Full text of "Journal of the Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom"

3fournal

MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION

THE UNITED KINGDOM.

"^^^^^

VOLUME VI T I (N.S.).

1907-10.

PLYMOUTH:
rUBLlSlIKi) liY THE ASSOCIATION,

Agents in Loudon; — Messrs. Dl'i.au <t Co., 37 Soho Square, W,

The Council of the Marinr L'iofoi/i'cal A^^^ociation wish it to be
Uiiiterstood that they do not accept responxihility for the aceuraey of
statements published in this Journal, ercepthuj vjhen those statem''vds
are contained in evn oft rial report (f thr Qovncil.

CONTENTS OF VOLUME VI II.

(NEW SERIES.)

List of Governors, Pounders, and Members

Oclol)er, 1908 .

Report of the Council—
1906-1907 .
1907-1908 .
1908-1909 .
Balance Sheet, 190G-1907

ditto 1907-1908

ditto 1908-1909

340 V

49'
320 >
479-

68 .
338 '
500 .

Allen, E. J.

Mackerel and Suusliine . . . ... 394

Allen, E. J., and Nelson, E. W.

On the Artificial Culture of Marine Plankton Organisms . . . 421

Atkinson, George T.

Notes on a Fishing Voyage to the Barents Sea in August, 1907 . . 71

Atkinson, George T.

An Experiment in the Transplantation of Plaice from the Barents Sea,

("White Sea'"') to the North Sea . . ... 502

Browne, Edward T.

The Hydroids collected by the Huxley from the North Side (jf the

Bay of Biscay in August, 1906 . . . . . IT)

Browne, Edward T.

A New Method for Growing Hydroids in Small Acjuaria by means of a

Continuons Current Tube
Bullen, G. E.

37 .

. 269 .

Plankton Studies in Relation to the Western Mackerel Fishery

Byrne, L. W.

The Fishes collected by the Hiuiey from the North Side of the Bay

of Biscay in August, 1906 . . . . . . 1 •

Crawshay, L. R.

On Rock Remains in the Bed of the Englisli Channel : an Account of

the Dredgings carried out by s.s. Oithnnu in 1906 . . . 99 »

Crawshay, L. R.

On an Experiment in the Keeping of Salmon (Salmo salar) at the

Plymouth Laboratory . . . ... 303 •

Cunningham, J. T.

A Peculiarly Abnormal Specimen of the Turbot . . . . 44 ■

De Morgan, W.

On the Species Upogebia stellata and Gebia deltura . . . 475

IV CONTENTS OF VOLUME VIII.

Eliot, C. pa«e

On the Cjlmius Cuiiiaiiotus . . . . ... 313

Elwes, Major E. V.

Notes on the littoral Polychaeta uf Tonjuay . . . 197,' 347

Heffoed, a. E.

Note on a Conger with Abnormal Gonad . . . .318

Hefford, a. E.

Note on a Hermaphrodite Cod (6r'«(^HS ??)on7(«(0 . ... 315

HiCKSON, S. J.

The Alcyonaria, Antipatharia, and Madreporaria collected by the Huxley

from the North Side of the Bay of Biscay in August, 1906 . *. 6

Kemp, Stanley.

The Decapofla collected by the Ifuxley from the North Side of the •

Bay of Biscay in August, 1906 . . . . . 407

Reynell, a.

The Bi'achiopoda collected by the Huxhy from the North Side of the

Bay of Biscay in August, 1906 . . . . . 392

Reynell, A.

The Mollusca collected by the Huxley from the North Side of the

Bay of Biscay in August, 1906 . . ... 359

Tattersall, W. M.

The Schizopoda and Isopoda collected by the Huxley from the North

Side of the Bay of Biscay in August, 1906 . , . . .189

Walton, C. L.

On Phellia niurocincta {Gosse) . . . ... 47

Walton, C. L.

Notes on some Sagartiidae and Zoauthidae from Plymouth . . . 207

Walton, C. L.

Actiniae collected by the s.s. Huxley in the North Sea during the

summer of 1907 . . . ... 215

Walton, C. L.

Nudiliranchiata collected in the North Sea l)y the s.s. Huxley during

July and August, 1907 . . . . . . 227

Worth, R. Hansford.

The Dredgings of the Marine Biological Association (1895-1906), as a

Contribution ti.i llie Knowledge of the Geology of the English
Channel . - . . . . . . 118

List of Institutions which have been supplied with specimens
of Marine Animals and Plants by the Marine Biological
Association during two years ending 31st May, 1907 . 265

List of Publications recording the Results of Researches car-
ried out under the auspices of the Marine Biological Asso-
ciation of the United Kingdom in their Laboratory at
Plymouth or on the North Sea Coast from 1886-1907 . 241

The Fishes collected by the " Huxley " from the North
Side of the Bay of Biscay in August, 1906.

L. W. Byrne.

With one Fisure in the Text.

Only one species met with on this cruise appears to have been
previously undescribed.

Although all the other species were already known from similar
localities in the North-east Atlantic, attention may be called to an
interesting series of the young of Synajjliolranchus pinnatus and to the
capture of numerous young examples of Onus hiscaycnsis.

When compared with the results of the hauls taken by H.M.S.
Besearch, a little farther south and over very much deeper soundings, the
list of species taken by the Hiixlcij is chiefly remarkable for the
entire absence of Stomias boa, Gonostoma mdcrodon, and G. hathi/j^hilicm,
the range of none of which seems to extend into waters as shallow as
those fished by the Huxley.

Stomiatidae.

Maurolicus borealis, Nilsson.

The small fish trawl took two damaged larvae (about 7.5 mm. long)
at Station VIII.* and very many young, one of 27 mm. and 98 others of
all sizes between 20 and 12 mm., at Station X.

Anguillidak.
Conger vulgaris, Cuv.

A Icptoccphalus of this species (kindly identified for me by Dr. Schmidt)
141 mm. long was taken in the small fish trawl at Station VIII.

Synaphobranchidae.

Sgnaphobranchus pinnatus, Gthr.

Fourteen specimens, 105 to 270 mm. in length, were taken at
Station XII., on fine sand at a depth of 246 fathoms.

This series serves to connect the small specimen taken by the Helga
(Fisheries, Ireland, Sci. Invest., 1905, ii. [1906]) with examples having

* For the positions of the Stations see Table on p. .^).

NKW .SERIES. —YOL. A'lII. XO. 1. SeITEMBEU, 1907. A

2 FISHES COLLECTED BY THE "HUXLEY FROM

the form and characters of the adult, and dispels any doubt as to the
correct identification of the former specimen.

The relative distance of the origins of the dorsal and anal fins from
the snout is subject to considerable individual variation ; and the
length of the head is contained 2h to 3^ times in the distance from
the snout to the origin of the dorsal fin, 2 to 2| times in the distance
from the snout to the origin of the anal fin, and half to slightly more
than once in the interval between the origins of the two fins, which is
relatively shortest in the two smallest examples.

The belly of the smallest specimen, 105 mm. long, was distended by
the vertebra of another fish about 4 mm. long and 3 mm. in diameter,
to which fragments of fiesh still adhered.

SCOPELIDAE.
Scojoclus (Myctophum) glacialis, Eeinhdt.

Nine specimens, 38 to 12 mm. in length (without caudal fins) were
taken at or near the surface at Station VIII.

S. (M.) jpundatus, Eaf.

Ten specimens, 37 to 20 mm. in length (without caudal fins), were
taken in the same haul as the last species. In these specimens the
superanal photophores numbered 7-9 + 8-10, and tlie posterolateral
varied somewhat in position, being either above the break in the
superanal series or above the last photophore anterior to the break.

S. (Lainpanydus) crocodilus, Eisso.

A single damaged specimen 21 mm. long (without caudal fin) was
taken in an Agassiz trawl at Station XII. There is nothing to show the
precise depth at which it entered the net.

The small fish trawl at Station X. contained the remains of Scopclus
larvffi, too broken for specific determination.

Paralepis sp.

"Long-anal" larva. Holt & Byrne, Trans. Linn. Soc, x. p. 199.

A damaged specimen about 29 mm. long from Station ^.

Syngnathidae.
Nerophis acquorcus, var. exilis, H. and By., was taken by the small fish
trawl, worked as near the surface as possible, at Stations VIII. (nineteen ;
177-43 mm.) and X. (two; 220 and 105 mm.). The smallest ovigerous
male captured was 150 mm. long.

Gadidae.
PIn/cis hlennioidcs, Brunner.
Nine specimens (145 to 85 mm. long) were taken at Station IX. on

NOETH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 3

fine sand in about 240 fathoms of water, and a single specimen (108 mm.
long) at Station XII. on similar ground at about the same depth.

Onus sp.

Six specimens of a tricirrate Onus from 60 to 109 mm. long from
Station VII. cannot at present be satisfactorily referred to any described
species and, in view of the difficulties attending the satisfactory deter-
mination of isolated specimens belonging to this genus, it seems best to
await further material before applying any name to them.

Drs. Schmidt and Jensen have kindly compared the specimens with
0. Rcinhardti of a comparable size, and inform me that they certainly
do not belong to that species, while they also appear to be distinguish-
able from 0. Carpentcri, Gthr., and 0. macrophthalmus, Gthr.

The specimens were taken with the Agassiz trawl, which came np
filled with large masses of coral.

Onus hiscaycnsis, Collett.

Small examples occurred as follows, in each case on sandy ground :
Station II. — One, 61 mm.
Station IX. — Two, 62 and 54 mm.
Station XIII.— Seven, 64 to 48 mm.

The broken remains of two small fishes from Station XIII. are probably
referable to either this or the preceding species.

Specimens of the size captured appear to have the back ordinarily
greyish-brown in colour with obscure marblings of a darker sliade
which become less conspicuous with growth.

Pleuronectidae.

Arnof/lossus latcrna (Walb.).

Two specimens, 89 and 40 mm. long, at Station II. (75-80 fathoms)^
and two, 140 and 37 mm. long, at Station XL (146 fathoms).

The larger example taken at the latter station showed the character
of "^. lopliotes"

Zcuffopterus meffastoma (DonoY.).

A single specimen of 175 mm. at Station II. and three smaller ones
(73-53 mm.) at Station XI.

Damaged larvse (about an inch long in each case) were taken by the
small fish trawl at Stations VIII. (one) and X. (one).

Sulea variegata (Donov.).

A single specimen, 110 mm. long, at Station VIII.

Gobiidae.

Gohins Jcffrcysii, Gthr,

A single specimen of 21 mm. at Station X. and fourteen others of
32 to 20 mm. at Station XI.

4 fishes collected p,y the '■' huxley " from

Lycodidae.
Pteridium Alleni, Byrne.*

The specimen on which this species was founded was taken at Station
VII. in about 444 fathoms. The specimen was taken with the Agassiz
trawl, which came up filled with large masses of coral.

The original description and sketch of this species are (by the kind
permission of the editor of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History)
repeated below : —

Form stout ; body compressed in caudal region, its greatest height
about 4 times in its length (without caudal fin). Head depressed, 3|
times in length (without caudal), nearly twice as long as broad, its
breadth about equal to its height at isthmus. Snout rounded, with
numerous mucous glands, about 4^- times in head. Eye of moderate
size, longer than the Hat interorljital space is wide, 6 times in head and
less than li times in snout. Gape 2f times in head, barely reaching

Pteridium Alleni, x 1.

beyond the level of the hind margin of orbit ; maxilla weak, and but
little expanded distally. Villiform teeth in both jaws and in a
V-shaped band on vomer.

Marginal fins continuous, their bases covered with skin and scales ;
fin-rays difficult to count, probably D. ca. 90, A. ca. 55. Ventrals each
with two closely apposed rays.

Body covered with a copious mucous secretion ; scales very small,
approximately 105 in a longitudinal and 35 in a transverse series.
Lateral line very indistinct and In-oken.

Colour, after preservation, umber-brown, darker on top of head and
front part of dorsum, paler on belly. Eays of marginal fins dark.

Length of type, 101 mm. (96 mm. without caudal).

Hah. Mouth of English Channel, near La Chapelle Bank, ca.
450 fath.

p. Allenif Byrne, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 7, vol. xviii. p. 448 (Dec, 1906).

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906.

Station No.

VII.

VIIL

IX.

XI.

XII.

xin.

Latitude, N.

48° 24'

47° 36'

47° 30'

48° 7'

48° 10'

48° 7'

Longitude, W. .

0' 28'

7° 31'

8° 13'

8° 11'

8° 13'

Fatlionis .

444

Surface.

240

Surface.

146

246

412

STOMIATIDAE.

Maurolicus borealis .

2 1.

ANGUILLIDAE.

Conger vulgaris

1 1.

SYNAPHOBRANCHIDAE.

S. pinnatus ....

SCOPELIDAE.

4 1.

Scopelus glacialis
,, punctatus .
,, crocodilus .

9
10

SYNGNATHIDAE.

N. aequoreus v. exilis

GADIDAE.

Phycis blennioides .

Onus sp

,, liiscayensis

PLEUKONECTIDAE.

Aruoglossus laterna .

Zeugopterus raegastoma

Solea variegata ....

2
1
1

1 1.

2
3

GOBIIDAE.

Gobius JeftVeysii

LYCODIDAE.

Pteridiuni Alleni

—

[ ^ ]

The Alcyonaria, Antipatharia, and Madreporaria

collected by the ' ' Huxley " from the North Side

of the Bay of Biscay in August, 1906.

By
Sydney J. Hickson, M.A., F.R.S.

(Professor of Zoology in the Victoria University of Mancliester.)

The principal feature of interest in these collections is the presence
of a single fine specimen of Cor allium maderensc. Only one other
specimen of this species has hitherto been obtained, and no specimen
of the family has <hitherto been recorded from the Bay of Biscay.

The occurrence of Si/mpodmm. coralloidcs in the Bay is also a feature
of some interest, but not very surprising, as it is in other localities
usually associated with the Madreporarian corals on which it was
found.

ALCYONARIA.

Family ALCYONIID^.
Alcyonium coralloides, Pall.

Gorgonia coralloides, Pallas, Uleiich. Zooijliyt.
Atcyonviim coralloidcs, von Koch, Zool. Jalirh., v. 1891, p. 76.
Synipodium. coralloidcs, de Lacaze Duthiers, Arcliiv. dc Zool. Exper.,
3°, viii. 1900, p. 360.

Station VIL Lat. K 47° 36'. Long. W. 7° 31'. m fathoms.
A few small specimens evidently belonging to the white variety of
this species are found encrusting the dead bases of the Oculinid corals.
None of the specimens are large enough to enable me to reopen the
question whether the species belongs to the genus Sympodiuin or
the genus Alcyonium. Notwithstanding the very able discussion of this
question by de Lacaze Duthiers, who retains the species in the genus
Sympodium, I am inclined to consider the reasons given by von Koch
for transferring it to the genus Alcyonium as unanswerable. In any
case, it is an extremely interesting connecting link between the
Stolonifera and the Alcyonacea. In the Mediterranean Sea the

ALCYONAEIA, ANTll'ATHARIA, iMADKErORAJilA, ETC. /

spicules are usually purplish red to pale pink in colour, but, according
to de Lacaze Duthiers, pure white varieties also occur.

The species was not recorded from the Bay of Biscay either by the
Gaudan or the HirondcUe expeditions.

Alcyonium digitatum, Linn.
Station I. Lat. K 48" 25'. Long. W. 6° 28'. 75 fathoms.
A small white unbranched specimen of this species was obtained
at this station. It is noteworthy that no specimens of the species
were found in the dredgings in deeper water. The Caudan expedi-
tion obtained the species at a depth of 570-600 metres.

Family CORALLIIDiE.
Corallium maderense, Jolinson.
Pleiirocorallium maderense, J. Y. Johnson, Proceed. Zool. Soc., London,
1899, p. 60, Plates V. and VIL, figs. 1 and 4.

Station XIIL Lat. N. 48° 7'. Long. W. 8° 13'. 412 fathoms.

The type of this species was obtained by Rev. Padre Ernesto Smith,
to whom it was given by a fisherman, who told him it was brought up
by a fishing-line from deep water off Camara de Lobos, a village six
miles to the west of Funchal. No other specimen of the species has
been described. The species was placed in the genus rieurorondlmm
by Johnson, but for reasons pointed out by Kishinouye {J. Imp.
Fish. Bnremi, xiv. 1, 1904), which I can confirm by my investigations on
the Coralliidte of the Siboga expedition, to be published shortly, it
is inconvenient to subdivide the known species of the Coralliidae
into generic groups, and I have therefore referred it to the genus
Corallium.

The specimen is 110 mm. in length, flabellate in growth, with the
verrucfB all on one side of the colony and about 70 mm. in width.
The main axis is kidney-shaped in section, 6 mm. x 4*5 mm. The base
of attachment is broken off and the ends of many of the branches are
missing, and consequently it may have been a good deal larger when
in position at the bottom of the sea. The type specimen was consider-
ably larger than this, being 300 mm. in length and about the same
in width. The specimen resembles the type in all essential respects.
The ramification is not quite so profuse, and there are not so many
of the " double carafe " or " opera-glass-shaped " spicules as described
by Johnson, but I can find no substantial reason for making a new
species.

It is perhaps the most interesting feature of the collection of
Anthozoa that has been sent to me for examination to find a specimen

8 ALCYONARIA, ANTII'ATFIAPJA, AND MADREPOUAiaA COLLECTED BY THE

of Corallium in the Bay of Biscay. No specimens of Corallium
were found by the Challenge?', Lightning, Porcupine, or Caudan expedi-
tions in their explorations of the deep-sea fauna of the west coasts of
France and the British Islands, but a single specimen of Corallium
johnsojii was obtained by the Irish Fisheries Department in 382
fathoms off the west coast of Ireland (Hickson, Nature, vol, 73,
1905, p. 5, and Fisheries, Ireland Sci. Invest., 1905, v. [1906]). It
is established therefore that Corallium does occur on the Atlantic slope
of the European shores, but it is apparently very rare, or else very
local in its distribution. The axis is pure white, but very hard and
somewhat translucent. The coral is not of a character to command a
high price, but it is possible that if a locality could be found where it
occurs in considerable quantities the thicker branches would have
a market value.

A series of sections through a small branch shows that the colony is
female, but the ova are not, I believe, nearly mature.

Like all the other species of the genus that have been examined,
G. maderense is dimorphic. The ova are borne by the siphonozooids and
not by the autozooids. In this respect the species differs from C. nohile,
in which the gonads are borne by the autozooids only, and resembles
C. japonicum, C. konojoi, C. elatius, and C. reginm.

Family ISIDJE.
Isidella elongata, Gray.
Isidella elongata. Gray, Cat. Lithophytcs, 1870, p. 14.
Isis elongata, Esper (see von Koch, Fauna and Flora, Naples,
Monog., XV. 1887, p. 90, plates and figures).

Station XIII. Lat. K 48° 7'. Long. W. 8° 13'. 412 fathoms.

The name of this species has been subject to many changes, and it
would form an interesting subject for a specialist in such matters to
determine which, according to the rules of nomenclature, is the correct
one. It was described as a new species by von Koch in 1878 {Alorph.
Jahrl). iv. 126), by the name Isis neapolitana. In 1882 he changed
the name to Isidella elongata, Esper {Mitt. Zool. Stat. Neapel, bd. iii. 537).
In 1887 it is described by the same author as Isis elongata, Esper, but
in a " Nachtrag " is referred back again to the genus Isidella. I am in
agreement with Wright and Studer (Cliall. Reports, xxxi., 1889) in think-
ing it is doubtfully synonymous with Isis elongata of Esper, but it
may be the same as Alopsea elongata of Philippi and Mopsea medi-
terranea of Kisso. There can be no doubt, however, that it is the
same as the Isidella elongata of Gray, and for that reason I have
attributed the species to him. The species was obtained by the

" HUXLEY" FROM NOUTII SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, lit06. 9

Caudan in 5° 55' W., 46' 40' N., 400-500 metres. The specimen is
200 mm. long, and gives off one slender branch 100 mm. from the
base. The axis is 2 mm. in diameter at the base, and tapers gradually
to a very slender filamentous thread at the extremity. The inter-
nodes are from 10 to 15 mm. in length.

Acanella arbuscula, Johnson.

Mopsca arhuscidum, Johnson, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1862, p. 245, PI. XXXI.
figs. 1, la.

Acanella arbuscula, Gray, Cat. Lith., 1870, p. 16, woodcut.
Station XIII. Lat. N. 48° 7'. Long. W. 8° 13'. 412 fathoms.

This is a characteristic species of the Atlantic slope. It was first
described by Johnson from Madeira. It was found by the Challenger
in 1525 fathoms S.W. of the Canaries. It was found in no less than
four stations at depths of from 950 to 1710 metres in the Bay of Biscay
by the Caudan.

Being very brittle owing to the alternating calcareous and horny
joints of the axis, the specimens always reach the systematist con-
siderably broken.

In the Huxlen collection there is a main axis with nearly all the
branches broken off that is 150 mm. in length, the calcareous inter-
nodes 10 mm. in length, and the greatest diameter of the stem 5 mm.

The most perfect " bushy part " of a colony is 105 mm. in height by
55 mm. in diameter.

Family MURICEID^.

Acanthogorgia ridleyi, Wright and Studer.

A. ridleyi, Wright and Studer, Challenger Eeports, vol. xxxi. 1889,
p. 95, Plates XXII. and XXV.

Statiox\ VII. Lat. N. 47" 36'. Long. W. 7° 31'. m fathoms.

1 specimen.

Station XIII. Lat. N. 48° 7'. Long. W. 8° 13'. 412 fathoms.

5 specimens.
I have had a great deal of difficulty in determining the species of
the specimens of Acanthogorgia obtained by the Huxley. A great
many species of this genus have been described by authors, and in
most cases from the examination of a single specimen. There is no
account of the range of variation within the limits of a single species.
There can be little doubt, I think, that when the genus is overhauled
the number of species will be materially reduced. Having compared
our specimens with the species in the British Museum, I have found

10 ALCYONARIA, ANTIPATHAKIA, AND MADREPORARIA COLLECTED BY THE

that they resemble very closely those attributed to Acanthogorgiw
ridleyi obtained by the Challenger off Patagonia.

This species was also discovered by the Cauclan expedition at their
station 6° 21' W., 45° 47' N., 1410 metres. The species obtained by
the Hirondelle expeditions from the Golfe de Gascoyne are attributed
by Studer to A. truncata and A. horrida, but these came from much
shallower water (240 metres and 200 metres respectively). The
spicules are mucli larger than those of the type of Acanthogorgia
ridleyi, and resemble more closely the spicules of A. muricata, Verrill.
The longest of the bent spindles are 1*2 mm. in length. In the other
three species they do not attain to a length of 1 mm. There is
another difference between our specimens and the type in that on
many of the branches the zooids are very closely crowded together,
especially at their extremities, instead of being separated by intervals of
3-4 mm. The observations 1 have made on a small piece of a branch
of one of the type specimens do not quite agree with the description
given by Wright and Studer, and in so far as they differ, agree more
closely with our specimens. On comparing them I have come to the
conclusion that they cannot be regarded as anything but varieties of
the same species.

I may add, in conclusion, that I have compared our specimens with
a small dried piece of Acanthogorgia (Blejjharogorgia) schrammi of
Duchassaing and Michelotti, and find them to be closely related.

THE ANTIPATHAEIA.

Family ANTIPATHIDJE.

Stichopathes spiralis, Pourtales.

Antipathes spiralis, Pourtales, Bidl. Mus. Comp. Zool., 1880, p. 114,
PL III.

Stichopathes 2Jourialesi, Brook, Clcallenger Reports, xxxii. 1889, p. 89.

Station VII. Lat. N. 47° 36'. Long. W. 70° 31'. iti fathoms.

2 specimens.

Station XIII. Lat. N. 48" 7'. Long. W. 8° 13'. 412 fathoms.

4 specimens.
This species was obtained by the Caudan at Stations IV. and X., in
1410 and 1220 metres respectively.

Parantipathes larix, Esper.
Antipathes larix, Esper.
Parantipathes larix. Brook, Challenger Beports, vol. viii. 1889, p. 142.

"HUXLEY" FROM NOKTII SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 190(5. 11

Station XIII. Lat. N. 48" 7'. Long. W. 8'' 13'. 412 fathoms.

There are six specimens in the collection, varying in length from
225 mm. to 325 mm. The species was obtained by the Caudan in
1220 metres.

Family SCHIZOPATHIDiE.

Schizopathes crassa, Brook.

Station XIII. Lat. K 48° 7'. Long. W. 8° 13'. 412 fathoms.

1 specimen.

Schizopathes crassa, Brook, Challenger Reports, xxxii. p. 147.

This species was originally found by the Challenger in 1900 fathoms
off Monte Video, but it was subsequently discovered by the Caudan at
Station XVL, 5° 53' W., 45° 38' N., in 1220 metres.

The specimen is broken at the base, and is about 530 mm. in total
length. The lateral branches arise sometimes in pairs, sometimes
alternately, sometimes irregularly, from a strip of about one-third the
width of the total circumference of the main axis, and are in two
series, inclined at an angle of about 30° to each other. The lateral
branches in the middle region are 250 mm. in length, those at the
distal end very much shorter. At the proximal end the branches are
broken.

The zooids seem to be about the same size as the type specimen,
that is about 3 mm. in a diameter transverse to the axis, but the
tentacles are much more contracted than those of the Challenger
specimen, and are not more than 3 mm. in length (cf. 4-7 mm. in
the type).

The character of the spines on the axes corresponds with the descrip-
tion of the type. Although there is a difference in the manner in
which the lateral branches arise from the main stem between the
Huxley and Challenger specimens, there is no good reason, in my opinion,
for regarding them as distinct species.

The species was also found in the Bay of Biscay in 1220 metres by
the Caudan.

THE MADREPORARIA.

Family TURBINOLIID^.
Caryophyllia clavus, Scacchi.
Caryophyllia clavus, de Lacaze Duthiers, Archiv. de Zool. Expdr., 3°,
V. 1897, p. 37, and 3°, vii. 1899, p. 529.

Station I. Lat. N. 48° 25'. Long. W. 6° 28'. 75 fathoms.
Station II. Lat. N. 48° 24'. Long. W. 6° 28'. 75 fathoms.
Station V. Lat. N. 47° 48'. Long. W. 7° 46'. 109 fathoms.
Station VII. Lat. N. 47° 36'. Long. W. 7° 31'. js fathoms.

12 ALCYONAKIA, ANTIPATHARIA, AND MADllEPORAEIA COLLECTED BY THE

This is a common species off the coast of Ireland (Stephens), in the
Bay of Biscay (Pioiile), and in the Mediterranean Sea.

The Mediterranean species of Caryophyllia have been carefully
studied by de Lacaze Duthiers, and on the diagnoses given by the
distinguished French naturalist I have no difficulty in assigning all
the specimens that I have examined to the species C. clavus. It is
true that a few specimens appear to approach G. Smithii, which
de Lacaze Duthiers regards as a distinct species and not a mere
variety of C. clavus. The following measurements taken at random
will express better than words the fact that the crown has the
characteristic oval outline of C. clavus rather than the round outline
of C. Smithii: —

Height . . . 26 mm. 21 18 16 13

Maximum diameter 22 mm. 19 19 18 14

Minimum diameter . 14-5 mm. 12 12 12-5 9

There is a complete series of specimens from the maximum size, the
measurement of which is given in the first column to specimens less
than 1 mm. in diameter. The collection would be of great value to
any one willing to undertake a systematic study of the variations of
the species.

The species was also obtained by the Caudan, and is common in deep
and occasionally found in shallow water in the Mediterranean Sea
(de Lacaze Duthiers).

Desmopliyllum cristagalli, Milne Edwards and Haime.
Besmophyllum i^igens, Moseley, Challenger Reports, vol. ii. 1881, p. 160.
Station VIL Lat. N. 47° 36'. Long. W. 7° 31'. m fathoms.

There are four specimens of this species in the collection. The
name D. ingens was given to some " gigantic " specimens obtained by
the Challenger in 345 fathoms in the fiords of Patagonia. I am
inclined to agree with Eoule that these specimens cannot be separated
from the older species D. cristagalli.

The following measurements may be of some interest : —

Greatest Shortest

Extreme diameter of diameter of

length. the calyx. the calyx. »

Largest 67«r//n?^rr specimen . 135 ... 82 ... 50

Largest //^wi'/t'T/ specimen . . 100 ... 37 ... 25

Huxley specimens 2 and 3 . 75 ... 33 ... 25

^w^Zey specimen 4 , . .55 ... 22 ... 17

" HUXLEY" FROM NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 13

OCULINID^.

Lophohelia prolifera, Pall.

Amphihelia oculata, Linn.

Amphilielia ramea, Miiller.
Station VII. Lat. N. 47° 36'. Long. W. T 31'. iJr fathoms.
Station XIII. Lat. 48° 7' N. Long. 8° 13' W. 412 fathoms.

There can be no doubt that the corals obtained by the Huxley at
these stations are the same as those obtained by the Porcu^mie at
59° 56' N., 6° 27' W., 363 fathoms, and some other localities in the
same part of the ocean. Duncan has given a description and several
excellent figures of these corals {Trans. Zool. Soc, viii. 1872, p. 330),
and commented on their extreme variability. The difficulty of express-
ing in a diagnosis in words the difference between the species has not
yet been overcome, and after carefully studying his work and that of
Moseley {Challenger Reports, vol. ii. p. 178) and of de Lacaze Duthiers
{Arch. Zool. Fxpdr., 3", v. 1897), I have been unable to determine what
should be, on scientific or historical grounds, the proper limits of the
species. The difficulties the systematist finds in dealing with this
group are: (1) the great range of variation that each species exhibits
in the size of the calices, the manner of growth and ramification of
the colonies, the size and even the presence of a columella, the size
and the degree of exsertion of the septa, etc. ; (2) the accommodation
of the growth of the ccenenchym to the worm-tubes and other objects
which the colonies encrust ; (3) the amalgamation of the colonies of
the different species.

(1) As regards the first difficulty, the calices of Lophohelia vary from
4 to 15 mm. in diameter across the rim of the calyx, of Am2)hihclia
oculata from 3 to 5 mm., of Amphihelia ramea from 2 to 3 mm., the
measurements of the larger zooids only of each colony examined
being taken. The presence of a columella in Amphihelia cannot
be relied upon as a trustworthy character to distinguish that genus
from Lopholiclia. On two branches of a colony I regarded as clearly
belonging to Amp)hihelia oculata I found that some calices had a
columella, others had not, and in others the columella was rudimentary.

(2) All three species exhibit a remarkable power of forming a
growth of ccenenchym over worm-tubes or other objects with which
they come into contact. This power (" La puissance blastogenetique "
of de Lacaze Duthiers) by determining the character or shape of the
support also determines to a great extent the general character of the
facies of the colony, and as all three species appear to be partial to a
tubular encrusting growth round the tube of the Polychsete worm

14 ALCYONARIA, ANTIPATHAEIA, MADREPOEARIA.

Eunice philocorallia, many of the colonies of the three species are
very similar in their manner of growth. Many of the specimens in
the collection exhibit these tubular growths of coenenchym with the
worm inside. (See F. Buchanan, Froc. li.D.S., viii. (N.S.), 1893, p. 169,
and Haddon, I.e., part iv. 1895.)

(3) If we are prepared to agree with the current views that the
three species are really distinct, then we must suppose that very
frequently a larva of one species becomes fixed to a colony of
another, and the coenenchym of the two colonies becomes fused or
amalgamated. So intimate is this amalgamation of the coenenchyms
that it is impossible to tell by surface views or the examination of the
ground surface of the coral where the coenenchym belonging to the
one colony begins and the other ends. This difficulty has been
observed by de Lacaze Duthiers. He writes (I.e., p. 149) : " Les deux
especes [Lophohelia prolifera and Amphihdia oculata\ tres souvent
sent greffees I'une sur I'autre et se ressemblent extremement." And
in attempting to distinguish between them he writes (p. 151):
" J'avais pense que peut-etre la texture intime microscopique donnerait
quelques indications. Apres avoir fait des coupes minces bien polies,
je n'ai pas trouve de grandes differences entre la tige de VAmphihelia
et celle du Zojohohclia."

The position of the problem appears to be as follows : All the
authors who have examined the species agree that they are very
variable, but no one has yet made a serious attempt to determine the
range of variation in any one species. Until we know whether the
species really merge and overlap, or do not, it is little better than a
waste of time to attempt to determine the species by the ordinary
methods of the systematist. To throw some light on the problem a
systematic study should be made of the range of variation in one or
more large colonies of the three " supposed " species. . The collection
obtained by the Huxley affords sufficient and excellent material for
such an investigation, and it may be suggested that such an investiga-
tion might be undertaken.

[ 15 ]

The Hydroids collected by the "Huxley"

from the North Side of the

Bay of Biscay in August, 1906.

By
Edward T. Browne.

(University College, London.)

With Plates I. and II. and one Ficrure in the Text.

INTRODUCTION.

The Hydroids collected on tlie northern edge of the Bay of Biscay
during a five days' cruise in August, 1906, by Dr. E. J. Allen, were
entrusted to me for examination. I thank my friend Dr. Allen for
giving me the opportunity of working through the collection, which
contained thirty-seven species, including two new species {Bimeria
arhorca and Bimeria hiscayana) and several rare deep-sea forms.

Our knowledge of the area occupied by the British Hydroids has
been increased by this cruise. All the species taken at six out of the
eight stations have been previously recorded for the British area. It
was only at the two stations over 400 fathoms that foreign species
occurred. Bathymetrical distribution has also made an advance, as
several species were taken at a depth considerably greater than that
hitherto recorded for them.

I have followed Hincks's nomenclature very closely, because the
names are so familiar to us, though I foresee that a day is not far dis-
tant when other generic names, which at present are only known to
specialists, will have to be introduced into our faunistic lists.

The geographical distribution of nearly all the British species
mentioned in this report has already been given by Dr. Allen in his
paper on the " Fauna of the Eddystone Grounds," published in this
journal in 1899, so that it is scarcely necessary to repeat the same
records again. But since that date several important works on
Hydroids have been published, and from these I have selected such
records as are of geographical and bathymetrical importance.

HYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM

LIST OF SPECIES, AND THE STATIONS AT WHICH
THEY OCCURRED.

station No.

in.

IV.

VII.

IX.

XIII.

Latitude, N.

48° 25'

48° 24'

47° 48'

47° 36'

48° 7'

Longitude, W. .

G°28'

6° 28'

6° 33'

7° 25'

7° 46'

7° 31'

8° 13'

Fathoms

109

444

240

412

GYMNOBLASTEA.

Binieria nutans (Wright) .

-f

,, vestita, Wiiglit

,, arborea, n. sp. . . .

,, biscayana, n. sp. . . .

Eudendiium ramosuni (Linn.)

,, rameura (Pallas)

Tubularia sp. . . . .

CALYPTOBLASTEA.

Clytia jolmstoni (Alder)

-1-

Campanularia liincksii, Alder

,, raridentata, Alder .

Calycella fastigiata (Alder)

Laioea duniosa (Fleming) .

,, fruticosa (M. Sars) .

,, pinnata, G. 0. Sars .

Filellum serpens (Hassall) .

Perisiphonia pectinata, Pictet and Hedot

—

Cryptolaria Imniilis, Allnian

Cusj)idella grandis, Hincks

-f

,, costata, Hincks .

Halecium sessile, Norman .

Sertularella polyzonias (Linn.)

,, gayi (Lamouroux)

Diphasia pinaster (Ellis and Solander) .

,, taraarisca (Linn.) .

,, pinnata (Pallas) .

,, alata, Hincks

Sertularia abietina (Linn.) .

H3'drallmania falcata (Linn.)

Plumularia elegantula, G. 0. Sars .

,, setacea (Ellis) .

,. frutescens (Ellis and Solander)

Antennularia antennina (Linn.)

,, ramosa (Lamarck)

Antennopsis norvegica (G. 0. Sars)

! -

Aglaoplienia myriophyllum (Linn.)

! +
1

STATIONS AND THEIR CHARACTERISTIC HYDROIDS.

Station I. East side of Parson's Bank. 75 fathoms.

At this station an ordinary dredge was dragged for about a mile
over a sandy bottom. Here were found rooted in the sand Aglaophenia
myriophyllum and Antennularia antennina. which may be regarded as
the characteristic Hydroids of this ground. Attached to shells and
worm-tubes {Chmtopterus) were colonies of Sertularella polyzonias,
Diphasia pi/iaster.^ and Diphasia tamarisca, and on a broken pecten
shell was a nice compact colony of Cuspidella grandis. Eight other

NOKTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 17

species were found, nearly all of them being fixed to the larger
Hydroids, Aglaophenia, Antennularia, and Scrtularella.

Station II. This station is a continuation of Station I., but here
an Agassiz trawl was used in the place of a dredge. There is a
distinct decrease in the number of Aglaophenia myriophylhim and
Antennularia antennina. The dredge, no doubt, is a better instrument
for digging out these rooted Hydroids than the trawl. On the other
hand, Sertulardla poli/zonias and Dijjhasia pinaster, both attached to
worm-tubes, show an increase in number in the haul taken by the
trawl over that of the dredge.

The species taken at this station are nearly the same as those found
at the first station, but Sertularia abietina is an addition. The latter
is a fine old colony with branches thickly covered with other small
Hydroids.

Station III. A large otter trawl was used at this station, which
was a few miles south-west of Station II. The trawl brought up a
fine large colony of Diphasia pinnata, and a large colony of Sertularia
ahietina. Upon tlie latter were attached small colonies of Sertularclla
p>oli/zonias.

The great falling off in the number of colonies at this station must
be put down to the use of the otter trawl.

All the Hydroids taken at Stations I., II., and III. have been recorded
for the Eddystone Grounds. There is a remarkable similarity between
the Hydroid fauna of the two regions, though they are far apart.

Station IV. Near La Chapelle Bank. 109 fathoms. Bottom
deposit — coarse sand and broken shells.

This station was about fifty miles to the south-west of Station III.,
and here a dredge was used. It brought up a large colony of Scrtularella
pohjzonias attached to a worm-tube, a very fine colony of DipJiasia
alata, and a small colony of Diphasia pinaster on a worm-tube. Four
other species were found upon these Hydroids.

Station V. 109 fathoms. Bottom deposit — coarse sand and shells.

An Agassiz trawl was used at this station, which was not far from
Station IV.

Here Diphasia alata, Sertulctrella pohjzonias, and Diphasia 'pinaster
were again the principal Hydroids. Dijjhasia alata may be regarded as
the characteristic Hydroid for Stations IV. and V. It was not taken
at any of the other stations, and it has not been recorded for the
Eddystone Grounds.

Station VII. Over 444 fathoms.

Although this station was only a few miles south of Station V., the
water is about four times as deep. An Agassiz trawl was used, but it

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 1. B

18 HYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM

brought up very few Hydroids. Here were found some large colonies
of Sertularella gayi, to which are fixed a few colonies of Campanularia
hincJvsii, a large branch of Eudendrium rameum, and fragments of
Plumidaria elegantula.

Station IX, 240 fathoms. Bottom deposit — fine sand.

This station belongs to another area, about forty miles north-west
of Station VII. Only a few Hydroids were taken, and all were broken
into fragments. Sertularia alietina and Sertularella polyzovias appear
to be the principal forms.

Station XIII. 412 fathoms. Bottom deposit — sand, mud, and hard
ground.

This station was not far from Station IX., but it was on the side of
the Atlantic slope. For Hydroids it is certainly the most interesting
of all the stations, as it was just beyond the range of the British
Hydroid fauna. At all the other stations every Hydroid (except
Plumularia elegantula at Station VII.) had been previously recorded
within the British area, and described in Hincks's classical monograph.

At this station an Agassiz trawl was used, and it struck a large
bed of the coral Lopltohelia prolifera, to which many Hydroids were
attached.

Amongst the larger Hydroids were Eudendrium rameum, Halecium
sessile, Sertularella gayi, and two new species of Bimeria {B. arborea,
B. hiscayana). The foreign species include Zafoea pinnata, Perisiphonia
pectinata, Cryptolaria luimilis, Plumidaria elegantida, and Antennopsis
norvegica. The occurrence of Prrisiplwnia pectinata and Cryptolaria
humilis extends their geographical range further north.

Several species have their bathymetrical distribution considerably
extended into deeper water, namely, Eudendrium rameum, Cam-
panularia hincksii, Halecium sessile, Plumidaria elegantula, Plumularia
sctacea, and Plumularia frutescens.

Two more foreign species were taken, which are not mentioned in
this report. They look something like a Cryptolaria, but possess an
operculum. If the colonies had been complete and in better condition
I would have described them.

GYMNOBLASTEA.

BOUGAINVILLID.ffl.

Character of the family. Trophosome — hydranths with conical
hypostome, tentacles filiform in a single verticil. Gonosome — gono-
phores, planoblasts, or hedrioblasts (AUman, 1888).

NOKTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 19

BIMERIA, Wright, 1859.

Generic character. Trophosome — hydrocaulus well developed,
usually erect and branching ; hydrantlis fusiform. Gonosome —
gonophores in the form of sporosacs developed upon the hydrophyton.

The above description of the genus is almost identical with that
given by Torrey (1902), who has emended Hincks's description and
broadened it, so as to include the genus Garveia. According to Allman
and Hincks, Bimeria is distinguished from Garveia by the perisarc,
covering the lower part of the hydranth, extending over the proximal
half of each tentacle, a character more suitable for a species than for
a genus.

1 am distinctly in favour of constituting the genus Bimeria in such
a manner that it may stand in relation to Bougainvillia as Coryne
does to Sijncorync, the trophosomes of the two genera being some-
what similar, but their gonosomes quite distinct, the former possess-
ing sporosacs and the latter planoblasts.

It must be remembered that Bimeria vcstita is the type species
of the genus. Its trophosome in general appearance is very much
like a Bougainvillia. Madame Motz-Kossowska (1905) has, however,
transferred Bimeria vcstita to the genus Pcrigonimus, which, like
Bougainvillia, reproduces by means of planoblasts. The planoblasts
of Perigonimus and Bougainvillia are not all alike, in fact they
belong to two distinct medusoid families.

It would be an advantage to place rruvotclla grisea, Motz-Kossowska
(1905), in the genus Bimeria. The generic character of Pruvotella, as
given by Madame Motz-Kossowska, should make an excellent specific
character.

I certainly prefer to place Hydroids, like Bougainvillia, with plano-
blasts, and Hydroids, like Bimeria, with sporosacs into separate genera,
though there may be a few cases in which it is hard to draw the
line. I notice that naturalists who have confined their attention
solely to the trophosome completely disregard the nature of the
gonosome in their classifications. They consider it is a matter of no
importance whether the gonosome is a planoblast or a sporosac, and
ignore the fact that medusae have also a system of classification. I
am strongly of the opinion that the gonosome should play an impor-
tant part in the classification of Hydroids, especially in those Hydroids
which liberate free-swimming medusae.

Bimeria (Garveia) nutans (Wright).
This Hydroid occurred at Station I., 75 fathoms, on Sertularella
folyzonias, and at Station II. it was common on Sertularia ahietina.
The colonies are without gonophores.

20 HYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM

Bimcria nutans is generally found in the form of an erect arbor-
escent colony, but here it was growing as a creeping form, without
branches. The hydrocaulus has become a creeping stolon giving off at
intervals single hydranths, which are on fairly long stalks.

A change in the mode of growth is not uncommon among Hydroids,
and is one of the difficulties in connection with the drafting of precise
generic characters. Arborescent colonies of Syncorync and Bougain-
villia, when so placed in small aquaria that a branch is in contact with
the glass, will frequently send out a shoot which, on adhering to the
glass, becomes converted into a stolon. The stolon develops single
hydranths on long stalks, which seldom branch. The mode of growth
of the new colony is distinctly that of a creeping form, whereas the
old colony retains its arborescent growth.

Bimeria vestita, Wright.

At Station II., 75 fathoms, this species was fairly common on
Sertnlaria abietina.

It can at once be recognised by having the lower half of each
tentacle sheathed with a layer of perisarc. When the hydranths are
in a contracted condition the sheath is scarcely visible, and then a
colony looks like a little Bougainvillia.

Distribution. Firth of Forth (Wright, Allman) ; Yorkshire, Whitby
(Hincks); Devonshire, Torbay and Salcombe (Hincks); Start Bay,
20-23 fathoms (E.T.B); Lancashire, Morecambe Bay (Allman); Irish
Sea (Thornely) ; Ireland, Lough Swilly (Duerden) ; Heligoland (Hart-
laub, 1897) ; Mediterranean, near Banyuls (Motz-Kossowska).

Bimeria arborea, nova species. Plate I., figs. 1-3. Plate 11.

At Station XIIL, 412 fathoms, was taken a large tree-like Hydroid,
which at first sight looked like an aged colony of Bougainvillia, but
since the gonophores were found to be true sporosacs, it showed the
generic character of Bimeria.

Description of the species. Trophosome — hydrocaulus well branched,
attaining a height of about 3| inches ; branching irregular, with
a tendency towards one plane ; stems and branches fascicled ;
hydranths with about twelve tentacles in a single verticil; perisarc
continued over the lower part of the hydranths in the form of a cup,
into which the hydranth contracts. Gonosome — sporosacs situated on
the hydrocaulus.

The specimens consist of a large colony (Plate 11.) and several
small pieces. It is quite probable that they all formed part of one
colony, which the trawl had torn off above the root.

The stem and branches have a central axial tube surrounded by
a large number of delicate auxiliary tubes. Apparently all the

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 21

hydraiiths and gonophores are directly connected \vith the axial tube,
and the auxiliary tubes only give rigidity to the stem and branches.
The auxiliary tubes greatly increase the thickness of the stem and the
principal branches, and extend, in decreasing numbers, almost to the
extremities of the little branches, but do not run along the stalks of
the hydranths.

The hydranths (PI. I., Fig. 1) have rather a broad, cone-shaped hypo-
stome surrounded by a single row of about twelve tentacles, but oc-
casionally thirteen are present. It is not possible to say definitely that
the tentacles during life naturally arrange themselves in two altern-
ating series, one elevated and the other depressed, as in Bougainvillia.
A few of the hydranths certainly show such an arrangement, but as
nearly all the hydranths are in a contracted or semi-contracted
condition, the tentacles are also contracted. Surrounding the lower
part of the hydranth is a cup-like expansion of the perisarc, into
which the hydranth withdraws on contraction. This cup is conspicuous
owing to its being covered with very fine black or dark brown
particles. A similar coating occurs in Bimeria vestita and Bougain-
villia. The stalks of the hydranths are smooth, except at their origin,
where there are a few slight wrinkles or corrugations. The axial tube
is also smooth, but it is only exposed just at the tips of the branches.

The gonophores (Fig. 3) are situated upon the branches, and not
upon the hydranths or their stalks. The male gonophore is globular
in shape, and is upon a short pedicel. Sections (Fig. 2) show that it is
a true sporosac. At the base of the spadix slight outgrowths of the
endoderm indicate rudimentary radial canals, such as are found in the
gonophore of Garveia nutans.

Bimeria biscayana, nova species. Plate I., figs. 4, 5.

At Station XI [1., 412 fathoms, six colonies of a small Hydroid,
about 20 mm. or less in height, were found attached to the coral
Lophohclia. As the colonies have compound branches of considerable
thickness for the size of the colonies, and are without, gonosomes, they
are probably at an early stage in their growtli, and may reasonably be
expected to grow to a much larger size.

Description of the species. Hydrocaulus compound, composed of
series of tubes bearing individual hydranths. Some of the stems of
the hydranths become branches. Hydranths with aljout ten tentacles
in a single verticil. Perisarc continued over the lower part of the
liydranth in the form of a small cup, into which the hydranth con-
tracts. Gonosome unknown.

Theoretically, the main stem of the colony should be a single
unbranched tube carrying a hydranth at ils top. The hydranth

22 HYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM

manufactures the tube and also secretes inside it thin layers of
perisarc, which form a kind of coarse network (Fig. 4). Then from
the root arise auxiliary tubes (stolons), which creep up the stem.
From the auxiliary tubes bud forth numerous hydranths. At first
the hydranths are sessile, and later on some develop a stalk; some
are more vigorous than others and develop a long stalk, which becomes
a branch, and is similar in structure to the original stem. Along the
branches there creep from the root more auxiliary tubes bearing

Fig. 1.
Bimeria hiscayana, n. sp. x 4.

hydranths. This process is repeated again and again, and results in
the formation of an arborescent colony (Text Fig. 1).

The auxiliary tubes frequently anastomose with one another, and
form a dense matted mass, which gives a considerable thickness to the
principal branches.

The coenosarcal tube of a hydranth, which forms a branch, apparently
has no direct communication with the auxiliary tubes growing over
the external surface of its perisarc. It is, however, in communication
with other hydranths by means of its own auxiliary tube, from which
it originally developed. The tube formed by the hydranth even when

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 23

it lengthens into a branch does not produce lateral branches. Wherever
I could trace the course of the internal ccenosarcal tube it always came
from an auxiliary tube.

The auxiliary tubes are simply stolons arising from the root of the
colony, growing over one another, and producing series of single
hydranths, the stems of which do not develop hydranths or branch.

As all the hydranths are more or less contracted, their natural
shape remains uncertain. They possess a broad conical hypostome,
and generally ten tentacles, but occasionally eleven are present. The
stalk of the hydranth is smooth, of about the same thickness throughout
its whole length, and terminates in a slight extension to form the cup
for the hydranth. The hydranths which remain sessile or nearly so
upon the auxiliary tubes gradually become surrounded by tubes of a
later growth, and embedded to such an extent that only their heads
arc visible.

Until the gonosome has been found, this species can only be pro-
visionally regarded as a member of the genus Bimeria. As the
Hydroid was found at a depth of over 400 fathoms, its gonophore is
almost certain to be a sporosac.

EUDENDRID^.

Eudendrium ramosum (Linn.).

At Station IV., 109 fathoms, a few colonies were taken. They are
very small in size and attached to worm-tubes.

Distribution. Some recent foreign records :— California (Torrey).
Antarctic Ocean, lat. 71° S., long. 89° W. ; lat. 71° S., long. 87° W. ;
lat. 70° S., long. 80° W. ; 220 to 300 fathoms. (Species marked (?),
Hartlaub, Belgica Expedition, 1904.)

Eudendrium rameum (Pallas).

At Station II., 75 fathoms, a small colony about 1 inch in height
was taken. At Station VII., over 444 fathoms, the trawl brought up
a piece which had evidently, from the thickness of the stem, been
broken off from a large colony. At Station XIII., 412 fathoms, several
small colonies were taken, and also a branch about 3| inches in
height. Some of the colonies have gonophores.

Distribution. Some recent foreign records : — Arctic Ocean, off Bear
Island, lat. 74° 53', long. 15° 55' E., 180 fathoms (Bonnevie). S.E. of
Iceland, lat. 62° 59', long. 10° 37' W., 250 fathoms (Broch, 1903).
Portugal (Nobre). Off West Coast of Morocco, 33° 16' N., 8° 53' W.,
65 fathoms (Billard). California (Torrey). Chile, about lat. 42° S.
(Hartlaub, 1905). South Georgia, 135 fathoms (Jaderholm).

24 HYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FKOM

TUBULARID^.

Tubularia sp.
At Station II., 75 fathoms, a single Tuhularia Hydroid was found
attached to a worm-tube. It has the appearance of a young form.

CALYPTOBLASTEA.
CAMPANULAEID^.

Clytia johnstoni (Alder).

A few colonies with gonophores were found at Stations I. and II.,
75 fathoms. They were attached to Sertularia ahictina and to other
large Hydroids.

The bathymetrical distribution of Clytia johnstoni is from the shore
down to about 100 fathoms.

Campanularia Mncksii, Alder.

This species was fairly common at most of the stations, extending
from 75 fathoms down to over 444 fathoms. It was usually attached
to Sertularella, occasionally on Antennularia, but only once seen on a
Diphasia. Colonies with gonophores were taken at Station II.

CamjMnularia Mncksii is similar to Clytia johnstoni in its mode of
growth and habitat, but differs in its method of reproduction. The
gonophores contain fixed sporosacs which mature their products
within the gonangium. Clytia liberates free-swimming medusaB which
belong to the medusoid genus Fhialidium.

It does not occur so close to shore as Clytia, but extends to a much
greater depth.

Distribution. Some recent foreign records : — Off east coast of Green-
land, 74° 7' N., 19° 4' E. ; 50 fathoms; 019° C. Off Norwegian coast,
62° 17' N., 4° 57' W. ; 145 fathoms (Broch, 1903). Morocco, off Cape
Spartel, 60 fathoms (Billard).

Campanularia raridentata, Alder.
A few hydranths resembling Alder's figure were seen on Sertularella,
and on a broken shell at Station IV.

CAMPANULINID^.

Calycella fastigiata (Alder).

A few colonies were found attached to Sertularella and to the roots
of Diiihasia alata, 75-240 fathoms.

Distribution. Some foreign records : — Norway, Aelesund, 55-100
fathoms (Bonnevie). Gulf of Gascogne, 225 fathoms. Off west coast
of Morocco, 33° 16' N., 8° 53' W.; 60 fathoms (Billard).

NOETH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 25

LAFOiilD^.

Lafoea dumosa (Fleming).

The erect form (var. rohusta) was common at Station II., but scarce
at Station V. The creeping form also occurred at Station II., and on
Lophohelia at Station XIIL, 412 fathoms.

The deepest record for this species is 450 fathoms, off Sombrero
Island, West Indies {Challenger Expedition).

Lafoea fruticosa (M. Sars), var. gracillima, Alder.

This species was very scarce ; just a few colonies from Stations I.
and II., 75 fathoms. At the second station it was growing over
worm-tubes.

There appears to be a difference of opinion as to whether Lafoea
gracillima, Alder, and Lafoea fruticosa, Sars, are the same species or
distinct species. Lafoea gracillima, has its hydrotheca on a stalk which
has one or two very loose twists, but Lafoea fruticosa has three or four
distinct spiral twists. The specimens in this collection belong to
Alder's type, which is the type found in the English Channel, and
which has usually been called Lafoea fruticosa.

Distribution. Jaderholm has recently recorded Lafoea gracillima
for Falkland Islands and South Georgia.

One of the deepest records for Lafoea gracillima is 274 fathoms, ol'f
the Norwegian coast, 62° 30' K, 1° 56' E. (Broch, 1903).

Lafoea pinnata, G. 0. Sars.

Lafoea irinnata, G. 0. Sars, 1873, p. 116, Tab. IV. figs. 25-28;
Bonnevie, 1899, p. 69, PI. VI. fig. 1.

Lafoea halccioides, Allman, 1874, p. 472, PL LXVI. fig. 1.

Lictorclla halccioides, Pictet et Bedot, 1900, p. 16, PL III. figs. 4, 5.

Lictorella pinnata, Broch, 1903; Broch, 1905, p. 11, fig. 3.

This species was taken at Station XIIL, 412 fathoms, and was either
growing over Eudenclrium. rameum, or fixed to the coral Lojjhohelia.

It was first described by G. 0. Sars, who found it on Eudendrium
rameum in the Hardangerfjord, on the coast of Norway. In 1874
Allman described a new species of Lafoea under the name of Lafoea
halccioides, which was found by the Poreupinc Expedition in the Faeroe
Channel, and this appears to me to be identical with Lafoea pinnata.

Allman (1888), in the Eeport on the Hydroida of the Challenger
Expedition, considered a Hydroid from Torres Straits, North Australia,
to be identical with Lafoea hcdccioides from the Faeroe Channel, and on
account of the structure of the hydrotheca of the Australian specimen,
he transferred Lafoea halecioides to a new genus called Lictorclla.

26 HYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FEOM

Through the kindness of Mr. E. Kirkpatrick, I have examined at
the British Museum the specimen of Lidonila halccioidcs from Torres
Straits. It is not like Zafoea ^nnnata, and it is not like Allman's
figure of Lafoea halecioides from the Faeroe Channel.

Pictet and Bedot record the occurrence of Lidordla halecioides in
the Bay of Biscay. Their description and beautiful figures show that
they refer to the form originally described by Allman from the
Faeroe Channel.

The distinction between the two genera Lafoea and Lictorella rests
entirely upon the structure of their hydrothecne. In Lafoea the cavity of
the hydrotheca is directly continuous with that of the stem or peduncle,
but in Lictorella the cavity is distinctly differentiated from that of the
peduncle.

In the lower part of the hydrotheca of Lafoea pinnata there is a fine
transverse circular line on the inner side of the perisarc. The line is
more readily seen when the hydrotheca are empty, and, better still,
when the perisarc has been lightly stained. Two circular lines, close
together, are not uncommon, and occasionally a hydrotheca was seen
without a circular line. In mounted specimens one usually sees this
line and nothing more, but occasionally in an empty hydrotheca a
very fine membrane, with a central hole, was found stretching across
the hydrotheca. The circular line is a very slight thickening of the
perisarc, to which this membrane is attached. When the colony
is alive the membrane extends from the body of the hydranth to the
perisarc of the hydrotheca, and shuts off the lower part of the
liydrotheca from the exterior. The membrane is so thin and delicate
that it usually disappears on the death or absorption of the hydranth.
Levinsen (1893) has noticed a similar membrane in Lafoea fruticosa.
This membrane has commonly been called a diaphragm and considered
homologous with the diaphragm of a typical Campanularian Hydroid.
To compare this delicate membrane with the firm perisarcal diaphragm
which forms the bottom of the hydrotheca of a Campanularia is likely
to cause confusion. The membrane is not at the bottom of the
hydrotheca, and it does not, on account of its pliability, in any way limit
the contracting back of the hydranth; when the hydranth of a Lafoea
is contracted back it does not rest upon the diaphragm like a Cam-
imnularia, but contracts back below the diaphragm to the bottom of
the hydrotheca.

Lietorclla halecioides horn Torres Straits has a typical Campanularian
diaphragm. Its hydrotheca, with a thick basal wall, is upon a short
peduncle, and the cavity of the hydrotheca is distinctly differentiated
from that of the peduncle.

Description of Lafoea pinnata. This Hydroid has two modes of

NOKTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 27

growth : (a) A creeping form which occurs on Eudendrmm. In this
form the stolon either gives oft' stems bearing only hydranths, or stems
with lateral branches which carry the hydranths. The stem is either
simple, nionosiphonic, or fascicled. A fascicular stem has usually only
one or two auxiliary tubes, (h) An erect form which is distinguish-
able from the creeping form by the main stem being thick and
composed of many auxiliary tubes, and by the presence of thick
fascicular branches which give oft" branchlets to bear the hydranths.

Sars has described and figured the creeping form on Eudcndrium.
Allman, Bonnevie, and Bedot, figure the erect form, which reaches a
lieight of 70 mm. In this collection both forms occur ; the erect form
is similar to the figures given by Allman and Bedot.

The peduncle of the hydrotheca has the appearance of being twisted
near its base. There is not a distinct joint, but rather a corrugation
of the perisarc. Occasionally a peduncle was seen without the slightest
trace of even a wrinkle, but peduncles with several transverse
corrugations or even with two or three distinct rings were more
frequently seen.

The hydrotheccC are alternately situated upon the stem, and all turn
towards the same side of the colony. They frequently show several
rings of growth near their orifice. A single hydrotheca is also present
in the axil of the branches.

In addition to the ordinary hydrothecae, there are very minute
pedunculated cups, resembling somewhat in shape and size the
sarcothecas of Pcrisiphonia 2^cctinc(ta (Pictet and Bedot, 1900, PI. IV.
figs. 2h, 2c). They occur either at the axil of a branch, or at the
base of the peduncle of a hydrotheca, or on an auxiliary tube of the
stem. They are, however, extremely scarce ; one branch may have two
or three, and another none at all. Some have, undoubtedly, been
broken off, as minute holes were found in the perisarc in the places
where they should occur, but even the holes are very scarce. A few
of the sarcothecae contain a little coenosarc which is usually in a
contracted or dilapidated condition.

The existence of nematophores in La/o'ea pinnata has not been
previously noticed, but before changing the generic name again it
would be well to know if similar nematophores occur in specimens
from other localities, especially off the Norwegian coast. If so, then I
would suggest that the species be transferred to the genus Zygophylax,
Quelch. There seems to be a close relationship between my specimens
of La/oea pmnata and Zygophylax hiarmata (Billard, 1907).

All the colonies are without gonosomes. Bonnevie has figured the
gonosome, and it belongs to the Scajncs type.

Distribution. Arctic Ocean, 71° 45' N., 15° 41' E., 620 fathoms

28 IIYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FKOM

(1134 metres), 0-97° C. ; 72° 27' K, 35° 1' E, 136 fathoms (249 metres),
0° C. (Bonnevie). Norway, Hardangerfjord, 90-100 fathoms (Sars).
Between Iceland and Greenland, 66° 42' N., 26° 40' W., 320 fathoms,
+ 0-11° C. (Broch, 1903). Faeroe Channel, 61° 10' N., 2° 21' W., 345
fathoms, 30° F. ; 61° 21' K, 3' 44' W., 640 fathoms, 30° F. (Allman, 1874).
Off north-west of Scotland, 59° 28' K, 8° 1' W., 600-700 fathoms
(1100-1300 metres) (Broch, 1903). North-west of Faeroe Islands
(Broch, 1903). Bay of Biscay, off north coast of Spain, 43° 4' K,
8° 55' W., 80 fathoms (Pictet and Bedot).

Filellum serpens (Hassall).
Lafo'ea scrpe7is, Bonnevie, 1899.

This species was very common on Scrtulardla ahietina at Stations II.
and IX., 75-240 fathoms.

Both Levinsen and Bonnevie state that the gonosome belongs to the
Coppinia type, and a figure of it is given by Bonnevie.

Filellum serpens has recently been recorded by Jaderholm from the
Falkland Islands and Tierra del Fuego. It was found by the
Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition at many different stations,
10-328 fathoms (Bonnevie).

Perisiplionia pectinata, Pictet et Bedot.

Perisiphonia pectinata, Pictet et Bedot, 1900, p. 18, PL IV. V.

There is only one specimen of this interesting Hydroid, which was
taken at Station XIII., 412 fathoms, and found attached to the coral
Zophohelia. The main stem is about 20 mm. in height, and has twelve
alternating branches.

There are some exceedingly beautiful figures of this species drawn
by Bedot, who believes that his specimens, taken in the Gulf of
Gascogne and at the Azores, are identical with those described by
Allman (1888) under the name of Perisiphonia pectinata. Allman
has described two species of Perisiphonia — P.Jilicula from the Azores
and Australia, and P. p)cctinata from off the coast of New Zealand.
My specimen agrees very well with Bedot's figures, but I am not sure
that it is identical with either of Allman's species.

The stem and branches have a principal axial tube from which the
hydrothecae arise, and it is surrounded by a number of auxiliary tubes,
which do not bear hydrothecae, but numerous minute sarcothecte. The
presence of sarcothecse is the characteristic feature of the genus.

The hydrothecse are adnate for about half their length to the axial
tube. According to Allman, a pedunculated hydrotheca is one of the
characters of the genus, but I think that tliis detail might be omitted
from the generic characters and passed down to the species. At the

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 29

base of the hydrotheca there is a transverse ring, which indicates the
presence of a diaphragm similar to the one mentioned in Lafoea
innnata. The hydrothecpe have not the shape or position of those
figured by AUman, but are similar to those figured by Bedot. Many
of the hydrothecffi show circular rings of growth near their orifice.

The shapes of the sarcotheca? are similar to those figured by Bedot,
but they are not like the long sarcothecte on the auxiliary tubes of
Allman's species. So far as I know, no one has yet examined a living
FerisijjJionia, so that the structure and form of the supposed sarco-
styles are unknown.

Bedot fortunately found a specimen bearing a gonosome, which was
previously unknown. It belongs to the Copjnnia type, and a beautiful
figure is given of it.

Cryptolaria humilis, Allman.

Cryptolaria Immilis, Allman, 1888, p. 39, PI. XVIII. fig. 1.

The collection contains only a fragment from the upper part of a
colony. It was taken at Station XIII., 412 fathoms. The hydrothecse
are similar to those of Cryptolaria humilis as figured by Allman,
and they are also like the hydrothecoe of C. conferta, Allman, and
C. crassicaulis, Allman. It would be well to have these three species
united, and a few more with them.

Distribution. C. humilis: off the Azores, 38° 30' K, 31° 14' W.,
1000 fathoms (Allman, 1888). C. conferta: off Cuba, 450 fathoms
(Allman, 1877) ; off the Azores, 70-250 fathoms (Pictet et Bedot) ;
Gulf of Gascogne, 225 fathoms ; off West Coast of Morocco and
Soudan, Cape Spartel to Cape Garnet, 225-400 fathoms (Billard).
G. crassicornis : off Ascension Island, 420 fathoms (Allman, 1888).

Cuspidella grandis, Hincks.
This species occurred at Station I., 75 fathoms, on Sertularella
polyzonias. At Station IV., 109 fathoms, it was fairly common on
Sertularella and Diphasia alata.

Cuspidella costata, Hincks.
This species was only taken at Station I., 75 fathoms, and was
rather scarce.

HALEOID-S.
Halecium sessile, Norman.

A single specimen was taken at Station XIIL, 412 fathoms. It is
about 2h inches in height, and has evidently lost some of its branches.
The main stem is thick and fascicled ; the principal branches are also
fascicled and irregular in position.

30 HYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM

The hydrothecte are sessile, and around their orifice there are a
number of fine lines. These lines look like a striated band, but on
being subjected to a higher magnification each line is seen to be a
projecting rim and to represent a rudimentary hydrotheca.

The gonangia (male) are very long and slightly curved. They are
situated on the side of the hydrothecre, either singly or in pairs.
Their distal end is rounded, and the proximal end tapers towards a joint
which is closed to the hydrotheca. The male gonangium agrees with
Bonnevie's description. The female form is still unknown.

Distribution. Scotland, The Minch, in deep water (Hincks, 1868).
Norway, Bodo, Lofoden, 55-100 fathoms (Bonnevie).

SERTULARID^.

Sertularella polyzonias (Linn.).

This species occurred at all the stations, except at the two over
400 fathoms. It was usually attached to worm-tubes, shells, and
occasionally to small stones or to another Hydroid. A few of the
colonies taken at Station II. bear gonophores.

Jiiderholm has recently recorded this species for the Falkland Islands
and South Georgia.

According to Nutting, the greatest depth recorded for this species is
353 fathoms in the North Atlantic, off Florida.

Sertularella gayi (Lamouroux).

Large colonies, some of which are loaded with gonophores and carry
their ova in acrocysts, were taken at Station VII., over 444 fathoms.
The species was also fairly common at Station XIIL, 412 fathoms.

Some of the colonies have very thick stems, and are evidently of a
great age. Even quite small colonies have thick stems and branches,
and have the appearance of old colonies producing a new growth of
shoots.

Both Sertularella i^olyzonias and S. gayi are common species on the
Eddystone Grounds, 30-35 fathoms, yet on this cruise S. gayi was only
taken at the two stations over 400 fathoms, and there S. ijolyzonias
was absent.

Sertularella gayi has been taken in the Faeroe Channel at the depth
of 605 fathoms (Allman, 1874).

Diphasia pinaster (Ellis and Solander).

A few colonies, without gonangia, were taken at Stations I., II., IV.,
and v., 75-109 fathoms. Some were attached to worm-tubes.

Distribution. Hebrides, 40 fathoms; off Mull of Galloway, 110-
140 fathoms ; Dogger Bank ; Jersey ; Dublin Bay ; and other places

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 31

(Hincks, 1868). South of the Eddystone (Bourne). Norway, 200
fathoms (Broch, 1903). Portugal (Nobre). Gulf of Gascogne, 100
fathoms; Azores, 75 fathoms (Pictet and Bedot). Off the Azores,
450 fathoms (Allman, 1888). Morocco, Cape Spartel, 60 fathoms ;
Cape Verde Islands, 220-320 fathoms (Billard).

Diphasia tamarisca (Linn.).

At Stations I. and XL, 75 fathoms, a few small colonies and frag-
ments were taken. Some of the colonies have gonophores.

Bonnevie records this species along the Norwegian coast from
Kristiandsund to Hammerfest, and off the north-west coast of Norway
in lat. 69° 44', long. 16° 15' E., 650 fathoms, 0-66° C. ; and 71° 45' N.,
15° 41' E., 622 fathoms, 097° C.

Diphasia pinnata (Pallas).

A splendid colony was taken at Station III., 75 fathoms. There
are over a dozen shoots, the largest about 6 inches in height, and several
are loaded with female gonophores.

The colony when alive was of a deep carmine colour, which slowly
dissolved out in alcohol, and after its complete removal the colony
became a dark brownish colour.

Distribution. South coast of Devon and Cornwall, about 30-40
fathoms (Hincks). As this species was not taken by the Challenger
Expedition, and is not mentioned in recent foreign records, its
occurrence outside the areas mentioned above is very doubtful.

Diphasia alata (Hincks).

At Station IV., 109 fathoms, a large colony, with many shoots and
branches, up to 5 inches in height, and a small colony were taken.
Both colonies were attached to worm-tubes. At Station V. several
large branches were again taken.

The main stem is strengthened by a number of auxiliary tubes,
which run along one side of it, and decrease in number towards the
distal ends.

Several of the large shoots bear female gonosomes. The gonangia
are similar to those of the male.

Distribution. Norway, Stavanger, 50-100 fathoms (Bonnevie).
Shetlands, 40 fathoms (Hincks). Cornish coast (Hincks). Ireland,
west coast, 43 fathoms (Duerden). Bay of Biscay, Gulf of Gascogne,
75-164 fathoms ; Azores, 75-174 fathoms (Pictet and Bedot). Gulf
of Gascogne, 225 fathoms (Billard).

Sertularia abietina (Linn.).
Ahietinaria ahietina, Nutting, 1904.
A fine old colony, closely covered with other small Hydroids,

32 HYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM

was taken at Station II., 75 fathoms, and some large branches at
Station III. At Station IX., 240 fathoms, a few fragments were
secured.

Broch (1903) records this species at 250 fathoms in lat. 62° 59' K,
long. 10° 37' W.

Hydrallmania falcata (Linn.).

A few fragments were obtained at Station I., 75 fathoms.

PLUMULARID^.

Plumularia elegant ula, G. 0. Sars.

Flumularia clegantula, G. 0. Sars, 1873, p. 103, Tab. III. figs. 9-14;
Bonnevie, 1898, p. 15 ; Bonnevie, 1899, p. 90.

This species occurred at Station YIL, over 444 fathoms, and at
Station XIII., 412 fathoms. At the first station only two plumes
were taken. The largest measures 35 mm. in length, and has a few
empty gonangia on the stem. At the second station several young
colonies were found attached to the coral Lopholielia.

It is very likely that tliis species is a deep-water variety of Flumti-
laria pinnata. It agrees with the latter species in every detail, except
that the internodes of the hydrocladia are nearly twice as long. The
hydrothecse are smaller in size, and are situated at the distal end
of the internodes. Their position is probably due to the lengthening
of the internode at its proximal end. It is the length of the inter-
nodes that gives the hydrocladia a more delicate and more slender
appearance than that seen in the littoral Plumularia fnnnata.

Distribution. Norway, Kristiania to Bodo, 55-200 fathoms (Bonne-
vie, 1899).

Plumularia setacea (Ellis).

At Station I., 75 fathoms, very small colonies bearing gonangia were
found on Aglaophcnia and Antcnnularia.

At Station XIII., 412 fathoms, several little colonies witli gonangia
were attached to Plumularia frutescens.

Distribution. Some recent foreign records : — Norway, 55-110
fathoms (Bonnevie); Azores, 174 fathoms (Pictet et Bedot); Florida
(Nutting) ; California (Nutting) ; Puget Sound (Torrey) ; Chile
(Hartlaub); Ceylon (Thornely); New Zealand (Hartlaub, 1901); Japan
(Jfiderholm, 1896).

Plumularia frutescens (Ellis and Solander).

A few short branches bearing gonophores were taken at Station XIII.,
412 fathoms.

Bonnevie records this species for the coast of Norway, 20-160
fathoms.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 33

Antennularia antennina (Linn.).

Small colonies were fairly common at Station I., 75 fathoms, but
scarce at Station II.

Distribution. Eecent foreign records: — Norway, 100-200 fathoms
(Bonnevie); Bay of Biscay, Gulf of Gascogne, 10-35 fathoms (Pictet
et Bedot) ; Portugal (Nobre) ; iSTorth Atlantic, off the American coast,
lat. 42° N., long. 65° W., 65 fathoms ; lat. 35° K, long. 75' W., 71
fathoms (Nutting).

Antennularia ramosa (Lamarck).

A few fragments were taken at Station II., 75 fathoms.

Distribution. Piecent foreign records: — Bay of Biscay^ Gulf of
Gascogne, 35-75 fathoms (Pictet et Bedot); Portugal (Nobre); Azores,
75 fathoms (Pictet et Bedot).

Antennopsis, Alhnan, 1877.
Generic character (Nutting, 1900). Trophosome — stem jointed;
coenosarc not canaliculated ; hydrocladia scattered irregularly over the
stem, sometimes approaching a verticillate arrangement. Gonosome —
gonangia borne in the axils of the hydrocladia, without protective
appendages.

Antennopsis norvegica (G. 0. Sars).

Heteropyxis norvegica, G. 0. Sars, 1873, p. 104, Tab. III. figs. 15-22.

Antennularia norvegica, Bonnevie, 1899, p. 97.

Antennularia norvegica, Broch, 1903; Broch, 1905, p. 24; Billard,
1907, p. 217.

At Station XIIL, 412 fathoms, a few colonies about 15-35 mm. in
height were found upon Lophohelia.

In young colonies the arrangement of the hydrocladia on the stem
is pinnate, as in the genus Plumularia. The same arrangement is
found at the bottom of the larger plumes, but as the stem grows in
length the hydrocladia no longer remain in the same plane. They
project out in pairs, either alternate or opposite, at an angle of about
forty-five degrees. At the distal end of the plume the hydrocladia
become closer together and more irregular in position, and scattered
in all directions round the stem. This irregular arrans-ement of
the hydrocladia led Bonnevie to place the species in the genus
Antennularia.

Nutting in his revision of the Plumularidse has restricted the genus
Antennularia to species with a canaliculated stem, and retains the
genus Antennopsis for species with a simple or fascicled stem.

The specimens from the Bay of Biscay have a simple, monosiphonic
stem. Bonnevie, however, states that the main is compound, which
I interpret to mean a fascicled stem.

XEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 1. C

34 HYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM

The internodes of the main stem are very irregular in length ; some
are quite long, carrying about eight hydrocladia, others are very
short, with only two or three hydrocladia.

The nematophores are bithalamic and rather small. On each inter-
node of the hydrocladia there are three, two situated in front of the
hydrotheca and one behind it. There are also two in the axil of
the hydrocladia, and several scattered over each internode of the
main stem.

The gonangia are in the axil of the hydrocladia, usually one or two,
but occasionally three are present. They are curved downwards, and
contain a single ovum.

Distribution. Norway, Kristianfjord, 50-60 fathoms; Hardanger-
fjord, 90-100 fathoms (Sars). North Atlantic, off the Norwegian coast,
61° 41' N., 3° 19' E., 219 fathoms, +6^ C; 62" 44' N., 1° 48' E., 411
fathoms, - l-Q" C. ; 64° 48' N., 6° 36' E., 155 fathoms, + 6-9° C. (Bonnevie).
North Sea, 57° 11' N., 1" 50' W., 55 fathoms, 58° 0' N., 3° 24' E., 50
fathoms; 57° 9' N., 1° 30' E., 50 fathoms, +615° C. (Broch, 1905);
62° 16' N., 6° 6' W., 60 fathoms (Broch, 1903). South-west of Toulon,
245 fathoms (Billard).

Aglaophenia myriopliyllum (Linn.).

Lytocarpus myriophyllum, Allman, 1883.

Thecocarpus myriophyllum, Nutting, 1900.

About thirty specimens were taken at Station I., 75 fathoms, and a
few at Station II.

Distribution. Eecent foreign records : — Off the coast of Norway,
200-400 fathoms (Bonnevie). Bay of Biscay, 50-135 fathoms ; Azores,
70 fathoms (Pictet et Bedot). Portugal (Nobre). South of Madeira, 55
fathoms ; off the west coast of Morocco, 300 fathoms ; Cape Verde
Islands, 220-320 fathoms (Billard).

LITEEATUEE.
Allen, E. J. 1899. On the Fauna and Bottom-Deposits near the Thiity-Fathom

Line from the Eddystone Grounds to Start Point. Journ. Marine Biol.

Assoc, vol. V. pp. 365-452. 16 charts. Plymouth.
Allman, G. J. 1871-1872. A Monograph of the Gymnoblastic or Tubularian

Hydroids. Eay Soc. London.
Allman, G. J. 1874. Eeport on the Hydroida collected during the Expeditions

of H.M.S. Porcnpine. Trans. Zool. Soc. Lend., vol. viii. pp. 469-481.

Pis. LXV.-LXVIIL
Allman, G. J. 1883-1888. Eeport on the Hydroida dredged l^y H.M.S. Challenger.

Part i. Plumularidee, 1883, vol. vii. 55 pp. 20 j^ls.

Part ii. Tubularinoe, Campanularinse, etc., 1888, vol. xxiii. 159 pp. 39 pis.
Billard, A. 1907. Hydroides. Expeditions scientifiques du Travailleur et du

Talisman, tom. viii. pp. 153-243. 21 text figures. Paris.

NOETH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, AUGUST, 1906. 35

BoNNEViE, Kristine. 1898. Neue uorwegisclie Hydroideii. Bergens Mus. Aarbog,

1898, No. 5. 16 pp. 2 Tafn.
BoNNEViE, Kristine. 1899. The Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition, 1876-1878.

Hydroida, No. 26. 103 pp. 8 pis. Christiania.
Bourne, G. C. 1890. Notes on the Hydroids of Plymoutli. Jour. Mar. Biol.

Assoc. (N.S.), vol. i. pp. 391-398. PI. XXVI. Plymouth.
Broch, H. 1903. Die von dem norwegischen Fischereidampfer Michael Sars in

den Jahren 1900-1902 in dem Nordmeer gesammelten Hydroiden. Bergens

Mus. Aarbog, 1903, No. 9. 14 pp. 4 Tafn.
Broch, H. 1905. Nordsee-Hydroiden von dem norwegischen Fischereidampfer

Michael Sars in den Jahren 1903-1904 gesammelt, nebst Bemerkungen

iiber die Systematik der Tekaphoren Hydroiden. Bergens Mus. Aarbog,

1905, No. 6. 28 pp. 2 Tafn.
Duerden, J. E. 1896. The Hydroids of the Irish Coast. Proc. R. Dublin Soc,

vol. viii. pp. 405-420.
Hartlaub, C. 1897. Die Hydromedusen Helgolands. Wiss. Meeresunters. deutsch.

Meere, Bd. ii. pp. 449-536. 10 Tafn.
Hartlaub, C. 1901. Hydroiden aus den Stillen Ocean. Zool. Jahrbiich, Bd. xiv.

pp. 349-379. Taf. XXI. -XXII.
Hartlaub, C. 1904. Hydroiden. R^sultats du Voyage du Belgica, 1897-1899

(Expedition antarctique). 19 pp. 4 pis. Antwerp.
Hartlaub, C. 1905. Die Hydroiden der magalhaensischen Region unci chilenis-

chen Kiiste. Zool. Jahrbiich, Suppl. VI. Dr. L. Plate, Fauna Chilensis.

Bd. iii. pp. 497-714. 142 text figures.
HiNCKS, T. 1868. A History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes. London.
Jaderholm, E. 1896. Ueber assereuropaische Hydroiden des Zoologischen

Museums der Universitats Upsala. Bihang Svensk. Vet. Akad. Handl.

Bd. xxi. Afd. 4, No. 6. Stockholm.
Jaderholm, E. 1905. Hydroiden aus Antarktischen und Subantarktischen Meeren.

Schwedischen Siidpolar-Expedition, 1901-1903, Bd. v. Lief. 8. 41 pp.

14 Tafn. Stockholm.
Marine Biological Association. 1904. Plynaouth Marine Invertebrate Fauna.

Being Notes of the Local Distribution of Species occurring in the Neigh-
bourhood. Compiled from the Records of the Laboratory. Journ. Mar.

Biol. Assoc, vol. vii. pp. 155-298.
MoTZ-KossowsKA, S. 1905. Contribution a la Connaissance des Hydraires de la

Mediterranee occidentale. I. Hydraires gymnoblastiques. Arch. Zool.

exp^rimentale et generale, ser. 4, tom. iii. pp. 39-98. PI. III. Paris.
Nobre, a. 1903. Subsidies para o estudo da fauna marinha do norte de Portugal.

Ann. Sci. nat. Porto., vol. viii. pp. 37-94. 1 pi. and pp. 153-160.
Nutting, C. C. 1900. American Hydroids. Pt. i. Plumularidte. 142 pp. 34 pis.

Special Bulletin Smithsonian Instit. Washington,
Nutting, C. C. 1904. American Hydroids. Pt. ii. Sertularidae. Special Bulletin

Smithsonian Instit. 151 pp. 41 pis.
Pictet, C, et Bedot, M. 1900. Hydraires provenant des campagnes de V Hirondclle

(1886-1888). Result. Camp, scient. Albert de Monaco, fasc. xviii. 58 pp.

10 pis. Monaco.
Sars, G. 0. 1873. Bidrag til Kundskaben om Norges Hydroider. Videnskabs-

Selskabet. Forhandl., 1873, pp. 91-150. Talj. II.-V. Christiania.

36 HYDROIDS COLLECTED BY THE "HUXLEY."

Thornely, Laura K. 1904. Report on the Hydroida. Ceylon Pearl Fisheries,

i:>t. ii. pp. 107-126. 3 pis. Eoyal Soc, London.
ToRREY, H. B. 1902. The Hydroida of the Pacific Coast of North America.

Univ. California Publications. Zool., vol. i. pp. 1-104. 11 pis. Berkeley

California.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.
Figs, 1-3. Bimeria arborea, nova species, p. 20.
Fig. 1. The hydranth. x 100.
Fig. 2. Portion of a branch. x9. G., Gonophore.
Fig. 3. The male gonophore. Longitudinal section, x 150.

Ec, Ectoderm. En., Endoderm. G., Gonads. R., Rudimentary
radial canals. P., Perisarc.
Figs. 4-5. Bimeria biscayana, nova species, p. 20.

Fig. 4. Transverse section of the stem of a hydranth. x 180.

A., Auxiliary tubes. Ec, Ectoderm. En., Endoderm. P., Perisarc.
pi. Inner layer of perisarc. P-, Intermediate layers of perisarc
forming a coarse mesh-work.
Fig. 5. Portion of a branch draAvn to show the arrangement of the hydranths
and the auxiliary tubes, x 40.
S., Stem of a hydranth which has grown into a branch. A., Auxiliary
tuljes growing over the branch and bearing liydranths H^ A',
Auxiliary tubes whicli are jjrobably for the upper parts of the
colony. H., Hydranths which give rise to branches and are con-
nected with auxiliary tubes on S. S*, A transverse section of the
stem in this position is shown in Fig. 4.

PLATE II.

Bimeria arborea. Collotype plate from a photograph by the author, x r4.

iqurn. Mar. Biol. Assoc. Vol. VIII,

Plate I.

E.T.B.del.

E.Wilson, Cambridge.

Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc. Vol. VII I.

PL A TE //

[ 37 ]

A New Method for Growing Hydroids in Small Aquaria
by means of a Continuous Current Tube.

By
Edward T. Browne.

(University College, London.)

With one Figure in the Text.

The simple piece of apparatus, to which I give the name " Current-
tube " was made last year in the Marine Laboratory at Plymouth. I
designed it especially for growing Hydroids, and for them it has proved
to be a success ; but it should also be useful for other fixed organisms,
such as sponges, polyzoa, and ascidians.

The previous methods which I had used for growing Hydroids in
bell-jars or small aquaria never gave complete satisfaction. Occa-
sionally a success was recorded, but there were too many failures,
which frequently involved a great waste of labour.

A Hydroid colony when it has an ample food supply grows at an
astonishingly rapid rate. I will give as an example of this the growth
of Syncoryne eximia in one of my bell-jars at Plymouth in Sep-
tember, 1897.

The colony was taken on September 14th, and suspended in a bell-
jar with one of its branches touching the glass. This branch sent out
a shoot which attached itself to the glass and became converted into a
stolon. The growth of the stolon and its lateral stolons or branches
was measured and sketched daily from September 18th to 23rd, and
on the 27th.

On September 18th the stolon was 14 mm. in length and had no
lateral branches. Nine days later (September 27th) the main stolon
measured 77 mm. in length, and its numerous lateral stolons or
branches measured altogether 500 mm. These measurements ex-
cluded the short stalks of the hydranths, which were then seventy-
seven in number. During the same period a second stolon came off
from the old colony, and on September 27th it measured 70 mm. in

38 A NEW METHOD FOR GROWING HYDROIDS IN SMALL AQUARIA

length and its branches 72 mm. The total amount of new growth
in the part of the colony under observation amounted to 773 mm.
(34 inches), and ninety-nine hydranths in thirteen days.

The rapid growth of this colony was due to a splendid food supply.
The hydranths like large copepods, especially the oily Calanus, and
there were no difficulties in obtaining a large supply almost every
day. To give the hydranths every chance of catching the copepods,
the side of the bell-jar to which the colony was fixed was placed
facing a south window, but screened from direct sunlight, and only
those copepods which are attracted by a strong light were put into
the bell-jar. Consequently the copepods spent tlie day knocking their
heads against the glass in the neighbourhood of the hydranths, and
many got too close and were captured. During daylight the copepods
usually kept near the surface and followed the course of the sun, but
at night they could be brought amongst the hydranths by turning a
strong beam of gaslight on to the colony.

I have frequently tried to grow Bougainvillia and some other
Hydroids on the system described for Syncoryne, but have never met
with a real success. A short stolon would run along the glass and a
few hydranths would appear, but they remained in a diminutive con-
dition. The new growth lacked vigour, which was evidently due to
the want of food. Although there were plenty of copepods in the
bell-jar the hydranths rarely caught them.

The tendency of the copepods to congregate within a small area
was not always favourable to the colony, as the zone of the copepods
did not always correspond with that of the colony. The introduction
of the " plunger" system into bell-jars (described in this journal by the
author in 1898) also proved useful for the growing of Hydroids. The
currents which the plunger created helped to distribute the copepods
more evenly in the water, and other species of copepods which are
not attracted by light could be utilized for a food supply. The
plunger in its journeys up and down a bell-jar does not set up a
current in one direction, but in different directions, so that the
copepods are carried hither and thither. It was the quick-changing
direction of the current that frequently prevented the hydranths
from holding their prey. One current carried a copepod upon the
tentacles of a hydranth, and, before the tentacle responded to the
touch, another current coming from a different direction would sweep
the copepod away.

It must be borne in mind that the number of copepods or the
quantity of plankton which can safely be placed into a bell-jar is
strictly limited. Overcrowding soon leads to a heavy death rate, and
ultimately to the fouling of the water. If copepods are being used

BY MEANS OF A CONTINUOUS CURRENT TUBE. 39

as food supply for Hydroids, then diatoms and other microscopic
organisms should be present in the water for the copepods to feed
upon. The constituents of the plankton require careful adjustment,
and the whole must be kept in a perfectly healthy condition. There
should always be a reserve of food in the bell-jar to carry over days
of bad weather at sea and other misfortunes.

Hydroids certainly keep in better condition and live longer in a bell-
jar with the water in constant motion than in perfectly still water.
They are accustomed in the sea to a current running in a definite
direction and carrying along plankton, from which they select their
food. In the sea the current is ever running, always fresh and aerated,
and always carrying new plankton. The successful rearing of Hydroids
in a few gallons of water depends greatly upon imitating, as closely
as possible, the natural conditions under which they live in the sea.
The current-tube imitates fairly closely these conditions. The Hydroid
is placed in a glass tube through which flows a constant current of
aerated water carrying along with it the plankton in the bell-jar.

Description of the current-tube. The power for producing the current
within the tube is compressed air. It does not matter by what
method the air is compressed, provided that the pressure is kept fairly
constant and the air is clean and pure. The latter condition is
important, as a considerable quantity of air passes through the sea-
water in the course of a day. The supply should be drawn from
outside of a building, and then washed or filtered to remove the
dust. The air-pump used in the Laboratory at Plymouth is a form
of Sprengel's pump, made of metal, and obtainable for about ten
shillings.* It is a remarkably cheap, but very efficient piece of
apparatus.

I shall describe the current-tube as it was originally made by me.
(Fig. 1). Modifications in size and shape will no doubt be introduced
later on to meet special requirements.

^ is a glass tube, 32 mm. in diameter and about 200 mm. in length.
At the lower end a bored cork is inserted, into which is placed the
narrow glass tube BCD, having an internal diameter of about 4 mm,
B C D is an ordinary T-tube, with one end {D) reduced in length, one
end (B) made U-shaped as figured, and the third end (C) remaining
perfectly straight. To D is attached by a short piece of rubber-tubing
the long glass tube ^, the length of which depends upon the depth of
the bell-jar. The next step is to tie a piece of string round the tube A
near the top, and lower the current-tube into the bell-jar. The string
attached to A is made fast to the top of the bell-jar, and adjustments
made to hold A in an upright position.

* The pump is supplied by Anton Skell, Zinzendorfstrasse 34, Dresden.

■40 A NEW METHOD FOR GROWING HYDROIDS IN SMALL AQUARIA

A tall bell-jar was used, about 20 inches (50 cm.) in height and
8 inches (20 cm.) in diameter. The top of the tube A was about

-G

Fig. 1.
Diagram of the current-tvibe inside a bell-jar.

9 inches (23 cm.) below the surface of the water, which was about an
inch below the top of the bell-jar.

After adjusting the current-tube, fill the bell-jar with sea-water,
and connect tube E at F, with rubber-tubing, to the pipe G, supplying

BY MEANS OF A CONTINUOUS CURRENT TUBE. 41

the air from the pump. On the ruljber-tubing near F should be fixed
a screw compressor {H) to regulate the flow of air. On allowing the
air to enter at F, it forces the water out of tube E down to D, and as
the air enters tube C it breaks into bubbles, which pass up tube C and
float to the surface. Between every two air-bubbles there is a short
column of water. The driving of the water out of tube C by the air-
bubbles produces an in-draught of water through tube A. As the air-
bubbles follow one another in rapid succession, there flows down tube
A a good current of water.

The Hydroid (7) is suspended inside tube ^ by a silk thread
attached to a small glass hook, which hangs over tlie top of the tube ;
and the copepods, diatoms, etc., are put into the bell-jar.

As the current through tube A mainly draws from the upper part
of the bell-jar, it is best to keep the top of the tube as low down as
possible. The continuous stream of air which bubbles out of tube G
not only aerates the water, but sets up a current inside the bell-jar
and produces a good circulation. It is therefore advisable to keep the
top of tube G low down. This circulation is beneficial to the
plankton, and also carries it within the reach of the stream drawing
in to tube A. The stream of air-bubbles is in another way of
great service. Their continual breaking at the surface prevents the
formation of the scum, chiefly due to bacteria, which gradually accumu-
lates in small aquaria to form a thick, dirty surface film. This film,
when once formed, is difficult to remove, and is often harmful to the
inhabitants of an aquarium.

So long as the water in a bell-jar keeps quite clear there is no
necessity to completely change it. I usually siphon off about half a
gallon twice a week and fill up with very clean water.

The f/roivth of Bougainvillia muscus in a airrcnt-tuhe. On Nov-
ember 6th a small bush-like colony of Bougainvillia muscus, about
20 mm. in length, was suspended inside a current-tube with the root of
the colony touching the glass. The colony had a few short stolons
growing out from near the distal ends of the branches. It was for
observations upon the growth and function of these stolons that the
Boiigainvillia was placed in the tube.

Soon it was apparent that Bougainvillia. liked its new surroundings.
The hydranths kept fully extended, and their stomachs were seldom
empty. The stolons greatly increased in number and in length, some
hanging down 15-20 mm. A few developed, here and there, soli-
tary diminutive liytlranths, but there were no signs of active bud-
ding of hydranths. The activity of the colony was directed into
a stolon which came off from near the root and was able to
attach itself to the glass of the tube, along which it grew at a

42 A NEW METHOD FOR GROWING HYDROIDS IN SMALL AQUARIA

great rate, sending out lateral stolons and quickly producing large
hydranths.

A most fascinating and beautiful sight was to see the colony at night
under a low-power lens, illuminated by a strong light against a black
background, and to watch the fate of the copepods as they passed
down the tube. Usually the copepods on entering the tube either
were carried clear of the colony, or going among the hydranths
succeeded in escaping into the narrow tube, and then were rapidly
ejected along with the air-bubbles. As the current through the tube was
fast enough to pass the whole of the water in the bell-jar through
several times during the day, the copepods, which escaped on their
first round were liable to a few more passages of the tube, until
their fate was settled by the hydranths which had recently emptied
their stomachs.

On watching the copepods passing through the tube, it was clearly
seen how a steady, continuous current in one direction was of advan-
tage to the hydranth in securing a copepod. A copepod would be
seen to drift on to the expanded tentacles. If at the moment of
touching the copepod gave a jump it usually got away, but occasionally
the jump was delayed too long, and pressed by the current against
the tentacles, it remained just long enough to be secured.

As my stay at the Laboratory terminated on November 17th, I was
only able to watch the growth of the colony for eleven days, and
during that period the new growth far surpassed that of any Bo^ujain-
villia which I had previously tried to grow. Mr. L. R. Crawshay most
kindly took charge of the colony, and I am able to give a further
account of the growth from his letters to me.

Letter dated November 30th : — " The colony has been kept well fed
with copepods every day. The air-pump continues to work success-
fully, so that the food supply has been continuous. The growth of
the colony has consequently been very rapid, more especially, or
almost entirely, over the basal stolon, which by yesterday had
extended over the whole length of the tube, lining the main expanse
of the interior surface. Young polypes have grown out from this
surface at every part, and almost without exception at or near the
points where branching of the stolon occurs. But so far as I have
observed the polypes are simple; there is no tendency to a tree-
like expansion anywhere. The parent part of the colony has not
developed."

" The colony has developed enemies ; from what source I know not,
whether from veligers in the tow-nettings or from original infection.
Three days ago three minute nudibranchs were first observed browsing
on the hydranths, which proved to be Tcrgipes despedus. Yesterday

BY MEANS OF A CONTINUOUS CURKENT TUBE. 43

the number had increased to six, and now the survival of the colony
is threatened by about thirty capsules of their spawn deposited all
over it."

Letter dated December 18th : — " Shortly after my last letter to you,
a day or two only, it was evident to me that the six Tergi'pcs were
having it all their own way. They had stripped the whole stolon
area of almost every visible polype, and had, moreover, simply
plastered the same with spawn, containing, I should say, thousands
of their embryos. I therefore took out the tube and removed the
Tergipcs, and thoroughly cleaned out the bell-jar before returning the
Hydroid colony. The effect was very marked. In about two days
the polypes sprung up again in all directions, and the stolon con-
tinued to form a closer network inside the tube. But it is even now
to all intents and purposes a creeping colony. The first show of
arborescent growth occurred inside the tube. This happened after the
stolon had reached the summit of the tube and ramified over the
edge. A few days ago a similar branching growth appeared outside
the tube at one spot. But this is quite insignificant, with only about
three polypes, and no more than 10 mm. in height."

"A new source of obstruction has arisen in the form of a brown
diatom, which in the past few days has come to infest almost the
whole interior of the tube."

Early in February, 1907, I heard that the colony was still alive,
but owing to the intermittent failure of the air-pump and the scarcity
of copepods the colony had not put forth much new growth.

In March the growth of diatoms and a small alga {Edocarims)
inside the tube was slowly choking the colony. A few vegetarian
molluscs were placed on the tube to browse on the algaa. They did
more than was expected of them in cleansing the tube. Within a
fortnight of their introduction the encrusting mass of diatoms, etc.
lining the tube broke away in large flakes, perhaps due to a poison
secreted by the molluscs, and carried away at the same time the
stolons to such an extent that the whole colony was destroyed.

The successful growing of Bougainvillia is not altogether due to the
advantages of the current-tube, but greatly also to the personal attention
which Mr. Crawshay bestowed upon the colony. I sincerely thank
him for the interesting letters from which he has allowed me to quote.

I am also greatly indebted to Dr. Allen. It was during the pre-
liminary testing of his air-pump that the current-tube was designed.
He at once most generously gave me the use of the pump, and took
a very active interest in the starting of the apparatus and in the
welfare of the colony.

[ 44 ]

A Peculiarly Abnormal Specimen of the Turbot.

By
J. T. Cunningham, M.A., F.Z.S.

With Plate III.

The specimen which forms the subject of this note was sent to Dr.
Allen by Miss Olivia L. Fox, of Falmouth, at the beginning of Decem-
ber, 1906, preserved in formalin. Dr. Allen sent it to me in London,
and requested me to study and describe it. The specimen is 4"4 cm. in
length, and presents a condition which has never previously been
described in any species of flat-fish. I have examined it with great
interest, and would express here my thanks to Dr. Allen for sending it
to me.

With respect to the position of the eyes the fish is a reversed speci-
men, that is to say, both eyes are on the right side, whereas normally in
turbot they are on the left. With respect to colour, on the contrary,
the specimen partially resembles a normal turbot : the right side is
almost entirely unpigmented, the greater part of the left side is coloured
as in a normal specimen. The pigmentation does not extend uniformly
over the whole of the left side, but is absent from the head, and from
the anterior part of the dorsal region above the head. On these areas
there are only a few scattered black chromatophores. On the right or
uncoloured side there are also scattered black chromatophores, rather
more numerous than on the left side of the head. It is important to
note that the head and anterior region of the right side, although not
fully pigmented, have more pigment than the rest of that side : between
the eyes and around the dorsal eye pigmentation is almost complete.

The number of dorsal fin-rays in the specimen is 65, of the ventral
47. The characteristic tubercles of the adult turbot are not yet de-
veloped, but there are three little projections at the base of each of the
dorsal and ventral fin-rays, and also projections at the bases of the
caudal rays : these are probably the beginnings of marginal tubercles.

The anterior end of the dorsal fin, and the basal tissue which carries

A PECULIARLY ABNORMAL SPECIMEN OF THE TURBOT. 45

it, form a projecting hook-like process over the dorsal eye, that is, the
originally left eye which has moved to the right side of the head. This
projection, due to the absence of attachment between the base of the fin
at the anterior end and the head, occnrs commonly in ambicolorate
specimens of the turbot, and less frequently in ambicolorate specimens
of other species of Pleuronectidae. (See Cunningham & MacMunn,
" Coloration of Skins of Fishes," etc., Phil. Trans., 1894.)

The specimen was caught by Miss Fox on September 28th last year,
on the sands at Polzeth, near the Doom Bar, Padstow, and was kept alive
in captivity till November 28th, when it died. When the fish was alive
the right side, on which the eyes are situated, was of course the upper
side, while the left was in contact with the ground. It presented,
therefore, the extraordinary case of a fiat-fish having its upper side
white and its lower side coloured. Several normal specimens were seen
with the abnormal one, and some were caught ; one of these was sent
with the abnormal specimen for comparison. The normal specimen was
4*2 cm. long ; its metamorphosis was complete, but there were still a few
scattered black chromatophores on its right or lower side. Similar
chromatophores are present on the right or upper side of the abnormal
specimen, and they are a little larger and more numerous. Miss Fox,
in a letter, stated that the upper side of this specimen was becoming
pigmented during the time she kept it alive, but it is evident that ex-
posure of this side to light had produced very little effect up to the
time of death. However, it is not impossible that, had the fish lived to
become adult, its upper side would have become completely coloured in
consequence of exposure to light, since I have proved by my experiments
on flounders that light produces pigment on the lov/er side of normal flat-
fishes. In that case the specimen would have been quite similar to the
ambicolorate turbot, or specimens coloured on both sides, which have
long been known, except that the present specimen would still be
reversed.

The appearance of the two sides of the fish is shown in the two
figures here given, which are reproduced from photographs taken by
my friend Mr. E. T. Browne, of University College, London. I have
discussed the condition of the fish at greater length in a paper
in the ProceediiKjs of the Zoological Society, 1907, p. 174. I have
there pointed out that the condition, which is certainly congenital, is
that of a turbot of which the head is reversed while the body remains
normal. In other words, the fish consists of a reversed head joined to
a normal body. The abnormal position of parts in the fish must be
regarded as due to the abnormal position of corresponding parts in the
ovum from which it was developed. The determinants of the left side
of the head were on the right, and vice versa. I have suggested that

46 A PECULIARLY ABNORMAL SPECIMEN OF THE TURBOT.

this view may explain the sejparation of the anterior end of the dorsal
fin from the head, which occurs in this specimen and in many ambi-
colorate specimens. In consequence of the reversion of the head the
left side of the body is joined to the right side of the head and vice
versa. Thus the dorsal fin, when it grows forwards in the develop-
ment, finds itself in abnormal relation to the two sides of the head
and therefore fails to unite with the head, but grows out as a free
process. The pigmentation of the fish is not precisely in agree-
ment with the above hypothesis, since the right side of the head is
only incompletely pigmented, and pigment is wanting from the
anterior dorsal region of the left side of the body. These deficiencies
of pigmentation, whatever their cause, do not appear to me to be
sufficient to invalidate my hypothesis, which agrees so well with all
the more important peculiarities of the fish.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IIL

Fig. 1. Riglit or upper side of abnormal young Turbot, showing both eyes with
some pigment on right side of head, absence of pigment from right side
of body.

Fig 2. Left or lower side of the same sjiecimen, showing absence of eyes and
pigment from left side of head, presence of pigment over left side
of body.

Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, VoJ. VIII.

Plate III.

Fifi. 1.

Fig. 2.

[ 47 ]

On Phellia murocincta (Gosse).

By
Chas. L. Walton.

P. H. Gosse described this beautiful little species in his British Sea
Anemones and Corals, in 1860, from two specimens obtained from a
pool at Petit Tor, near Torquay.

I recently collected two specimens at Zennor, some five miles along
the coast south of St. Ives, Cornwall.

An examination of these proved tliat Gosse's examples were young
and immature, as shown by the difference of size and number of
tentacles.

Their habitat was very similar to that of the Torquay specimens,
namely, attached to the under side of granite stones, at the bottom of
a shallow pool in a small dark cave, just at the top of the Lamiuarian
zone. There occurred also on the same stones young specimens of
Actinia equina (Linn.), Ccrcus pcdunculatus {8. Bellis), and a number of
Bepastrum cyathiform c.

Size. — Expanded, half an inch in diameter. The measurements of
Gosse's examples were, " Diameter of column -|- of an inch, expanded ^
of an inch."

Outline of base irregular. The " epidermis " not dense (as in Gosse's
description), free and easily removed, the animals expanding as freely
after the removal as before. The column was usually much flattened
during the day, but frequently elongated and pillar-like at night.

No acontia were emitted even after severe irritation.

Tentacles 36 in number. Gosse's specimens had 24. Otherwise the
tentacles in my specimens agreed with his account. As he says,
" they were generally carried hanging over the margin with a double
curve, like the branches of a chandelier, but sometimes the inner row
stand erect."

They exhibited much greater activity at night tlian during the day-
time.

Colour. — Although differing slightly from one another, both my
specimens agreed with Gosse's, except that the column had no " mealy

48 ON PHELLIA MUROCINCTA.

appearance and fewer white longitudinal lines," nor were there
" broad white gonidial radii " on the disk, though the white patches at
the bases of the tentacles were in one specimen much more prominent
in the case of the " gonidial tentacles " and those adjacent, than the
rest.

The white star-shaped area in the centre of the disk was very well
marked in one specimen, less so in the other, and the three white bars
on the tentacles varied considerably in intensity.

One of the anemones twice moved from the upper to the under side
of the stone to which it was attached, when this had been turned up
for inspection.

The colouring of these anemones harmonised so exactly with their
surroundings (granite stones covered with live and dead colonies of
Polyzoa and Scrpulm brown and white — the rock also being stained
dark brown in patches) — as to be very hard to make out even when in
the aquarium and close under the eye — especially when fully expanded.

[ 49 ]

Park ^iologtml |.ssodatiait of tlje Initcb |itngbom.

Report of the Council, 1906-7.

The Council and Officers.

Four ordinary and two special meetings of the Council have been
held during the year, at which the average attendance has been twelve.
The Council desire to express their thanks to the Eoyal Society,
in whose rooms at Burlington House the meetings have been held.

Committees of the Council have visited the Laboratories at
Plymouth and Lowestoft and inspected the details of the work which
is being carried on.

In November, Lord Carrington, President of the Board of Agriculture
and Fisheries, visited the Lowestoft Laboratory, and was entertained
by the members of the Council at luncheon.

In December, a deputation to the Chancellor of the Exchequer in
support of an application for funds to carry on the work of the
Association, was organized by the Council. The deputation was
introduced by Mr. Austen Chamberlain, m.p., and was received by
Mr. M'Kenna, m.p., Financial Secretary of the Treasury, in the
unavoidable absence of Mr. Asquith. As a result of the Council's
application the usual grant to tlie Association for the purposes of the
Plymouth Laboratory was renewed, and the Council were asked to
continue to carry out the work of the International Investigations
until July 1908.

The Council have to record with deep regret the death of Professor
Alfred Newton, a Vice-President since the foundation of the Association;
and of Sir Michael Foster, k.c.b., also a Vice-President, and for many
years the representative of the University of Cambridge on the Council.
One of Sir Michael Foster's last public utterances was made at the
deputation to the Chancellor of the Exchequer, when he warmly
advocated the claims of the work of the Association on the financial
support of the Government.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 1. D

50 REPOET OF THE COUNCIL.

The Laboratories.

The Laboratories at Plymouth and at Lowestoft have been maintained
in an efficient state, and both are well equipped for the work which
they undertake.

The Boats.

The Oithona and Hudcy have both worked successfully during the
year, and have given great satisfaction to those who have conducted
the experimental work at sea.

The sailing-boat Anton, Bohrn was again used during the winter
months for collecting work in connection with the Plymouth
Laboratory. It would add to the efficiency of the winter work
if this boat could be replaced by a small motor fishing-boat, which
would be better able to take advantage of fine weather during the
winter months.

The Staff.

Mr. W. P>ygrave, b.a., of Christ's College, Cambridge, has succeeded
Dr. Gough as Assistant Naturalist for Plankton Investigations, on the
appointment of the latter to the post of Assistant in the Pretoria
Museum.

Mr. C. L. Walton has been appointed a temporary Assistant
Naturalist at Lowestoft for work on the steamer Hnxley.

Occupation of Tables.

The following Naturalists have occupied tables at the Plymouth
Laboratory during the year : —

Miss A. Binder, Mainz (Hydrozoa).

E. T. Browne, m.a., London (Medusae).

A. D. Cotton, Kew (Algae).

A. I-I. Craig, London (General Zoology).

A. D. Dareishire, m.a., London (Elasmobranchs).

W. De Morgan, London (Crustacea).

Sir Charles Eliot, k.c.m.g., Sheffield (Nudibrancliiata).

E. S. Goodrich, m.a., f.r.s., Oxford (Anatomy of Fishes).
G. H. Grosvenor, b.a., Oxford (General Zoology).

T. V. Hodgson, Plymouth (Pycnogonida and Crustacea).
Keith Lucas, m.a., Cambridge (Physiology of Crustacea).

F. A. Potts, b.a., Cambridge (Parasitic Crustacea).
Miss M. Robinson, London (Hydrozoa).

R. W. H. Row, London (Crustacea).

C. Shearer, ph.d., Montreal (Polychaeta).

E. Speyer, Eton (Hydrozoa).

W. M. Tattersall, b.sc, Dublin (Plankton).

A. WiLLEY, D.sc, F.R.s. (Polychaeta).

Sixteen students attended a course of study in Marine Biology con-
ducted at the Laboratory during the Easter vacation by Mr. G. H.
Grosvenor.

REPOKT OF THE COUNCIL. 51

The Library.

The thanks of the Association are clue for the following books and
current numbers of periodicals presented to the Library during the
past year : —

Academie Imp. des Sciences de St. Petersbourg. Bulletin.

Memoire.s.

American Museum of Natural History. Memoirs.

Report.

American Philosophical Society. Proceedings.
Australian Museum. Memoirs.

Records.

Report.

Bergens Museum. Aarbog.

Aarsberetning.

An Account of the Crustacea of Norway, etc. ; by G. 0, Sars.

Meeresfauna von Bergen.

Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu. Occasional Papers.

Board of Agriculture and Fisheries. Annual Report of Proceedings under the

Salmon and Fresliwater Fisheries Acts.

Annual Report of Proceedings under Acts relating to Sea Fisheries.

■ ■ Rejjort of Proceedings of 16th Annual Meeting.

Boston Society of Natural History. Proceedings.

Bristol Naturalists Society. Proceedings.

British Association for the Advancement of Science. Report.

Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. Cold Spring Harbor Monographs.

Science Bulletin.

Brown University. Contributions from the Anatomical Laboratory.

Bryn Mawr College. Monographs, Reprint Series.

Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences. Bulletin.

Cairo Zoological Gardens. Report on Mission to Europe, 1905.

Cambridge Natural History. Protozoa, Coelenterates, Echinoderms, etc.

The Carnegie Institution. Publications.

Announcement of Station for Experimental Evolution.

La Cellule.

Ceylon Marine Biological Laboratory. Report.

Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries. Report to Colonial Government.

College of Science, Tokyo. Journal.

College voor de Zeevisscherijen. Verslag van den Staat der Nederlandsche

Zeevisscherijen.
Colombo Museum. Spolia Zeylanica.
The Commissioners of Fisheries, N. S. Wales. Report.

The Fishes of Australia. By D. G. Stead.

Conchclogical Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal of Conchology.
Conseil perm, internat. pour I'Exploration de la Mer. Bulletin des Resultats

acquis pendant les Courses Periodi(p;es.

Bulletin Statistique.

Publications de Circonstance.

Rapports et Proces-Verbaux des Reunions.

Rapport Administratif.

Cuerpo de Ingenieros de Minas del Peru. Boletin.
Segunda Memoria.

52 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Danish Biological Station. Report to the Board of Agriculture.
Kgl. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab. Oversigt.

Skrifter.

Dept. of Agriculture, Cape of Good Hope. Marine Investigations in

S. Africa.
Dept. of Agriculture, etc., Ireland. Reports.
Dept. of Marine and Fisheries, Canada. Annual Report.
Deutsche Zoologische Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen.
Deutscher Fischerei Verein. Zeitschrift fiir Fischerei.
Deutscher Seefischerei Verein. Mitteilungen.
Falmouth Observatory. Meteorological and Magnetic Reports.
La Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes.
Field Columbian Museum. Publications.
Fisheries Society of Japan. Journal.
The Fisherman's Nautical Almanack ; liy O. T. Olsen.
Fishery Board of Scotland. Annual Report.
The Fishing Gazette.
Fiskeri-Beretning, 1905-6.

The Government Biologist, Cape of Good Hope. Report.
Government ]\Iuseum, Madras. Report.
Harbour of Refuge Enquiry, North Coast of Devon and Cornwall. Report 1)y

W. Matthews, c.m.g.
niinois State Laboratoiy of Natural History. Bulletin.
Illustrations of the Zoology of the Royal Indian Marine Survey Shit)

Investigator.
Imperial University of Tokyo. Calendar.
Internationella Hafsforskningens. Resultaten.
R. Irish Academy. Proceedings.
— — Transactions.

Johns Hopkins University Circulars.
Kansas Universitj\ Geological Survey of Kansas.

Science Bulletin.

Kommission zur wissenschaftlichen Untersuchung der Deutschen Meere, etc

Wissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuchungen.
Kommissionen for Havundersogelser, Copenhagen. Meddelelser, series Fiskeri,

Hydrografi, Plankton.
Laboratoire Biologique de St. Petersbourg. Bulletin.
Lancashire Sea Fisheries Laboratory. Report.
Lancashire and Western Sea Fisheries. Suj^erintendent's Report.

Quarterly Report on the Scientific Work.

Liverpool Biological Society. Proceedings and Transactions.

Manchester Microscopical Society. Annual Report and Transactions.

Marine Biological Association of the West of Scotland. Fauna and Flora of the

Clyde Area.
Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods HoU. Biological Bulletin.
Mededeelingen over Visscherij.
Meteorological Office. Monthly Pilot Charts, North Atlantic and Mediterranean.

Monthly Pilot Charts, Indian Ocean and Red Sea.

R. Microscopical Society. Journal.

Musee du Congo. Annales.

Musee d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris. Bulletin.

Nouvelles Archives.

Musee Oceanographique de Monaco. Bulletin.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 53

Museo Nacional, Buenos Aires. Aiiales.

Museo Nacional Montevideo. Anales.

Museo Zoologico della R. Universita di Napoli. Annnario.

Museo de La Plata. Anales.

Revista.

Museum fiir Meereskundc, Berlin. Fiilirer.

Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard College. Bulletin.

Memoirs.

Report.

The Museums Journal.

Natal Government Museum. First Report.

National Sea Fisheries Protection Association. Annual Report.

Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Basel. Verhandlungen.

Natui'historischen IVIuseum, Hamburg. Mitteilungen.

Neapel. Mitteilungen aus der Zoologischen Station.

New York Academy of Sciences. Annals.

New York Zoological Society. Bulletin.

Report.

New Zealand Institute. Transactions and Proceedings.

Norges Fiskeristyrelse. Aarsberetning vedkommende Norges Fiskerier.

North Sea Fishery Investigations. Report of British Delegates.

Northern Area. Second Report.

North iimberland Sea Fisheries Committee. Report on Scientific Investigations.

La Nuova Notarisia.

Oberlin College. The Wilson Bulletin.

Physiographiske Forening. Christiania. Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne.

Plymouth Institution. Annual Report and Transactions.

Plymouth Museum and Art Gallery. Annual Report.

Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science. (Presented by Prof. E. Ray

Lankester, f.r.s.)
Rijksinstituut voor het Onderzoek der Zee. Helder. Jaarboek.

Uitkomsten van Meteorologische Waarnemingen op Zee.

Vangstatistieken van Hollandsche Stoomtrawlers.

Verhandelingen.

Royal Society of Canada. Transactions.
Royal Society of Edinburgh. Proceedings.

Transactions.

Royal Society of London. Philosophical Transactions,

Proceedings.

Reports of Commission for Investigation of Mediterranean Fever. Part V.

Reports to the Evolution Committee.

Year-Book.

Royal Society of Victoria. Proceedings.

Scottish Microscopical Society. Proceedings.

Selskabet for de Norske Fiskeriers Fremme. Norsk Fiskeritidende.

Smithsonian Institution. Annual Report.

Sociedad Geografica de Lima. Boletin.

Sociedad Scientifica de Sao Paulo. Revista.

Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica. Acta.

Meddelanden.

Societe Beige de G^ologie, etc. Bulletin.

Societe Centrale d'Aquiculture et de Peche. Bulletin.

Societe d'Oceanographie du Golfe de Gascogne. Rapports.

54 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Societe Suisse de Peche et Pisciculture. Bulletin.

Societe Imp. Eusse de Pisciculture et de Peche. Vyestnik R'ibopom'shlennosti.

Societe Zoologique de France. Bulletin.

Memoirs.

South African Museum. Annals.

Report.

Station Aquicole de Boulogne-sur-Mer. Annales.
Kgl. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademieu.

Arkiv for Botanik.

Arkiv for Zoologie.

Handlingar.

Tuft's College. Studies.

United States Commission of Fish and Fisheries. Bulletin.
United States National Herbarium. Contributions.
United States National Museum. Bulletin.

Proceedings.

University of California. Publications. Zoology, Physiology, Botany.

R. Universita di Napoli. Annuario del Museo Zoologico.

University of Pennsylvania. Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory.

University Bulletins.

Kgl. Vetenskaps Societeten, Upsala. Nova Acta.
Visscherhavn en Vischhal te Ijmuiden. Jaarverslag.
Zoological Society of Japan. Annotationes Zoologicse Japonenses.
Zoological Society of London. List of the Fellows.

Proceedings.

Zoological Record.

Zoologischen Museum, Berlin. Bericht.

Mitteilungen.

To the authors of the Memoirs mentioned below the thanks of the
Association are due for separate copies of their works presented to the
Library : —

Ash worth, J. H., and Hoyle, W. E. The species of Ctenopteryx, a genus of

Dibranchiate Cephalopoda.
Bidder, G. P. Principal Results of the Exj^eriments with Bottom-Trailers.
Bruce, W. S. The Area of unknown Antarctic Regions compared with Australia ;

Unknown Arctic Regions, and the British Isles.

Report on the Work of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition.

Castellani, A., and Willey, A. Observations on Haematozoa in Ceylon.
Chilton, C. Note on a New Zealand Amphijiod belonging to the genus Seba.
Chubb, G. C. The Growth of the Oocyte in Antedon. A Morphological Study

in the Cell-Metabolism.
Cotton, A. D. On some Endophytic Algae.
Darbishire, A. D. On the Difference between Physiological and Statistical

Laws of Heredity.
Davenport, C. B. Inheritance in Poultry.

Evolution without Mutation.

Animal Morphology in its relation to other Sciences.

The Origin of Black Sheep in the Flock.

Species and Varieties : Their Origin by Mutation.

Report of the Station for Experimental Evolution at Cold Spring Harbor.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 55

Davenport, C. B., and Hubbard, M. E. Studies in the Evolution of Peden.

IV. — Eay Variability in Peden varius.
Driesch, H. Analytische und Kritische Ergiinzungen zur Lelire von der
Autonomie des Lebens.

Die Physiologic der Tierisclien Form.

Studien zur Entwicklungspliysiologie der Bilateralitat,

Bemerkungen zu Przibrams Kristall-Analogien.

Eegenerierende Eegenerate.

Eliot, C. The Genus Boriopsilla, Bergh.

Nudibranchiata from the Cape Verde Islands.

On the Nudibranchs of Southern India and Ceylon, with special Reference

to the Drawings by Kelaart and the Collections belonging to Alder and
Hancock preserved in the Hancock Museum at Newcastle-on-Tyne.

Mollusca Nudibranchiata. (National Antarctic Expedition.)

Gurney, Robt. On some Freshwater Entomostraca in the Collection of the

Indian Museum, Calcutta.
Hadley, P. B. Observations on some Influences of Light upon larval and

early adolescent stages of the American Lobster,
Preliminary Report regarding the Rate of Growth of the American

Lobster.
Herdman, W. A. Report to the Government of Ceylon on the Pearl Oyster

Fisheries of the Gulf of Manaar.
Hickson, S. J. Precious Corals.

Hodgson, T.V. On Collecting in Antarctic Seas. (National Antarctic Expedition.)
Holt, E. W. L., and Tattersall, W. M. Preliminary Notice of the Schizopoda

collected by H.M.S. Discovery in the Antarctic Region.
Janet, C. Anatomie de la tete de Lasiiis niger.
— — Remjjlacement des muscles vibrateurs du vol par des colonnes d'adipo-

cytes, chez les Fourmis, apres le vol nuptial.
Kiaer, H. Om dyrelivet i Balsfjorden og denne fjords undliib til havet.
Laidlaw, F. F. On two new genera of Deep-Sea Nemertines.
Man, J. G. de. Sur quelques Especes nouvelles ou peu connues de Nematodes

libres vivant sur les cotes de la Zelande.
Observations sur quelques Especes de Nematodes terrestres libres de

I'lle de Walcheren.
Contributions a la counaissance de Nematodes libres de la Seine et des

environs de Paris.
H.S.H. The Prince of Monaco. Meteorological Researches in the High

Atmosphere.
Mossman, R. C. Some Meteorological Results of tlie Scottish National

Antarctic Expedition.
Nansen, Fridtjof. Northern Waters.
Nathansohn, A. Ueber die Bedeutung Vertikalen Wasserbewegungen fiir die

Produktion des Planktons im Meere.
Pace^ R. M. On the Early Stages in the Development of Flustrella hispida,

Fab., and on the Existence of a "Yolk Nucleus" in the Egg of this form.
Pearl, Raymond. Variation and Differentiation in Geratophijllum.
Philippi, Erich. Ein neuer Deszendenztheoretisch Interessanter Fall von

Vivijmritat bei einem Teleostier.
Kurzer Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Teleostiergenera Glaridichthys, Garman,

und C)iederodou, Garman (Familie Cyprinodontidac, s. Poeciliidae).
Ein neuer Fall von Arrhenoidie.

56 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Potts, F. A. The Modification of the Sexual Characters of the Hermit Crab

caused by the Parasite Peltogaster (Castration parasitaire of Giard).
Punnett, K. C. Sex-determination in Hydatina, with some Remarks on

Parthenogenesis.
Rathbun, Mary J. A new Crab from Dominica, West Indies.

Description of three new Mangrove Crabs from Costa Rica.

A new Scyllarides from Brazil.

Ridewood, W. G. A new species of Ccjyhalodiscus.

Shipley, A. E., and Hornell, J. Report on the Cestode and Nematode Parasites

from the Marine Fishes of Ceylon.
Sinel, J. The Fishes of the Channel Islands.
Strodtmann, S. Laichen und Wandern der Ostseefische.
Tattersall, W. M. Report on the Leptostraca, Schizopoda, and Stomatopoda

collected by Prof. Herdman.

Preliminary Diagnoses of six new Mysidae from the West Coast of Ireland.

Thomson, G. M. The Portobello Marine Fish Hatchery and Biological Station.
Tower, W. L. An Investigation of Evolution in Chrysomelid Beetles of the

genus Leptinotarsa.
Vernon, H. M. The Conditions of Tissue Respiration.
The Rate of Tissue Disintegration and its Relation to the Chemical

Constitution of Protoplasm.
Walker, A. 0. Preliminary Descriptions of new species of Amphipoda from

the Discovery Antarctic Expedition, 1902-4.
Willey, A. Report on the Polychaeta collected by Prof. Herdman at Ceylon

in 1902.
Williams, J. Lloyd. Studies in tlie Dictyotaceae. III. — Periodicity of the

Sexual Cells in Didyota dichotoma.
Woodruff, L. L. An experimental study on the Life History of Hypotrichous

Infusoria,

General Work at the Plymouth Laboratory.

Faunistic work during the year has been chiefly directed to
extending the observations into the deeper water of the English Channel.
A close study has been made of the grounds to the south of the Eddystone
as far as the fifty-fathom line. The results of this survey are now
being worked up, and it is hoped to publish them in an early number
of the Journal.

In August last the Oithona was sent to the North Sea in order to carry
out fishery investigations in the shallow inshore waters of the East Coast,
for which she is specially suited, whilst the Huxley, after the completion
of the regular August hydrographic cruise, made a short voyage to the
deep water on the edge of the Bay of Biscay, south of Parson's Bank.
In addition to hydrographic observations, several hauls of the Agassiz
trawl were made at depths of from ninety to four hundred fathoms, and
some very interesting material was collected. This is now being studied
by different specialists, and their reports will add some valuable
information to our knowledge of these little-worked grounds.

In connection with the more local faunistic work in the immediate

EEPOET OF THE COUNCIL. 57

neighbourhood of Plymouth, the Director has continued to pay special
attention to the Polychseta, whilst Mr. Crawshay is commencing a
study of the Sponges.

Mr. G. E. Bullen has continued from time to time the observations
on the food of the mackerel and other migratory fishes. Since the
present spring mackerel season has been characterized by the immense
abundance of fish, whilst last year they were very scanty, a comparison
of the physical and biological conditions of the two periods is of great
interest.

Mr. T. V. Hodgson has occupied a table in the Laboratory during the
whole year, and has been engaged in working out the material which
he collected in the Antarctic.

The International Fishery Investigations.

The following is a summary of the work done, and of the conclusions
arrived at by the scientific staff working under the direction of the
Council.

Section I.— NORTH SEA WORK.
A. WOKK OF THE S.S. "HUXLEY."

Tkawling Investigations. — From June 1906 to the end of May
1907 the Hu-deij made 15 fishing voyages, during which 198 hauls of
the large commercial trawls were made in connection with the scientific
survey in progress. The boat was again laid up at Grimsby during
December and January.

From the beginning of the investigations 90 voyages have been com-
pleted by the Huxley, and the result of 1,078 hauls with the large
trawls systematically recorded. On many occasions fine-meshed nets
have been attached outside the cod-end, and other parts of the com-
mercial trawl, in order to throw light on the proportions of small fish
which escape through the meshes.

In August 1906 a temporary exchange of steamers was effected
between the Lowestoft and Plymouth Laboratories, in order to facilitate
an investigation of the Thames Estuary, which was carried out very
satisfactorily by the s.s. Oithona. Two members of the Lowestoft staff
had charge of the work, and were kindly assisted by Dr. James Murie,
of Leigh, Essex, who was present on board the vessel throughout the
voyage. The otter trawl was shot on 44 occasions.

Fish Measured. — More than 100,000 measurements of fish, repre-
sentative of the total catch on almost every occasion, were made and
recorded at sea during the past year.

58 KEPOKT OF THE COUNCIL.

Nearly 410,000 fishes have been measured under these conditions
since the beginning of the investigations, as shown in detail in the
following table : —

Plaice. Haddock. Others. Totals.
1902-6 Voyages I-LXXV 90,463 26,705 181,660 ... 298,828

1906-7 Voyages LXXVI-XC 17,151 20,535 71,633 ... 109,319

Totals 107,614 47,240 253,293 ... 408,147

In order to supplement the Huxley's measurements of plaice during
the spawning season, and to compare her results with those of com-
mercial trawlers during this season, a voyage on a Lowestoft smack was
made by a member of the staff in February last, and the entire catch
of plaice (2,631 fish) was measured and examined. During January
and February two members of the staff also measured and examined
19 samples of plaice, amounting to 8,208 fish, from smacks in Lowes-
toft market.

Marking Experiments. — During the past year 2,053 marked plaice
have been set free, as compared with 2,041* during the previous twelve
months (1905-6). Of the latter fish 522 have been reported as recap-
tured by May 31st, 1907, i.e. 25-6 per cent of the total liberated, as
compared with 23-9 per cent reported last year for the 5,115 marked
plaice previously liberated.

The correspondence of these percentages renders it highly probable
that under similar experimental conditions the percentage of recaptures
of marked plaice affords a reliable factor for estimating the intensity
of fishing in a particular area under modern conditions, and for
measuring differences in this respect in different regions.

The annual percentage of marked fish returned has been found to
vary with the size of the fish, increasing regularly from less than
10 per cent for plaice marked at less than 20 cm. (8 inches) in length
to a maximum which lies between 30 per cent and 45 per cent in the
case of plaice marked at 30-39 cm. (12-15 inches) in length. Above
this size the percentage again decreases, a result which appears from
other data to be partly indicative of natural mortality.

In this connection it is not without interest that during the spawning
season of the plaice the males have been caught in relatively greater
numbers than the females, not only among the marked fish, but also
in the ordinary course of the trawling experiments in spawning areas.

The transplantation experiments to the Dogger Bank, which were
again carried out in the spring of 1906, have shown nearly the same
rapid growth of plaice which was so marked a result of the experiments

*This total was given in last year's report as 2,042, owing to accidental inclusion of a
marked dab.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

ANNUAL INCREMENT.

15 cm.
10 cm.
13 cm.

6 cm.

7 cm. (nearly).
6 cm. (nearly).

in 1904. On the other hand, experiments on the coastal banks and on
the Flamborough Off Grounds have shown that in the western part of
the North Sea the area of rapid growth is apparently limited to the
Dogger Bank, and does not extend to the grounds south or west of the
Dogger Bank.

The following table summarizes the chief results obtained from these
experiments as to the average annual increase in length of small plaice,
the great majority of which ranged between 19 and 23 cm. in length at
the time of liberation.

EXPERIMENT.

Dogger Bank, 1904 .

„ 1905 .

„ 1906 .
Leman Banks, 1905
Flamborough Off' Ground, 1906
Well Bank, 1906

Data yielded by the trawling experiments and fishermen's records,
as well as by the investigations made concerning the food of fishes,
render it highly probable that the above variations in the growth of
plaice on the Dogger Bank are mainly due to competition for the same
articles of food between this fish and the haddock. Young haddock
were much more abundant in 1905, when the growth of plaice was
relatively small, than in either of the years before or after.

The transplantation experiments to the Dogger Bank have been
again repeated during the spring of the present year, and have been
extended to certain grounds on the Great and Little Fisher Banks.

The experiments devised last year to test whether still smaller plaice
of a length of 2-4 inches would thrive if transplanted to the Dogger
Bank have been unsuccessful.

Experiments with marked fish have also been carried out upon cer-
tain other species besides the plaice, as shown in the following table: —

NO. RECAUGHT.

23
7
7
6

40
1

FISH.

Sole

N'O. MARKED

. 463

Brill

Turbot .

Lemon 8ole

Flounder

Dab

Cod

252

Haddock

Whiting .
Pouting .
Latchet .

Eed Gurnard

Thornback Kay .

108

60 liEPOKT OF THE COUNCIL.

It will be seen that in spite of many trials, the sole has not proved a
very suitable subject for experiments of this kind, as the number
of recaptures has been excessively small compared with the labour
involved. On the other hand, the experiments with other flat-fish,
especially brill, turbot, and lemon sole, have been very satisfactory,
and merely require to be carried out on a large scale in order to yield
results of interest comparable with those of the plaice.

The experiments with cod and thornback, though not so numerous
as is desirable, have yielded results of great value, both as regards the
migrations and rate of growth of these fishes ; and the two recaptures
of marked latchet have also shown features of considerable interest.

Marked Coconuts and Drift Bottles. — With the object of obtain-
ing additional data on the relative intensity of trawling in different
parts of the North Sea, 859 perforated coconuts, to each of which
a numbered brass label was attached, were thrown overboard from
the Huxley in September last. They were put out at equal intervals of
one mile along lines which traversed the chief fishing grounds of the
Lowestoft smacks as well as the Dogger Bank and the grounds east
and west of it. Many of these nuts have been returned to the
Lowestoft Laboratory by fishermen and the Association's agents with
particulars of capture, but a complete year must elapse before it would
be profitable to compare the records.

Of the bottles designed by Mr. Bidder for the study of bottom
currents, 170 were put out along three lines in the southern part of
the North Sea in November and December. Mr. Bidder has communi-
cated to the International Council an account of some results of
former experiments carried out on the Huxley with these bottles.
In these experiments the bottles were recovered by commercial
trawlers over all the area at the rate of 54 per cent per annum, while
in particular districts the rate of recovery was even higher.

B. LABORATOKY WOEK.

Age of Plaice. — A detailed report on the age of plaice based on the
examination of nearly 8,000 otoliths collected up to the end of 1905,
has been completed and is now in the press.

The report, besides demonstrating the reliability of the methods
of age-determination employed, contains definite information in

regard to

1. The distribution of the various age-groups in the southern

part of the North Sea.

2. The relation of size to age on different fishing grounds.

3. The rate of growth of young plaice on the English inshore

grounds.

KEPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 61

4. The average rate of growth of plaice in the southern part

of the North Sea at different ages, and the difference
between the sexes in this respect.

5. The relative numerical proportions of the two sexes at

successive ages.

6. The age and size at first maturity.

Food of Fishes. The stomachs of over 10,000 fishes belonging to
34 species have now been examined, and a second detailed report on
the food of fishes is in the press.

Among the more important observations it contains may be mentioned
those on

1. The predominant extent to which Crustacea serve as food

for almost all useful species of fish during their earliest
stages, and the degree to which the diflerent species of
fish diverge in their selection of food as they grow older.

2. The cessation of feeding by flat-fish, especially plaice,

during the winter months, and the relation of this
phenomenon to spawning and other conditions.
4. The competition between plaice, haddock, and dabs for
mollusean food, especially on the Dogger Bank, and the
great destruction of mollusean fry by these species,
particularly by the haddock.

Bottom Fauna and Bottom Deposits. — The analysis of this
material has made continual progress, and the results are in process of
collation.

Herring Investigations. — Several additional samples, each of 100
fish, including one sample from the Cornish coast, have been examined
in conformity with the scheme described last year. All the samples
show a high degree of uniformity as regards the number of vertebrae.

C. FISHERMEN'S EECOEDS.

This branch of the work has been continued on the same lines and
on the same scale as hitherto.

The records of Lowestoft trawling smacks so far as concerns the
catch of plaice and soles have been worked up for each of the past four
years so as to show the average catch per haul for each month in
succession, and for each of nine grounds into which the total area has
been subdivided.

The results show clearly the seasonal fluctuations in the catch
on different grounds, and harmonize remarkably well with the results
of the Huxley's marking and other experiments in the same region.

62 EEPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Section II.— HYDROGRAPHIC AND PLANKTON WORK
IN THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

The Hydrographic programme of previous years has been carried
out on the quarterly cruises in the English Channel, and the results up
to the end of September 1906 have been published in the Bulletin,
The work has been rendered unusually difficult by bad weather, and
only one set of current measurements has been made. Severe gales
made it impossible to complete the November cruise, and the three
stations to the east of the Isle of Wight were omitted. The area is
to a certain extent covered by the lines of samples taken by steamers
sailing from Southampton and Newhaven.

Fortnightly samples and observations of Surface Temperature have
been received from the captains of steamers crossing the English
Channel, and from five lightships. Outside the English Channel,
regular samples have also been received from the captains of liners,
covering the North Atlantic south of 56° N. latitude.

The salinity of the English Channel has been slowly decreasing
during the past year, the decrease beginning in the western half
which is influenced by the southerly flow of fresher water from the
Irish Sea. This flow was well marked during February, but no
division into layers of different salinity was found at any of the
stations. In the eastern half of the Channel the change did not com-
mence till three months later, water of 3 5 "4 7oo S. being still
found on the Newhaven-Caen line during the latter half of April.

The decrease in salinity referred to in a previous report has
continued.

In May 1906 there was a very decided fall over the whole of the
English Channel. The salinity at Station 3, oft' Ushant, increased
fairly regularly with the depth, being 35'21 7oo ^^ the surface and
35"34 7oo ^^ 110 metres. This difterence is apparently due to the
coastal water of Brittany, and is not connected with the sharp
division into layers that is sometimes found on the more westerly
stations. At all other stations during May the water was homo-
geneous from top to bottom.

During the two following months the decrease of salinity still con-
tinued, and no value as high as 35 7oo ^^^^ found on the Newhaven-
Caen line during the latter part of July.

The August cruise showed a strong southerly flow from the Irish
Sea across the western entrance to the Channel and a decided division
into layers of different salinity on all the western stations except the
one oft" Ushant. The diflerences between the surface and bottom
salinities were greatest on the more northerly positions, especially off"

EEPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 63

the Bishop and in the Bristol Channel. The Plankton on the western
stations was unusually rich in oceanic species, a fact which leads to
the conclusion that this southerly current is accompanied by and
probably due to a simultaneous movement of water from the Bay
of Biscay in a northerly direction.

By November 1906 the surface salinity of the English Channel had
risen generally, the 3 5 '4 isohaline in the western area roughly coincid-
ing with the August isohaline of 35 "o, while to the east of the Isle of
Wight-Cherbourg line the area which during the August cruise had a
salinity of 35"0 to 35"1 was filled with water of from 35'1 to 35*2. The
southerly flow of low salinity water from the Irish Channel to the
west of the Scilly Islands was even more sharply defined on its eastern
edge than in August. It extended at least as far south as Parson's Bank,
where the surface salinity was 35"33 compared with 35-37 in August.
The western edge lies outside the area of the quarterly cruises, and the
only observations available are from liners which only cross its northern
extremity. Its approximate dimensions on the surface south of the
latitude of Land's End may be put at 100 miles in a north and south
direction, and 25 to 30 miles across. It reached the bottom at all
stations except 4 and 5, wdiere its thickness was about 30 metres, the
water below that depth being of higher salinity. In view of the steep
salinity gradient to which this current frequently gives rise on the sur-
face, and its possible importance to the Plankton investigations, it would
be advisable to devote a special cruise of three or four days to its
examination, particularly on its western edge.

The samples from the February cruise have been analysed, but the
results have not yet been plotted. The most striking point is the
continued fall of the salinity on Station 4 (Parson's Bank), accompanied
by a rise at Station 5. The water was of the same composition at all
depths.

Two stations were worked south-west of the Start at the end of
March, when mackerel were being caught by trawlers on the bottom.
The results were much the same as in February, and present no point
of interest.

In May five new stations in the Bristol Channel were added to the
programme. It had originally been intended to work this area on the
same day on which the steamers of the Irish Fishery Department and
the Lancashire Sea Fisheries Committee were to carry out similar
investigations in the adjacent waters, but this was unfortunately pre-
vented by a gale which interrupted operations for some days.

During the year samples of Plankton were taken as usual on the
four quarterly cruises, and also at frequent regular intervals at
Plymouth, and at several light-vessels off the English and Irish coasts.

64 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Samples were also taken each week midway between Plymouth and
the Channel Islands, from the s.s. Dcvonia.

The records of the species found on each of the quarterly cruises are
published in the Bulletin of the International Council.

As in the preceding years, it was found that the percentage of
Oceanic species in the Plankton falls regularly as one passes up the
Channel from west to east, rising again a little to the east of the
Cherbourg-Southampton line.

In August 1906 the Pteropod Limacina lesueuri (D'Orbigny) was
found in vast numbers at the surface in the north-west portion of the
English Channel, and to the north of the Scilly Islands.

This Pteropod, which Professor Paul Pelseneer was good enough to
identify, is an inhabitant of tropical waters, and has not previously
been recorded north of the Bay of Biscay, so that its appearance in
the Plankton would seem to indicate an inflow of water of southerly
origin.

It is possible that the shoal entered the Channel from the south-west,
following the direction of the strong current which at times flows past
Ushant, in a northerly direction.

As no Plankton samples were taken in the south-west portion of the
Channel between May (when Limacina was entirely absent from the
Plankton) and August 1906 it is not possible to obtain any confirmation
of this supposition.

At the end of August 1906 an extra set of Plankton samples was
taken about 60 miles south-west of Parson's Bank.

These samples contained a number of forms which had not been
found on any of the quarterly cruises.

Published Memoirs.

The following papers, either wholly or in part the outcome of work
done at the Laboratory, have been published elsewhere than in the
Journal of the Association : —

Bidder, G. P. — Princi;pal Eesults of the Experivients with Bottom-Trailers. Rapp.
et Proc. Verb. Cons. Internat p. I'explor. de la mer, vol 6., 1906, pp. xxxv.-xlii.

Chubb, G. C. — The Growth of the Oocyte in Antedon : A Morphological Study in the
Cell- Metabolism. Phil. Trans. Roy. Sec, Ser. B, vol. 198, 1906, pp. 447-505.

Cotton, A. D.—On some Endophytic Alga;. Journ. Linn. Soc. Botany, vol.
37, 1906, pp. 288-297.

Davenport, C. B. — Evolution without Mutation. Journ. Experini. Zool., vol. 2.
1905, pp. 137-143.

Hewett, C. G.—Ligia. Liverpool Marine Biology Committee. Memoir xiv.,
London, 1907.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 65

Pace, R. M. — On the Early Stages in the Development of Flustrella hispida
(Fabricius), and on the Existence of a " Yolk Nucleus " in the Egg of this Form. Quart.
Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 50, 1906, pp. 435-478.

Robinson, Margaret. — On the Development of Nebaha. Quart. Journ. Micr.
Sci., vol. 50, 1906, pp. 383-433.

Shearer, Cresswell. — On the Structure of the Nephridia of Dinophilus. Quart.
Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 50, 1906, pp. 517-545.

Woodland, W. — A Preliminary Consideration as to the possihle Factors concerned in
the Production of the various Forms of S2ncules. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 51,
1907, pp. 55-79.

Woodland, W. — Studies in Spicule Formation. V. — The Scleroblastic Developme7it
of the Spicules in Ophiuroideaand Echinoidea,and in the Genera Antedon and Synapta.
VI. — The Scleroblastic Development of the Spicules in some Mollusca, and in one Genius
of Colo7iial Ascidians. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 51, 1907, pp. 31-53.

Woodland, W. — On the Anatomy of Centrophorus calceus (crepidalbus
Socage and Capello) Gilnther. Proceed. Zool. Soc, London, 1906, pp. 865-886.

Donations and Receipts.

The receipts for the year for the ordinary work of the Association
include the grants from His Majesty's Treasury (£1000) and the
Worshipful Company of Fishmongers (£400), Special Donations (£025),
Annual Subscriptions (£113), Kent of Tables in the Laboratory (£70),
Sale of Specimens (£:)84), Admission to the Tank Eoom (£136).

Vice-Presidents, Officers, and Council.

The following is the list of gentlemen proposed by the Council for
election for the year 1907-8: —

President.
Prof. E. Ray Lankester, LL.D., F.R.S.

Vice-Presidents

The Duke of Abercorn, K.G., C.B.
The Duke of Bedford, K.G.
The Earl of St. Germans.
The Earl of Ddcie, F.R.S.
Lord Avebury, F.R.S.
Lord Tweedmouth, P.C

The Right Hon. Joseph Chamber-
lain, M.P.

The Right Hon. Aosten Chamber-
lain, M.P.

Sir Edward Birkbeck, Bart.

A. C. L. GtJNTHER, Esq., F.R.S.

T J TTT ' -CI T) o i Sir John Murray, F.R.S.

Lord Walsingham, F.R.S. t^ , t t-. t. o

rri, r)- !,<- TT A T -n nc t. I ReV. Cauon iNORMAN, D.C.L., r.R.S.

The Right Hon. A. J. Bai-four, M.P., ' '

p j{ S_ j Edwin Waterhouse, Esq.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 1. E

KEPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Members of Council.

G. L. Alward, Esq.

Prof. T. W. Bridge, Sc.D., F.R.S.

F. Darwin, Esq., F.R.S.

Sir Charles Eliot, K.C.M.G.

G. Herbert Fowler, Esq., Ph.D.
J. Stanley Gardiner, Esq., M.A.
W. G.\rstang, Esq., D.Sc.

S. F. Harmer, Esq., Sc.D., F.R.S.

E. W. L. Holt, Esq.

J. J. Lister, Esq., F.R.S.

H. R. Mill, Esq., D.Sc.

P. Chalmers Mitchell, Esq., F.R.S.

Prof. D'Arcy W. Thompson, C.B.

R. N. Wolfenden, Esq., M.D.

Gliairnian of Council.
A. E. Shipley, Esq., F.R.S.

Hon. Treasurer.
J. A. Travers, Esq.

Hon. Secretary.
E. J. Allen, Esq., D.Sc, The Laboratory, Citadel Hill, Plymouth.

The following Governors are also members of the Council

G. P. Bidder, Esq., M.A.

Sir Richard B. Martin, Bart. (Prime

Warden of the Fishmongers'

Company).
E. L. Beckwith, Esq. (Fishmongers'

Company).

G. C. Bourne, Esq., D.Sc. (Oxford

University).
A. E. Shipley, Esq., F.R.S. (Cambridge

University).
Prof. W. A. Herdman, D.Sc, F.R.S.

(British Association).

STATEMENT OF
RECEIPTS AND EXPENDITURE.

[ 68 ]
^r. Statement of Receipts and Payments for

& s. d. £ s. d.
To Current Income : —

H.M. Treasury 1,000

Fishmongers' Company 400

Annual Subscriptions 113 7

Rentof Tables 70 12 1,583 19

„ Extraordinary Receipts : —

G. P. Bidder, Special Donation towards expenses of

International Fishery Investigation (see contra) . 500

Anonymous, Special Donation 100

J, J. Lister do. 25 625

,, Balance : —

Loan from Bank 400

Less : —

Cash at Bank, Current Account 69 1

Cash in hand 20 11 4 89 12 4 310 7 8

Note. — This balance is apportioned as follows :—

General Account, overdrawn 468 19 10

Zess Repairs and Renewals Account in credit 158 12 2

£310 7 8

This Liability does not inclnrio the amount of £100
referred to on the accounts for the year ending 31st
May, 1905.

£2,519 6 8

Examined and found correct,

(Signed) N. E. Waterhouse, A.C.A. L. W. Byrne.

R. NORRIS WOLFENDEN.
26tfc June, 1907.

[ 60 ]
the Year ending Z\st May, 1907. Cr.

& s. d. £ s. d.

By Balance from last year, being amount due to Bankers ... 171 5 10

Ztfss Cash in hand 20 4 151 110

,, Current Expenditure : —

Salaries and Wage.s —

Director

Naturalist (International Fishery Investigations) ...

Director's Assistant

Wages

Travelling Expenses

Library

Journal

Less Sales of Journal

Buildings and Public Tank Room —

Gas, Water, and Coal

Stocking Tanks, Feeding, etc

Maintenance and Renewals

Rent of Land, Rates, Taxes, and Insurance

234 9 11
Zess Admissions to Tank Room 136 7 11 98 2

Laboratory, Boats, and Sundry Expenses —

Stationery, Office Expenses, Printing, etc 168 1 5

Glass, Chemicals, and Apparatus £182 16 4

Zess Sales 74 10 9 108 5 7

Purchase of Specimens 51 15 2

Maintenance and Renewal of Boats,

Nets, Gear, etc £277 6 7

Zess Sales 28 15 6 248 11 1

Coal and Water for Steamer 138 2 5,

714 15 8
Less Sales of Specimens, etc. (including £50 from
International Investigations Commission for use of
S.S. Oithona) 434 12 3 280 3 5

Bank Interest 17 3

„ Extraordinary Expenditure :—

Contribution towards the expenses of the International
Fishery Investigations 500

£2,519 6 8

200

250

150

658 5

1,258 5
89 17

82 4

75 5

16 10

58 15

95 10

19 3

102 10

17 5

PUBLICATIONS OF THE ASSOCIATION.

Journal of the Marine Biological Association,

Old Series.
No. 1, August, 1887 (only a few copies left, reserved for Libraries).
No. 2, August, 1888. Price Is.

New Series (Royal 8vo).

Volume I., 1889-90, 472 pp., 28 plates.

Volume II., 1891-2, 410 pp., 14 plates.

Volume III., 1893-4, xxxviii. and 458 pp., 5 plates and 25 woodcuts.

Volume IV., 1895-7, iv. and 425 pp.

Volume v., 1897-9, 550 pp. and 16 plates.

Volume VI., 1899-1903, 676 pp., 3 charts and 7 plates.

Volume VII., 1904-6, 486 pp., 1 chart and 12 plates.

Separate numbers (generally 4 to one volume), in wrappers, 3s. 6c^. ; to Members, 2s. 8d.

London Agents; Messrs. Dulau & Co., 37 Soho Square, W.

Cloth 4to, 150 pp., 18 plates (12 coloured).

A TREATISE 01^ THE COMMON SOLE.

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A., F.E.S.E.,
Late Fellow of University College, Oxford ; Naturalist to the Association.

Price to Members, 20s. ; to Non-Members, 25s.

Medium 8vo, 3Q8 pages. 159 Illustrations a7id two Maps. Price Is. 6d. net.
(Macmillan & Co., London.)

THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE MARKETABLE
MARINE FISHES OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS.

Prepared expressly for the use of those interested in the Sea-fishing Industries^

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A.,

FORMERLY FELLOW OF UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, OXFORD ;
NATURALIST ON THE STAFF OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION.

Smitl) Preface bp
E. RAY LANKESTER, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.,

PROFESSOR OF COMPARATIVE ANATOMY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD.

[ 71 ]

Notes on a Fishing Voyage to the Barents Sea
in August, 1907.

By
George T. Atkinson,

Assistant at the Lowestoft Laboratory.

IF-ifh Plate IV and three figures in the Text.

CONTENTS.

PAGE

Introductory

The Plaice

Methods of obtaining and measuring

samples

Composition of the catch

Maturity Examination

Average Size at First Maturity

Age .

Migrations

Comparison with North Sea .

Summary

Other Species

Chiefly with the object of obtaining material from which comparisons
of an intact plaice population with that at present existing in the
North Sea might be made, I undertook, in August, 1907, a voyage in a
commercial steam trawler to the new fishing grounds in the " White
Sea."*

As this area was only exploited commercially by trawlers for the
first time in 1905, an exceptional opportunity was afforded for the
study of an accumulated stock of plaice unaffected by the influence of
man.

To Mr. F. 0. Hellyer, who kindly arranged the voyage for me in the
s.s. Roman, of the Imperial Steam Fishing Company, Hull, and to
Captain W. Leighton, through whose co-operation I was enabled to
measure and examine over four thousand plaice, my heartiest thanks

* Generally so mis-named. Very little trawling has taken place within the White Sea
proper, nor has it proved profitable.

XEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. May, 1908. F

72 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

are due. I am also indebted to my friend, Mr. A. E. Jones, who
accompanied me and recorded the various measurements. During the
collation of my material and the preparation of this memoir, I have
received much valuable assistance and advice from my colleagues at
Lowestoft, particularly from Drs. Wallace, Garstang, and Allen.

Owing to the keen struggle to make and keep the " White Sea "
fishing a commercial success, it was naturally stipulated that the
actual position of the fishing grounds should not be revealed. This
from the immediate scientific point of view is immaterial, nor was it
the object of the investigation.

Depths, however, are of importance in the distribution of plaice,
and their insertion entails no breach of trust, as the latest Admiralty
charts afford no clue to the position of the fishing bank visited.
Doubtless in the course of time the fishing in the area will be
generally understood, but by that time the pioneer fishermen of Hull
will have reaped the rich reward of their discoveries, and the know-
ledge gained will continue to stand them in good stead.

I propose here to deal with the notes made on the various fishes met
with during the voyage, but before doing so will recall briefly the
general conditions which are found throughout the year in the Barents
Sea as far as they are at present known.*

The sea is at its coldest in June. From this time an inflow of
Atlantic water commences, and continues till November, bestowing a
considerable increase of temperature on the whole area. After
November the influence of the Arctic water gradually predominates.
It has been pointed out by Knipowitsch that the fisheries of the
Barents Sea are dependent on this annual flood of warm Atlantic
water.

The coming of the most important fishes with this flood, and their
subsequent departure when Arctic conditions again prevail, have been
studied by the Eussian investigators by means of fishing experiments.
By these means it has been found that quantities of fish can be
obtained in the neighbourhood of the different branches of the North
Cape Current at the times when there is no fishery worthy of mention
on the usual fishing grounds along the Murman coast. To cite one
example!: from May 15-l7th, 1898, quantities of haddock, catfish,
halibut, black halibut, cod, Norway haddocks, tusk, and other fish were

* L. BiiEiTFUSs. Ozeanographische ,Studicn iiher das Barents Meet: retcrmanns
Mitteihmgcn, II, 1904.

N. Knipowitsch. Expedition fur wissensclmftlich-praktische Untersiichiingen an der
Murman- Kiiste, I. Cf. Rapports et Proces-verbaux. Appendix A, Vol. iii, 1905.

t N, Knipowitsch. Expedition fiir ivissenschaftlich-p>raktische UntersucMbngcn an der
Murman- K teste, I, p. 594.

BARENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1007. 73

caught by means of long-lines in Lat. 71° 14' N., Long. 32° 46' E., a
position in the southernmost branch of the constant North Cape
Current.

At this time the fishing on the Murnian coast was of no importance,
and the conviction of the fishermen was that no fish would be found
out in the open sea.

Knipowitsch records that in March and April the Murman coast is
very deficient in fish, though quantities can be met with as a rule more
to the west (north of Finmark, etc.). Then the eastward migration
commences, the chief shoals still being found in the neighbourhood of
the well-marked warm stream. As summer approaches, they draw
near the coast, and the population of the open sea decreases.

Late in summer the fish still press on to the east, towards the
neighbourhood of Cape Kanin. Late in autumn the return migration
from the coast commences, though many fish can remain till mid-
winter* off the Murman coast.

Marked differences have been observed in the fauna as the bottom
temperature rises above the freezing point ; it is very rare to find the
valuable food-fishes present in water with a temperature below
freezing point. Bearing this in mind, it is probable that the use of a
satisfactory deep sea thermometer would greatly assist the efforts of
our own fishermen in these regions. As they first work in this sea in
June and July,-f when the influence of the Atlantic flood is com-
mencing to extend, a thermometer might prove as useful a guide as
the lead. Though it cannot be claimed that such an instrument would
show where fish are to be caught, futile trawling in the unproductive,
ice-cold Arctic water, which undoubtedly has taken place, might be
avoided.

By means of a simple reversing thermometer of his own design, to
be worked on the ordinary leadline, kindly supplied me by Mr. D. J.
Matthews, of the Plymouth Laboratory, I was able to determine on
several occasions that the bottom temperature on the bank where the
plaice were chiefly taken was 34° F., or two degrees above freezing
point. The surface temperature at the the same times varied from
45°-48° F. In similar depths (34-36 fathoms) in the North Sea the
difference in top and bottom temperatures would only be slight.

An English trawler in June, working in suitable depths some
distance to the eastward of the fishing ground now under consider-
ation, found an almost entire absence of plaice, and the icy coldness of

* The winter in respect of the land, not sea. — G. T. A.

t The tendency has been to make an earlier start each year. In 1907 the first trawler
left Hull on May 1st.

74 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

the water was remarked on ; the region had then eventually to be
abandoned, and the fishing voyage concluded at Iceland. In my
notes on the plaice the influence of temperature on the movements of
this species in other regions will be further indicated.

The Plaice {PlenronecUs platcssa).

This was by far the most abundant species met with, and is of
course the special object of the trawlers' exploitation of the region.

Throughout the greater part of this voyage on the lloman, samples
of the catch were measured and examined.

Methods of Obtaining and Measueing Samples.

The method of obtaining and working through the samples was as
follows : As the contents of the trawl lay upon the deck, the crew
proceeded to gut the plaice and throw them one by one into the
" pound " on the side of the deck opposite to which the trawl had been
hauled, where they were eventually washed before being put below.

Thus, by getting one or more of the men to put their gutted fish
as they picked them unselected from the deck into baskets, and by
taking as many baskets as it was possible to dispose of without
interfering with the regular routine of the ship, good samples could be
obtained.

The gutting process consists of making an incision into the body
cavity, through which the viscera, with the exception of the reproduc-
tive organs, are extracted. Thus it was comparatively easy to make an
examination of the maturity of each individual fish.

The international method of measurement was adopted (e.g. 39-39-9
car., recorded as 39 cm.), and the operation was carried out on a
portable measuring board, on the open deck in fine weather and under
the " whaleback," or roofed-in bow deck, when it was rough.

On six occasions the whole catch of plaice was measured and
examined. The close agreement of the average sizes (p. 76) then
obtained, with those of smaller samples at other stations in the
vicinity, confirms the confidence in the value of the smaller samples.

As each measurement was made and recorded the sex of the fish
was noted, together with the maturity. From these records (Table I)
it will be seen that the lengths of the smallest mature fishes were 24
and 35 cm. for male and female respectively, and the corresponding
largest immature 41 and 45 cm. The average size of the mature
males is 40-9 cm., and of the mature females 48-3 cm.

The lengths of 113 fish (65 <? , 48 ? ) have been excluded from all
consideration, as in each of these casQS the tail had been more or less

BARENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907.

damaged, sometimes half, and even the whole, of it being missing, and
the record was only kept to show the great frequency with which this
damaged condition occurred. T am strongly inclined to agree v/ith the
fishermen, wlio noticed this feature in the previous year, and to
attribute it to the depredations of the Greenland shark {Laemargus
microcephalus), which without a doubt includes the plaice in its diet
(see p. 97). If this is the case, the fact that nearly 2h per cent of the
fish in my samples were in this condition is significant, and shows that

Table I. — Showing

file achml

length

the s.s. "

Roma

n " in

the Barents

fo mahii

itij :—

MALES.

Maturity.

T onrrf Ti

cm. Immature

Mature. ?

Total.

24 .

. _

25 .

26 .

. 1

27 .

28 .

. -

29 .

30 .

31 .

32 .

33 .

34 .

35 .

36 .

37 .

129

135

38 .

176

178

39 .

202

203

40 .

235

236

294

296

42 .

254

255

43 .

195

44 .

159

45 .

116

46 .

47 .

48 .

49 .

50 .

51 .

52 .

53 .

54 .

55 .

56 .

57 .

frequencies of plaice measured on hoard
Sea, August, 1 907 ; classified according

Totals 23 2078 45 2146

Length.
cm.

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
60
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
73

Immature. Mature.
1

1
3
2

1
5
9

8
12
15
18
16
18
11
19

109

168

186

178

175

140

132

104

1
2

5
14
17
19

Total.
1

5
10

8
13
17
21
21
33
32
50

104

113

117

126

189

178

189

183

179

141

134

105

Totals 184 1941 240 2365

76 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

in this region at least the plaice lives in the presence of a serious
natviral enemy (or enemies, for though the food of the seals in the
Barents Sea has not yet been sufficiently studied, the possibility of
their preying upon plaice is by no means precluded).

It may perhaps seem possible that, owing to the novelty of this
phenomenon, the fishermen would be inclined specially to select these
damaged fish for my benefit, thus exaggerating their occurrence. I am
confident that tliis is not the case, as the men were not even aware
that these fish were being in any way regarded.

The Composition of the Catch.

The length frequencies of 2146 females and 2365 males, representing
over three tons of fish, are shown in Table I above, each sex being sub-
divided, according to maturity. The measurements, arranged in 2 cm.
groups, are further displayed in diagrams (pages 78 and 79).

Care was taken to secure a,s fair a sample as possible of each catch
dealt with. That this object was attained appears evident from the
slight variations in the average sizes at the twenty-nine stations. For
the males, of which the averages vary between the narrow limits of
40"4 cm. and 41"9 cm., a total average size of 40*7 cm. is obtained ; in
the case of the females, as might be expected, a greater range in the
average sizes occurs : 45"3 cm.-48'9 cm , with one exception, 50'5 cm.
(in the smallest sample taken). The total average size of 2365 female
fish is 467 cm.

The population consisted almost entirely of large mature fish, the
total range of size being for males 24 cm. to 57 cm , and for females
24 cm. to 73 cm.

In Table II below the measurements for each sex are summarized in
5 cm. groups, the percentage of males in each being also presented.

Table II. — Showing the measurements of Barents Sea ^j/fwce sumviarized in
5 cm. groiqis, the 2^ercentage of mcdes in each group heimj 2>'''esented
JjeJow : —

Cm
S
?

Totals
of Males .

<30

30-34
79

132

35-39
634
157

791

40-44

1141

527

45-49
265
918

50-54

526

538

55-50

148

151

60 +

Total.
2146
2365

1668

1183

4511

The striking feature of this table is the great proportion of males in
each group up to 40-44 cm., and the subsequent rapid decrease.

The male plaice is generally recognised as being a constitutionally
smaller fish than the female, and would not be expected to attain to

BAKENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907. 77

the same length, but at the same time the rapid decrease after 44 cm.,
and virtual disappearance after 49 cm., is surprising.

In this recently spawned shoal the usual earlier maturity of the
sex* would account for tlie great numbers of males in tlie smaller
groups; for instance, in the 35-39 cm. group 96 per cent of the males
were mature, in contrast to only 11 per cent of the females. To only
a small extent would this account for the high percentage of males
being maintained in the next group, as only 8 per cent of the females
now remain immature. We must look for some other explanation,
which seems to me to lie in the probable infinitesimal annual growth
which the males now undergo. The fishes of this sex are now some
10 or more centimetres above the size I have estimated for first
maturity, after which stage in life' considerable retardation of growth
takes place, f It is probable, therefore, that in these slow growing
plaice (see p. 84) of the Barents Sea many year groups are comprised
in this arbitrary 40-44 cm. group.

It is probable, too, that the rapid diminution in numbers and final
disappearance of males in the succeeding groups is accentuated by an
earlier mortality of the sex here, as in the North Sea.| Looking at
the curves of length frequencies it will be seen that the curve for the
males does fall more rapidly from its mode or maximum height (at
41 cm.) than does that for the females from its mode (at 47 cm.).

The variation in the proportion of the sexes at individual stations
and groups of stations, as possibly giving a clue to migrations, is dealt
with later (p. 87).

The curves, of length frequencies (Figs. 1 and 2) in the case of both
sexes, display remarkable regularity, representing an absolutely intact
stock of mature plaice, such as is to be found in no other region of
the world at present fished. A series of annual observations, tracing
the inevitable reduction of this stock by the influence of man, and a
contemporary study of this fishery's statistics in their modern im-
proved form, will throw interesting and valuable light on the
changing aspects of a plaice fishery. Icelandic waters cannot now
afford similar opportunities, for in the comparatively few years this
region has been exploited for plaice a marked reduction of the
original stock is observed by the fishermen to have occurred.

* FuLTOX. Twentieth Annual Rexiort Fishery Board for Scotland, Part III, pp. 354-
60 (1902).

Wallace. Preliminarij Investigations on the Age and Growth-Rate of Plaice. Nortli
Sea Investigation Committee, Report 2. Soutliern Area, 1902-3. Cd. 2670 (1905),
pp. 218, etc.

t Wallace. Report on the Age and Growth-RcUe of Plaice in the Southeryi North Sea.
North Sea Investigation Committee. Second Report (Southern Area), 1904-5, Part I,
p. 33. + Wallace. Loc. cit., p. 34.

MALES.

360

•9 f
1^ >

3 70

■

360

^T(7

3'fO

330

320

3/0

300

2 90

280

710

260

2 50

2*0

2M)

Z20

2IQ

200

(

190

IHO

1 70

160

I'fO

M<7

t?0

110

lOO

flO

.^n

t-H

; — J

"-^

^—i

>-H

25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 -f/ 43 45 47 49 SI S3 SS 57

IMMATURE FISH
MATURE FiSh .

Fig. 1, — Showing the length frequencies in 2 cm. groups of 2,101 male
plaice. Barents Sea, August, 1907.

FEMALES.

43 4S 47 45 i-

jrj

■^

(

[

—

r-^

._^i~^

►— <

1 1

^,—1

)

5 2

7 2

9 3

/ S

J J

5 3

7 JS

3 4

J 4

7 -?

9 J

/ .

'3 S

s s

7 S

1 6

5 t

J 5

7 6

9 7

/ 7

3 a

^ IMMATURE FISH.
^ MATURE nSH

VERTICAL LINE (Mj AvaRACB SIZE
AT FIRST MATURITY.

Fir;. 2.— Sliowing the length frequencies in 2 cm. groups of 2.125 female
plaice. " Barents Sea, August, 1907.

80 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

Maturity Examination.

Owing to tlie method of gutting and the recent completion of the
spawning season, examination of maturity was greatly facilitated.

Before each fish was measured, the sex was determined by an
inspection of the reproductive organs simultaneously with an observa-
tion of the condition, whether immature, mature (i.e. spent), or
doubtful. The stage " spent " could generally be readily distinguished
in the females, as it was possible to press out greater or less quantities
of dead eggs from the ovary. Tlie characteristic flaccid appearance of
this organ afforded an additional criterion.

Quite distinct were the taut, translucent ovaries of the immature
specimens.

Milt still flowed freely from the majority of the males, and definitely
immature fish were of very rare occurrence throughout the voyage,
as is also the case in the spavming shoals of the North Sea. These
were to be distinguished by the testis appearing a mere thin band, at
this time contrasting with the condition of the recently spawned
individuals.

However, in order that errors of observation might be avoided, a
special record was kept of every fish of which the condition was in
any way open to doubt. Into this class were placed those fish of
either sex which on further trial failed to show the presence of
sexual products, and yet seemed to differ from those which were
definitely immature.

Facilities were not available, nor is the deck of a trawler an ideal
spot for making the minutest examinations, but it is evident that the
main results are not seriously affected, as the size at which the
maximum number of measurements of doubtful fish occurs, in the case
of the females, will be seen to lie in close proximity to the determined
average size at first maturity. In the measurements of the males, the
maximum lies where the size at first maturity would appear to be
forecasted.

The condition of eight males* occurring in the samples was
remarkable from the fact that, although the fish were large, the gonads
were in an undeveloped condition, and I am not aware that a similar
feature has been recorded before. The majority of tlie lengths, viz. 40,
41, 47, 48, 51, 51, 53 and 57 cm., obviously render the probability of
immaturity very remote, and yet to judge by all appearances, these
fish had certainly not been in a spawning condition in this year. In

* Two more occurred in the earliest samples, but I rejected them, thinking that the
apparent absence of reproductive organs was due to accidental removal in gutting.

BARENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907. 81

one fish, 57 era., the testis, about 2 mm, wide, was such as is found
in tlie immature condition, but tlie measurement is the largest in the
records for the sex. As regards tlie other seven fishes, no definite testis
could be traced.

Whether this phenomenon was due to tlie lifelong sterility of the
individuals, or to the fact that sterility had supervened on account of
the great age to which they must have survived, is an interesting
biological question which must for the present remain open.

Having made an extensive examination of spawning plaice in the
southern parts of the North Sea in the spawning season (January-
February) this year (1907), I received the distinct impression that the
quantity of spermatic fluid and unextruded dead ova was far greater in
the Barents Sea fish than in those of the southern region. It would be
interesting if investigation should prove this to be actually the case.

No females actually spawning or about to spawn were found, and it
will be seen from the summary of measurements that the number of
immature fish of both sexes was very small, particularly in the case of
the males.

It is interesting to find that the greatest number of immature
occurred in the haul across the shoalest part of the bank (26 fms.)
at the end of the first day's fishing. The catch then consisted of
eighteen baskets of plaice, of which four were measured. These con-
tained 183 fish (73 males, 110 females). Of the males, 7, or 9| per
cent, were definitely immature; and 11, or 15 per cent, recorded as
doubtful. Of the females, 24, or 22 per cent, were immature ; and 5,
or 4|- per cent, doubtful. Thus, of the fish in this sample, 18 males, or
25 per cent, and 29 females, or 26 per cent were possibly immature.
Taking all the other stations, and classing the immature and doubtful
fish together in the same way as " possibly immature," I find only
about 3 per cent of the males, and 16 per cent of the females wo^ld
fall into that category.

Asa result of the international investigations in progress, we know
that the same phenomenon, viz. an excess in the proportions of
immature females compared with that of immature males, also obtains
on the central grounds of the North Sea at a similar period.

The length of the smallest mature male was 24 cm., and of the
smallest mature female, 35 cm. The largest immature female was
45 cm. The largest immature male was recorded as 41 cm., but this
record is rendered open to doubt by the curious condition of the eight
males recorded above. The average size of the mature males is
40"9 cm., and of the mature females, 48'3 cm.

82 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

The Average Size at First Maturity.

The average size at first maturity, that is to say, the size at which
equal numbers of mature and immature fish occur, I find to be about
40 cm. (see diagram, page 79), in the case of the females.

In regard to the males, owing to the virtual absence of immature
individuals, this size cannot be determined. The indications, however,
from the material available, point to this size being not far remote
from 31 cm.

These sizes correspond closely with those Dr. Wallace kindly in-
forms me he has determined from 895 females and 561 males for the
central grounds of the North Sea (Dogger, Flamborough Off' Grounds,
Clay Deep, etc.), viz., 40 cm. for females and 31 cm. for males. The
correspondence is remarkable, and would hardly seem a mere
coincidence. It is evident, however, that the plaice of the Barents
Sea mature at a much later age (p. 85).

Age.

The age investigation presents many difficulties. It is evident that
the rate of growth is extremely slow, and this not only renders the
distinction of year groups impossible by a study of the length
frequencies (Petersen method), but it is also reflected in the otoliths,
on which the annual rings are so narrow and crowded togetlier that
only in the case of the smallest fishes found has it been possible to
estimate the age with a degree of certainty.

I made a small collection of otoliths on board the Roman, and
although this material is quite insufficient for obtaining an estimate
of the rate of growth, it can be seen that this is exceedingly slow, even
during the years before maturity is attained.

A noticeable feature of these otoliths is the contrast of the com-
parative width of the white and dark rings, the latter being exceedingly
narrow.

The physical conditions which apparently regulate the deposition
of these respective rings have been studied in the case of plaice from
the Baltic and North Seas.

Various investigators* have found that the white ring first shows
itself in spring, when the temperature of the water commences to rise
and the fish to feed. In late summer and into the autumn (the period

* Reibisch. Ueber die Eizahl bei Plcuronectes platessa und die AUersbestimmung
dieser Form aus den Otolilhen. Wiss, Meeres. Abt., Kiel, N. F. Bd. 4, 1899.

Maieu. Beitrdge zxir AUersbestimmung der Fische ; Arb. d. wissen. Komm. f.d. Intern.
Meeres. No. 5. Bd. viii., 1907.

Wallace. Loc. cit.

BARENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907. 83

of warmest water and most rapid growth in the North Sea) the dark
ring is formed. In winter the growth of the otolith, as of the fish,
ceases.

Immermann* has shown that these rings on the otoliths of the
plaice are purely optical effects, explicable by the regular changes in
the life conditions of the fish.

Avoiding technicalities, the reason for the occurrence of apparent
white and dark rings is as follows : The whole otolith is composed of
layers of chalk substance deposited regularly as the growth of the
fish is in progress. Kestrained growth, as when cold water conditions
prevail, has the effect of crowding together these layers. As the
temperature rises, and the growth rate of the fish increases, so must
that of the otolith, and thus is effected a wider expansion of the layers
of chalk substance. The optical effect of this is that the crowded
rings, not permitting the passage of light, appear white, whilst the
expanded translucent layers appear dark by contrast.

The reason for the narrowness of the dark ring, and the comparative
great width of the white ring in the otolith of the Barents Sea plaice,
is thus afforded. For the greater part of their annual growth- period
these fish are subjected to very low temperature (at the time of my
visit the bottom temperature was only two degrees Fahrenheit above
the freezing point), so that for only a short period would rapid growth
appear to take place, and it is not unlikely that this period coincides
with the culmination of the Atlantic flood.

As has been pointed out before (p. 72), this expansion of Atlantic
water is in progress in the month of August ; in other words, biological
spring has commenced. Correlated with this physical phenomenon
the otoliths of the plaice slioio the commencement of a white ring at the
edge. In the North Sea by this time, according to investigations
(Wallace, Maier, etc.), the dark ring has commenced. Thus in the
two regions of the ocean, many hundreds of miles apart, it can be
seen on the otoliths of the plaice that biological spring in the one
region coincides with midsummer in the other, as we know to be the
case from hydrographic observations referred to above.

For suggestions and help in the investigation of the small collec-
tion of otoliths, I am greatly indebted to Dr. Wallace, who also kindly
undertook an independent investigation of a number. Our two re-
sults were in close agreement, the chief discrepancies being in the
case of otoliths on which certain of the rings appeared to split in a
doubtful manner.

* Beitrdge zur Alter shedimm.ung der Fische II. Die innere SlruMur dcr Sclwllen
Otolithcn. Arb. d. wisseii. Koni. f.d. Intern. Meeres. No. 6. Bd. vi., 1907.

NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

In Table III are shown the ages of certain individual fishes, reckon-
ing that, as in the North Sea, one white ring is deposited annually,
and that each fish had recently completed the number of years
specified. In the case of the larger (older) fishes, the outer rings are
so crowded together that accurate counting would seem impossible.

I have, however, included a few examples of these, estimating the
age at not less than a certain number of years, as shown by the number
of distinct white rings.

If fishes of either sex are not less than ten years old when 40 cm.
in length, to what age must a male of 57 cm. or a female 73 cm. in

Table III. — Showing the age of certain individiial ^ytaice from the Barents
Sea, August, 1907, estimated according to the number of white rings shown
on the otoliths : —

FEMALES.

Number of White Rings.

MALES.

MBER OF White

Rings.

Length
I'm.

hnmature. Mature.

Matui'ity
Doubtful

24 .

26 .

27 .

! 5

28 .

29 .

30 .

10'

33
34
35
37
39

42
43

44
45

46
50

not ^11

not L\\

not Z.15

not L\l

not ^10

not .^13

not Z.10

not L\\

not ^11

not L\6

not ^12

not L 12

not L 162

Probably 10.

Immature.
6

6
10 ,

9
10

not L 9

not L 12

not L\2

not Z.12

not L 20

not L 21

obab

iyi7.

not L 18

BAKENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907. 85

length have survived, considering that each year the growth becomes
less and less !

Although the material in Table III cannot be regarded as satis-
factory, it shows plainly how slow the rate of growth must be, and
would seem indicative of the direction future plaice investigations
should take in this inhospitable region.

In connection with the majority of these specimens (Table III), the
possibility presents itself that they may be actually amongst the best
grown fishes of their respective year groups. That plaice in the North
Sea are larger for their age the further they are caught from the
coastal grounds has been very clearly shown by Wallace in a recent
paper {op. cit), so it seems possible, if not probable, that a similar state
of things obtains in the off-shore grounds of the Barents Sea.

The youngest plaice of either sex amongst those examined had
apparently already completed five years, but this would seem quite
exceptional. In addition to the slow rate of growth, the evident late
age at which maturity is attained is striking.

Amongst these few fish examined for age, no male less than eight
years (32 cm.), and no female less than twelve years old (41 cm.) was
found to be mature, though younger mature specimens must have
occasionally been present in the catch (see Table I). In the North Sea
few males are found to survive to eight years.

If the plaice in the Barents Sea have really to live through some
eight or nine years before they attain the size at which they reproduce
their species, the question occurs to us, " How long will the present
stock, accumulated through many years, hold out in sufficient abund-
ance to make this long, expensive voyage of three to four thousand
miles down to the Arctic Ocean profitable to our trawlers ? "

Migrations.

Speaking in a general way, the migrations of mature fish seem to be
determined by the search for food, or to be in connection with the re-
production of the species. Currents, temperature, and such local factors
as a general exodus from shoal to deeper water in stormy weather, are
amongst other causes of fish movements, but all have more or less
direct bearing on one of the main stimuli.

Although conclusions as to migrations in the Barents Sea would be
impossible from the material collected on the voyage of the Roman,
nevertheless every fact in my possession points to a general movement
of this mature plaice population from deeper and here probably
warmer water, after spawning has taken place, on to the banks to the
eastward, apparently in search of food.

86 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

That rich supplies of molluscs were available, was evident from the
frequent occurrence of living specimens in the trawl ; the masses of
crushed shells in the stomachs of the plaice and catfish ; and, perhaps
most important of all, the fine, plump condition of the plaice when first
caught. This is a striking contrast to the condition met with a few
years ago at Iceland, and reported of the earliest trawling times on
the Dogger Bank.

How sensitive some fishes are to external conditions, when about to
spawn, has been pointed out by Schmidt.* The same investigator has
found more recently f that plaice marked on the north and east coasts
of Iceland, migrate from their cold surroundings towards the warm
Atlantic water, when preparing for reproduction.

As further contributing to our knowledge on this problem, I find
that among the Lowestoft fishermen, whose fishing in January and
February is almost entirely confined to the spawning plaice of the
southermost North Sea, it is common knowledge that in a severe,
cold winter, plaice always set in more abundantly, and remain longer,
in the deep channels of this region, than is the case when the winter
is mild. Hydrographic observations have shown that the water here is
of Channel origin, and has a higher temperature at this period tlian
any other part of the southern North Sea.

From the evidence I shall present below, it will be seen that the
spawning plaice of the Barents Sea probably seek to the west the more
congenial surroundings which their condition demands.

The Prussian hydrographers| have pointed out how the ramifications
of the North Cape current follow well-defined channels along the sea
bottom towards the east, and we may perhaps justifiably surmise that
the influence extends to the deep water west of the bank on which the
present investigations were carried out.

At any rate, it is the experience of our fishermen that the plaice
are found further to the west, and in denser shoals, when they first
visit these grounds in June and July, than later in the season.
I should estimate, from the condition of the fish taken by the
Boman in August, that this year the spawning season terminated
in July.

An analysis of the Roman's hauls of the first two days, relative to
their respective positions and depths, reveals features which bear
comparison with North Sea grounds at a similar period, viz., just after

* Jons Schmidt. " Contributions to the Life History of tlie Eel," (Angiiilla vulgaris.
Tart.), Rapports et Prods- Vcrbaux, V, p. 234, ct scq., 1906.

t Marking Experiments on Plaice and Cod in Icelandic IVaters. Meddel. fra Ivomm.
f. Havnnders., Serie Fiskeri. IJind ii. No. 6, 1907.

X Rapports et Proces-Verbaiix, Vol. iii, 1905. Appendix A, pp. 3 and 4.

BARENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907. 87

spawning has taken place. This is in regard to the proportions of
the sexes.

Recent investigations* have shown that a high percentage of males
is characteristic of the catches in areas where plaice are spawning, or
have recently spawned. To gain additional knowledge on this point,
I made, in the first days of February this year (1907), a voyage in the
Lowestoft smack Boschud, and measured all the plaice caught, 2631
fish, of these no fewer than 85 per cent being males. The spawning
season had then about half expired.

Table IV. — Sliowing mialyds of the total catch of plaice made by the Lowes-
toft sailing -trawler ^'Rosebud" January ^\st to February 5th, 1907.
Eastern Deep Water : —

Cm.

<20

20-24

25-20

30-3i

35-39

40-44

45-49 50-54

>55

Total

202

648

555

505

257

2226

148

108

405

Totals

203

686

703

613

305

2631

Percentage of Males

99-5

Spent Females

103

Immature Females .

115

212

The early hauls of the Roman, referred to just above, were, roughly
speaking, in a series — starting from the deep water to the west of the
bank, extending over the same, and dropping again into deep water to
the east of it.

Three hauls were made up the western slope at depths of 55, 40,
and 38 fathoms. The complete catch of two of these hauls, and a
greater part of the third, was measured, and the condition of the re-
productive organs examined, the numbers showing that males greatly
predominated here.

Out of the 294 fish comprising these samples, 179, or 61 per cent,
were males ; the first haul, indeed, in 55 fathoms, resulted in a catch
of 42 fish, of which 33, or 79 per cent, were males.

Crossing the bank with water as shallow as 26 fathoms, measure-
ments of two hauls were made, these samples amounting to 288 fish.
The males now only numbered 123, or 43 per cent.

In three hauls down the eastern slope, the water deepening to
49 fathoms and shoaling again to 40, and eventually to 37 fathoms,
an eighth, nearly half, and, on the third occasion, the whole of the
catch was measured,

A complete reversal in the pjvjjortion of the sexes, as compared ivith the
west side, had now taken place. Out of 319 fish dealt with, only 115,
or 36 per cent, were males.

After the last haul of this batch, the vessel steamed westward on to

* rM2}ports et Proces-Verhaux. Vol. vii, 1907. Comni. B., p. 20.
NEW SEEIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. G

88 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

the body of the bank, and fish were eventually found in satisfactory
quantities. The remaining 21 hauls, from which fish were measured,
give 48 per cent of males.

It is evident that this unmistakeable change in the proportions of
the sexes from west to east is not without significance, and when we
consider that a great preponderance of males is characteristic of
spawning areas in the North Sea during, and immediately after the
spawning season, it would seem that we have a clue to where these
plaice had spawned in the Barents Sea.

Evidence of a probable abundance of plaice some little time
previously in the deep water to the west of the bank, was accidentally
afforded in the following manner: When first approaching the in-
tended fishing grounds, a trawler's fishing buoy was found anchored
in 55 fathoms. No vessel was in sight, and it had been in the water
some little time, evidently having been lost sight of in one of the
frequent fogs. A trial haul of nearly two hours gave the result
previously mentioned, viz., 42 plaice, 33 of which were males.

Now the experienced skippers who make this long voyage to the
Arctic Ocean would only be likely to employ a buoy for one of two
purposes — to mark either a rough ground, or a shoal of fish. In the
latter case plaice would be the species, for in the present limited
scope of the fishery this is the only species specially sought after in
this region.

No rough ground was encountered in the haul taken, so the prob-
ability is that when the buoy was put down quantities of plaice were
to be had in the vicinity. It was not until nearly two days later,
after searching to the eastward and then returning to the body of the
bank, that the Roman fell in with sufficient quantities of plaice to
warrant the use of a fishing buoy.*

The rapidity with which an accumulation of plaice can under
certain conditions disappear from a given spot, is a phenomenon well
known amongst fishermen.

Thus we have evidence, indirect and admittedly not conclusive, yet
from various aspects corroborative of a distinct eastward movement of
these plaice subsequent to spawning. Conversely it would appear as
if the westward migration, from this bank at least, into deeper water
for the purpose of spawning, might be assumed.

* Since the above was written, information has been obtained on this point, which
corroborates in eacli respect tlie surmises mentioned in the text. From distinguishing
marks on the buoy, and through the courtesy of Captain Leighton, it lias been possible to
discover the Hull skipper who lost it. He states that it was aclually on a bank with
52 fathoms, and was lost in a fog of two days' duration towards the end of June. At
that time he was catching sixty baskets of plaice for a two hours' haul.

G. T. A., 27.12 07.

BARENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907. 89

Whither the eggs drift, where the larval forms reach the coastal
shallows necessary for the development of young plaice, the life
history of tliese, and where they spend the long years before they
reach the outer grounds as mature fish, all afford highly interesting
subjects for future investigation.

The pioneering trawlers have found that the plaice are smaller near
Cape Kanin, as would be expected, but neither here nor in the
entrance to the White Sea, has any great quantity of small fish been
found. A study of the Admiralty chart reveals the fact that west of
Long. 45° E., the water deepens from the coast comparatively rapidly ;
indeed, no extensive tracts of shallow water overlying a fine sandy
oottom such as characterize the small plaice nurseries in the North
Sea, are indicated until Long. 53° E. is passed.

Thereafter to the eastward a long, broad area of fine sandy ground
extends across the wide mouth of the Pechora Elver. It is perhaps
significant that the glass balls which Norwegian fishermen employ in
connection with their fishing gear, have been found at the mouth of
this river.* This reminds us of the drift of derelict fish trunks from
our fishing fleets in the North Sea, which with other flotsam, find their
way on to the beaches of Holland, Germany, and Denmark, as do also
the early developing stages of the plaice.

That this class of evidence is not without significance is shown by
the results of later scientific experiments with drift bottles,f by which
the trend of the surface currents in the North Sea has been deter-
mined.

How THE Investigation of the Plaice Fisheey in the Barents
Sea may throw Light upon the Condition of that Fishery
in the North Sea.

It is now desirable to see if from this mass of material from a
virgin fishing ground, we can gain any light upon the condition of the
plaice fishery in any comparable area of the North Sea.

It must at the outset be recognized that many conditions of life
must differ vastly, and yet we have aspects from which this fishing
bank in the Barents Sea and the central grounds of the North Sea are
comparable as regards the plaice populations at present found on each.

We have the sea bottom in both cases deepening from the coast,
whence we may take it the small plaice originate. Far out to sea the

* Naxsen. Oceanogra^ithy of the North Polar Basin, Part II, p. 263.

t Fulton. "The Currents of the North Sea and their Relation to Fisheries";
Fifteenth Annual Report Fishery Board for Scotland, Part III, 1897.

Garstang. " Report on the Surface Drift of the English Channel and Neighbouring
Seas during 1897," Journ. M. B. A., Vol. v.

NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

bottom rises, forming a bank or banks, rich in the food of plaice : in
one case the Dogger Bank, in the other, this uncharted bank discovered
by the fishermen from Hull, and on which my investigations were
made.

Further seawards in both areas, depths are eventually attained
which cease to interest the plaice. In this regard, the Barents Sea is
more comparable with the North Sea than is Iceland, where the plaice
are restricted by the configuration of the sea bottom to a com-
paratively narrow coastal zone, throughout their lives. Biologically,

f—*

<r^

.-^

(

K-^

'-— ,

*-^

>—*

r*'

'--^

►--H

h-.

"-~1

S 2

1 2

J 2

S 2

7 Z

9 3

/ J

3 J

S 3

7 3

/ -f

3 4

5 +

7 t

9 S

/ 5

3 5

f s

7 5

9 61 S3 65 67

^ ^ IMMATURE FISH.

_a « MHTURE FISH.

VERTICAL LINE (m) MERAGE SIZE
AT FIRST MATURITY.

Fig. 3. — Showing the lengtli frequencies of 895 female plaice from the central grounds of

the North Sea (Dogger Bank, Clay Deep, etc.).
The ordinates at 19, 21, 23, etc., represent the frequencies in 2 cm. size groups 18-19,

20-21, 22-23 cm. etc.

for both regions, we have this important standpoint from which a com-
parison can be obtained.

The average size of the females at first maturity ums found to he 40 cm.
{ajjproximately), the same as in the central part of the North Sea.*

Moreover, it is remarkable that out of 2365 and 895 fish from the
Barents Sea and the central part of the North Sea respectively, the
size of the largest fishes definitely determined as immature should be
45 cm. (Cf. Wallace, Fig. 3).

In order to compare the populations from this standpoint, I have
constructed curves of the actual length frequencies of mature and
immature female fishes in the two regions (Figs. 2 and 3, pp. 79, 90).

For the rich material from which that for the central North Sea is

* Fulton. 20th, 22nd, and 24th Ann. Report. Fishery Board for Scotland,

Holt. Journ. M. B. A., Vol. ii.

Kyle. 18Lh Ann. Report. Fishery IJoard for Scotland.

Wallace, op. cit.

BARENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907. 91

constructed, I am indebted to Dr. Wallace, who has made the deter-
mination of the maturity of 895 female fish on the fishing grounds of
the Dogger Bank, Clay Deep, and off Flamborough Head.

In this curve for the central North Sea we find that the immature
females, commencing at 18-19 cm., attain their greatest frequency at
36-3Y cm., and ultimately disappear after 45 cm. The smallest mature
female occurs at 25 cm., with the actual greatest frequency at
40-41 cm. This curve, however, representing the mature fish, 'rises
again at 46-47 cm., so that it seems that its real mode lies between
these groups. The largest fish in this collection was 66 cm. long.

In the curve for the Barents Sea (Fig. 2), the smallest immature
female was at 24 cm., and then, as in the central part of the North
Sea, the greatest frequency occurs at 36-37 cm., and the largest
immature specimen at 45 cm. The smallest mature' female was
found to be 35 cm. in length, and the greatest frequency occurs at
46-47 cm. (thus coinciding with the second mode in the curve for the
mature North Sea females. Fig. 3). The largest specimen had a length
of 73 cm.

The size at which the numbers of immature and mature are equal
(the average size at first maturity), represented by the line M, is for
each curve in the vicinity of 40 cm.

Thus in the Barents Sea with its intact stock of plaice, the mode of
the length frequency curve (Fig. 2), viz., 46-47 cm,, is some 7 cm. higher
than the average size at first maturity, viz., 39-40 cm. On the other
hand, in the diagram (Fig. 3) representing the stock in the central
parts of the North Sea, we should naturally not expect to find any such
great accumulation of mature fish ; but it is somewhat alarming to find
that the mode here (36-37 cm.) fails by 3 cm. to reach the average
size at first maturity (39-40 cm.). That is to say, some factor is at
work which keeps down the plaice population to such an extent that
the greater 'proportion are not, at the j^i^esent time, once permitted to re-
produee their kind. If we compare this with Dr. Petersen's previous
discussion of these points in his paper, " What is over-fishing ? "
{Journ. M. B.A., Vol. vi., 1903, pp. 587-94), it would appear as though
the chief theoretical effects of over-fishing in the North Sea, suggested
in that paper, were now being substantiated.*

It may be that this enormous contrast is partly due to the fact that

* Kyle {Journ. M. B. A., A^ol. vi, p. 496) suggests that oue effect of fishing a plaice
population is to reduce the average size at first maturity. The Barents Sea will afford the
opportunity of testing this ; meanwhile, if we were to accept the suggestion that sucli a
reduction has taken place to the extent of, say, 5 cm. in home waters, the deterioration
of the stock would be still more evident, and even a gi'eater proportion of North Sea plaice
than my curves tend to show would be prevented from attaining maturity.

92 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

the fish dealt with in the Barents Sea were possibly selected naturally
by the function of spawning, and that immature fish had not migrated
so far seawards to an appreciable extent. I think this is in part
probable, and that in the North Sea a similar state of affairs may
have once obtained, but has now undergone the following change : —

Formerly the plaice population was dense on suitable areas, from
the nursery grounds out to such a central ground as the Dogger Bank,
and the food supply was everywhere restricted. The early influence
of man's fishing was to reduce the numbers of the largest fish at pro-
portionally the greatest rate, and thus reduce the density of the
population on the central grounds.

Better feeding conditions would now be aff'orded on the central
grounds, and to these the younger plaice would tend to move more and
more, as the reduction in the numbers of the older individuals became
more appreciable. At the present time there seems no doubt that
density of population is restricted to the nursery grounds, so it is to the
advantage of the individuals to radiate rapidly to the more favourable
surroundings off'shore. Thus it may be that the larger of the im-
mature plaice extend further seawards than was formerly the case, i.e.,
emigrate at an earlier age, in consequence of the reduced competition
withm the species on the off'shore grounds.

At any rate, whether it was the case or not in former times, there
is now to be found everywhere, and at all times in the North Sea, a
proportion of immature fish many times greater than I found this
year in the Barents Sea. Even amongst the spawning shoals in the
North Sea it is quite usual to find as many immature female fish as
mature.

On the other hand, it may possibly be that we have on this bank in
the Barents Sea an accumulated stock of plaice such as the Norwegian
investigators* have shown to have existed in suitable areas on their
coast, on a much smaller scale. When these spots were first fished,
quantities of large plaice were to be obtained. After a few years,
however, the population appeared to have been almost entirely fished
out, the explanation being that the currents, setting out of the fiords,
carry the majority of the floating eggs and young fish to water in
which they cannot develop. The capture of the stock is thus out of
all proportion to its renewal by natural means, and the decay of the
fishery in these particular spots is inevitable.

From this it would seem to be of the greatest importance for the
future welfare of the plaice fishery in the Barents Sea, that steps
should be taken to ascertain definitely whether extensive nursery

* Report on Norwegian Fishery and Marine Investigations. Vol. i. , 1900, i)p. 138-52.

BARENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907. 93

grounds actually exist, from which the stock of the outer grounds may
be renewed.

If the majority of the eggs and larvre are carried by currents to
regions in which they must naturally perish, as Hjort and Dahl
(loe. cit.) have shown to be the case on parts of the Norwegian coast,
it is evident that the fishery can only flourish so long as the present
stock, accumulated through a great number of years, continues to be
sufficiently abundant to pay for its capture.

It is not difficult to imagine that there may have been a period
when the central grounds of the North Sea were inhabited by a plaice
population, of which at least the majority of the individuals were
mature ; and, had we a curve of measurements of that period, the
mode would conceivably have exceeded the average size at which the
fish were first mature, by an amount as great as may now be found in
the virgin waters of Northern Europe.

One of the earliest effects of fishing on any ground is to reduce the
number of the large fish, and consequently lower the average size ;
that is to say, representing this effect on a diagram to compare with
Figs. 2 and 3, the mode will recede to the left, and approach the size
at which the species becomes mature.

If it is allowed that an accumulation of mature plaice once pre-
ponderated in the central North Sea, it will be obvious that the retro-
gression of this modal size to its present position (36-37 cm.) helow
the average size at first maturity (39-40 cm.) must have been effected
gradually by the influence of man, for no serious natural enemy of
large plaice in the North Sea is recognised, whilst the intensity of
fishing is known to be very great.

Hence it is conceivable that if intense fishing continues, the modal
size of the plaice will imperceptibly recede to even lower limits, and a
period must arrive, if it is not already with us, when the supply of
eggs, and consequently young fish, seriously suffers.

SUMMAEY.

In this preliminary investigation of the plaice on a bank in the
Barents Sea the following were among the chief features noted : —

1. The population consisted almost entirely of mature fish, thus
presenting a marked contrast to the conditions prevailing at the
present day in the central parts of the North Sea (Dogger Bank, etc.).

2. The " average size at first maturity " for the females appears to be
approximately the same (39-40 cm.) in the Barents Sea as in the
central parts of the North Sea : but, whereas in the Barents Sea the

94 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

predominant size is several centimetres ahove, in the central parts of
the North Sea it is several centimetres helow that standard.

In other words, whereas on the virgin grounds of the Barents Sea
the female plaice live to spawn many times, in the southern much-
fished region the majority at the present time do not live to spawn once.

3. The number of rings on the otoliths indicate a remarkably slow
rate of growth and great age attained in this region as compared
with the North Sea. It also appears from these investigations that
" biological spring," and also the spawning season, is some three to five
months later than in the North Sea, viz. in mid summer.

4. On this voyage the differences in the proportions of the sexes at
different sizes was striking. Up to a certain size (40-44 cm.) males
were in great excess ; after this, rapid diminution in their numbers
took place.

In the North Sea the same two features have been found to occur,
and are connected respectively with the spawning habits of the species
and with earlier mortality of the male fish and its slower rate of
growth.

5. Various evidence points to the existence of a spawning ground
somewhat to the westward of the bank where the fishing took place.

Other Species.

The few other species which occurred during this voyage were as
follows : —

Dab {Plcuronectes limanda).

Long Rough Dab {Hii^poglossoides platessoides).

Halibut {Hippoglossus vulgaris).

Cod {Gadus morrhua).

Haddock (Gadus aeglejinus).

Catfish (Anarrichas {minor ?) ).

Greenland Shark (Laemargus microcefhalus).

Starry Ray {Baia radiata).

Lump-fish {Cyclopterus lun^ms).

and Cgclopterus {Uumicrotremus) sjyinosus, Milll.
A Cottoid {GymnacantMis tricuspis).

Dab {Pleuroncctes limanda).

This species was of very rare occurrence in the area visited. Only
four were observed, all being large ; two of these measured 35 and
36 cm. respectively. On an otolith from the latter fish seventeen white
rings appear very clearly, tending to show that the rate of growth of
this species, like that of the plaice, is exceeding slow in these waters.

BAREKTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907. 95

Long Rough Dab (Rippoc/lossoides platessoides).

This fish occurred in small numbers every haul. It appears to
attain a much larger size here than in the North Sea, where the
majority recorded by Fulton* are below 15 cm., and only an occasional
specimen over 25 cm. A sample of 42 measured from one haul on the
Roman ranged from 19-39 cm., the majority being between 25 and
29 cm. Slightly larger and smaller fish probably occurred, but
no very small specimens were observed. The species is not brought
to market at present.

Halibut {Rippoglossus vulgaris).

Four only were caught. " Two measured 66 and 78 cm., the other
two being a little larger and a little smaller than the lengths recorded.
Examination of the otoliths of the fish 78 cm., a male, shows it to be
apparently either seven or eight years old.

The species has but rarely been met with in the region, though from
the Eussian records it would appear to be more abundant further west.
The specimens found on this occasion were probably all immature.

Cod (Gadus morrhua).

Small individuals occurred in practically every haul, and on one or
two occasions in abundance.

A sample basket (52 fish) out of about three was measured from
a haul on the second day, and the whole catch (51 fish) eight days
later. The features presented by the tabulation of these measure-
ments, if not accidental, are interesting.

In the first sample the sizes range 30-49 cm., with an exceptional
fish 58 cm., the maximum number of measurements grouping about
40-42 cm.

The fish in the second lot had a range of size, 27-52 cm., with a very
exceptional specimen 82 cm. The maximum of length frequencies
occurs some 8 cm. lower, 32-34 cm., with a smaller maximum at
42 cm.

The possibility presents itself that two year groups are chiefly
represented, the younger sparsely at the former station, and pre-
dominating at the latter, which would be further east than the early
haul.

The above-mentioned specimen (82 cm.) was much the largest noted,
other exceptionally large fish measuring 60, 69, 70, 77 cm., but never

* " Rate of Growth of Sua Fishes." Twentieth Annual Rejiort, S. F. B.

96 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE

more than one or two such large fish could be found in any liaul.
Mature cod at this time were thus practically absent from the area
visited. Small codling have been found in quantities by the trawlers
towards Bear Island.

Haddock {Gadus acglefimm).

In the first haul (55 fms.) thirty fish were caught ranging from
24-34 cm.

Throughout the remainder of the voyage such small specimens were
only rarely to be found. Very large fish up to 81 cm. were caught in
quantities varying from one or two fish in a haul up to, on one
occasion, 143 fish. These fish had evidently spawned some time
previously.

An increase in the catch was noticeable in the few hours the sun
was below the horizon.

In 1906* Dr. Hjort procured some large haddock from the catch of
a Hull trawler which had been fishing in this region. His specimens
were from 55-80 cm. in length, and their ages determined by investiga-
tion of the scales ranged between nine and fourteen years.

Catfish {Anarrichas {minor ?) ).

I have records of tliis fish occurring regularly throughout the
voyage in number from one to about a score a haul. With one excep-
tion (49 cm.) all the specimens were very large.

Two catches, 10 and 11 fish respectively, were measured, the range
of size being 88-120 and 102-125 cm. These ranges and the quantity
were typical of most of the hauls in the region at this time.

On various occasions stomachs of seven fish were examined.
Crustacea {Hyas) and Mollusca appeared to be the staple food, though
in one stomach I found three codling.

Greenland Shark (Laemargus microcephalus).

Called by the fishermen " oakettle."

Fourteen were recorded, but one or two more occurred. Of these
fourteen, eight were measured, viz., 14 ft. (427 cm.), 12 ft. (366 cm.),
11 ft. 4 ins. (346 cm.), 10 ft. 6 ins. (320 cm.), two specimens 7 ft.
(213 cm.), 6 ft. 10 ins. (208 cm.), and 5 ft. 6 in. (168 cm.). No very
small specimens were found.

Difficulty was experienced in examining the stomach contents of

* JoHAN Hjort. "Nogle Resultater af den Internationale Havforskning," Saertryk af
Aarsbei-etning vedk. Norges fiskerier, 1907.

BARENTS SEA IN AUGUST, 1907. 97

these cumbersome creatures. Steam power was necessary to remove
them from the remainder of the trawl contents, so that this and
hoisting over the ship's side was made one operation. Before cutting
the monsters adrift a lateral incision was made through which the
liver was extracted.

To have opened the stomach as the fish lay upon the heap would
not have improved the remainder of the catch. In two instances,
however, I was able to examine the stomach contents.

In the first instance the food consisted of three codlings, about
40 cm., and a plaice of the same length. On the second occasion I
found in a fish 6 ft. 10 ins. (208 cm.) in length two round fish (one
probably a codling, about 60 cm. in length), one long rough dab, and
a piece some twelve inches long from the mid-lateral region of one
of the salmon species {Salmo salar ?) evidently a large fish.

Quantities of plaice could be observed at times pouring from the
mouth of these sharks when suspended by the tail and lowered over
the ship's side. That their depredations amongst the plaice are great, I
feel convinced. I do not think the missing and damaged tails, so frequent
as to be commonly noted by the fishermen, can be otherwise accounted for.

I have observed in the North Sea that when the dogfish (Acanthias
vulgaris) feeds on small plaice, these are devoured from the tail first,
in contrast to round fishes, such as herring, which are taken head first.

In my samples, the significant number of 113 fish, or nearly 2| per
cent of the total, I found with tails more or less damaged, and subse-
quently healed; in some instances the whole tail had disappeared.
The possibility of this phenomenon being the result of disease, such
as is sometimes found to be destroying the tails and fins of fresh- water
fish, would seem excluded, as the damaged extremities were clean and
healthy. In the only exception the extremities of the tail rays were
raw and bleeding.

All these facts, in conjunction with the concave shape of the
majority of the assumed bites, seemed to me to point to the successful
escape of the individual plaice from the jaws of a Greenland shark,
though, as previously suggested, the possibility of depredations by
seals must not be overlooked.

Starry Ray {Raia radiata).

This was the only ray species which occurred, and only occasional,
full grown specimens were to be seen. Two female fish in one haul
measured 35 and 37 cm. between the extremities of the pectoral fins.
In the stomach of each of these was found two large specimens of
the Arctic shrimp (Sclerocrangon horeas), identified by Mr. K. A. Todd,

98 NOTES ON A FISHING VOYAGE TO THE BARENTS SEA.

Lump-fish {Cydopterus lumpus).
One medium -sized specimen was found.

Lump-fish {Cydopterus (Eumicrotrenuis) spinosus, Milll).

Two or three individuals of this himp-fish occurred during the first
day or two of the voyage, but it was not observed afterwards.

A Cottoid {Gymnacanthus tricuspis, Reinh.)

This was represented on the voyage of the Roman by one specimen.
For the identification of this and the preceding species, my thanks are
due to Mr. L. W. Byrne.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV.

Photograph of a three hours' catch of plaice in the Barents Sea (about 40 baskets),
s.t. Roman, H 948, Aug., 1907.

General Chart of Barents Sea.

Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, Vol. VII f.

Plate IV.

Photograph of a tliree hours' catch of plaice in the Barents Sea (ahout -40 baskets),
s.t. Roman, H 948, Aug., 1907.

General Chart of Barents Sea.

To face j>. iKS.

[ 99 ]

On Rock Remains in the Bed of the
English Channel.

An Account of the Dredgings carried out by
ss. "Oithona" in 1906.

By
L. R. Crawshay, M.A.

Assistant Naturalist at tlie Plymouth Laboratory.
JVith one Chart (Plate V) and two Figures in the Text.

In the programme of work for the summer of 1906, it was decided by
the Director that a series of cruises should be carried out by the
Association's steamer Oithona to investigate the fauna of the deeper
waters of the English Channel. The bearing S.W. \ S., Magnetic, = S.
23° W., True,* from the Eddystone Lighthouse was chosen as a base-
line, and the work was to be carried out with special reference to
points at 10-mile intervals along this bearing. The fauna was to be
investigated as fully as possible, and bottom-deposits, particularly
stones, were at the same time to be carefully recorded and collected.
In all, eight cruises were made, the work being extended nearly as
far as the 50-mile point.

Pending the completion of the report on the fauna collected, it has
been decided to issue in a separate form an account of the geological
collections that were made, which afford valuable evidence in the light
they throw on the history of the Channel.

The stones, with which Mr. Worth's report deals copiously in a
subsequent paper, were first found on June 11th at the close of the
second cruise at Position (9), bearing S. 31° W. from the Eddystone,
22 miles, and at a depth of about 40 fathoms. The 3' 0" dredge
was cast to try the nature of the bottom. After an unsatisfactory

* Except where otherwise stated, all hearings here given are true, a variation of
16' 45' W. (say 17° W. ) having been allowed throughout.

100 ON KOCK REMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

haul the arrangement of the gear was modified,* and as the result
of a tliird attempt the dredge came up three parts full of stones. The
contents of this haul were of so great interest that it was decided to
investigate the subject further, and so far as was possible without
unduly interfering with the faunistic work, the most careful attention
was given during the subsequent cruises to tracing the extent of
these stones and estimating the conditions associated with their
occurrence.

In the third cruise, commencing on June 14th, the course was
accordingly set to the position where they had been encountered.
The stones were found again without difficulty, and were followed at
close intervals during this cruise over a considerable area Sub-
sequently their inner limit was observed at points adjacent to the
base-line of the work at some 15 miles outside the Eddystone. Beyond
this their extent was still unknown, and much time was therefore
occupied at first by short runs about the 20-mile point, which will
explain the large number of positions shown on the chart in this
region. Finally, from Position (37), S. 41° W,, 17 miles, a test run of
12 miles was made in a south-westerly direction. The casting of the
dredge at 6 and 12 miles showed rough ground at both points, one
of the dredges being so bent out of shape as to be rendered tem-
porarily useless. After this the work was extended on broader lines
to the southward.

Some general points in connection with the stones will now be
considered from evidence afforded in the course of the work. The
extent of the area covered by the cruises is shown in the accompany-
ing chart (Plate V), where the positions plotted are all of them
directly concerned with the stones collected. All bearings and dis-
tances are reduced to the Eddystone Lighthouse. The work was done
entirely by log and compass, no sextant observations being taken.
At the same time much care was taken throughout with a view
to securing as close a degree of accuracy as by dead reckoning
was possible, and the positions given may be regarded as nearly
accurate.

(1) Extent of Exposure. — The inner limit of the stones, as previously
mentioned, was traced by two or three samples at about 15 miles out-
side the Eddystone. Here only a very few small stones were found,
mingled with the sand and shell deposit which covers the sea-
bottom. Inside this point, that is to say, between 8 and 15 miles

* That is to say, liy attaching a heavy sounding-lead to the hemp warp employed,
a few feet in front of the dredge. From this point the hemp warp was dispensed with,
and a wire rope substituted for it in all dredgings.

ON ROCK REMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL 101

outside the Eddystone, the dredges revealed nothing but clean shell-
sand. Outside it, however, from the time when the gear was
suitably adjusted to the work, there was no single point among the
forty-five positions in which either of the larger dredges was used
where stones were not found in greater or lesser degree. It may
therefore be said that outside this 15 -mile point a stony area was
traced without interruption for a distance of 34 miles S.S.W. and for
some miles to the eastward and westward of this line, covering a total
area of some 300 square miles. At Position (80), the outermost point
reached, bearing S. 16° W., 49 miles, which is slightly beyond the
middle of the Channel, both the average size and the average weight
of the stones collected were, with one exception, higher than anywhere
observed, and there is every reason to suppose that beyond this point
similar conditions prevail to within close proximity to the French
coast.

(2) Intensity. — Of the distribution of the stones exposed in point of
intensity it is more difficult to speak with assurance, so many are the
factors which must enter into consideration : the character and possi-
bilities of the gear employed, the variation of local conditions, and the
tendency of the dredge to become quickly filled with animal debris in
a particular spot, the general success of a haul dependent on tidal and
weather conditions ; all these tend to complicate the result as shown
by the stones actually taken ; so that it is difficult to form a just
quantitative estimate without a more complete and systematic
method of investigation than was possible in the circumstances.
From the available data, however, there is little doubt that the
stones lie scattered about the surface, with very little interruption
over the whole area. In a table appended below (Table I, p. 114)
detailed particulars are given of every sample obtained, including
the estimated area covered by the dredge used. This estimate as-
sumes an average rate of towing of one sea-mile per hour throughout.
This cannot be regarded as more than a rough approximation, but it
is sufficiently near for the general purpose. Excluding three hauls
where no definite result was obtained owing to the dredge being fouled
on obviously rough ground, the total area actually covered by the
remaining 53 hauls amounts on this estimate to 11,950 square yards.
The total number of stones of 4 cm, and over that were collected
being 5808, an average ratio of distribution is obtained for the whole
area of 0"5 per square yard.

Probably this estimate is somewhat short of the true state of things,
for it does not take into consideration those stones which are too large
to enter the opening of the dredge, nor does it make allowance for

102 ON ROCK REMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

the limited capacity of the dredge in regard to those positions where
the stones are exceptionally numerous. But as a general estimate I do
not think it is very far short of the truth, having reference, of course,
only to stones exposed at the surface or very little covered. The most
reliable test is probably to be found in the result of hauls with the
conical dredge and the 1' 6" dredge. The former of these instruments
is so constituted as to dig deeply with its heavy frame into the sea-
bottom, and is therefore allowed to work only for a fraction of a
minute, during which time the canvas bag with which it is fitted is
rapidly filled with a complete sample of the bottom from a very small
area, about 4 to 8 square yards. The 1' 6 " dredge was also fitted with
a canvas bag, and though not digging so deeply was used for a very
similar purpose. Of five hauls with the conical dredge, from 19 to 49
miles, two produced no stones at all ; of six hauls with the 1' 6" dredge,
from 30 to 46 miles, three produced no stones at all; but if these 11
hauls be summarised, and the number of stones of 4 cm. and over be
distributed over the sum of the estimated areas covered, a ratio of
distribution is obtained for these short hauls very nearly equiva-
lent to that for the whole area of the work, namely, 0"6 per square
yard.

With reference to this absence of stones in five hauls with these small
dredges, there is no doubt that the stones lie exposed on the sea-
bottom very much more thickly in some places than in others, owing
to the varying degree of sedimentary deposit in different areas depen-
dent on tidal action and the physical conditions influencing animal
settlement, and so regulating the local deposition of shell and other
debris of animal origin. In the " Distribution " column of the table
it will be seen that the ratio varies as widely as from 0"4 to 28-0
square yards per stone. An interesting case in point occurs in tlie
Positions (10) to (13), S. 26' W., 18 miles. These four samples were
taken in quick succession in a westerly direction over a distance of
about 1 mile, and lying thus close together, are shown on the chart as
coincident. It seems evident that here the dredgings passed through
the middle of a stony patch which was almost covered by finer
deposits at either limit.

At (10) 6 stones were obtained with an average distribution

of 1 stone to 28 sq. yds.
„ (11) 166 „ „ „ „ 2 „

„ (12) 187 „ „ „ „ 1-8 „

„ (13) 21 „ „ „ „ 27-3 „

To quote another instance, at Position (17), S. 28° W., 23-3 miles,
a haul of 11 minutes with the 3' 0" dredge produced only 15 stones,

ON EOCK REMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 103

with the small mean dimeusion of 4'8 cm., and a distribution of 1
stone to 247 square yards. The dredge had liere passed through
a large and flourishing settlement of Pallasia mnrata, Allen, and a
vast number of the tubes, together with several living specimens of
this valuable Polychiete, were brought up in it with little else. As
it was evident from the next haul, (18), that we had passed outside the
limit of the Pallasia settlement, we steamed back to the ground of
Position (17) in the hope of securing some more specimens, setting
this run at half a mile. But the Pallasia ground was missed, and
a very heavy haul of 34 stones was brought up at (19) with a mean
greatest dimension of 10 cm., which was one of the highest averages
obtained during the work. These two positions, (17) and (19), cannot
have been separated by very many yards from one another, though
the results obtained were totally different.

Again, the two blank hauls with the conical dredge previously
referred to, (71) and (73), at 19 and 29 miles respectively, were
followed in each case immediately afterwards by a haul with the 3' 6"
dredge at (72) and (74). The first of these latter gave 213
stones with a mean distribution of 0"8 per square yard. In the
second, the safety-stop of the dredge was broken, owing to the rough-
ness of the ground passed, and no more definite conclusion was there-
fore obtainable than that very heavy stones had been encountered
within about a quarter-mile of (73), where the conical dredge revealed
only coarse shell-sand.

(3) Size and Weight. — A single greatest measurement of each of the
stones was taken. Ultimately all stones of less than 4 cm. were left
out of consideration, and a mean was obtained for each haul, derived
from the products of dimension x number in each case, at intervals of
1 cm. Similarly, the samples were weighed, and a mean was worked
out in pounds per stone, for each haul.

A cursory glance at Table I (p. 114) does not convey any very definite
impression as to the relation between size or weight and distance of
position from the Eddystone. A certain rate of increase occurs with
distance, but it is very irregular. This is evidently due to the fact
that the main bearing of the work does not lead directly out towards
mid-Channel, but nearly four points to the westward. If a line be
drawn due E. and W., Mag., through the Eddystone, a distinct
increase is obtained, both in size and weight, in a direction perpen-
dicular to this line, i.e. due S., Mag. Parallel lines being accordingly
drawn E. and W., Mag., at 5-mile intervals outwards, and a mean being
taken for all the samples falling within these several intervals, a fairly
regular curve is obtained for both size and weight (pp. 105, 106).

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. H

stones

2924

1765

334

424

455

104 ON ROCK REMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

The disposition of the samples is as follows : —

5-10 miles 8., Magnetic 1 sample .

10-15 „ „ 18 samples

15-20 „ „ 13 „

20-25 „ „ 3 „

25-30 „ „ 7 „

30-35 „ ��� 7 „

35-40 „ „ 2 „

The area between 20 and 25 miles, represented by three samples, should
properly include the sample (74) previously referred to, where the
stop of the dredge being broken, owing to the roughness of the ground,
no numerical results were obtainable, and the position had therefore
to be left out of consideration. There is little doubt therefore that it
is owing to an insufficient number of samples that a drop occurs over
this area in both curves.

In point of size and weight, then, there is a steady increase
correlated with distance in a mid-Channel direction. For the loca-
tion of the samples, the bearing and distance of all the positions
has been reduced to the Eddystone ; but the main bearing of the
work being S, 23° W. from this point, that is, almost directly on
Ushant, their location must be regarded from a different standpoint,
where questions are involved relating to their distance from the
English coast. Treating the Eddystone as an outlying point on the
coast-line, a line running through it E. and W., Mag. will be roughly
parallel to the mid-Channel line, and less than one point off the main
direction of Hurd Deep. Outside it the positions fall naturally into
the groups from which the curves (Figs. 1 and 2) are obtained at
5-mile intervals, as follows : —
5-10 miles. 37.

10-15 „ 36, 31, 32, 35, 33, 34, 10, 11, 12, 13, 39, 40, 9, 16, 15,
72, 26, 27. ♦

15-20 „ 14, 20, 21, 22, 29, 30, 34, 25, 17, 19, 18, 42, 41.

20-25 „ 73, 74, 43, 47, 44.

25-30 „ 55, 56, 53, 44, 50, 51, 58.

30-35 „ 58, 75, 67, 76, 77, 63, 62.

35-40 „ 79, 80.

In connection with the foregoing deductions, two points may here
be considered : (1) the size of the stones in relation to that of the
opening of the dredge frame ; (2) the position in which they lie.

In regard to the first point, the 3' 6" dredge, the largest used, with
a frame of 3' 6" x 1' 0", offered an opening of about 100 x 30 cm.
Similarly the 3' 0" and triangular dredges allowed of stones at least

\ ■

1 '

B 2

(.\

)

{

ON ROCK EEMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 107

as large as 90 cm. and 50 cm. being taken. But it is signijficant that
in forty-five hauls with these three dredges, no stones with any
approach to such a size, even in their greatest dimension, were
obtained. Among the largest were —

four of 20 cm. on (19), (77), and (58)
five of 21 „ „ (19), (58), and (62)
four of 22 „ „ (19), (53), and (67)
one of 26 ,, ,, (58)
two of 27 „ „ (53) and (80)
one of 30 „ ,, (77)

It may therefore be concluded that, except, of course, in so far as
they are largely or wholly covered up, very large stones are not very
numerous in this area, and the dimensions and weights shown on the
curves may be taken as a fair approximation to the true average.
There is no doubt, however, that very large stones and even boulders
do occur with considerable frequency, as on the trawling-grounds off
Start Point. The heavy working of the dredge communicated through
the warp, the breaking of the safety-stop, and the bending or even
breaking of the ironwork of the dredge afforded frequent evidence of
this. A broken stop occurred at the following points : —

(38), S. 381° W., 22-2 miles
(39), S. 38° W., 22-2 „
(18), S. 29° W., 23-4 „
(62), S. 25° W., 46-4 „

At (21), S. 25° W., 21-2 miles, the 3' 0" dredge employed was brought
up fast and lost, only a portion of one arm being recovered.

To break the safety stop, a strain is required of some 600-700 lbs-
To sharply open out the wrought-iron frame of the dredges used, in
the manner that too often occurred, involves a strain of several
hundredweight; while in the total loss of the dredge at (21), the part-
ing of the remaining arm would only be caused by a strain of about
twelve tons. At some of these points, then, and at (21) in particular,
heavy boulders must have been encountered, the size of which can
only be estimated at a rough minimum.

As regards the second point, the position of the stones as they lay
when dredged up, there is ample evidence to show that, with very few
exceptions, they were well exposed at the surface of the sea-bottom,
and that they have probably so lain for a considerable time past.
Almost without exception, they supported living animal growth or
its remains— Porifera, Hydrozoa, Polychteta, Polyzoa, MoUusca, etc.
Scarcely any of the stones were without investing Polyzoa, which
often covered the greater part, sometimes the whole, of the surface.

108 ON ROCK REMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

A large majority supported living Hyclrozoa, in addition. The animal
growth often showed well-marked limits above an underlying bare
portion on which the stone had rested in its bed, evidently undisturbed
for a long period of time. Such a position, with the greater part of
the stone exposed, was the commonest ; but in places, especially near
mid-Channel, on (80), S. 16h° W., 48-9 miles, evidence pointed to the
stones resting more openly on one another, with very little fine deposit
associated with them. Under the more ordinary conditions, with the
exposed stones lying scattered about at intervals of a yard or two,
in an even shelly or sandy bed, it is not surprising that the
bottom of the Channel has been so widely charted as sand and shell,
the lead rarely happening to strike these stones except in places
where they are exposed to an abnormal degree. There is much reason
to believe that the intervening deposit of shell and sand forms for the
most part only a thin covering, and that if this could be penetrated to
a depth of not many inches, the true bottom of the Channel over the
whole of this area would be revealed as an uninterrupted stony bed.

(4) General Form. — The stones exhibited every gradation of form,
between that of perfectly rounded outline and sharp angulation ; the
fact that numerous examples of these two extremes repeatedly occurred
in the same sample is sufficient to show that little or no wearing
action has taken place in recent times. Frequent instances occur of
a sequence of events : (1) complete rounding ; (2) sharp fracture ; (3)
secondary rounding ; but the ultimate investment of animal growth
afforded constant evidence in such cases of the secondary rounding not
being recent.

(5) Bottom-De'posits. — Thirteen hauls were taken with the conical
and 1' 6" dredges, two of them being from positions at eight to nine
miles outside the Eddystone, and therefore well inside the point where
the stones first appear. I am indebted to Mr. E. A. Todd for his
assistance in grading the whole of these samples. The results are given
in Table II (p. 117), where the samples are arranged in order of their
distance on a S.W., Mag. bearing from the Eddystone. The method
of grading is that adopted at the Lowestoft Laboratory for estimating
the texture of bottom-deposits in connection with the International
Fishery Investigations. The material is separated into eight grades
by washing it successively through a series of sieves with circular
perforations of 15 mm., 10 mm., 5 mm., 2*5 mm., 1*5 mm., I'O mm.,
and 0'5 mm., the residue which passes through the 0"5 mm. sieve
forming the eighth grade. The exceptionally high proportion of
"shell" contained in tliese samples, that is to say, fragments of the
shells of MoUusca, fragments of plates and spines of Echinodermata,

ON KOCK EEMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 109

and fragments of Polyzoa, especially Ccllaria and Cdlepora, rendered
the accurate grading of them a difficult matter, owing to the repeated
breaking of the more delicate fragments in the sifting process, so that
some small excess error must be allowed for throughout in the direction
of the finer grades. The percentage of Carbonate of Lime present in
the material above and below the dimension of 0*5 mm. has been
determined as shown in Table 11. The proportion of this due to
inorganic matter is so slight that the percentage may be treated as
representing entirely organic remains. For convenient comparison of
the samples an " average grade " is added in each case. This method
of averaging the samples, which was used by Mr. Worth in estimating
the texture of bottom-deposits of the Start to Eddystone G-rounds,*
consists in multiplying each grade - percentage by its conventional
number (15 mm. + = I, . . . /. 0'5 mm. = VIII,) and then dividing the sum
of the products by 100, the quotient being the average grade of the
sample. It is an interesting point to observe that in these samples,
as is shown in Table II, there is a distinct tendency for the average
grade to decrease, i.e. for the texture to become coarser, with the
increase of distance outwards, as far as (75) at 38 miles, beyond which
an increase occurs up to (79) at 48 miles. If these few samples be
grouped together on broad lines of 10-mile intervals on a S.W., Mag.
bearing, the combined averages appear as follows : —

5-10 miles .
10-20 „ .
20-30 „ .
30-40 „ .
40-50 „ .

Sample (50 ), falling on the 30-mile point, is included in both
intervals between 20 and 40 miles.

While this method of averaging is useful as indicating the com-
parative texture of the samples, it is open to the objection that the
inclusion of the coarser grades may unduly influence the result in the
way of obscuring the finer ones. If the coarser grades be disregarded,
and only those below and including 1 mm. -l- be considered, the average
percentage of material within this range for the samples grouped in
the same manner as before works out as follows : —

5-10 miles .... 95-0 per cent.

10-20 „ .... 77-1 „

20-30 „ .... 76-2 „

30-40 „ .... 52-1 „

40-50 „ . . . . 41-6 „

* Journal of the Marine Biological Association, Vol. V, p. 381.

2, 69,

Average Grade,

7-576

71 .

6-524

73, 48, 50

6-480

50, 75, 76

5-255

65, 61,79

5-033

the 30-m

ile

point,

inc]

[uded

110 ON ROCK REMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

In most of the samples the smaller particles, both organic and
inorganic, show a good deal of rounding and often a high polish, and in
all of them there is almost or entirely an absence of silt.*

Few as these samples are and irregularly disposed over so great a
distance, the fragmentary evidence afforded by them is important in
its bearing on the final question to be dealt with.

(6) Conclusion. — One point remains to be considered in conclusion.
How is the exposure of these stones at the present time to be
accounted for ? The Channel bottom is probably disturbed to a con-
siderable depth by wave action in stormy weather, though to what
degree is a matter yet to be investigated. Fine particles of sand and
other matter have often been taken in the tow-net at a considerable
distance from the bottom, and even at the surface, in water as deep
as in any part of the Channel. It would be difficult not to attribute
this, in some degree, to wave action. It is commonly asserted by
fishermen that on the trawling-grounds off the Start, in 35 to 40
fathoms, they are much more liable to have their trawls fouled by large
stones immediately after stormy weather than at other times, the belief
prevailing that at such times the boulders become more exposed owing
to the disturbance of the fine deposit. A case in point occurred quite
recently (December 15th, 1907), after an exceptionally rough spell of
weather, when some of them encountered heavy stones on these
grounds, and by one of them, the Brixham trawler Love and Unity,
a block of granite was brought into Plymouth weighing 833 Ibs.f
Probably there is much truth in this impression, and the influence of
wave action should be considered as partly contributing to the con-
tinued exposure of the stones far out in the Channel. But the direct
agent must be sought for in the tides, and I think it will be found that
the tidal conditions in this region are sufficient to explain the cause at
work.

As far at least as about the 40-mile point referred to in these
cruises, there appears to be a constant gain on every complete tide in
a north-easterly direction. The meridian of the Eddystone is roughly
the western limit of the conflicting tidal conditions caused by the
Dover Stream, involving at intervals an opposite direction of the
current in the easterly and westerly portions of the Channel. When
in this westerly part of the Channel the tide turns to flow, it has to
encounter,, to the southward of the Eddystone, a still strongly ebbing
stream from Dover. Aided by the northerly set from the Bay of
Biscay, it is forced against this in such a way as to be deflected to the

* i.e. matter which remains in suspension in water at the end of one minute,
t This stone is referred to by Mr. Worth on p. 122.

ON ROCK REMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. Ill

northward and north-eastward, and it is only when the Dover ebb has
slackened, some time afterwards, that the direct np-Channel flood can
be resumed. On the turn to the ebb the case is different. The two
streams simply flow away from one another, and there is very little
or no appreciable deflection through the south. While there cannot
perhaps be much doubt as to the existence of this north-easterly gain,
nearly as far, at least, as mid-Channel, the existing data available are
too incomplete to admit of its being definitely estimated with confi-
dence as to the result. I have made reference to the surface current
measurements as shown in the English and Irish Channel Tidal
Streams, compiled for the Admiralty by Commander Simpson, R.N.,
and in order to form some estimate on this basis the measurements
of the mean current between neaps and springs for each hour were
combined, and a mean resultant worked out for one complete tide at
10-mile intervals S. 23° W. from the Eddystone. The values thus
obtained are as follows : —

Eddystone N. 23° E., 10 miles . . N. 24° E., 2-2 miles
20 „ . . N. 21° E., 1-3 „

30 „ . . N. 26°E., M „
40 „ . . N. 39° E., 1-2 ,.

These results must, of course, be treated with reserve. In the first
place, they are derived from measurements in which, admittedly, too
great reliance must not be placed on detail ; and in the second place,
they are surface measurements, and, however accurate as such, do not
necessarily represent the condition of things at the bottom. But they
show a remarkable degree of regularity in the general result, which
seems to justify their being given here. The most doubtful point is
that at 50 miles, where different conditions arise with the commencing
approach to the French coast, and there is more southerly drift than
at the other points. Owing to the difficulty of estimating closely
from the tidal charts the force and direction of the current here at
some intervals of the tide, the position has been left out of considera-
tion. Close to this point, Mr. D. J. Matthews has made, from time
to time, a number of measurements with the Ekman-Nansen current
meter. In August, 1905,* he was able to carry these observations
through one complete tide at different depths. From his 22 measure-
ments at the surface on this occasion I have derived a resultant of
S. 4° W., 0'96 mile. At 70 metres, however, his 18 measurements give
a resultant of S. 21° E., 0-40 mile. The gain at this point would there-
fore seem to be a southerly to easterly one. The most important

* Conseil Perm. Inter nat, pour VExpI. de la Mcr. Bulletin Trimcstr. August, 1905.
Part B. , p. 25.

112 ON ROCK REMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

point in Mr. Matthews's observations in the present connection is the
fact that he has found a stronger current at 70 metres than at the
surface. On this occasion, wliich was about the time of three-quarter
Springs, it amounted to as much as 13 miles per hour. In the pre-
ceding May,* he made, on the same station, a series of measurements
at 90 metres i.e. close to the bottom, extending through almost one
complete tide, but not, unfortunately, in quite sufficient detail to
admit of a resultant being taken. The force of current then measured
rose to as much as 0"5 mile per hour, and as it was only one
day subsequent to the date of the Moon's first quarter, one may
fairly safely assume at high Springs a bottom velocity, at this point,
reaching 1*5 knots or more.

It is on this latter point that the main question turns concerning
the exposure of the stones. If it should be true, as evidence seems
to point, that there exists a constant tidal gain on the English side of
mid-Channel in a north-easterly direction, and in the more central
waters, as would seem from Mr. Matthews's observations towards the
south-east and south, this fact, combined with the presence of a
bottom current reaching as much as li knots, would be sufficient
to explain the exposure of stones. No fine deposit could accumulate
with this gradual shifting process constantly at work in the outer waters
of the Channel. It must be passed on elsewhere, perhaps to come to
rest ultimately off the English coast-line, or, on the other hand, it may
be, to be carried through the south towards the Atlantic. The evidence
afforded by the bottom-samples that were taken with the conical
and 1' 6" dredges tends to support this conclusion. Outside about ten
miles from the Eddystone no instance was found of what could, strictly
speaking, be called a fine deposit. Beyond this point the deposits obtained
might be described in general terms as coarse shell-sand mingled with
fine or coarse gravel and usually stones, with a very small proportion
of quartz grains. Except in sample (50), S. 16" W., 30'9 miles, the
material above 1 mm. in grade comprehended within the range of
Table II, amounted in all cases to more than 30 per cent of the
sample. In most of them it exceeded 50 per cent. Sample (50),
moreover, cannot by any means be regarded as of a fine grade, since
it also contained in addition to the finer deposit indicated in Table II,
several stones with an average greatest dimension of 6 cm.t Further,
it has already been pointed out (p. 109) that this coarser texture of

* Id. May, 1905. Part B., p. 94.

t The same point applies to several of these bottom-samples, in which the inclusion of
stones would have been too cumbersome for the purposes of Table II ; cp. especially
sample 79 (Table I, p. 116), where the larger stones averaged 0-67 lb. per stone.

ON ROCK REMAINS IN THE BED OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 113

the bottom deposit increases with distance outwards, or conversely, the
percentage of the finer deposit increases as the coast-line is approached,
till at some eight to ten miles outside tlie Eddystone there is found, in
40 fathoms, a deep accumulation of fine sand, 92 to 95 per cent of which
is less than 1 mm. in grade.*

It would be difficult to account for these facts except on the
assumption that there is a constant tendency for the finer material to
be drifted, by combined tidal and wave action, from the outer waters
of the Channel towards the coast-line, the direction of the drift being
apparently, so far as the English side of the Channel is concerned,
north-easterly. On such an assumption, with the continuous trans-
portation of the finer material from the more distant positions, the
greater degree of exposure of the stones in like proportion would be
accounted for. Without the presence of a constant process of the
kind no explanation would seem adequate to account for the fact that
in the midst of shifting deposits brought from other regions and
continuously augmented by the local growth and decay of numerous
lime-secreting organisms, even small pebbles of no more than a centi-
metre or two in height are found again and again, affording an un-
disturbed base for delicate animal growth, evidently for a long period.

Whether the present conditions are undergoing any change, or
whether they represent a state of equilibrium maintained between the
factors of deposition and tidal action it would be of deep interest to
know. In either case there is very little doubt that at the present
time, over almost the whole of this area, the true stony bed of the
Channel is but barely obscured by a very thin, superficial covering.

* It must, however, be expressly stated that it is not intended here to assign to this
last formation, represented by the samples (2) and (69), an origin in the outer waters
of the Channel. The inference is rather that somewhere between it and the region of
sample (71) the outer Channel drift encounters an opposing action of coastal currents,
to which latter it would seem that this distinct deposit is properly to be ascribed, thus
preventing its further distribution seawards and deflecting. the outer Channel drift itself
from the actual coast-line. — L. R. C.

C
H

P
H

H .
3d p

C ^

w
w

w
o

K^
(— (

, 1

,__('

(11

oj a> aj o)

^ j3-i3^

t»a2 c»a2

aj (U

> >

ri -—

cj tS

bC>

bD be

-73 S

■73 Tj

,i=

(3 bC^

a a

■^ <U'3

03 ce

,_,

!=: (2 >

^ ^

;_]

a> cs rt

0) 0)

_a O t-

J3^

0200

t/3 t/3

P-I

fe »

cfl a:) — '

5+^ Hi!

■'S^'S

O D"

■SB

0) Cr

i-Hi-li-l (M--HOCOCJC^lC^t;-l';-ir<l C<l(Nq^C<I(N(NOT (NCvlrH

ooo oooooooooo ooooooo ooo

O (M CO t^ O O O CO CO -^ (M i-H .-( CO O r~ M rH (>1 ir^l CO ip -^

tOt^CO T-Hr-HCOC^i— ll^i-li-Hi— li-H lr-lOO(MrieO>-( 0>i-l0
.-I <M C»

r— 'too OSU^^D'^OSOOitp'pOJ COOJOCOOIOOI TllO»y

I rH (M rt .-I (M

(M (^J t^ i-l i-H

\n a \ci

00 CO ■*

ooipopooui^oo

CO«OOOJOS«DOt--t>»i— I

o o o p O O >p

t^ ■* -^ Tj< -* ■># o»
m i^ t-^ CO Tji c^ •<i<

o p p

00 r-l OO
O CO

tD500SCOOO-^COCOCO«OTjlCDi— ItOOOOOOO'^ eovooo
•^ tococoi^r— it^t--i— I t^u:30eococoos .— it^o

Wi-HlOCOCOCOrH "M^Oi-l

in ?D lo _ -

OS J>. lO i-H t - ^ - .. » „ . - . , . . .

coiMco eo(Ni-icocoocoi— ii-Hco

OOl^OOOl^ODCOOOOO '-Wt— t^ lO O O O OS

n.-O

bc S bc t- be

^^^

•T3 o3

Ti '-a'T3 j^T^

^ ^ ^

CD "5 to .2 O

(-1

CO H

CO O CO H CO

■^

■^ ■*

•^ ■*

Tt<

Til Tj<

Tl< Tj(

bc t-
-T^ bO

0.2
1-1

coH

o eo 1^ ip \p CO
m ?D j-~ i^ i^ 1^

OCO^jiulOOOOOCOOOitN

'P ^ "^

(M (M IM

tS^^ ^^^

xfizn.'Xi cc OQ !»

^^^^te:^^^^^^^ ^fS^

mrnma^mmmmrna^a:!^ co oj oq

a a

*> g ;3 <u tc

03 02

°T3

9
_ p

_ ^ g So

■ a.g s

£c^-2

^ « .ti bO . -3

•s bt fe .s r^ §

JS > '^'C ^^ ^

-° — ft CO c8 «
CO

^ P -U
OPS

«=s: 2

J S
^-^ ^'

-=> 5 I

o t- «—

-M to O

Onr

s i;^

ea ^•'

a^Tl

-"^

> SJ

o "2

TIT)

S 3

O "

t. -3

o %

<u o

1 1

,— ,

avel
rave
tub

tsfZ

character
m -deposit

d and gi
small g
I'allasia

■73

"35

ft^ T3

-^2

c3 = ft

<— «

CO OS cS

■5

03 a

§-°

_■ <i>

CD Oi Ol d)

;-<

;:3

J3^ J3 ^

^ '-

OC!

mrjirjim

COM

01 0^ -^ -j!

t^ VO t^ n-l

Cq rH rH O

O O O Ai

•i..22 3 '

^-. o ^^ c35

O (N -^ OS

^ -^ O C5

O (M O .-I

< 1 1 "

O eo 00 O

50 »« -* O

i^ -^ ^^ <»

to •* O CO

^ T'

«0 lO

tCo ft CO

O O lO lO

m lO »o >o

1^ t^

• -3 "S^

^•S £ fe ^

(» C<5 i-H OO

00 0^50

00 C»

«D CC

lO ■*

lO 50

O t^ 1^ CO

CO CO lO i-H

— ^_co

OJ 00

^s=^8t

r-l

r-l -H CO CO

CO I-H r-H (N

*"*

00 >n
o o>

^ CO

■^ ■*

»o

00 r-l O

O to t^ O c^J

-4J1

O -*)

>o o

O Tl(

hJog

-ft

rft

bn.t:

■^

?.n

(U •> » ID

7. ^

■«

ft ^

bC ^ ., ta

ft - ".S

,.2 ft

be ca ~ bn

-s

^r^

^i.^

PI
u

^ -
ID "

o „

bCO

rn CD

s^ ±;

>
a

■^ S-i

as
.2 '^

ft
o

ft V

tl _

bC tH

Tj ta

<D '^

'^ bb

to .2

EH CO

H O

H CO

coH

. CO

-*i

aS ■

^ tl

to m >o

m Tjt Tj< lo

to 135

■^ •*

'I'

^ Ttl ^

Tj* ^ ^ ^

•*

T1<

■^

•>*' ■*

Q-S

c S

OS OS

lO O CO

»1< ^ to 00 00

00 »o

(N CO

«:^

•-' I-H

CO CO -

CO to to CO 00

;

<-TS

OS o

(N T»t

IM 5^

(^^

C^ IM

(M CN I^ . 1 (N

t>\

CI CO

CO CO

^>"

^>'^'^*M

^■^

^^"

?o 00

■<i<

'oo -

OS 50 ^^'^

(M CO S (N (>q

^OS

t^ .-H

7-1 ?a

1—1 I-H

I-H

<N (M

a -a

^ H

CGCQ

a:iai^a^ai

"5.

!>■ OS

lO t^ OS

00 (N i-l CO CO

■* r^

•^ OO

CO to

Ol CO

!N rH T-l

rH ^ ^ -^ t^-

(^ Tjl

•* Tjl

\ri

IC»»0

K- cn

o
o o

^?
" B

!-§

Stones, gravel, and

broken shell
[Shell and stones]
Coarse shell -sand
[Broken shell and gravel]
[Shell]
Coarse shell-sand

Coarse shell-sand and
gravel

[Shell and gravel]
Coarse shell-sand and

gravel
[Stones]

B
u

Aver-
age

weight,
lbs.

(M0005D eO(Mt^Tll
(N OS OOlp-^l 1 COrH«p •^

O O i^COo' OOO IM

Ratio
of dis-
tribu-
tion. 1:
sq. yds.

-* t^ 00 ;>~ oo ip p rH CO ip
o o •r^(^^oo■*l 1 ■— icot-n -fli

Arith-
metic
mean,
cm.

CO oo 5Dop-^. a -^ fo «o
in (o oiooool 1 jotfjw OS

.-H i-l

03 OS l^COi— IK>| 1 OOO". CO 05

CO m (M -H 1 CO Tfi .-H

Weight
of total
sample.

lbs.

ippppp ippplp

03 00 (fo 1 (N C<I 1 1 OO i oi io

O «3 (M 00 rtl

Esti-
mated
area

covered.

Sq. yds.

1-, ?0 (O CO IC: fO t~~ l^ «0.-lTj( to

I— 1 1^ OS i-H r-H >— 1 1^ >r5 1^

(M CO (N C^ i-H (M

5 -si

r-l Hn t-- HOO O i-H rt ir^ t^ t^

r«

§[).-ta

."ti

T3 te

'S <»

-i

'T3

c.^ ?n

bCaj
=? bD

bD!-n~

T-l

r-~d

bO ^3 Si

tS ts 'T3 _53

T3 J2 ^3

-o go's

to .3 '-^

c4
•0

1= .2 s

eoH .-H

mHO

.= B

(Ti

OS IM

Q rt

.>3<

•rt<

.^ 10

m in 10

•^

>— 1

10 IM

■^

.^ 00 t^

OS (M

CO CD 00

:2a

CO ^ ■*

■.Jt

T(l -"tl -^

-*l

bo
a a>

aj C m

^f^

"^0''°

o<«13

(N^.-i

S w

«j

en ^ CO cc aj

OOo^W

ifj

ITS

1^ CO 00 t^

IM CO OS

l^ l^ in CD CD

CD CO t^

M .-tJ

fS T! ^

Sril

►5 . S C3

I a ^j

w " 2

^^ oii

h4
o

o
o

M
-^

H
m

pq H

;> '-^

i-l
<

w 8

jc !^

< W

«} p

H W

O
H
H
O

pq
o

Average
Grade.

■* o> ■*! CO 'JD 1^ <o CO o> e<3 j^

0'l<(M05!Mr-(0^mOCO
t^t^?0«OCD5DKOCO-*»r5vO

O
o

o
V

ip ip 00 ip 00 ip 00 t;- 00 O GO

OOS(NC^00505D0003i— 11^
(Nt-tCOCOlM0CI5O«D->*<Tt(^

o
A

r)<-jt('p-5H>pOOa5^l>-C^OO
OOOI^OJWC^OOi^CTji-HN

i^ t^ i^ TO GO OJ '^ >* ■:£> OS 00

S
S

o
V

O ip oo CO 00 00 OS eo w T}< t_-~

«Oi— i.-icomcocoi-^ooco>o
oooooo (M-»»<eo i-i ?-i

+
o

t~- o i^ >^ ip oo -^ ip 7t< -^ OS

050«OI^OSOO->ti|r^lOTOiO
rH0OO0C<I(MrH r-lr-lC<)

C05Oippi-~C<lC<)t^00C<lOS

rMAH00-^Oli<lAHAf-^00AH
(M n-l i-H >-l i-l

■^l^rHl^i;-C050<3>t;~«l>p

ooc>oo4t(ooi>-inic<ios

i-H rH r-H C^

(>lTj<<X)t^00COC<lOlrH00C<l

O O <D O 00 O I-l CI f-i -^ O
r-H .-1 ^ (N CO rH

lp^_^(^^poo^-oooocogslp

OOC'1.^A^O(^IA^OOOOS
I-l (N 1-1

o
o

ipc<icp.;-<c>irHasc<)ytic>(N
Oi^i^oooooi^Oi-ii

i-ico<NO 't--05oooiii

Weight
treated.

pppoppppopo

00 -^ (M (>) Ol ^ ?D OI (N I'o »^
OS O 00 rH "S" t^ i-l l^ lO O 1— 1

t^iMOococoi-ioooooa)

Distance
on S.W.
Bearing

OOOSOSOSOSOt^OOIMtOOO

i-i(M(Neocoeo-*-*-ti<

Sample.

irl OS 1-1 CO 00 O to O O I-l OS
to t^ l^ ^ lO t^ 1^ to toi^

a g

[ 118 ]

The Dredgings of the Marine Biological Association
(1895-1906), as a Contribution to the Knowledge
of the Geology of the English Channel.

By
E. Hansford Worth, F.G.S.

JVith Plates VI-XVII (including five charts) and four figures in the Text.

INTRODUCTION,

Investigation of the geologic problems connected with the English
Channel is no new matter. Setting aside all speculations deriving
from the study of its coast-line, the first serious examination of the
bed of the Channel was made by E. A. C. Austen, and his results
published in the Froccedings of the Geological Society, 13 June, 1849.
Although, as he states, he had examined the sea-bed with dredge and
sounding-lead he has little to say as to its lithology. But none the
less his work is a notable contribution to our knowledge, and his
conclusions bear well the test of subsequent discoveries. Following
Austen, in 1871, Delesse published his Lithologie des Mers de France,
in which considerable attention is given to the Channel ; and the
lithology of its coastal deposits, and to some extent of the sea-bed, is
considered in detail. But, valuable as this work is, its chief interest
lies in the information given as to the nature of the sea-bottom, the
grade and extent of the varying deposits. Austen and Delesse alike,
and in agreement, point out the large areas of the Channel bed which
are occupied by stones, boulders, and pebbles of some size, and argue
on much the same lines as to the conditions which have formerly
existed there.

In 1879 the petrology of the English Channel was first seriously
attacked. Mr. A. K. Hunt then published in the Transactions of the
Devonshire Association a paper " On a Block of Granite from the
Salcombe Fishing Grounds." This was followed in 1880, 1881', 1883,
1885, and 1889 by five papers entitled, "Notes on the Submarine
Geology of the English Channel off the South Coast of Devon." And,
in 1896, the same author added later information in his paper on

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 119

" West Country Greological Problems," published in the same Transac-
tions. It is notewortliy tliat Mr. Hunt was on tlie track of a shore
prol)lein when his attention was thereby directed to the large Itoulders
occasionally trawled by the fishermen off the south coast of Devon,
and it is to these boulders that he confines his work. None the less
he stands the first to really approach the matter from the point of
modern petrology.

Meanwhile, in 1886, the late E. N. Woeth had taken up the
question on very similar lines, and in the Quarterly Journal of the
Geological Society, in August of that year, he reported the existence of
a submarine Triassic outlier off the Lizard ; in a subsequent paper, in
the Transactions of the Royal Cormvall Geological Society, he dealt with
a similar discovery off the Dodman.

Here the matter rested until, in 1895, Dk. Allen commenced an
investigation into the fauna and bottom-deposits near the thirty-
fathom line from the Eddystone grounds to Start Point. In the
course of this work numerous samples of the bottom-deposits were
taken, and in vol. v, no. 4, of this journal will be found, incorporated
in Dr. Allen's paper, some notes on these. The geologic results were
subsequently dealt with at greater length by the present writer in the
Transactions of the Devonshire Association, 1899, xxxi. pp. 356-75
(" The Bottom-Deposits of the English Channel from the Eddystone
to Start Point, near the Thirty-Fathom Line "). Since 1899 the
inshore grounds nearer Plymouth have also been subjected to an ex-
amination on similar lines, and additional geological information
obtained which has not hitherto been published.

In the present paper it is intended to incorporate the whole of the
previous results with the work done in 1906, of which latter an account
is given by Mr. Crawshay in the preceding pages. By Mr. A. E. Hunt's
kind consent an abstract of his petrographic work is added by way of
an appendix, which, with other short appendices, will bring together
the whole of our present knowledge of the geology and petrology of
the western part of the English Channel.

Mr. Crawshay's long line of dredgings, extending to a point near
50 miles S. 16r W. from the Eddystone, and Mr. Hunt's specimens,
which reach 43 miles E. of the Eddystone, between them cover a large
area ; while to the westward for a distance of 36 miles we have the
records of the late E. N. Worth. The difficulties which exist where
no field work is possible are naturally considerable, but, as the writer
has endeavoured to show elsewhere, very definite results, within certain
limits, may be obtained by an inquiry of this kind. Other usual
observations being barred, lithology becomes of the utmost importance,

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. I

120 DKEDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

and the microscope invaluable, since much of the minuter evidence
afforded by a rock is as direct and positive as that on a large scale.
It has been impossible to microscopically examine every variety found,
but one hundred sections in all have been prepared, and it is hoped
that most of the rocks may safely be grouped around those thus
represented.

Before entering upon detail, it may be well to pass in review the
manner in which the problem has been attacked by the various
investigators. Austen used both sounding-lead and dredge, he differ-
entiated the textures of the deposits, giving such statements as that
the gravel was of the size of almonds, beans, olives, walnuts, or the
ground was stony, or large angular and rounded blocks occurred ; he
mentions flint, granite, black granite, tin-stone, serpentine, etc., but
with no clearer lithological definition, and he records any shells of
littoral species found in the deeps. His observations covered the
whole Channel bed, but not closely, and extended from the Nymph
Bank to near Dover.

Delesse, with greater attempt at detailed location, but with less
information as to the size of the constituents of gravels, maps out the
Channel, discriminating between areas covered by ' argile,' ' craie,*
* sable/ ' sable riche en coquilles,' ' sable sur les roches pierreuses,'
' roches pierreuses,' * roches en pierres dfeagregees,' and ' roches en
pierres pourries ou decomposees.' He trusted to the sounding-lead for
his samples, and none is recorded as coarser than gravel, while none
which came from a greater depth than 28 metres is lithologically
examined in detail ; most were obtained very near the French coast.

Hunt chiefly derived his material from the occasional boulders
captured in fishermen's trawls off the south coast of Devon ; the
more part of these were decidedly heavy, ranging from about 3 to
about 12 cwt. All were examined microscopically by modern methods.

R N. WoKTH was supplied with blocks and stones of some size
which had become entangled in long lines or bolters ; he, too, examined
the rocks microscopically.

The Association has conducted systematic dredgings and endeavoured
to obtain fair samples of the bottom-deposits, including sands, gravels,
pebbles, and small boulders. Its gear has not permitted the capture
of the larger blocks which undoubtedly occur, but three of these have
been traced which have been obtained by fishermen, and hand speci-
mens taken. Where pebbles have been dredged, in the later work at
least, these have been entirely depended on for information as to the
lithology of the station ; in the earlier work, where pebbles were
scarce, the sand was examined in detail also. The superior facilities

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 121

which the Association enjoys advantages it greatly, but our debt to the
earlier workers remains undiminished, and in many instances they have
preserved evidence of great importance, whicli must otherwise have
been lost.

PETROLOGY.

To avoid the confusion which might arise from the system of
numbering the dredgings, whereby three distinct sets of samples have
all been numbered from 1 onward, the following method has been
adopted. Actual hand specimens from Dr. Allen's first dredgings are
referred to by the reference which the slides bear in the writer's
collection, similarly specimens from the second set of dredgings further
inshore, this will always be found to be a double number, such as
" 356/1 ", with sometimes a letter added also. In those cases where
sands only have been examined, all of which occur in Dr. Allen's
dredgings alone, the station number already published in the Journal is
used, prefixed by the letter "A." The most recent stations, of last
year's work, have the letter " M " set before the number ; and Mr.
Hunt's own figures are used with the letter " H " prefixed. Mr. E. N.
Worth's specimens bear a number prefixed to which is the letter " W."

Where more than one rock is described from a station small letters
are added after the number, by which the various specimens are
discriminated.

With reference to the dredgings taken last year, the rule has been
adopted that if several varieties or specimens of one class rock have to
be described, those are set first which are nearest the Eddystone, and
of those at equal distance precedence is given to the more western.

Throughout, the abbreviation " Edd." represents the word Eddystone.

GRANITES AND ALLIED ROCKS.

A large number of specimens, generally distributed over the area
examined, fall within the popular acceptation of the term ' G-ranite'
but the greater part of these when submitted to microscopic examina-
tion must be transferred to the Quartz-diorites in consequence of the
distinct preponderance of plagioclase felspars. Since it is impossible
to be certain in which class to place many of the specimens on mere
inspection, and it has been out of the question to section all, those as
to which any doubt exists are hereafter collected under the head of
' Granitoid Rocks.'

GRANITES.

Boulder. S.S.W. Start, 15 miles. Weight about 8 cwt.

A fine-grained white granite, with very uniformly disseminated
black mica. The little felspars are bright and fresh, and the simple

122 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

twinning of orthoclase shows in almost every one. Some of the
felspars are slightly tinted yellow liy powdery decomposition products.
The mica inclines to a reddish bronze lustre. The general structure of
the rock is very uniform.

In the section a portion of the felspars is seen to be slightly clouded.
The more part are orthoclase, but the orthoclase at places encloses
small crystals of triclinic felspars, of which larger areas also occur.
There is a tendency to zonal structure in some of the felspars, and
there are a few very small areas of graphic structure. The quartz con-
tains fairly numerous fluid inclusions with bubbles, some apparently
empty or gas-filled cavities, and frequent hair-like microlites, probably
apatite. Almost all the mica is brown and intensely pleochroic, but
associated with this is a little which is colourless and shows no
pleochroism. Apatite is present.

Boulder. S.W. by S. ^ S. Bolt Head, 19 miles. Weight 833 lbs.

A coarse rock of granitic texture. The felspar gives bright cleavage
surfaces, but is largely yellow-stained by dusty decomposition pro-
ducts ; there are no good crystal outlines. Black mica occurs in
patches of granular texture.

The large orthoclase areas are seen in section to be intergrown with
plagioclase, narrow irregular and only approximately parallel strips
of which penetrate the orthoclase ; all the strips in each crystal ex-
tinguish together and in a different position to the main crystal, and
all show lamellar twinning, the direction of which is constant through-
out the crystal ; thus the intergrowth gives rise to micro-perthite.
Those felspars, the less numerous, which are clouded with decomposi-
tion products, all appear to be triclinic. The quartz presents
numerous fluid inclusions, and in places is crowded with other in-
clusions which appear as a fine black dust ; there are also small
acicular microlites. The mica passes from olive-brown to dark green
on rotation, but there is a little that is almost colourless.

M. 58b. S. 22° W. Edd., 39 miles.

Medium textured granitic rock, pale flesh-coloured felspar, dark and
light mica. Structure granitic. Felspars clouded brown. There are
small patches of very well defined graphic structure, here the
felspar is clearer. Multiple twinning can still be detected in places.
Nearly half the felspar is still almost clear ; none of this shows plagio-
clase twins. Much colourless widely biaxial mica. Quartz plentiful,
crowded and lined by fluid inclusions, all with bubbles ; many of these
inclusions are of comparatively large size. There is a little apatite,
and in one part of the slide a chloritic mineral fills the cracks in a
felspar.

Jouni. Mar. Biol. Assoc, Vol. Kill.

Fio. 1.

Plate VI.

M. lla. B. 26° W. Edd,, 17'8 miles.
Micro-])eginatite.
Crossed nicols. x 29.

Fi(

M. lla. S. 26= W. Edd., 178 miles.

Mici'o-pegiiiatite.
Crossed nicols. x 97|.

To face p. 123.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 123

MICRO-PEGMATITE.

M. 11a. S. 26° W. Edd., 17-8 miles.

Red granitoid rock of fine grain, black mica.

Many felspars clouded entirely with red-brown decomposition pro-
ducts. Others, but fewer, almost clear. Some crystals are practically
opaque in the centre, clear outside, with successive narrow zones of
brown. Graphic structure is well developed ; often where it has
invaded a felspar crystal there will be included in it small perfect
crystals free from this structure. Eepeated twinning is rather rare.
The fluid inclusions in the quartz are very small, most have bubbles,
and extremely rarely a cubic crystal occurs. There is a little dark
green biotite and some ilmenite. Tlie graphic structure is the great
feature of the slide. (Plate VI, figs. 1 and 2.)

APLITE.

M. lie. S. 26° W. Edd., 178 miles.

A fine grained red granular rock with nests of schorl visible in the
hand specimen.

An aplite consisting of quartz and felspar only, except for the tour-
maline above mentioned. Structure microgranitic. Felspar red, and
somewhat clouded in parts, mainly orthoclase, but plagioclase present.
The quartz contains numerous and rather large fluid inclusions, nearly
all with bubbles, many with crystal inclusions. Most of the tourmaline
is indigo in colour, but some small crystals give brown to blue
pleochroism.

This might be a type rock from Dartmoor. It can be matched
in situ in the valley of the Tavy toward and below the lower end of
Tavy Cleave, and a precisely similar rock was found as a small boulder
resting on the rock bed some hundred feet below the surface of the
mud at Keyham Extension Works.

M. 27x. S. W W. Edd., IS'S miles.

A schorlaceous aplite very similar to M. lie, but which has not been
ndcroscopically examined.

M. 24g. S. 24° W. Edd., 22*5 miles.

Granular felsite of rich red colour.

The section exhibits microgranitic structure. All the felspars are
more or less clouded, a few considerably, and in some cases the ordinary
optical properties are destroyed. Orthoclase distinctly predominates,
but plagioclase twinning is not rare. The felspars show rounded out-
lines, marked in some instances by a narrow line of iron oxide, and
flakes of hematite occur in some of the crystals. The quartz shows

124 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

fairly numerous fluid inclusions of very small size. No other mineral
is present. The rock must be classed as an aplite.

Similar rocks to 24g are 34e, S. 28° W. Edd., 18-5 miles and 14e, S. 24° W.
Edd., 20 miles.

FELSITES.

Under this heading are placed a number of rocks which fall readily
into three groups, the first of which consists of two specimens, almost
identical in character, and very familiar in appearance to any one who
has an acquaintance with the Permian and Triassic rocks of Devon.

M. 27c. S. 19° W. Edd., 18-3 miles.

Compact red-purple felsite, with light porphyritic felspars and black
mica. Fracture trachytic. Has all the appearance of one of the new
red felsites.

M. 41a. S. 36J° W. Edd., 26-6 miles.

Felsite, texture trachytic, colour red-brown, small dull white por-
phyritic felspars, and a little black mica. Cryptocrystalline ground-
mass. A few idiomorphic felspars. A few porphyritic quartz crystals
with corroded outlines. Well developed, highly pleochroic brown mica.
The ground-mass contains numerous microlites, also many small fel-
spars outlined in or largely replaced by hematite. Flakes of hematite
are very numerous. A typical red-rock felsite.

The specimens placed in the second group form a series, commencing
at the Hand Deeps and terminating M. 62, 46-4 miles S. 25° W. from
the Eddystone. Of these the northernmost example has been subject to
considerable mineral alteration ; the southernmost is the most fresh,
and in the latter the porphyritic constituents are more prominent than
in any other. The northernmost is probably alone in that it contains
mica. All are strongly reminiscent of rocks elsewhere associated with
the Permian and Trias.

354/3d. Slopes of Hand Deeps.

A grey rock, with a slight shade of green and small purple spots.
Small felspars appear, colour buff, all somewhat decomposed. At
places the tint of this rock varies to yellow and to purple. There are
minute black specks of a hard mineral, and calcite is developed on
joint faces.

Microscopically the ground-mass is seen to be crypto-crystalline
with much minute calcite, areas of which mineral also occur. Small
felspars are scattered through this mass, and are about uniformly
divided between orthoclase and plagioclase. Quartz occurs in small
patches of interlocked granules. Mica is now almost entirely replaced
by pseudomorphs in limonite and magnetite.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 125

M. 36e. S. 37 V/. Edd., 17-5 miles.

Sub-conchoidal fracture. A dull purple rock, with parts more drab
in colour, flesli-tinted felspars in a horny matrix.
M. 35d. S. 32° W. Edd., 18 miles.

Grey, with warm tinge, purple mottling, sub-conchoidal fracture,
minute flesh-tinted felspars, mostly much decomposed.
M. 20a. S. 25° W. Edd., 20-5 miles.

Compact rock, very like o54/3d. in general appearance, but without
the small black grains and the calcite. Eather harder than that rock.
Grey in colour with warm tinge. Small flesh-coloured felspars, many
of which are decomposed.
M. 21b. S. 25° W. Edd., 21*2 miles.

Compact light grey-drab felsite, red mottling, porphyritic quartz.

Crypto-crystalline felsitic ground-mass, in which porphyritic quartz
is freely developed; the crystals, although rounded at the angles and at
places invaded by tlie felsitic matter, are largely bounded by straight
lines. Minute fluid inclusions are not uncommon, but comparatively
the quartz is clear. The felspars are almost formless and ill differen-
tiated from the ground-mass ; micro-perthite is indicated in some
individuals. There is a small yellow patch of some granular mineral
showing brilliant colours between crossed nicols. This same mineral
is also sometimes associated with the dusty, somewhat dendritic red
oxide of iron which gives the rock its mottling.

M. 62c. S. 25° W. Edd., 46-4 miles.

A green-grey compact rock, with much quartz and fels; ar irregularly
distributed. The felspar is pink. The porphyritic constituents more
prominent than in any of the preceding. Calcite is freely developed
on joint faces.

The third group would appear to bear a close relation to the
granites which form a prominent feature of the lithology of parts of
this area. In this respect they probably stand much as the very hard
India-red felsite so freely found on the Hallsands Beach does to the
granites of Dartmoor. All are horny in texture and have a sub-
conchoidal fracture.
M. 12f. S. 28° W. Edd., 17-8 miles.

No detailed notes taken of this rock.
M. 72d. S. 23" W. Edd., 19 miles.

India-red, compact felsite, occasional small red felspars.
M. 9a. S. 31° W. Edd., 21-7 miles.

Eed felsite. Green porphyritic felspars, compact texture.

Ground-mass crypto-crystalline. Felspars much decomposed, the green

1 26 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :

shade being clue to a secondary mineral. This traverses the crystals
along irregular cracks, and sometimes extends from them a short way
into the ground-mass, continuing the line of the crack ; it is also
generally distributed in the crystal. The less altered felspar is pale
red in colour. The green mineral is often fibrous and sometimes
granular, it has a high double refraction ; apparently we are dealing
with epidote. Quartz crystals, somewhat corroded, are rather common,
and show a fair number of very minute fluid inclusions with bubbles.

Titanic iron ore is scattered in small grains throughout the slide,
but much more freely developed and in larger forms at some places
where associated with the green decomposition product above referred
to. All the ilmenite is much altered and the smaller crystals are now
entirely leucoxene. Apatite occurs, and two much altered areas were
once apparently mica.

QUARTZ-DIOEITES, DIORITES, DOLERITES, AND DIABASE.

It is possible that exception may be taken to the manner in which
some specimens have been placed in the subdivisions of this group.
But the erection and maintenance of hard and fast boundaries, where
none such exist in nature, invariably brings the element of personal
judgment into play, and in most cases it will be found that ample
detail is given to enable the reader to reclassify the specimens to his
individual preferences.

No pretence can be made that any more than a few, and those the
most representative, of the rocks in this group are here given.

QUARTZ-DIOEITE.

M. 11, 1, S. 26° W. Edd., 17- 8 miles.

Brownish granitoid rock of medium grain. Texture granitic. Fel-
spars clouded light brown, but wherever the structure is not masked
by this show very closely repeated twinning. Outside the better
defined crystals there is some clearer and probably secondary felspar.
Quartz plentiful, traversed by streams of fluid inclusions in two or
more directions. The cracks in quartz and felspars alike are iron-
stained. Hornblende in short, well-marked, prism forms, pleochroism
light brown to rich green, two twinned crystals. Ilmenite occurs both
in hornblende and in felspars. A few minute crystals of apatite.
Quartz hornblende diorite.
M. 72e. S. 23° W. Edd., 19 miles.

Pale green rock, with close texture and fine grain, black or very dark
green spots of small size.

Micro-granitic structure. The minerals are felspar, quartz, horn-
blende, magnetite, mica, and augite. The felspars are clear in patches,

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 127

but otherwise much clouded, and all are plagioclases. The quartz
contains small and moderately numerous fluid inclusions. Hornblende
occurs in two forms ; some of it is almost certainly an original mineral,
and shows good basal sections, with inclusions, however, of other
minerals. Elsewhere the hornblende is more fibrous. The mica has
suffered considerable change, if I am right in so identifying a very
doubtful mineral, and very little unaltered augite remains. Might
almost equally well be classed as a quartz aphanite.

M. 9e. S. 31° W. Edd., 217 miles.

Dark grey crystalline rock of rather fine texture. Small felspars of
irregular shape and slightly greenish tint, small quartz granules, very
clear and bright.

The felspars are plagioclase, much clouded in the centre, quite clear
around the margins when crystal outline is shown. Some have obviously
been broken. In the felspars occur very numerous small prisms and
acicular forms of a clear mineral which may be zoisite. Some felspars
show an irregular zone of decomposition products a little within the
margin. Most of the quartz areas break down in some part to a
mosaic of interlocked granules. The quartz contains fluid inclusions.
Strain shadows show in both quartz and felspar. Hornblende, chiefly
of an olive shade, is freely developed, much is markedly uralitic. A
little chlorite occurs. There is some apatite, and a little ilmenite.

M. 9r. (Same location as last.)

Fine-grained grey rock, felspar and hornblende visible.

Plagioclase felspar, somewhat clouded, occasionally achieving good
crystal boundaries, and with a marked tendency to zoning from
secondary growth, clearer from decomposition than the centres. Ee-
peated twins somewhat frequent. Minute epidote has been freely
developed in many of the felspars, and granules of a mineral which is
apparently epidote. Fibrous hornblende is a prominent constituent,
occurring in large patches, spreading and extending between the
felspar areas ; principally it is of a green colour with a tendency to
blue ; here and there brown and olive shades occur, especially in the
interior of some of the larger patches. Quartz is fairly plentiful, with
numerous small fluid inclusions, most with bubbles, and a few
apparently include very small cubic crystals. Some apatite.

M. 19a. S. 28° W. Edd., 23-3 miles.

Dark greenish grey, granular crystalline. Felspars small and
slightly green in tint. Fine grain. Texture micro-granitic. Tlie
felspars a good deal clouded with pale brown decomposition products,
but with frequent clear patches. Some crystals with characteristic

128 DKEDGINGS OF THE MAKINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

microcline twinning. By far the greater part is probably, however,
oligoclase. Quartz abundant, in large areas of compound structure.
The quartz is traversed by narrow streams of fluid inclusions, and
contains small rod-shaped crystals, apparently of apatite. Both
massive and actinolitic hornblende occur. The pleochroism of the
former is pale yellow-brown, dark olive-green. At places a vivid
chlorite replaces some of the hornblende. The quartz is slightly iron-
stained in some of the cracks. Quartz hornblende diorite.

Four rocks apparently similar to the group M. 9e., M. 9r., and M. 19a.,

are —

(1) M. lib. S. 26° W. Edd., 17'8 miles.

Dark grey granitoid rock of fine grain.

(2) M. Ilk.

A finer texture of M. lib.

(3) M. 9q.

Dark grey, fine grained, felspars greenish.

(4) M. 50a. S, 16^ W. Edd., 30-9 miles.

Grey crystalline rock, minutely granular fracture, rather
small white felspars somewhat widely scattered.

M. 18a. S. 29° W. Edd., 23-4 miles.

Structure granitic, medium texture, colour grey.

Somewhat clouded felspar, apparently plagioclase. Graphic structure
in many crystals. Quartz traversed by broad streams of fluid inclusions,
some with bubbles ; hair-like microlites also occur, and some larger,
recognizable, apatite. There are two micas, the one colourless, the
other brown and intensely pleochroic, the extreme tint being a very
dark bronze green. Quartz mica diorite.

M. 58a. S. 22° W. Edd., 39 miles.

Black and grey granitoid rock, medium grain.

Granitic texture. Felspars in the main clear, but here and there
clouded with decomposition products. All apparently plagioclase and
probably oligoclase. The quartz clear, with small fluid inclusions and,
at places, hair-like microliths. Brown and oli^'^e-brown mica, strongly
pleochroic. Green and olive hornblende, always associated with mica,
but on the whole in less quantity. The hornblende and mica inter-
penetrate. A fair amount of apatite is present.

The rock must be classed as a quaitz-diorite, with hornblende as
well as mica present.

M. 80d. S. 16i° W. Edd., 489 miles.

Fine-grained brown granitoid rock, with black mica, texture granitic.
Felspar much altered and crowded with brown decomposition pro-

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 129

ducts, A few crystals appear zoned, some still show repeated twinning.
Much quartz, in which fluid inclusions are common; a majority of
these inclusions have bubbles. Brown mica. Apatite. Some iron-
staining. Quartz mica diorite.

DIORITE

M. 12d. S. 26° W. Edd., 17-8 miles.

A striking looking rock by reason of the lustre of its constituent
minerals. Very dark in colour, consisting as it does of a black mineral
in prismatic form, and a clear felspar. Some of the little prisms of
the black mineral are as much as 3 mm. in length.

The rock consists of a clear labradorite, in which, however, calcite
granules are developed here and there along cracks ; and a green
monoclinic pyroxene, segirine, in which a very marked schiller
structure has been set up, the microlites being of a dark brown.
Minute crystals of pyroxene appear in the felspars. Irregular patches
of an iron oxide, apparently magnetite, are common.

M. 35b. S. 32° W. Edd., 18 miles.

A fine grained, dark grey, granular rock with much mica. Besides
the dark mica there is obviously a lighter mineral, and the two are very
uniformly admixed.

The section shows this rock to be a mica-diorite. Kich brown mica
occurs freely in irregular plates, and felspar in mosaic. A minority of
the felspar granules are striated, a very few show decomposition pro-
ducts. An occasional crystal of apatite is present and a fair amount of
titanic iron ore in small grains. The general appearance of the rock is
very fresh.

A similar rock to M 35b. is

M. 79a. S. 16° W. Edd., 48-7 miles.

Dark grey, close textured, much mica in small form.

M. 9s. S. 31° W. Edd., 217 miles.

A dark coloured rock, the exterior of which shows large lustrous
black hornblende and dark drab and brown felspar. Fracture very un-
even and texture coarse.

The felspars in this rock are now almost indistinguishable as such, an
occasional very small patch showing repeated twinning being all that
remains unaltered ; for the rest they have given place to a granular and
fibrous mineral of high refraction and double refraction, and apparently
colourless, although the larger grains may have a palest shade of green.
The rest of the slide is occupied by fibrous pale green hornblende.
Ilmenite is common. The structure ophitic.

130 DKEDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

DOLERITE.

M. 14e. S. IT W. Edd., 20-3 miles.

A fine-grained even -textured rock of a distinct green colour. Some
iron pyrites show in the hand specimen. Numerous lath-shaped
felspar microlites with irregular terminations, all quite fresh and clear.
Pale bluish-green fibrous hornblende is quite tlie most prominent con-
stituent of the rock ; there is no general direction pursued by its fibres.
Scattered closely throughout the section are very irregular grains of a
minutely granular pale brown mineral of strong double refraction when
examined with high powers and strong light. Dirty white by reflected
light, this is probably leucoxene.

Curious little streams of (?) magnetite occur rather frequently, in
forms suggesting that they are reminiscent of some original prismatic
mineral.

M. 16b. S. 29° W. Edd., 20-9 miles.

Pale green minutely granular rock.

A slide of confused texture. Fibrous green hornblende. Felspar
with a tendency to lath-shaped sections. Apparently no quartz. Grain
very fine.

M. 21e. S. 25. W. Edd., 21 '7 miles.

A close-textured grey rock, looks much like a grit.

Tlie most prominent feature in the section is the abundance of pale
yellowish-green acicular or fibrous mineral in diverging bundles,
which often have the appearance of having been drawn together at the
middle. Here and there almost colourless, at other places this mineral
takes a blue-green tint, and it is almost certainly actinolite. These
bundles are largely set in a crypto-crystalline ground-mass, which is
freely invaded by shorter prisms of actinolite. There are also felspar
crystals of irregular outline, some certainly plagioclase, some possibly
orthoclase, and micro-porphyritic quartz is about as frequent as the
felspar. There is a considerable sprinkling of grains of titanic iron ore.

M. 80c. S. 16i° W. Edd., 48-9 miles.

Clouded white felspars, lath-shaped in part, in part conforming to
the interspaces between the augites which constitute the more part of
the rock. Portions of the felspars are still quite clear. The augite is
in the main quite fresh, but traces of chloritic products occur.
Characteristic patches of ilmenite.

DIABASE.

M. 27a. S. 19° W. Edd., 18 3 miles.

Compact dark grey rock, green felspar and hornblende. Augite,
hornblende, chlorite, plagioclase, leucoxene, quartz. The augite, pale

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 131

brown, apparently existed in ophitic form ; it is now almost entirely
replaced by hornblende. Tlie hornlilende is cliietly pale green, with a
slight blue shade and orange-brown tints along cracks and cleavages.
The titanic iron ore is entirely associated with the hornblende, and is
present in large forms and l)ranching growtlis. Chlorite occurs in
fairly large areas, and exhibits marked pleochroism from pale brown
pink to pale bluish green. The felspars are pale pink, rather fresh in
appearance, but sometimes traversed along cleavages by chlorite ;
they have a tendency to elongated parallelogram section. Quartz
shows good crystal outline.

M. 14v. S. 24° W. Edd., 20 miles.

A small hard pebble, distinctly green in colour, and having small
somewhat vesicular looking cavities on the surface.

In section, seen to be a network of small lath-shaped felspars set in
a grey and green ground-mass. Chlorite is disseminated throughout
the slide, and the larger patches, which are not infrequent, are
evidently after augite, as they are associated with unaltered remnants
of the latter mineral. Calcite occurs, not only mingled with the
ground-mass, but also in larger patches; the solution of these has
probably left the cavities on the surface of the pebble. There are two
or three recognizable crystals of ilmenite and scattered black grains
that are either this mineral or magnetite.

M. 15c. S. 2T W. Edd,, 20-3 miles.

Greenish hornblendic rock.

Large patches of very pale hornblende. Between these a fibro-
granular ground-mass of low double refraction, prismatic and basal
sections of zoisite of sufficient size for discrimination occur rather
freely. Some iron ore. What other minerals may be present in
minute forms cannot be determined.

Zoisite-amphibolite.

M. 22c. S. 25° W. Edd., 21*9 miles.

Dark green rock, massive hornblende.

Shows a very little felspar, and a few patches of augite. In the rest
it consists of reedy hornblende of very varying tint, from almost
colourless to olive-brown and l:)lue-green, all in light shades.

GRANITOID ROCKS

M. 31. S. 25° W. Edd., 15 miles.

Granitic texture. Brown and black, ditto brown.
Felsitic. Brown, fine-grained, granular.

132 DEEDGINGS OF THE MAKINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

M. 36. S. ST W. Edd., 17-5 miles.

Granitic texture, f. Medium grain, white felspar, l^lack mica.

g. Fine grain, pink, black specks.
Felsitic texture, b. Brown, granular.

M. 33. S. 25° W. Edd., 17-5 miles.

Diorite.
M. 11, M. 12, M. 13. S. 26^ W. Edd., 17-8 miles.
M. 11. Granitic texture, g. Fine-grained brown, black mica.
M. 12. Hornblende Diorite.

Granitic texture. Red with abundance of mica. Brown of fine
grain. Brown of medium grain. Grey.

M. 35. S. 32° W. Edd., 18 miles.
Granitic texture, f. Brown.
M. 27. S. ir W. Edd., 18*3 miles.

Granitic texture. Pale grey.

M. 26. S. 20° W., 18-4 miles.

Two quartz-hornblende-diorite pebbles.
M. 34. S. 28° W. Edd., 18-5 miles.

Felsitic texture, g. Brown, fine granular.

M. 72. S. 23° W. Edd., 19 miles.

Granitic texture. Medium grain, grey and brown, brown mica.

Brown. Eed with black mica.
Felsitic texture, c. Porcellanous cream-coloured.
M. 14. S. 24° W. Edd., 20 miles.

Granitic texture, k. Red medium grain, and several other varieties.
Felsitic texture, t. Close-grained buff.

M. 15. S. 27° W. Edd., 203 miles.

Granitic texture. Coarse-grained, white felspar, yellow-stained, black
mica, much like boulder from S.W. by S. \ S. Bolt Head, 19 miles.
Fine-grained grey, brown and silvery mica.
Brown with white mica.
M. 20. S. 25° W. Edd., 20 5 miles.

Granitic texture, f. Black and white, rather coarse, some hornblende.
e. Black and buff, fine grained, (?) some hornblende.

M. 16. S. 29° W, Edd., 209 miles.

Gi'anitic texture. Distinctly granitic in appearance, flesh-coloured
felspars, orthoclase twins, quartz.
Grey and brown, fine grained.
M. 21. S. 25° W. Edd., 21-2 miles.
A few grey granitic rocks.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 133

M. 30. S. 21° W. Edd., 21-5 miles.

Granitic texture, d. Coarse, pale cream-coloured, dark mica.

M. 9. S. 31° W. Edd., 217 miles.

(Jranitic texture. 1. Medium grain, red felspars.
m. Medium grain, buff felspars.
r. Fine-grained grey.
Medium grain, brown and black.

M. 40. S, 38^ W. Edd., 217 miles.

Granitic texture. Brown, medium grain.
Fclsitic texture. Brown, granular.
Greenish grey.

M. 22. S. 25° W. Edd., 21-9 miles.

Granitic texture, b. Buff and brown felspar, black hornblende,
medium texture.

M. 24. S. 24° W. Edd., 22-5 miles.

Fehitic texture, c. Pale grey, compact, white mica. Bed.

M. 25. S. 24° W. Edd., 23 miles.

Granitic texture, b. Brownish, fine grained, (?) hornblende.

M. 19. S. 28° W. Edd., 23-3 miles.

Granitic texture, b. Dark grey, fine grained, much dark mica.

M. 18. S. 29° W. Edd., 23*4 miles.

Granitic texture. Brown and grey, medium grain, pale grey felspars.

M. 43. S. 21° W. Edd., 28-8 miles.

Fehitic texture. Brown-grey, granular.

M. 77. S. 11° W. Edd., 38-8 miles.

Granitic texture. Brown, very fine grain.
Light brown, fine grain, black mica.

M. 58. S. 22° W. Edd., 39 miles.

Granitic texture. The granitoid rocks occur in rather large pebbles,
almost small boulders.
Grey, rather coarse, clear felspars, black mica.
Grey, rather fine, clear felspars, black mica.

M. 62. S. 25° W. Edd., 46-4 miles.

Fehitic texture, c. Compact, greenish grey, with pink felspars and
porphyritic quartz.
d, A somewhat similar rock, more granular, felspars white, some

hornblende.
Also, pink, saccharine texture.

134 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

M. 80. S. 16|° W. Edd., 48 9 miles.

Granitic texture. Brown-grey, fine-grained, black mica.

Felsitic tcdure. Light brown-grey, ])lack mica, apparently a variant
of above.

All the above granitoid rocks are described from megascopic ex-
amination only, and the list is inserted chiefly in order to point out
the localities in which this class of material has been found. To
adequately deal with all the varieties a great number of sections would
have been required, but probably those which have been microscopically
examined give a fair general idea of the whole.

SCHORL ROCK.

Eocks consisting of tourmaline and quartz ; placed liere, although
undoubtedly in a sense metamorphic, on account of their usual associa-
tion with granite.

356/4a. W. i S. Bolt Head, 4| miles.

A rather small pebble.

This rock consists of quartz and tourmaline. Much of the quartz is
secondary ; in part it forms a mosaic, in parts it extends from original
crystals with which its crystal axis corresponds. The primary quartz
contains fluid inclusions with bubbles, the bubble in many instances
occupying more space than the fluid ; these inclusions are very
numerous and rather large. The secondary quartz contains few and
very small fluid inclusions. Acicular schorl is scattered throughout
the slide, sometimes in almost fibrous radial bunches, at others in
slender, well-defined prisms, radially or otherwise arranged ; there is
also some more massive schorl. The colour is chiefly light blue to rich
blue, but blue-green occurs, and occasionally olive-brown.

M. 31a. S. 25° W. Edd., 15 miles.

A schorl rock of Dartmoor type.

Ground-mass a quartz mosaic. The quartz contains many fluid
inclusions, some of which, in addition to a bubble, have also cubic
crystals in the fluid. These cubic crystals are, in fact, very common.
The slide is crowded with granular tourmaline, chiefly a very dark
brown colour, almost opaque, but a few grains are blue-green.

M. 31g.

Schorl rock. The general ground of a brown shade, an intimate
mixture of rather pale brown tourmaline and quartz. Frequent areas
of quartz partially invaded by acicular tourmaline. Some cracks are
also filled by quartz. The quartz areas all present a mosaic, in
which some grains contain many more fluid inclusions with bubbles

Journ. Mar. Biol Assoc, Vol. Fill.

Fir;. 1.

Plate VII.

354/1. N.W. by N. (mag.) Zdd., i mile.
Hornblende gneiss, with garnets.
Ordinary light, x 141.

Fifi. 2.

M. 62a. S. 25° W. Edd., 46 4 miles.

CruHhed jilagioelase felspar in chlorite schist.
Crossed nicols. x 29.

To face p. 135.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 135

than do others. Small cubic crystals are not infrequent in these
inclusions.

Schorl rock also occurs at 36a, S. 54" W. Edd., 17-5 miles ; 72, S. 23° W.
Edd., 19 miles ; 14f, S. 41° W. Edd., 20 miles.

ANDESITES.

354/4b. 6| miles W. from Rame Head.

Strictly speaking a felsite. Eed- brown felsitic ground- mass, with
porphyritic orthoclase, quartz, and dark mica. One of several pieces
here dredged, with every indication of being practically in situ. Is
much like the andesitic felsite of Withnoe, but lacks the flow structure
sometimes present in the latter. The similarity of the specimens to
many, however, which have been collected at Withnoe practically
amounts to identity. Thus to the Cawsand mass and the two near
Withnoe we have to add another, and a submarine, patch of igneous
rock of the New Red Sandstone period. Apparently this exposure
is of some considerable area. A conglomerate containins; large frag-
ments of this rock was taken in the same dredging.

M. 15a. S. 27° W. Edd., 20-3 miles.

Brownish-grey trachytic rock.

Well-marked flow structure. Ground-mass a devitrified glass (pala-
gonite). Some augite developed in rare crystals and crystalline areas.
Flakes of very dark brown mica rather frequent. Lines and micro-
dendritic growths of iron ore (?) hematite. Occasional patches of calcite.

M. 15. Also yielded a more red variety of the above.

GNEISS,

Some latitude must be allowed in any classification which attempts
to discriminate Gneiss from Schist in this area. If anything, the writer
leans toward identification as the former in doubtful cases.

354/1. N.W. by N. Edd., \ mile.

A large stone or small boulder, angular with freshly fractured
surface. A grey-green foliated rock with plates of brown mica and
numerous garnets up to 1"75 mm. in diameter. Quartz fills thin joints
at right angles to the planes of foliation. The mica is so developed as
to give to the rock an easy cleavage.

The pale-pink garnets are a characteristic feature ; these are much
cracked, and around them bend the less resisting minerals. There is
much blue-green actinolitic hornblende, the blades of which all
approximately conform to one direction. Mica is in much less
quantity than would appear from the hand specimen ; it is intensely
pleochroic, from pale straw-colour to dark cinnamon-brown ; its
occurrence is practically limited to the neighbourhood of the garnets.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. K

136 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

Touching and partially enveloping the garnets is a certain amount of
chlorite. Water-clear felspar in mosaic form fills all interspaces ; it
appears to be albite, and inclusions of apatite are frequent. There
seem to be some rare fragments of pale brown-augite. (Plate VII, fig. 1.)

354/3f. Hand Deeps.

A schistose or foliated rock, dark steel-grey in colour, and highly
lustrous from the abundance of pale mica. Eare eyes of red felspar
occur.

The section does not pass through any of the felspar eyes. There is
a distinct banded structure : bands in which hornblende predominates,
bands consisting almost entirely of white mica, bands of felspar
mosaic. But in every layer tliere is some slight admixture of the
other minerals. The hornblende is both uralitic and actinolitic with
very distinct indigo tint here and there. It is not entirely free from
chlorite. The mica appears perfectly fresh and shows no trace of
pleochroism. Both hornblende and mica exhibit a parallelism of
arrangement. The felspar is apparently albite, quite clear, with
apparently a casual grain of quartz. Grains of sphene are not un-
common.

355/1. West side of East Rutts.

A brown stained schistose or gneissic rock, exhibiting much contor-
tion.

No part of the slide is entirely free from iron stain. Contorted
bands of limonite traverse it, and these appear to have been developed
at the expense of mica, bleached residual blades of which are
associated with it. All the mica is niucli bent. Parallel with, and
touching the limonite, are narrow interrupted bands of calcite. The
general ground-mass is a mosaic of slightly stained clear minerals, and
apparently consists of albite (?) and quartz in about equal proportions,
the quartz showing fluid inclusions with bubbles, and the albite being
rather frequently twinned.

M. 36p. S. 37° W. Edd., 17-5 miles.

A mica schist or gneiss, shows clear felspar, some in moderate-sized
crystals, and mica which is in general rather silvery but in small
patches dark bronze.

There are two orders of felspar, the one represented by slightly
clouded crystals of irregular outline and exhibiting signs of crush, the
other present in mosaic form. The repeated twinning of plagioclase
appears almost constantly in the former, but not at all in the latter.
And some few of the larger crystals extinguish differently in different
zones, although there is no appearance of zonal structure except

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL, 137

between crossed nicols. The mosaic in places is of larger and irregular
granules, in places of small granules of lenticular form the longer axes
of which lie parallel to each other and form lines flowing round the
crystals of the first order. The mica conforms in general direction to
these same lines, it shows moderately strong pleochroism, and its face
colours range from rich cinnamon-brown in basal planes to a rather
pale olive-brown in sections perpendicular to these planes. A very
little apatite is present.

M. 16a. S. 2r W. Edd., 20 9 miles.

Schistose rock. Dark grey and pale brown, lamination very clearly
defined ; fissile. Much dark grey mica on joint faces.

Structure schistose. Irregularly bounded felspar areas occasionally
associated with quartz form " eyes," around which the other minerals
are bent. These felspars are all mvich clouded ; some are thickly set
with microlites, but polysynthetic structure is clearly discernible in
many instances. Most of the felspars are curiously isolated from their
surroundings and have a rounded form, as though due to friction.
White mica is abundantly developed, forming streams in which the
felspars appear as islands. Mingling with the mica is dull green horn-
blende in short blades and in grains. There are numerous long
patches and irregular areas of quartz mosaic, the quartz containing
some apparently fluid inclusions, prismatic microlites, the larger of
which are seen to be hornblende, and rather frequent blades of the
latter mineral. The mica does not appear to invade the quartz areas.
Apatite is fairly plentiful. There is occasional staining by iron oxide,
especially between the quartz grains and the blades of mica.

This rock is a gneiss, and has evidently been subjected to extreme
pressure.

M. 9k. S. 31= W. Edd., 217 miles.

A grey gneiss.

Schistose structure well marked. Somewhat clouded felspars appear
to form the only remaining original mineral. These show plagioclase
twinning; some have been broken across with the development of a
felspar mosaic along the line of fracture. There are two orders of
mosaic structure, the one coarser and composed of a very clear mineral,
the other much finer and containing minute hornblende and apparently
zoisite. For the more part the large felspars are surrounded by this
finer material, into which they have the appearance of having been
driven. Ilmenite, hornblende, and zoisite mark out the planes of
schistosity. The hornblende is almost entirely in minute blades and
needles of a bright l)lue-green. Prisms of apatite are frequent in the

138 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

mosaic. Of this mosaic, which is probably almost all felspar, it should
be noted that the coarser part is formed of entirely irregular inter-
locking granules ; in the finer part the granules all appear lenticular,
and their longer axes conform to the planes of schistosity.

From M. 9 a coarse gneiss was also noted, and M. 36cl is but a slight
variant of M. 36p,

M. 25c. S. 24° W. Edd., 23 miles is a coarse gneiss with white opaque
felspar and grey-green chlorite.

SCHISTS.
MICA SCHIST.
354/3/e. Hand Deeps.

A mica schist in which micaceous layers greatly contorted and con-
voluted alternate with granular layers of quartz and garnet. This
rock has not been microscopically examined.

Fig. 1. Mica Schist
from Hand Deeps.

M. 31f. S. 25° W. Edd., 15 miles.

A grey schist of very fine grain, traversed by rather broad lighter-
coloured bands.

The section shows a distinctly foliated rock, the lighter parts are a
clear quartz mosaic ; I can detect no felspar ; the quartz shows numerous
fluid inclusions, some with very small bubbles. The darker parts
appear to consist of a scaly mica of a yellow tint, associated with
which is a little limonite and black granular matter which may be
carbonaceous.
M. llx. S. 26= W. Edd., 1T8 miles.

Micaceous schist, the planes of schistosity well marked by lustrous
bronze mica, cleaves very perfectly.

The section shows, in addition to mica, a granular mosaic, which
certainly in the main consists of quartz but also contains felspar, which
latter can only be detected by its biaxial figure in convergent light.
The quartz has, in the larger grains, fluid inclusions with bubbles. The
mica is of a rich brown colour, but some few rather well-developed
crystals are colourless. The basal sections show numerous acicular
microlites, and also very dark brown patches, almost opaque, surround-
ing small crystals which are apparently zircon.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 139

M. 9c. S. 31° W. Edd., 21-7 miles.

A schistose rock of light brownish-grey colour and rather pearly
lustre ; small darker spots mark an " eye ' structure.

The general body of the rock is crypto-crystalline, polarizing in low
tints. Streams of mica in minutest scales are developed in this
ground-mass, especially near the " eyes," which largely consist of this
mineral associated with a felspar mosaic in which some granules are
large enough for identification. The basal planes of the mica follow
one general direction throughout the slide. The dark colour of the
" eyes " arises from irregular plates, aggregates of an olive-brown sub-
stance with moderate double refraction, but this may be somewhat
masked by the colour.

M. 43a. S. 21° W. Edd., 28 8 miles.

A thin pebble of dark grey schist.

A minutely granular rock, consisting of quartz, felspar probably
all plagioclase, white mica (sericite), epidote (?), chlorite, and traversed
by a vein of calcite. Apatite is present in some quantity. The
felspar granules freely exhibit the repeated twinning of plagioclase.
M. 20g. S. 25° W. Edd., 20 5 miles.

Closely resembles M. llx, but the mica has a more decidedly bronze
lustre. In both these rocks there are stray features of resemblance to
the series from the immediate locality of the Eddy stone.
M. 31c. S. 25° W. Edd., 15 miles.

Eather like a fine-grained granitoid rock, now stained brown by
exposure, but fissile from the development of silvery mica along
definite planes.

M. 36c. S. 37° W. Edd., 17-5 miles.

Largely quartz, but with possibly some felspar, silvery mica chiefly
confined to the cleavage planes, which are stained pink with iron oxide.
A very fissile rock.

CHLORITE SCHIST.
Off Stoke Point.

A silvery-green schist, consisting of vivid blue-green chlorite changed
here and there to a dull orange, at which places it exhibits a moderate
double refraction, and water-clear felspar in which no repeated twins
are observable (the section is small). There is also apatite, and much
of a granular dusty brown mineral, buff coloured by reflected light,
leucoxene.
356/1. 4 to 5 miles S. | E. from Prawle Point.

A chlorite schist with bands of quartz one-eighth of an inch in
width.

140 DREDGINGS OF THE MAklNE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIAtlON :

356/2. 3 miles S.S.E. i E. from Prawle Point.

A silvery grey chlorite schist with minutely wrinkled surfaces of
chlorite precisely like the shore rocks. Much chlorite.

These last three specimens are practically identical with rocks to be
found in situ on shore in the Start Point to Bolt Tail district. None
of the specimens show signs of travel or wear.

M. 62a. S. 25° W. Edd., 46-4 miles.

A mixture of felspar and quartz, largely the former. Micro-mylonitic
structure well developed and some of the felspars greatly deformed.
One in especial, with well-marked plagioclase twinning, is much bent
in reverse directions, is cracked, and finally at each end passes into
mylonite. The slide is full of similar evidence of deformation. As
a whole the felspar has a reddish tinge ; some portions are crowded
with microlites of high double refraction, probably calcite. Calcite is
rather freely developed, filling interspaces and cracks. Chlorite plays
a similar part, and the two are associated. In places the chlorite is
thickly strewn with minute grains and blades of a feebly translucent
brown mineral.

If the presence of original felspars is to be the criterion this rock
should have been included among the gneisses. (Plate YII, fig. 2.)

HORNBLENDE SCHISTS WITH AUGITE.
356/4/b. W. i S. Bolt Head, 4| miles.

A very compact dark greenish-grey schist with occasional small
specks of pyrites.

The slide looks distinctly patchy, augite areas of brown tint, and
granular augite. Much uralitic hornblende, blue in ordinary light,
with a faint tinge of green, pleochroism brownish grey to blue-green.
This mineral dominates the section. Much calcite, with a tendency to
form broad bands. And, filling irregular interspaces, a mosaic of water-
clear granules, containing both felspar and quartz. Calcite mingles
with this mosaic. A little leucoxene occurs.

M. 80b. S. 16i° W. Edd., 48-9 miles.

Fine-grained dark grey rock ; some pyrites.

Structure schistose. Marked in part by veins of secondary quartz
in mosaic. The felspar is entirely clouded with decomposition pro-
ducts ; it lies irregularly mingled with very pale green fibrous horn-
blende. The latter has apparently developed at the expense of a pale
pink augite, of which a fair quantity remains ; in turn the hornblende
has here and there given place to chlorite. Irregular grains of a feebly
translucent mineral, probably leucoxene, are plentiful, and have a dis-
tinct tendency to linear arrangement.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 141

CALC SCHIST.

M. 14r. S. 2r W. Edd., 20 miles.

A compact rock with well-marked cleavage, the planes of which are
not, however, closely set. Broken across the cleavage, tlie colour is a
warm grey and tlie texture close and uniform. The cleavage planes
show a somewhat pearly lustre and are stained in parts with red
oxide of iron. The rock gives distinct effervescence with cold acid,
with warm acid effervesces freely ; fragments retain their form,
however, but from the surface a few small quartz grains are set
free.

Tlie section shows numerous clear grains set in granular cement,
with which, in places, is much red oxide of iron. Colourless mica
(sericite) is rather sparingly developed, being more prominent on the
cleavage planes. The clear grains are quartz, with the very rare
exception of a felspar, and many show boundaries imposed upon them
by the adjacent calcite and dolomite, which freely exhibits the rhombus
form of larger or smaller dimensions. The granular cement consists, in
fact, almost entirely of minutely crystalline dolomite and calcite, a
high power being required to detect the crystal forms. A very large
proportion of the quartz grains show secondary enlargement, the
secondary quartz having the same crystal axes as the original grain.
The boundary between the original and secondary is just such a dark
line as occurs when a mineral of greater refractive index is enclosed
in a mineral of less. Hair-like microlites are not uncommon in the
primary quartz, but none pass over into the marginal secondary
growth. In the loose powder obtained by treating this rock in hot
acid I found one small crystal of tourmaline.

The fact that the rock retains its form after treatment with hot acid
shows that neither the iron nor the dolomite are necessary cements,
the secondary quartz being in itself sufticient.

Presumedly it is best to call the specimen a calcschist.

SERPENTINE.
M. 24h.

A small jet-black pebble with very smooth surface.

The section shows yellowish-green serpentine with "lattice" structure,
traversed by roughly parallel streams of dense black material, which
also occurs irregularly in cracks of varying direction, and more
or less densely diffused in certain parts of the slide over areas which
appear reminiscent of the original structure of the rock. The
serpentine varies considerably in its depth of shade. At one point
it is blue-green around the margin of a clear mineral, which appears
possibly to be a plagioclase felspar.

142 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :

The serpentine, some of which is colourless, splits up under crossed
nicols into doubly refracting bands and isotropic portions.

The association of felspar with a massive serpentine is rare, but
Professor Bonney has recorded an instance from the Lizard district.

This specimen acquires some value, despite its small size, since in
Hunt's series there occurs a serpentine boulder, H. 6, of 5 cwt.

QUARTZITES.

A number of quartzites, very similar to some in the Budleigh
pebble-bed, have been dredged from a great many stations. Up to
the present no fossils have been found in them. These rocks vary in
colour, being purple, red, light red, buff', grey and white, and are
associated with very hard grits which have not been sufficiently
examined.

M. 80. S. 16f W. Edd., 48-9 miles.

Purple quartzite, very compact in structure. Quartz grains, sub-
angular and of very uniform size, fluid enclosures common. The
cementing material silica with much iron oxide ; this cement appears
to be minutely granular. An occasional quartz grain shows hair-like
microlites.

This may be taken as a type. Other Puiyle Quartzites were dredged
at Stations M. 31, M. 36, M. 13, M. 35, M. 27, M. 26, M. 34, M. 29, M. 14,
M. 20, M. 9, M. 40, M. 22, M. 25, M. 43, M. 50, M. 67, and M. 80.

Red quartzites from M. 11, M. 72.

Light red quartzites from M. 13., M. 30.

Buff quartzites from M. 34, M. 20, M. 22, M. 41, M. 43.

White quartzite from M. 21.

M. llf. S. 26° W. Edd., 17-8 miles.
A grey grit.
A little mica appears in the section. The rock is practically a quartzite.

SEDIMENTARY ROCKS.

Under the heading of sedimentary rocks have been included all
altered varieties, except such as may possibly have been fully meta-
morphosed to schists and quartzites.

CARBONIFEROUS AND EARLIER.
SANDSTONES AND GRITS.
354/4k. 6^ miles W. from Rame Head.

A red micaceous grit, probably Devonian.
M. 9b. S. 31° W. Edd., 217 miles.

A light brown sandstone of flaggy structure, bedding marked by
slight variations of tint. Possibly Devonian.

Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, Vol. VIII.

Fig. 1.

Plate VIII.

M. 9d. S. 31^ W. Edd. , 21 7 miles.
Grit, showing large grain, A-l>.

Ordinary light, x 29.

Fig. 2.

M. 9d. S. 31 W. Edd., 21-7 miles.

Grit, sliowing compound structure of grain ; at end

A striated felspar, at end B (quartz niosaic.
Crossed nicols. x 29.

To face j). 143.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 143

M. 9d.

A rather light grey rock, which appears to be a compact and very
fine-grained grit ; looks much like many grits of the Devonian age.

The microscope confirms preliminary examination ; this rock is a
grit of close texture. A considerable proportion of the granules are
felspar, many showing repeated twins.

A number of the grains prove to be of compound structure, and are
portions of quartz and felspar mosaics from some original schist or
gneiss. Further than this, three of the larger grains are compounded
of portions of felspars with bent striation and portions of quartz
mosaic, being, in fact, derived microscopic specimens of gneiss. As
bearing on the age of the rocks which have supplied the fragments,
this slide is distinctly interesting. The interstitial matter largely con-
sists of a rather pale chlorite in which occur rare blades of pale mica,
There is some ilmenite, apparently detrital. (Plate YIII, figs. 1 and 2 )

M. llf. S. 26° W. Edd., 17-8 miles.

A fine grey grit slightly browned by exposure. Much like last in
general appearance, and may well be of Devonian formation, already
included as quartzite, the cement being apparently silica. The grains
are sub-angular and include a few felspars. There are rather
numerous grains of sphene, some irregular, some of the characteristic
lozenge shape, all apparently derived.

Grits, not microscopically examined, were also taken at M. 31, M. 27,
M. 26, M. 14, M. 20, M. 16, M. 9, M. 40, M. 19, M. 41, M. 77, and M. 80.
SLATES.

Unaltered slate was scarce, as might be expected from the fact that
it would usually be associated with much harder material, and probably
be soon destroyed.

M. 77a. S. 11° W. Edd., 38-8 miles.

Dark compact shale, a clay slate.

Under the microscope appears built up of minute grains of high
double refraction. There are frequent traces of minute organisms,
some possiljly foraminifera. Some shell fragments still consist of car-
bonate of lime, and numerous forms of circular section are infilled with
calcite.
M. 39. S. 38" W. Edd., 219 miles.

A decomposed slate.

ALTERED SLATES.

354/4J. 6^ miles W. from Rame Head.

A slate of Devonian type, evidently altered by the proximity of the
andesite dyke which here occurs.

144 DKEDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :

M. 14j. S. 24° W. Edd., 20 miles.

Almost black, a very compact rock with sub-conchoidal fracture,
and lustre somewhat like a quartzite. The worn surface shows rather
minute banded structure.

The same banded structure shows in section when examined by the
unaided eye, but is less prominent under the microscope ; this is a
sedimentary rock altered by contact metamorphism. The general
ground-mass is a crypto-crystalline substance, rising to a minute
mosaic here and there, and probably having a complex mineral com-
position. Felspar almost certainly plays an important part. In this
there occur small grey-clouded areas, presenting sections which are
chiefly of somewhat ill-defined rhombus shape, and which in certain
positions completely extinguish. One such area has a portion clear of
dusty products, and this shows high double refraction in a bright and
pure colour ; other similar instances occur. The dusty material shows
a tendency to arrange itself in zones and crosses, and from examina-
tion of a great number of these imperfect crystals there can be no doubt
that the rock is crowded with andalusite in a condition bordering on the
chiastolite form. For the rest, there is much small brown mica, and
titanic iron ore, mostly in very small grains, is quite plentiful. Such
a rock might easily arise from the metamorpliism of a Devonian or
Carboniferous slate by contact with a large boss of igneous material.

Altered slates, having the appearance of being baked by proximity to
igneous rock, were also taken at tlie following stations, but have not
been examined microscopically.

M. 11, M. 34, M. 72, M. 14, M. 15, M. 21 (common), M. 24 (very common),
M. 17, M. 18.

LIMESTONE.

M. 26b. S. 20° W. Edd., 18-4 miles.

A blue-grey limestone, veined and mottled with lighter calcite, nnicli
like some of the South Devon middle Devonian series. Consists
almost entirely of irregular interosculating calcite patches, traversed
by cracks filled with clear calcite. The calcite forms give indication of
former organic remains, and at three places undoubted sections of
madrepore occur. Around and between the boundaries of some of the
calcite areas are very irregular and much folded lines of a granular
black substance, apparently carbonaceous.

NEW RED SANDSTONE.

CONGLOMERATE.
354/3b. Hand Deeps.

A red conglomerate, certainly of the New Ked Sandstone period.
Among the derived constituents are quartz grains of some size

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 145

showing mosaic structure and containing fluid inclusions with bubbles.
Other grains of felspar mosaic precisely similar to that occurring in tlie
neighbouring schists and gneisses. Blades of mica that may have been
similarly derived. Quartzites, and fragments of highly cleaved slates,
or very fine-grained schists.

Calcite or dolomite, probably the latter, is very prominent, filling
the interspaces.

354/4b. 6 J miles W. from Rame Head.

Conglomerate with fragments of andesite.

SANDSTONE.
354/3C. Hand Deeps.

A coarse, red, micaceous sandstone.

354/ 2a. S.W. Edd., 2 miles.

Variegated sandstone, fine texture, red and grey.

354/2b.

Buff sandstone, almost salmon coloured.

354/2C.

Fine-grained compact red marly sandstone, sub-jaspideous.

M. 31. S. 25° W. Edd., 15 miles.

Red sandstone and buff sandstone.

M. 32. S. 25° W. Edd., 16-3 miles.

Eed sandstone and yellow sandstone.

M. 10. S. 26^ W. Edd., 17 8 miles.

Red sandstone.

M. 33. S. 25° W. Edd., 17-5 miles.
Red sandstone.

M. 34. S. 28° W. Edd., 18-5 miles.

Variegated, red and grey.

M. 27. S. 19° W. Edd., 18-3 miles.
Red sandstone and buff sandstone.

M. 26. S. 20° W. Edd., 18-4 miles.

Red sandstone.

M. 40. S. 38° W. Edd., 21 7 miles.
Variegated, red and grey.

M. 17. S. 28° W. Edd., 23-3 miles.

Red sandstone.

M. 19. S. 28° W. Edd., 23-3 miles.

Red sandstone in large angular blocks.

M. 18. S. 29° W. Edd., 23-4 miles.
Red sandstone.

146 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

M. 21g. S. 25° W. Edd., 21-2 miles.

(Not inserted in the above series because structurally different ; all
the above are of ordinary type.)

A compact rock with granular fracture ; the granules vary from buff
to a light brown with a tinge of Indian red. The rock has been bored
by molluscs.

A sandstone cemented by crystalline calcite, dolomite, or in the
alternative a very sandy crystalline limestone. The quartz grains well
rounded with numerous, and some large, fluid inclusions. One grain
which proves to be part of a quartz mosaic contains a fragment of rich
brown mica. Yet another grain contains brown mica, and many have
acicular microlites, possibly apatite. Considerably less numerous than
the quartzes are felspar grains, botli orthoclase and plagioclase. There
are numerous fragments of a brown rock, apparently a palagonite,
containing some crystals, including mica. The rhombs of dolomite are
clearly marked out by concentric bands of dark brown inclusions,
grains, and microlites, which tend to form radial bunches. In some
cases the centre of a rhomb is completely darkened.

MARLS.

Under this heading are included hard marly limestones, those more
exceptional forms from the Trias which are calculated to resist abra-
sion ; with them is a smaller percentage of the true friable marl.

M. 34b. S. 28° W. Edd., 18 5 miles.

A dark red pebble, with smooth surface, much bored by molluscs.
A cut surface shows very compact rock, the red colour of which is
slightly mottled by a lighter shade. In the section this mottling
is much more prominent. The rock is minutely granular, the mineral
being probably a mixture of calcite and dolomite. There are also
small angular fragments of quartz, and apparently some fibres of
gypsum. Some of the borings have been infilled with secondary sand-
stone having calcareous cement. The stone is a very hard marl.

M. 9f. S. 31° W. Edd., 217 miles.

A fine-grained red marl.

Much very fine sand, with some larger quartz grains. The colour
not uniformly distributed but mottled with grey. Many of the grains
appear to be crystalline calcite or dolomite.

M. 31. S. 25° W. Edd., 15 miles.

Soft variegated marl, red and green.

M. 36. S. 37° W. Edd., 17*5 miles.
Hard chocolate-coloured marl.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 147

M. 11. S. 26° W. Edd., 17-8 miles.
Hard chocolate-coloured marl.

M. 12. S. 26° W. Edd., 17-8 miles.
Hard chocolate-coloured marl.

M. 35. S. 32° W. Edd., 18 miles.
Hard chocolate-coloured marl.

M. 34. S. 28= W, Edd., 185 miles.

Hard chocolate-coloured marl.

M. 14. S. 24° W. Edd., 20 miles.
Hard chocolate-coloured marl.

M. 15. S. 27° W. Edd., 20-3 miles.

Pale red, rather soft marl.

M. 20. S. 25° W. Edd., 20-5 miles.

Hard chocolate-coloured marl.

M. 24. S. 24" W. Edd., 22 5 miles
Hard chocolate-coloured marl.

LIMESTONES.

The following dolomitic limestones would appear to belong to the
New Red Sandstone formation.

M. 34d. S. 28° W. Edd., 18-5 miles.

A rather small brown-grey pebble, much bored by saxicava. Freshly
broken surface is pale brown, and shows somewhat granular, very
uniform, texture.

The section, examined by the unaided eye, suggests a slightly
marked banded structure. The matrix of the rock is a fairly pure
crypto-crystalline calcite and dolomite, and minute zoned rhomboids of
the latter mineral occur sparsely. But it is so closely set with small
sand grains that it might almost be described as a sandstone with cal-
careous cement. Most of these clear grains are probably quartz, but
some show the repeated twinning of plagioclase felspar. A little
brown mica is to be found, and rather numerous rich brown and black
specks, which may be rutile. There are also many pale olive
patches, distinctly larger than the other granular constituents, some-
what ill defined in outline and apparently calcareous. The calcareous
ground-mass has here and there a yellowish-brown tint.

M. 35e. S. 32° W. Edd., 18 miles.

A very similar rock to the last described.

M. 21a. S. 25° W. Edd., 21 2 miles.

A compact horny -textured rock distinctly hard, but bored by

148 DREDGINGS OF THE MAEINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

molluscs, etc. Colour of broken surface brown with a shade of purple,
and buff. Weathered surface an uniform light brown.

A granular crystalline limestone, stained by iron in patches and
lines. Apparently it has always contained some free spaces which are
lined with larger crystal grains. Occasional almost complete rhombs
of dolomite of small size occur. There are slight streams of a pale
brown mineral of low double refraction ; and scoriaceous looking
inclusions of rich brown rock, containing small quartzes ; these are the
more aluminous parts of the rock.

PASSAGE BEDS— TRIAS TO RHAETIC.

M. 29a. S. 14° W. Edd., 198 miles.

A coarse, open-textured marl or marly limestone, drab coloured.
The section shows widely varying colour and texture, giving at first
sight the effect of a detrital rock with many derived fragments. That
there are fragments of other marly limestones does indeed appear to
be the fact ; certain textures associated with definite colours, and with
mineral forms not found generally distributed throughout the slide,
are located in areas with well or less clearly defined boundaries. On
the other hand, the same yellow iron stain which marks some of these
areas runs irregularly across the section in a contorted and divided stream
and is always associated with a finer ground-mass than the average.

In the general body of the rock, besides much granular crystalline
calcite, occur small spheroids of a clear mineral, which consist of fibres
radially arranged, and are also marked by a slight concentric zoning.
One long vein shows the same structure, and its outline is botroidal.
This mineral is soluble in HCl. There is a fair amount of dark
material, which may be carbonaceous. Not infrequent quartz grains.
And in the rather ill-defined orange-brown inclusions (if inclusions
they are) a fibrous mineral in single blades showing a double refraction
considerably less than that of mica ; none of this is to^be found in the
residue after solution in acid, and it may be gypsum. One piece of
certain mica is visible, with pleochroism from colourless to cinnamon-
brown. The residue after solution in acid consists chiefly of a rich
olive-brown isotropic matter in flocculent form.

M. 29b.

Compact, smooth, and fine-textured marl in thin slabs, can be marked
by thumb-nail, drab coloured. The section shows very minute grains of
calcite, and some brown fragments which may once have been mica.

M. 29c.

Angular fragment of stone-coloured marl, rather coarser than last,
but still fine-grained and compact, just harder than the thumb-nail.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 149

M. 29d.

Much like last, but has a greenish tinge.

M. 29e.

Like last, but harder and greener.

M. 29f.

Like last, but considerably softer, and greener still with patches of
bright decided colour. Micaceous.

M. 29g.

Green marl and drab-brown marl as above in narrow alternate
bands.

M. 29h.

A layer of coarse grey marl and one of fine-grained drab-brown marl.

The series M. 29a. to M. 291i. inclusive indicates a locality occupied
by soft marls of varying texture and colour, associated in one and the
same formation in layers of varying thickness, the alternations being
frequent and repeated.

RHAETIC AND LIAS.

LIMESTONE AND SHALE.

Most of these limestones contain argillaceous matter; some, how-
ever, appear to resemble the White Lias ; in the absence of field work
it is not well to attempt to do other than group Rhaetic and Liassic
together.

OFF LYME REGIS— Mi situ.

This type rock is frequently dredged off Lyme Eegis.' The speci-
men shows coral fragments, including Gonioseris. For the rest it is
a rough, somewhat sandy limestone, inclined toward a marl. A great
deal of brown and black matter occurs in granular form. Obviously a
Lias Limestone.

M. 12a. S. 26° W. Edd., 17 8 miles.

Drab-coloured stone, fine in grain. The section shows crystalline
granular structure with no visible organisms.

M. 30a. S. 21° W. Edd., 21 5 miles.

Darkish limestone, rather brown than bufr'. Minutely crystalline
granular. Traces of organisms ; grains and slight micro-dendritic
growths of iron oxide.

M. 53a. S. 22° W. Edd., 32 2 miles.

. A light brown slabby rock, bored by molluscs. A closely-cleaved,
highly-calcareous shale. Corresponds to the " paper shales." Dis-
tinctly marly. The section shows occasional aggregates of crystalline
calcite. The chief part of the rock is a minutely granular pale brown

150 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :

mixture, with mottling of rich orange -brown, less granular, substance,
and grains and short irregular lines of an almost opaque dark brown.
No undoubted organic remains.

M. 53b.

A light brown rock, a harder variety of the preceding, contains
calcite veins, and one joint-face shows well-developed crystals. The
laminae of tliis rock are alternately of closer and of more open
texture.

The section is made in one of the harder layers and corresponds
with 53a, except that it is lighter in general shade and the orange-
brown portions are much less in proportion to the whole.

M. 53c.

Drab-coloured compact rock in slabs, one face of which is usually
obviously a joint surface recently broken, and one face much bored,
probably by annelids. The section shows a pale brown rock wholly
but minvitely granular, almost entirely calcite, with an occasional
narrow vein of clear calcite, and small scattered brown and black
granules. No trace of organisms. This forms the last of a series of
which 53a and 53b are the first members.

M. 56a. S. 25° W. Edd., 343 miles.

A dull brown limestone of light shade.

Contains numerous fragments of shells and rather frequent echino-
derm spines, but no foraininifera.

M. 44. S. 17° W. Edd., 29 8 miles.

Buff limestone, apparently liassic.

CRETACEOUS.
CHALK.

A very hard, yellow, or cream-coloured, chalk is of frequent oc-
currence ; generally the exterior of the pebble is brown, and this colour
extends some slight depth into the stone, getting less in intensity
until it fades into the yellow or cream-colour. Unless the stone
happens to be much bored it usually requires a considerable blow to
break it.

M. 26a. S. 20° W. Edd., 18 4 miles.

Hard, cream-coloured chalk. Minutely granular texture. Crowded
with small organisms. Many good sections of small foraminifera.
Fragments of larger shells frequent. Some of the foraminifera in-
filled with a yellow-orange substance. Several textularia. Fragments
of nodosaria, and some rotaline forms and s'lobif^erina.

Jourii. Mar. BioJ. Assoc.

Vol. nil.

Fig. 1.

Plate IX.

j0m

*^^ ^Vm

^^ f

/ 2

''.^^^H

M. 14a. S. 24" W, Edd., 20 miles.

Hard yellow chalk, surface iincly grouiirl Ijut not polislied.
Derived inclusion on left.

xU.

Fic. 2.

M. 14a. S. 24 W. Edd., 20 miles.
Hard yellow chalk.
Ordinary light, x 97^.

To face p. lol.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 151

M. 72a. S. 23° W. Edd., 19 miles.

Hard, cream-coloured chalk.

Texture minutely granular. Crowded with the remains of small
organisms, and with shell fragments, etc.

M. 72b.

Hard yellow chalk. Shell fragments, small foraminifera, etc.

M. 21c. S, 25° W. Edd., 21 2 miles.

Hard yellow chalk. Crowded with foraminifera. There is a com-
paratively large circle of calcite (J mm.) having radial structure,
apparently the cross section of a cylinder, also sliell fragments.

M. 14a. S. 24° W. Edd., 20 miles.

Should have preceded M. 21c, but placed last, because in some ways
typical of the whole series.

A fair-sized pebble, some three inches in length, orange- brown on
the outside, within distinctly yellow for an average depth of about
7 mm., then cream-coloured with small lighter patches. A somewhat
irregularly bounded area on the surface is a darker brown and more
compact than the rest, it is harder and stands slightly above the
general level. Before the pebble was broken this measured over
30 mm. by 13 mm. On breaking the stone it was seen to be an
inclusion extending 14 mm. inwards. This inclusion, viewed in cross-
section, is green around the margin where it is in contact with the
cream-coloured rock, and red in the interior and en its outside face.
It has small curved cream-coloured markings, the largest 4 mm. by
1 mm., and in grinding down a section these markings were seen to all
communicate with the original outer face of the inclusion ; they are
obviously borings made by some animal and have been infilled with
chalk of the same character as the body of the pebble. This is the
only specimen in which such a fragment has been observed, but
perhaps closer inspection would discover more among the samples.

The section was cut through inclusion and general mass alike ; it
bears out in all respects the above description. There is a consider-
able similarity between the chalks forming the included fragment and
the body of the pebble, but in the latter there are possibly more shell
fragments ; foraminifera are exceedingly numerous in both, and grains
of glauconite are present in both. The cream-coloured rock has some
considerable areas of calcite in interlocked crystalline grains ; these are,
however, infrequent. The whiter patches in the cream-coloured rock
appear to be denser, to have fewer, although still very many, fora-
minifera, and smaller shell fragments, but there is no divisional line
between the two. The foraminifera include Globigerina, Textularia,

NEW .SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. L

152 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :

Bolivina, Cristellaria, and Lagena. There are occasional black and
dark brown specks. In all except its liardness the rock is distinctly a
chalk. (Plate IX, figs. 1 and 2.)

Mr. D. J. Matthews has kindly made an analysis of a portion of the
specimen above described, and returns : —

Silica (SiOo) 0*70 per cent.
Calcium Carbonate (CaCOg) 94-05 per cent.
Magnesium Carbonate (MgCOg) 1*56 „
Phosphorous pentoxide (PoO,) 0'66 „
A little Iron and Aluminia.

Alkalies not tested for.

Prom the above it will be seen that the rock is both phosphatic and
dolomitic.

Hard Yelloiv Chalk was also taken at the following stations, among
others. The list is not quite complete : —

M. 31, M. 36, M. 33, M. 35, M. 15, M. 25, M. 17, M. 41, M. 58, and M. 67.

FLINT.

Flint is quite the commonest rock if the whole area covered by the
dredgings is considered. It would be difficult to assert positively that
it is anywhere entirely absent from the stony grounds. A. 90, about
four miles toward Plymouth from the Eddystone, is all Devonian, but
this was on a sandy ground.

Many of the flints are very unlike, in external appearance, any
usually seen on land.^ The unaltered mineral is very frequently
black, but occurs only in the heart of the pebbles. A solvent
action, not necessarily entirely marine, has removed a portion of
the silica for some depth from the surface of the stone, and has
left a white coherent gritty substance, which is sometimes soft
enough to mark on a blackboard, sometimes quite hard. The pro-
gress of this alteration can frequently be traced in the section of
a broken stone. Pebbles of some inches in thickness are often
so far affected that a mere remnant, a patch of perhaps half an inch
diameter, will be left in the centre to show what the former condition
was. In some even of the large pebbles no unaltered flint remains.
It seemed desirable to ascertain what proportion of the original
mineral has been removed by this solution, and as an approximation
the following method was adopted: M. 15. A piece of thoroughly
altered flint, from a stone which showed some remnant of black flint

^ Exceptionally, as, for instance, on Hardown Hill and Annis Knob, near Lyme Regis,
chert and black Upper Chalk flint are fonnd in much the condition here described, but
the presence of carbonate of lime has not been re])orted, although probably existing much
as in these specimens.

Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc , J'ol. VIII.

Fio. 1.

Plate X.

M. 62b, 8. 25 W. Edd., 46-4 miles.

Decomposed black flint.
Ordinary ligJd. x 97J.

Fig. 2.

M. 62b. 8. 25 W. Edd., 46-4 miles,

Decomposeil black fliut, the lower half of plate rejn'esents portion of slide
treated with acid.

Crossed nicols. x 97|.
Shell fragments dissolved away
from lower half.

Ordinary light, x 97J.

Shell fragments dissolved away

from lower half.

To face p. 1;13.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 153

at the centre, when dried weighed 51 grains ; it was boiled in water for
twenty minutes, allowed to remain in the same water until cold, when
it was taken out, wiped, and found to weigh 62^ grains. The specific
gravity of the remaining mineral was ascertained to be about 2"56. If
we assume that all the lost material was chalcedonic silica we have to
multiply the weight of water absorbed, 11 1 grains, by the specific
gravity of chalcedony, say, 2 '3, in order to ascertain the loss of the
original rock by solution ; this gives us about 26 1 grains or somewhat
over 33 % of the mass of the original flint. From the fact that
the specific gravity of the residue is less than that of quartz, although
some calcite also occurs in the rock, it may be assumed that not all
the silica yet remaining is crystalline.

These porous altered flints effervesce, some more freely than others,
on treatment with acid, but maintain their outward form. The same
specimen on which the above determinations were made lost 3| grains
in weight after prolonged stay in dilute acid. (This loss includes a
very small amount of silica and the merest trace of iron.) It would
thus appear that the unaltered rock had contained at least 4 % of
soluble carbonate. In some instances this is certainly exceeded.

M. 62b. S. 25" W. Edd., 46-4 miles.

This specimen was selected for especial microscopic examination ; it
is a somewhat chert-like black flint, the outer portion altered as above
described. The first section was made from the black part of the
pebble, and shows the flint to be nothing more than a silicified
chalk. Foraminifera and shell fragments, all still carbonate of lime,
crowd the slide, and there are occasional quartz grains and some of
glauconite. The matrix is partly crypto-crystalline, and so intimately
is the crystalline mixed with the isotropic that practically all the
silica ground-mass gives some reaction with polarised light. A second
slide, cut from the decomposed part of the rock, shows a crypto-
crystalline ground-mass of silica crowded with forms in calcite after
organic matter. Foraminifera quite numerous, the chamber walls well
defined, but the original structure mainly, if not entirely, replaced
by granular calcite. An occasional fragment of some larger shell
(molluscan) appears to have retained pretty well its original structure.
Glauconite grains occur freely, and some of the foraminifera are
infilled with this material.

Finally, to remove any possible ambiguity as to the presence of
carbonate of lime, a third section was prepared, also from the decom-
posed portion. After this had been ground down to the requisite
transparency one-half of it was varnished with Canada balsam, and
the whole section dipped in dilute acid ; a brisk but brief effervescence

154 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :

followed. The slide now shows a clear-cut boundary ; on the side
which was varnished the foraininifera and shell fragments remain, on
the other side they have vanished, leaving absolute vacancies. The
crypto-crystalline silica is identical in character on either liand. The
included quartz grains, which occupy the whole thickness of the slide,
polarise in higher colours than the silica of the ground-mass, which is
in too minute form to extend through the whole depth.

One interesting point is that the chalk thus converted into flint
had not the same original structure as the yellow chalks described
previously. (Plate X, figs. 1 and 2.)

Tlie following further specimens were microscopically examined.

M. 15b. S. 27° W. Edd., 20-3 miles.

Decomposed flint. Lime not so common except in parts. There
are instances of foraminiferal shell entirely replaced by silica. These
are best seen by polarised light. In places the grain of the silica in
the ground-mass becomes comparatively coarse.

M. 9h. S. 31° W. Edd., 21-7 miles.

Black cherty flint, with small light markings. The exterior reduced
to a white loose-textured substance with minute brown spots. The
varying resistance of the flint to decomposition is to be seen where the
extreme outer surface has been chipped off, and small patches of almost
unaltered rock are visible.

Shows the crypto-crystalline structure of the ground-mass very well.
Much like other sections of the same material, except that the calcite
fragments are larger, and there are iron-stained areas.

M. 18b. S. 29° W. Edd., 234 miles.

Decomposed flint. Hydrozoa and shell fragments, mainly in calcite,
but some wholly replaced by silica of coarser texture than ground-
mass. At one place slight dendritic growth of iron oxide.

Flint is present in greater or less quantity in every sample which
yields pebbles or stones. Without actual count an approximate estimate
of the proportion of flint to the whole sample has ])een made in most
cases with the following results : —

A. 105. S.S.W. Bolt Head, 1 mile.
Flint in gravel 13 %.

A. 106. S. Bolt Head, 2 miles.

Flint in gravel 40 %.

M. 31. Flint two-thirds of whole.

M. 32. Thirty-seven pebbles, of wliich twenty are flint.

M. 36. Nine-tenths flint.

M. 10. Nine- tenths flint.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 155

M. 33. Flint predominant.

M. 11. Nearly half flint.

M. 12. Three-quarters flint.

M. 13. About same as M. 12

M. 35. Two-thirds flint.

M. 27. Much flint.

M. 26. Flint very plentiful.

M. 34. Over seven-eighths flint.

M. 72. Half flint.

M. 29. Some flints.

M. 14. Much flint.

M. 15. Three-quarters flint.

M. 20. Two-thirds flint.

M. 16. One-third flint.

M. 21. Half flint.

M. 30. Twenty pebbles, of which fourteen are flint.

M. 9. Nearly half flint.

M. 40. A little flint.

M. 22. Half flint.

M. 39. About half flint.

M. 24. About two-thirds flint.

M. 25. Almost entirely flint.

M. 17. Flint (no note of quantity).

M. 19. Very little flint.

M. 18. One-third flint.

M. 41. One-half large flints.

M. 43. Nine-tenths flint ; one entirely altered, has been bored by

molluscs.

M. 44. One-third flint.

M. 50. A little flint.

M. 53. One-third flint.

M. 56. One-third flint.

M. 77. Three-quarters flint, in large size, one about 6" x 6" x 4".

M. 58. Two-thirds flint, in large size, one about 10" x 6" x 4".

M. 67. Over nine-tenths flint, large and entirely unrolled, roughly

cylindrical, with short branches, one 18 cm. x 13 cm. x 15 crn.,

one 21 cm. x 10 cm.

M. 62. One-half flint.

M. 79. Three stones, of which one is flint.

M. 80. A little flint.

156

DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

EOCENE.

M. 77b. S. 11° W. Edd., 38 8 miles.

A rough-textured cream-coloured limestone, rather soft, and closely
resembling, the ' calcairc grossier ' of the Paris Basin.

Fine gravel or coarse sand is sparingly visible in the hand specimen.
The microscope shows clear quartz grains, many of considerable size,
and in the^'quartz fluid inclusions with bubbles. Fragments of

i M^

Fig. 2. Sections of foraniiiiifera from M. 77b.

1.2.3.5. Miliolina {Qidnqucloculina) scminulum.
4. Miliolina ( Ti'iloculina) angularis.

'RM.w:

hydroids and of corals are clearly distinguishable. But the feature of
the rock is its foraminiferal character. Various forms of Miliolina
preponderate; these certainly include Miliolina semimdnm, Miliolina
trigonula, Miliolina {Triloculina) angularis (d'Orbigny), and possibly
other varieties.

Of other foraminifera Truncatulina reftdgens (Mont.) is identifiable,
and there appear to be two species of Discorhina ; one species of

Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, Vol. VIII.

Plate XI.

M, 77b. S. 11 W. Edd., 38 miles.
Eocene limestone.
Ordinary light, x 33|.

To fane p. 15G.

Juurn. Mar. Biol. Assoc, Vol. VIII.

Fro. ].

Plate XII.

M. 77b. S. 11° W. Edd., 388 miles.

Section of Fla)iorbidina {'. larvata) in Eocene limestone.
Ordinary light, x 44.

Fill. 2.

M. 77b. S. ir W. Edd., 38-8 miles.

Section ol' /'hutorbiilind {'. hd-cata) in Hocene limestone.
Orilinarj/ lujht. x 44.

To face v. V.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 157

Verneuilina and one of Textularia, both the latter with arenaceous
tests. Biloculina ringcns is clearly present, and apparently a species
of Polymorphina and one of Spiroloculina. There are several sections
of a very beautiful foraminifera, all, however, in planes practically
parallel to that of its spiral ; still, cut at diflerent parts of the thick-
ness of the test, they give fairly clear information as to the form. It
is certainly Planorhidina, and seems identical with Planorhidina
larvata, Parker and Jones. This species is, however, only hitherto
known as recent and of tropical habitat. The rock is too hard to
admit the separation of the foraminifera as opaque objects, and
sections must be relied upon wholly ; so far three have been prepared,
but many more will have to be cut before any certain identifications
of the foraminifera can be made, except among the Miliolinm and in a
few chance instances where typical forms are fully displayed. Glau-
conite grains are common and of fair size, and the same mineral fills
the chambers of many of the foraminifera. The foraminiferal shells
have not been the subject of any mineral alteration. The ground-
mass of the rock has been a highly calcareous mud, with little
aluminous matter. Comparatively shallow water conditions and a
warm sea are indicated. (Plate XI and Plate XII, figs. 1 and 2.)

ROCKS OF UNDETERMINED AGE.

SANDSTONE.

M. 14d. S. 24" W. Edd., 20 miles.

A buff-coloured sandstone with calcite cement, appears rather open-
textured on outer face of pebble, but is quite compact within.

By far the greater number of grains are quartz, but a few felspars
show in the slide. There are also some shell fragments and other
organic remains. Many quartz grains show acicular crystals of apatite,
some few have zircon enclosures. Some are nearly free from fluid
inclusions, but most show rather many, with bubbles in the majority
of instances. Many of the grains are iron-stained yellow along cracks,
obviously before inclusion in this rock.

This rock has all the appearance of a ragstone, and may very
possibly belong to the Neocomian formation.

ARKOSE.

M. 62x. S. 42^ W. Edd., 464 miles.

The fracture shows a pale pink rock ; externally tlie worn surface
looks rather like sandstone in which the cementing material is less
hard than the sand grains, the fractured surface seems more
like a granular f el site; felspar of a light flesh colour is clearly
visible.

158 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

The section resembles a breccia, in which the individual grains are
as well fitted to each other as the fragments in a tessellated pavement ;
thus there is a minimum of cementing matter. But, on the other
hand, the normal constituents of granite, orthoclase, a little oligoclase,
quartz, and some brown mica occur in much the proportions that
would be found in a micro-granite, and very similarly distributed.
Some of the felspar is micro-perthite. A great many felspars are
cracked, some crushed, in each case the cementing material invades
the crystal. Many of the quartz grains are similarly cracked, and the
mica has been forced into curved forms to fit the surrounding grains,
and in some cases has been structurally destroyed. The great majority
of the grains of felspar and quartz show strain shadows in polarised
light. The cementing material consists very largely of zoisite, with
which is possibly a little felsitic matter. Small well-formed crystals
of apatite and fluid inclusions with bubbles occur in the quartz. The
felspar is fairly fresh and very little decomposed.

The rock has every appearance of a fine-grained granite, crushed,
and then re-cemented by secondary minerals.

But for the appearance of the worn surface this would probably
have passed in the hand specimen as a porphyritic felsite of tlie
granitic class ; it appears to agree precisely with the Mimophyrc
quartzeux of Brongniart, and the Granite recompos4 of French petro-
graphers.

A precisely similar rock is found at —
M. 13a. S. 26° W. Edd., IT8 miles.
M. 30c. S. 21° W. Edd., 215 miles.
M. 44a. S. 17° W. Edd., 298 miles. Distinctly angular block.

Its range is, therefore, about 29 miles at least.

LIMESTONE.

M. 80e. S. 16^° W. Edd., 48 9 miles.

A large sub-angular stone, the surface distinctly polished. Very
compact and hard. Brown with a vein of lighter buff or drab, dendritic
markings on the lighter portion.

The section passes through both the mass of the specimen and a
portion of the vein. Both consist of minutely granular crystalline
material, largely calcite, but apparently dolomitic. The darker part
gives indistinct evidence of organic remains, and shows clear rounded
sand grains.

The rock is certainly puzzling, it may (doubtfully) have some
affinity to the Cotliam marble, but it would be a bold guess indeed to
so identify it.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 159

M. 51a. S. 15 W. Edd., 30 8 miles.

Wliile this paper is in the press the writer has examined a rock
from M. 51, which he had previously overlooked. This is a compact,
dark brown limestone, with large shell fragments, now in calcite. The
stone is angular. It is but little softer than M. 80e, and when sectioned
shows dendritic markings similar to those in the lighter portion of
that specimen. Undoubtedly liassic in type it in some sort forms a
stepping stone from the more frequent forms to M. BOe, and the latter
may now with fair certainty bo identified as liassic. In mapping pur-
poses this has been assumed.

GEOLOGY.

In the preceding section the various rocks have been assigned to
their respective formations and their peculiarities noted. In Mr.
Crawshay's paper their mode of occurrence, independently of their
lithology, has been fully described. It remains to construct from the
evidence thus called some coherent scheme of geology for this portion
of the Channel.

With this end in view it is especially necessary to consider the
probable date of these stony accumulations as such, and to find some
reasonable explanation of their presence. Following which we must
be assured that to some considerable extent the deposits are of local
origin before we can proceed to any mapping of the various forma-
tions under the waters of the English Channel.

The one outstanding feature, as Mr. Crawshay has pointed out, is
the general increase in average weight and size of the stones due
south (magnetic), i.e. straight outwards into the Channel from the
Eddystone. But although, as regards the dredged material, this fact
is clear and important, against it or with it must be set the occurrence
of large boulders on the Salcombe and Eddystone fishing grounds.

That the grade of the bottom deposit should grow coarser as the
distance from land increases is against all probability and all experience,
if the deposit is of recent formation under existing conditions. It should
be expected that the detritus which enters the sea by the mouths of the
rivers, derived from the denudation of the land, would so sort itself that
the heavier and coarser particles deposit in the nearer and shallower
waters, the lighter and finer particles coming to rest in the deeps ;
and, added to the river-borne detritus, the products of coast erosion
and broken shells from the littoral zone should similarly distribute
over the sea-bed with reference to the weight and size of their grains.
No matter how small the rivers, how slight their supply of sands and
clays, and without reference either to the rate of erosion and supply
from the sea-clifis, in time and in the absence of strong localised

160 DKEDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

currents the bed of any sea will become covered with deposits, the
average grade of which at any place will bear a relation to the depth
and the distance from land. And the strength of the sea currents
will in most instances accentuate this differentiation, being greatest in
shallower water.

If, then, a contrary condition is found to exist, and the sands are
replaced, even in parts, in the deeper water by coarse beds and blocks
of stone, it becomes apparent that these latter belong in their origin
to other conditions than those now prevalent. The present rivers, the
cliffs which we see to-day have not supplied their material. Further,
we may surmise that a sea which exhiliits this anomalous feature, that
the materials of its bed grow larger in individual constituent parts
with distance from shore, cannot be, in its present form and depth, of
very ancient origin. The time available has not sufficed to enable
the shore-derived material to spread over the whole area.

Austen has discussed these points very fully and with great clear-
ness ; in fairness to his work and in recognition of his precedence the
matter may be stated in his own words ^ : —

" The law of progressive change in the character of the sea-bed
requires that the most remote deposits of the Channel should be the
finest, and that no coarse materials should occur at any considerable
distance from the coast ; this law holds good for a given extent round
all the shores of the Channel, but beyond the area of mud and ooze,
line and coarse sands, shingle and bare rock are again met with. . . ."
And referring to the coarse deposits on the Sole Banks and Jones Bank,
" the whole of these groups [of coarse material] are separated from
the zones of coarse materials depending on the coast-line by a broad
intervening area of the finest quality of seajbed. We are precluded
from supposing that the lines of coarse materials can have travelled
over the mud zones, as their upper surface is soft and incoherent, into
which the sounding-lead sinks some distance before the mass is
tenacious enough to stop it, and in which the dredge buries ; if there-
fore marginal or sub-marginal zone materials are found in places
beyond well-defined areas of the low moving power of water, they
become a clear indication that since their accumulation a great change
in the position of such place, as to depth of water and distance from
coast-line, has taken place." ..." It may be objected to this, that
these distant sand, gravel, and shingle beds may belong to any age,
and not in any way be connected with the present seas. In tracing
the remains of marine animals seawards, we may observe a like
gradual comminution with that noticed with respect to mineral
1 " Valley of the English Channel," Q.J.G.S., Vol. VI, 1850, p. 83 et seq.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 161

materials, long after the forms of the shells have ceased to be recog-
nisable. The sea-bed, particularly on the French side of the Channel,
is mainly composed of shell sand, or sand in which few particles of any-
thing but such as show shell-structure occur. Areas of this character
are laid down by the French surveyors, and occur in the interval
between the Land's End of France, or TJshant, and the Little Sole
Bank; yet on the sides of this bank, and more particularly on its
western slopes, large, perfect, though decayed, shells again occur, and
what is more remarkable. Patella vulgata, Turbo littoreus, etc. Taking
the two phoenomena together, the occurrence of littoral shells and of
marginal shingle, we may safely infer that we have at this place the
indication of a coast-line of no very distant geological period, buried
under a great depth of water, and removed to a great distance from
the nearest present coast-line."

"... In the very coarse beds which form the floor or lowest levels of
the deeps in the upper part of the Chanliel, from the meridian of Cape
la Hague eastward, and which have a depth of forty and fifty fathoms,
we also seem to have the highest marginal zone of some former period,
over which the drifting beds of the actual period are spreading ; and,
on the other hand, such masses as Jones Bank are to be considered as
protruding portions of an older sea-bed isolated amidst the ooze
deposits of the present sea."

". . . The character of the greater part of the Channel area, if laid bare,
would be that of extensive plains of sand, surrounded by great zones
of gravel and shingle . . . ; whilst along the opening of the Channel
there is an obvious configuration of hill and valley, and an amount of
inequality equal to that of the most mountainous part of Wales."

Delesse attributes more to the action of currents in the deeper
parts of the Channel than apparently would Austen, but agrees that
the coarser deposits are not of the present epoch, and argues that the
settlement of the sands and silts of to-day has been prevented in
certain areas by the strength of the currents, and hence these earlier
deposits have been preserved from being covered. He writes ^ : —

" La Manche etant balayee par des courants energiques, on doit
s'attendre a ce que son fond ne regoive pas partout des depots, mais
soit au contraire forme tres souvent par des roches pierreuses
anterieures a I'epoque actuelle; c'est, en effet, ce qu'apprennent les
sondages, et proportionnellement ces dernieres roches y occupent
meme une etendue beaucoup plus grande que dans les autres mers.
D'abord, elles presentent des surfaces tres vastes dans tout I'Ouest de
la Manche ; elles bordent la Bretagne et la Cotentin auquel elles

' Lithologie des Mcrs de France, p. 308 et seq.

162 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

reimissent Jersey ainsi que les autres iles anglo-normandes ; de plus
elles reunissent la Bretagne au Cornouailles et le Cotentin au Sud de
rAngieterre. Elles sont decoupees suivant des echarpes tres irregu-
lieres ; non-seulement elle longent les cotes, mais elles traversent com-
pletement la Manche, se poursuivant jusque dans les parties les plus
basses de son bassin et meme jusque dans son thalweg."

" Ces roclies sont assurement tres variees ; cependant entre la
Bretagne, le Cotentin, le Cornouailles, et le Devonshire, elles appar-
tiennent au granite et au terrain de transition. Les Bondages font
connaitre qu'elles sont en partie formees de pierres desagregees ; qu'en
outre les roches pourries sont frequentes autour de 49° 5' latitude et
de 7° 10' longitude, dans le thalweg de la Manche."

Finally, when we deal with the boulders from the Salcombe-Eddy-
stone grounds we have Mr. Hunt's opinion.^

" My own contention being that they [the boulders] are to all
intents and purposes in situ.

" The problem of origin is certainly a perplexing one. Those who
maintain a distant derivation have to show where the blocks came
from, and how they came.

" Those who contend for a local submarine origin have to explain
how such solid blocks could have become detached from the parent
beds.

" That trawls could detach the blocks from their beds is as possible
as that ' Old Noll ' fired them at the seagulls ; but that trawlers
could have dragged them about all over the Salcombe fishing grounds
when detached is practically certain. Thus none of the detached
blocks have any claim whatever to be considered in situ when caught,
though they may fairly claim, I think, to represent rocks forming the
bed of the Channel not far distant.

" However, it is clearly impossible to prove that some of them may
not have been ice-borne. Let those who maintain that theory show
cause for their belief."

We are somewhat more favourably situate now than when either of
the above extracts left the hands of their authors. As regarding a
definite line, from Plymouth Sound, past the Eddystone to a distance
of nearly fifty miles from the latter, we have absolutely located and
perfectly representative samples of the bottom deposit. From the
2 5 -fathom line to the 3 5 -fathom line these have been worked out in
detail. Broadly speaking, the results are that we now know the
Eddystone and, in part, the Hand Deeps to stand above the general

' "The Subiiiariiie GeoIoi,'y of the Eiiglisli Cliaiiiiel otl" the South Coast of Devon,"
Trans. Dev, Assoc, 1889> p. 484 el seq.

Joum. Mar. Biol. Assoc, Vol. VIIL

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 163

level of a sea-bed which consists of fine gravel and fine shelly gravel
in patclies ; while south and east for some distance from the Eddystone
are fine sands. South of the Prawle promontory, off the coast-line
from Bolt Head to Prawle, is shell gravel, from Prawle to Start, stony
ground.

The fine sands are quite unlike the silty sand of Plymouth Sound,
are coarser as a whole and cleaner. A chart which the writer pre-
pared in 1898, from Dr. Allen's details, is here reproduced; the un-
determined areas have not yet been fully worked, and perhaps are
better left blank until full information is available. There is a little
stony ground at East Putts, a stony patch off Stoke Point, and stones
have been dredged north of the Eddystone, and on the margin of the
Hand Deeps. (Plate XIII.)

All the stations on this chart are those to which I have elsewhere
prefixed the letter A.

Station A. 100, south of the Eddystone, gave large stones as well as
sand. Stations A. 78 and A. 31, although near to and surrounded in
part by sand, were actually on rock, and A. 79 yielded Triassic sand-
stone. Tliese three points are southward from the Eddystone, on the
margin of the fine-sand area.

The first matter, the probable date of the stony deposits and their
origin, may now be left for a time, to be resumed when the general
geological mapping of the area has been attempted.

As to the second matter, the extent to which we may rely on the
comparatively local origin of the various stones and pebbles, this, too,
may be left in part to a later portion of the paper, but enough should
be written here to justify the attempted location of the various forma-
tions in situ.

When a rock is obviously torn from its parent mass, as instanced by
its form and freshly-broken surfaces, and when it comes from known
rocky, as opposed to stony, ground, the inference as to its in situ origin
is almost irresistible.

This is a matter of rare occurrence. Hunt's H. 19 appears to have
been a clear instance. The trawler Pelican got fast in what was sup-
posed to be a wreck, and remained thus fast for some hours. When
the trawl came away, a fragment of granite showing a clean fracture
was found in it. This fragment, No. 19, differs from Hunt's other
specimens in that it evidently formed part of a thin slab of rock, and
not of a massive block. The stone proved to be a granite of coarse
grain, with white and black micas, and a little triclinic felspar in
addition to the orthoclase. The locality 20 miles S.W. of Eddy-
stone. From practically the same spot, M. 15, the recent dredgings

164 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

raised a fine-grained granite also with Iwth lirown and silvery
mica.

There is evidence that the rock hottom at A. 78, A. 79, is Triassic.
While the gneiss from A. 86 (354/1), | mile N.W. of Eddystone, was
a large angular slab, with one face of apparently clean fracture.

Thus on this class of evidence granite, gneiss, and trias have alike
been found in situ.

Another feature that argues strongly for a rock being near its first
home is the angular or sub-angular form occasionally presented ; especi-
ally is this form of evidence of value when the stone is such as will
readily suffer from transport.

A. 100 (354/2), 2 miles S.W. of Eddystone, gave large stones, a thin
slab of variegated Triassic sandstone, a rather thin slab of buff Triassic
sandstone, and a thin piece of red marl, all angular and practically un-
worn. Such rocks as these could not travel without great wear.

M. 19. S. 28^ W. Edd., 23-3 miles yielded large square blocks of Eed
Triassic Sandstone.

M. 14. S. 17° W. Edd., 29 '8 miles, yielded thin sharp slabs of Liassic
limestone.

There are other similar instances. Evidence of this type again
demonstrates practically in situ exposures of Trias, and in this case of
Lias as well.

A third clear indication of localisation is when the adjacent sea-
bottom yields rocks of the same class and type as shore exposures.
The sea-bed off the Bolt and around the Eddystone affords instances.

To some extent coupled with this is a fourth strong class of evidence
— the restriction of the occurrence of a given type rock to areas with
definite boundaries. Thus the Bolt and Prawle schists vary in type as
we proceed southward along the sea-bed. The Eddystone and Hand-
Deeps gneisses are restricted to the immediate neighbourhood of the
reef ; in A. 102, S. Edd., 2^ miles, the gravel contained no Eddystone
reef material, although in A. 87, N.W. by N. Edd., 1 mile, 87 % of
it is derived from the reef. It will presently be seen how, on a much
larger scale, the New Eed Sandstone series is definitely bounded. Thus
at M. 27, S. 19° W. Edd., 18 3 miles, there is a representative series of
Triassic rocks ; at M. 29, S. 14° W. Edd., 198 miles, these are entirely re-
placed by the maris of the passage-beds to the Ehaetic. The distance
is under two miles.

Another, the fifth, possible proof that a rock is near its point of
origin applies in but a few cases. An example will best explain it.
On all the preceding arguments we may decide that the gneiss of the
Hand Deeps is practically in situ. 354/3b is a red conglomerate of the

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 165

New Eed series ; it contains derived fragments of the Hand Deeps
gneiss and schist ; it is found side by side with them, and hence if they
are in situ so, too, in all probability, is it.

The sixth line of argument for the demonstration of the local origin
of the rocks and pebbles is as strong as any. There are some rocks so
friable that they might not travel half a mile without being destroyed.
Many of the marls of M. 29 above referred to are of this class, the
' paper shale ' of M. 53a, S. 22° W. Edd., 32 2 miles, is another rock
which must be content to rest at home or be destroyed. From these
which cannot be moved without destruction, through those which can
only travel a little way without disintegration, on to others which
may journey but must be considerably reduced in their progress and
l)ear evidence of their wanderings, there is a complete succession. The
extreme of the class may be taken to be flint, and if entirely unrolled
flints are found, as at M. 67, S. 19° W. Edd., lOo miles, among other
places, it may well be assumed that they are untravelled.

On some one or more of these six lines of argument every class of
rock found in the dredgings may be shown to be practically in situ
at one or more stations. Its associates are arguably almost equally
near their points of origin, for it is impossible to attribute to any
drift, arising from whatever cause, the selective and confounding
ability to bring like to like, to transport from a distance and place
among its kin any stone or stones. A little exchange of material
between adjacent areas there must be, but we are not about to attempt
any geological mapping within extreme narrow limits of error.

THE CRYSTALLINE ROCKS.

Granites, Diorites, Gneiss, Schist, etc.

Mr. A. E. Hunt quotes, in a paper above cited, a letter received by
him from the late Mr. E. B. Tawney, as follows : —

" My views are rather Britannic ; I look to Brittany for their origin
[the origin of the Channel granites and gneisses, E.H.W.]. I consider
Brittany reached to Plymouth Sound and then stopped short, but am
inclined to give Start Point to it. If so, the granites are oiot all pre-
Devonian, though pre-Carboniferous."

To much the same conclusion the writer has arrived, as at least a
working hypothesis, with the correction that some at least of the
Brittany granites are now commonly accepted as of Carboniferous
age:

To one who has worked in a granite area such as Dartmoor there
is nothing unexpected, nothing disappointing in finding, as in the
present instance, such considerable variety among the plutonic rocks,

166 DEEDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :

a variety that by no means in all cases involves difference of
origin.

For the moment all granites and associated rocks which may have
had a Dartmoor origin are excluded from consideration ; these are
extremely few in number. The first part of this paper must be left
to speak as to the variety of the plutonic rocks met in these dredgings.
But here such slight evidence of relative age as can be adduced may
well be considered. Gneiss is known to occur at the Eddystone in
situ ; it occurs also at the Hand Deeps and the East Eutts, and not-
withstanding the doubt thrown upon the fact, I am inclined to consider
that the ' Shovel Eeef specimen ' was, indeed, obtained near Plymouth
Breakwater. This has been rendered the more probable by discoveries
made since the time when Mr. A. E. Hunt, on evidence that warranted
him in all fairness, challenged the fact.

We now know, as we did not then, that gneiss occurs at the East
Eutts, and chlorite schist off Stoke Point, in each case without any
trace of their presence being visible on shore.

Gneiss also occurs at M. 36, M. 9, M. 16, and M. 25 stations, which all
lie in a narrow north and south strip, extending from 17"5 miles
S. 37° W. from the Eddystone to 23 miles S. 24° W. from the Eddy-
stone, a strip not quite three miles broad. M. llx and M. 20g might
also be classed as gneiss, and would somewhat broaden the patch
referred to. In any event there is a certain localisation about these
associated rocks. The writer has always hitherto leant to the hypo-
thesis that the Eddystone gneiss was of Archaean age. From the
features of similarity the gneiss from this area would presumedly be
of the same formation. And there is an interesting piece of evidence
which at least tends to indicate age. A number of grit stones have
been dredged from various parts of the area examined (see p. 142).
Among these is M. 9d, and that rock contains as derived fragments
particles of just such gneisses as occur in the neighbourhood.

It is impossible to correctly date the grits, which may be either
Carboniferous or earlier, perhaps more probably the latter.

Turning next to the schists. One of the most interesting finds was
off Stoke Point, where chlorite schist is not uncommon (see p. 139),
This brings the Bolt series many miles west. For the rest, the petro-
logical notes give all the useful information.

As bearing on the age of some of the plutonic rocks we have to
observe that there is an area over which slates are common which
show evidence of contact metamorphism. The northernmost point of
this area is M. 11, S. 26" W. Edd., 17-8 miles, the southernmost is M. 24,
S. 24° W. Edd., 22-5 miles, about five miles long ; tlie patch is from one to

To face p 166.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 167

three miles in breadth (see p. 144) ; it is quite possible that similar
rock in small quantity may occur outside tliis area and have been
overlooked. M. 14j has been taken as the type. Possibly these
slates are carboniferous ; they more resemble the carboniferous series
lithologically than the Devonian. It is to be noted that side by side
with these slates occurs a red felsite, and red granites occur also. This
distinctly looks like an area where the contact plane of the granite
and the sedimentary rock is near to or reaches the surface. Felsites
and red-coloured granites would be expected near the junction. If
these slates are carboniferous, then the granite is post-carboniferous ;
if Devonian, the granite is post-Devonian, in any event not pre-
Devonian. Some interesting features attend this area of altered rock.
It is true that Hunt's H. 19 granite in situ occurs 20 miles S.W.
of Eddystone. Here, too, have been found the only specimens of
schorlaceous granite or aplite M. lie, M. 27x ; hence come the other true
aplites M. 24g, M. 14e, M. 34e ; and hence we derive the micro-peg-
matite, M. 11a., all granitic, and not dioritic rocks. The only schorl
rocks, except M. 14f and M. 72, come, however, from M. 31 and M. 36,
one to two miles north of this area, and possibly in the absence of M. lie,
M. 27x would be regarded as strays. Such was the writer's first thought ;
but considering the nature of the adjacent rocks, he now inclines to
believe that both schorl rock and schorlaceous granite truly belong
to the area. The presence, in addition to the above-named, of diorite,
quartz diorite, and some intermediate igneous rocks is not overlooked.

The areas of gneiss and altered slate lie side by side, but neither
can claim exclusive occupation of its portion of the bed of the
Channel. (Plate XIV.)

Since very little good can result, with the present materials, from
any further attempt to deal with the plutonic and metamorphic rocks,
we next turn to the New lied Sandstone, which overlaps and partially
overlies the district just considered.

NEW RED SANDSTONE.

The westernmost shore exposures of New Eed Sandstone are at
Thurlestone in Bigbury Bay, and in Cawsand Bay on the Mount
Edgcumbe shore. There is also on the beach at Drake's Island in
Plymouth Sound an untravelled block of breccia of Triassic aspect,
weighing about four or five tons.

The mica-andesite (felsite of the Geological Survey) at Withuoe in
Whitsand Bay is an intrusive rock, evidently connected with the red
trap in Cawsand Bay, and undoubtedly of New Pted age. 354/4b
6 1 miles W. from Eame Head lies on another exposure of this same
igneous series.

NEW SEKIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. M

168 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

De la Beche, vvliose work stands as a model of careful discovery
and accurate inference, with reference to the red trap of Cawsand
writes : " Though unable to adduce direct proof, we are inclined to
refer this porphyry, from its general character, to the date of the
lower part of the red sandstone series, and to infer that it may be
connected with a portion of that series beneath the sea in the direction
of Bigbury Bay, on the coast of which, near Thurlestone, we find the
patch above noticed."^

In 1867 Pengelly, and in 1886 Worth, supplied proof and
confirmation as to the age of the 'porphyry.' And in 1898 the
writer, as the result of Dr. Allen's dredgings, was able to assert that
there was strong evidence that from the Hand Deeps to Bigbury Bay
the New Red rocks were continuous. It may now be added that
conglomerates dredged from off the Mcwstonc Ledge are distinctly of
the New Red type. In the gravels and sands between the Eddystone
and the Bolt New Red materials everywhere constitute a considerable
percentage of the rock fragments.

In the vicinity of the Eddystone and the Hand Deeps New Red
rocks are found in situ (wherever rock is exposed), through which
protrude the reefs. The conglomerate at the Hand Deeps contains
fragments of the local schists and gneisses.

The lithology of these rocks having been fully treated of in the
first part of the paper, it is not proposed to make any repetition here,
but pages 144 to 148 inclusive may be referred to. Although the
variety of the rocks is considerable, all, or almost all, appear to be
Triassic rather than Permian in character.

Only one of Hunt's specimens has any bearing on this formation,
and that is H. 10, S. Edd., 20 miles — " Triassic Sandstone."

Worth's discoveries further westward, meeting and overlapping the
Association's latest dredgings, are of especial importance ; these carry
the Trias to a point W. 5, S.W. by S. (mag ) Dodman, 25 miles, roughly
36 miles from the Eddystone.^ He doubted the eastward extension of
the outlier, on evidence which has interest as confirming the Associa-
tion's results. In fact the Trias does so extend, but his two eastern-
most points lay one on either side of the broad belt which it forms.
His W. 12, S. by E. Dodman, 27 miles, lies about 3 miles north-east
from M. 29, and at the latter point we now know that the Trias has
given place to higher strata. W. 12 yielded no Triassic rocks.

His W. 6, S. by W. Dodman, 20 miles, in addition to a salmon-tinted

1 Report Oil the Geology of Cornwall, Devon, and IVest Somerset, p. 212, 1839.
^2 "On a Submarine Triassic Outlier in the English Channel," Q.J.G.S., Vol. XLII,
1886, p. 313-15.

To face p. 168.

«0

*~»,

■:-:-x:---\_

st-

;

*^1\7

- (

•

r-"^

;

f ^

■

^ \

o o

;

o o o
^ o

■

o
u

""^STs^j— '~^

«^^tO/^

^ if

iP^

ki a
5

;

) /

o i^

> /

c "^M

^ ^i:

■^

;

-i

;

—

'il

Q '

<o-

a 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

■i. 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1- i..ui 1 1 1 ! 1 1 1 1

j 1 j^

To face p. 169.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 169

calcareous sau Istone (Triassic), yielded pebbles of granitic, granitoid, and
quartzite rocks, with flints, thus confirming M. 40, five miles westward.

On the chart here inserted the letter T indicates those dredgings
made by the Association in which New Bed rocks have been found ;
while Worth's records are marked T'. (Plate XV.)

The point at which the imssiccge-beds above the Trias were found is
marked P.B,, and L indicates limestones and marls of Liassie type.

CRETACEOUS.

Inasmuch as flints are recorded from practically every dredging, it is
useless to place the localities on a special chart.

A chart has, however, been prepared showing the distribution of
the hard yellow chalk. The northernmost location would appear to be
Hunt's H. 13, S.W. Ed.d.,15 miles; his record of "a small piece of buff-
coloured limestone, riddled through and through by molluscs and other
marine borers," probably refers to a piece of this chalk. From this
point to M. 41, a distance of, say, 11 miles, records are frequent in
the Association's dredgings. There is then a gap for about 14 miles,
and following this two localities occur, M. 58 and M. 67. (Plate XVI.)

The affinities of this yellow chalk appear to be with the ' Melbourn
Eock,' described by Mr. A. J. Jukes-Browne, and later by the same
author in collaboration with Mr. W. Hill.^

Whether lithological similarity in this case implies identity of age
may be doubtful. But the writer is indebted to Mr. Jukes-Browne
for the loan of some slides from his collection, and finds much in
common between these and his own slides prepared from the dredged
material. Unfortunately the latter contains no recognisable remains
of any zonal fossils. If of the same age as the Melbourn Eock, the
specimens indicate a formation lying at the base of the Middle Chalk.

EOCENE.

The one block of Eocene limestone is of great interest ; it is large,
over one foot in length, fiat-bedded, and angular. From its nature it
cannot have travelled far and preserved its present form ; indeed, it
must practically have been taken m situ.

The possibility of Eocene strata occupying some part of the western
bed of the English Channel had been recognised before this specimen
was taken, and the grounds for that recognition have been so well
summarised by Mr. Jukes-Browne, that no apology is needed for in-
serting here an extract from his work, l%e Building of the British Isles
(1892):—

"From the superposition of marine limestones upon the lignitic
1 "The Melbourn Eock, etc.," Q.J.G.S., Vol. XLII, 1886, p. 216 et seq.

170

DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION

series of tlie Paris Basin, and the sudden appearance in tliem and in
their English equivalents of tropical forms of mollusca, it was formerly
supposed that a subsidence took place which submerged part of the
intervening land and allowed the waters of the great Eocene Mediter-
ranean to occupy a portion of the low-lying tract on the northern side
of the barrier. But the discovery by M. Vasseur of deposits with
fossils of the Calcaire Grossier age near the mouth of the Loire, and
the identity of tlieir fauna with that of similar deposits in the little
basin of Carentan in Normandy, makes it much more probable that the

Fig. 3. The English Channel in the Middle Eocene Period. .
Land areas shaded. {After Jukes-Browne.)

incursion of warmer water came from the Atlantic. Professor Hebert
remarks that the height of the ground between Carentan and Eennes
makes it impossible to suppose that these two basins were directly
united. Brittany must have formed a promontory between the inlet
of the Loire and a channel which ran through what is now the opening
of the English Channel. M. Dollfus is of the same opinion, and has
recently proved by his researches along the south side of the Paris
Basin that there was a continuous shore-line along that district
throughout the whole of the Eocene period.

" It is fairly certain, therefore, that the opening was westward, and
was nothing less tlian an incursion of the Atlantic into the North

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 171

European region. We may suppose that the Atlantic waves had long
been thundering against the western land which united France to
Ireland, and that at last only a narrow tract of rocky land between
Cornwall and Brittany remained to separate the western ocean from
the lowland of the Anglo-Parisian area. The final breaching of this
was accomplished during the subsidence to which the Calcaire Grossier
testifies; the waters of the Atlantic soon widened the straits, and
established a sub-tropical fauna and fiora on the southern shores of
Britain."

Mr. Jukes-Browne gives a map showing the geography of the
Anglo-Gallic area as so interpreted ; this with some addition and cur-
tailment is here reproduced (Text, fig. 3). The Eocene of Carentan has
been marked ' C,' the similar si rata near the mouth of the Loire have
been marked ' L,' and the position of the dredging M. 77, from which
came the Eocene limestone, is indicated by the letter ' E.' The confir-
mation afforded by this discovery to the views of French geologists, in a
problem the key to which lies in their country, is a pleasant matter to
record.
GENERAL CONCLUSIONS.

The atfinities of the crystalline rocks in the area examined are
strongly toward Brittany, and but slightly toward the mainland of
Devon and Cornwall.

There is evidence, amounting at the least to a strong suspicion, that
the granite which occurs at and around a point 20 miles south 26° west
from the Eddystone is post-carboniferous ; and this granite exhibits a
tendency toward the Dartmoor type.

The Triassic outlier off the Lizard and Dodman discovered by the
late E. N. "Worth has proved to be connected eastward with an even
larger area of New Bed Sandstone rocks, which may very probably be
continuous with the nearest shore exposures.

A clear indication of the eastern boundary of the Trias has been
found at a point about 20 miles south 17° west of the Eddystone.
There seems fair reason to suppose that the western boundary of the
Jurassic formations may for a short distance approximate to a line
drawn south-west from this point. It may, however, be noted that
Lias limestone was found in a detrital deposit at Cattedown (Ply-
mouth) by the late K. N. Wortli.

The Cretaceous rocks dredged from the Channel are now for the
first time recognised to include chalk as well as flint. There is some
possibility that the rock found is from the base of the Middle Chalk.

Flints, in addition to occurring on modern beaches, are found also in
the raised beaches of Devon and Cornwall ; were very numerous,

172 DREDGINGS OF THE MAWNE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

associated with Dartmoor rocks, in the cletrital deposits lying on
the limestone at Cattedown, and examined by E. N. Worth; have been
found by the writer, again associated with Dartmoor rocks, on the floor
of clay-filled fissures in the Plymouth Limestone 20 feet below low
water, and have been found by him on the rock beds of the Plymouth
estuaries, buried beneath the silt.

As a result of the dredgings a considerable westerly extension of
the boundary lines of the Trias, the Lias, and the Cretaceous must be
made on our maps, beyond the present usually accepted speculative
bounds. And the theory of an Eocene drift, sometimes put forward to
account for the flints, must be abandoned.

It appears that from distant geologic time a depression has existed,
having the same trend as the western part of the English Channel,
and occupying a part at least of the same area. The New Eed Sand-
stone first distinctly shows the previous existence of this depression.
From Torbay to Plymouth the northern verge of the New Pted de-
posits touches the present shore-line here and there ; always the
derived fragments in the conglomerates and sandstones are largely
from local rocks. From Plymouth to nine miles south-east of the
Lizard it runs parallel to the coast without absolutely touching it,
and how far further west it extends we do not at present know. An
arm of the great inland sea of this period, probably of its later or
Triassic years, had its northern shore much where the waters of the
Channel now meet the cliffs of Devon and Cornwall. How wide the
Trias lake was along this western extension cannot at present be
known ; its deposits are lost under those of the succeeding Liassic sea,
perhaps to reappear nearer France, perhaps not.

During the later Jurassic period this depression would appear to
have slowly risen free from the waters, and in part, if not in whole, to
have become a subaerial valley.

The Cretaceous era witnessed its entire submergence, although the
highest points of Devon, where Dartmoor and Exmoor now stand, may
have appeared as islands above the surrounding waters.

This submergence was gradual. A problematic coast-line of the time
of the Lower Chalk has been laid down by Mr. Jukes-Browne.^ By
that author's consent the map accompanying his paper in the Transac-
tions of the Devonshire Association is here reproduced (Text, fig. 4).

It may be that the westerly extension of the Cenomanian sea has
not been sufficiently prolonged ; be that as it may, the sea of the Upper
Chalk sent an arm westward to the Lizard parallel or probably beyond.

1 "Devonshire in the Time of the Lower Chalk," Trans. Dev. Assoc, Vol. XXXV,
1903, p. 787 et seq.

Fig. 4. Maj) showing the probable geography of Devon, etc., in the
Cenomaniau Age. (By Jukes-Biowne. )

174 DKEDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :

The next movement of the earth's surface involved an emergence
of the land, and the depression which we are considering came into
subaerial conditions once more ; how far it had been tilled in the
meantime by chalk rocks and its features obliterated cannot be decided.
We may imagine the denudation and solution of the chalk to have
at once commenced, and for a period there existed over the site of the
English Channel a valley draining eastward.

At this time a profound change in the geography of Northern
Europe was imminent ; the Western Land was slowly yielding place
to the sea, and already Atlantis was almost lost in the ocean. A
renewed subsidence brought the eastern sea in constant encroach-
ment westward over the site of the Channel and helped bring the
Atlantic eastward toward it. In the Middle Eocene period the last
barrier to the junction of these waters must have yielded, and for the
first time the Atlantic ebbed and flowed in the ancient depression
south of the Devon and Cornwall coasts, now re-excavated and largely
cleared of the cretaceous deposits. The English Channel may be said
to have had its birth.

That the sea still occupied the w^estern part of the Channel during
the Oligocene, Miocene, and earlier Pliocene periods seems a fair in-
ference from all known facts, but no evidence for or against this view
is yielded by the dredgings. In later Pliocene times the valley of the
Channel was once more dry land, and almost certainly drained west-
ward to the Atlantic. There is reason to believe that, during this and
the earlier part of the Pleistocene period, features were impressed upon
the valley of the Channel which it has never since entirely lost.
Despite occasional halts and even retrogressions, the victory has since
lain with the sea, which has reoccupied the valley between France and
England, and in so doing has modified its contour, bringing into being
the Channel bed as it now is.

If the true physical history of the Channel has been as above
described, does it explain the conditions now found ?

The absence of all actual chalk, excepting some peculiarly hard
nodules which from their exceptional character offer great comparative
resistance to destructive agents, may be attributed to its removal by
solution and denudation during periods of subaerial condition. It may
have been that some traces were left which were only finally destroyed
by marine erosion during the latest incursion of the sea. It may even
be that undiscovered patches yet remain. But the flints are left to
indicate where the chalk has been.

Bare patches of soft sandstone and softer marl present no difficulty
of explanation. Assuming the last subsidence to have been even

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 175

moderately rapid, the sli ore-line would never have presented any con-
siderable height of cliff. Fringing the cliff in all bays and many
creeks would be beaches of sand and shingle derived chieHy from the
local rocks. Beyond the beach, where soft strata existed would be
tidal plains of marine erosion, such level surfaces as now exist between
tide-marks in Torbay. The constant advance of the sea, the constant
depression of the land, would ever carry forward the line of shore, the
sea-cliff" for the time being existent, and the beach would follow ; its
material would always be largely derived from the actual cliff, but in
part consist of older material driven forward by the waves. The
rocky plain would sink beneath the sea, and be left as a rather uniform
surface of slight gradient seaward. Little or no beach would be left
behind, and the older constituents of the beaches, those derived from
the outer previous shore-lines, would never long persist, the constant
wear reducing and destroying them.

Boulders from harder rocks would not be driven on in the
same manner as pebbles and shingle, but would remain near their
points of origin. Until, however, some considerable depth of water
flowed over them, sucli boulders would still be liable to wear from ex-
ceptional wave action ; and, further, we may consider that, especially
with the granitoid rocks, submarine weathering must produce, but in a
greatly less degree, the familiar effects of subaerial exposure. The
chief and important difference would arise from the more uniform
temperature of the sea.

There is reason to believe that the first inlet of the sea was some-
what long and narrow, a comparatively sheltered area, where wave
action would be slight. That large and relatively unworn stones
might be left here would be no occasion for surprise. And as the land
sank and the Channel widened, this first-formed portion of its bed
would still receive some shelter, until it was covered with water too
deep to permit destructive wave-action. Extending the argument,
there seems here a reasonable explanation of the general increase in
the size of the dredged stony material outward into the Channel.
Other causes may have co-operated. That wave action beyond the
forty-fathom line has little or no destructive effect upon the pebbles
at present, may be judged by the existence of pieces of yellow chalk
and of Lias limestone bored and riddled through and through and yet
in pebble form.

But in a narrow sea, while the wave action would be slight the tidal
currents would be swift, and sand would not readily deposit ; hence the
fact that these stones were not buried beneath finer deposits derived
from the shores.

176 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

Even now, could the fine sands which float about in the Channel
find a resting-place in its main water-way, a very short period would
suffice to bury the stones and boulders. The surface tow-nets used on
the cruises undertaken for the purposes of the International Sea
Fisheries Investigations constantly catch considerable quantities of
fine sand. But sand which by wave disturbance can be maintained at
the surface over a depth of forty or fifty fathoms requires but a slight
current to prevent it coming to rest on the bottom. It is not
necessarily that the currents scour the inorganic sand from the sea-
bed, but that they prevent its settlement there.

As regarding organic carbonate of lime, shell, and other material,
which is forming even now in the deeper parts of the Channel, the
currents must be credited with removing some of this mechanically,
some by solution, as the particles become finer by disintegration, and
the redeposit of such material must take place in quieter waters.
Otherwise from the accumulation of this debris alone the stones would
long since have been entirely covered.

Defective argument may be based on accurate observation, and if
the hypotheses above put forward are found incapable of bearing the
test of closer reasoning or of fresh discovery, the apology for their
being must stand — that they are based in fact, and in fact the state-
ment of which has been in no way influenced by them.

On two points further work is in hand : the examination of the
flints for fossils, and the closer inspection of the baked shales from the
neighbourhood of the presumedly Post-Carboniferous Granite.

AN ADDITIONAL NOTE.— THE SANDS AND GRAVELS.

Fine materials, sands and gravel, from eighteen dredgings have
been examined, but not in such detail as might be desirable.

As a whole the mineralogical results confirm the conclusions derived
from the stone samples ; so closely are these in agreement that a very
few points need be noted.

M. 29. S. 14° W. Edd., 19 S miles, gives exactly the same results in the
fine material as in the pebbles, small fragments of the passage-bed
marls being fairly frequent, and no Triassic rocks present.

M. 71. S. 23 W. Edd., 190 miles, yields Triassic material, which M. 72,
a coarse dredging from the same spot, did not ; this is within the New
Eed Sandstone area.

M. 75. S. 20' W. Edd., 381 miles, yields a little Trias.

M. 65. S. 22° W. Edd., 422 miles, possibly contains a little Triassic
material.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 177

The southernmost find of New Eed Sandstone rocks among the
pebbles having been M. 18, S. 29" W. Edd., 23.4 miles, this trace of the
same in the sands shows in all probability an outward and downward
movement of small quantities of detritus, extending nearly twenty
miles, certainly fifteen miles. This is the only evidence of any but
very restricted movement among the mineral constituents of the sands,
and it must be remembered that Triassic sandstones and marls are
present in great quantity on their own area, and the amount of detritus
would be proportionately large, some might well have trespassed on to
other ground.

In all but this matter the inorganic sands agree so precisely with
the closely adjacent coarse deposits, even in minute detail, and their
constituents are so exactly parallel, that great strength is given to the
previously urged view as to the value of the dredgings for approximate
geological mapping.

In the gravels of some dredgings sharp chips of brown flints are
rather common. Such angular flint flakes were taken at M. 37, S. 41°
W. Edd., 171 miles, M. 71, M 40, M. 73, M. 56, M. 75, M 76, M. 65, and
M. 61, S. 25° W. Edd., 464 miles, extending thus over a long range. For
the more part the surfaces of the chips are practically undecomposed,
and all are of brown flint. (It is black flint which chiefly shows the
extreme alteration referred to in an earlier part of this paper.) These
chips do not, however, look quite recent. They are such as would be
formed by the mutual impact of subangular flints, possibly but rarely
of broken flint pebbles. They could never last long on a beach or in
any depth of water to which considerable wave action extended,
although such wave action might constantly create a fresh supply.
With a stationary shore-line a few such chips might be found a little
below low-water mark, but only rarely. On the other hand, with an
advancing shore-line and constantly deepening water it is quite easy
to imagine that, formed on beaches or in shallow water, they might be
placed in deeper water conditions soon enough to preserve many of
them from destruction. Taking the deposit at TIallsands as an
instance of a flint beach, long stationary, I may say that I have never
dredged off that shore any such flint chips, although it must be
imagined that some are at times formed. But probably one reason for
their absence at Hallsands is the extent to which the shingle has been
rounded, and a broken pebble is most rarely found ; while with the sea
advancing over a land surface covered with unrolled flints the process
of rounding these into pebbles or commencing such rounding would
give rise to very numerous chips. The fragments are therefore the
supplement of the subangular blocks of flint still associated with them,

178 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

and they persist — firstly, because the original supply was great ;
secondly, because for some time after their formation the sea was con-
stantly deepening over them ; and lastly, those only remain which
have formed from material capable of resisting decomposition.

APPENDIX I.

M. Delesse on the English Channel. Translated extract.^

" La Manclie, whicli washes the whole north-west of France, is a shallow
sea, its mean depth being no more than 45 metres. Its basin shoals near the
coasts of France and England, and also toward the Pas-de-Calais, while
deepening toward the Atlantic.

"We would direct attention to the submarine terraces which border the coasts
as among the princi})al features of the orography of la Manclie. Outside
these terraces somewhat numerous banks occur, especially toward the Pas-de-
Calais, as, for instance, the Bassure, the Vergoyer, and the Golhart, which lie
near and parallel Avith the French coast.

"ISTote should be made of the central deep which stretches from off the
county of Sussex to Finistere. Near cap de la Hague, at the western extreme
of Gotentin, it twists and presents irregular ramifications.

" In breadth but slight, in depth it much exceeds the rest of la Manchet
reaching even, at the west of cap de la Hague, to over 160 metres. This
central deep corresponds to a submarine valley, and that it has not been
scoured out by the currents of la Manclie its characteristics clearly show. It
is formed, on the contrary, by a deep cleavage, having a general direction of
E.jST.E., and, although very narrow, not yet filled by recent deposits.

" Since la Manclie is swept by strong currents, it should follow that deposits
are not universally received on its bed, which, on the contrary, should
frequently be formed of rocks {I'oches pierreuses) of earlier than the present
period; and this, in fact, the soundings show, while these rocks occupy an
even greater proportional area of the bed than in other seas.

" In the first place, they cover large areas in the western part of la Manche ;
they border Brittany and Cotentin, which they join to Jersey and the other
Channel Islands ; and further they unite Brittany to Cornwall, and Cotentin
to the south of England. Cutting out on very irregular boundaries, not only
do they spread along the coasts, but pass completely across 7a Manclie,
extending even to the deepest parts of its basin and the mid-course of its
valley.

"These rocks are certainly very varied; between Brittany, Cotentin, and
Cornwall and Devonshire, they are, however, either granites, or belong to the
1 Lithologie des Mers de France, etc., p.p. 308-9.

£L

To face p. 179.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 179

transitinn formations. Srnindings sliow that the}' consist in pai't of (lelaclied
stones (jn'erres dcsagregees) ; in addition to which rotten rocks {roches ivmnies)
are frequent around latitude 49° 15', longtitude 7° 10' (W. of Paris), in tlie
ndd-course of the valley of la Manchc.

" Further to the east the rocks should be submarine extensions of the
secondary formations which build up the opposite coasts of France and
England. Thus the coast rocks of Calvados, which are limestones of the
lower Jurassic period, are continued far out under the sea. And, similarl}^,
white chalk is found at a considerable distance from the chalk cliffs of Fecamp,
of Dieppe, and of Saint-Valery en Cau.v, and is especially prominent on the
bed of the Pas-de- Calais," etc.

APPENDIX II.

By the kind permission of Mr. A. R. Hunt, m.a., p.q.s., the following
petrological notes, abstracted from his papers on the Submarine Geology of
the English Channel^ are here reproduced.

In his work, Mr. Hunt had the assistance of the late Mr. E. B. Tawney,
M.A., F.G.s. (E. B. T.), Prof. T. G. Bonney, m.a., f.g.s. (T. G. B.), and Mr. A.
Harker, m.a., f.g.s., (A. H.), and all the notes herein included are taken from
the descriptions written by some one or other of these petrologists.

The initials of the authorities, as given above, follow each entry.

Although for present purposes the notes have been somewhat shortened, no
variation has been made amounting in any Avay to more than the exclusion of
minor detail.

All bearings are magnetic, and bearings and distances alike are given on the
authority of the fishermen who traAvled the blocks. Hence minute accuracy
can not be expected, but, on the other hand, subsequent experience indicates
that probably no very considerable error has been made. (Plate XVII.)

CRYSTALLINE ROCKS.
Eight Granite. Nos. 2, 19, 20, 27, 34, 35, 39, 42.

H. 2. Doorstep of Brixham Orphanage. A granite of moderately coarse
grain and pinkish colour, with large pale flesh-coloured orthoclase twins.

Biotite and muscovite in about equal proportions. Orthoclase largely
predominant, but some plagioclase present.

The quartz contains cavities, some with moving bubbles ; also microlite
needles, and hair-like delicate crystals of undetermined character. Some
apatite is present. — E. B. T.

1 Transactions of the Devonshire Associations, 1879, 1880, 1881, 1883, 1885, 1889.

180 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :

H. 19. Broken off by trawl about 20 miles S.AV. of Eddystone.

Granite of coarse grain. Both white and black micas present. A little triclinic
felspar in addition to the orthoclase. The quartz contains large fluid inclusions
with bubbles. Apatite is abundant in rather large crystals. — E. B. T.

H. 20. About 10 miles S.W. by S. of Start Point, weight about 15 to
16 cwt.

A coarse grey granite with silvery mica in addition to dark mica. Felspar
chiefly orthoclase, but a little triclinic felsj^ar, including microcline, is present.
The quartz contains fluid cavities. An occasional tendency to micropegniatic
structure. — E. B. T.

H. 27. Trawled 18 miles S.W. of the Start.

A rather fine-grained granite, reminding Prof. Bonney somewhat of granites
from one or two localities in the Channel Isles.

It consists of quartz, felspar (orthoclase, oligoclase (1), and perhaps
microcline), and two micas, black and white, the former occasionally some-
.what altered. — T. G. B.

H. 34. Trawled 18 to 20 miles S.S.W. of Start Point. Weight 9 or
10 cwt.

A true granite, a good deal decomposed. — T. G. B.

H. 35. Trawled 21 miles S.W. of Start Point. Weight about 5 cwt.
A granite containing quartz, with the usual felspars, hornblende, and brown
mica. — T. G. B.

H. 39. Trawled 15 miles S.E. by E. of Berry Head. Weight 4 to 5 cwt.

A rather fine-grained granite of a warm greyish colour. It consists of quartz,
— containing fluid cavities, with bubbles and some acicular microliths (^rutile)
— felspar, somewhat decomposed, both orthoclase and plagioclase (? oligoclase),
brown mica, occasionally somewhat decomposed, a little white mica, and iron
oxide.— T. G. B.

H. 42. Trawled 12 miles S.W. of Start Point. Weight 3 cwt.

A moderately finely crystalline rock, speckled lighter and darker grey,
looking like a granite, with possibly a slight foliation. Consists of quartz,
felspar (orthoclase and plagioclase), and a considerable quantity of brown
mica, Avith a rich colour and strong dichroism. Now and then there is a little
white mica. — T. G. B.

Four Hornblbndic Granite. Nos. 4, 21, 24, 25.

H. 4. Trawled 15 miles S.W. of Start Point. A rounded block measuring
3' 6" X 2' 3" X r 8".

A coarse-grained rock, exhibiting colourless felspar and quartz, black horn-
blende, and brown mica. Hornblende and biotite abundantly present. Of
the felspars, orthoclase and plagioclase seem in almost equal proportions ; both
are much decomposed and kaolinised in i:>atches. The quartz contains a
quantity of hair-like crystals of undetermined nature ; besides these are a

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 181

few prismatic microlites, and enclosure of minute cavities. Apatite is well
developed also. — E. B. T.

H. 24. Trawled 14 or 20 miles 8.S.E. of Start Point. Weiglit about
4 cwt.

A rather coarse-grained hornlilendic granite, of darkish tint ; the felspars of
slightly pinkish hue. Both hornblende and dark mica are present in abund-
ance. The felspar is much decomposed, and is chiefly orthoclase. Aj^atite
present — E. B. T.

H. 21. Trawled 16 or 17 miles S. of Eddystone. Weight about 5 cwt,
A granite of medium grain, with faint pink-tinted felspars, and in which

hornblende is abundantly visible ; of biotite there is much less. Though the

felspars are much decomposed, pl.agioclase can be detected in some quantity.

Apatite seems nearly absent. Quartzes are clear, but moving bubbles are

frequent in the liquid inclusions. — E. B. T.

H. 28. Trawled 15 miles S. of Start Point. Weight 3 to 4 cwt.
To the eye much like No. 24, but differs a little in shade. Biotite more
abundant than hornblende ; apatite very abundant. — E. B. T.

One Gneiss. No. 36.

H. 36. Trawled about 21 miles S.W. of Start Point. Weight 8 or 9 cwt.

Quartz, felspar (plagioclase predominating), brown mica and some white
mica, apatite. Prof. Benney adds : " The rock, I think, is undoubtedly a
gneiss, and it is of an Archsean type." — T. G. B.

Three Granitoid Gneiss. Kos. 3, 28, 61.

H. 3. Salcombe Block, buried at Brixham Orphanage.

A rather fine-grained granite-looking rock, in which a certain streaky
arrangement of the mica is apparent, the felspars fresh and translucent.

The thin slice shows the micas distinctly set in one direction mainly ; they
wrap around the felspars or larger quartzes. The felspars show little or no
kaolinisation ; orthoclase more abundant than plagioclase. Both biotite and
muscovite are present. The quartz contains numerous delicate, long capillary
crystals, and cavities with bubbles. Apatite is present. — E. B. T.

No. 28. Trawled 15 miles S. S.W. of Start Point. Weight 12 cwt.

A very coarse gneiss rather than a granite. The quartz occurs both in
larger grains, rather full of cavities, and in aggregates of small granules. The
felspar is in parts more decomposed, and replaced by aggregates of secondary
products (micaceous and other microliths), or by a dull greenish granular
mineral, perhaps an impure epidote, but in parts is fairly well preserved,
microcline being common. There are also flakes of an olive-brown older mica,
and a few granules of iron peroxide. "This rock has the aspect of a very
ancient Archsean gneiss." — T. G. B.

H. 61. Erratic on shore, S.E. of East Prawle.

A light grey rock with the appearance of a fine-grained granite or granitic
gneiss. The foliation seen in the slice is not evident in the hand-specimen.

182 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

The rock consists mainly of felspar and quartz, with subordinate liiotite,
etc. The felspar is chiefly, if not wholly, of triclinic varieties. jNluch of it
is microcline ; there is also some oligoclase with carlsbad, and albite-twinning.
Most is clear, but there are cloudy patches in places, which seem due to the
development of white mica in minute scales. Quartz occurs in large and
small grains, usually composite ; strain-shadows are common. The biotite has
a marked parallel orientation throughout the slice. It is a deep brown,
intensely pleochroic mica, becoming green only by alteration. The other
elements of the rock are rare magnetite and green hornblende, with some
epidote and other secondary minerals. — A. H.

Two HoRNBLBNDic Gneiss. Nos. 33, 44.

H. 33. Trawled about 12 miles S.E. of Start Point.

Quartz abundant in irregular aggregated granules, felsjiar in occasional
grains, with very irregular outline ; orthoclase (probably) and plagioclase.
Green hornblende, a strongly dichroic variety, in streak-like aggregates of long,
slightly fibrous prisms, magnetite, a few films of brown mica, a little apatite,
possibly zircon. — T. G. B.

H. 44. Trawled block, lying on Brixham Quay.

A medium-grained felspar-hornblende rock with well-marked banding, the
white felspathic and black hornblendic bands being commonly from one-
twentieth to one-eighth inch in Avidth. There is no evident fissile structure,
and the rock is perhaps to be styled a hornblende-gneiss rather than a horn-
blende-schist.

Felspar, the dominant mineral, is exclusively plagioclase, apparently a basic
labradorite. Inconstant twinning is often seen to be clearly connected with
a slight bending of the crystal, and must in great part be secondary and the
consequence of strain. ]\Iost of the felsj)ar is perfectly clear, but there are
also cloudy opaque patches, white by reflected light. The abundant green
pleochroic hornblende is in ragged or irregularly bounded crystals. Asso-
ciated with it is a clear colourless augite. This is often embedded in
the hornblende, but there is no clear indication of the latter mineral
having originated at the expense of augite. JSTo iron-ore appears in the
slice. — A. H.
Three Hornblendic Granitoid Gneiss. Nos. 31, 32, 41,

H. 31. TraAvled 18 miles S.S.W. of Start Point. Weight about 3 cwt.

Quartz, felspar, brown mica, a little hornblende, and a little green chloritic
mineral, perhaps an alteration product after some of the mica, some apatite.
The quartz has rather numerous minute cavities, some empty, some with small
moving bubbles. The felspar (which is a little decomposed) is partly ortho-
clase, but there is a good deal of albite or oligoclase. — T. G. B.

H. 32. Trawled 12 miles S.S.E. of Eddystone. Weight about 7 cwt.
Minerals as in 31, but in rather different proportions. For instance, there
is more hornblende. The state of preservation is not so good. — T. G. B.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 183

H. 41. Trawled 16 miles S. by W. of Eddystone. Weight 5 to 6 cwt.

A pale-coloured coarse rock witli a rather porphyritic structure, the felspar
crystals occasionally about an inch long. Quartz containing rather numerous
enclosures, chiefly little cavities with small bubbles ; felspar, rather de-
composed, one crystal in the section is a plagioclase, but the larger crystals
resemble orthoclase ; white mica ; the section shows a good-sized grain of
brownish hornblende ; some dark granules or grains, probably hematite. —
T. G. B.

One Microgkanulite. ^o. 40.

H. 40. Trawled 22 miles S.W. of Start Point. Weight 2 or 3 cwt.

The ground-mass a very intimate mixture of quartz and felspar, exhibiting
numerous varieties of micrograj^hic structure. Rather rounded crystals of
felspar, up to about quarter of an inch in diameter, generally in fair preserva-
tioii, and in most cases orthoclase. Smaller and less distinct grains of quartz.
Irregular patches of a dark mineral, seen in the section to be a green chloritic
mineral, often rendered nearly opaque by the association of brown iron
oxide.— T. G. B.

One Quartz Felsite. No. 43.

H. 43. Exact locality unknown. Weight about 12 cwt.

The microscope shows grains of quartz and felspar, and clusters of rather
small flakes of biotite, scattered in a microgranular matrix of quartz and
felspar, with occasional flakes of biotite or a greenish mineral, possibly a
chlorite or a variety of hornblende, with sometimes a certain amount of ferrite
staining. The felspar varies much in its state of preservation, some grains
being very decomposed, others rather clear. Plagioclase is present. — T. G. B.

Two Syenite. Nos. 7, 9.

H. 7. Trawled about 20 miles S.W. by W. of Start Point. Weight about
4 cwt.

A dark green rock of coarse grain, felspars opaque, tinted with pale green
and mixed with black hornblende in about equal proportions. Microscopic
examination shows the felspars so much decomposed that they are not
individually determinable ; many are certainly plagioclase from indications of
multiple twinning, Avhether plagioclase or orthoclase is predominant cannot be
determined. There is a considerable amount of quartz present, of which
much is certainly secondary ; it is seen replacing felspar crystals and originat-
ing from their decomposition. The hornblende is green in colour ; by decom-
position it gives rise to chloritic matter, with which some epidote is mixed ;
epidote may also be seen in the decomposed felspars. Apatite crystals are
large, and specially abundant near the hornblende. Ilmenite is also pre-
sent.— E. B. T.

H. 9. Dredged 20 miles S. of Eddystone. Weight from ^ to i cwt.

The same minerals occur as in No. 7, but it differs by the abundance of
quartz, the substitution mostly of chlorite for hornblende, and the obscure
linear arrangement of the same. — E. B. T.

NEAV SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. N

184 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION:

Four Dioritb. Nos. 1, 16, 22, 62.

H. 1. From Salcombe fishing grounds. Weight 9^ cwt.

Macroscopically this rock shows a pale yellowish-white felspar and a very
dark green hornblende, which appear to be rather closely set in a dull yellow-
grey rather compact matrix. The slide shows felspar crystals, which have a
tolerably regular outline, but are, as a rule, much decomposed, the mineral
being often converted into an aggregate of earthly granules. In some of the
crystals the polysynthetic twinning of plagioclase is still visible. The horn-
blende is a rich green colour, with fairly strong dichroism, and tolerably per-
fect crystal outlines. There are several grains of quartz, and a few clusters of
small flakes of brownish mica, and a little magnetite. — T, G. B.

H. 16. Trawled 17 miles S. of Start Point. Measures 2' 6" x 1' 10" x 1' 2".

A sap-green coloured rock, in which the large actinolite crystals chiefly
catch the eye ; it is coarsely crystalline. The microscope shows the long ac-
tinolite crystals, green in colour, and at the borders often connected with
diverging bundles and needles of pale green crystals, also actinolite, which
penetrate the felspars.

The plagioclase still preserves its twinning for the most part, but much of it
is attacked by decomposition, and it is everywhere permeated by long actino-
litic fibres and particles. Apatite is present. Secondary quartz has been
deposited in little veins and interstices, — E. B. T.

H. 22. Trawled 20 miles S. of Eddystone. Weight about 5 cwt.

Quartz is not so abundant as in granite, while the microscopic examination
shows that the prevailing felspar is triclinic. Hornblende is abundant, and
also dark mica; the latter occurs not so much as scattered crystals as in
groups of diverging or matted prisms. Apatite is abundant ; magnetite grains
occur also mixed with the mica. — E. B. T.

H. 62. Erratic on shore near Gorah Run, E.S.E. of Prawle.

A moderately coarse granitic rock, in which black hornblende is conspicuous,
set in white felspar and grey quartz. Lustrous flakes of dark mica are also
seen.

Green hornblende and brown biotite are both well represented. The
former often shows faces of the prism-zone, but never builds very perfect
crystals. One section, three-eighths inch in diameter, is studded with little
grains and rounded crystals of felspar, and some of quartz. The smaller cry-
stals of hornblende are sometimes tAvinned on the usual law. Much of the
biotite, which tends to build stout flakes, is bleached and partially de-
composed. The felspar tends to form rectangular crystals, and is chiefly,
if not wholly, oligoclase with rather close albite-lamellation. The crystals
are often cloudy from alteration, especially in the interior. The clear
quartz often shows strain-shadows. The only other original mineral is a
little apatite.

Quartz is more abundant than in most ordinary quartz-diorites, — A. H.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 185

Two Diabase. Nos. 17, 37.

H. 17. Trawled 17 to 18 miles S.W. by W. of Start Point. Weight 7 to
8 cwt.

A dark green rock of medium grain, with minute specks of pyrites. A
diabase of ordinary type. The plagioclase is much decomposed, the twinning
being often lost. Quartz has been secondarily deposited. The augite has also
been partly attacked by decomposition, and chloritic matter has resulted
thereby. A little apatite is present. Magnetite or black oxide is much more
abundant than the pyrites. — E. B. T.

H. 37. Trawled 15 miles S.S.W. of Start Point. Weight 7 to 8 cwt.

A rather compact, dull, greenish-grey crystalline rock. Microscopic
examination shows it has once been a fine-grained but holocrystalline rock,
composed mainly of plagioclase felspar, augite, and some iron peroxide ; but it
is now composed of more or less altered felspars, associated with viridite and
chloritic minerals, epidote and other secondary products, and perhaps some
altered augite.— T. G. B.

Three Gabbro. Nos. 8, 15, 38.

H. 8. Trawled about 25 miles S.W. of Start Point. Weight 5 to 6 cwt.

A coarse-grained rock consisting of white opaque felspar crystals and
yellowish-grey diallage. Microscopic examination shows no other constituents ;
the felspar is almost entirely decomposed, scarcely showing original optical
features. The diallage at borders sometimes undergoes a change into
actinolite. — E. B. T.

H. 15. Trawled about 16 miles S. of Start Point. Measures 2' 8" x 1' 8"
X 1'6".

To this block some ' killas ' was adherent, so that it was a junction speci-
men. The diallage scarcely retains its own physical properties ; much of it
has become altered to an aggregate of diverging fibrous, colourless or pale
greenish crystals, which may probably belong to the actinolite group. The
plagioclase is in places opaque from decomposition, and is everywhere much
penetrated by the pale green actinolite microlites. — E. B. T.

H. 38. Trawled 15 miles S.S.W. of Start. Weight 10 cwt.

A moderately coarse-grained compound of a bluish-white felspar and a dull
green mineral. Microscopic examination shows that it is a considerably
altered gabbro. The plagioclastic felspar is to a very large extent replaced by
micromineral products, such as occur in the so-called saussurite. The augite
or diallage is replaced by hornblende, sometimes normal in aspect, sometimes
rather actinolitic. An iron oxide and a little apatite are present, but no
indication of former olivine. — T. G. B.

One Serpentine. No. 6.

H. 6. Trawled 13 miles S.S.W. of Start Point. Weight 5 cwt.

Mottled red and green colour, with steatite veins, and precisely like some ol
the Cornish varieties.

186 DREDGINGS OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION :

The microscope shows that none of the olivine is left unchanged in the
meshes; in the serpentine are abundance of scattered haematite blotches.
Veins of chrysolite, or steatite, have a central line of black iron oxide bordered
often with red. Some of the enstatite is left unchanged, but only in
fragments in the middle of bundles of talcose crystals and steatite, to which
it seems to give rise by decomposition. — E. B. T.

One Trachyte. No. 29,

H. 29. Trawled 18 miles S.W. by S. of Start Point. Weight 3 or 4 cwt.

Under the microscope this rock exhibits a glassy base, in part but probably
not wholly devitrilied, with a fairly well-marked fluidal structure. It has
undergone a certain amount of secondary change in the development of various
microlithic minerals, showing bright colours between crossed nicols, and of
specks of viridite. In this ground-mass occur numerous crystals of felspar,
sometimes rather rounded or broken-looking, which contain microliths or glass
inclusions, more or less altered. Some are plagioclase, probably oligoclase,
others appear to be orthoclase. There is a filmy green mineral associated with
streaks of opacite, which very probably replaces a mica, and there are some
grains of iron peroxide. No quartz grains are to be seen in the slide ; there
may be some apatite. — T. G. B.

NON-CRYSTALLINE ROCKS.

Two Conglomeratic-grit. Nos. 5, 26.

H 5. Trawled 20 miles S.W. of Start Point. Weight 10 cwt.

A coarse grit containing a few pebbles of rolled vein quartz, flesh-coloured
felspar, and fragments of fine-grained felsite-like rock. The rock has much
the appearance of an arkose. — E. B. T.

H. 26. Trawled 15 or 20 miles W.S.W. of Eddystone. Weight 3 or 4
cwt.

A moderately coarse grit composed wholly or almost wholly of rounded
grains of whitish quartz, cemented by pyrite. — T. G. B.

One Killas. Attached to No. 15.

H. 15. Trawled 16 miles S. of Start Point.

One Triassic Sandstone. No. 10.

H. 10. Trawled 20 miles S. of Eddystone.

An unrolled fragment of a reddish-brown sandstone, similar in appearance
to the Triassic sandstones abundant either in mass or as outliers on the coast
of South Devon.

One Neocomian Sandstone. No. 23.

H. 23. Trawled 15 miles S.E. of Start Point. Weight 9 to 10 cwt.

A sandstone with green grains; it has all the appearance of Neocomian
sandstone, as in Kent. — E. B. T.

THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL. 187

Four (Sets) Chalk Flints. Nos. 11, 12, 14, IS.

H. 11. Trawled 20 miles S.W. of Eddystone.

Some twenty chalk flints ; one weighs 6 lb., and is perfectly nnrolled.

H. 12. Trawled 15 miles S.W. of Eddystone.

A small flint about 8 oz. in weight.

H. 14. Trawled 20 miles S.W. of Start Point. Weighs 31b. 2 oz. and
21b. 14 oz. respectively.

H. 18. Trawled 17 or 18 miles S.W. by W. of Start Point. One flint
weighed 1 lb. 9^ oz.

One Limestone. No. 13.

H. 13. Trawled 15 miles S.W. of Eddystone.

A small piece of buff-coloured limestone, riddled through and through by
molluscs and other marine borers.

One Grit. No. 30.

H. 30. Trawled 15 to 20 miles S.S.W. of Start Point.

This is a small stone, measuring about 8" x 6" x 4", of fine grit, and may
well have been used for ballast. Its evidence is accordingly valueless.

APPENDIX III.

The observations of the late Mr. R. N. Worth,^ f.g.s.

The bulk of the material Avas obtained for Mr. Worth by the late Mr.
Matthias Dunn, of Mevagissey ; it was all brought up entangled in the hooks
of bolters or long-lines. All bearings are magnetic. (Plate XVII.)

"The evidence that the rocks were in situ Avhen entangled (partly by the
marine growths upon them, and partly by their irregularities and the holes
bored by Pliolades) is clear. With two exceptions only, the specimens
retained the characteristics of the original bedding."

W. 1. S.E. Lizard, 10 miles.

Fine-grained, soft, red Triassic sandstone, in layers 1^ to 2 inches thick.

W. 2. S.E. Lizard, 15 miles.

Triassic sandstone of coarser grain, mottled red and grey.

W, 3. S.E. Manacles Rocks, 16 miles.

Fine-grained soft sandstone, grey with a passing tinge of red in places, in
parts highly micaceous, containing both black and Avhite micas.

W. 4. S.S.E. Falmouth Castle, 18 miles.

Fine-grained, compact, red, jaspideous sandstone, much bored. The
specimen shows portions of two joint faces, at right angles to each other.

W. 5. S.W. by S. Deadman, 25 miles.

a. Chocolate marl, spotted white. The edges of this nodule were rounded,
but it could hardly be called rolled.

1 Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Vol. XLII, 1886, pp. 313-16.

188 THE GEOLOGY OF THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

h. A "Potato Stone," })artially coated with marl and filled with pinkish calcite.
The inside of the shell was studded with small brilliant pyramids of quartz.

c. Grey sandstone.

d. A nodule of Triassic Trap. A hard red rock, slightly micaceous ; very
closely resembles some varieties of the Triassic Trap of Thorverton, with
affinities to those of Pocombe and Cawsand.

W. 6. S. by W. Deadman, 20 miles.

a. A light salmon-tinted drab calcareous sandstone, in a slab nearly two feet
in longest diameter, the under surface intact and slightly pitted.
h. Granitic and granitoid pebbles.

c. Quartzite pebbles.

d. Flints.

W. 7. S. Deadman, 7 miles. ^

Slabs of Triassic conglomerate, evidently torn from a submarine reef-point,
sides, and upper and lower surfaces being intact in each instance, and the only
broken surface that of fracture from the parent rock. Examined micro-
scopically this conglomerate proves to contain pebbles of slate, grits, vein
quartz, quartz-felsite, and andesite.
W. 8. S.E. Deadman, 3 miles.
W. 9. W. Deadman 4 miles,
W. 10. S.W. Deadman, 10 and 12 miles.
W. 11. S. by E. Deadman, 27 miles.
No Trias found at any of the last four positions.
W. 12. S.W. Falmouth, 10 miles.
Ochreous volcanic ash.

^ "Additional Notes on the Cornish Trias," Trans. Royal Cornwall Geological Society,
1891.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Plate VL (0pp. p. 123). (1). Micro-pegmatite, with characteristic intergrowth of felspar

and quartz. (2). Central portion of (1), more highly magnified.
,, Vn. (0pp. p. 135). (1). Hornblende-gneiss. ShoAving 3 garnets ; immediately

beneath the central one a small, uniformly tinted area of chlorite. (2).

Chlorite schist with crushed plagioclase felspar.
,, VIIL (0pp. p. 143). Grit, with derived fragment of older rock (A-B).
,, IX. (0pp. p. 151). (1). Hard yellow chalk, with derived inclusion of earlier

chalk rock. (2). Section of same, showing foraminifera, shell fragments

and other organic remains.
,, X. (0pp. p. 153). Decomposed black flint, with shell fragments and complete

foraminifera in carbonate of lime. (2). Lower part with carbonate of

lime removed.
,, XI. (0pp. p. 156). Eocene limestone.

,, XII. (0pp. p. 157). Eocene limestone, showing foraminifera.
,, XIII. (0pp. p. 163). Chart, Start to Hand Deeps. Illustrating Dr. Allen's Start-

Eddystone dredgings.
,, XIV. (0pp. p. 166). Chart showing distribution of granite and gneiss.
,, XV. (0pp. p. 168). ,, .! >> trias, rhaetic, and lias.

,, XVI. (0pp. p. 169). ,, ,, ,, hard yellow chalk.

,, XVII. (0pp. p. 179). ,, ,, location of dredgings recorded by Mr. A. R.

Hunt and ]\Ir. R. N. Worth.

[ 189 ]

The Schizopoda and Isopoda collected by the
'• Huxley " from the north side of the Bay of Biscay,

in August, 1906.

By
W. M. TattersaU, M.Sc.

I AM indebted to the courtesy of Dr. Allen for the opportunity of
examining the collections of these two orders of Crustacea in the
Huxley's material.

None of the species are new to science, and but few of them present
any features worthy of remark. The chief interest of the collection
lies in its bearing on the known geographical distribution of the
species captured for, out of a total of twenty-eight, no fewer than
sixteen are recorded for the first time from localities south of the
British Islands, while only eight of the species have previously been
recorded from the Bay of Biscay. The ba thy metrical range of five
of the species recorded has been considerably increased by this
material.

A comparison of the following lists with those for the same orders
collected by the Caudan expedition, reveals little that is common
to the two, the explanation of which is probably that the Caudan
was working in much deeper water and considerably south of the
area explored by the Huxley. The results of the work done by
the Hirondelle and the Travailleur and Talisman in the Bay of
Biscay are not available for the orders now under consideration. The
only other expedition which has worked in the Bay is the Research,
but as that dealt entirely with plankton, the results are not strictly
comparable with those of the Huxley.

190

SCHIZOPODA AND ISOPODA FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY.

List of Species and the stations at tchich tliey occurred.

station

Longitude, N.

Longitude, W.

Fatlioms
SCHIZOPODA.
Euphausia Miilleri .
Meganyctiphanes norvegica
Nyctiphaues Couehi
Nematoscelis megaloj^s
Lophogaster typicus
Siriella norvegica
Haplostylus Normani
Anchialina agilis
Amblyops abbreviata
Paramblyops rostrata
Pseudomma affine
Mysideis insignis
Mysidopsis didelphys
Leptomysis gracilis .
Leptomysis sp.
Mysidetes Farrani .
Boreomysis arctica .
Schistomysis ornata

IsOPODA.

Aega Stromii .
Rocinela damnoniensis
Cirolana borealis
Cirolana Hanseni
Eurydice truncata .
Astacilla longicornis
lanira maculosa
Munna Boecki
Eurycope longipes -
Aspidophryxus peltatus

4S°24'
6°28'

47°48'
r°4G'
109

VII VIII IX X XI

47°36' 47°30' 48°7' 48°7' 4SnO'
7°31' 7°31' 8°13' 8°13' S°ll'
li. Surface 240 Surface 140

1000
5

28
ca. 300
ca. 200

- 53

XII

48°7'
S°13'
246

4
12

S°13'
412

1
13

SCHIZOPODA.

Of the eighteen species of this oi..er represented in the collection,
none can be described as new, though two specimens of the genus
Leptomysis cannot be referred satisfactorily to any described form.
They are, however, very closely allied to L. gracilis, and I await
further material before deciding the point. The depth at which they
were found is unusual for the genus.

Only four of these species have been previously recorded from the
Bay of Biscay, viz., Euphausia Ilillleri, Meganyctiphanes norvegica,
Nematoscelis megalops, and Lophogaster typicus.

Four other species, Nyctiphanes Couehi, Haplostylus Normani,
Anchialina agilis, and Boreomysis arctica are, however, known from

SCIZHOPODA AND ISOPODA FEOM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 191

the Mediterranean, and their occurrence in the Bay of Biscay merely
fills, in part, the gaps existing in their geographical distribution. The
remaining species have not hitherto been recorded from localities
south of the Britisli and Irish area {Leptomysis gracilis is, however,
known from the French side of the English Channel). The majority
of them are deep water forms, which recent work has shown to be
more or less abundant off the west coast of Ireland on the fringe of
the Atlantic slope, and it was only natural, therefore, to expect that
their known distribution would be considerably extended when the
slope was further explored to the south.

Siriella norvegica and Schistomysis ornata are here recorded from
depths greater than any at which they have up till now been taken,
wliile the capture of no fewer than one thousand specimens of
Euphausia Millleri and eighty-three of Lophogaster typicus in surface
hauls are features worthy of special note.

The records of Paramhlyops rostrata and Mysidctes Farrani are of
interest, since these two species have only lately been described from
material collected in deep water off Ireland.

SCHIZOPODA.

Family EUPHAUSIIDAE.

Euphausia Miilleri, Claus.

Station VIII. ca. one thousand specimens, up to 22 mm.
Station X. Twenty-eight specimens, 5-11 mm.
The occurrence of no fewer than one thousand specimens of this
species in a surface haul. Station X, is worthy of special note.

Meganyctiphanes norvegica (M Sars).

Station VIII. Five specimens, 14-28 mm.
Station X. ca. three hundred specimens, 11-33 mm.
Station XII. Twenty-two specimens, 17-34 mm.

Nyctiphanes CoucM (Bell).
Station X. ca. two hundred specimens, 7-17 mm.

Nematoscelis megalops, G. 0. Sars.

Station VIII. Two specimens, 10 and 11 mm.
Station X. Thirty-two specimens, 10-18 mm.

192 SCHIZOPODA AND ISOPODA FKOM THE BAY OF BISCAY.

Family LOPHOGASTRID^.
Lophogaster typicus, G. 0. Sars.

Station V. Two females, 20 and 22 mm.

Station IX. Two females, 21 mm.

Station X. Eighty-three specimens, 5-10 mm.

Station XL One female, ovigerous, 21 mm.

The occurrence at Station X of no fewer than eighty-three
specimens of this species in a surface haul is a feature of great
interest. L. typicus is regarded as essentially a bottom living form,
though Holt and Tattersall* have recently recorded a specimen from
a haul made at 44 fathoms, over a depth of 136 fathoms. This latter
specimen was a gravid female, in which the young were ready to be
liberated from the brood pouch. The probable fact is that L. typicus,
in its normal adult condition, is a true bottom haunting form, but that
the female rises to the surface to liberate the young and thus to
ensure a wide distribution. The haul at Station X above supports
this view, since all the specimens are small, and only two or three of
the very largest have assumed quite adult form.

Family MYSID-ffi.
Siriella norvegica, G. 0. Sars.

Station V. One male, 19 mm.

Two females, 14 and 17 mm.
Station XL Five males, 17-19 mm.

Two females, 15 and 19 mm.

Haplostylus Normani (G. 0. Sars).

Gastrosaccus Normani, G. 0. Sars ; Middleha vet's Mysider, p. &b\
Pis. XXIV, XXY, 1876.

Station X. Fifteen males, 6-8 mm.

Eleven females, 5-11 mm.

These specimens differ in one important respect from the descrip-
tion and figures given by Sars. Without exception, they have the
hinder margin of the carapace furnished with two dorsal, upwardly
and forwardly, directed lobes. The absence of lobes from the hinder
margin of the carapace was one of the characters on which Kossmann
separated the genus Haplostylus from Gastrosaccus. The present
examples, however, agree exactly with H. Normani in the structure
of the antennules, the length, form and armature of the telson, and

* Holt and Tattersall, "Fisheries, Ireland, Sci. Invest., 1904 V., [1906]."

SCHIZOPODA AND ISOPODA FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 193

especially in the rudimentary inner brancli to the third pleopods of
the male and the curiously twisted rami of the second pleopods of the
same sex.

It is curious to note in this respect that Holt and Beaumont,
writing of Gastrosaccus sanctus from the west of Ireland,* remark:
" most of the specimens from Bofin have practically no trace of the
upturned processes of the hind margin of the carapace, though agree-
ing in other respects with the type." From these observations it
would seem that the presence or absence of lobes is a character which
cannot be relied on either for generic or specific separation, but the
point is obviously one that requires further investigation. In the
meantime, the present specimens agree so well with H. Normani in
other respects, that I provisionally record them here as that species.

Anchialinaf agilis (G. 0. Sars).
Station X. Ten males, 6-9 mm.

Twenty-eight females, 6-9 mm., most of them ovigerous.

Amblyops abbrieviata, G. 0. Sars.
Station XII. Fifteen males, 12-16 mm.
Sixteen females, 12-16 mm.

Paramblyops rostrata, Holt and Tattersall.
Station IX. One female, head and thorax only.*

Pseudomma afl&ne, G. 0. Sars.
Station XII. Two males, 11 mm.
One female, 11 mm.

Mysideis insignis, G. 0. Sars.
Station IX. One female, 25 mm.
Station XII. Ten males, 14-20 mm.

Twenty-six females, 9-22 mm.

Mysidopsis didelphys (Norman).
Station V. One male, 13 mm.

A specimen of the Isopod parasite, Aspidophryxus j^cltatus, G. 0.
Sars, was found attached to the basal joint of the left antennule.

Leptomysis gracilis, G. 0. Sars.
Station X. One female, 10 mm.

* Holt and Beaumont, Sci. Trans. Royal Dublin Soc, Series ii., Vol. vii., Pt. vii,
1900.

t Anchialina, Norman for Anchialus, G. 0. Sars. See Norman and Scott, " Crustacea
of Devon and Cornwal]," London, 1906, p. 24.

194 SCHIZOPODA AND ISOPODA FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY.

Leptomysis sp.

Station XI. One male, 11 mm.
One female, 11 mm.

These two specimens differed from L. gracilis (1) in having the
dermis quite smooth instead of hispid ; (2) the rostrum is quite short,
and does not extend beyond the eyestalks, whereas in L. gracilis it is
produced into a broadly triangular acutely pointed plate, which
extends beyond the middle of the basal joint of the antennules.
Otherwise they agree perfectly with normal specimens of L. gracilis,
and it seems better to await further material before deciding whether
they represent a hitherto undescribed form, or are merely abnormal
specimens of L. gracilis.

Mysidetes Farrani (Holt and Tattersall).
Station XII. Four females, 18 mm.

Boreomysis arctica (Krdyer).
Station XIT, Two males, 15 and 18 mm.
One female, 14 mm.

Schistomysis ornata (G. 0. Sars).

Station V. Two males, 14 mm.

Eight females, 12-15 mm.

Station XI. Three females, 14 mm.

Both the stations at which these species occur are over 100 fathoms
in depth. This depth is most unusual for the species, the greatest
depth at which it has previously been captured being 50 fathoms. I
cannot, however, at present find any substantial difference between
these specimens and those from shallower water, and I am, therefore,
obliged to consider them as belonging to the same species.

ISOPODA.

In all ten species of Isopoda are here recorded from the material
collected by the Huxley. Of these only four have hitherto been
found in the Bay of Biscay, viz., Cirolana borealis, Cirolana Hanseni
(the type specimen of which was dredged by the Caudan expedition
a little further south of the area explored by the Huxley), Eurydice
truncata, and lanira maculosa.

The remaining six species have not been recorded from localities
south of the British and Irish marine area, so that the present records
indicate the most southerly limit of their known geographical range.

With regard to the bathymetric range of the species, I am not

SCHIZOPODA AND ISOPODA FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY. 195

aware that lanira maculosa, Munna Boecki, and Astacilla longicornis

have up till now been recorded from greater depths than 400 fathoms,

so that the vertical distribution of all three has been extended as a

result of the present material. lanira maculosa was only found at

Stations VIII and XIII, and from Professor Hickson's report on

the Alcyonaria of the Hurley's cruise it was at both these stations

that the majority of the Alyconaria were taken. In shallow water

lanira maculosa is very frequently found in considerable numbers

crawling over colonies of Alcyonium digitatum, and in all probability

the specimens in the present collection were clinging to the

Alcyonarians found on the same grounds. Eurycope longipes is a

species only recently described from specimens found off the west

coast of Ireland on the edge of the Atlantic slope. Its occurrence

further south on the same slope, while interesting, is only naturally

to be expected.

Family MGilDM.

Mg&. Stromii, Lutken.

Station XII. Three specimens.

Rocinela damnoniensis, Leach.
Station IX. One specimen.
Station XII. Four specimens.

Family CIROLANID^.
Cirolana borealis, Lilljeborg.
Station II. One specimen.
Station V. One specimen.
Station IX. Four specimens.
Station XII. Twelve specimens.

Cirolana Hanseni, Bonnier.

Station XIII. One specimen.

Stebbing, in his report on Professor Herdman's Ceylon Isopoda,
suggests that this species should be referred to his genus Hansenolana,
while Hansen, in his recent revision of the European members of the
genus, still retains in it the genus Cirolana. The present specimen
measures only 3 mm., and is therefore smaller than Hansen's largest
specimens, which was 4*2 mm., and which Hansen thought to be still
immature. As it is obvious that adult specimens are necessary before
the correct genus for the species can be determined, I follow Hansen
in retaining it in its original genus, Cirolana, for the present.

Eurydice truncata (Norman),
Station X. Fifty-three specimens.

196 SCHIZOPODA AND ISOPODA FROM THE BAY OF BISCAY.

Family ARCTURID^.
Astacilla longicoris (Sowerby).
Station II. One specimen.
Station XII. Sixteen specimens.
Station XIII. One specimen.

Family IANIRID^.
lanira maculosa, Leach.
Station VII. Five specimens.
Station XIII. Thirteen specimens.

Family MUNNID^.
Munna Boecki, Kixiyer.
Station VII. Two specimens.

Family MUNNOPSID^.
Eurycope longipes, Tattersall.
Station XII. Three specimens.

Family DAJIDJE.
Aspidophryxus peltatus, G. 0. Sars.

Station V. One specimen on the basal joint of the left antennule
of Mysidopsis didelphys (Norman).

Both Sars and myself have recorded this parasite from the anten-
nules of Mysidopsis diddphys, while I have also noted it on the same
host from the more normal position for such parasites, viz., the dorsal
surface of the thorax.

[ 19^ ]

Notes on the littoral Po/ychceta of Torquay.

By
Major E. V. Elwes.

The following notes are confined to the species of Polychseta, which
have been found by myself during the last four years, between tide-
marks, on the coast comprised within the Borough of Torquay.
Torquay is so well known as a hunting ground for the marine zoologist
that it is unnecessary to describe the features of the shores. No special
study of the Polychata of Torquay appears to have been previously
made, although the locality, Torbay, occurs somewhat frequently in the
British Museum Catalogue of Worms.

Syllidae.

Twenty species of Syllids have been found ; of these eight have not
apparently been previously recorded from the British area. They are,
Trypa7iosyllis cceliaca, Clpd. ; Autolytus elibiensis, de St. Joseph ; A.
longiferiens, de St. Joseph ; A. macrophthalma, Marenzeller ; Gruhea
clavatu, Clpd. ; Eurysyllis paradoxa, Clpd., and Pionosyllis lavielligera,
de St. Joseph. The Syllids were nearly all obtained by bringing home
the roots of Laminaria and placing them in glass vessels, when in a few
hours the Annelids crawl out and can be picked out with a pipette.

ExoGONE GEMMIFERA, Pagenstecher. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann.,
vol. ii., 1908, p. 151 ; de St. Joseph, Ann. Sc. Nat. Zool., 1886, p. 209 (as
Poedophylax claviger).

This species is by no means uncommon at Torquay amongst sea-
weeds from half-tide mark downwards. When such weeds are placed
in a glass jar, Exogone is one of the first species to leave the shelter of
the weeds and crawl out on the glass sides ; but unless observed within
five or six hours from the time the weed is placed in the vessel, it pro-
bably will not be noticed, because it very quickly dies and falls down
amongst the debris, where, owing to its small size, it is almost im-
possible to find it.

198 NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH^^TA OF TORQUAY.

The appendages very easily fall off, hence it is not unusual to see
individuals with only one or two tentacles.

Females with fully developed young ones, in the seventh stage of
de St. Joseph, were found in the month of March.

The young are attached, as de St. Joseph states, to the ventral side by
a pedicle ; but this pedicle is sufficiently long to allow some movement
of the young, so that when the mother crawls about, the young ones
turn upwards and appear to be carried on the back.

Grubea clavata, Clpd., de St. Josciih, Ann. Sc. Nat. Zool, 1886, p. 200.
One example from Laminaria root, obtained at an unusally low
spring tide, from rocks at Oddicombe Beach in the month of January.

Pionosyllis divaricata. l\.QiQvs,iGm = lonrjocirrata, de St. Joseph,
Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann., vol. ii, p. 164.

Three or four were obtained in the months of March and April from
Corbyn's Head. They were extremely fragile, making it very difficult
to prepare a satisfactory mount.

Pionosyllis lamelligera, de St. Joseph. Ann. Sc. Nat. Zool, 1886,
p. 113.

This species is very common, one or more being found in nearly
every root of Laminaria. Like P. divaricata it is very fragile breaking
up into pieces of two or three segments. The Torquay specimens agree
with the description given by St. Joseph, but some of them are rather
longer, reaching 10 mm. in length and having about 67 segments.

A large proportion of the individuals found were females with ova of
a conspicuous pink colour. They often violently vibrate the posterior
portion of the body while the front remains fixed. It seems possible
that one use of the so-called swimming bristles in the sexual forms of
Syllids generally, is to break off a portion, or the bud, from the rest of
the body at the proper time.

Eusyllis tubifex, Grosse. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann., vol. ii., 1908
p. 173.

Fairly common in glass jars containing weeds covered with Polyzoa
and Sertularia, just in the same way as it was first obtained by Gosse
at Ilfracombe. Several females containing ova were obtained in the
month of April, some of them showing well-developed swimming
bristles, but in no case was there any sign of a stolon being formed.

It is curious that a species which is said to be common in the North,
and is also found in Devon, should not yet have been reported from the
other side of the Channel.

The dorsal cirri rapidly taper to a point, in which respect it appears
to differ from B. Blomstrandi, which is apparently very near it.

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYGH^ETA OF TORQUAY. 199

Odontosyllis gibba, Clpd. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel., vol. ii.
p. 183.

Several examples of this species were obtained from Corbyn's Head.
They agreed in colour with the one from Plymouth figured in Mon.
Brit. Annd. In one example two red eye-spots in front of the anterior
pair of large eyes were distinctly observed. These additional spots
apparently have only been previously observed in the Unihellisi/llis
fasciata of M. Sars which, according to Mcintosh, is the same species.

Odontosyllis ctenostomata, Clpd. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel,
vol. ii., p. 182.

The most abundant of all the species of Syllids at Torquay.

The colour is usually yellowish green. In glass vessels it creeps to
the edge of the water. Although unripe individuals are so numerous,
only one or two, females, were found with swimming bristles.

Amblyosyllis lineata, Grube. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann., vol. ii.,
p. 225.

Occasionally met with in weeds from the rocks between Oddicombe
and Babbicombe beaches. One individual was marked with purple
stripes, and appeared to belong to the variety /or??io,9a.

Syllis spongicola, Grube = >S'. hamata, Clpd. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit.
Annel., vol. ii., p. 197.

Fairly abundant. The colour is rather a reddish brown than orange.
Several females with ova showed no signs of swimming bristles or
formation of a bud. - Only one individual showed a distinct bud with
ocular spots on each segment.

Syllis prolifera, Krohn. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel., p. 161 (as
Pionosyllis prolifera).

One of the most numerous of the Torquay Syllids, It appears to be
a very variable species, both as regards the number of the articulations
of the cirri and the colouring. Some have markings like those given in
Mon. Brit. Annel., fig. 53, others like the variety variegata as figured
by Marenzeller, while some are uniformly coloured.

The articulations of the longer dorsal cirri, in some cases, are as many
as fifty. Several with buds were found ; one with a regenerated head,
without proboscis or proventriculus, exactly like that described by
de St. Joseph. Ann. Sc. Nat., 1886, p. 147.

Syllis alternosetosa, de St. Joseph. Ann. Sc. Nat., 1886, p. 150.

The species found at Torquay is undoubtedly the one so fully
described by de St. Joseph. Malaquin, in his Recherches sur les Syllidiens,
considers S. alternosetosa as identical with S. hyalina, Grube. But this
species, as described by Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel., vol. ii., p. 167,

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2.

200 NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH.ETA OF TORQUAY.

differs from it, having all the terminal pieces of the compound bristles
bidentate in all the regions of the body.

Giard, on the other hand, as stated on page 202 of Mon. Brit. Ann.,
vol. ii., considers S. altcrnosetosa as a variety of aS*. cornuta, H. Eathke.
The segments in the anterior part of the body are marked with a
number of parallel transverse lines, about 20 in number. No buds
were seen. Fairly common.

Syllis krohnii, Ehlers. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annelids, vol. ii., p. 192.
Langerhans, Zeits. fur Wiss. ZooL, 1879, p. 529.

Five examples of this species were found amongst Corallina in a
pool in the rocks which jut out from Corbyn's Head. They agreed
better with the description and figures given by Langerhans than
with those given by Mcintosh.

The median tentacle is not shorter than the lateral one, but, as is
generally the case with the Syllids, longer, The longer cirri, especially
in the anterior part of the body, are also much thicker than the short
ones, and somewhat club-shaped. The articulations are well marked.
The colouring corresponds to that given in Mon. Brit. Anncl. ; the eyes
on each side are very close together, almost touching. The bristles are
exactly as described by Langerhans, the bulge just under the point of
the stalk of the bristles being more pronounced than is shown in his
drawing.

All the appendages are more or less speckled with opaque white
spots.

Trypanosyllis zebra, Grube. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Annel, vol. ii.,
p. 169.

This beautiful Syllid can be at once distinguished by the great pro-
portionate breadth of the body and the markings, from which it derives
its specific name.

It is fairly numerous, most of the specimens being obtained from
Laminaria roots from the rocks between Babbicombe and Oddicombe
beaches. No simple bristles were detected in the posterior region. It
appears probable that these simple bristles in the Syllids generally
only appear at certain periods, like the swimming pairs. Only one
individual had a bud attached, but one free stolon was found. The
number of spines varies from two to four. There are three different
kinds of spines : one variety is pointed ; another quite blunt at the
point, looking as if it had been cut across at riglit angles to its length ;
the third variety is bent at right angles to its length at the point,
forming a short hook. The segments are very short in proportion to
their breadth, so that the large dorsal cirri almost touch each other.

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH.ETA OF TORQUAY. 201

Trypanosyllls cceliaca, Clpd. de St. Joseph, Ann. des. Sci. Nat.
ZooL, 1886, p. 184.

This species, which has not been before recorded from this side of
the Channel, is easily distinguished from the much larger T. zebra by
the short tentacles, tentacular, and dorsal cirri. They have only six to
ten articulations, and are all very nearly of the same length.

In life the cirri are of a most beautiful golden colour; the anterior
eyes are situated on the ventral side of the head.

In most of the feet there is only one strong pointed spine, in others
two. The proventriculus is very little longer than it is broad. Four
or five specimens only were found ; all from Oddicombe rocks.

Eurysyllis paradoxa, Clpd. de St. Joseph, Ann. Sc. Nat. ZooL, 1886,
p. 191.

Eurysyllis is easily distinguished from other Syllids by its spherical
cirri ; but the absence of comparatively long cirri, the sluggishness of
its movements, and the fact that it is usually covered with mud, probably
account for the fact that it has not before been recorded as British ;
de St. Joseph does not appear to have found it on the shore, but says
it was common in the dredges. The Torquay specimens agreed with
his description.

Examples were obtained from Oddicombe, Corbyn's Head, and Liver-
mead, but none had buds.

Autolytus ehbiensis, de St. Joseph. Ann. Sc. Nat., 1886, p. 228.

This is a very interesting addition to the British Fauna, on accovmt
of the excellent example it affords of the production of buds ; de
St. Joseph says he never found it without a bud, and I have only found
two or three out of fifty or sixty examples without one.

Chains of five or six buds are common. In February, 1907, this species
was found in great abundance on the Fucus, growing on the little
breakwater at Babbacombe. The Fucus was covered with Sertularia
pumila.

Two or three examples of the variety mentioned by de St. Joseph,
with only twenty teeth in the proboscis, were also observed.

Autolytus pictus, Ehlers. Mcintosh, Hon. Brit. Anncl., vol. ii.,
p. 211.

Kather common ; the colour is similar to that of PI. XLI., fig. 8,
Mon. Brit. Annel. ; but the tentacles are usually yellow instead of a
madder-brown colour.

Autolytus macrophthalma, Marenzeller. de St. Joseph, Ann. Sc.
Nat. ZooL, 1886, p. 226.

Two examples from Babbicombe. The teeth of the proboscis agreed

202 NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYGH^ETA OF TORQUAY.

exactly with the figure given by Marenzeller. Ziw Kenntniss der
Adriatischen Anncliden, 1875.

AuTOLYTUS LONGIFERIENS, cle St. Joseph. Ann. dcs Sci. Nat. ZooL,
1886, p. 217.

Five or six of this species, so remarkable for the great length
(2 mm.) of the proboscis, were found. Two red eye-spots, not men-
tioned by St. Joseph, are situated rather a long way in front of the
anterior pair of large eyes. In the Torquay examples there are only
two small teeth between the large ones, instead of three, as is the case
with those from Dinard.

AuTOLYTiDES INERMIS, de St. Joscph, Ann. dcs. Sci. Nat. ZooL, 1886,
p. 237.

One specimen was found. The proboscis was of full length, and
there appears no reason to think that the absence of teeth is due to an
accident.

l«iOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH^TA OF TORQUAY.

203

H
O

W
H

H
W

o
o

I— I
H

iy2

o p
-^ o

W
H

O
Eh

.T3

03 rt

a> o
O fl

pL,

W _ _

HH H

t; ^ o ui

H PI

cs 3 P

. 9 ^•

sted
Mai
angl

bC^

r§0

:^;S

•<;^

^•^^

oT 5ri

l?l s

i^On

bqo ^

03 ^

^ ^

1— 1 ->-^

to OJ

> to

h one lar
eth .
h teeth p

■p 'C

't.

%-:%

o o

•^ o3T3
03 d CD

a » s

a C

*r^

tH ^

03 03

P-

03=4-; 03

Oh pL| PU Ph Oh

O 6D

Pi «

O r-
P^l

—

■-CJrS .S

2rd

a
o

PI <y o

C3 g— =

fO +J

(1)

entacle
not fo
distinc

Pho3
Ph

'^ /

pug:

-sw

S 55i

e 2=

-S

iih

E^E^

C3 r^

t< o3
O) O

s ° ^ .

C <y F 73

f-i o 13

m 03 g -S

. ^

0) Ctf

■%%.

o o

. w

!y2

• Pi

-U

CO '~^

2-S

-*^ "S

_cd cS

h— 1

03^

d 03
y PI

*:i C
U

1-:]

'> "^

<1
Ph

7> 2

s-is

S'^

'3 'o

CO CO

O O

o o

PhPh

s o

.s .s .s ft

■ 1— 1

ritJ

"XS

Ph'

S -^^ .

p-i^ c;
P^g

13T3
9 -u

,— I -► -H

CS D "^

204

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLVCBJUTA OF TORQUAY.

W
O

o -G

r '^

O q

W
t— (

W
H

Ol P

-tJ

O ->J

• rt

S i=5

'o'"

s fl

<^<5

.■TS

i2 "

?i o b ^

o o

P-iCi,

C\)

o -^

u f-< ■r'

2 ^

QQ Q

rS °

■r; o

r^r^ -^ ^ P.

Q Pq

O oj
CQ to

!3^

(«2i ^3

t,'^

s O

. Ph • '^

5t3

r2 5c

^ o

.t^

.t;

-5 o

I..T

• M

• m •

apex
cirri cyl
lort and

al piece
look
al piece
ooth

r-, j-l H-

bJD

Q:3 •

t-'

^^3
Pi

^ _. s "^

CO bD^

iC 1=1

'-S

« rt OJ

O 0, o

o bCT3 m 3
■K P C OJ oi
■p."n "3 S bp

5}= _

Ph O

FlH

J- rd

CO rP ^

o P c3

OJ OJ q;

■Pn'-'^

■— H . CO

S (- -"^

fcH ^

0) -S "S -2
be P _cH o

Ol '

42 p
bc o

'bb5

SS c3 .

2 Ph 1^
P P H

° fl a;

IZi

iS a

S <l

Eh r4

p a

rt to

OQ
O

n
;^
<1

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYGHyETA OF TORQUAY.

205

R ^

Ph 02

c3 o

o -^

c3 O J2

-1-3 ^

-^ .2

f* CD

r-H a,

Co o.

cc i^

SPo^iiTJ.r^

^.s^

rS 'Ph

's.S ;= S g

_« 0) y

o; o w

^ s> ^

Q '^egj 9\{% 1^13 ui luasajd saj'^suq pnnocIuioQ

206

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH.-ETA OF TORQUAY.

:fl

i-s

f^"

Si^

^ r^

PU Cw

ii-g

<1> O)

SS S

P-(

fX,

o o

S +o

l-t, l-s

U O)

*i -UJ

^ M

'-5

C/2 03

w" "5

,£3

T3
Oh

•-S

►-S

S)«

cs e

rt'P

■73

•pi

t— I

O
H

5^^

o rt

■ -H Pi (M

ej_, p — I

P 03

tin

•5

•T}

p •

o S

■T3

_^j

i-i

•■^

1 tc

•_j3

crt

>""*

Tl • r3

a *^

^ ^

r-^ (B

^r,

P a;
bD t^i

tie

OJ^

H +2

•F-l -4^

•r o

-tJ

PL|

Ph
<1

H <i1 O

rP <^

-pS

oJ be

"^ P

^'^

a> o

bD'— 1

N
'to

^ a

t-i 0)

^ p

P -^^

4J ,_,

<V 1— 1

5 03

> •

S Eh

^ cy

<] l'

03 rP
P "*"'

O) ^ "J ^

o (B ^ p 2 ' '

tH -X, P vu -^
O CT CO p f:;

cu '^ O
tu CO iL

Is Ph S
S CO rP

^ ^^ "^

o3 (U i-c cj_.

"' C^ !=l rP ~ '^

cu c* CO ^ e«3

■* a rP 5 ^

^ CO H^ 4:: O

& ^

Ph^

OS"'"
T— 1 CO ,p P

•-3 r-l 0) fO

::^
^§

P o

p «
1^

t>H

[ 207 ]

Notes on some Sagartiidae and Zoanthidae from
Plymouth.

By
Chas. L. Walton.

Sagartia Incise, Verrill.

This small species was described by Verrill in 1898, and first
observed by Miss Verrill in 1892 near New Haven, U.S.A.

In 1902 Parker noted a number of new localities, and remarked
upon its rapidly extending range on the American coast.

It has been known at Plymouth for a considerable period, being
first observed in the Millbay Docks in 1896, and was identified by
Mrs. Davenport in October, 1902. It was then to be found in the
Cattewater, and I have lately observed it abundantly near high-water
mark, under and upon stones in Eum Bay, and on Drake's Island in
the Sound. It is thus extending its range here also in a quiet way.

It is certainly remarkable that this species should make its appear-
ance on the American coast about 1892 and in Plymouth Docks in
1896. It is of course possible that it existed in both localities for
some time previously, but it could hardly escape notice for long in a
locality so constantly examined as Plymouth. As observed by
Davenport (1903): "When the water becomes foul, or from other
causes, it may voluntarily detach itself and float about the aquarium
or hang upside down from the surface film." This I have also
observed. Since it frequents docks, piers, and other situations, and
near high-water mark, it is liable to become attached to the bottoms
of ships, even floating to them in the still water usual in such places
and being very hardy, would survive a voyage, and again change its
environment at the next port of call. It is significant that it was
first noted at Plymouth in the Docks, and next in the Cattewater.

It is thus possible that it is not native to either the eastern coast of
America or to South Devon, but was introduced into both areas about
the same time.

208 NOTES ON SAGARTIID^ AND ZOANTHID^ FROM PLYMOUTH.

In the Millbay Docks it lives upon the agglomerated masses of
Ascidiclla aspersa, which grow on the piles, valves of Mytilus, and upon
one another, together with various Polyzoa, Obelia longissinia, Sycon
coronata, and colonies of Botryllus.

Height of column usually 5 or 6 mm., but I have seen adults when
elongated as much as 10 mm. in height.

Column smooth, dull green, striped with orange-yellow.

Disk varies from semi-transparent greenish brown to dark green,
with varying short lines or spots of greenish yellow at the base of the
tentacles, and frequently one white radius.

Mouth generally raised on a cone.

Tentacles in multiples of twelve, 24, 36, 48, and 60 being observed in
various individuals. Dull, semi-transparent, greenish in colour, or
tinged with yellow or pink, sometimes a faint white ring near
the tip.

Many of the conditions mentioned by G. C. Davenport, in " Varia-
tion in the stripes of aS*. lucice," are observable here.

The anemone was in active subdivision on Drake's Island in early
December, 1907, specimens being found with 4, 6, and 8 stripes more
frequently than those with the normal 12.

Two large individuals, found on the same stone in Eum Bay, had the
unusual number of 34 stripes, arranged in 17 pairs. One of these
subsequently divided, and each of the resulting individuals had
17 stripes (8^ pairs).

Several small ones from Millbay were entirely without stripes.

I have observed one of these anemones seize and retain an amphipod
of the same length as its own tentacles.

Sagartia coccinea, Gosse.

This species was named coccinea by Gosse, believing it to be
identical with Actinia coccinea, Mtiller, Zool. Danica, 1776. Carlgren
(1893) has shown, however, that the species really described by
Miiller was the Stomphia churchia; of Gosse, which must hence be
Stomphia coccinea (Miiller), and the present species Sagartia coccinea
Gosse.

It is to be found in abundance in the Cattewater, its presence there
being in all probability due to trawl refuse, the majority being
attached to the ascidian Polycarpa pomaria, and associated with other
animals from the trawling grounds.

It however readily attaches itself to wood, leather, dead leaves,
fucoids, and any other available material.

NOTES ON SAGARTIID^ AND ZOANTHID^ FROM PLYMOUTH. 209

This species does not appear to be at all common, or at all events
is seldom observed.

Base very irregular, generally lobed and twisted in a most peculiar
manner. Fragments are constantly being split off, and speedily
develop into fresh individuals.

Column very changeable in form. Surface finely corrugated, orange-
buff with numerous yellowish white longitudinal lines, 12 of which
are usually more prominent than the rest, paler about the base, and
darker at the summit.

Disk as described by Gosse ; the white radial lines and rich orange
area about the tentacle bases.

Tentacles generally short and stout, but capable of considerable
elongation. In many young specimens, 16 in number, 80 to 90 in
the largest examined, they are colourless, with three broad white
rings and marks at the base, as described by Gosse. Large specimens
measured 12 mm. in diameter at the base. Height of column,
7-8 mm. Acontia emitted reluctantly and from the upper part of
the cokimn and the mouth ; they are long and white. This species was
seldom firmly attached, and could be removed from the ascidians, etc.,
with ease.

The following varieties were observed: (a) Some of the tentacles
with two interrupted dark lines down their inner faces, somewhat
as in S. viduata, but more to the front of the tentacles, not con-
tinuous, and never present on all the tentacles ; (h) found upon water-
logged wood, etc. Column perfectly transparent, the mesenteries
showing as narrow white lines, the oesophageal region showing as an
orange-red patch. The column of this form, tall and pillar-like, as in
Gosse's figure, and the base less lobed. Height about 10 mm.

Disk transparent, pinkish-white, white lines as usual ; the orange
area reduced to thin light red lines around the bases of the tentacles.
Mouth orange. Tentacles with indistinct white rings. Eeproduction
by longitudinal fission would appear to take place in this species.
One quite small one was noted, divided into two as far down as the
centre of the column. Carlgren remarks in 1896 : Stiidien uber
Nordische Actinien, p. 96, Sagartia undata, var. undata ^, " Moglicher-
weise ist diese Form identisch mit Gosse's (nicht Miiller's)
S. coccinea."

Lack of the necessary material and literature prevent an attempt
to elucidate the relationship of the form with regard to the above,
to S. vidunta, to S. herdmani, and to S. (Actinia) lacerata, and I
therefore retain Gosse's name.

210 NOTES ON SAGARTIIDiE AND ZOANTHID^ FROM PLYMOUTH.

Sagartia sphyrodeta, Gosse.

Specimens were examined from the Asia Shoal, Eeny Rocks, and
other localities. They all belonged to the var. Candida of Gosse. His
variety XantJio'pis I have not yet met with here, though it occurs on
the north Cornish coast.

Some of the specimens had a pale bluish or glaucous tinge on the
column, and I have seen a variety near St. Ives in which this colour
predominated on the column in darker and lighter bands. The
tentacles, according to Gosse, number 48 (8 + 8 + 16 + 16). Fischer
(1874) gives 8 + 8 + 16 + 32 + 64. The usual number at Plymouth
is 64 (8 + 8 + 16 + 32), but a few have about 100. Their form is
changeable. " They are usually spread horizontally, and have their
tips bent frequently downwards " (Gosse, p. 73).

Sometimes they are much inflated, and curve in all directions, and
are often very active. Both these conditions are most frequent in
those dredged in the deeper parts of the Sound, and in such also the
column is more pellucid and the tentacles more extensile than in the
littoral form. I have observed one exhibit extraordinary activity,
bending all the tentacle tips, and then straightening them again all
together and at the same time.

The lines encircling the tentacle bases, usually dark brown, some-
times light purple, or only the inner cycles so encircled. They are
frequently irregular, spreading out as a dark coloured area, or forming
dark patches at the sides of the tenacles. Acontia freely emitted.
Transverse sections showed the ectoderm to be well developed
(especially in the oral disk), and the mesogloea, though not markedly
developed in the body wall, mesenteries, or tentacles, is also thicker in
the oral disk, and the sphincter is strong, and shows numerous small
cavities. The longitudinal muscle of the mesenteries well developed,
the fibres dendritic.

Paraphellia expansa, Haddon,

This species is not uncommon on the Eame-Eddystone grounds, but
I have only been able to examine one living specimen from that area,
which had been in captivity for some time. When completely con-
tracted, 20 mm. in diameter, and much flattened, the base spread out,
sometimes smooth, and at others crenulated, the centre slightly
elevated and much wrinkled. The form is very changeable, the
flattened base being partly or wholly retracted, the column elevated,
and the anemone then assumes the turban shape figured by Haddon,
but this is rare.

NOTES ON SAGARTIIDtE AND ZOANTHIDyE FROM PLYMOUTH. 211

This specimen does not progress by the usual creeping method, but
by drawing in the fiat base, inflating one side of the column, and
falling over in that direction, thus turning upside down and resting
on the partly expanded oral disk and tentacles. One side of the
pedal disk is next inflated, and the anemone rights itself again, and
so on. The body wall was covered by a thin horn-coloured coating
of hardened mucous, in which a good many sand grains were embedded.
Eemains of an older and thicker coating could be made out. The
thin coat was easily removed, and the animal expanded more freely
in consequence. The whole base and column were then seen to
be " translucent buff," but with no sign of the " pinkish or flesh
colour " on the scapus, as in Haddon's Irish specimen. Tentacles
6 + 6 + 12 + 24 + 48 = 96, one cycle more than in Haddon's examples.
They were coloured as given in his plate and description, but varied
in intensity, some being largely white, others with a wash of pale
chrome, especially about the base. The brown terminal spot very
weak or absent. The lateral spots of brown, in two or three pairs,
well marked or almost absent.

Disk pale brown, with 12 somewhat darker areas radiating from
the primary tentacles to the mouth, these areas bordered by double
yellowish lines (single in Haddon's specimens).

From the bases of the secondary tentacles, and on a paler ground,
lines of white dots run towards the mouth.

Mouth raised in a cone, lips pale, throat same, longitudinally ribbed,
and banded with dark brown. Acontia freely emitted from the mouth.

I recently obtained seven specimens adhering to stones at extreme
low water at Zennor, near St. Ives, Cornwall, and as this is a new
habitat and locality for this species, a short description may be of
interest. An abundant growth of Laminaria and several layers of
stones having been removed, these anemones were found adhering
firmly to the sides and lower faces of the stones, together with
Corynactis viridis and Caryophyllia, etc. When contracted they re-
sembled Haddon's figure (Trans. B., Duhlin Soc, Vol. iv., PI. XXXII,
Fig. 2), and were invested in a thick brown, wrinkled, bark-like
coating, and the scapus proved to be pale flesh colour on its removal.
In no case, while in my possession, was a flat or crenulate base to be
seen. This is probably limited to specimens living on a sandy bottom.
Disk tawny brown. The arrangement of lines and dots was more
complicated than in either the Irish or Plymouth specimens, but on
the whole was very similar. The tentacles 96 in the larger specimens ;
in these also there were slight variations of arrangement of tint and
markings.

212 NOTES ON SAGARTIID^ AND ZOANTHID^E FROM PLYMOUTH.

Soon after capture several ejected shells of Homalogyra atornus,
which is abundant on the rocks there.

P. expansa thus appears to have a fairly wide range on the western
coast, and to be variable in colour and form.

Epizoanthus couchii, Johnston.

Zoanthus couchii, Johnston, 1838 ; Gosse, 1860.
Epizoanthus couchii, Haddon and Shackelton, 1891.

A colony dredged on December 6th, 1907, from Duke Eock, Ply-
mouth Sound, consisted of fifteen polyps of various sizes attached to
a stone. Coenenchyme thin and irregular. The larger polyps 15 mm.
in length, gradually widening toward the summit. Encrusted with
sand. The lower f of the column was weak, less encrusted than the
summit, and incapable of supporting the upper portion. The upper ^
contractile, and this gives these polyps a " knobbed " appearance. If
irritated, the whole column stiffened somewhat, but usually lay bent
over, the summit resting on the stone. The half-grown polyps all
showed more or less narrowing about the base, but those of 2-4 mm.
are the same thickness throughout.

Fresh polyps appear to arise as small mound-like swellings in the
coenenchyme. Small isolated individuals were also to be observed on
the same stone.

Disk concave, olive with white lines. Mouth elevated. Lips opaque
white. Tentacles 24 to 28, in two cycles, fairly long and transparent.
Tips rather blunt and white. Marginal teeth, 12 to 16. In some
cases well developed ; in others less so.

Lives well in confinement ; very timid, contracting at the least
vibration.

Epizoanthus (?) rubicornis (Holdsworth).

Zoanthus rubicornis, Holdsworth, 1861.

Epizoanthus (?) riibicornis, Haddon and Shackleton, 1891.

Haddon and Shackleton (1891), p. 653, say : " This s}»ecies has
apparently not been met with since its discovery, and we are unable
to do more than recast Holdsworth's description. Wo have no doubt
that this species is an Epizoanthus."

I have examined two preserved colonies, marked " Five miles south-
west of Eame Head, September, 1902."

Colonies unattached. From their conformation they would appear
to have lain free on a sandy bottom, the polyps all being bent slightly
upward.

NOTES ON SAGARTIIDiE AND ZOANTHID^E FROM PLYMOUTH. 213

Colony (a) consists of two large primary polyps growing from a
centre, away from one another, and in the same plane ; two secondary
polyps arising in a similar manner at right angles to the first pair,
and two smaller tertiary polyps arising from the bases of the primary
pair.

Colony (b) is formed upon the same plan, but is more irregular in
growth, and consists of seven polyps.

Greatest length of colony (a) 40 mm., largest polyp 20 mm. in
length, and 5 mm. in width at the summit, and 3 mm. at the base.

Breadth of colony 22 mm., the polyps 10 mm. long. Tertiary
polyps 5 mm. Measurements of (b) very similar.

In both colonies there were swellings at the base of the secondary
polyps, indicating further branching.

Body wall strongly incrusted with sand, a few folds on or below
the summit of the larger polyps.

Capitular ridges, 15 or 16, not strongly developed. Spaces between
the ridges unincrusted.

Disk not visible. Tentacles partly retracted, stout, and white, 26
visible in one and 24 in another. Mr. A. J. Smith informs me that
they were of an orange-red when fresh.

These specimens are evidently identical with that described by
Holdsworth, and which was also obtained in the neighbourhood of
Plymouth.

An anatomical examination was not attempted, as owing to the
amount of incrusting sand, and the fact that the specimens had been
five years in formalin, the result would be certain failure, to judge by
an experience with U. incnistattis, besides mutilating the colonies.
Fresh and less incrusted examples must be awaited and hoped for.

In the meanwhile I agree with previous writers as to the close
affinity of this form with E. coucliii.

Parazoanthus dixoni, Haddon and Shackleton.

One colony, preserved in alcohol. The label reads : " Millbay
Channel, December 1st, 1902."

This colony, which consisted of over 50 polyps, had evidently been
torn off a rock by the dredge, as fragments of stone and Balanus were
found still adhering to the ccenenchyme.

Greatest length of colony 35 mm., breadth 27 mm. Height of
largest polyps 10 mm., diameter 4 mm. Ccenenchyme soft, spongy,
and abundant. Polyps rather crowded. Body wall slightly wrinkled,
owing to the contraction of the polyps.

214 NOTES ON SAGAKTIID^ AND ZOANTHID^ FKOM PLYMOUTH.

The whole colony bears a strong resemblance to that figured by
Haddon and Shackleton, Hcvis. Brit. Actinim, Pt. II, PI. LVIII, Fig. 37.

Polyps stout, contracting somewhat toward the summit, where they
again enlarge. Margin rounded, with 16 to 18 well-developed ridges.
Disk and mouth not \dsible.

Tentacles difficult to enumerate, almost all being retracted. Thirty
were visible in one large polyp, fairly stout, and dull white in colour.
Colony sand colour.

A transverse section shows the ectoderm and nematocysts, encircling
sinus and canals, endoderm, etc., to be as described by Haddon and
Shackleton. The incrustations, consisting of sand grains, spicules, etc.,
were, however, more numerous than in their specimens.

The specimens described by the above-mentioned authors were
obtained oil' the coast of Kerry, Ireland, in 70-80 fathoms. The
Millbay pit, from which the present colony was probably obtained,
has a depth of from 12 to 17 fathoms.

LITERATURE.

1860. GossE, P. H. Actinologia Britannica.

1861. HoLDSWORTH, E. W. H. Proc. Zool. Soc, p. 99. On an Undescribed

British Zoanthus.
1874. Fischer, P. Reclierches sur les actinies des cotes de France. Arch.
Museum de Paris.

1888. Ellis, J. W. Cylista coccinea. Proc. Liverpool Biol. Soc, voL ii. p. 72.

1889. Haddon, A. C, and Shackleton, A. C. Rev. of Brit. Actiniae. Part i.

Trans. Roy. Dublin Soc.
1891. Haddon, A. C, and Shackleton, A. C. Rev. of Brit. Actiniae. Part ii.

Trans. Roy. Dubhn Soc.
1893. Carlgren, 0. Studien uber Nordische Actinien. Kongl. Svensk. Vet.

Akad Handl. Bd. 25. No. 10.
1898. Verrill, a. E. New American Actinians. Amer. Journ. Sci., ser. 4,

vol. vi., p. 493.
1902. Carlgren, 0. Actinarien der "Olga" Expedition. Wiss. Meeresunter-

suchungen.

1902. Parker, G. H. Notes on the dispersal of S. luciae. Contrib. Zool. Lab.

Mus. Comp. Anat. Harvard. No. 133.

1903. Davenport, G. C. Variation in the stripes of S. luciee. Mark Anni-

versary Volume.

[ 215 ]

Actiniae collected by the s.s. "Huxley" in the
North Sea during the summer of 1907.

By
Ohas. L. Walton,

Assistant Naturalist on s.s, Huxlcij

The following species were obtained :—

Bolocera tuedice (Johnston).

Bolocera longicornis, Carlgren.

Tealia coriacea (Cuvier).

Bhodactinia crassicornis (0. F. Milller).

Siomphia coccinea (0. F. Milller).

Sagartia undata (0. F. Mliller).

S. miniata-((jro&se).

S. viduata (0. F. Milller).

;S^. pallida (Holdsworth).

Sagartia sp.

CJiondr actinia digitata (0. F. Milller).

Metridium dianthus (Ellis).

Epizoanthus incrustatics (Dub. and Kor.).

Cerianthus llogdii, Gosse.

BOLOCERA TUEDIiE (Johnst).

Voyage XCIII. Station 37. Northumberland ground. 40 fathoms.

1 specimen.

Voyage XCIII. Station 56. Lat. 55° 31' N. Long. 0° 53' W. 55 fathoms.

2 specimens.

The specimen from 93-37 was young and damaged. Expanse of disk
and tentacles in a contracted condition, 30 mm.

Column much contracted and wrinkled, and of a dirty white ; outer
cycle of tentacles of the same colour, the inner cycles rose-pink.
Disk dull uniform pinkish white, moutli the same and protruding, two
pink oesophageal grooves.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. P

216 ACTINIA. COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA

Many of the tentacles were missing, especially from the inner
cycles ; these were three times the length of the outer. The animal,
although injured, was still alive when first captured, and the tentacles
underwent constant inflation and contraction ; during contraction the
sulcations showed strongly.

The two examples from Station 56 were large, and in size and
colour agreed with the description in Gosse's British Sea Anemones
and Corals, p. 186-7. Gosse there writes that the column is "studded
somewhat sparsely with minute rounded warts, scarcely apparent when
the animal is extended," etc., and also quotes Cocks to this effect ;
Carlgren, in 1891, discusses the matter, and concludes that the warts
described were due to the contraction of the body wall. In the two
examples now under consideration, no warts were to be found when
living and expanded, but when preserved and contracted the body wall
is thrown into innumerable wart-like folds, which any one who had
not seen the animal in a living state might easily take to be genuine
warts. The figure on Plate V (of Gosse) certainly does not show a
fully expanded specimen, as the tentacles are contracted (for although
incapable of retraction they can be considerably contracted). The
number of tentacles present in the more perfect specimen amounted
to 127, but so many had been thrown off that anything like an accurate
enumeration was impossible.

The internal preservation was bad, but 77 pairs of mesenteries were
recognisable.

Measurements fo a preserved specimen : — Breadth of pedal disk,
40 mm. Breadth of oral disk, 50 mm. Height of column, 55 mm.
Length of tentacles of the inner cycle, 40 mm., of outer cycle, 15-
20 mm. In colour, one approximated very nearly with Gosse's
description, but paler ; the other very pale, merely tinged with pink
and light brown on the inner face of the tentacles, etc. The stomach
protruded considerably.

BOLOCERA LONGICORNIS, Carlgren.

Voyage XC. Station 7. Great Fisher Bank. Lat. 56° 59' N. Long. T 53' E.

38 fathoms. 2 specimens.
Voyage XC. Station 10. The Gut. Lat. 56° 40' N". Long. V 32' E.

50 fathoms. Abundant, and at other stations in this area.
Voyage XCIII. Station 99. Lat. 55° 48' N. Long. 0° 49' E. 45 fathoms.

1 specimen.
Voyage XCIII. Station 101. Lat. 55° 48' N. Long. 1° 4' E. 40 fathoms.

1 specimen.

DURING THE SUMMER OF 1907. 217

Voyage XCIIT. Station 106. Lat. 55° 41' N. Long. 2° 13' E. 43 fathoms.

7 specimens.
Voyage XCVI. Station 1. Lat. 56° 0' N. Long. 3° 23' E. 38 fathoms.

4 specimens.
Voyage XCVI. Station 5. Very near last. 27|^ fathoms. 1 specimen.

This species was first described by Carlgren, in 1891, from specimens
obtained on the west coast of Sweden, from depths of from 40-80
fathoms. In 1893 he gave a much more detailed account, and mentions
the Gullmars-fjord, " other localities on the Swedish west coast," and
the Skagerrak as its distribution.

Only a few of those obtained by the s.s. Huxley were in a perfect
condition, the best being those taken in the Agassiz trawl during short
hauls ; those from beam hauls of several hours' duration being frequently
almost destitute of tentacles, which would be found adhering to the
mesh in all parts of the trawl.

None of the specimens attained the dimensions of those described
by Carlgren, and measurements of fully expanded specimens were not
easy owing to the generally great and usually unequal inflation of
the body wall. The height of the column varying from 50 to 100 mm.
Breadth of oral disk usually equal to the height. Length of inner
cycle tentacles up to 80 mm, the outer 25-30 mm.

Pedal disk thin and not well demarcated. None were attached, but
were free in the trawl, and only adhered in a slight degree to any
vessel in which they were kept, and as they showed no sign of having
been torn from any object it is probable that they lie loosely upon the
bottom (sandy).

Column smooth and polished and thin, finely wrinkled when con-
tracted. Tentacles 160, in six cycles in the larger specimens, stout,
tapering to the tip, strongly sulcated, fairly contractile, constricted at
the base, and very readily thrown off. Disk smooth, two large
oesophageal grooves, stomach freely protruded and grooved.

Some few were of the colours described by Carlgren, " flesh colour
all over, tentacles often brown-red on the inner side, gonidial-tubercles
and primary mesenteries weak carmine." But the majority had the
column chestnut or dull orange (the mesenteries showing as faint white
lines during distention)

Tentacles maroon or, rarely, chestnut, the inner faces much darker
than the outer, and the inner cycles darker than the outer. Disk a
warm flesh tint, or light orange-brown, with numerous irregular radial
lines of dark brown or maroon, of varying widths, but widest and
darkest about the base of the tentacles. (Esophageal grooves flesh
colour. Throat and stomach brownish pink. The colours persist well

218 ACTINIiE COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA

in preserved specimens. B. longicornis is not easy to keep alive, and
soon after capture usually protrudes the stomach walls to an enormous
extent, collapses to an abject flatness and dies.

RHODACTINIA CRASSICORNIS (0. F. Miiller).

In 1902, 0. Carlgren, in his paper on the Actinice of the Olga expedi-
tion considered that the name Urticina (Tcalia) crassicornis really
covered three species belonging to two genera, i.e., Rhodactinia crassi-
cornis (0. F. Mull.), Tealia coriacca (Cuv.), and Tealia lofotensis
(Dann.).

Unfortunately I did not see this paper until after the voyages, and
regarded all the forms obtained as varieties of Urticina crassicornis.
merely making notes on colour and external characters at the time of
capture. In these notes I however distinguished three forms : (a) U,
crassicornis, the normal form of the littoral area ; (h) the large deep-water
form, the Tealia tuhcrculata of Cocks and Cunningham , and (c) a form
with small warts, occurring on the Great Fisher Bank. A subsequent
anatomical examination of such specimens as were preserved shows this
last to be B. crassicornis and the other two to be forms of T. coriacea. It
is thus almost impossible to assign all the numerous records to their real
species, only those cases where my notes actually notice the size of
the warts and the preserved specimens can be safely noticed.

B. crassicornis occurred at several stations during Voyage XC about
the region of the Great Fisher Bank, together with B. longicornis and
Chondraciinia digitata.

Almost all the specimens were large, having an expanse of from 12
to 14 cm. They were attached to valves of Cyprina islandica and
Modiola, both dead and living, and Fusiis antiquus, either living, empty,
or tenanted by Eupagurus hernhardus, and once upon the shell of a
living F. turtonis.

The small warts which beset the upper part of the column are
arranged in irregular vertical rows, and during partial contraction the
arrangement frequently appears annular. The colouration is very
variable ; the following were noted : —

(«) Much resembles Gosse's description and plate of Bolocera eques.
The margin was frequently not retracted, even when the tentacles had
been withdrawn. The disk, however, was never " pellucid," nor was
the scarlet tentacular ring bounded by white, as described by Gosse.

When I first saw this I took it to be B. eques.

ih) Column dull orange, the summit white. Tentacles dull pink,
the scarlet ring indistinct. Disk pale orange.

DURING THE SUMMER OF 1907. 219

(d) Column as (a). Disk dull white, smudged with yellow. Ten-
tacles a fine rose-red, inner faces darkest, scarlet ring not distinguishable,
basal lines chestnut.

(e) Column as (a). Disk red. Tentacles with an indistinct white
ring, no scarlet band.

(/) Column dull orange, summit rod, the fosse blue. Disk cobalt
blue, two red circles around the mouth. Tentacles dull orange-brown,
red ring well defined, basal lines faint.

In others the column was blotched with scarlet.

In all cases the warts were white. The stomach frequently everted
to a considerable extent.

The food of this species appeared to be varied, a full-sized Spatangus
purpureus and larger shells of Cardium and Fstonrnohia were ejected
after capture, and considerable masses of Tuhularia, though this may
have been obtained in the trawl. Those kept alive swallowed Dcndro-
notus arlorescens with avidity, but refused Tritonia hovibergi.

TEALIA CORIAOEA (Cuviei).

The large deep-water form, described as Actinia tuhcrculata l)y Cocks
and Tealia tuhcrculata by Cunningham, was obtained from various
localities.

The colours are generally pale and the warts on the column large.
The tentacles 160 in number; in several there was a bifurcation of one
or more.

Usually attached to shells (dead). Near the coast, in shallov/ water,
specimens resembling the ordinary shore form were obtained.

STOMPHIA COOCINEA (0. F. MiiUer).

Actinia coccinea, Miiller, 1776.

Stoviphia cJiurchice, Gosse, 1859.

Stomphia coccinea, Carlgren, 1893 and 1902.

Voyage XCIII. Station 47. Off Seaham. 14 fathoms. 1 specimen.
Voyage XCIII. Station 65. Lat. 55° 35' N. Long. 0° 50' W. 45 fathoms.

6 specimens.

Voyage XCIII. Station 73. Lat. 55° 39' N. Long. 1° 10' W. 50 fathoms.

7 specimens.

Voyage XCIII. Station 75. Near the last. 50 fathoms. 11 specimens.

220 ACTINIAE COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA

Voyage XCIII. Station 77. Off Holy Island. 32 fathoms. Common.
Voyage XCIII. Station 82. Off St. Abbs. 37 fathoms. 1 specimen.
Voyage XCIII. Station 83. Lat. 56° 7^ N. Long. 1° 22' W. 42 fathoms.

1 specimen, and at a number of other stations in that area a few

specimens, or common.
Voyage XCIV. Station 23. Lat. 53° 49' N. Long. 0° 15' E. 15 fathoms.

1 specimen.
Voyage XCVI. Station 20. Lat. 54° 11' N. Long. 1° 40' E. 22 fathoms.

1 specimen.
Adhering to stones and dead shells. Several from 93-77 were upon
living shells of Aporrhais pes-pelecani, the dead shells used were usually
Modiola modiolus and Psammobia ferrcensis, etc. In confinement this
species displays much restlessness, detach themselves and roll about
the vessel or tank, re-attach and again loosen, and so on, also as Gosse
observes (p. 222), " very protean in shape," and frequently assumes the
shape shown in Gosse's figure (PI. VIII).

Colours very variable ; the column is always smooth, and has a satiny
lustre, the crimson or yellowish white predominating according to the
individual. Disk dull red or white, streaked with red ; lips usually
crimson ; throat dull white or pink. In some specimens a circle of dull
spots upon the inner third of the disk. Q^^sophageal grooves, two, red.
The pedal disk is frequently flecked and streaked with red of con-
siderable intensity ; this is probably corellated with the habit of living
for varying periods unattached, lying on the side on hard rocky ground
such as it favours. The tentacles pellucid white, with one or two bright
red rings, or only one ring near the tip ; sometimes the rings are in-
distinct or a white ring below the red ones. Eed lines frequently run
down the sides of the tentacles on to the disk. In some also a white
spot is present at the base of each tentacle of the two inner cycles,
thus forming two alternate circles of white spots. In several, from
XCIII. 90, the column and disk were very pale and almost transparent,
but the tentacles and throat were red.

It was noticeable that when a series of stations was worked at
intervals away from the coast (Northumberland), the colours of this
species became more and more faint, until the column was so trans-
parent that the mesenteries could be counted with ease.

SAGARTIA UNDATA (0. F. MuUer).

Actinia undata, Miiller, 1788. Zool. Danica.
Sagartia troglodytes, Gosse, P. H., 1860.
Cylista undata, Andres, 1883.
Sagartia undata, Carlgren, 0., 1893.

DURING THE SUMMER OF 1907. ~ 221

Voyage XCV. Station 24. S. edge of Coal Pit. 13 fathoms. 1 specimen.

A small specimen attached to a stone among Serpidce and Balanus,
and only visible when elongated and expanded.

Column cylindrical pink, white longitudinal lines near the base, some
sand attached. Disk pure satiny white. Mouth flat, throat buff.
Tentacles 70-80, not very long, yellowish white, barred transversely,
some with two ill-defined dark lines upon the front face, and a rather
prominent B mark at the foot.

SAGARTIA VIDUATA (0. F. Miiller).

Voyage LXXXIX. Station 22. Lat. 54' 28'. Long. 2° 36|' E. 18 fathoms.

1 specimen.
Voyage XC. Station 2. Off Esbjerg. Lat. 55° 22^' N. Long. 8° IQi' E.

8 fathoms. Several specimens.
Voyage XCII. Station 10. Lat. 54° 0' N. Long. 6° 46|' E. 16 fathoms.

6 or 7 specimens.
Voyage XCII. Station 28. Lat. 54° 5lV. Long. 6° 38' E. 22 fathoms.

Common.
Voyage XCII. Station 31. Lat. 54° 47|-'. Long. 6° 30' E. 21 fathoms.

Abundant.
Voyage XCII. Station. 34. Lat. 54° 2'. Long. 6° 54' E. 14 fathoms.

Several.
Voyage XCII. Station 42. Lat 54° 23'. Long. 7° 47' E. 12 fathoms.

Fairly common.
Voyage XCIV. Station 54. Sole Pit. 47 fathoms. 2 specimens.
Voyage XCIV. Station 56. Sole Pit. 45 fathoms.
Voyage XCVL Station 15. Lat. 54° 30' N. Long. 3' 59' E. 25 fathoms.

Fairly common.
Voyage XCVL Station 17. Lat. 54° 20' N. Long. 1° 43' E. 24 fathoms.

1 specimen.
Upon stones, valves of Ostrea, lumps of slag and one from 89-22
in a hollow on a lump of " Moorlog," also inside empty shells of
Buccinum.

Colours, etc., as described by Gosse, Carlgren and others, those from
more than 40 fathoms paler than usual.

SAGARTIA MINIATA (Gosse).

Voyage XCII. Station 28. Lat. 54° 511'. Long. 6° 38' E. 22 fathoms.

8-9 specimens.
Voyage XCIII. Station 27. Off AVhitby. 25 fathoms.
Voyage XCIV. Station 54. The Sole Pit. 47 fathoms. 5 specimens, and

at four other stations in the same area, common.

222 ACTINIA COLLECTED IN TPIE NOKTH SEA

Voyage XCV. Station 7 Smith's Knoll, L. V. 26 fathoms. 5 specimens.
Voyage XCV. Station 20. Knoll Deep. 22 fathoms. 4 siiecimens.
Voyage XCV. Station 24. S. edge of the Coal Pit. 13 fathoms. Fairly

common.
Voyage XCVI. Stations 15 and 16. Lat. 54° 30' N. Long. 3° 59' E.

25 fathoms. Very common.
Voyage XCVI. Station 17. Lat. 54° 20' N. Long. 1° 43' E. 24 fathoms.

Fairly common.
Voyage XCA^I. Station 18. Lat. 54° 20' N., near Long. 1° 43' E. 24
fathoms. One or two.

This species usually occurs in colonies upon living and dead Ostrea,
frequently clustered about the base of a colony of Alcyonium digitatum
(growing on the Ostrca also), their bases overlapping or overlapped by
the edge of the colony of A. digitatum, and often with S. viduata.

The colour as a rule is very variable, particularly as regards the
outer cycles of tentacles, the " core " of these, though generally
scarlet, may be orange-red, faint orange, or without any difference in
colour from the inner cycles. Disk also variable, each colony usually-
being fairly uniform as to the colour of the outer tentacles and the
number of the "gonidial" radii, one colony of 7 (from 96-15) having
one very broad white radius each, and the same occurred in a colony of
S. viduata from the same station.

Those procured in the Coal Pit in from 42 to 47 fathoms, bottom
black mud, were identical in colouring (and as bright in colour) as
those abundant in rock pool at low tide at East Hartlepool.

SARGARTIA PALLIDA, var. RUFA (Holdsworth).

Voyage XCVI. Station 15. Lat. 54° 30' N. Long. 3° 59' E. 25 fathoms.
8 or 9 specimens.

This colony was attached to a valve of Ostrea, together with young
Mctridium dianthus, to which, when contracted, they bore a strong
superficial resemblance, and where that species is abundant would be
easily passed over as the young form of one of the colour varieties.

Size of largest specimens. — Expanded diameter, 20 mm. Height,
15 mm. Length of tentacles of inner cycles, 10 mm. Column smooth
and of a uniform dull orange-brown. Base somewhat spreading.
Disk dusky white, mouth and throat orange ribbed. Tentacles numer-
ous, about 200 in 5 (?) cycles, a double white spot at the base, which is
also encircled by bowed bluish black lines ; these lines give the disk a
dusky appearance, and show through the body wall when contracted
as a broad blackish band. One very young specimen had the column
orange in colour and only eight tentacles ; another, somewhat larger,

DURING THE SUMMER OF 1907. 223

24 tentacles. Tn the first of these the basal lines were not visible ; in
the one with 24 tentacles they were blue, and the tentacles had a faint
white core.

Acontia were emitted from both mouth and column.

These larger specimens were much more robust and darker in colour
than any I have seen on the English or Welsh coasts ; in such the
column is generally white or pale orange (as in the young form
described above), and the basal lines blue or purple.

With the exception of this species (and the next to be described) the
anatomy of most of the forms obtained by the Huxley is well known.
An attempted investigation of this species ended in failure ; the
tissues were hard and brittle, due to preservation in too high a per-
centage of formalin. The external form and colour were excellently
preserved however. It would be well when several specimens are
obtained to preserve those intended for anatomical purposes in alcohol,
and museum specimens in formalin.

SAGARTIA SP.

Voyage XCIV. Station 56. The Sole Pit. Lat. 53° 36' N. Long. V 30' E.
45 fathoms. 1 specimen.

Attached to a dead valve of Ostrca. Expanded diameter, 25 mm.
base slightly exceeding the column, outline irregular and lobed. Column
firm, much wrinkled during contraction, slightly so when expanded.
The summit smooth, margin tentaculate ; a few weak suckers on the
upper parts of the column. Colour of column dull white, the mesen-
teries showing as white longitudinal lines, especially about the base.

Disk transparent white, the mesenteries showing as numerous white
radial lines ; mouth large and frequently gaping ; lips lobed, yellowish ;
throat brownish buff'.

Tentacles about 96 in number, thick and swollen at the base, tapering
gradually to the tip, white (showing an irregular white core during con-
traction), with a faint lilac tinge, stronger upon the lower parts and
most pronounced during contraction. During complete contraction the
tentacles show through the column wall as a broad lilac or light purple
area. Examination with a lens shov/ed this colour to occur upoii the
tentacle in little streaks. Acontia sparingly emitted and only after
severe irritation. Much flattened upon complete contraction. I am
not aware of any species of the genus to which I can safely refer
this form, but it appears to be nearly allied to S. miniata ; further
material may provide additional evidence and permit of the form being
examined anatomically.

224 ACTINIAE COLLECTED IN THE NOKTII SEA

CHONDRACTINIA DIGITATA (0. F. Mull. i).

Occurred frequently in abundance at many stations in the region of
the Great Fisher Bank and about Lat. 55° 31' N., Long. 0° 53' W. ; 55°
48' K, 0° 49' E. ; 55° 44' K, 1° 40' E., and many other stations in those
areas in from 34 to 55 fathoms.

Generally attached to the shells of various species of Fusus, either
living or inhabited by Eupagurus hcrnJiardus. Those from the Great
Fisher Bank showed great variability in the size of the warts and colour
of the column, etc. ; there might be but one row of prominent warts near
the summit, or they might be scattered thickly over the greater part of
the column, and the colour of the column varied from dirty white to
dull orange, and the tentacles from dull pale lilac to light brown.

In a few there was a tendency to mammillation in the warts thus
approaching C. nodosa, though none could be placed in that species.
Carlgren mentions similar cases, but in a region where both forms
were to be found. He found it difficult to determine to which
species some individuals should be assigned,

METRIDIUM DIANTHUS (EUis).

This species was found so constantly and abundantly throughout the
entire area investigated, as to render an enumeration of localities un-
necessary. All the colour varieties mentioned by Gosse, Carlgren, and
others were represented, with the exception of the sulphur and lemon-
yellow ; this appears to be somewhat rare (it is abundant in places on
the coast of N. Wales). The most frequent in the North Sea is a dirty
white, especially in the deeper water. Carlgren (1893, p. 102) says
" Die rein weisse Varietat " (var. sidonea, Gosse, 1860, p. 13) " habe ich
nur in tiefem Wasser angetrolten." In shallower areas the red, pink,
and pale orange are abundant ; the dark brown and olive forms were
only taken occasionally.

This species is to be found attached to stones, wood, Algce, Alcijonidium
gelatinosum, Buccinvm, Fusus (in such it usually occupies the apical
region), upon the surface of Cancer pagurus, etc., etc. I have seen a large
female Cancer almost entirely covered by an enormous red anemone.

Pycnogonum littorale is frequently to be found clinging about the
base of this species, and on several occasions I have observed it feeding
upon this and other species. The proboscis is sunk deeply into the
tissues, and the claws are hooked into the body wall. It requires a
sharp pull to draw out the proboscis, and the tissues around the
puncture were generally discoloured, showing the proboscis to have

DUKING THE SUMMER OF 1907. 225

remained inserted for some considerable time. P. littoralc was ob-
served feeding in a similar manner upon CJiotidr actinia digitata in the
region of the Great Fisher Bank, and Sagartia miniata from the Sole
Pit, neither the tough body wall in one case nor the acontia in the
other being sufficient protection. The coloured tissues of the anemone
were often visible within the body and proboscis of the Fycnogonum, and
that these attacks may prove fatal to young Actinians was observed in
my aquaria in the spring of 1907 at Newquay, in Cornwall, a young
Sagartia being speedily killed, and young Bunodadis thallia (Gosse)
were much injured.

I have since seen it feeding upon Actinia equine, Linn., and young
M. dianthus in the Plymouth aquaria.

EPIZOANTHUS INCRUSTATUS (Diib. and Kor.).

Voyage XCIII. Station 34. East of Shields. 38 fathoms. Common.
Voyage XCIII. Station 37. Northumberland ground. 40 fathoms. 5

specimens.
Voyage XCIII. Station 59. Lat. 55° 31' N., 0° 36' W. 47 fathoms.
Common, and a number of other stations in that area in 40 to 57 fathoms.

The colonies varied greatly in size, number of polyps, etc. All
were incrusting forms, forming carcina3cia by replacement of the shells
of gastropod shells ; the carcintecia were inhabited by various species of
Eiipagurus. The smallest colony consisted of 4 polyps. The largest
obtained measured 42 mm. in length, and the polyps varied from
12 mm. in height and 7 mm. in breadth to 6 mm. by 4 mm.

The number of polyps in a colony was usually 10, but as many as 30
were counted in one case, many of these being, of course, mere buds.

The incrustations were extremely dense, the ectoderm and mesogloea
being permeated with sand, and there was usually a considerable
amount in the ccelenteron. Eepeated attempts to observe the polyps
expanded all failed, owing to the motion of the ship, the animals being
very timid.

CERIANTHUS LLOYDII, Gosse.

Voyage XCIII. Station 36. East of Shields. 38 fathoms. 2 specimens.
Voyage XCIII. Station 39. Northumberland ground. 34 fathoms. 1

specimen.
Voyage XCIII. Station 70. Lat. 55° 39' N. Long. 1° 10' W. 50 fathoms.

1 specimen.
Of these only the last was in a sufficiently good condition to be of
use, the others were badly injured by the trawl.

226 ACTINI/E COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA.

Length when living, 60 mm. In spirit, 27 mm.

Column cylindrical, tapering gradually posteriorly.

Body wall transversely wrinkled, the upper portion also grooved and
ridged longitudinally, each ridge corresponding to one of the fully
developed tentacles of the marginal cycle.

Tentacles of the marginal cycle about fifty in number, but difficult
to determine, as many were quite small and evidently just developing.
It was likewise impossible to enumerate the inner tentacles in a
preserved condition as they were crowded together and broke in pieces
if any attempt was made to separate them. The animal would not
expand fully when alive.

When living the colouration agreed with the description given by
Gosse. The column was uniform yellowish white, with a dark olive-
green band at the summit, they area from which they arise white, and
upon the base of the tentacles a series of maroon or purple patches.
Marginal tentacles slender, not long ; light yellowish brown, with in-
distinct bars of chestnut brown across the inner faces. The oral series
very dark maroon.

LITERATURE.

1860. Gosse, P. H. Actinologia Britannica.

1889. Haddon, a. C. Revision of British Actiniae, Part I. Proc. R. Dublin Soc.

1889. Cunningham, J. T. Tealia tuberculata. Jouni. Mar. Biol. Assoc.

1890. Dixon, G. Y. and A. F. Note on T. tuberculata, etc. Ann. and Mag., Nat

Hist., Vol. V.

1891. Carlgren, 0. Das genus Bolocera. Ofr. Kongl. Svensk. Vet. Akad.

1891. Haddon, A. C., and SHACKiyETON, A. M., Rev. Brit. Actiniae, Part II. Proc.

R. Dublin Soc.
1893. Carlgren, 0. Studien uber Nordische Actinien. Svenska. Ak. Handl.
1902. „ „ OUja Actiuiaria. Meeresuntersucliungen. Heft I.

1905. RoDLE, L. Ceriantlies d'atlantique nord.

[ 227 ]

Nudibranchiata Collected in the North Sea by the
s.s. "Huxley" during July and August, 1907.

By
C. L. Walton,

Assistant Naturalist on the s.s. Huxley,

During July and August, 1907 (Voyages XCII, XCIII, XCIV,
XCV, and XCVI), the s.s. Hnxlej worked a series of stations reaching
from near Cromer to St. Abb's Plead more or less parallel with the
coast line, and also a series furtlier to the north, and extending around
the eastern borders of the Dogger Bank.

Many of the hauls were in and about " roughs," and, as might be
expected, a considerable number of species of Nudibranchs were
obtained, some of them of considerable interest. The specimens were
examined in the living state as thoroughly as circumstances permitted,
and as often as possible in their natural environment. Unfortunately
in many cases this was impossible, as the animals had become either
detached in the dredge or trawl, or were found adhering to the mesh
of the nets, and were in consequence more or less injured.

All the specimens were killed with menthol, preserved in formalin,
and subsequently re-examined in the Laboratory at Lowestoft.

The following species were obtained : —

Aeolidiidae.

1. Acolidia papillosa (Linn.).

2. Aeolidiella alder i (Cocks).

3. Aeolidiella glauca (A. & H.).

4. Cuthona nana (A. & H.).

5. Ampliorina aurantiaca (A. & H.).

6. Cratena amoena (A. & H.).

7. Galvina cingulata (A. & H.).

8. Galvina picta (A. & H.).

9. Galvina tricolor (Forbes).

228 NUDIBRANCHIATA COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA

10. Corypliella gracilis (A. & H.)

11. C. lineata (Loven).

12. G rufihranchialis (Johnst.).

13. G. salmonacca (Couth.).

14. Facelina drummondi (Thomp.).

Lomanotidse.

15. Lomanotus genei (Verany).

Dotonidae.

16. Doto coronata (Gmelin).

17. D. fragilis (Forbes).

Dendronotidae.

18. Dendronotus arborcsccns (Muller).

Tritoniidse.

19. Tritonia homhcrgi, Cuvier.

20. T. pleheia, Johnston.

Dorididse.

21. Archidoris testudinaria (A. & H.).

22. A. tuherculata (Cuvier).

Polyceridse.

23. Acanthodoris pilosa (Miiller).

24. A. suhquadrata (A. & H.).

25. Lamellidoris hilamellata (Linn.).

26. Goniodoris castanea, A. & H.

27. Idaliella aspersa (A. & H.).

28. Ancula cristata (Alder).

While following Bergh, Vayssiere, Trinchese, and other authors in
regarding Goryphella rufihranchialis, C. 2)dlucida and G. landsburgii as
synonyms, I have preferred to treat G. gracilis as a good species, and
also describe Goryphella salmonacca as occurring in the British area.

^OLIDIA PAPILLOSA (Linn).

Voyage XCVI. Station. 15. Lat. 54° 30' N. Long. 3° 59' E. 25 fathoms.

1 specimen.

Length 2 cm. The colouration almost identical with that of most

littoral specimens. The triangular white mark on the head prominent.

Oral tentacles of a clear wliite, spotted with opaque white. Body,

DURING JULY AND AUGUST, 1907. 229

rhinophores and papillae, dull yellowish white, freckled with brown.
Tail very obtuse.

The specimen was found upon a colony of Alcijonium digitatum.

-ffiOLIDIELLA ALDERI (Cocks).

Voyage XCVI. Station 15. Lat. 54° 30' N. Long. 3° 59' E. 25 fathoms.
1 specimen.

Found on Alcyonmm digitatum. Length about 16 mm.

When first obtained the specimen was taken to be a variety of
A. glauca, but upon examining it in the Laboratory I found that it
belonged to the present species.

Oral tentacles longer than the rhinophores, and white ; rhinophores
stout, wrinkled, bright orange-red, and very like those of A. glauca.
Papillae set in 8 or 9 rows, of a reddish chestnut colour, paler at the
bases and tips, and more or less freckled with white.

The "ruff" was not well marked, but the papillae forming it were
paler than the rest. All the papillae were erected upon irritation.
Tail tapering to a fairly -fine point.

The radula agreed generally with Alder & Hancock's plate and
description. There were 14 plates of a clear yellowish white, tapering
gradually ; the central tooth rather stronger than in their figure, and
the laterals 24 in number.

JEOLIDIELLA GLAUCA (A. & H.).

Voyage XCV. Station 24. S. edge of the Coal Pit. 13 fatlioms. 1 specimen.
Voyage XCVI. Station 18. Lat. 54' 16' N. Long. 1° 46' E. 23 fathoms.
2 specimens.

The specimen from XCV — 24 was upon Alcyonium digitatum.

Those from XCVI — 18 were found clinging to the meshes of the
beam trawl, but A. digitatttm occurred commonly in the haul.

All the individuals agreed with Alder and Hancock's specimen in
form, but showed considerable variation in their colouration, especially
in the colouration of the papillae.

{a) In the specimen from XCV — 24 the length was 14 mm. The
rhinophores were somewhat wrinkled, short, stout, and tipped with
white. Oral tentacles semi-transparent and freckled all over with
white. Body and papillae as in Alder and Hancock's plate. Eyes
plainly visible.

(h) Those from XCVI — 18 measured 35 and 25 mm. in length,
respectively.

230 NUDIBRANCHIATA COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA

In both the papillae were for almost their whole length of a dull
green, freckled with opaque white, no red being seen.

In (a) the head and body were as figured by Alder & Hancock ; in
(b) the oral tentacles were much paler, and the head and rhinophores
of a dull uniform red.

The animals showed little activity, but both crawled on the surface
film on several occasions.

E. Hecht {Contribution it Vetndc des Nudibranches, 1896) sa3^s of this
species : " Kemarquable par la variabilite de sa coloration, qui est
parfois plus foncee que celle indiquee par Alder et Hancock, et plus
souvent d'un jaune grisatre."

CUTHONA NANA, A. & H.

Voyage XCII. Station 45. Edge of Sylt Outer Rough. 13 fathoms.

Several specimens.
Voyage XCII. Station 46. Edge of Sylt Outer Rough. 13 fathoms

Several specimens.
Voyage XCIII. Station 9. N. of Dogger Rough. 13 fathoms. Several

specimens.
Voyage XCIII. Station 19. Bruecy's Garden. 27 fathoms. 6 specimens.

Most of the specimens obtained were small, four of those from
XCIII — 19 measuring y, 8, 6 and 4 mm.

All were feeding upon Hydractinia echinata.

Those from XCII — 45 were upon a large specimen of Jlyas coardatus,
which was almost covered with a growth of Hydractinia. Some nine
individuals, mostly small, were clustered upon the under side of the
head of the crab, and several others upon the crapace. All were of
a transparent white, the papillae having a light chestnut or pink core.

Those obtained at the other stations were upon Hydractinia, encrust-
ing the shells of Natica monilifcra and Buccinum. Leslie and Herd-
man {The Invertebrate Fauna of the Firth of Forth, 1881) also record
C. nana on Hydractinia at " Morrison's Haven," collected by Dr. T.
Strethill Wright.

AMPHORINA AURANTIACA (A. & H).

Voyage XCIV. Station 47. Outer Dowsing Ground. Lat. 53° 28|' N.
Long. 1° 93' E. 14^ fathoms. 1 specimen.
Length 1 cm. The specimen difiered slightly from Alder and
Hancock's plate and description, the rhinophores being wrinkled and
slightly shorter than the oral tentacles. The white area below the
tips of the papilla3 very faint ; the animal was damaged, and many
of the papill.ie were missing from the posterior region.

DURING JULY AND AUGUST, 1907. ^31

It was living upon a colony of Tuhularia larnyx, which was growing
upon a large stone. The spawn, which was similar to the figure of
Alder antl Hancock, was attached to the bases of the Tuhularia.

CRATENA AMOENA (A. & H.).
Voyage XCV. Station 23. S. edge of the Coal Pit. 24 fathoms. 2 specimens.

The two examples of this most beautiful species were discovered
creeping about the base of a colony of Sertularia argenta, growing upon
a dead valve of Pecten opercidaris.

Length 6 and 4 mm. respectively.

They differed from Alder and Hancock's plate and description in
the following particulars, but otherwise were similar : —

1. The oral tentacles were not much longer than the rhinophores,

and were white and without the brown band.

2. There was a prominent dark green mark on the centre of the

head, probably due to the jaws showing through the tissues.

3. The red band on the rhinophores was broad, and in one specimen

occupied the centre of the organ. In the other specimen the basal
half of the rhinophore was red-brown and the upper half white.

4. The foot was more bilobed, and produced into rounded lobes at

the sides.

The animals were active and restless, and progressed with ease on
a flat surface contrary to Alder and Hancock's surmise.

Papillae pale green, spotted with white and brown at their bases ;
a few white spots were present on the head region, but I could not
make out any " white tubercles " in that region.

GALVINA CINGULATA; A. & H.

Voyage XCIV. Station 13. Inner Silver Pit. 43 fathoms. 1 specimen.
Length 13 mm.

The specimen was in a very perfect condition, and as it differs in
several minor points from the plate and description of Alder and
Hancock, a detailed description may be of interest. Body dull white,
shaded, patched, blotched, and streaked with brown and olive-brown,
much darker in the regions from which the papillae arise.

The rhinophores smooth and very little shorter than the oral
tentacles, a band of olive near the tip, and streaks of white down to
the base. Oral tentacles similar. Head olive, spotted with white.
Eyes not discernible. The region immediately behind the head streaked
and lined with dark olive-brown and spotted with white.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. *<!

232

NUDIBRANCHIATA COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA

Papillae long, stout, and irregular in outline, set in 9 transverse rows,
the first somewhat remote from the others and arising close behind
the rhinophores, thickest near the summit, and terminating somewhat
abruptly in a small point ; the inner rows held more or less curved
inwards ; 5 or 6 papilla in each row.

The bases very pale, the " core " of^ light yellowish brown, irregularly
and indistinctly tinged with olive, an olive band near the tip, which
is white (due to numerous minute white crowded dots), or sometimes
tinged with olive or yellow. A bare space down the centre of the
back ; posterior region pinkish fawn. Body rather narrow, foot as in
Alder and Hancock's plate. Tail shorter than their figure.

The white spots on the body well marked, those on the rhinophores
and papillcC less so.

The specimen was living on a branch of Antcnnnlaria ramosa grow-
ing upon a stone brought up by the conical dredge. The hydroid was
crowded with yellow gonophores, and the animal was by no means
conspicuous when extended with the body parallel with the stem, the
general colour and form of the papillae approximating closely to what
was undoubtedly its natural environment.

GAL VINA PICTA, A. & H.

Voyage XC II. Station 45. Sylt Outer Ground. 13 fathoms. 1 specimen.
Voyage XCIII. Station 30. Hartlepool Grounds. 30 fathoms. 2 specimens.
The specimens were of the normal colouration, that from CXII — 45
was living upon a colony of Sertularia cupressina.

GALVINA TRICOLOR (Forbes).

Voyage XCIII. Station 96. Lat. 55° 50' N. Long. 0" 35' E. 45 fathoms.

4 specimens.
Voyage XCIII. Station 99. Lat. 55° 48' N. Long. 0° 49' E. 45 fathoms.

1 specimen.
Voyage XCIV

„ xcv

Station 11. Inner Silver Pit. 43 fathoms. 1 specimen.
„ 24. S. edge of the Coal Pit. 13 fathoms. 1
specimen.
Voyage XCVI. Station 18. Lat. 54° 16' N. Long. 1° 46' E. 23 fathoms.
1 specimen.
Some variations were observable in the colours of the body and papillae.
In the younger specimens the yellow band near the tip of the
papillae was paler than in the adults, and in one case it was absent
from some of the papillae, though present in others ; when absent the
whole tip was white.

DURING JULY AND AUGUST, 1907. 233

In some of the adult specimens the body was brownish and in others
of a greenish yellow.

The specimen from XCIY — 11 had had a number of the papillae
torn off, and fresh ones were growing in their places.

OORYPHELLA GRACILIS (A. & H).

Voyage XCIV. Station 45. Lat. 53° 22' N. Long. 0" 34f E. 15 fathoms.

5 specimens.
Voyage XCIV. Station 47. Lat. 53° 28f' N. Long. 1° 39' E. 14^ fatlioms.
1 specimen.
XCIV — 45. Length of specimens, 8, 7, 7, 7, and 6 mm. respectively.
Living on Antennularia antenni7ia and Sertularia argenta.

Agreed in all particulars with Alder and Hancock's description, as
also did the specimen from Station 47, which, however, was living
upon Tubularia larnyx.

CORYPHELLA LINEATA (Loven).

West of Brucey's Garden. 40 fathoms. 3
23. Whitby Outer Rough. 36 fathoms. 7

Voyage XCIII.

Station 21,

specimens.

Voyage XCIII.

Station 2

specimens.

Voyage XCIII.

Station 25.

J) ))

„ 30.

)> )>

„ 32.

9) 5»

„ 53.

Whitby Grounds. 34 fatlioms. 6 specimens.
Off Hartlepool. 30 fatlioms. 1 specimen.
N. of Hartlepool. A few specimens.
Lat 55° 21' K Long. 1° 10' W. 45 fathoms.
3 specimens.
The colour of the papillae varies somewhat in shade, lighter or
darker chestnut-red or carmine ; the white tips also may be either
well demarcated, narrower or wider, or may be continued downwards
for a little way in streaks and blotches.

The papillae arise from or about two lateral transparent ridges, which
are more prominent in some individuals than others ; the first pair of
clusters are much the largest, and are somewhat compressed and taper
rapidly to the tip.

The posterior portion of the foot is broad, and capable of consider-
able expansion ; the animal attaches itself by this, the rest of the
body swinging freely in the water (as in many other species). It can
also crawl on the surface film.

The radula agrees with the figure and description of Alder and
Hancock.

The food of the species appears to be Tubularia indivisa and T.
larnyx.

234 NUDIBRANCHIATA COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA

CORYPHELLA RUFIBRANOHIALIS (Johnst).

Voyage XCIII. Station 21. W. of Brucey's Garden. 40 fathoms. 2

specimens.
Voyage XCIII. Station 23. Whitby Outer Eoiigli. 36 fathoms. 5 specimens.

,j ,, ,, 30. Off Hartlepool. 30 fathoms. Common.

,, XCV. ,, 24. S. edge of the Coal Pit. 13 fathoms. 1 specimen.

With the exception of that from XCV — 24, all the specimens obtained
from the above, and a number of other stations off the coasts of
Durham and Northumberland and to the N. of the Dogger Bank, etc.,
were referred when captured to the C. pcllucida of Alder and Hancock.
In size and external features almost all exactly agreed with the plate
and description of those authors, but upon examining the radulte it
became evident that they must all be referred to the present species.

Some 16 specimens were examined from XCIII — 21, 23, and 30.
Unfortunately specimens from the other stations had not been pre-
served, so I can only conjecture that they were also referable to this
species.

All the radulse examined agreed very closely, and many were
identical with the figures and description of Alder and Hancock.
Generally of a yellowish white, the central plate with usually 15
denticles, the central cusp strong ; the laterals, as described by Alder
and Hancock, " of an acute triangular form with the apex turned out-
wards ; " the denticles on their inner margins, however, very irregular
in size and number, in some cases 12 to 14 and of fair size, in others
the same number but much smaller, in otliers again only 7 or 8 might
be present upon the upper portion of the tooth.

It is possible that specimens occur without any denticles on the
laterals, and although the radula, figured by Alder and Hancock for
C. iKllueida, is of a different shape to any I examined, still the evidence,
I think, supports the opinions of Bergh and Vayssiere, who unite
these species.

One specimen from XCIII — 30 had a faint white bifurcating line
on the head as in C. lineata, and in another from the same station tlie
head region was coloured as in C. landshurgii (A. & H.). Oral tentacles
and rhinophores amethystine, and tipped with yellowish white ; length,
half an inch. Both these cases also support the views of Bergh and
Vayssiere in uniting these species also with C. rujibranchialis.

Tuhularia indivisa and T. larn.y.'c were in every case the habitat of
the species, and when crawling along the stems among the colonies
the animals very closely resembled their surroundings. Some of the
specimens were 4 cm. and many 3 and 3i cm. in lengtli.

DURING JULY AND AUGUST, 1907.

235

CORYPHELLA SALMONACEA (Couth).

Lat. 55° 31' N. Lon^'. 0° 36' W. 47 fathoms.

Lat. 55° 57' N. Lon". 0° 27' W. 42 fathoms.

Lat. 55" 50' N. Lone 0° 35' E. 45 fathoms.

Lat. 55° 48' N. Lon". 0° 49' E. 45 fathoms

Lat. 55' 48' N. Long. 1° 40' E. 40 fathoms.

Lat. 55° 44' N. Long. 1° 40' E. 43 fathoms.

Lat. 56° 00' N. Long. 3° 23' E. 38 fathoms.

Voyage XCIII. Station 59.

1 specimen.
Voyage XCIII. Station 89.

2 specimens.
Voyage XCIII. Station 96.

Veiy common.
Voyage XCIII. Station 99.

Very abundant.
Voyage XCIII. Station 101.

Aboilt 100 specimens.
Voyage XCIII. Station 103.

Several specimens.
Voyage XCVI. Station 1.

1 specimen.

Length, 20 mm. for the largest ; the greater number of specimens,
15 mm. Other measurements of a specimen of 20 mm. in length :
height of body, 5 mm. ; breadth, 5 mm ; length of oral tentacles
5 mm. ; rhinophores, 4 mm. ; papillae, 3'5 mm. (for the largest).

Form — Body firm, foot rather narrow, produced at the angles into
thin points, tapers gradually to a somewhat obtuse point at the tail.

Oral tentacles broad and thick ; rhinophores slightly wrinkled ;
eyes very small, placed behind the rhinophores ; papilke very numerous,
the grouping obscure, continuous almost to the tip of the tail ; a bare
space continuous from head for three-quarters of the length of the back.

Colours — Body and foot semi-pellucid white ; oral tentacles and
rhinophores of the same colour, with frequently a line of opaque
white down the front, or in the rhinophores confined to the upper
third ; papill£e reddish brown or fawn coloured, with a very distinct
white ring just below the tip, giving an " eyed " appearance when
viewed from above ; tliis white ring speedily disappears in preserved
specimens. Dorsal area frequently tinged with reddish brown, a faint
white line along the dorsal surface of the tail.

Jaws very strong and of a dark horn colour.

Eadula triseriate, of 16 to 18 rows, pale yellowish wliite in colour.
Central plate broad, central cusp long and strong, with 7 to 8 denticles
on either side, curved inwards and of fair size.

Laterals slender and acute, generally bearing 8 or 9 small and
irregular denticles.

Almost all the specimens obtained were adhering to the meshes of
the trawl or dredge, so that it is not possible to state its natural

236 NUDIBRANCHIATA COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA

habitat. Few hydroids occurred in any of the hauls. These specimens
differ from the majority of C. salnionacea in that the lateral teeth
have only 8 or 9 denticles on their inner edges, while in typical C.
salmonacca they are very numerous (Sec Bergh, Danish Ingolf Ex-
pedition, Vol. II, Pt. 3, pp. 33-34, PI. IV, Fig. 19 ; and PI. v. Fig. 9).

The numerous, closely-set, small papillse, from among which arise the
ill-defined groups of larger ones, were a constant feature in all the speci-
mens examined.

FACELINA DRUMMONDI (Thompson).

Voyage XCIII. Station 7, W. edge of the Hills. 23 fathoms. 1 specimen.
„ 86. Lat. 56° 20' Is". Long 0° 55'. 36 fathoms.

2 specimens.
Voyage XCIII. Station 89. Lat. 55° 57' N. Long. 0° 23' W. 42 fathoms.

1 specimen.
Voyage XCIV. Station 47. Lat. 53° 28|' N. Long. 1° 39' E. 14^ fathoms.

1 specimen.
XCIII — 86, Head orange, with white blotches between the rhino-
phores ; back light orange, becoming patchy towards the tail, which
was pellucid white, and had a white line to the tip. Oral tentacles
long, somewhat wrinkled, orange, the tips lighter and spotted with
white. Ehinophores laminated, dark orange, the tip white, and a
white line down the front of the tip. Eyes situated in front of the
rhinophores in one specimen and behind them in the other. Papillffi
run on to the head around the rhinophores; many were missing, but those
remaining were of a chestnut-maroon, with a prominent white ring
below the pellucid tip, those nearest the rhinophores with a longitu-
dinal white line on the front face, and the white ring absent. Length
of animals, 15 and 20 mm.

XCIII — 89. The body lighter in colour and semi-transparent.
Foot sharply angulated, propodium deeply notched ; a white line on
the foot angles. Oral tentacles twice the length of the rhinophores.
Papilke dark chocolate colour.

XCIV — 47. A young specimen J of an inch in length.
Foot angles produced into long fine points. Occurred upon Tuhidaria
larnyx.

LOMANOTUS GENEI, Verany.

Voyage XCIII. Station 96. Lat. 55° 50' N. Long. 0° 35' E. 45 fathoms.
1 specimen.

Length 14 mm.

The rhinophores were of an orange-yellow colour, stout, and with
about 15 closely-set laminae, the tip produced, truncated, and smooth;

DURING JULY AND AUGUST, 1907. 237

sheaths " calyx like," extending for half the length of the rhinophores,
the margin divided into a number of small blunt teeth. Margins of
foot rounded.

Body semi-transparent, tinged with pink; viscera yellowish and
visible through the body wall. Faint pinkish brown lines on the
epipodial processes.

DOTO CORONATA (Gmeliu).

Voyage XCiV. Station 45. Lat. 53° 22' JS". Long. 0° 34f' E. 15 fathoms.

Common.
Voyage XCV. Station 23. Knoll Deeps. 22 fathoms. 1 specimen.

Those from XCIV — 45 were living and spawning freely upon Gemel-
laria loricata and Hydrallmania falcata.

DOTO FRAGILIS, Forbes.

Voyage XCIII. Station 62. Lat. 55" 31' N. Long. 0° 19' W. 36 fathoms.

3 specimens.
Voyage XCIV. Station 1 3. Inner Silver Pit. 43 fatliums. 1 specimen.
,, ,, ,, 38. N. of Haisboro L.V. 14 fathoms. 1 specimen.

„ XCVI. „ 20. Lat. 54M1'N. Long. T 40' E. 22 fathoms.

1 specimen.
XVIII — 62. The three specimens varied in length from '5 to 1 cm.
One was upon Tiibularia larnyx, and was much darker in colour than
the other two, which were living and spawning on a species of Halecium.

DENDRONOTUS ARBORESOENS (Mliller).

An enumeration of the stations where this species was obtained is
scarcely necessary, as it occurred throughout the entire area explored.
Tubularia would appear to be its general habitat, and it is most
plentiful where Tiibularia is likewise abundant. Three varieties are
especially distinguishable.

{a) The body transparent or yellowish white, and the dentritic pro-
cesses opaque white,

(?>) a uniform, dull, semi-transparent pink,

The last is the most general, and approximates well with the colonies
of Tiibularia on which it is usually found.

More rarely specimens are found with the body much spotted with
white. All these varieties are mentioned by Alder and Hancock.

In one or two specimens a number of small wart-like projections
were observable, scattered about the dorsal surface, particularly in the
region between the rhinophores and the first pair of processes.

238 NUDIBRANCHIATA COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA

Several very young examples were examined, the smallest being
2 mm. in length ; in this specimen the dentritic processes were simple,
cylindrical, clavate, and incipiently branched in the first pair, which
was much the largest ; rhinophores plain and unbranched.

TRITONIA HOMBERGI, Cuvier.

This species was taken at a large number of stations.

It appears to be generally distributed, though seldom abundant ; it
was especially numerous where Alcyonium digitatuvi abounded. The
colouration varied from white, yellowish white and grey, to light or
very dark brown.

TRITONIA PLEBEIA, Johnst.

Like the last, this species was found wherever Alcyonium digitatum
was at all abundant, and was generally to be found creeping about the
base of a colony, or between the fleshy lobes. Considerable difference
exists between the individuals from the white and those from the
orange colonies of Alcyonium ; those from the white being of a pale
hue, and those from the orange a warm orange-brown with darker
markings.

AROHIDORIS TESTUDINARIA (A. & H.).

Voyage XCIII. Station 59. Lat. 55° 31' N. Long. 0° 19' W. 47 fatlionis.
1 specimen,

Length 45 mm. ; general colour dark greenish yellow.

Branchite 9, with a dusky fringe Rhinophores short. Warts of
two sizes, low and obtuse. Mantle ample, covering the sides and foot.
The radula agreed with the figures given by Eliot (Journ. liar. Biol.
Assoc, Vol. VII, 1906, PI. xi. Fig. 2).

AROHIDORIS TUBERCULATA (Cuvier).
East Hartlepool. Eocks about low tide mark. 1 specimen.

AOANTHODORIS PILOSA (Miiller).

Very common wherever Alcyonidium gelatinosum is at all abundant,
and is widely distributed.

Varying in size from a few mm. to nearly 5 cm. in length. Usually
pure white, sometimes grey, and occasionally brown or dusky. Spawn
abundant upon Alcyonidiuiii gelatinosicm.

39'

fathoms.

801'

10 fathoms.

fatl:

loms,

, Fairly

' U'

fathoms.

DUKING JULY AND AUGUST, 1907. 239

ACANTHODORIS SUBQUADRATA, A. .fe H.

Voyage XCIII. Station 77. Off Holy Island. 32 fathoms. 1 specimen.

The single example obtained agreed exactly with the description
and plate of Alder and Hancock,

LAMELLIDORIS BILAMELLATA (Linn.).

Voyage XCIV. Station 47. Lat. 53° 28f N. Long. V

1 specimen.
Voyage XCIV. Station 52. Lat. 53° 30' N. Long. 1°

. 3 specimens.
Voyage XCV. Station 24. S. edge of the Coal Pit.

common.
Voyage XCVL Station 24. Lat. 54° 16' K Long. 1
Fairly common.

All the specimens but one were living among colonies of Balanus,
upon stones of various sizes.

In colour they were perfectly normal, and agreed so well with their
environment as to be extremely difficult to detect, and repeated search-
ing of the colonies of Balanus was necessary to obtain all the specimens
present.

The only marked variation was in the case of a specimen living
upon a colony of Alcyonium digitatum, growing on a stone covered
with Balanus, on which normally coloured specimens of L. hilaindlata
were living, ' This one specimen was of a very clear white, the only
dark marks being two obscure and shadowy patches on the mantle,
and a slight dusky shade on the brancliiie.

The largest specimens were not more than 16 mm. in length. It
was observable that the branchite increased in number with age.

GONIODORIS CASTANEA, A. & H.

Voyage XCIV. Station 54. The Sole Pit. Lat. 53° 40' N. Long. 1° 28' E.
47 fathoms. 1 specimen.

Colour pinkish white, shaded with yellow. Ehinophores with
yellowish laminae and yellow tips.

Cloak more or less warted all over, the central and transverse ridges
strongly warted, a double row on the central one.

Jaws showed through the tissues of the head as a broad purple
patch. Branchiae 7, pinkish brown, with a few white spots, especially
near the bases.

The upper part of the foot paler than the mantle and with smaller
tubercles.

240 NUDIBRANCHIATA COLLECTED IN THE NORTH SEA.

The specimen was living upon a colony of Botryllus, which was
attached to a large tube of Sahella pavonina, and upon which A.
digitntum was growing. The animal lay in a depression eaten into the
colony, to which it approximated very closely in colouration.

IDALIELLA ASPERSA (A. & H.).

Voyage XCIII. Station 77. Off Holy Island. Lat. 55° 44' N. Long.
1° 40' W. 32 fathoms. 1 specimen.
In all respects resembled the specimen described by Alder and
Hancock.

ANCULA CRISTATA (Alder).

Voyage XCIV. Station 2. N.E. of Sherringham Bank. 11 fathoms. 1
specimen.

Colour a very transparent wliite ; the orange line on the keel very
faint.

The linear appendages surrounding the branchiae tipped with opaque
white in about half their number, the rest with the normal yellow
tip ; they were very irregular in length.

[ 241 ]

List of Publications Recording the Results of Researches carried
out under the Auspices of the Marine Biological Association
of the United Kingdom in their Laboratory at Plymouth or
on the North Sea Coast from 1886-1907.

The following list has been classified, so far as practicable, according to
subjects, in order that it may be useful for purposes of reference. The
list does not include publications recording the results of observations
made on material supplied by the Association to workers in different
parts of the country, of which a considerable amount is sent out each
year.

In attempting to distinguish between economic and more purely
scientific publications considerable difficulty has been experienced ;
indeed such a distinction is in reality impossible, since all researches
bearing on the distribution and habits of marine life of any kind have
a more or less direct bearing on fishery problems. All papers dealing
with the distribution, habits, and young stages of fishes have been
included in the economic division, whether the fishes are themselves
marketaljle or not.

Jime, 1907.

Economic Publications.

FISHES.
1 . General.

The Natural History of the Marketable Marine Fishes of the British Islands.

Prepared by order of the Council of the Marine Biological Association

especially for the use of those interested in the Sea-Fishing Industries.

By J. T. Ciuniingham, m.a. With a preface by E. Ray Lankester, m.a.,

LL.D., F.R.s. London : Macmillan and Co., Ltd., 1896.
The Ovaries of Fishes. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii.

1893-95, p. 154.
On the Histology of the Ovary and of the Ovarian Ova in certain INIarine

Fishes. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. XL.

1897, p. 101.
A Contriljution to the Knowledge of the Ovary and Intra-ovarian Egg in

Teleosteans (Avith Plates XL and XII.). By W. L. Calderwood. Journ.

M.B.A. N S. ii. 1891-92, p. 298.

242 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Observations on Ovarian Ova and Follicles in certain Teleostean and Elasnio-

brancli Fishes. By W. Wallace, m.a. Quart. J(»urn. ]\Iicr. Sci., vol.

xlvii. Y>. 161.
A Eecord of the Teleostean Eggs and Larvse oljscrved at Plymouth in 1897.

By E. W. L. Holt and S. D. 8cott, b.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v.

1897-99, p. 156.
Studies on the Reproduction and Development of Teleostean Fishes occurring

in the neighbourhood of Plymouth (with Plates I.-VI.) By J. T

Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. Is\S. i. 1889-90, p. 10.
On some Larval Stages of Fishes (with Plates III. and IV.) By J. T.

Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 68.
On Some Disputed Points in Teleostean Emljryology. By J. T. Cunningham,

M.A. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1891.
Recherches sur la Reproduction des Poissons osseux. Par E. W. L. Holt.

Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Marseille, v., 1899.
Preliminary notes on the Reproduction of Teleostean Fishes in the South-
western District. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v.

1897-99, p. 41.
Notes on the Reproduction of Teleostean Fishes in the South- Western Dis
. trict. By E. W. L. Holt and L. W. Byrne, b.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. V. 1897-99, p. 333.
Report on the Eggs and Larvae of Teleostean Fishes observed at Plymouth in

the Spring of 1902. By F. Balfour Browne, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. vi,

1903, p. 598.
Notes on the Reproduction of Teleostean Fishes in the South-Western District.

By E. W. L. Holt. J.-urn. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 107.
Report on a Collection of Very Young Fishes obtained l)y Dr. G. H. Fowler in

the Faeroe Channel. By E. W. L. Holt. Proceed. Zool. Soc, London.

1898, p. 550.
The Rate of Growth of some Sea Fishes and their Distribution at Different

Ages. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92,

p. 95.
On the rate of Growth of some Sea Fishes and the Age and Size at which they

begin to breed. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii,

1891-92, p. 222.
Report on the Probable Ages of Young Fish collected by Mr. Holt in the

North Sea. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

1891-92, p. 344.
On the Relation of Size to Sexual Maturity in Pleuronectids. (North Sea

Investigations.) By E. W.L.Holt, Journ.M.B.A. N.S.ii. .1891-92, p. 363.
On the Relation of vSize to Sexual Maturity in Round-fish. (North Sea

Investigations.) By E. W. L. Holt. Journ.M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95,

p. 78. ^
On the Relations of the Generative Organs and of the Sexes in some Fishes,
(North Sea Investigations.) By J. T. Cunningham, m.a, Journ, M.B.A,
N.S. iv, 1895-97^ p. 28.

EECORDING RESULTS OF RESEARCHES. 243

Hyl)i'iili,sm in Marine Fishes. By H. M. Kyle, d.Sc. Journ. M.B.A. vi,

1903, p. 623.
An Examination of the Present State of the Grimsl)y Trawl Fishery, with

especial reference to the Destruction of Immature Fish. By E. W. L.

Holt. Journ. M.B.A. KS. iii. 1893-95, p. 339. (Cf. N.8. iv.

1895-97, p. 410.) Also issued as a separate puhlication.
Destruction of Immature Fish. By G. C. Bourne, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i.

1889-90, p. 153.
On the Destruction of Immature Fish in the North Sea. Remedial Measures.

(North Sea Investigations.) By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

1891-92, pp. 380, 388.
The Immature Fish Question. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 54.
Growth and Distribution of Young Food-fishes. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 18^93-95, p. 272.
On the Destruction of Immature Fish in the North Sea. (North Sea In-
vestigations.) By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95,

pp. 81, 123, 169, 288.
Statistics of Small Fish landed at Grimsby. (North Sea Investigations.)

By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 10.
The Impoverishment of the Sea. By W. Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. vi. 1900, p. 1.
Notes on the Fishing Industry of Plymouth. By Walter Heape, m.a. Journ.

M.B.A. Old Series. No. 1. 1887, p. 45.
Monthly Reports on the Fishing in the neighbourhood of Plymouth (with

8 charts). By W. L. Calderwood. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92,

p. 277 and p. 394. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 107.
Preliminary Note on Trawling Experiments in certain Bays on the South

Coast of Devon. By F. B. Stead, b.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv.

1895-97, p. 90.
Report on Trawling in Bays on the South Coast of Devon. By E. W. L,

Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 296.
Report on Trawling and other Investigations carried out in the Bays on the

South-east Coast of Devon during 1901 and 1902. Prepared for the

information of the Devon Sea Fisheries Committee by Walter Gar-
stang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. vi. 1903, p. 435.
Notes on Rare or Interesting Specimens [Ulujjea alosa, Auxis Rochei, Thynnus

fhynnus, Alyliohatis aquila). By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Joui'n. INI. B.A.

N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 274.
North Sea Investigations. Preliminary. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 216.
On the Territorial Fishing Ground of Scarborough and its Neighl)ourhood.

(North Sea Investigations.) By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 176.
On the Iceland Trawl Fishery, Avith some Remarks on the History of the

North Sea Trawling Grounds. (North Sea Investigations.) By E. W. L.

Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 129.

244 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Two Trips to the Eastern Grounds. (North Sea Investigations.) By J. T.

Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 33.
Notes on the General Course of the Fishing. (North Sea Investigations.)

By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 12.
Observations at Sea and in the Markets — Grimsby, Scarlwrough, Hull,

Lowestoft. (North Sea Investigations.) By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 108.
Account of a Voyage in the »Smack Albert to the Newfoundland Fishing Banks.

By W. T. Grenfell, m.r.c.s. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 143.
Causes of the Observed Distribution of Fish in the North Sea. (North Sea

Investigations.) By J. T. Cimningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv.

1895-97, p. 133.
General Keport on the Fishery Investigations. By Walter Garstang, m.a.

Internat. Fish. Investigations. Mar. Biol. Assoc. Report I, 1902-03

(Cd. 2670). 1905, p. 1.
Report on Experiments Avith Marked Fish during 1902-03. By Walter Gar-
stang, M.A. Internat. Fish. Investigations, INIar. Biol. Assoc. Report I.

1902-03 (Cd. 2670). 1905, p. 13.
Report on the Trawling Investigations, 1902-3, Avith especial reference to the

distribution of tlie Plaice. By Walter Garstang, m.a. Internat. Fish.

Investigations, Mar. Biol. Assoc. Report I. 1902-03 (Cd. 2670). 1905, p. 67.
Report on the Food of Fishes collected during 1903. By R. A. Todd, b.Sc.

Internat. Fish. Investigations, Mar. Biol. Assoc. Report I. 1902-03

(Cd. 2670). 1905, p. 227.
Physical and Biological Conditions in the North Sea. By J. T. Cunning-
ham, M.A. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 233.
Recent Experiments Relating to the Growth and Rearing of Food-fish at the

Laboratory, ii. The Rearing of Larval Fish. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 370.
Breeding of Fish in the Aquarium. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 195.
Experiments on the Rearing of Fish-LarviB in the Season of 1894. By

J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 206.
Growth of Fishes in the Aquarium. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 167.
Rearing of Fish-Larvae. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 168.
Experiments on Sea-Fish Culture. By W. Garstang, m.a. Report Brit.

Assoc, 1899.
Preliminary Experiments on the Rearing of Sea-Fish Larvae. By W.

Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. vi. 1900, p. 70.
On the First Successful Experiment with Importation of European Sea Fishes

to Australian Waters. By H. C. Dannevig. Fisheries of New South

Wales. Annual Report for 1902, II.
The Sense-Organs and Perceptions of Fishes, with Remarks on the Supply of

Bait (with Plate XX.). By W. Bateson, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i.

1889-90, p. 225.

RECORDING RESULTS OF RESEARCHES. 245

Modes in which Fish are affected by Artificial Light. By W. Bateson, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 216.
Experiments on the Production of Artificial Baits. By Frank Hughes.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, pp. 91 and 220.
'Notes on How Fish Find Food. (Report on the occupation of Table.) By

Gregg Wilson, m.a., b.sc. Report Brit. Assoc, 1893, p. 548.
Notes on the Invertebrate Fauna and Fish-food of the Bays betAveen the

Start and Exmouth. By R. A. Todd, b.Sc. Journ. M.B.A. vi. 1903,

p. 541.
The Amount of Fat in Different Fishes. By F. Hughes. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 196.
The Vernacular Names of Common Fishes. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 92.
The Regulations of the Local Sea Fisheries Committees in England and Wales.

By E. J. Allen, b.sc. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 386.
Fishing Nets, Avitli special reference to the Otter Trawl. By H. M. Kyle,

M.A., D.sc. Journ. M.B.A. vi. 1903, p. 562.

2. The Eel Family.

The Breeding of the Conger. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.,

Old Series, No. 2. 1888, p.' 245.
On the Reproduction and Development of tlie Conger. By J. T. Cunning-
ham, M.A. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 16.
On a Specimen of Leptocephalus Morisii. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 73.
Sudden Colour-changes in Conger. By W. Bateson, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 214.
The Larva of the Eel. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii.

1893-95, p. 278.
The Reproductive Maturity of the Common Eel. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 87.
Eels and Sticklebacks in Sea-water. By W. L. Calderwood. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 77.
Note on Muraena helena, Linn. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v.

1897-99, p. 91.

3. Tlie Herring Family.

Anchovies in the English Channel (with an illustration in the text). By

J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 328.
Probable Relation between Temperature and the Annual Catch of Anchovies

in the Schelde District (with Plate XXIV.). By G. H. Fowler, b.a., ph.d.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 340.
Experiments on the Relative Abundance of Anchovies off the South Coast of

England. By W. L. Calderwood. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92,

p. 268.
The Migration of the Anchovy. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 300.

246 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Ichthyological Contributions, iv. Growth of Young Herring in the Thames

Estuary. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. JS'.S. ii.

1891-92, p. 330.
On the Occiu'rence of Large Numbers of Larval Herrings at the Surface. By

Matthias Dunn. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 184.
Notes on the Herring, Long-line and Pilchard Fisheries of Plymouth

during the Winter 1889-90. By W. Roach. Journ. M.B.A. V.S. i.

1889-90, p. 382.
Notes on Herring, LongJine and Pilchard Fisheries of Plymouth. By W.

Roach. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 180.
The Spawn of the Pilchard. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

Old Series, No. 2. 1888, p. 247.
The Reproduction and Growth of the Pilchard {with Plate X.). By J. T.

Cuimingham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 151.
Year-old Pilchards. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

1891-92, p. 398.
The Life History of the Pilchard. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 148.

4. The Salmon Family.
The Great Silver Smelt, Argentina silus, Nilsson, an addition to the List of

British Fishes. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99,

p. 341.
Grayling and Loch Leven Trout in Salt Water. By W. L. Calderwood.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1891-92, p. 76.

5. Flat-fish Family.
Diagnostic characters in Flat-fishes. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ.

\m.B.A. N.S. v. 1893-95, p. 247.
The Development of the Egg in Flat-fishes and Pipe-fishes. By J. T.

Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 258.
A Treatise on the Common Sole (Solea vulgaris), considered Ijoth as an

organism and as a connnodity. Prepared for the Marine Biological

Association of the United Kingdom. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.,

Plymouth. Published by the Association. 1890 (4to, pp. 147, with

eighteen plates).
Reproductive Organs of the Common Sole. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. Old Series, No, 2. 1888, p. 248.
Ichthyological Contrilmtions. ii. On a Stage in the Metamorphosis of Solea.

By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 327.
Report on the Spawning of the Common Sole in the Ac^uarium of the Marine

Biological Association's Laboratory during April and May, 1895. By

G. W. Butler, B.A. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 3.
The Size of Mature Plaice, Turbot, and Brill on different Fishing Gromids.

(North Sea Investigations.) By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 97.
On the Pecidiarities of Plaice from different Fishing Grounds. By J. T.

Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. . N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 315.

RECOEDING RESULTS OF RESEARCHES. 247

Observations on the Natural History of Plaice. (North Sea Investigations.)

By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 15.
Proposed Restrictions on the Landing of undersized Plaice in the light of

the New Evidence. (North Sea Investigations.) By J. T. Cunning-
ham, Ai.A. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 138.
On a Dwarf Variety of the Plaice, Avith some Remarks on the Occasional

Ciliation of the Scales in that Species. (North Sea Investigations.) By

E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 194.
A Piebald Plaice. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii.

1893-95, p. 271.
Variation und Asymetrie bei Pleuronectes flesus L. By G. Duncker. Wissen.

Meeresuntersuch ii. 1900, p. 333.
The Periodic Growth of Scales in Gadidse and Pleuronectidae as an Index of

Age. By J. S. Thomson. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. vi. 1902, p. 373.
Experiments in the Transplantation of Small Plaice to the Dogger Bank. By

Walter Garstang, m.a. Internat. Fish. Investigations, Mar. Biol. Assoc.

Report i. 1902-03 (Cd. 2670). 1905, p. 45.
Preliminary Investigations on the Age and Growth-Rate of Plaice. By

William Wallace, d.sc. Internat. Fish. Investigations, Mar. Biol. Assoc.

Report I. 1902-03 (Cd. 2670). 1905, p. 199.
Note on Pleuro7iedes microcephahig, Donov. By E. W, L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 121.
Rhombus maxivius, Linn. (The Turbot). By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 399.
Note on some Supposed Hybrids between the Turbot and the Brill. (North

Sea Investigations.) By E. VV. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii,

1893-95, p. 292.
Note on Phrynorhomhus umvianilatus, Rif^so. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. V. 1897-99, p. 343.
Hippoglossiis vulgaris, Linn. (The Haliliut). By E. W. L. Holt. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 399.
On Secondary Sexual Characters in Arnoglossus. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.

Proceed. Zool. Soc. 1890, p. 540.
Note on Arnoglosius laterna, Walb. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 283.
Note on Arnoglossus GroJananni, Bonaparte. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. V. 1897-99, p. 89.
Ichthyological Contributions. i. Zeugopferus norvegicus. (Giinther.) By

J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S.'ii. 1891-92, p. 325.
Young Stages of Zeugopferus punctatus. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 202.

6. The Cod Family.
Note on Gadus Esiaurkn, Nilss. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

1891-92, p. 282.
Gadus Esmarka, Nilsson, the Norway Pout, an addition to the Fish Fauna of

the English South- Western District. By E. W. L. Holt and Matthias

Dunn. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 79.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 2. R

248 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Note on Phyeis hlennioides, Brlinn. By E, W. L. Holt and W. L. Calder-

wood. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 282.
Sense of Touch in the Rockling (Mofella). By W. Bateson, m.a. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 214.
Note on Motella cinibria, Linn. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v.

1897-99, p. 343.
Note on Raniceps raninus, Linn. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 119.
On some specimens of Molva ahyssorum, Nilss., from Iceland and Faroe.

(North Sea Investigations.) By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii.

1893-95, p. 200.
The Pelagic Post-larval Stages of the Atlantic Species of Gadus. By Johs.

Schmidt. Meddel. Komm. Havunders. Fiskeri., Bd. I. Nr. 4.
An Albino Hake (Merluccius merluccius). By, W. Garstang. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. vi. 1900, p. 275.
Motella fusca. A New British Record. By W. Garstang and F. Balfour

Browne. Journ. M.B.A. vi. 1903, p. 626.
The Periodic Growth of Scales in Gadidae as an Index of Age. By J. Stuart

Thomson, f.l.s. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. vii. 1904-06, p. 1.
Gadus Esmarkii (Nilss.) in Shallow Water. By W. Garstang. Journ.
• M.B.A. N.S. vi. 1900, p. 274.

7. The Stickleback Family.

Note on Gastrosteus pungUius, Linn. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.
N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 120.

8. Cepolidae.

Note on Cepola nibescens, Linn. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.
N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 197.

9. The Blenny Family.

Note on Lumpenus lampetraeformis, Walhaum. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 120.
Note on the Young of Blennius galerita, Linn. (Montagu's Blenny). By

L. W. Byrne. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. vi. 1902, p. 383.

10. The Lepadogasfer Family.

On Lepadogaster. By E. W. L. Holt and L. W. Byrne, b.a. Proceed. Zool.
Soc. London. 1898, p. 589.

11. The Dragonet Family.

On the Breeding of Callionymus lyra in the Marine Biological Association's
Aquarium at Plymouth. By E. W. L. Holt. Proceed. Zool. Soc.
London. 1898, p. 281.

The Egg and Larva of Callionymus lyra (with Plate V.). By J. T. Cunning-
ham, M.A. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 89.

RECOEDING RESULTS OF RESEARCHES. 249

Kote on Callionymus mactdafus, Bonaparte. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ.

M.B.A. KS. V. 1897-99, p. 90.
Note on CaUionijmus maculatus, Bonaparte. By E. W. L. Holt. Joni'n.

M.B.A. N.S. V. 1897-99, p. 343.

12. The Gohij Family.

Note on Gohius Jeffreysii, Giinther. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. V. 1897-99, p. 89.
The distribution of Onjstallogohius Nilssonii. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 158.
Note on Crystallogohius Nilssonii, Dlib. and Ivor. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 283.
Notes on Aphia pelludda, Nardo. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. V. 1897-99, p. 89.
The British and Irish Gobies Report on Sea and Inland Fisheries of Ireland

for 1901. By E. W. L. Holt and L. W. Byrne, b.a. Part II., p. 37.

Published 1903.

13. The John Dory Family.

The Habits of the Cuckoo or Boar Fish. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ.
M.B.A. Old Series, No. 2. 1888, p. 243.

1 4. Jhe Horse-Mackerel Family.

The Eeproduction of Caranx traclmrus, Linn., the Scad or Horse-Mackerel.
(North Sea Investigations.) By E. AV. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii.
1893-95, p. 190.

15. Stromateidae.

On some Young Specimens of Gentrolophus pomphilus (Art.) from the Coast
of Cornwall. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92,
p. 265.

16. Tlie Mackerel Family.

The ]\Iackerel Fishery in the West of England in 1888. By B. J. Eidge.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 72.
The Plymouth Mackerel Fishery of 1880 90. From data collected by

W. Eoach, Associate M.B.A. By W. L. Calderwood. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 4.
Ichthyological Contributions, iii. A Larval Stage of the Mackerel. By

J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 329.
Note on Scomber scomber, Linn. (The Mackerel). By E. W. L. Holt. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 396.
Eeport on the Present State of Knowledge with Eegard to the Habits and

Migrations of the Mackerel {Scomber scomber). By E. J. Allen, b.Sc.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 1.
Eecherches sur I'Histoire Naturelle du Maquereau. By W. Garstang, m.a.

Congr^s Internat. Peches Marit. Dieppe. 1898, p. 67.

250 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Preliminary Note on tlie Races and Migrations of the Mackerel {Scomber
scomber). By W. Garstang, m.a. Rep. Brit. Assoc. Bristol, 1898,
p. 902.

The Variations, Races, and Migrations of the Mackerel. By W. Garstang, m.a.
Journ. M.B.A. KS. v. 1897-99, p. 235.

17. The W sever FamUy.
Note on Trachinus draco, Linn. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.
N.S. V. 1897-99, p. 197.

18. Scorpaenidae.
Note on Sehastes norveqic^is, Ascan. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. ii. 1891-92,' p. 283.
Note on Scorpaena dactyloptera, de la Roche. By E. W. L. Holt. Jonrn.

M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 121.

19. The Gurnard, Family.
Note on Trigla ohscura, Linn. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v.

1897-99, p. 197.
Malformation in Tub {Tri(/la lucerna, Bloch.). By H. M. Kyle, d.Sc. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. vi. 1900-03, p. 617.

20. The Sea Bream. Family.
Malformation of the Mouth in the Common Sea Bream. By Walter Garstang,

M.A, Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 345.
Ray's Bream. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-

92, p. 78.
Note on Cantharus Uneatus, Mont. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. V. 1897-99, p. 89.

21. The Perch Family. '

Polyprion cernium, Val. By W. L. Calderwood. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

1891-92, p. 396.

22. Rays and Sharks.
Notes on Raia alba (Laccp). By W. L. Calderwood. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

1891-92, p. 283.
The Blonde (Raia Uanda, Holt and Calderwood, MS.), a species hitherto

confomided with R. maculata, Montagu. (North Sea Investigations).

By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 181.
On the Bottle-nosed Ray (Raia alba) and its Egg-purse. By E. W. L. Holt.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 181. "
Note on Myliobatis aquila, Linn. The Eagle-ray. By E. W. L. Holt and

W. Garstang. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 198.
l^oiQonTrygonpastinaca,'L\im. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v.

1897-99, p. 198.
Note on a Specimen of Ecliinorinus spinosus. By F. B. Stead, b.a. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 264.
Notes on Centrina Salviani (with Plate XIII.). By W. L. Calderwood.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 322.
Note on Chimaera monstrosa, Linn. By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 120.
Echinorhinus spinosus, Blain. By H. M. Kyle, u.sc. Journ. M.B.A. N.S.

vi. 1900-03, p. 623.

KECOKDING RESULTS OF RESEARCHES. 251

OYSTERS.

Oyster Culture in the River Yealm. By G. H. Fowler, b.a., Ph.d. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-62, p. 78.
Notes on Oyster-culture. Ft, I. Oyster-farming in Holland. Pt. II. Recent

Legislation relative to English Oyster Fisheries (with Plate XXI.). By

G. H. Fowler, b.a., Ph.d. ' Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 257.
The Generative Organs of the Oyster. Abstract of a paper by Dr. P. P. C.

Hoek (mth Plates XXII. and XXIII.). Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-

90, p. 268.

CRABS AND LOBSTERS.

On the Development of Palinurus vulgaris, the Rock Lobster or Sea-Crayfish

(with Plates VIII. and IX.). By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 141.
Recent Experiments relating to the Growth and Rearing of Food-fish at the

Laboratory. 1. The Rearing of Lobster Larvae. By W. F. R. Weldon, m.a.

and G. H. FoAvler, b.a., ph.d. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 367.
The Lobster Fishing of one Boat in Plymouth District from May 1st to

September 29th, 1890. By W. L. Calderwood. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

1891-92, p. 15.
The Reproduction of the Lobster. By E. J. Allen, B.Sc. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 60.
Contributions to the Knowledge of the Natural History of the Lobster and

Crab. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. Roy. Inst. Cornwall, vol.

xliv. 1898.
Larval Lobsters at the Surface. By E. AY. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v.

1897-99, p. 196.
Young Lobsters. By W. L. Calderwood. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92,

p. 284.
On the Early Post-Larval Stages of the Crab {Cancer par/urus), and on the

afiinity of that Species to Atelecyclus heterodon. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a.

Proceed. Zool. Soc. 1898, p. 204.
Notes on the Senses and Habits of some Crustacea. By W. Bateson, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 211.
The Plague of Octopus on the South Coast, and its effect on the Crab and

Lobster Fisheries. By W. Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. vi.

1900, p. 260.
The Protection of Crabs and Lobsters. By E. J. Allen, b.Sc. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 182.

SPONGES.

Report on the Sponge Fishery of Florida and the Artificial Culture of Sponges.
By E. J. AUen, b.Sc. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 188. Sup-
plement, p. 289.

Note on Projects for the Impro^'ement of Sponge Fisheries. By G. Bidder.
• Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 195.

252 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Morphological and Biological Publications.

FISHES.

Contractility of the Iris in Fishes and Cephalopods. By W. Bateson, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 215.
The " Eecessus Orbitalis," an Accessory Visual Organ in Pleuronectid Fishes,

(North Sea Investigations). By E. W, L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N'.S. iii.

1893-95, p. 185.
The Palpebral and Oculomotor Apparatus in Fishes : observations on Morpho-
logy and Development. By N. Bishop Harman, b.a., m.b. Journ. Anat.

and Phys., vol. xxxiv. 1899.
The Air-Bladder and Ear of British Clupeoid Fishes. By W. G. Ridewood.

Journ. Anat. and Phys., vol. xxvi.
Studies in Teleostean Morphology from the Marine Laboratory, Cleethorpes.

By E. W. L. Holt. Proceed. Zool. Soc. 1894, p. 413.
Investigations on the Function of the Electrical Organ of the Skate (pre-
liminary note). By Prof. Burdon Sanderson, f.r.s., and F. Gotch, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 74.
The Head Kidney of Teleostean Fishes (with Plate I.). By W. L. Calder-

wood. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 43.
On the Coloration of the Skins of Fishes, especially Pleuronectidse. By

J. T. Cunningham, m.a., and C. A. MacMunn, m.d. Phil. Trans. Roy.

Soc, vol. clxxxiv. B. 1893, p. 765.
Researches on the Coloration of the Skins of Flat Fishes. By J. T. Cunning-
ham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. KS. iii. 1893-95, p. 111.
Additional Evidence on the Influence of Light in producing Pigments on the

Lower side of Flat Fishes. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

KS. iv. 1895-97, p. 53.
An Experiment concerning the Absence of Colour from the Lower Sides

of Flat Fishes. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Zoologisclier Anzeiger.

1891, p. 27.
On an Adult Specimen of the Common Sole with Symmetrical Eyes. Avith a

Discussion of its Bearing on Ambicoloration. (North Sea Investigations.)

By E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 188.
An Observation of the Colour-changes of a Wrasse, Labruii inaculatus,

Donovan. By E. W. L. Holt and L. W. Byrne. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v.

1897-99, p. 193.
Colour-changes in Coitus huhalis. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 458.
On the Composition and Variations of the Pelvic Plexus in Acanthias

vulgaris. By R. C Punnett, m.a. Proc. Roy. Soc. 68, p. 140, and 69,

p. 2.
On the Anatomy of Centrophorus calceus {crepidalhus Bocage and Capello)

GUnther. By W. Woodland. Proceed. Zool. Soc, London, 1906, pp.

865-86.

KECORDING RESULTS OF RESEARCHES. 253

PROTOCHORDATA.

Prelimininary note on a new tlieory of the Phylogeny of the Chordata. By

W. Garstang, m.a. Zoolog. Anzeiger. 1894, p. 122.
Report on the Tunicata of Plymouth (with Plate I.). By W. Garstang, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 47.
On some Ascidians from the Isle of Wight, a Study in Variation and

Nomenclature (with Plates VI. and VII.). By W. Garstang, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 119.
Note on a New and Primitive Type of Compound Ascidian. By W.

Garstang, m.a. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1891.
Observations on Ascidians (Report on the Occupation of Table). By Arthur

Willey, B.sc. Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1892.
The Development of Stigmata in Ascidians. By W. Garstang, m.a. Proceed.

Roy. Soc, vol. Ii. 1892, p. 505.
Note on Salensky's account of the development of the Stigmata in Pyrosoma.

By W. Garstang, m.a. Trans. Liverpool Biol. Soc, vol. vii. 1892-93,

p. 245.
Outlines of a new Classification of the Tunicata. By W. Garstang, m.a.

Rep. Brit. Assoc, Ipswich. 1895, }>. 718.
Budding in Tunicata. By W. Garstang, m.a. Science Progress, vol. iii. 1895.
Studies on the Protochordata. By Arthur Willey, K.Sc. Quart. Journ.

Micr. Sci., vol. xxxiv. 1893, p. 317.
On a neAv Genus of Synascidian from Japan. By Asajiro Oka, of the

Imperial University of Tokio, and Arthur Willey, b Sc. Quart. Journ.

Micr. Sci., vol. xxxiii. 1892, p. 313.
Phoronis at Plymouth. By W. Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

1891-92, p. 77.
On a Tornaria found in British Seas (with Plates VII. and VIII.). By

G. C. Bourne, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 63.

MOLLUSCS.

On the Gastric Gland of Mollusca and Decapod Crustacea ; its Structure and

Functions. By C. A. MacMunn, m.a., m.d. Proceed. Roy. Soc, vol.

Ixiv. 1899, p. 436.
Notes on the Minute Structure of the Nervous System of the Mollusca. By

J. Gilchrist, m.a., ph.d. Journ. Linn. Soc, vol. xxvi. 1897, p. 179.
On the Aplacophorous Amphineura of British Seas. By W. Garstang, m.a.

Proceed. Malacol. Soc, vol. ii. Oct., 1896, p. 123.
Sound heard by a Lamellibranch {Anomia). By W. Bateson, m.a. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 217.
On the Gastropod Colpodaspis pusilla of Michael Sars. By W. Garstang, m.a.

Proceed. Zool. Soc. 1894, p. 664.
On the Anatomy of Trochus. By W. B. Randies. Report Brit. Assoc

Glasgow. 1901, p. 377.
Some Observations on the Anatomy and Affinities of the Trochidae. By

W. B. Randies, b.sc. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. xlviii. 1904, p. 33.

254 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

A complete list of the Opistliobranchiate Mollusca found at Plymouth, with

further Observations on their Morphology, Colours, and Natural History

(with Plates XXVII., XXVIII.). By W. Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 399.
Report on the Nudibranchiate Mollusca of Plymouth Sound. By W.

Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i., p. 173.
On tlie Occurrence of the Nudibranch Hancockia at Plymouth. By F. W.

Gamble, b.Sc. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 193.
PleuropliijlUdia Loveni, Bergh. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 194.
On the Structure and Habits of Jorunna Johnsfoni. By W. Garstang, m.a.

Conchologist, vol. ii, 1893, p. 1.
On the Relations of Hesse's Doto uncinata to the Genus Hancockia. By

W. Garstang, m.a. Conchologist, vol. ii. 1893, p. 110.
On Doris maculata, a new species of Nudibranchiate Mollusk found at

Plymouth. By W. Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97.

p. 167.
CorypheUa smaragdina. By J. C. Sunnier. Journ. INI.B.A. N.S. iii.

1893-95, p. 336.
Cuthona ? aurantiaca. By J. C. Sumner. Journ. INI.B.A. N.S. iv.

1895-97, p. 75.
Notes on Some British Nudibranchs. By C. Eliot. Journ. M.B.A. N.S.

vii. 1904-06, p. 333.
On the Nematocysts of Solids. By G. H. Grosvenor, b.a. Proceed. Roy.

Soc, Ixxii. 1903, p. 462.
On the Doris Planata of Alder and Hancock. By Sir C. N. E. Eliot.

Proceed. Malacol. Soc, vol. vi. 1904, p. 180.
Notes on Two Rare British Nudibranchs, Hero Formosa, var. Arhorescens, and

Staurodoris mandata. By Sir C. N. E. Eliot. Proceed. Malacol. Soc,

vol. vi. 1905, p. 239.
The Pigments of Aplysia punctata. By C. A. MacMunn, m.a., m.d. Journ.

Physiol., vol. xxiv. 1899, p. 1.
Note on a British Cephalopod {Illex ehlanae, Ball). By W. E. Hoyle, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 189.
Note on a Large Squid (Ommastrej^hus pteropus, Stp.). By E. S. Goodrich.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 314.
Specialised Organs seen in Action (Tentacles of Sepia). By J. T. Cunning-
ham, M.A. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 166.
Note on Sepia elegans, d'Orlj. By E. W. L. Holt and W. I. Beaumont.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 343.

POLYZOA.

On tlie Regeneration of Lost Parts in the Polyzoa. By S. F. Harmer, m.a.

Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1890.
On the British Species of Grisia. By S. F. Harmer, m.a. Quart. Journ.

Micr. Sci., vol. xxxii. 1891, p. 127.
On the Occurrence of EmbrjTjnic Fission in Cyclostomatous Polyzoa. By

S. F. Harmer, m.a. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxiv. 1893, p. 199.

EECOKDING RESULTS OF EESEARCHES. 255

Note on Now or Rare British Marine Polyzoa. By S. F. Harmcr, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 51.
Un the Development of Tubulipora, and on some British and Northern Species

of this Genus. By S. F. Harmer, m.a. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. vol., xli.

p. 73.
The Embryology of the Polyzoa. By T. H. Taylor, m.a. Report Brit. Assoc.

1899.
On the Early Stages in the Development of Flustrella liispida (Fabricius),

and on the Existence of a " Yolk Nucleus " in the Egg of this Form.

By R. M. Pace. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 1. 1906, p. 435.

CRUSTACEA.

On some Rare and Interesting Crustacea from the Dogger Bank collected by
E. W. L. Holt, Esq. By Thomas Scott, f.l.s. Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Hist. (6)xiii. 1894, p. 412.

The Crustacea of Devon and Cornwall. By A. M. Norman, f.r.s., and
T. Scott, LL.D. London, 1906, p. 1.

Note on the Function of the Spines of the Crustacean Zooea (with Plate XVI,)
By W. F. R. Weldon, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 169.

The Habits and Respiratory Mechanism of Corystes cassivelaunus. (Contribu-
tions to Marine Bionomics, I.) By W. Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.
N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 223.

The Functions of Antero-Lateral Denticulations of the Cara})ace in Sand-
burrowing Crabs. (Contributions to Marine Bionomics, II.) By W.
Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 396.

The Systematic Features, Habits, and Respiratory Phenomena of Portumnus
nasuhis (Latreille). Contributions to Marine Bionomics, III.) By W.
Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 402.

On some modifications of Structure subservient to Respiration in Decapod
Crustacea Avhich burrow in Sand. By W. Garstang, m.a. Quart. Journ.
Micr. Sci., vol. xL p. 211.

On the Function of certain Diagnostic Characters of Decapod Crustacea. By
W. Garstang, m.a. Rep. Brit. Assoc, Liverpool, 1896, p. 828.

On the Habits of Pinnotheres i^isum. By A. D. Darbishire. Report Brit.
Assoc. Bradford. 1900, p. 399.

Some Points in the Histology of the Nervous System of the Embryonic
Lobster. By E. J. Allen, b.Sc. Proceed. Roy. Soc, vol. Iv. 1894, p. 407.

Studies on the Nervous System of Crustacea. By E. J. Allen, b.Sc. I. Some
Nerve-elements of the Embryonic Lobster. II. The Stomatogastric System
of Astacus and Homarus. III. On the Beading of Nerve-fibres and on
End-swellings. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. vol. xxxvi., 1894, p. 461.
IV. Further Observations on the Nerve-elements of the Embryonic
Lobster. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxix. 1896, p. 33.

Nerve-elements of the Embryonic Lobster. By E. J. Allen, B.Sc. Journ.
M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 208.

Additional Oliservations on tlie Nerve-elements of the Eml)ryonic Lobster.
By E. J. Allen, b.sc Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 70.

256 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Das Nervensystem von Garcinus maenas, i., ii., and iii. Von A. Bethe, Ph.d.

Archiv fur Mikros. Anat., 1., 1897, pp. 460 and 589 ; and li., 1898, p. 383.
The Formation of the Germ Layers in Crangon vulgaris. By Professor

Weldon, F.R.s. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. vol. xxxiii. 1892, p. 343.
The Coelom and Nephridia of Palaemon serratus (with Plates XIII. to XV.).

By W. F. R. Weldon, M.A. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 162.
The Renal Organs of Certain Decapod Crustacea. Py Professor Weldon, f.r.s.

Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxii. 1891, p. 279.
The Colour-physiology of Higher Crustacea. By F. Keeble, d.Sc, and F. W.

Gamble, d.sc ''Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Ser. B, vol. 196. 1904, p. 295.
On the Nauplius Eye persisting in some Decapoda. By M. Robinson. Quart.

Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxiii. 1892, p. 283.
The Minute Structure of the Gills of Palaemonetes varians. By E. J.

Allen, B.sc. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxiv. 1892, p. 75.
Preliminary Account of the Nephridia and Body-cavity of the Larva of

Palaemonetes varians. By E. J. Allen, b.Sc. Proceed. Roy. Sci., vol. Hi.

1892, p. 338.
The Nephridia and Body-cavity of some Decapod Crustacea. By E. J.

Allen, B.Sc. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. Vol. xxxiv. 1892-93, p. 403.
A Garcinus with a Right-handed Walking-leg on the Left Side of the

Abdomen. By A. Bethe, Ph.d. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97,

p. 144.
Ein Garcinus maenas (Taschenbrebs) mit einem rechten Schreitbein an der

linken Seite des Abdomens. Ein Beitrag zur Vererbungstheorie. By

A. Bethe, ph.d. Arch. Entwick. mech. iii. 1896, p. 301.
Metamorphoses of the Decapod Crustaceans Aegean {Crangon) fasciatus.

Risso and Aegeon {Crangon) trispinosus (Hailstone). By Robert Gur-

ney, b.a., f.l.s. Proceed. Zool. Soc. London. 1903, ii. p. 24.
The Larvae of Certain British Crangonid*. By R. Gurney, b.a. Journ.

M.B.A. vi. 1903, p. 595.
Palaemonetes varians in Plymouth. By W. F. R. A\'eldon, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 459.
The Metamorphosis of Gorystes cassivelaunus (Pennant). By R. Gurney, b.a.

Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xlvi. p. 461.
Hermit Crabs and Anemones. By G. H. Fowler, Ph.d. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 75.
On the Development of Nebalia. By Margaret Robinson. Quart. Journ.

Micr. Sci., vol. 50. 1906, p. 383.
Notes on Mijsis longicornis, Milne-Edwards, and Mysidopsis angusta, G. O. Sars.

By E. W. L. Holt and W. I. Beaumont, b.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v.
1897-99, p. 344.
On Siriella armata (M.-Edw.) and the reputed occurrence of S. frontalis
(M.-Edw.) in British Seas. By E. W. L. Holt and W. I. Beaumont, b.a.
Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), iii., 1899, p. 151.
Monstrilla Helgolandica, Claus, at Plymouth. By R. Gurney, b.a. Journ.
M.B.A. vi. 1903, p. 627.

RECORDING RESULTS OF RESEARCHES. 257

On the Early Development of Cirrliipedia. By T, T. Groom, m.a. Proceed.

Roy. Soc, vol. lii. 1892, p. 158.
The Distribution of Unciola crenatipalmata, Bate. By W. Garstang, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 119.
Report on the Pelagic Copepoda collected at Plymouth in 1 888-89 (with Plates

XL and XII.). By G. C. Bourne, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90,

p. 144.
The Movements of Copepoda. By Prof. E. W. MacBride, m.a. Quart. Journ.

Micr. Sci., vol. xlii. 1899, p. 505.
A list of the Parasitic Copepoda of Fish obtained at Plymouth. By

P. W. Bassett-Smith. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 155.
Notes on the Parasitic Copepoda of Fish obtained at Plymouth, with descrip-
tions of New Species. By P. W. Bassett-Smith. Ann. and Mag. Nat.

Hist. (6) vol. xviii. 1896, p. 8.
Sur un Copepode nouveau parasite de Polycirrus aurantiacus, Grube.

E. Brumpt. Comptes rendus. June 21, 1897.

ANNELIDS.

The Incubation of the Skate-leech, Pontohdella muricata, Linn. By

E. W. L. Holt. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 195.
Notes on Pontohdella muricata. By the Hon. Henry Gibbs. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. V. 1897-99, p. .330.
Contributions to the Anatomy and Histology of Thalassema neptuni, Gaertner.

By H. L. Jameson. Jena Fischer. 1899.
Notes on the Marine Oligochaeta of Plymouth. By F. E. Beddard, m.a.

Journ M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-93, p. 69.
Certain Points in the Structure of Glitellio. By F. E. Beddard, m.a. Proceed.

Zool. Soc. 1888, p. 485.
On Some British Species of Pachydrilus. By F. E. Beddard, m.a. Proceed.

Roy. Phys. Soc. Edinburgh. 1889.
The Nephridium of Lumbricus, with Remarks on the Nephridia of other

Chaetopods. By W. B. Benham, d.Sc. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,

vol. xxxii. 1891, p. 293.
The Amphinomidae, Apliroditidae, Polynoidae, and Sigalionidae of Plymouth

and the English Channel. By T. V. Hodgson. Journ. M.B.A. N.S.

vi. 1900, p. 218.
On the Nephridia of the Polychaeta, iii. By E. S. Goodrich. Quart. Journ.

Micr. Sci., xliii. 1900, p. 699.
List of Polychaets taken at Plymouth. (Report on the Occupation of Table.)

By Florence Buchanan, b.Sc. Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1892.
The Anatomy and Classification of the Arenicolidae, with some observations

on their post-larval stages. By F. W. Gamble and J. H. Ashworth.

Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xliii. 1900, p. 419.
Report on Nerves of Arenicola, Nereis, etc. By F. W. Gamble, M.Sc. Report

Brit. Assoc. 1898, p. 584.
The Post-larval Stage of Arenicola marina. By W. B. Benham, D.Sc. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 48.

258 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

On a Blood-forming Organ in the Larva of Magelona. By Florence Buchanan,

B.Sc. Report. Brit. Assoc. 1895, p. 469.
Pallasia murata, n. sp. : A New British Sabellarian. By E. J. Allen, d.Sc.

Jonrn. M.B.A. N.S. vii. 1904-06, p. 299.
Observations on the Habits of the Onuphiclae. By A. T. Watson. Trans.

Liverpool Biol. Soc, vol. xvii. 1903, p. 303.
The Anatomy of Poecilochaetus. By E. J. Allen, d.sc. Quart. Journ, Micr.

Sci., vol. xlviii. 1904, p. 79.
Notes on the Anatomy of Dinopldhis (with Plates IX. and X.). By

S. F. Harmer, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 119.
On the Structure of the Nephridia of Dinopliilus. By Cresswell Shearer.

Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 1. 1906, pp. 517.

NEMERTINES AND TURBELLARIA.

A list of the Nemertines of Plymouth Sound. By T. H. Riches, b.a. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 1.
A New British Nemertine. By T. H. Riches, b.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

1891-92, p. 284.
Description of a New Species of Nemertine. By J. C. Sumner. Ann. and

Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), vol. xiv. 1894.
On Two New British Nemerteans. By R. C. Punnett, m.a. Quart. Journ.

Micr. Sci., xliv. 1901, p. 547.
Contributions to a KnoAvledge of British Marine Turbellaria. By F.W. Gamble,

B.Sc. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxiv. 1892-93, p. 433.
The Turbellaria of Plymouth Sound and the Neighbourhood. By F. W.

Gamble, b.Sc. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 30.

ECHINODERMS.

Notes on the Echinoderms collected by Mr. Bourne in Deep "Water off tlie
South-west of Ireland in H.M.S. Research. By F. Jeffrey Bell, m.a.
Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 324.

The Organogeny of Asterina gibbosa. By E. W. MacBride, m.a. Proceed.
Roy. Soc, vol. liv. 1893, p. 431.

The Development of Asterina gibbosa. By E. W. MacBride, m.a. Quart.
Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxviii. 1895-96, p. 339.

Report on the Work done during the Occupation of the British Association
Table at Plymouth, June, 1905. (Development of OpMofhrix fragilis).
By E. W. MacBride, f.r.s. Report Brit. Assn. South Africa, 1905,
p. 183.

The Growth of the Oocyte in Antedon : a Morphological Study in Cell-
Metabolism. By G.'C. Chubb, u.sc. Proceed. Roy. Soc. B. 519. 1906,
p. 384. See also Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Ser. B., vol. 198. 1906, p. 447.

On some Bipinnariae from the English Channel. By W. Garstang, m.a.
Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxv. 1894, p. 451.

On the Echinoderm Fauna of Plymouth. By J. C. Sumner. Report. Brit-
Assoc. 1895, p. 471.

RECORDING RESULTS OF RESEARCHES. 259

The Development of Ecliinoids. Part I. The Larvpe of Echinus miliaris and

Echinus esculentus. By Prof. E. W. MacBride, m.a. Quart. Journ. Micr.

Sci., vol. xlii. 1899, p. 335.
The Development of Echinus esculentus. By E. W. MacBride. Proc. Roy.

Soc, 68, p. 268. Also Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc, 1903, p. 285.
The Rearing of Larvae of Echinidae. By Prof. E. W. MacBride, m.a. Report

Brit. Assoc, 1899.
Notes on the Rearing of Echinoid Larvae. By Prof. E. W. MacBride, m.a.

Jonrn. M.B.A., vol. vi. 1900, p. 94.
On some Parasites found in Echinus esculentus^ L. By A. E. Shipley. Quart.

Journ. Micr. Sci., xliv. 1901, p. 281.
Notiz liber die Excretion der Holothurien. By P. Barthels, ph.d. Zool.

Anzeiger. 1895, p. 493.
On Cucumaria Montagui, Fleming. By A. M. Norman, f.r.s. Ann. Mag.

Nat. Hist. Ser. 7, vol xvi. 1905, p. 352.
Note on Two Species of Cucumaria from Plymouth, hitherto confused as

C. Montagui (Fleming) : C. Normani, n. sp., and C. Saxicola (Brady

and Robertson). By S. Pace. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. vii. 1904-06,

p. 305.

COELENTERATES.

Beitrage zur KenntnLs der Spermatogenese bei den Colenteraten. By W. M.

Aders, Ph.D. Zeitsch. Wiss. Zool., vol. 74. 1893, p. 81.
Tealia tuherculata, Cocks : a Study in Synonymy (with Plate XIX,). By

J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. p. 205.
Some preliminary Notes on the Anatomy and Habits of Alcyoniuvi digitatum.

By S. J. Hickson, m.a. Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1892.
The Anatomy of Alcyonium digitatum. By Prof. S. J. Hickson, f.r.s. Quart.

Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxvii. 1894-95, p 343.
Report on Mr. J. H. Wandsworth's collection of material for the Study of the

Embryology of Alcyonium. By Prof. S. J. Hickson, f.r.s. Report

Brit. Assoc. 1898, p. 585.
Notes on the Maturation of the Ovum of Alcyonium digitatum. By ]\I. D.

Hill, M.A. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xliv. 1905, p. 493.
Virgulanamimhilis. By W. P. ]\Larshall. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95,

p. 335.
Notes on the Hydroids of Plymouth (with Plate XXVI. ). By G. C.

Bourne, M.A. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 321.
Tektonische Studien an Hydroidpolypen. Von Hans Driesch. Jenaische

Zeitschrift. Vols. xxiv. and xxv.
On some Points in the Histology and Development of Myriothela phrygia.

By W. B. Hardy, b.a. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxii. 1891,

p. 505.
Notes on Plymouth Hydroids. By Prof. C. C. Nutting. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 146.
Notes on the Reproduction of Plumularian Hydroids. By Prof. C. C. Nutting.

American Naturalist, Nov., 1«95, p. 966.

260 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Notes on Plymouth Hydroids. By Prof. C. C. Nutting. Bull. Lab. Nat.

Hist. Iowa. Vol. iv., No. 1, p. 1,
On Three New Species of Hydroids and one new to Britain. By Prof. C. C.

Nutting. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) i. 1898, p. 362.
On Tuhulaiia crocea in Plymouth Sound. By E. T. Browne, b.a. Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. V. 1897-99, p. 54.
On British Hydroids and Medusae. By E. T. Browne, b.a. Proceed. Zool.

Soc. London. 1896, part ii. p. 459.
On British Medusae. By E. T. Browne, b.a. Proceed. Zool. Soc. London.

1897, p. 816.
On Keeping Medusae Alive in an Aquarium. By E. T. Browne, b.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 176.
SapTienia mirabiHs, Haeckel. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 194.
On a Species of Siphonophore observed at Plymouth. By J. T. Cunning-
ham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 212.
Muggkea atlantica. By J. T. Cunningham, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

'l891-92, p. 398.
On the Distribution and the Migrations of Mtigr/icea Atlantica, Cunningham,

in the English Channel, the Irish Sea, and off the South and West

Coasts of Ireland in 1904. By L. H. Gough, th.d., Conseil Perm.

Internat. pour I'Explor. d. 1. Mer. Publications ■ de Circonstance, No.

29. 1905, p. 1.

SPONGES.

Notes on Plymouth Sponges. By George Bidder. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. vi.

1902, p. 376.
Note on a Sieve-like Membrane across the Oscula of a Species of Leucosolenia.

By E. A. Minchin, m.a. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxiii. 1892,

p. 251.
The Characters and Synonymy of the British Species of Sponges of the Genus

Leucosolenia. By E. A. Minchin, m.a. Proceed, Zool. Soc. Lond.

vol. ii. 1904, p. 349.
The Collar-cells of Heterocoela. By George Bidder. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,

vol. xxxviii. 1895-96, p. 9.
The Skeleton and Classification of Calcareous Sponges. By George Bidder.

Proceed. Roy. Soc, vol. Ixiv. 1898, p. 61.
Studies in Spicule Formation. Parts i.-iv. By W. Woodland. Quart.

Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xlix. 1905, pp. 231 and 533.
Studies in Spicule Formation. By W. Woodland, v. — The Scleroblastic

Development of the Spicules in Ophiuroidea and Echinoidea, and in the

Genera Antedon and Synapta. vi. — The Scleroblastic Development of

the Spicules in some Mollusca, and in one Genus of Colonial Ascidians.

Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. Ii. 1907, pp. 31-53.
A Preliminary Consideration as to the possible Factors concerned in the

Production of the various Forms of Spicules. By W. Woodland. Quart.

Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. Ii. 1907, pp. 55-79.

EECOEDING KESULTS OF RESEARCHES. 261

PROTOZOA

Contributions to the Life-History of the Foraminifera. By J. J. Lister, m.a.

Phil. Trans. Roy. 8oc. Vol. clxxxvi. 1895, p. 40L
The Foraminifera of the Exe Estuary. By R. H. Worth. Journ. M.B.A. vi.

1902, p. 336.
Observations on the Gregarines of Holothurians. By E. A. Minchin, b.a.

Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxiv. 1893, p. 279.
Life History of Sporozoa. By H. M. Woodcock, b.Sc. Brit. Assoc. Report,

Belfast, 1902.
On Myxosporidia in Flat-fish. By H. M. Woodcock, b.sc. Report for 1903

on the Lancashire Sea Fisheries Laboratory, p. 46.
On Cystobia irregularis (Minch.) and Allied " Neogamous " Gregarines. By

H. M. Woodcock, b.Sc Arch. Zool. Exper. et Gi^n. Notes at Revue,

1904, No. 8.
The Life-Cycle of " Cyf<fobia" irregularis (Minch.), together with Observations

on other " Neogamous " Gregarines. By H. M. AVoodcock, b.Sc. Quart.

Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 1. 1906, p. 1.

FAUNISTIC AND GENERAL PAPERS.

Preliminary Report upon the Fauna and Flora of Plymouth Sound. By Walter

Heape, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. Old Series, No. 2. 1888, p. 194.
Notes on the Marine Invertebrate Fauna of Plymouth for 1892. By

W. Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 333.
Faunistic Notes at Plymouth during 1893-94. I. Faunistic Records, p. 212.

II. Notes on the Breeding Seasons of Marine Animals at Plymouth,

p. 222. III. Materials for a Calendar of the Floating Fauna, p. 229. By

W. Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95.
On some New or Rare Marine Animals discovered on the Coast of Devonshire.

By W. Garstang, m.a. Trans. Devon. Assoc. 1892, p. 377.
Notes on the Plankton observed at Plymouth during June, July, August, and

September, 1892. By E. J. Bles, b.sc Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii.

1891-92, p. 340.
Faunistic Notes, January to June, 1895. By E. J. Allen, b.sc Journ.

M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97,. p 48.
Notes on Dredging and Trawling work during the latter half of 1895. By

E. J. Allen, b.sc Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 164.
Notes on the Pelagic Fauna at Plymouth, August-December, 1895. By

T. V. Hodgson. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 173.
On the Changes in the Pelagic Fauna of Plymouth during September, 1893.

and 1895. By E. T. Browne, b.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97,

p. 168.
On the Pelagic Fauna of Plymouth, September, 1897. By E. T. Browne, b.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 186.
On the Fauna and Bottom-deposits near the 30-fathom line from the Eddystone

to Start Point. With seven Tables and sixteen Charts. By E. J. Allen,

b.Sc. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99, p. 365.

262 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

The Fauna of the Salcombe Estuary. By E. J. Allen, d.Sc, and R. A. Todd, b.Sc.

Jourh. M.B.A. N.S. vi. 1900, p. 151.
The Fauna of the Exe Estuary. By E. J. Allen, d.sc, and R. A. Todd, B.ac.

Journ. M.B.A. :N\S. vi. 1902, p. 295.
Plymouth Marine Invertebrate Fauna : Being Notes of the Local Distri])ution

of Species occurring in the Neighbourhood. Compiled from the Records

of the Laboratory of the Marine Biological Association. Journ. M.B.A.

N.S. vii. 1904-06, p. 155.
Report of a Trawling Cruise in H.M.S. Be^earch off the South-west coast of

Ireland. By G. C. Bourne, m.a., with addendum by the Rev. Canon

Norman, f.r.s. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 306.
Report on the Surface Collections made by Mr. W. T. Grenfell in the North

Sea and West of Scotland (with Plate XXV.). By G. C. Bourne, m.a.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 376.
Report on the Surface Drift of the English Channel and Neighbouring Seas

for 1897. By W. Garstang, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. v. 1897-99.

p. 199.
Physical Investigations. By H. N. Dickson. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92,

pp. 159, 272.
Notes on Meteorological Observations at Plymouth. By H. N. Dickson.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. ii. 1891-92, p. 171.
Microscopic Marine Organisms in the Science of Hydrography. B}^ Prof.

P. T. Cleve. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iv. 1895-97, p. 381.
Plankton and Physical Conditions of the English Channel. First Report of

the Committee, consisting of Prof. E. Ray Lankester (Chairman), Prof.

W. A. Herdman, Mr. H. N. Dickson, and Mr. W. Garstang (Secretary),

appointed to make Periodic Investigations of the Plankton and Physical

Conditions of the English Channel during 1899. Report Brit. Assoc. 1899.
Notes on the Physical Conditions existing within the Line from Start Point

to Portland. By H. M. Kyle, d.sc. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. vi. 1903,

p. 528.
Report on the Physical Conditions in the English Channel, 1903. By

Donald Matthews. Internat. Fish. Investigations. Mar. Biol. Assoc.

Report I, 1902-03. (Cd. 2670) 1905, p. 289.
Report on the Plankton of the English Channel, 1903. By Lewis H.

Gough, rn.D. Internat. Fish. Investigations. Mar. Biol. Assoc. Report I.

1902-03 (Cd. 2670). 1905, p. 325.
On the Oxidation of Ammonia in Sea Water. By G. P. Darnell-Smith.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. iii. 1893-95, p. 304.
On the Action of Nicotine on Certain Invertebrates. By Marion Greenwood.

Journ. Physiol., vol. xi. 1890, p. 573.
Notes on some Animal Colouring Matters. By C. A. MacMunn, m.a., m.d.

Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 55.
Contributions to Animal Chromatology. By C. A. MacMunn, m.a., m.d.

Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxx. 1890, p. 51.
Photogenic Bacteria. By J. E. Barnard. Trans. Jenner Inst. Preven. Med.

1899, ser. ii. p. 81.

RECORDING RESULTS OF RESEARCHES, 263

VARIATION.

The Variations occurring in Certain Decapod Crustacea. I. Crangon vulgaris.
By W, F. R. "Weldon, m.a. Proceed. Roy. Soc, vol. xlvii., p. 445.

Certain Correlated A'ariations in Crangon vulgaris. By Professor Weldon,
F.R.s. Proceed. Roy. 8oc. vol. li. 1892, p. 1.

Certain Correlated Variations in Carcitius maenas. By Professor Weldon,
F.R s. Proceed. Roy. Soc, vol. liv. 1893, p. 318.

An Attempt to Measure the Death-rate due to Selective Destruction of
Garcmus maenas, with Respect to a Particular Dimension. By Prof.
Weldon, f.r.s. Proceed. Roy. Soc. vol. Ivii. 1895, p. 360.

Remarks on Variation in Aninaals and Plants. By Prof. Weldon, f.r.s.
Proceed. Roy. Soc. vol. Ivii, 1895, p. 379.

Presidential Address to the Zoological Section (on Natural Selection and
Variation). By Professor Weldon, f.r.s. Report Brit. Assoc. 1898.

On the Variation of the Tentaculocysts of Aurelia aurita. By E, T. BroAvne,
B.A, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxvii, 1894-95, p. 245.

Variation in Aurelia aurita. By E. T. Browne. Biometrica, Vol. 1, No. 1,
page 90.

On the Variation of Haliclijsfus ocforadiatic^. By E. T. Browne, b.a. Quart.
Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxxviii. 1895-96, p. 1.

Preliminary Report of the Results of Statistical and Ichthyological Investiga-
tions made at the Plymouth Laboratory. By Georg Duncker, Ph.d.
Journ, M.B,A, N.S, v. 1897-99, p. 172,

Quantitative Studies in the Evolution of Pecten. III. Comparison of Fecfen
opercularis from three localities of the British Isles. By C. B, Daven-
port. Proceed. American Acad. Arts and Sci., vol. xxxix. 1903, p. 123.

Evolution without ^Mutation. By C. B. Davenport. Journ. Experim. Zool.,
vol. ii. 1905, p. 137.

Botanical Publications.

The Flora of Plymouth Sound and Adjacent Waters (with a woodcut). By

Prof. T. Johnson, b.Sc. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90, p. 286.
On the Systematic Position of the Dictyotaceae, with special reference to the

Genus Didijopteris, Lamour. By. Prof. T. Johnson, b.Sc. Journ. Linn.

Soc. Botany, vol. xxvii. 1890, p. 463.
Studies in the Dictyotaceae. III. The Periodicity of the Sexual Cells in

Didyota (Uchotoma. By J. LI. Williams. Annals of Botany, vol. xix.

1905, p. 531.
Observations on Brown and Red Sea-weeds. By Prof. T. Johnson. Rep.

Brit. Assoc. 1890.
On the Structure of the Thallus of Delesseria sanguinea (with Plates XVII.

and XVIIL). By M. C, Potter, m.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i. 1889-90,

p. 171.
The Callosities of NitophyUum versicolor. By Prof. T, Johnson, Journ.

Roy. Dublin Soc. 1892.

NEW SEltlES. — VOL. VIII. XO. 2. S

264 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS.

Observations on the Phaeozoosporeae. By Professor T. Johnson. Ann. Bot.,

vol. V. 1891.
Halosphaera viridis, Schmidt. By H. Thompson, b.a. Journ. M.B.A. N.S. i.

1889-90, p. 341.
The Polymorphy of Cutleria imdtifida. By A. H. Cluircl), b.a. Ann. Bot.,

vol. xii. No. 45. 1898, p. 75.
Algologieal Notes, by G. Brebner. Jonrn. M.B.A. N.8. iv. 1895-97,

pp. 179, 286.
On some End<)]^)hytic Algae. By A. D. Cotton. Journ. Linn. Soc. Botany,

vol. xxxvii. 1906, p. 288.

[ 2G5 ]

List of Institutions which have been supplied with specimens of
marine animals and plants by the Marine Biological Associa-
tion during two years ending 31st May, 1907.

I.— UNIVERSITIES, UNIVERSITY COLLEGES, AND RESEARCH
LABORATORIES.

Department of Comparative Anatomy, Oxford.
Geological Laboratory, Oxford,

Zoological Laboratory, Camln-idge.
Balfour Laboratory, Cambridge.
The Botany School, Cambridge.

The University of London.

Bedford College for Women, London.

Birkbeck College, London.

Charing Cross Hospital Medical College.

Guy's Hospital Medical College.

King's College, London.

The Lister Institute of Preventive Medicine.

London Hospital Medical School.

London School of Medicine for Women.

Middlesex Hospital.

Royal College of Science, South Kensington.

Royal Veterinary College, Camden Town.

St. Mary's Hospital jSIedical School, London.

St. Thomas's Hospital, London.

University College, London.

University of Aberdeen.

University College, Aberystwyth.

Queen's College, Belfast.

The University of Birmingham.

University College, Bristol.

University College, Cardiff.

Queen's College, Cork.

Department of Agriculture (Fisheries Branch), Dublin.

266 LIST OF INSTITUTIONS

Scliool of Physic, Trinity College, Dul.lin.

Eoyal University of Ireland, Dublin.

University College, Dul:)lin.

The Medical School, Cealia Street, Dublin.

University College, Dundee.

The University of Edinburgh.

The Eoyal Albert Memorial College, Exeter.

The University of Glasgow.

St. Mungo's College, Glasgow.

The Ujiiversity of Leeds.

The University of Liverpool.

Victoria University, Manchester.

Armstrong College, Newcastle-on-Tyne.

University College, Nottingham.

University College, Eeading.

Gatty Marine Laboratory, St. Andrews.

The University of Sheffield.

Hartley University College, Southampton.

School of Medicine, Cairo.
Canterbury College, New Zealand.
South African College, Cape Town.
Government College, Lahore, India.
McGill University, Montreal.
Stazione Zoologica, Naples.
Fergusson College, Poona, I'ritish India.
Princeton University, New Jersey, U.S.A.
Zoologisches Institut, Tiibingen, Germany.

II. MUSEUMS.

University Museum of Zoology, Cambridge.
University Museum, Oxford.

British Musevun (Natural History).
Horniman IMuseum and Art Gallery, London.
Eoyal College of Surgeons.
Stepney Borough Museum.

Chadwick Museum, Bolton.
The Welsh Museum, Cardiff.
Essex Museum of Natural History.
Eoyal Albert Memorial Museum, Exeter.
Free Library and Museum, Gt, Yarmouth.
Plymouth Museum and Art Gallery.

Konigliche Zoologisches Museum, Berlin.

Dresden Sea Aquarium.

Academia Polytechnica do Porto (Muzen de Zoologica), Portugal.

SUPPLIED WITH SPECIMENS. 267

III. TECHNICAL AND OTHER SCHOOLS.

University Tutorial College, Loudon.

Dulwich College, London.

East London College.

The Grove School, Highgate.

Mary Datchelor Girls' School, Caniberwell.

INIerchant Taylors' School, Ijoudon.

Northern Polytechnic Institute, Hollo way.

The Polytechnic, London.

St. Olave's Grammar School, London.

St. Paul's School, West Kensington.

South-Western Polytechnic, Chelsea.

Berkhamstead School.

King Edward's High School, Birmingham,

Technical School, Bradford.

The Training College, Brighton.

Merchant Venturers Technical College, Bristol.

Municipal Science, Art and Technical School, Burnley,

The Mining School, Camliorne.

The Leys School, Cambridge.

The Whitgift School, Croydon.

Municipal Technical College, Derby.

Felstead School, Essex.

Glasgow and West of Scotland Technical College.

Charterhouse School, Godalming.

The Ladies College, Harrogate.

The School, Harrow.

Haileybury College, Hertford.

Technical College, Huddersfield.

Manchester High School for Girls.

Trent College, Nottingham.

Hulme Girls Grammar School, Oldham.

Penkridge Evening School.

Technical School, Plymouth.

Municipal Technical School, Rochdale.

Central Secondary School, Orchard Lane, Sheffield.

St. Mary's Hall, Stonyhurst.

Central Technical Schools, Truro.

Municipal Secondary School, West Bromwach.

Eton College, Windsor.

Grammar School, Wirks^vorth.

Transvaal Technical Institute, Johannesburg,

PUBLICATIONS OF THE ASSOCIATION.

Journal of the Marine Biological Association,

Old Series.
No. 1, August, 1887 (only a few copies left, reserved for Libraries).
No. 2, August, 1888. Price Is.

New Series (Royal 8ro).

Volume I., 1889-90, 472 pp., 28 plates.

Volume II., 1891-2, 410 pp., 14 plates.

Volume III., 1893-4, xxxviii. and 458 pp., 5 plates and 25 woodcuts.

Volume IV., 1895-7, iv. and 425 pp.

Volume v., 1897-9, 550 pp. and 16 plates.

Volume VI., 1899^1903, 676 pp., 3 charts and 7 plates.

Volume VII., 1904-6, 588 pp., 1 chart and 12 plates.

Volume VIII., No. 1.

Separate numljers (generally 4 to one volume), in wrappers, 3s. 6d. ; to Members, 2s. 8d.

London Agents: Messrs Dulau & Co., 37 Solio Square, W.

Cloth ito, 150 j»|)., 18 flates (12 coloured).

A TREATISE ON THE COMMON SOLE.

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A., F.R.S.E.,

Late Fellow of University College, Oxford; Naturalist to the As.sociation.

Price to Members, 20s. ; to Non-Members, 25s.

Medium 8vo, ^68 pages. 159 Illustrations aiul two Maps. Price Is. &d. net.

(Macmillaii <£■ Co., London.)

THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE MARKETABLE
MARINE FISHES OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS.

Prepared expresslij for the use of those interested in the Sea-fishing Industries,

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A.,

FORMERLY FELLOW OF UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, OXFORD ; ■
NATURALIST ON THE STAFF OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION.

QlSlitb Preface b_p
E. RAY LANKESTER, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.,

VROFK-^SOi; OF COMI'AliATIVR ANATOMY IN THK UNIVKKSITY OF OXKOKD,

PUBLICATIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL CODNCIL
FOR THE STUDY OF THE SEA.

BULLETIN

DBS RESULTATS ACQUIS PENDANT LES COURSES

PERIODIQUES.

Published Quartehly. Price per Volume of Four Numbers,
18 Kroner (£1).

RAPPORTS ET PROCES-VERBAUX DES REUNIONS.

Vols. I. -IX., 1902-7.
Price per volume, from Kr. 4 to Kr. 15.

BULLETIN STATISTIQUE.

DE8 PECHES MARITIMES.
Vol. I., 1903-4. Kr. 10.

PUBLICATIONS DE CIRCONSTANCE.

Nos. 1-41, 1903-7. Price per Number, from Kr. 0..")0 to Ivr. 3.

PubluliCil on helialf of tJi'/ International Council

ANDR. ERED. HOST ET FILS,
COPENHAGEN.

[ 269 ]

Plankton Studies in Relation to the Western
Mackerel Fishery.

By
G. E. BuUen.

With Six Charts (Plates XVIII-XXIII), two Figures in the Text and Tables I-V.

I. METHODS.

The researches here described extended for intermittent periods over
the years 1906 and 1907, and were primarily intended to embrace
inquiry into the food problem of Pilchard, Herring, and Mackerel
frequenting the western part of the English Channel. The observa-
tions now recorded form, therefore, a part of a wider series.

Most of the information referring to the condition of the fishery
throughout the spring season of the two years was collected at
Newlyn and Plymouth, by systematic inquiry amongst the fishermen.
Other information was derived from the market reports of the Fish
Trades Gazette and other journals, and from Mr. Mathias Dunn of
Newlyn, who kept the fishery constantly under observation.

The samples of plankton and stomach material were obtained from
various sources. Some were taken by myself at sea from fishing-boats
or from the Oithona, others by fishermen ; whilst a good deal of the
stomach material was got from systematic collections made at Ply-
mouth and Newlyn from catches landed at those ports. In addition
to the plankton samples mentioned above, certain samples taken at
the western stations during the international cruises were also ex-
amined and the results utilized.

The plankton was collected for the most part by a compound tow-
net embodying in its construction Swiss bolting silk of two sizes of
mesh, viz. («) 18 holes per 1 cm., the average length of a hole being
•056 cm. and the average breadth being 'OSe cm., and (l) 70 holes per
1 cm. The surface hauls were usually made for ten minutes. The
contents of the net were filtered through a net-bag constructed of the
fine silk mentioned above, and the product preserved in 5 % formalin.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 3. OCTOBER, 1908. T

270 PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

In certain cases the samples were collected by two separate nets, of
coarse and fine mesh respectively.

As this paper does not deal with plankton other than in its direct
bearing upon mackerel food, it has been considered desirable, for pur-
poses of easy reference, to include the surface hauls with those taken
from bottom to surface (oblique) under one column for each position
noted on the Plankton Tables (Tables I, II). In thus combining the
analyses of the surface and oblique hauls, it may be mentioned that
the comparative signs (which are those adopted in the International
Plankton Investigations) placed against the Phytoplankton species are
those derived from the analysis of the surface haul, whilst for Zoo-
plankton the higher of the two values recorded for the surface and
oblique hauls is used.

In the determination of the plankton samples, a general examination
was first made under magnification x 48 and x 160 in a shallow
trough. The phytoplankton was subsequently examined under cover-
slip with higher powers, x 520 to x 824, etc.

In the greater number of cases six stomachs were collected from
every catch and preserved in 10 % formalin. The contents of each were
subsequently washed out into Petrie dishes and examined in a similar
manner to that described for plankton. The whole of the sample,
unless very bulky, was examined. Other modifications of detail with
reference to stomach samples are explained under a later heading^
page 273.

My thanks are largely due to Dr. E. J. Allen, who has materially
assisted me throughout the investigation and in the preparation of this
paper ; also to Mr. Mathias Dunn, for much valuable help in the
collection of observations and material. I here also desire to express
my thanks to Mr. Howard Dunn, Mr. D. J. Mathews, Dr. L. H. Gough,
and Mr. W. Bygrave, for assistance in the collection or identification
of material, and to Mr. A. E. Hefford for help in the preparation of
this paper.

11. THE WESTEEN SPPJNG MACKEEEL FISHEEY.

The factors, which influence the inshore migration of mackerel in
greater or less abundance, have long been the subject of inquiry. That
the purpose of spawning is the primary object of such migration has
been admitted, but it still remains to show reasons for the greater or
less extent of this migration, which from a commercial standpoint,
under the present system of drift fishing, is equivalent to a good, bad,
or indifferent season. Many previous authors have shown that

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY. 271

plankton forms the main food of mackerel during the shoaling
season, and the examination of more than four hundred stomachs
of mackerel taken in the British Channel and extreme western
part of the English Channel, during the present investigations
(1906-7), has shown agreement with this result. As suggested
by several previous authors on the subject, it appears possible
that from a study of this food some light may be thrown upon
the factors which govern the fluctuations in the mackerel fishery
during the spring shoaling season. The object of this paper, therefore,
is to show, from the information and observations at our disposal,
whether there is a demonstrable correlation between the distribution
of plankton or mackerel food, and the extent of migration. It has
already been stated that over four hundred stomachs have been
examined during the present researches. These were taken in
1906-7 from fish caught in the Bristol Channel and in the English
Channel from Plymouth to west of Scilly, during the three months
which constitute the more important part of the spring fishery, viz.
April, May, and June. The result of the analyses of these stomachs
will be found in the Plankton and Food Tables which are appended.
From an examination of these tables it will be seen that on no occa-
sion has an instance occurred of material, other than plankton, being
observed in the stomachs of fish caught during the shoaling season in
the extreme western part of the area under consideration. In the
eastern part, however (see Table V), it will be seen that the plankton
forming the principal food was gradually supplemented, as the season
advanced, with young fish and adult Crystallogohius nilsoni.

From information derived from the weekly market reports published
in the Fish Trades Gazette, and from statements made to me by local
fishermen at Plymouth and Newlyn, it would appear that, although
drift fishing had been carried on in the Bristol Channel and elsewhere
since the beginning of February until April in 1906 and 1907, the
catches made were irregular and comparatively small. Fishermen and
others agreed in stating that this was due to the fact, that there
appeared to be no regular shoaling at the surface during these three
months.

That mackerel did occur, however, in the inshore waters at this
time at the surface is evinced by the fact that fair catches of hook fish
were made constantly during the early months of the two years, as
shown by the market reports, and by the writer's personal ob-
servations.

Fishermen seem to be agreed that shoaling mackerel will not take a
bait : and a consideration of the above facts tends to suggest that in

272 PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

these early spring months mackerel may be present at the surface but
are dissemmatecl over a wide area. A careful comparison of the plankton
results for the February cruises, shown in the Bulletins Conseil Inter-
national ijour V creploration cle la Mer, shows that, at the western mid-
Channel and Bristol Channel stations (E. 5 and E. 6, the only two fall-
ing within the fishing area), plankton generally has reached a minimum
in comparison with other quarterly results. It is desirable at this-
point to state that, for the purpose of comparison in this and other
cases, an arbitrary numerical value was substituted for the comparative
signs employed in the tables, viz. + =10, c=100, cc=oOO, the signs.
" r " and " rr " being disregarded. In the present instance comparison
was made for all the years since the commencement of the international
investigations, and this condition appeared to be invariably the same.
This point is further supported by certain observations taken during
the present investigations (Nos. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Table I).

These two main facts considered together cannot, however, be offered
as sufficient evidence that mackerel do not shoal closely at the
surface until there is a sufficiency of plankton to form food for their
support without much individual effort, especially in view of the fact
that mackerel are known to be shoaling densely at the bottom off
Start Point in the early part of the year, and, as far as our present
observations extend, are feeding there upon plankton. Possibly, how-
ever, it may be suggested reservedly that a lack of plankton may exercise
a retarding infiuence upon the shoaling of fish already at the surface^
which are disseminated over a wide area, of the presence of which
evidence has already been given. Further, attention has already been
drawn to the fact that in the Plymouth to Lizard area in 1907 larger food
material was observed, in gradually increasing quantity as the season
advanced, from the end of April onwards. Throughout July, 1907,
from the writer's personal observations, the plankton in the Plymouth
area was observed to decrease very materially in quantity. In the
previous month, the tow-nettings brought to the Laboratory at Plymouth
from within and outside the Sound for the use of students, and for the
Plymouth plankton records taken weekly, were composed mainly of
Temora longicornis in extreme abundance. During the first few days of
July, within the first week, the Copepod in question, from being ex-
tremely abundant, rapidly disappeared from the tow-nettings, leaving
the samples almost clear, for the time being, of animal life. No
plankton observations were obtained from the western area during^
July, 1907 ; but, confining our attention to the Plymouth to Lizard area,
it appeared that from all reports the shoals broke up at about this time
and the hand-lining season commenced. It may, therefore, be siig-

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY. 273'

gested, that, until individual effort on the part of the fish to secure
food becomes necessary, the mackerel remain in shoals.

These results tend to support the theory that mackerel feed upon
plankton only when shoaling.

Owing to a certain general similarity in the samples examined, it
was found possible to tabulate the results of the analyses of the
stomach material. These are given in the Plankton and Food Tables
(III, IV, and V) which are appended. From nearly every position
noted therein the contents of six stomachs were examined, and,
by a system of adopting the highest comparative symbol placed
against the different species throughout the series, a single sample was
formed. This, in certain instances, is shown for comparison with a
plankton sample collected on the same position as that from which the
fish themselves were derived.

It has proved convenient to arrange the results in three separate
tables, viz. Western Area, 1906 ; Western Area, 1907 ; and Plymouth
to Lizard Area, 1907. Lack of observation in this latter area in the
earlier year has prevented the formation of a separate table for 1906.

It will be seen that only those principal species, which occurred more
or less regularly in the stomach contents, have been included in the
tables. These comprise seven species of Copepods, viz. Acartia clansi,
Calanus finmarchicus, Centropages typicus, Metridia lucens, Paracalanus
parvus, Pseudocalanus elongatus, and Tcmora longicornis. An examina-
tion of the tables will show that of these species Calanus finmarchicus,
Pseudocalanus elongatus, and Teviora longicornis are the most important.
The other species, although persistently occurring in stomach contents,
are hardly of sufficient importance for purposes of comparison.

In addition to the Copepods there are included in the tables, Zoeae,
Sagitta hijmnctata and Oikopleura dioica. These species, together with
the Copepods, constitute the principal forms of zooplankton observed
in the stomach contents.

For the Plymouth to Lizard area it was found necessary to include
young fish, or Crystcdlogohius. The last item for consideration, which
is noted on every table as " Phytoplankton, chiefly Phaeocystis glohosa,"
refers to the material largely found in mackerel stomachs in the early
part of the season. This, upon examination, in many instances proved
to be diatom detritus, consisting of the shells, spines, chromatophores,
and the jelly-like substance associated with them, forming in a majority
of cases a glairy mass of a dark green tint.* Associated with this
material in a number of instances was a certain quantity of Phaeocystis

* For the exact diagnosis of the uature of this material the writer is indebted to
Mr. A. J. Mason-Jones.

274 PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

globosa, the exact proportion of which it was found impossible to
gauge. In certain samples, however, owing to the absence of diatoms
and other protophyta (Samples 68, 69, 93, 94, Tables III, IV), it was
found possible to estimate the amount of Fhacocystis with more
probability.

It may be mentioned that Cunningham,* in describing the early
spring food of mackerel, remarks, " In some [stomachs] there occurred
a quantity of the green slimy vegetable matter, which was then abun-
dant in the sea."

During the examination of certain series of stomachs, instances
have occurred where tlie contained food was deposited in layers
(Samples Nos. 94, 120, 121, 123, 124, etc., Tables IV, V). Farran
{Report on Sea and Inland Fisheries, Ireland, 1901, Part II, p. 122)
records the same thing, and Mr. W. M. Tattersall informed the writer
that he has frequently observed a similar condition in mackerel from
the west of Ireland. Such a state of the stomach contents is
specially obvious where the Pteropod Limacina retrovcrsa (Flem.)
occurs together with one or more species of Copepods, the dark colour
of the former contrasting sharply with the bright orange tint of the
latter. It has often been suggested that certain plankton organisms
occur in shoals of varying extent. Now it is interesting to note in
this connection, that many fishermen think that shoaling mackerel,
when feeding, scarcely move at all, beyond maintaining their position
against the current. The theory of the fish feeding, therefore, first
in one shoal of plankton organism and then in another as they pass,
may be suggested as an explanation of this phenomenon. The fact
might also be due to the fish swimming first in one and then in
another layer of water.

By an examination of the Food and Plankton Tables it will be
seen that the plankton organisms occurring in the stomach contents
are common also to tow-nettings taken on the same position. In
a majority of cases also, the relative proportions of individual species
are similar in both, or nearly so. Occasionally differences occur. But
in the examination of the large mass of material which is generally
found in a mackerel stomach when plankton is abundant, it is often
difficult to decide the comparative proportion of one species to another.
This fact, together with that of the method of treatment already
explained (see p. 273), will account for the differences which are
occasionally shown between the analyses of stomach contents and
those of plankton samples from the same locality.

Although, however, certain species occurring in the tow-nettings are

* Marketable Marine Fishes, p. 313.

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY. 275

observed in the stomach material of fish from the same position, an
exhaustive examination of a fair number of stomach samples has
failed to show the presence of the same variety of organisms in the
stomach, as occur in the tow-nettings taken on the same positions as
the mackerel. Possibly this fact may be offered as additional evidence
in support of the food-layer theory already mentioned.

In the early part of April, 1906, as in the two preceding months,
an unprofitable fishery had been carried on in the Bristol Channel by
the greater number of the steam drifters. From fishermen's reports this
condition had, it appeared, continued since the commencement of the
season without a single period of improved fishing. On the 20th of
April, however, some good shoals were struck to the south-west of the
Wolf by the sailing fleet. The greater number of the steam drifters
at once left the Bristol Channel and commenced fishing in a semicircle
to the south and south-west of Scilly. The result was that moderate
but regular catches of ten thousand down were landed from this area,
the fishing although light being general. The stomach contents of
samples of these fish did not differ very materially from those of
Bristol Channel fish (see Samples Nos. 66, 67, Table III).

A line of plankton samples was taken at this time from Plymouth
to the fishing area south-west of the Wolf, the chief aim being the
determination of the relative quantities of zooplankton and phyto-
plankton* present on the fishing area and adjacent waters. The
analyses of the tow-nettings taken on 23rd and 24th April during this
crviise (see Samples Nos. 11-20, Table I) are interesting when viewed
in relation to the distribution of shoaling mackerel at the time.
Briefly summarized, it appeared that from Plymouth to the Lizard
phytoplankton in every example was in excess of zooplankton
(Samples Nos. 11, 12, 13, and 20, Table I). In the single position in
Mount's Bay where tow-nettings were taken this was also the case
(Sample No. 19, Table I), whereas in samples taken, on the approach
to the fishing area and actually on the ground (Samples Nos. 14-17),
there was a rapid decrease in phytoplankton, leading to a reverse of
the former condition, i.e. to an excess of zooplankton over phyto-
plankton. It may be mentioned that the excess of phytoplankton
over zooplankton was largely, though not entirely, due to the
presence in the samples of large quantities of Phaeocystis glohosa,
Scherffel.

* Throughout this paper the word "phytoplankton" must be understood as referring
to the larger organisms, .such as are recorded in the plankton tables of the International
Bulletin. No investigations have been made on the minute plankton organisms which
Lohmann has included under the term " microplankton."

276 PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

From a comparison of the tables it will be seen that the reverse
condition was not brought about entirely by the decrease of the Phaco-
cystis, but also by the increasing number of the Copepods in the
samples.

During this cruise, through lack of time, only one position could be
worked in the Bristol Channel (Sample No. 18, Table I), which showed
phytoplankton in excess of zooplankton. The same condition was
observed in a sample taken at Sevenstones five days later. The
positions of the stations on this cruise and the general distribution of
samples taken during April, 1906, can be readily understood on refer-
ence to the Distribution of Species Chart No. 1.

Throughout the early part of April, 1907, from the fishermen's
reports it appeared that fairly regular catches had been landed from
the Bristol Channel south-west of the Wolf, and also from twenty to
thirty miles S.W. of the Lizard. Many fishermen declared, however,
that the water lying within a ten-mile or wider limit from the coast
from off Plymouth to Land's End, was in that particular condition
which they termed " stinking," and of a most unsuitable condition for
the presence of mackerel.*

In order to obtain observations in this affected area, and also to trace
the varying proportions of zooplankton and phytoplankton on the
fishing ground, a cruise was taken from Plymouth to ten miles S.W.
of the Wolf, and from thence to twenty miles north of the Longships,
somewhat earlier than in 1906, viz. April 16th, 17th. The analyses of
the tow-nettings taken (see Samples Nos. 41-8, Table II) show a some-
what similar condition to that observed in 1906, with certain impor-
tant exceptions. The main differences lie in the excess of phyto-
plankton extending farther westward past the Lizard (see Samples
Nos. 41-5, Table II). This condition was largely due to Fhaeoajstis ;
zooplankton occurring in excess of phytoplankton only in the sample
taken farthest west, viz. ten miles S.W. of the Wolf (No. 48, Table II).
A more important feature, however, appears to lie in the conditions
observed in the Bristol Channel samples (Nos. 46, 47, Table II), where
zooplankton occurred decidedly in excess of phytoplankton. For a
synoptic view of these observations, showing the positions of stations,
the reader is referred to Distribution of Species Chart No. IV.

Now in drawing a comparison between the condition exhibited by
the plankton and that by the fishery in April 1906 and 1907, it will be
seen that in the former year, phytoplankton appearing in excess of zoo-
plankton in the Bristol Channel, the fishery there was unprofitable ;
whereas the reverse obtaining S.W. of the Wolf, fair catches were

* See note on "Stinking Water," p. 289.

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY. 277

made there. In 1907, on the other hand, zooplankton was in excess
of phytoplankton both in the Bristol Channel and also to the S.W.
of the Wolf, in both of which areas good fishing was obtained. In
considering these observations further, it is interesting to find that the
most profitable fishing grounds lay outside the area in which phyto-
plankton predominated, which suggests that mackerel during the
shoaling season prefer an animal to a vegetable diet, and may be met
with in quantity where such food is abundant.

Further consideration of the Distribution of Species Charts IV to VI
shows wider eastward distribution of shoaling mackerel as the season
proceeded in 1907.

An examination of the Plankton Tables Nos. I and II shows, more-
over, that throughout the season, during 1906, phytoplankton was
always in evidence, whereas in 1907 it entirely disappeared from the
beginning of May onward until the close of the season. The official
statistics of monthly landings, published by the Board of Agriculture
and Fisheries show that the fishery in 1906 was phenomenally bad,
whereas that of 1907 was very good.

From these two facts it may be suggested that excess of phyto-
plankton in inshore waters retards or rather limits the eastern migra-
tion of the shoals first appearing west of Scilly.

An examination of the official statistics of mackerel landings serves
to show that, in the month of May, the quantity of mackerel caught
has reached a maximum for the four months forming the more im-
portant part of the spring fishery. The following table shows the
figures from 1901-7 inclusive. The figures given represent the landings
on the south and west coasts of England and AVales, which are sig-
nificant for the western fishery, since comparatively few mackerel are
taken elsewhere during the months dealt with.

Table sliovjing OfficAal Returns of Mackerel landed on the south and ivest
coasts of England, and Wales, from March to June inclusive, in the
years 1901-7.

TOTAL IN HUNDREDWEIGHTS.

1901.

1902.

1903.

1904.

1905.

1906.

1907.

March

. 23,340 ..

. 8,145 ..

. 22,492 ..

. 78,866 ..

,. 63,570 ..

9,260 ..

. 18,769

April

. 39,041 ..

. 73,384 ..

. 60,190 ..

. 62,241 .,

,. 152,972 ..

. 28,779 ..

. 43,107

May

. 169,020 ..

. 169,857 ..

. 152,753 ..

,. 199,884 .,

.. 378,157 ..

. 108,273 ..

. 222,151

June

. 70,005 .,

,. 77,889 ..

. 65,005 .,

,. 108,822 .,

.. 53,215 ..

. 49,743 ..

. 57,383

As these figures are taken over a fair number of years it may be
assumed that during May, under normal conditions, the fishery is at
its height. In May also the maximum number of boats are generally

278 PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

fishing, and during the latter part of tlie period considered there is no
reason to suppose that the number of boats has greatly altered. The
fluctuation, as shown by the official figures, in consideration of the
usual fair-weather conditions during this month, is less liable to
be influenced by causes other than the greater or less extent of
migration.

On reference to the above table it will be seen that in May, 1906,
the landings touched a minimum for the seven years ; whereas, al-
though the figures in no way compare with those of 1905, the May
landings for 1907 are suggestive of a good season. The good May
fishing of 1907 as opposed to the bad of 1906 forms a useful compari-
son when we come to consider plankton conditions of the same period
in these two years.

From an examination of the daily market reports published in the
Fish Trades Gazette, it woiild appear that in 1906 the fishery was
gradually improving throughout May until the last week, when, after
a short period of improved conditions, it began rapidly to decline, and
remained depressed until the end of the season.

In 1907, from information derived from the same source, and from
observations taken at Xewlyn by Mr. W. Bygrave, it appeared that
heavy landings of mackerel took place during the first and second
weeks in May. The market was several times glutted ; and there is
every reason to suppose that, had not a short spell of bad weather
intervened, in which the men temporarily lost sight of the shoals, the
landings would have been considerably greater than they appear to be
from the official statistics. However, despite the unfavourable com-
parison between the figures for May, 1905, and those of 1907, from all
accounts there is every reason to consider the latter year to have been
an excellent season.

In reviewing the plankton conditions generally, it should first be
pointed out that throughout May, 1906, phytoplankton was present in
fair quantity in every sample taken during the month on the fishing
grounds (see Table I). In 1907, on the other hand, it had almost
completely disappeared, and as may be seen from the Plankton Tables
(Table II), zooplankton was represented by merely a few species of
Copepods in extreme abundance. The comparative symbol , " cc "
shown on the tables for certain samples (Nos. 52, 53, 54, 55)
hardly sufficiently indicates the large quantities of the species
occurring in the sample.

In comparing the plankton conditions during May of these tw^o
years, it may be mentioned that a far greater number of observations
were taken in 1907 than in 1906. It is desirable, therefore, in draw-

THE WESTEEN MACKEKEL FISHEKY.

279

ing a close comparison, to consider only such observations as are com-
mon to the two years. These are furnished by the analyses of plankton
samples taken at the mid-Channel and Bristol Channel stations (Stats.
E. 5 and E. 6) during the May cruises of the International Plankton
Investigations.

By the same method of comparison as adopted for other similar
cases (see page 272) a curve was formed, showing the fluctuation of the
principal zooplankton forming mackerel food. This curve (Fig. 1)

PLANKTON

VALUES

1200

lOOO

800

600

'too

200

^ 1

y /

^ /

^^ /

' /

;

/
/

„<•/

,0/

. y

v"/

/ .

f /

/ ^^^

t y

(l^^

\\
\\

1 /

1 y

1 X

\\
Y

MACKEREL
CWTS.

400.000

350,000

300,000

250,000

200,000

150,000

1905

1904

1905

1^6

100,000

1907

Fig. ]. — Curves showing, for the month of May, fluctuations in the quantities of mackerel
landed, and of zooplankton observed at Stations E. 5 and E. 6.

ZooplanVton : mean between Stations E. 5 and B. 6 for May — Dotted line.
Mackerel landed during May — Continuous line.

shows the results of a mean between the analyses of the samples
taken in surface hauls at the two stations, the following species only
being taken into consideration : Acartia clausi, Calanus finmarchi-
cus, Centrojjages typicus, Paracalanus parvus, and Fseudocalanus elon-
gatus.

280

PLANKTON STUDIES IN EELATION TO

TABLE SHOWING FLUCTUATION OF PRINCIPAL ZOOPLANKTON
AT STATIONS E. 5 AND E. 6.

May Cruises. Yeaiis 1903-7 Inclusive. Surface Hauls only,
from the international bulletins.
The first column shoivs the comparative value sign, the second the adopted nuinerical value.
1903 1904 1905 1906 1907

Species.

Acartia clausi
Calaims fiimiarchicus
Centropages typicns
Paracalanus parvus
Pseudocalanus

elongatus

Total mini, value
Mean value

E. 5 £. 6

E. 5 E. 6

E 5 E. 6

E. 5 E. 6 i. 5 E. e"

100

500

100

500

100

500

100

500

100

500

100

500

100

500

100

—

500

210

300

255

700 1210
955

1200 1110
1155

120

1210 710,
960

In order to form a wider comparison the results obtained from all the
May cruises since the commencement of the International Investiga-
tions in 1903 have been included in the present curve.

When compared with the mackerel landings for May as provided by
the official statistics, it will be seen that the correlation between fluc-
tuation of zooplankton and that of the fishery is very marked. This
would tend to support the suggestion that when zooplankton is in
abundance on the fishing grounds mackerel are numerous.

As already mentioned many more plankton observations were
taken during May, 1907, than in the same month of 1906, and as such
were actually derived from the fishing area, west and south-west of
Scilly (see Samples Nos. 52-55, Table II), they are of value, tending as
they do wholly to support the evidence already cited. At every posi-
tion within the fishing area the samples taken during a ten-minute sur-
face haul were bulky, being composed for the greater part of two or
three species of Gopepods, viz. Acartia clausi, Calanus fininarchicus, and
Pseudocalanus elongatus, the two latter more particularly, to the almost
complete exclusion of other organisms. At one position west of
Scilly (S. 52, Table IV), a ten-minute surface tow-netting more than
half filled a sample jar of capacity approximately 300 cc. with these
two species, in comparatively even proportion. In connection with
this fact it may be mentioned that a steam drifter fishing ten miles
west of this position on the same night (May 16, 17) landed four lasts
of fish at Newlyn the next morning.

It is perhaps unnecessary to cite further instances of a similar
character. The Food and Plankton Tables and Fluctuation Curve

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY.

281

speak for themselves in support of the theory that the quantity of
zooplankton occurring on the fislung grounds materially affects the
fishing ; the more food the more fish, and vice versa.

Before leaving the consideration of the present matter, it is desirable
to draw attention to the relation of phytoplankton to zooplankton
during May, for the years 1903-7 inclusive. This can best be done
by an examination of a curve showing the flvictuation of phytoplank-
ton at the same stations and formed by the same method (Fig. 2).

PLANKTON

VALUES

600

500

406

300

200

100

^ /

\ /

v /

\ /

\
\

\ /

/ \

\ /

/°/

/ \

\ ^

■f

/ \

\ jr

\
\

/ \

•-v

/ \

/ ^

/ \

/ \
/ \
/ ^

/ \

■ \

MACKEREL

CWTS.

'lOO.OOO

350,000

3oo,ooa

250,000

200,000

/50,00a

1903

1904

1905

(906

100,00a

1907

Fig. 2. — Curves showing, for the month of May, fluctuations in the quantities of mackerel
landed and of phytoplankton observed at Stations E. 5. and E. 6.

PliytoplauUton : mean between Stations E. 5 and E. 6 for May — Dotted line.
Mackerel landed during May— Continuous line.

In the present example, however, it was found necessary to take
every species of phytoplankton into consideration. In this it will be
seen there appears to be almost a direct inversion of the zooplankton
curve. There is an exception, however, in 1903, in which year
plankton generally is low.

We have seen that there appears to exist a marked correlation
between fluctuation of zooplankton and that of the fishery. It will be
admitted that the fluctuation of zooplankton need not necessarily entail

282 PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

a diametrically opposite fluctuation of phytoplankton, but we shall not
here attempt to discuss the causes which promote paucity or abundance
of phytoplankton.

But little is known at present of the food of Copepods, and
the inversion of the phytoplankton curve in comparison with that of
zooplankton cannot be offered in any way as evidence that Diatoms,
Peridiniales, and other comparatively large protophyta taken in
tow-nettings are the food of Copepods. Therefore the paucity of phyto-
plankton correlating to a large extent with the abundance of mackerel
(Fig. 2) need not at present be considered as other than additional
evidence to show that where zooplankton is in excess of phyto-
plankton mackerel are more numerous — the subject of a former
paragraph.

Briefly now to summarize the results of the present investigations.
The following considerations are submitted as forming the principal
points of correlation between the plankton and mackerel during 1906
and 1907.

(i) That during the three months forming the more important part of
the spring mackerel fishing in the west part of the English Channel
and Bristol Channel, viz. April, May, and June, mackerel appear to
feed for the greater part on plankton.

(ii) That the plankton organisms observed in the stomach contents of
mackerel are also to be found in tow-nettings taken on the same
position from whence the fish are derived. Further, that in a majority
of cases, the relative quantities or proportions of such species are also
common to both tow-nettings and stomach samples.

(iii) That in April of the two years under present consideration,
where zooplankton was in excess of phytoplankton mackerel were more
numerous.

(iv) That the abundance or paucity of zooplankton during a certain
number of years (1903-7) appears to be correlated with the greater or
less abundance of mackerel.

III. THE " STAET " MACKEKEL FISHERY.

I. GENERAL CONDITIONS IN 1907.

From the reports of fishermen at Plymouth and Newlyn, together with
information derived from a fish salesman agent at Boulogne, it
appeared that from the end of December, 1906, and throughout
January, February, and the greater part of March, a regular and
profitable trawl fishery for mackerel was carried on in an area of
20 to 40 miles S.S.W. to S.E. of Start Point.

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY. 283

Cligny, in a paper entitled " Les pretendues migrations du maquer-
eau," has pointed out that the existence of mackerel congregated in
dense shoals on the bottom in this particular area, was first brought to
light during the winter of 1901, and that since that time a regular
trawling industry for mackerel by means of a specially designed trawl
has been carried on by the Boulogne fishermen, in the early spring.

In regard to this fishery, it has been stated by many fishermen at
Plymouth that the best catches are made during the daytime, night
trawling being often entirely unproductive.

From a consideration of this fact, the fishermen at first were of the
opinion that the mackerel rose to the surface at night, and a certain
number of boats shot drift-nets in the area where it was known that
successful trawling during the day had been carried out. In every
instance, however, the catches made at the surface were very light,
and the practice was soon abandoned owing to the risk of damage
to nets.

Toward the end of March, 1907, a Plymouth steam trawler, the
Condor, was furnished with a special mackerel trawl, constructed in
France ; but losing this net on her first shot on the mackerel ground, an
ordinary otter trawl was employed, with the result that a catch of
nearly eight thousand mackerel was made, fish measuring 12| to 14 in.
in length. A Boulogne fisherman, who was superintending this fishing,
expressed an opinion that had the trawl been a regular mackerel trawl,
and the speed capability of the vessel greater, a far larger catch would
have been made. This fishing was carried out, on a position roughly
25 miles S.W, of Start, on the 24th of March. Five days later a
Brixham smack landed nine mackerel caught amongst other fish
20 miles S.E. of Start. From information received from Boulogne*
it would appear that in 1907, throughout January, February, and
the earlier part of March, the French trawling fleet, numbering nearly
thirty vessels, were landing regular catches of sixty thousand down.
During the third week of March, however, the catches rapidly decreased,
until at the end of the month scarcely ten per cent of the former
catches were landed, and the fishery was therefore discontinued.

Cligny, in the paper mentioned above, remarks on the close shoaling
within certain limited areas on the ground in question, and this condi-
tion has been further evidenced during 1907 by statements made by
the Boulogne fisherman in charge of the Condor's operations, who
mentioned that of two vessels trawling within half a mile of each other,
on a parallel course, the one would often obtain a large catch, whilst

* A series of telegrams giving daily market reports, for the use of which the writer is
indebted to Mr. R. H. Palmer.

284 PLANKTON STUDIES IN EELATION TO

the other would fish hghtly. The same fisherman, moreover, stated
that he considered the shoals to lie parallel with the shore line.

\_Note. — Amongst the fishing community at Plymouth and Newlyn a
considerable diversity of opinion at one time existed in regard to the
form and construction of the mackerel trawl. It may, therefore, be
desirable to state that the writer was informed by Mr. Chant, the
owner of the Condor, that the following details of construction, present
in the net which was lost, constitute the essential points in which the
mackerel trawl differs from an ordinary otter trawl.

Not being in a position to show the actual specifications of the trawl
in question, Mr. Chant stated that the otter boards were heavier,
the length of the foot rope was 92 feet (less than that of an ordinary
otter trawl, which is usually 120 to 130 feet), and that the cod end was
longer and bred of a finer mesh, viz. one inch. These points alone, he
explained, constituted the difference in construction. The main point
of the successful manipulation of the trawl, he stated, appeared to lie
in the fact that, when trawling is proceeding at the pace of three miles
an hour, the length of hawser employed should be five times the depth
of the water.

With this length of hawser, he explained, together with the extra
weight of the otter boards, there is no chance of the trawl leaving the
ground, although it does not work so heavily as an ordinary trawl would,
at the usual pace of two miles an hour.

Mr. Chant further stated that the mackerel taken by the Condor
were caught in an ordinary otter trawl, the cod end of which had been
backed with netting of a finer mesh.]

II. THE PHYSICAL AND BIOLOGICAL CONDITIONS OBSEKVED ON THE
START MACKEREL GROUND.

As a result of a series of observations taken from the Oithona
at two positions on the mackerel trawling ground on March 27th,
1907, the following is a summary of the chief physical and biological
conditions then observed within the area : —

First Position. — 15 miles S.W. from Start Point.
Depth, 38 fathoms.
Condition of bottom, fine sand.

Temperatures : surface, 9"25°.
11 fathoms, 8-35°.
22 fathoms, 8-26°.
P)Ottom, 38 fathoms, 8"3°.

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY. 285

Second Position. — 21 miles S. x W. | W. of Start.

Depth, 39 fathoms.

Condition of bottom, coarse sand, fine gravel.
Temperatures : surface, 9"4:5°.
16 fathoms, 8"65°.
Bottom, 39 fathoms, 8"65°.

General condition of plankton* taken by coarse and fine nets : —

Bottom (o9 fathoms). Four species of Copepods, chiefly Temorci longi-
cornis, not abundant ; few other metazoa, including Oikoplcura dioica,
rare.

Phytoplankton in excess of zooplankton, composed largely of
diatoms, Lauderict borealis and Chaetoceras dcnsum, both common.

Fourteen other species of diatoms observed.

Surface plankton, similar in every respect to the bottom samples but
slighter in bulk.

Petersen trawl samples from surface, midwater and bottom were
composed largely of several species of amphipods : Aphereusa bispinosa,
very abundant, Bathyporeia pelagica, rare, Euthemisto gracillipcs, rare,
Monoculodes sp., rare, Paratylus vedlomensis, rare, Stenotho'e marina,
rare, Urothoe elegans, rare, etc. Schizopods, viz. Anchiahcs agilis,
rare, Gastrosaccus spinifer, rare, Mysidopsis angtista, rare, and M.
giibosa, very rare. A fair number of post-larval fish were also
taken, including Clupea harengus, plentiful, Pleuronectes rnicrocephalus,
common, Solea variegata, rare, etc.

An unsuccessful attempt was made to obtain mackerel in the otter
trawl. The following species, however, were taken after a two hours'
haul : Arnoglossus laterna and A. inegastoma, Callionymus lyra, Gadus
minutus, G. luscus, and G. merlangus, Gobius quadrimacidatus, Pleuronectes
platessa, Baict bland a, Bhombus laevis, Solea variegata, and S. lascaris,
Trachinus draco, Trigla cuculus, T. gurnardus, T. liirnndo, and T. lineatciy
Zeusfcdier, together with several invertebrates.

III. GENERAL CONDITIONS OBSERVED IN STOMACHS OF MACKEREL TRAWLED
ON THE START GROUND.

The contents of six stomachs were examined from the fish taken by
the Condor on March 24th, 1907. A general determination based upon
the six samples will be found in the Food and Plankton Tables
(Table Y), Sample No. 2-1-. It is desirable, however, to describe the
present material more particularly. In the six samples there appeared
to be two distinct types of food, together with intermediate stages, in

* See Plankton Tables, Sample No. 38.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 3. U

286 PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

which the one converged into the other, forming, so to speak, a mixed
sample. In one stomach only there occurred a pure zooplankton sample,
consisting almost entirely of Tcmora longicornis ; three other species
of Copepods were observed in extreme scarcity, viz. Centropages typicus,
Paracalanus parvus, Pseicdocalanus elongatus, together with a few Caridid
larvse and Amphipod remains. This sample alone constituted the one
extreme ; the other, which may be considered as phytoplankton, was
represented by three slight samples, which were composed mainly of
a number of plankton diatoms {Lauderia horcalis and Chaetoceras
dcnsum principally), together with a few bottom forms such as
Bhahdonema sp., forming with an indeterminable quantity of Phceocystis
glohosa a glutinous mass. Entangled in this material were observed
also a few Temora longicornis and the three other species of Copepods
above mentioned, together with a large number of Oikopleura dioica.

In the case of the two mixed samples, two slightly different types of
food were observed. In the one Temora longicornis occurred fairly plenti-
fully throughout the stomach contents, which otherwise were composed
of the phytoplankton mass, as already described. In the second instance
Temora longicornis formed an almost pure sample in a layer deposited
above the phytoplankton. In connection with Oikoplevra dioica it is
interesting to note the following points. It occurred in greater abun-
dance in the stomach samples showing phytoplankton and mixed
material than it did in the tow-nettings taken from the Oithona (see
Table No. II, Sample No. 38). Secondly, it Vt^as not observed at all in
the sample composed entirely of Temora longicornis ; and lastly in the
mixed sample already referred to, where Temora was deposited in a
layer, it did not occur amongst the Copepod material, but was plentiful
in the lower layer of phytoplankton. These points alone in connection
with Oikopleiira dioica appear to constitute the sole difference existing
between the plankton samples and stomach material.

CONCLUSION.

It has been suggested by several previous authors* that the migra-
tions of the mackerel are not so extensive as hitherto generally
supposed. Cligny, in the paper already referred to, states that, as far
as his observations extend, mackerel return year after year, at
the close of the shoaling season, to certain confined areas not far

* Allen, "Report on the Present State of Knowledge of the Habits and Migrations of
Mackerel" {Scomber scomhcr), p. 26, M.B.A. Journal, vol, v. (N.S.).

Garstang, " On the Variation Races and Migrations of the Mackerel " [Scomhcr
scomhcr), p. 286, ihid.

Cligny, Les pr6tenclues migrations du Maquereau,

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY. 28?

removed from the spawning grounds. At present only a few of these
winter quarters are known to fishermen. Unless, therefore, certain
other areas in the Channel exhibiting physical features common to the
Start ground were thoroughly investigated, any attempt to suggest
a reason for the preference of the fish for such particular spots would
be based upon insufficient evidence.

In reviewing the foregoing observations upon the physical and
biological conditions of the Start ground toward the close of the
trawling season, it is desirable to draw attention to the following
points : (1) that these bottom shoaling fish appeared to be feeding
largely upon plankton ; (2) that the plankton species observed in the
stomach contents were common to the tow-nettings taken within the
fishing area ; (3) that Oikopleura dioica occurred in great abundance in
stomach contents composed largely of phytoplankton, but in those
containing a considerable quantity of zooplankton it was scarce, and
further that, under the former circumstance, it was far more plentiful
than in the tow-nettings taken within the fishing area ; (4) that the
tow-nettings taken on the bottom showed a greater bulk of material
than those from the surface.

IV. FISHERMEN'S "SIGNS."

Amongst the west and east country fishermen there are gener-
ally recognized certain distinctive types of water in which mackerel
are said to occur more or less abundantly. According to the men's
statements, the colour and appearance of the water, its smell, and
possibly upon occasion the presence of certain marine birds, comprise
the only indications by which the drifter is guided in making choice
of his position.

That these " signs," as they are termed, are the outcome of ex-
perience there can be no question, and the greater or less capability
for interpreting them makes a better or worse fisherman. An instance
occurred on one occasion when I was at Mevagissey, when one fisherman
shot his nets a few miles to the landward of the rest of the pilchard
fleet and secured a top catch ; when questioned as to his reasons
for doing so he explained that the signs at that particular position
were altogether better than any that he had seen the previous night
farther out. At other times I have heard a fisherman state that he
could not hope for even a fair catch, as the class of water was entirely
unsuitable, and on hauling nets this surmise has been found correct in
every instance.

Before proceeding to treat the matter in detail it will be well to

288 PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

summarize the result of systematic inquiry made amongst the fisher-
men in regard to their views upon the subject, and to detail the
different characteristics of the various types of water as described by
the fishermen themselves.

" Stinking Water " is of a dull leaden colour even in bright sunlight,
so dense that a man looking over the side of a sailing drifter cannot
see down to the keel. It possesses, according to the fishermen, a
distinctly noxious smell, which has been described as similar to that
of decaying seaweed. The men are agreed that mackerel are not to-
be found in such water; but one informant stated that scad or horse
mackerel are often present in fair-sized shoals.

" G-reij Water " is somewhat similar to the foregoing, but does not
possess an unpleasant smell. Mackerel are never numerous in such
water.

" Bhie " and " Green Water " are both suitable for good shoals of fish.
They differ, according to the fishermen, merely as regards colour.
Both are so clear that the keel of the vessel can be seen distinctly.
Both varieties are the usual types of water found in the western area
in the early part of the season, right up to the first or second week in
May. The fishermen are agreed in considering either type sufficiently
promising to allow of fishing with some prospect of a fair catch.

" Yello7v Water " is considered to be the best of any. This, according
to the statement of many fishermen, exhibits the following character-
istics. It seldom appears before the beginning of April, and more
often not until the last week of that month. It is of a distinctly
yellow tint, and rather dense when viewed either in sunlight or under
a dull sky ; often it appears in patches of greater or less extent. In
certain years the sea west of Scilly has been almost entirely of this
type of water. It appears, according to certain statements, to be
teeming with " minute animal life." The fishermen agree in stating
that the largest catches are always made in such water, and that it is
not usual for an unproductive shot to be made, although, by the state-
ment of several fishermen interrogated upon the point, it would appear
that light catches are occasionally made in the best type of yellow
water. Certain fishermen consider that the colour of the water is not
due to the excreta of mackerel, but to the general colour of the
" swarms of water fleas," whilst others on account of its density contend
that it is coloured by excrement of mackerel.

Other "signs." — Apart from the characteristic of smell invariably
associated with so-called ' stinking water," the generality of fishermen
are agreed that a shoal of drift fish may be detected by their smell.
This is more strongly pronounced in the case of pilchards, but, with

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY. 289

mackerel shoaling densely, the fishermen state that there is no mis-
taking it. An oily appearance at the surface of the water generally
occurring in " splats," i.e. patches, is also said to be a sure indication of
drift fish.

A milky appearance of the surface generally occurring in inshore
waters, where there is no addition of china clay to the water, is asso-
ciated by the fishermen with shoals of small mackerel, the milky
appearance being due, it is stated, to excrement.

" Signs " of shoaling fish offered by the presence of sea-birds preying
upon them occur more frequently, according to the fishermen's state-
ment, in inshore waters, and the point is one which has already been
described by previous writers, and need not therefore be discussed here.

COMPARISON OF " SIGNS " OFFERED BY DIFFERENT TYPES OF WATER
WITH THE CONDITION OF PLANKTON OCCURRING IN SUCH WATER.

In order to endeavour to ascertain to what extent these colour
" signs " are produced by plankton conditions, a number of plankton
samples were taken for me in 1906-7 by fishermen, and labelled with
reference to the particular type of water from which they were
derived.

" Stinking Water." — Sample No. 39, Plankton Tables, was taken by
myself on April 10th, 1907, in an area of water termed by the fisher-
men " stinking," which, it was stated, extended from the Lizard to
Land's End in a zone of varying width about ten miles or more from
the shore. At the particular position at which it was taken, 6 miles
N.W, X W. of Lizard, the fishermen were agreed in stating that the
water was a fair sample of the " stinking " type, and that it would be
useless to shoot in it. The colour and characteristics generally were in
accordance with the description already given ; but although the fisher-
men were agreed in saying that there was an obnoxious smell, I was
unable myself to detect it. The analysis of the sample showed (by the
method of comparison described in a former section) a moderate pre-
ponderance of phytoplankton over zooplankton, but the total bulk of
the sample was comparatively small. As will be seen on reference
to the Plankton Tables, the phytoplankton was mainly composed of
diatoms, of which Chaetoceras boreale and C. densum were both common.
Fhaeocystis glohosa appeared to be rare. The zooplankton comprised
three Copepods, Acartia claiisi, Oithona similis, and Pseudocalanus
elongatics, moderately common. Calanus jinmarchicus was rare.

" Green Water." — It will be convenient at this point to compare the
foregoing with another sample (No. 40, Plankton Tables) taken on the
same date outside the " stinking water." This was at a position 16 miles

290 PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

S.W, of Lizard, where a catch of 500 mackerel was made. The water
appeared to be of a distinctly different type of a clear green tint. This
was considered by the fishermen to be in every way suitable for the
presence of shoaling fish. The examination of the sample showed
the following points. Zooplankton was in excess of phytoplankton.
This condition, however, was not brought about by a very pronounced
decrease in the quantity of diatoms, but by the increased number of
Copepods. Calanusjinmarchicus, which was rare in the former sample,
was common in the present one.

Between Samples 24 and 26, Plankton Tables, the former of which
was taken by fishermen in " green water " and the latter in " blue," and
from widely dissimilar positions, viz. 35 miles S.S.W. of Newlyn and
18 miles south of the Lizard, on May 5th and 10th respectively, there
did not appear to be any striking points of difference. In each zoo-
plankton was in excess of phytoplankton. The relative quantity of
phytoplankton of the " green water " sample, however, was greater
than that of the " blue water," although in the latter there was a slight
quantity of Fhaeocystis globosa, which was absent from the former.
A greater variety of diatoms was observed in the " blue water " sample
than in the " green," the higher proportion in the latter, already re-
ferred to, being due to two species, Rhizosolcnia alata and B. styliformis,
both plentiful.

In the main the zooplankton observed in each sample was similar.
The Copepod Temor« ^OTir/icomzs, however, occurred in the "blue water"
sample, whilst it was absent from the " green " ; but the more eastern
distribution of the species described under a former heading would
probably account for its absence in this sample of more western origin.

Samples 32 and 33, Plankton Tables, may be compared in a similar
manner. They are taken later in the season, but present no striking
dissimilarity.

No verified observations were taken in " grey water " except Sample
23, which, as stated in a footnote, would appear to be unreliable.

" Yellow Water." — In 1906, on May 20th, a sample was taken by
fishermen in such water 40 miles S.W. of the Bishop. Unfortunately,
however, the bottle containing the sample was broken in transit, and in
consequence the exact nature of the plankton was difficult to deter-
mine. It appeared, however, to be composed very largely of the two
Copepods Calanus finmarchicus and Pseudocalanus elongatus, and from
the appearance of the remains it seemed to have been a very bulky
sample.

This sample formed the sole observation from " yellow water "
furnished by fishermen during 1906 and 1907. Throughout May, 1907,

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY. 291

however, when the sea west of Scilly was, according to the fishermen's
statement, teeming with mackerel, " yellow water " was commonly met
with on the fishing grounds. An examination of the Samples 50 to 57
(Plankton Table No. II), all of which were taken either adjacent to or
on the fishing area during the international plankton cruise May, 1907,
will serve to show that throughout the area covered the samples taken
showed a certain similarity. Phytoplankton was entirely absent and
the zooplankton was confined almost entirely to three or four principal
forms, of which Calanus finmarchicus and Pseudocalanus elongatus were
the most important.

At one station, 49° 49' K x 6° 59' W. (Sample No. 52), the sea was
considered to be of a decidedly yellow tint, according to the statement
of Mr. D. J. Matthews, the leader of the expedition, and an analysis of
the very bulky sample showed that it was composed almost entirely
of the two species mentioned above, in almost equal abundance.

The possible inferences which may be drawn, therefore, from the con-
sideration of the foregoing observations can be briefly summed up as
follows : —

That in the "stinking water" sample, phytoplankton was in excess of
zooplankton, but that there was no evidence to show from whence
colour or smell were derived, beyond evidence of a negative character,
which would tend to suggest that the smell did not arise from the con-
dition of plankton. This suggestion is based upon the fact of an
almost equal quantity of phytoplankton occurring in the case of the
" green water " sample formerly referred to, " green water," according
to the fishermen's statement, being invariably free from smell. The
evidence offered by the analyses of " blue " and " green water " samples
would suggest that the plankton taken in such water was of a type
comprising a fair number of species in which, in the present examples,
zooplankton was in excess of phytoplankton. From lack of observa-
tions, however, it cannot be suggested that this is always the case.

Finally, with regard to "yellow water," the somewhat conflicting
opinions expressed by fishermen as to the causes which give rise to the
colour, already explained, would suggest that the yellow tint is ac-
counted for either by the presence of excrement arising from densely
shoaling fish or from the presence in large numbers of certain Cope-
pods. In view of the fact that several fishermen declare that light
catches of mackerel may be taken in " yellow water," and the evidence
offered by the analyses of certain plankton samples, it would appear to
be more probable that the coloration arose from the latter cause.
Were this view adopted, moreover, it would be strictly in accordance
with the theory already discussed, of mackerel being abundant where
food is plentiful.

292

PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

.-1

s8no^sn8A8s

S;iiiiii ^liiii ^-i^i^iitl

• dousig JO 'AiX-Ai'S "ai09

Sill t;iiii|:iiii!^i::iiiiiiii

■ doqsig jo -g x M 'uieg

giiiiiiiii^;iir:iiii^i'-^iiiii^ii

sauo^saaAag

^ 1 1 1 i^r;i 1 1 > f' 'Z '- 'Z 'Z ^ 1 ' 1 ' 1 I+ + +I-+I !■

• AlPS JO -Ai x-AV'S UI09

^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

■JPAi JO-jVl-g-Ai. -tnoi,

fJiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiis-iiJH^iiiiir;ii

S8nO'}SU9A9g

S 1 1 1 |f-+l is-l^-is^l^l i 1 1 1 1 IfHi + l+it.

1-H

• z 'a -^s^s

gllllllllllll^lllllll+lllllglCJ

• y -a ■'xns

giiiiiiiiiiii+iiiiiiiii+ioi+it<

• ■M,9So9X-jS[,if-„0S

giiiii;:+iiiii + iiiiiiir:i!-i!^i^ii-

• g -g -^B^g

g5iiiiiiii^;ii|:;iiii^;iiiiHiiir;^iii

l-H

pjBzii JO -g m 81

§iiii^iiiiiiit:iiiiii'^^iii+^"i^

s8ao^sn8A8g

Siiiii + ii^it:i + iiiiii^ii^i+!^l:ii

uX|Aia>i JO -j^-g-g -ingg

^lllllllllis-l^-l^lllllllllf-lj^lf-

-i

IJIOjVi. JO-Ai'g-S -lusi

glllll^-llllllj^lllllll^tll^+ioit-

CO
(M
CD
CO

sdiiisSaoT JO -^ -in eg

g^f-IIIIIIIIfH^t^+lllllllll + lOI + ll

S8U0^SU8A8S

53'-i-'i ii^i^i'!^^ + +-r'+t 1 1 1 1 if-(^r;i-- + f-+ii

• pjBziq JO -g^a -lus

*§ i^-i 1 1 i^uit. + +-i 1 1 1 1 i 'r I ioioi+ + j^

luioj aioq
-asnoH JO "Ai f -MSS -rag

*2 i + i 1 i + !«^i^; + + + tHi + ioii^ + j^

sdmsiJuoqjo -M? "AVN 'niot

*S l + l 1 1 1 |!-i+ + +^H^I^:i 1 1 |i-^; + +o|+i-m

■ JI0,tt JO "Ai. x-A\.-g -raf.!

*j^ 1 1 1 1 i + i 1 iti'^'^i i 1 1 1 1 1 i^i+|:;+i"^ +

• JlOAl JO -Aig -in OS

*2^l 1 1 l + l^lj^!'-l 1 1 1 1 1 l^+l l+!-lolt<

pjBznjo-gf -gx-Ai-g-iuos

*2 1 1 1 1 l + l 1 I'^^'-^l 1 1 1 1 1 l'-l^ + +lu|i-

CO
0*

• PJBZIT JO g x-Ai.-g -uici

** 1 + !:i^ + '-'+-^i it;i 1 i --^ \ V -^ a \ a -^^

• paBzn JO -g x-Ai-g -mg

*J3 l + l 1 1 1 i^i^;«-' + +i^;i 1 1 i^t-r;+ioitHfc-i

• UBiupoQ JO "Ai-S '^l

*« i^;i 1 i 1 ioi^ + + +i 1 1 1 1 i^i-i + ioi |t.j^

* ^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 lt>l^l++l 1 1 i 1 llli'^^l+lui^lj^

• JIOAi JO -g -in 05

* ^ !- \ 1 1 1=^1 1 i|:;i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \ t t ^ 1 i + i+f-f-

S9no^snaA8g

«'^^^S+i 1 i t + 'Z + '^ ^ 'Z ^ Z '■ Z + ^ + ^ 1 i+^it;

S8irOC(SU8A8g

oo + t-i l + l i|:;i^^i 1 1 1 1 irii i+i^<-i 1 \ + '" \ u

c«

S8U0;sa8A8g

i«;H!-.fHi + i 1 ir;fHr;r;|^i^;r;tHi i+^+i i^ + fHi||

^
«

S9U05SU8A8g

<D<- + |;]i + i 1 !r;uir;j;^!!-r;-!-i+i^i-ii:i«»-i{;;

• 8ioij8snoH JO 'AVg g "tne

*« ^- + ^.^o 1 ^- i+^H+i r;r; i + i i+ + ^; i Z Z + Z^t

aioipsnoM JO -g-g -tug

*»*+f-+!«i 1 1 is-iiiiiir;! i»-i i++iji:r:i+^|:;i

U^IA\9X JO -g -uis

♦ eof-f-f-i^+i^^i itH^Hi 1 1 1 |fc,r;i++i ir^i + ij^i

sguo^jsusAag

«^u^^'^^' 1 1 i^!i 1 1 1 1 ir;^i'a'-'i 1 1 i + iiS

auo^sXppa JO "Ai lu g

*^fHtH| |o| |^|+ + ^t,| 1 |t^|fH + + +| 1 |^;+|)

g am

■^ sc .

•so

^ . . . ...

g^bb-'" S

1 n-slll 11 ifltili fill il"4ll|1i|

q<l<5m« oo oo QfIqpHoK^JlJ'5

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY.

293

\ ■-- "z r. I

r; I I s- I I

II! Ill

I I I r I

r; + I !-, u + t- I I

I + ^

I I r;

III III

I I I I I

I I !- I I

+ I sh + r; I I I

I 1 ^ ^

+ I *- + =- I

I I I I I

I I r; I I

+ I 1^ I + I I I

I I I I I

O I I I o

I + I o I I I

I I !- I o

t< I t- I I I

n I ^ I III

I I I I I

I U I I u

■" \ I i^ I 1^1 I

o ^ I +

+ Z + +

I r; '^ I

I + "

I o

+ o

+ =- + +

f- + I +

.„ + ■'^ i I I I (H + I +

I o
I a

+ r; + "

I I I I I

+ 1^ + +

4- ^ tH ;-i

+ !H + ^r;i I ii^+i +

I ^

'^ +

I o

Jh O

I o

71 I

+ + + +

r; I I I I I ^ I

+ I + I u s- + +

+ + + s- I I I I + + I

+ + + ^Z I u n + " C +

I - + r; + '^ I +

r; o !- + + I I

1+^1 +

O -I- + (H I O

« I cj ?H o 4- I I

I z

I +

!- I + + f- I

tH ^, t, . . . ;h

^^ S-, -r^ ' ' I tH

I r;

+ +

I I I I I ^ ^

t ^ Zt

I I I I I

I I + I

+ r; I r; fa ^H I i i

I I I I I

I + I

I I + ^ r;

!- I I I I I + ^H

fa I + + +

+ fa fa I I I r; + I

^ I + fa o

fa fa + I I I r; fa r;

I + I

I I + r; r;

I I I I I I

I + + fa fa

I r;

I +

I O I + O I

a)
O

'3,

i •

•i .

So"

P-c

O
o

decipi
Cleve
doldii

•2

£
p

on3

C3
o

o
P.

ca o

-is! -C

OQQQ

o ^

-^ TO •

' ^ S g' ^ <^'" a::3 S

m^s

■as

iS S o g

r2 ^

fi-i O

ca ca

.2 •S'^ ^ P «

>5 5 3 =* -2 ^

g^ ca fa ^ rQ ■_■

o :0 «)s

la -M "

PhCO o

be N

.S J
bb -"^

v! - o'O
S ea a> n

1 3 ^'^
■§ =« « s

7^ S

^ s

—

o >

'bd^

«o

?■ .2 .2 '3

294

PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

ea
H

CO
C4

s9no;sn9A9g

«|f- l^llli^lllll IIJ-+ liHl

i-H

cloqsig JO •AVX'AV'S "m 09

Sll llllf-llllllll llll ^+1

l-H

• doqsig JO -gx-AV 'in fiS

g^i I'li^triiiiiiii llll i+t:

seuoqsuaAeg

551^ it;iiiiiiiiiii llll \ l^ \

• ^IIPS JO -M X -AVS -tn 09

So 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 11:1 1 S-, 1

JIOAV JO -AVfi'Ai "tnoi

??ll llll^llllllll llll l+l

i-i

S8lI0^SU9A8g

Joll I'-llt-ll^tHi^ii ll^i: '-+1

• I 'a '%ns

g^l lil^lllll^-lll ^111 tnOl

■ 9 -a -^ng

§n^ i^i^i^ii+£^ii lilt: S+i

i-l

•iS. ,98 c9 X "N ilf oOS

c§t;i iiii^-iii+^+ii llll ^"1

»o

• 5 'a n^g

wui iii^r;i + iii^-ii z!ii|: t ^ ^

o
1-1

p.iEziq JO -g -UI 81

gll l|!-ll + I^S-l>-|!- !h||| f-+l

I-l

s3uo;suaA9g

Sll llll^itll'^u^ll llll «-+!

nXiA\9N JO -AVS'S ■«! S8

^11 i + ii^H+iii-iiii 111^ ^;+i

+ J10Ai JO -Ai'g'S "in SI

g^ll lllll^lllllll llll 1^1

sduisSuoq JO -^ 'ui gg

IJii iiiiiiii^H^;tHir; iiii ++i

ssuo^snaAag

j^ii iiii^-iin^-i^Hi^^ llll ++I

■*
M

pjBzii JO -g f -g ra 8

*gl+ I^HfcH|^|;;||^- + ^-l^- +fcH + + + ^ \

oo
C4
CO

-C2_
w

C<t

00
OJ

• ^ujoj aioq
-asnoH JO 'Ai ? 'M'S'S "tn 5

*2l^ |+t,|i^fH|^ + f-+|t, !^(H|t. +'H|

sdinsSuoT JO -^ f "AVN 'm 01

*^ii ]i^--\i^i^'-'\+ + +'^ itlii +"i

■ JIOAi. JO "Ai X "AVS "in ?■[

• JPAi. JO -Ai'S ■«! 08

*Sll l^-^-^Ht^J^ + ^+U+ll lilt- +"l

piBzn JO 'g ^ 'g X -Ai'g "ui 08

*2i' i^^^i+'-'+i+^'+^i jt-t-i +"i

• P-iBziq JO -g X -AVS 'UI SI

* s i - 1 I: t: 1 ^ 1 1 1+ + + ^ 1 ^'Zu'z ++ •

*2i^ i+^i£^ii + + +^ £ ^11^ ++S

• pjBzn JO -g X-A\"g •tns

*2io ii;:iiiii+ + + +i +t- + + +01

UBHipoa JO "Ai'g "in I

■ 9007 JO 'g "in 9

*^1;h |^^||||||tH!HM«H| 4.t,^,tH + a \

* 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 + + IS- llll + 1

JIOAV JO -g -HI OS

SBUO^SUGAag

C5^l 'llllllllllll t^l'l u ^ ^

S8U0^SU8A9g

0011 llllllllllll^ 111^ s+l

S9U0^SU8A9g

l-ll lllllllllllll llll s+l

Oil

SaU0JSU9A9g

CO 1 1 lllllllllllll llll 1 u 1

I-l

9iouasnoi\[ JO -M'g'g -m 6

*>ot-l lllllllllllll llll 'Z. + u

eo
I-l

eioqasiioH jo -g-g -ni 9

* vj^ -^ ] illllllllllll llll u + '^

i-i_

1-1

u^|AV9jj JO -g -ni 8

*eoil illlllllll^^ll llll ^"J:

S9U0^SU9A9g

Od^l lllllllllllll llll |CJ|

9u0'jsippa JO -Ai 'UI g

*rH+l +^;illllllllll llu'-' 1: + -

Hcc .

■so

. . ^ . . ....

■■■■•■ ■ 1 g

^ i • -M S^

03 a „''-'^|i( ^ -^ 60 -g M • .2 CO .„- .... . O"^
S -S -J :? 1 ^ r-S ^ & , . a . g . • • - • ^ 1 §)

III 1111111.1111111 1 lilt Jill

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY.

295

>ii"tI + +iii'''i'^+' + i ii^;;ii^t-i>-«-i lilt- tH II

^;i:g^iirii'-ii|:;+i"i ii^it'-+ii^i ii^-^ t- ^^i

^;lgl + lll'-l + l'-+lgl ii>-ii++i>-.ii iiifH ^ +1

o|;; + t.u|llili]l(-,^^i-tH IIIIII + I^hii ii;|^i <~ + 'z

r;^giiii!-Ki + it-+igi + 11 " 1 +1

t:;igr;i^iiit-it-i^+i«i iit.|j;^i + iii-i t!ii^ ^ +i

+ i + ii-iiij:!i^i»-+i++ ii^<ii>H+it.t-i ^ tl ^ ^ + ^ i.

oi+;-t-,t-iiiiii+oiur; ^^i'ii>-+i|r+i iiif- >- ^;^;

■-^ \ + t z 'z i ^ 'z ^ ^ ^ ^ "z ^ + ■- iiit:i^'^ii+^ 111^ <- l:i

^;|olr:lll + lll^;+lg^ i t: t: ^ + t lilt; ^ ^t:

^r;=^ii;iii + iiiu+i"i iiii^i + ii>-i iiij^ t; r;i

^-ior;iiiir;i=Hi^!Hi++ it^+ii+t.ii^oi iii^ " + +

t:iSilIiii^i|li'^+i + i iif-iii + ijil+i i'«-^.i + ^1

+ t"il!^!!ii'-'i'-'iz;+i"i it-+iit:+ii + i t!ii^ " ^1

tHf-tH|||||||||||||| lll^il'-llll^ llll ■" ^ ^

+ i+l:l:ii:i + i'-iu+i+^ ii"^^;iiii+t: iii^ >- ^ z

4-t- + r;^-ii! + i<-ii-+i + i ii"^^i'-i«H + ^ ii^S + 'Z '^

+ |o + t.+ ir^;-l|^|i.+ l++ ||;.i,l4.i,|+4.| iii^H 4- t,^

"i+»-'"+ii + ir;ii'-i++ ll^;t.|c3^-,|4-(-,| lilt-, + ^tH

+ n + +^+ll"l'-ll + '++ ll++lo>-l++l III! + ^ +

"i+ + '-!:ii"i«-'i^+i+t^ i«- + t;i+'-i^^+i ll^-^: + ■'^ +

CI«-,0 + f-|||0|+^tH+| + | I^^Ot-^jtH^IOfc, llltH + tH-f

"^" + + ^;ii + i^l:l:+i+'- i+ot:if-ii^ + j: ii>h+ o + +

"r; + + + +ii^iii|:;+i+fH |^. + ^i+^i+4.|-; iii^h o ;h +

U|+fc.fc,(H||||«lfcH+|0+ 11+1^1 + 11+4-1 llltH + t^^H

"l+t!'^'-lt!ll + l++il! + ^ lll<-l"+l+>-l III^H + ^^ -^

+ l+!-'!-+l^ll + l-+|U+ ^,||(-.|00|+t-| llll O tH!-,

+ l: + z!^l:t;if-t;^i=-+i" ii^tH+ii^ii!-!:; ii^;^- + '-''-'

+ ^'-i'-t;iiiiii--t;iii iiitiii'-iiii llll + +1

^^+l'-'|||||||^-!-l + | ||||^||++|t.| IJ-t^l o t^^

ni + i^iiiiiii«---i + i iiiiii+t;it-i it!^i + ^1

r;i + iiiiiiiii'-'=-i'-'i ii^-iii + iif-i \ ^ 'Z ^ 'Z ui

ii + iz:iii-iiii:+i + i ^;iu^i|^+ii^i 11^'+ + + 'z

r;i + iiiii;-.iii!-+i + i it!t!i^ii'^iitli ii»-+ + ^-r;

ii + iiiiir;iiir^+i + i iiiiii^-iiii ii+t< + +

liai^^liiiiiii^i;-,^ llulll^ll|l!l lllf- 1 II

*-|!-i|++|||l||| + |+tH IIIIIIS'IIII ll-l-l U II

Crustacea copepoda.
Acartia Clausi, Giesb
Anomalocera Pattersoni, R. Temp.
Calanus Hnniarchicus, Gunn
Candacia pectinata, Brady
Centropages typicus, Kroyer
Corycaeus anglicus, Lubb.
Euterj)e acuti Irons, Dana .
Isias clavipes, Boeck
Metridia luceus, Boeck
Microsetella atlantica, Brady .
Oithona nana, Giesb

plumifeia, Baird

siniilis, Glaus. .
Paracalanus parvus, Glaus.
Parapontella brevicornis, 0. F. Mull
Pseudocalanus elongatus, Boeck.
Temora longicornis. 0. F. Mull.

Crustacea cetera.

Anchialis agilis, G. 0. Sars

Apherusa Clevei, G. 0. Sars

Carididae larvae

Cirripedia larvae

Euthemisto gracillipes, Norman

Evadne Nordnianni, Loven

Nauplius

Nictypbanes Couchii, Bell
Podon intermedius, Lilljeb.

Zoeae

Megalopa stage .
Mollusca.

Clione limacina
Gasteropoda larvae .
Lamellibrancbiata larvae .
Limacina retroversa, Flem.

T^micata.

Oikopleura dioica, Fol.

Vcrtebrata.

Fish ova

larvae . . . . .

fH ^

296

PLANKTON STUDIES IN KELATION TO

_ ^

i-i

• u.^i-wa^ JO •§ -in ee 1

^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

•A
1-5

■ JPAi JO -Al'S -ui OS

S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' 1 1 ^ 1 1 1 1 1

• donsig JO 'Ai'S'AV 'in 08

^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

r-C
00

JPAlJO-Ai'S'A^. •UI09

S 1 1 1 1 1 1 : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

8I0ii8sn0K JO "Ai'S '^a £5

g 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

dotistg JO ■A\."N;"Ai. "^ ST

2§ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

t-(
I-

• z "a ■'x^\%

^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

• 9 -a -^B^s

g 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

■^

■■AV,98o9X-N,to o6f

S 1 1 ' 1 1 1 1 1

• So -a -^j^is

^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

••AV;0IoiX->i,s^„6f-

^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

■■Ai ,6S„9X-j^,6to6?'

g 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

• 9 -a •^'Jis

g 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 z:

1-<

• • 08 -a "ins

g 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ^ 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1

■ dousig JO -gx 'A^ -ra ss

§ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

• JIOAV JO "M'S "ui 01

*«iiii^iiiiir:iiiiiii^:r:ii^

1-1

sduisSuoT JO "M "oi OS

*j:iiiit"iiiii!-^iiiiiiiiiiii

T-l

• sduisSuoT JO "Ai 1 -^ -in oi

♦ ^iiii^H + iiiiiiiiir;ii

9uo;siauuna JO ■ Ai. f "M x "S'lu ! t

♦ ^iiii + iiiii + iiiiiiiiii:^!

r-l

p-iBziq: JO •A\. ? -AVS 'ni fg

*^ 1 1 1 i+^-it.iccr;i 1 1 1 1 |i:-i + i +

1-1

pjBzn 8q; JO "S "ui SI

*S ' 1 i^: + t:i^i+=^i 1 1 i^!i ir;ii^i +

^uioj TiBuipoa: JO -Aix -g -in ii

**^IIII+^^|1-|00||||||||^^||0

800T JO -Ai. ? 'S "lu SI

*5h I 1 ir; + t-^;+it-ui i i i i i i i i ir;o

pjTJZiT JO -Ai-g "ni 91

* ^ '-^ Z ^ Z + + 'Z ' i!-+i ifHf-i^;^: ir;io

O
r-l

pjBziTjo -AIX-AVN '"lO

*g |||^HU«|||t-0|||||||llll +

PS
<

• cijb;sJO-A!iI 'M-X-s -oiig

*Sg 1 1^1 \ + i +'Z + o'Zt"+ ^ i + i 1 1 'S

—

1 s

•Sffl
|d

<! CD

H CC
O tn

Diatomaceae.

Asterionella japoniea, Castr.
Bacillaria paradoxa, Gniel.
Biddulpliia mobiliensis. Bail.
Cerataulina Bergonii, Perag.
Chaetoceras boreale. Bail.

contortum, Schtitt

convolutum, Castr. .

danicum, Cleve

debile, Cleve

deeipiens, Cleve

densuni, Cleve .

Schiitti, Cleve .

teres, Cleve
Corethron hystrix, Hensen
Coscinodiscus excentricus, Ehbj

Grani, Gough .

oculns iridis, Ehbg. .

radiatus, Ehbg.
Ditylum Brigbtwellii (West)
Eucampia zodiacus, Ehbg.
Guinardia flaccida (Castr.)
Hyalodiscus stelliger. Bail.
Lauderia borealis, Gran. .

THE WESTERN MAGKEKEL FISHERY,

297

I I I I I I I I I I I

I ^H I + + 1 +

I I I I I I I I I

r;r;i i i i i t, + + ■- + \

+ ■■^ + \ Z ^ I i++^+i

'" Z '" +

+ fc-+ir;i I 1+ + ^^^

+ f- + -i-^i- + r;i ir;

I I I I I I ^ I I I I

^^ + ^^1 ' i+*^i^n

+ .C Z

Z + '" '-^ ^ I ' I I + '-^ I i' \ S-i

i + i I I I I \ --I + t-, \ I i"ir;

^ • tc -53

.^^

. cs

^ a

^SI

■« o

P o

^ N

l-H

CD ^

PhM

iS -M

t:"

'a,
*3

>r3

;:g

•3

o xi

'CO

'73

£f

CBM

a«

<»

OQCO

a> o

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

s • • ^

. . . •___i-l • u)oQ a • • • -r^

-^ '^kS S Ch * £ c ^ 2 . s

-^ _-^S.ts '3rtS^'g!s S

^ — S. „ .2 T3 := .2 >< s M c = _- g

<D -j:; • — o <u in

n ' +

ly?

._<

=i3

'^'i

5
o

298

PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

I— I d

1— 'i*'

1-1

• uXiAva^ JO -g -ui eg

S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

• JIOAi JO -AVS -Ui 05

©I ..|.,,t,tH, Ill ^'.l Sh

«*

• doqsiajo •jil-S'M."ino8

^ i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

.-1

• ilojA. JO -Ai-g-Al -UI 09

S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

eioiiasnoM jo 'g -01 gg

llll 11^ riiiiii^

10 llll 1 1 ^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 .^

i-i
00

• doqsig jo 'ii'N'Ai. "in 81

00 1 ■ . . ^ . E_i

S iiii^iiiiiiiii'-t^iiii

I 'a '^Bis

n 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

»-
^

s -a •^s'^s

s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

r-l

••Ai,98o9X-N,^S„6t

IS iiiii^if-iiiiiiiiiiii

es -a '^iJis

^ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

• 'AV ,01 oi X -N ,9f .6f

s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1-1

• 'Ai ,65 o9 X -N ,6^ „6f'

U3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

9 "a "i-e%S

Ui llllllllllllllj^ll^ll

08 "a '^uis

g lllllll^l^lllllllllll

• doqsig JO -g x "AV 'ra 83

S iiiiii^i^i'^iiiiii^ii

'* 'III lltnlt^l^Hllllllt^ll

1-1

• JIOMJO "AVS "uiOl

** Illl^lllllS-IIIIIIfc-ll

1-1

*5 llll lllll^:^lll^-lll^;l

• sdiqsSuoT JO -Ai ? -^ -ni oi

*« iiiiSi^iii'-i^;i^ii^t:i

CO
rH

eno'^sisuunH JO-AV ?"Ai. x 'g "m ?i

*« ;:iii^:iiiiii^ii:^ii;:ii

1-1

pji'zn JO -Ai ! ■M.S in f 6

*5 ^ iiiiiiit:z:i!:l:'

CO
i-<

• pjBzii JO -g -in et

*M ^iii?:iiiiiii^i^ii?:ii

CO
l-(

• uBnipoa JO "Ai X -g -in n

*« ^111 iiiiiii!^-i^:ir;f:ii

1-1

8001 JO 'AV f -g -in St

*5S t ,^,,,^1^^,^^,

I-I

pjBziT JO •Ai.-g -m 91

4c ^ llll 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

o
l-(

•pjBztijo -Aix-Ai-K •rag

«g 1^!'' Illlllllllllllll

■ ^-itJIS JO 'Ai 1 ■A\.x -g -ni IS

* ^ till Illlllllllllllll

tcz c"

tnpq

^^ -
-g

•

=s _:
CQ ^ . .

e " ' ■

2 . . .T: . .

3 cs . . E=H-f f=^^ sc-g .03 .:2 ,• -J

8 11 1 llll -ilsll ""llll

1 l-s ||8||SIJp&|ll^i|

Oh ^h <jmoHWOWi-iSSoofiH phoq

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY.

299

1 + 1

U f-i

1 1 1

1 '"

o t-

t->

1 + 1

1 ^

Z 1

1 + 1

i.+

\ 1 1

1 f-

+ + +'Z

u
u

1 + 'z

1 f-

i->

1 1

1 + I

t 1

£ 1 1

1 !-i

+ + 1

1 Sh I

1 f^

1 1

1 1- 1

I 1

t 1 1

1 +

" 1

1 ■" 1

1 I:

1 1

1 + 1

'f~> 1 1

1 ^

i-1

-t

1 + 1

1 +

!-i

t.1

u -^ 1

"!:

tH 1 1

o t-

^:+ 1

1 f-

1 1

1 + 1

+ ^-

t> 1 1

1 1

1 + .1

1 t-

^ tl
u ^

1 +'Z

+ 1

t- 1 I

^ +

1 + 1

1 (-

>- 1

1 + 1

+ 1

t- 1 1

1 ►-

f->

1 + 1

1 +

1 1

1 + 1

i^ 1

1 1 1

1 +

s +

1 + 1

1 1

1 1 1

u 1

t- 1 1

1 s-

-o ,

1 ■"

1 1

1 1 1

f^ 1

1 1 1

1 1

Z 1

1 1 1

1 1

1 + 1

U 1

+ 'Z 1

1 +

o +

S+ i

1 s-i

;-. I-,

1 + 1

+ t:

t- 1 1

1 o

&-•

% 1

+ + z

fc- '

(.1

1 f- 1

M ^;

o
o

^- 1

1 ■"

C' 1

i:+ 1

1 +

^
^

(.1

^ I

^ + 't

+ 1

t^ ;- 1

1 ■"

" +

+ +

x. - ■

1 +

t.1

- + t:

+ sh

-i 1

I +

« +

+ +

t-. " '

1 +

tl f-l

'^ + 1

f- 1

- + 1

1 ^-

+ «J

'Z ^ 1

1 +

;- u -^

+ 1

t 1 1

Z '"

f-l

+ <^

+ 1 1

1 +

(4 .

>^ 1 1

+ 1

fc. t- 1

1 1

+ + + +

+ <^ 1

1 1

f-t

f-i r' 1

o ^;

(.1

"^ + 'z

1 1

;-.

o o

o 1 1

1 t-

1.1

^ ^

f^ + 1

o J^

C-i

+ s- I

1 1

■"

u o

u 'T I

^ ^

^
^

U ^

+ + ^

+ 1

+ 1 1

1 1

t.
t-

u o

+ 1 1

■" +

1 1

•05C

'C? s

^"3

1 ^- 1

+ 1 "

1 1 1

1 - ^: ^ ^ «- 1

1 1 1 « 1

1 + 1

1 'Z >

1 1 1

1 1

1 1 1

+ 1 ;:

t-i 1 1

1 1 r; + I- + 1

111 +

■-' + 1

1 'Z 1

1 1 !-

1 1

'Z '^ 1

1 'T ■"

+ 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 + o

11^1

1 1 1

1 tH 1

1 1 1

■-

•'p. •^•-z

c o S

.."^-^^25 2 . i 2 ^

I S S •- ^ .2 S s § " - S2 g S -s
si^ ^ e3 o ce pu,.^ p pg -O 5 !- ® ^

e.2!«j:yortP.'oT3a.513og
S b o ts ^ -ti r^i^ S -2 .s a S 3

„ o

;S S g 2 2 s

^ O ^ - o I

2 c« ai .2 "J ^

-^ M =*, ■Ts 'a

• O T)

• as.

iri: e.>.

a> 0)

ci-^ca.3s>^v:^ooo

-Sis

e ;:

U, -S <=•

S r-5 « .2 -2

S O ti^

CO en

300

PLANKTON STUDIES IN RELATION TO

<1
CO

O
H

Q
O
o

_ M

sano^snaABg

0-1

'HO+|++|tHtHt.

1 1

1-^

dousig JO "Aix -Ai'g "la 09

^oj;;^; + o i ^^ ■» ^

1 1

• donsia JO "AiX -jii'S "tu 09

■■r^ ^ U -r. + V 1 f^+^H

1 ,

• cIoi[S!a JO -gx-AV -uies

^g^+SSi^^i

' eo

• doqstg JO -g X -Ai "ui eg

us
00

^ g+^ + + 1 1 +S

1 1

S8U0')SU8A8g

P-t

" + " ' 'Z '^ ''^ 1 ll!'"

1 1

Xlipg Jo-AiX-M.'8 "0109

1 1

jfnrog JO -Aix-Ai's "uiog

^ g 1 t. + CJ 1 1 tH 1

1 1

• }\0M. JO -Ai'S'Ai "wi Oi,

-- 1 ^++ 1 ---

1 <=>

•a

• JPAi JO -AVg-Ai •!« Oi

l:g^^ + « 1 *- + JH

f- 1

S9U0^SU9A8g

i-t

+ + ^1:; + + + '- + +

+ 1

I 'a "^Big

o
eo

O+tH 1 co^l+ot-

1 1

ffi)

.-1

9 'a '^ins

^ + 'Z 'Z 'Z + '-^ + + ''^

1 1

■Ai ,98 o9 X -N ,lf .05

00
04

^"^++S^+"^

1 1

JlOAi JO-gx-M-raos

•-•
I-

^g::^ + +i+^^

1 1

•o

1-t

e 'a "5b;s

^o^ + + c3 1 (Hur;

1 1

S8U04SU8A8g

'-'S^'^++ 1 CJ + U

1 1

• doqsia JO -a^S'S 'tnoi

Z + + 1 "^ + +^2 +

1 1

o
i-i

1-1

• pjBziT JO -g -lu 81

1 O 1 1 ilH + !-, C3 (H O

o 1

• pjBzn JO -g -ra 81

^ "^ 'Z 'Z '"^ + + '^ + "^

+ 1

•a

Xng JO 'M'S'S 'ni SS

+ 0fcH!-, + O 1 ++0

1 1

«-(

• ♦JlOAl JO "M'SS 'OISI

eo
CI

(H >H 1 1 1 1 \ ^ t- S-.

1 1

CO
C4

sdiqsSuoi JO "jsi 'in eg

1;;; (-, 1 1. + t, 1 o j;; 1

o o

o eo

• sdiiisSuoi JO "ij "lu 58

++t+++z++^

" 1

sauo'jsnaAag

1-1
C4

+ + ^ + + + 1 + + ^

" 1

eioipsnoM jo "av? "Ai'SS 'in S

0+t>+!H + +tHfH +

^ 1

sduisSuoq JO -jsi i "Ai'N «' 01

00
iH

CJ++U+ + + + + +

S 1

• JIOAV JO -AiX-AV'S "tn^l

1-1

o + t-a++j, + o +

t> 1

■ JPAi JO 'Ai'S "in 08

1-<

oot,o + + 1 a a +

■■^ 1

pjBZiT JO -Aif "M-X 'Al'S "M 08

00+ + + +J-+00

!- 1

pjBzjT JO -AiX -jVi'S 'ui SI

1-1

cj + + t: + + !- + + =^

+ •

i-i
C4

• JPAi JO -Ai. S 'tu 03

+ +i'-" + S 1 ^ a

S 1

■ JIOAV JO 'AV-'S 'uiOS

o
1-1

+ + 1^ !-. + O 1 t,0 +

"§

1-1

PB8H S8A1 -g JO -Ai'N'iSI '"I 9Q

i^ o

1-1

S8U0^SH9A8g

+ fH fH 1 ^ 1 1 1 1 +

1 1

sauo^suaAag

t; + ^;i^+i^ + "

1 1

i-H

S8n0^SU9A8g

f^+^H 1 fc-+ 1 !h+ +

1 1

(

i-t
00

1-1
«

i-t

S8nO^SU9A8g

j^ + 1 1 tH tH 1 fc, O ^^

1 1

aiouasnopi jo 'AVft'S 'i" 6

!/}

1 i: 1 u 1 u 1 u ^ +

Op-|o

9ioii8snoK JO 'Ai'S'S 'ni 6

i+r;iH + +i Z + +

1 1

• gpnasnoH JO "a'S 'm 9

^+1 '- + +I ^""

1 1

S8nO:(SU8A8g

1 " t: 1 t! *- ^ t: " 1

1 1

• ujCiAV8i«s[ JO "g "ra 8

><<

1 + 1 (H ^ + 1 1 \ O

O 1

• uXiA\9K JO -g -ui 8

1 + 1 ^; + + 1 1 o +

1 1

c
o

C
Oi

Ph
II
PU

-c

m
II

CC!

"Ph

• a)

^3
o
u

.'^

o n

^ HI
tod ---

3 * "S

ri^ ^ O >->

o -— o

O 3 r^ O

= £ 5 2&^ >- Ph

o .:; -5 _S . -2 >,
^ S '^ 1 ^ ?c^ 6^1 =g

3 ^ c -g 2 S S S Tc^ £>
<!OoSpHPHHe<3a;OPH

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY.

301

1-1

nX[AV8^ JO 's ui gg

2-g. + g 1 ++ ,

1 <=>

• uAiA\aM JO •§ -UI gg

w^,o 1 t,„t,^, + t-

1 1

• JIOAV JO -AVS "tu OS

1 1

>!*<

• clonsiajo -Ai-g-AVuiOS

5SS^^+|!^+I

1 1

>-i

■JIOAiJO -Ai-g-.W -Kigg

1 1 g^ 1 g ^ ^ 1 1

1 <=>

• doiisig JO -Ai-g -tn Qf

0^+1^00 + ^ 1

1 ^^

•JIOAIJO -Ai'S'Ai •UI09

2"s>s 1 sj: 1

1 •*

' T-H

•JIOAiJO -AVSAVuiog

S 1 S^ + - 1 S- 1

1 1

• u^iAiax JO -gx -AVS 'tn g^

g J-, O !- i- O . j^ . ,

2 iH O tH tH O 1 "^ 1 '

I <=>

• eioiiasnopi jo -g 'lu gg

1 1

aiouasnoK JO 'AVg '0109

O + 0+'Hg+tH+ 1

1 "=>
1 M

§? •

eioqasnopi JO -aL'S -ui 08

+ fH + +0g!H| 1

1 t^

• JIOAV JO ■JA.'S "ni 58

+ S + + S--1: 1

doqsiajo •Ai.-N'AV "nisi

gco^^g^^^c

■ I "a -jBig

P-t

5; + oo,g + iH+i

1-H

• -Q "a ■%^?i

•Ai98"9X-N:f'6"6^

S + +'-'-S'^ + + 1

00
i-H

• 55 'a -^Big

S^gi+g + ^^+i

<-l

■AVOT'iX-Jsrs^W

gog^H^g^^l 1

1-1

•Ai.i5'9x-x -e^-et

g ^ S 1 1 S 1 1 1 1

i-t

• 9 -a -iBig

go + + +o + t,+ 1

■ -OS 'a '%in's

g + g^ogl l+PH

■ AlPS JO -Ai'g -UI 05

1 -S 1 ^S 1 + 1 1

1 o

■ doiisia JO -Ai. -UI 0^

o-g 1 -g 1 ^ 1 1

o
1 o

i-l

• JIOAV JO -Ai-S "tn 5t

§-g 1 -S 1 + 1 1

1 1

S ■ 8

oqasnoK Jo -g X -AVg -ui 05

g + O 1 1 O O tH 1 1

o
1 o

«it .

doqsjajo -Al-g^AV 'vi 9

00 »H O fH p.^ O . . .

1 (M

doqsia JO -g X -Ai m S5

0> t- O ' iH O ' ' '

1 o

doqsia JO -g X M. "UJ 85

§^gt^"l+l^

1 1

doqsia JO -g -in ^I

g^S 1 tS 1 1 1 1

1 o

• doqsia JO 'Ai'S •01 85

s j:s 1 ^s 1 1^1

. O

1 O

81Bsni3 JO -Ai-gg -in o^

S 1 o 1 1 o ^ g 1 ?;;

doqsia JO -NX-Al •ra08

CO t^ O 1 (- U 1 1 1 >H

+§

r-l

doqsia JO -g X "Ai "UI 58

0> ' O ' t, O *^ ' ' t-i

o
1 o

r-l

JlOAl JO -Al-g-Al •in 09

55 1 o 1 1 + ^; 1 1 +

• doqsia JO -Al "ra os

g 1 g ^ s " ^ 1 1 1

■ JIOAVJO -Ai-g-g -uios

g 1 g 1 t S 1 1 1 1

JIOAV JO 'AVS 'lu 01

« + gi.(HO + + +^-

S 1

sdfqsSuo^ JO -^ -UI 05

o 1

«o

1-1

sdtqsSaoi JO "Ai | "N "lu ot

»P-,tlUiH+0++(H

o 1

302

THE WESTERN MACKEREL FISHERY.

Pi
<l

pq
-^

!Z5

O
H

P
o
o

• (aniss raojj) eiJiuuAviJoj jgo

w^ II :• 1 1 II 2 1 o

CD
i-H

• (auras roojj) aainaj; sO

^§ 11 1 II 1 1 g 1 g

gno^s^ppa JO -AVS "ni 05

cow 1 ^ I: g o 1 1 1 1 ^

• eno^sjCppa JO -M-'S'S '^ 01

M^ 1 ^ ^ " 1 11+ 1 2

• auo'jsj^ppa JO -g-g -in g

W2M ^ + t '-^ '-' II ° 1 ^

rH
t-

eno^SiCppa JO -g-s'S 'm f

COM 1 ^; ;^ o + 1 1 o 1 O

■ auo^sjCppa JO -g -in si

«^« 1 1 1 sg 1 1 S 1 }e

• ano^s^ppa JO 'HX -g-g -ra i

cow II 1 o o 1 1 4- 1 ^

• ano^^s^Ippa JO -Ai -in gi

OQM 11 1 II 1 1 S 1 ""

i-H

1-H

«*<
rH

• ano^SiCppa JO -g "ta oi

coeo 'tl^g" II '-' I'*

• auo^SiCppa JO -a-g -tn zi

OCM 1 ^ ^ g ^: 1 I ^ 1 vo

auo^sXppa JO -g -ra f

OQeo 1 + + " " 11 o 1 00

auo^s^ppa JO •M.'S "ra 08

C0« 1 + + O O g 1 1 1 00

00
C4

• %iv%s JO -a-g -UI 0^

ooo! r;^Ht,gfH II 1 ioo

ano^sXppa JO ■fS.'S'S '^ 6

cow t! + + S " II + 1 He. !

• eno^SiCppa JO -gx 'Ai.'g 'ni 0^

MW 1 + + g + ^ 1 c 1 S

aiioiSiCppa JO -M'S 'UI OS

mS S+ + 01 si: I o 1'

eno^sXppa JO -gx -Ai •ni 9

O^g 1 1 1 S g 1 1 o 1 o

ano^sjCppa JO 'a'S'a 'in 5

mS 1 + + g S 1 1 ^ II

• eno^sjCppa JO -AVH'Ai. "m 8

C0C4 n^.^o^^l 1 1 1

CO
CO

• ano^s^Cppa JO •A'N '^ 9

OJN |+ + g+g| o lO

• aooT JO -a'g "ni^

O^l -+ + g+ o 1 - 1 o

• jCxiapuAVog jjo •in 8

«,S -o + go +- ?: o 1 :

"H .... .... i..

t-
c«

ano^sXppa a^I'J i^^K

corH (H+ + OH t-|^ r; f-1^

• ano^s.Cppa JO "Ai.'g 'ni 8

M^ + f- + g fH 1 1 1 1 5

!;nioj UBrapoa Jo 'jWX "8 "ni U

Ph*^ ot^oot.++ 1 g 1

• ^nioj; n^uipoa Jo 'a'g •« St

a^s ++ + g j: 1 1 1 1 5

luioj UBrapod JO "g 'ra g

QCS +^ + g| 11 1 Imv

aooi JO -g -m g

Cc2 +H + g H ^ ?: 1 + 2 r

• aooT JO 'Ai. f -g -m ei

0-,5i ++0 0+++I gl

Tj<

• pjBzn; JO -g "in 21

ccS 11 1 II II 1 1 o

'J*

ano^s^Cppa JO 'Ai-g "ni oi

CcS 1 tH + O 1 1 g 1 g '^

CO
0*

• '^J'BIS JO -AlJ-AVX-g-rais

plh« 1 ^- + o ^; ^. t. 1 +1

(punoio uo) ^jB^g JO -g -m sg

rn:2 ^^1 f-Ot. ,0 OO
COrH ^1 ^ cifc,lo ' 0<0

H
<!

Pofiitions where samples
were taken.

S = Stomach. P = Plankton

Sample No. .
Species.

Acartia Clausi, Giesbr.
Calanus finraarohicus,Gunn
Pseudocalanus elongatus,

Boeck

Temora longicornis, 0. F,

Mull

Zoeae.
Sagitta bipunctata, Quoy

and Gaim,
Oikopleura dioica, Fol.
Young Fish or Crystallo-

gobius ....
Phytoplankton, chiefly

Phaeocystis globosa

Scherftel
No. of Mackerel taken in

" hundreds" .

(Hundred = 120 fish)

Journ. Mar Biol Assoc , Vol. Sm.

Pioie am.

»6"

PISTRIBUTION or SPECIES CHART.

APRIL I906.

ditto.

di»o.
• *ach instiince.

™ • • ■= Ca/anus finrnarchicus c

Kj Q o ^ P&eudocalanus €fangof-ue .

A A A = Temora fongicornii

H H ■ = Phaeoct/stis gtoboia
Th* left hant^ sign marks posih'on

Tht tign (D under />/an*/or, opsermficm - ZOOfHaiiKton
m excest of phiftoplanliion ® = M« r,,en«

The Figures atore ifie signs dtnofe Ifie daif of
/he month. Figures htlon /he signs (^enoi-e iftt
nuntitr of maciere/ taken on /he spot tif /ha
restel n/iich attain cd /ha f>/an/c/t>n sam/>/».

Jourrt. Mar. Biol. Assoc. ..Vol. Sm.

Plate Xg.

51°

5(r

c.^.

• o

•o

•o
CD

PISTRIBUTION or SPECIES CHART.
MAY 1906.

• ••

Ooo

Cafanus finruarchicus cc i c ar-f- ; rarrr.
P.ieudoca/anu3 ttorjgatus dilfo.

^ A * = Temera longicornis. di/tu.

I B • =■ Phatoci/sf-is glolrosa. dilfo.

The lift hand sign maris f>os/f/'cn in aacA inskinct .
fht sign ^ undtr ptankton oHtrrahonS' xtOflanKlt.
in excass of phytoplankton . © - Ihm rmrsm .

The rigarti atart Ih* aigns dtnvf^t /fit dai) of
f/i« month. Figt4res l>aiof¥ fft€ signs denote Mia
number of macAere/ /-aktn on /fit spof >y /he
resse/ ntiich obf-ained ffie p/ank/on sample .

OAI

Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, Vol. MT.

piafe n:.

50"

2.000.

«^^' ®

PISTRIBUTION or SPECIES CHART .
JUNE 1906.

W0»' Ca/anus -finmarcfiicus cc; C or-r;r orrr.
O O o = Fseudoca/anus tlongatus. dffto.

Mk. ^ * " Timora /oneff'cor/t/'s. difto .

H ■ ■ - Phaeocysh'a glo^osa. vlitto.

Th« l*ft hand sign marfcs />03iYion in tacA nth't*.
The sign ®, under plankhn ot>sirrafiffns cn/y "
xooplankton ingxctss (^ f>fii/fo/>i,ntlfvn.®' the rerersa.
7h* Figurts ahr* Ift* signs dtno^t /ft* day of lf>*
mon/fi . figttixs ^elO¥/ /he si^ns dtnoft /h* number
ofmaeAert/ fi>ien on /fie Sf>o/. if/ /fit ratsti n/iiefi
ot/ia/ned Iht ^lant/en aamfilt.

Journ. Mar Biol Assoc, Vol anc.

Plate 2Xr.

6°

1 DISTRIBUTION or SPECIES CHART.
APRIL 1907 .

W# • - Calanus -finmarchicus cc,cor + , r orrr.

12.

LJO o a Pseudocn/anus e/cngo/us e/i/fa.

S.OOO

AAa < Temora longicornis dilf-o.

51°

!■■• P/iaeocysh's globosa ditto,
Tfia /eff- hand sign marks position in tach ins&iKt

.g'H

The sign (S) under plankton obseryaNons only =

11.

•OA

■zooplankhn in excess <^ phyloplanklon .®- Ihe nttrx

•°l

The Figures atore A» signs denote ffie day of

ifie month. Figures baton tfie signs denote ifie

•oH

'*'** #0

lOO

nun^ber of mactteret f-atten on Ifie spot t>u

■

Hie vessel nhich obtained tfie p/ankton samptt.

•OAI

o.(D

/A/-— — '^ "V^l

>OB

J •S4"

■^ 1

•9^" ^^

r .., .6>V-

N-rs^

CD y^

1*.

•^■[ ^

-^x^^

5.orf^ •oA

50°

•Oai

] _

}

•°st" L

.^§-.-

J6 _

•OAH
©

•oaB

10.

•c

• OA
SCO

•»■

ESO

•O

IZOOO

•o

4,000

5°

Journ. Mar. Biol Assoc , Vol 311.

Plafe SHI.

6°

PISTRIBUTION OF SPECIES CHART. |

MAY IS07.

"• • • Ca/anus ffnmarc/ttCUS
Uo o • Pseudocalanus tlongai

cc 1 c or-f-i rorrr
us diHo.

Jk A A - Ttmora longicornis . dilto
H 1 ■ = Phatocysh't globoia. di/fe

The feft hand stgn rrtarlcs fv$ihon in etch ins/ate*.

Tht tign ® undar plankton otsertahoni onli/ —

zoeplankton m excrtt of pfii/foe/anktan.@' Idt ntirst.
Tht Figurtt atort Iht signs dt/toft /fie dag ef Iff

mon/lj Figurtt l>llow <*5« sigm dlnete ifil num^f

of mackersl ruiren on iff tpot tg Ifit tftsst/ idiidh

otta'intd lilt flanklon aamp/t .

▲

/— ^.o^W^

^1 ^'^

4 000
40000 _,' * ^iffOflP

•b

17 20 OOO.

•o

so. 000

•8*

•oA

«>.000

I'-

W\J^ 2.000.
AO.OOO

l«. 2 OOO

•O

4.000 '

14 _

•OA i

to 000

•OAB

50"

Journ Mor. Biol. Assoc, Vol. SIII._

Piare nni.

'1~

DISTRIBUTION or SPECIES CHART.
JUNE I907.

W # • ' Calanus finmarchicus cc : C
OOo - Pseutlocalanus ofongatus.
A A A" Temora lon^icomis
■ Ha- Phaeocysh's globo&a

The feft fiond $iffn marks f>osih'on in
7h€ sign CD undtr plankton okservafwn
inax.e«se of phytofftankt-on . © - M#

Th* ftyures atort fht siyns denote Iht day of tht
monfh- figurts Ae/ow fftt tigns denof-e tfit numf>*r of
mackere/ taken On tht spot htf the wessef which
Ohf'aintd the pfankton sa^np/e .

or-t-i r or rr.

dmo.

ditto.

ditto
e.aeh instanco.
r flw/y • ^lOOpfanktcn
rtrerse .

-»*a.-.-.jygau.-.-iriraa6Bnnnro -BaaBW— lea'

[ 303 ]

On an Experiment in the Keeping of Salmon (Salmo
salar) at the Plymouth Laboratory.

By
L. R. Crawshay, M.A.,

Assistaiit Director.
With Plate XXIV.

FoK the past two and a half years (1906-8) some salmon, which
were reared at the Endsleigh Fishery, have been kept imder observa-
tion in the aquarium of the Plymouth Laboratory.

In sending these fish as smolts to the Laboratory, the Duke of
Bedford wished more particularly to obtain information on two
questions : firstly, the character of the food of the salmon during its
sojourn in the sea, and secondly, the period of that sojourn interven-
ing between the smolt and grilse stages. These and other points
of interest that have arisen will be considered in order in giving a
general account of the experiment.

The smolts were brought from Endsleigh at two years old, and
introduced into the aquarium in two lots (of twenty and thirty) on
February 6th and March 1st, 1906, respectively. The actual weight
and measurement were not taken at the time, but Mr. E. C. Bundle
informs me he has ascertained that the average weight may be placed
at 4-5 oz. and the average length at 8-10 inches. The fish have been
largely under the charge of Mr. A. J. Smith, and it is upon his detailed
notes that the present account is based.

For the accommodation of the smolts, one of the aquarium tanks
was emptied and brought into communication with the fresh-water
supply, the water being led into the tank by means of a rubber hose-
pipe, and kept running.

The first twenty smolts were put into this tank on February 6th,
1906, and allowed to remain in the fresh water for two days. Trans-
ference to sea-water was then effected very gradually, at a rate of
inflow increasing from day to day, as follows : —

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIIT, NO. 3. Y'

•

304 ON AN EXPEKIMENT IN THE KEEPING OF SALMON

February 8th, 11.45 a.m. Fresh water 1000 cc. per 15 seconds
oea ,, ,, ,, /5 „

,, 9th, 10.30 a.m. . . Density of Avater in tank 1*001

Fresh water 1000 cc. per 35 seconds
oea ,, ,, ,, 75 ,,

,, 10th, 10.30 a.m. . . Density of water in tank TOOS
Fresh water 1000 cc. per 47 seconds
oea ,, ,, ,, 31 ,,

,, 12th, 10.0 a.m. . . Density of water in tank TOIG
Fresh water 1000 cc. per 60 seconds
oea ,, ,, „ 31 ,,

„ 13th, 10.30 a.m. . . Density of water in tank / "^^P ^"^^'^

Temp. 46° F. »Bot. 1-018

,, 14th .... Density of Avater in tank 1'018

Fresh water shut off
Sea ,, 1000 cc. per 31 seconds

• ,, 15th . . Two more jets of sea water turned on. (One

smolt died.) ........

„ 16th, 10.0 a.m. . . Density of water in tank 1.027

The water having now approximately reached the normal salinity of
the water in the reservoirs, the siipply was connected up with the
general circulation, i.e. nine days after the transference began. The
digestive tract of the smolt that died on the loth was found to be
quite empty. Feeding on the whole had been fairly good. On
February 27th these nineteen smolts were removed to a larger tank.
On March 1st the second lot of smolts, thirty in number, were brought
from Endsleigh, and placed in fresh water in the tank now vacated by
the others. Their transference to sea water was completed in about
one-third of the time occupied for that of the preceding lot, and as
follows : —

March 5th . . Fresh water 1000 cc. per 18 seconds
oea ,, ,, ,, oo ,,

„ 6th ..... Density of water in tank 1 007

Fresh water 1000 cc. per 30 seconds
oea „ „ ,, 10 ,,

„ 7th ..... Density of water in tank 1'015
Fresh water supply turned off
Sea water 1000 cc. per 10 seconds

„ 8th ..... Density of water in tank 1*026

Supply connected up with general circulation.

The transference of the second lot was therefore completed in three

AT THE PLYMOUTH LABOEATOEY. 305

days. Before it began, one of the smelts jumped from the fresh-water
tank, over the barrier, into the sea-water tank adjoining. It was left
in sea water afterwards, and suffered no harm. The same thing
happened to a second individual on the first night after the change
began (March 5th).

On March 10th this second lot of smolts was put into the large
tank with the others. This tank, which now contained forty-nine
smolts, was used throughout to accommodate the survivors as long
as the salmon remained at the Laboratory. Its inside dimensions
are 15 "7 feet in length, 9 feet in width, and 4-4 feet in depth of water,
giving a capacity of 621 cubic feet. It was fed by eight jets, giving
a total normal inflow of about 385 cc. per second, and its position,
partly screened from the direct light by a dark-coloured blind, is such
that its lighting may be described as moderately low and constant.
The back, the ends, and the floor of the tank are formed of slate,
and all uprights or other portions of the framework are similarly
dark in colour. Air was supplied entirely by the force of the water
from the several jets striking the surface, which was sufficient to
carry the fine air-bubbles nearly or quite to the bottom of the tank.

Feeding. — The smolts were fed twice a day, and often three times.
On the first day or two the food given them was broken biscuit and
prepared fish and flesh foods previously soaked, of the same kind as
that used at Endsleigh. This was then varied with raw bullock's
liver cut into small pieces, and the preference for this latter soon
became so strong that the other was very shortly discarded altogether.
This was the case with both lots of smolt. When the transference
to sea water was about half completed, it was found that the common
inter-tidal marine worms of the genus Nereis (N. diver sicolor) were
taken very readily. About the time of the completion of the change
s. distinct loss of appetite was shown by several of the smolts for
a few days. But, on the whole, feeding was fairly good during the
interval, and this was particularly the case with the second lot, where
the transference was brought about more rapidly. After the change
to sea water, liver was taken with the same readiness as previously.
Nereis was at times taken when liver was refused, but beyond this
little preference was shown between the two.

Experiments in feeding with marine animals other than Nereis gave
entirely negative results. Among others, trials were made on several
occasions with the following species : — *

* It is to be regretted that herring was never tried. But the keeping of young
herring alive for any length of time, even when they are obtainable, is a matter of very
great difficulty.

306 ON AN EXPERIMENT IN THE KEEPING OF SALMON

Living Shrimps {Crangoii).
„ Prawns {Palaemon).

„ Pandalus anmdicornis and P. hrevirostris.
Cut Squid (Loligo).
„ Scallop (Fecfen).
Living Pollack [Gadus pollachlus), about 2 inches long.
„ Gobies (Gobius minutus and G. ruthensparri).
Cut Plaice {Pleuronectes platessa).

The salmon were seen by Dr. Allen to take hold of some of the
shrimps, though afterwards releasing them, and to show a certain
interest in some of the small fish. But there was no evidence of their
having swallowed any of these objects of food, and the only conclusion
to be drawn is that they entirely refused them. Two of the smolt&
were kept for some time in a separate tank with two bass as
companions, the only food offered them being shrimps, prawns, and
gobies. Although the latter experiment was not conclusive, no
evidence that any of these had been eaten by the salmon was-
obtained. On the first two or three days, while the smolts were-
still in fresh water, it was once or twice observed that fragments
of the prepared foods (not liver) were picked up by them after
reaching the bottom of the tank ; but this never occurred afterwards,
and even the living Nereis, which happened to reach the bottom, were
allowed to remain there crawling about, without the salmon paying
any attention to them. In marked contrast to this, some Eainbow
Trout (Salmo irideus), which the Duke of Bedford has also sent
to the Laboratory from Endsleigh, will connnonly follow their food to
the bottom, and continue to pick it up for some time after it has
settled. These Kainbows, too, easily adapt themselves in sea water
to the cut Squid {Loligo), and some other foods ordinarily given to-
the marine fishes.

Fird Spavming, 1906-7. — Signs of approaching maturity became
apparent in the smolts towards the end of October, 1906, i.e. eight
months after they were first passed into sea water. On October 31st
and November ] st it was observed that scarcely any food was taken,
and in some cases what was taken into the mouth was discarded again.
During the previous week the fish had been growing darker in colour.
They began to frequent the bottom of the tank and to lie there
heavily. One of them lost the upright position, and died in a day or
two afterwards (November 4th). It was accordingly decided to pass
sixteen of the more advanced ones into fresh water. The process was
begun on November 6th, and the change was made in a very similar
manner to the reverse one in the preceding March. The time allowed

AT THE PLYMOUTH LABORATOEY. 307

was from two to three days, and the whole of them were thus trans-
ferred to fresh water by November 15th. On November 9th, shortly
after the change to fresh water, one of the males died. The testis
was found to be nearly mature. The weight of this fish was very
nearly 1 lb., and the length 13f inches. During this period one of the
fish jumped from the fresh-water tank into a tank of sea water
adjoining (cp. p. 305). After thirty-six hours it was put back into
the fresh-water tank direct without any ill effects arising.

November 26th. All of the grilse were examined by Mr. McNicol,
who has charge of the Duke of Bedford's Fishery. Apart from the deaths
that had been recorded, it was found that five of the fish were missing.
It can only be surmised that these had from time to time jumped over
the barrier into the large adjoining tank and fallen victims to the
turbot, nurse-hounds, and other large fish that occupied it. The
number that remained was now thirty-five. Seven females were
spawned on this day (November 26th), and the ova fertilized. The
remainder were spawned on December 11th. Nearly the whole of
these fertilized ova were taken to Endsleigh and there hatched under
normal conditions both as regards numerical proportion and the
period between fertilization and hatching. They were not kept under
observation for long after hatching, and there was apparently no
unusual feature arising in regard to size or otherwise in connection
with their development. A few ova were retained at the Laboratory
and hatched under tap water, but these did not long survive the
feeding stage following absorption of the yolk-sac, owing no doubt
merely to the unsuitable condition of the water supply with its
irresistible tendency to nurture the growth of fungus and other
vegetable organisms.

As regards feeding during this period of spawning, very little food
was taken between the last week in October and the two respective
dates of spawning, November 26th and December 11th, though feeding
did not entirely cease for more than a day or so at a time. Within
a few days after spawning, there was a marked change in this respect
and by December 22nd the total consumption amounted to about f lb.
of liver per day, the weight of the fish at this time averaging about
1^ lb. Feeding continued at much the same point till the middle of
February. It was then decided to turn the fish, numbering thirty-five,
over to sea water, and this was done between February 19th and
20th. The change proved to be an unfortunate one, and the salmon at
once ceased feeding. Between February 21st and 26th, seven of them
died — five males and two females. These were found to still contain
a quantity of ripe milt and ova respectively. Between February 25th

308 ON AN EXPERIMENT IN THE KEEPING OF SALMON

and 26th they were therefore returned to fresh water, and remained
thus till March 15th. This change quickly brought about a return to
feeding. On March 6th the daily consumption reached f lb. of liver
and a supply of Nereis, and the amount did not fall appreciably below
this figure afterwards.

The return to sea water was made between March 15th and 19th,
one female, which was found to be incompletely spawned, being lost
in the process. Of the succeeding period in sea water in the spring
and summer of 1907 there is little to record of interest. The food
consumption rose steadily to 3 lb. of liver per day at the middle of
May, and continued at about this point till the middle of August.
From the latter date it began to fall, and on September 17th it dropped
to f lb.

At the end of September the salmon had to be moved, in order that
the tank might be repaired. They were very susceptible to injury in
handling, and four of them died before they were finally settled in
their own tank.

Second Spatvning, 1907-8. — The salmon, twenty-one in number,
were transferred to fresh water between October 1st and 5th, about six
weeks earlier than in the preceding year, feeding having by this time
all but ceased. After this time and up to the date of spawning they
continued to take a fair quantity of Nereis with some irregularity, but
little or no liver was taken.

About half of them were spawned on November 15th, seven on
November 29th, one on December 13th, and one on January 3rd. A
large number of the fertilized ova were kept and hatched at the
Laboratory, but the larvae barely attained at most the complete
absorption of the yolk-sac. How far the underlying causes were to be
attributed to the inadequate conditions of the water supply as in the
previous year, it is difficult to say, but two points were particularly
noticeable in this case : (1) a common difficulty in rupturing the egg-
membrane, and (2) a general weakness in the embryonic circulation
which hindered communication with the distal portion of the yolk-sac
and retarded its absorption. In consequence of the latter difficulty a
constriction arising in the yolk-sac was the direct cause of death in the
large majority of cases, and the two points taken together suggested a
general sickliness that had been transmitted from the parents.

Attacks of fungus, which began to affect the salmon in the early
part of December, 1907, had later assumed such proportions, with
fatal results to several of the fish, that it was decided to transfer the
remainder of them to sea water at an early date, and this was done
between January 7th and 8th, 1908. Three deaths that occurred

AT THE PLYMOUTH LABOKATORY.

309

within two days after the latter date may be attributed entirely to bad
cases of fungus, and its attendant disease, too far gone to remedy, and
apparently no ill effects resulted from this early return to sea water
beyond a falling off in feeding for a few days afterwards.

Growth. — As previously stated the weight of the smolts when they
were brought to the Laboratory in February and March, 1906, may
be placed at 4 to 5 oz., and the length at 8 to 10 inches. On September
28th, 1906, one fish, taken as representing the average, weighed 1 lb.
8|- oz., and measured 16 inches in length. On November 26th, 1906,
twenty-seven fish were weighed prior to spawning, but not measured.
The weights of these fish were as follows : —

No.

Weight.

Sex.

Condition.

lb.

oz.

(1)

female

mature

(2)

-I

immature

(3)

mature

(4)

male

(5)

female

(6)

(7)

immature

(8)

male

mature

(9)

female

))

(10)

(11)

(12)

male

!J '

(13)

immature

(14)

female

mature

(15)

male

immature

(16)

female

? spawned

(17)

> J

mature

(18)

male

nearly mature

(19)

female

mature

(20)

immature

(21)

))

mature

(22)

; J

))

(23)

male

nearly mature

(24)

immature

(25)

female

(26)

mature

(27)

))

barren

It is remarkable that the above weights give an average which is
exactly the same as the weight of the fish selected for trial on
September 28th, viz. 1 lb. 8|- oz. It is quite conceivable that this
particular fish chosen on that occasion slightly exceeded the true
average, but it is evident that the average increase of weight in the
two months' interval must have been very small. On the same

310

ON AN EXPEEIMENT IN THE KEEPING OF SALMON

occasion (November 26th) seven of the females were weighed after
spawning, with the following results : —

(a)

(e)
if)
(9)

These give an average of 1 lb. 6 oz. nearly. The weights cannot
be compared individually with those taken before spawning, since
to obviate as far as possible excessive physical strain on the fish the
weights before and after spawning were not taken in any definite
sequence. If, however, the average weight 1 lb. 6 oz. be compared
with that of the twelve mature females enumerated in the first list
(thus omitting No. 1 for obvious reasons), namely 1 lb. 8-5 oz., the
average weight of spawn removed works out at 2ioz., or 10*2 per cent
of the average weight of fish. Assviming, on the other hand, that
the females spawned were the seven heaviest of the mature females
in the first list, then the latter give an average weight of 1 lb. 10| oz.,
and the highest possible average weight of spawn removed would
thus be 4 J oz., or 17 per cent of the average weight of fish.

On November 15th, 1907, i.e. at the time of the second spawning,
the weights were again taken of seven fish, of which the females were
weighed both before and after spawning. These were as follows : —

Males

(1)
(2)

2 lb. 8 oz.

9 R

Females (1). Before spawning, 21b. 10 oz. After spawning, lib. 14 oz.

(2) 2 10 1 12

(3) , 2 „ 12 „ „ 1 „ 14 „

(4) ,) ^ }) ,, ,, -I ,, 4 ,,
i'^) )) 3 ,, ,, ,, 2 ,, -J ,,

The average weight of these five females at this date is therefore
2 lb. 12"8 oz., while the average weight of spawn removed from them is
13*2 oz. This weight of spawn thus constitutes as much as 29'5 per
cent of the average total weight, and amounts in one individual (No. 2)
to one-third of the total weight of the fish. On June 19th, 1908, four
of the salmon were weighed and measured as representing an average
sample of the twelve that remained at the Laboratory. The figures
obtained were : —

AT THE PLYMOUTH LABORATORY.

311

Weight.

Length

lb. oz.

inches.

3 2

3 4

191

20|

22i

(1) . .

(2) . .

(3) . .

(4) . .

It must, however, be mentioned that the weight given for the last
fish, 51b., is inconsistent with a subsequent test two months later, in
which the heaviest fish weighed 4 lb. 8 oz. There is no ground for
supposing that an error occurred in the reading, but it is difficult to
understand such a loss of weight in the interval, and it is safer to omit
these four weights in considering the average rate of growth.

It was subsequently decided by the Duke of Bedford that as little
information was likely to be added by retaining the salmon any longer
at the Laboratory they should be liberated. On August 20th, 1908,
the remainder were therefore marked and turned out into the sea, out-
side the Plymouth Breakwater. Some of them were already showing
signs of approaching maturity for the third time, and in one of them
that died before being liberated the ovary was much developed. In-
cluding this last individual, the weight of these eleven fish at this

date was as follows : — Wftght Length.

inches.
17
19
19
19
20
21
21
21
21
21
22

giving an average weight of 3 lb. 9| oz., and an average length of
20 inches.

Summarizing the above data, the following show the averages of
growth at intervals, during the period of about two years and a half,
in which the salmon were kept at the Laboratory : —

as follows : —

Weight.

lb. oz.

(1) . .

2 4

(2) . .

2 8

(3) . .

3 1

(4) . .

3 8

(5) . .

3 7

(6) . .

(7) . .

(8) . .

4 1

(9) . .

4 1

(10) . .

4 3

(11) . .

4 8

Date.

Approx. Age.

Average
lb.

Weight. Average Length,
oz. inches.

1906.

Feb. to March

2 years .

41 ... 9

))

Sept. 28th

•• 2/^ „

8i (approx.) 16 (approx.)

Nov. 26th

.. 2f „

8h ... -

1907.

„ 15th

.. 3f „

12 ... —

1908.

Aug. 20th

... 41 „

91 ... 20

312 ON AN EXPEKIMENT IN THE KEEPING OF SALMON.

The average rates of growth per month, from the smolt stage in
February and March, 1906, are therefore : —

For nine months to November 26th, 1906 . . 2*2 oz. per month.

„ twelve ,, ,, „ 15th, 1907 . . 1-6 „ „

,, nine ,, ,, August 20th, 1908 . . F5 ,, ,,

It only remains to mention that the form whicli the salmon assumed
was quite an abnormal one. The silvery colour of the smolts after
entering sea water was not retained, but the dorsal region became
dark and much spotted. This tendency increased till ultimately
the greater part of the region above the lateral line was much dark-
ened and the spots increased in size and in number, extending over
the whole length of the body, and in places considerably below the
lateral line, being especially large and prominent about the head
and gill-covers. The accompanying figure (Plate XXIV.) illustrates
these points in the female, weighing about 4 lb., which died on
August 20th, 1908, the date on which the remainder of the salmon
were liberated. The flesh of this fish was found to have no appear-
ance of the normal " salmon " colour, but was of a pale brownish
white.

L 313 ]

On the Genus Cumanotus.

By
Sir Charles Eliot, K.C.M.a.

(See Eliot on Coryphella heaumonti in Notes on some British Nudibranchs, Journ.
Mar. Biol. Assoc, vol. vii., No. 3, June, 1906, pp. 361-3 ; and Nils Odhner on
Cumanotus laticeps in Northern and Arctic Invertebrates, iii. Opisthobranchia. Kngl-
Svenslav Vetenskapsahademiens Handlingar. Band 41, No. 4, 1907, pp. 29, 80, and
101-2).

In describing (I.e.) Coryphella beaumonti as a new species, I pointed out
that in many important characters it differs markedly from the other
known CorypheUcc, and might be made the type of a new genus. But
I did not create a new genus, thinking it might be well to examine
further specimens, both of this animal and of allied forms, before
deciding on its place in the classification. In the next year Odhner
created (I.e.) the genus C2cmanotus* to which Coryphella heaumonti is
certainly referable, and which is shown by his researches to be well
characterized. It is allied to Coryphella inasmuch as it has un-
perfoliate rhinophores, tentacular angles to the foot, a triseriate radula
and denticulate jaws ; but it also possesses the following special
characters : (1) The oral tentacles are very small and connected by
a cutaneous fold which runs across the head ; (2) there are several (at
least, as many as three) rows of cerata in front of the rhinophores ;
(3) the verge is deeply grooved, and there is a bursa copulatrix, the
entrance to which bears on its upper and lower margin a circular pad,
armed on the periphery with twelve small cones terminating in
hooks.

In the specimen which I dissected, the reproductive organs were
much contracted, and I supposed these cones to be an armature on the
male genitalia, such as is not uncommon in aeolids ; but a dissection of
more specimens, as well as an examination of the animals in life, has
shown that Mr. Odhner is perfectly correct in describing the arrange-
ment as two pads placed at the entrance of the bursa copulatrix.
I have not seen the animals alive myself, but Mr. L. E. Crawshay, who
observed their movements in the tanks of the Plymouth Laboratory,
writes to me that : " Though in appearance the arrangement suggests

* He says it is from Ku^ia, a wave, and vQitov, back ; Vjut if so, would not Cymanohis be
the more usual form 1

314 ON THE GENUS CUMANOTUS.

that the hooked pads are associated with the S rather than with the
$ organ ... at the same time, what was observed in the Laboratory-
points strongly to the conclusion that they are really ? clasping organs.
If the organs of the one individual are called A ( c? ), B ( ? ), and
of the other, X ( c? ), Y ( ? ), what was observed was as follows : The
two individuals were placed right to right with the complete apparatus
of both extended and approximating. The base of A ( (? ) was grasped
laterally by an upward extension (i.e. presumably the pads) on both
sides of Y ( ? ), and the base of X ( (? ) was similarly grasped by
upward lateral extensions of B ( ? ). In each case a sort of peristaltic
movement on the part of B ( ? ) and Y ( $ ) occurred. As the grasp of
B ( ? ) and Y ( $ ) extensions relaxed, the flow of spermatozoa from
X ( (? ) and A (S) respectively was distinctly visible, while as the
grasp of the extensions closed round the base of X ( <? ) and A (S), the
flow of spermatozoa was checked." As far as I am aware, a female
clasping organ of this kind has not yet been recorded among Nudi-
branchs, but it is possible that in some other genera of aeolids its
nature may have been misunderstood.

It is doubtful whether Cumayiotus' heaumonti and Cumanotus laticeps
are specifically the same. The identity is not improbable, but
Odhner's specimens (judging from the figures) had lost all the cerata.
Cumanotus hcaumonti is remarkable for having a short truncated body
and extremely long snaky cerata, but when these have fallen off the
Plymouth specimens look very like Odhner's figures, and have the
margin of the foot similarly expanded. There may also be differences
in the denticulation of the jaws and lateral teeth. But these are
slight divergences, and hardly of specific value unless associated with
others. Still, until a complete specimen of the Norwegian form has
been examined it is safer not to unite the two species, and provision-
ally I think the genus may be tabulated as follows : —

Cumanotus, Odhner, 1907.

1. C. hcaumonti (Eliot), 1906.

2. C. laticeps, Odhner, 1907.

If the species are united the name heaumonti has priority.

I hope to publish figures of the living C. hcaumonti in a supplement
to Alder and Hancock's British Nudihranchiate Mollusca, which will
soon be issued by the Bay Society.

C. laticeps is known by four specimens obtained at Sorvser, in the
extreme north of Norway, in 5-10 fathoms of water. C. heaumonti
has been captured at Plymouth, twice in Barn Pool and on several
occasions in Jennycliffe Bay, at a depth of 2-5 fathoms, and though
far from common, appears to be a resident and not merely a visitor.

[ 315 J

Note on a Hermaphrodite Cod {Gadus morrhua).

A. E. Hefford, B.Sc,

Assistant Naturalist at the Plymouth Laboratory.

With one Figure in the Text.

On February 27th, the roe of a cod having a testicular portion attached
was received at the Laboratory from Messrs. Moodys and Kelly, of
Grimsby. It had been taken from a cod caught by a steam trawler
fishing in Icelandic waters. Owing to the rough removal of the
organs from the fish on the trawling ground, the genital ducts were
missing and the region of their origin was ruptured, while the testis
had been somewhat damaged in the course of its long journey to
Plymouth.

Fig. 1 shows a drawing of the organs seen from the ventral side.
The female element predominates, the ovaries appearing quite normal
and functional, with unripe ova at a stage of development which
suggests that spawning should occur in about two to four months.
The left ovary is 6J inches long and the right one 6i inches — a
practically symmetrical condition. The testicular portion is connected
v/ith the left ovary by a duct a quarter to half an inch long, enclosed
by a continuation of the fibrous covering of the ovary, the point of
connection being very near to the median line and about a quarter
of an inch behind the anterior extremity of the median ovarian mass.
The form of the testis is rather rosette-like and frilled, but much less
lobulated than a normal testis. The length of the longest lobe of the
rosette measured from the duct is about 3 inches. It is now rather
broken, however, and the original length was probably a little greater.

Internally the testis duct is longitudinally ridged, one of these ridges
widening into a valve-like flap near the small aperture which leads
into the lumen of the ovary. The testis is in a well-developed but
unripe condition. Owing to maceration in the course of transit —
on the trawler it was kept in ice and then sent through the post to-

!16

NOTE ON A HERMAPHRODITE COD,

Plymouth wrapped up in paper in a box — the tissue is not suitable for
microscopic examination. It is probable, however, that the male organ
would be functional, and that when ripe its products would pass to the
exterior via the testis duct and the ovary. Owing to the ruptured
condition of the right ovary in the region corresponding to the testis

Fig. 1. — Hermaphrodite Gonad of Cod.
r.o., right ovar}' ; ho., left ovary ; t., testis ; c.d., testis duct.

duct attachment on the left, I am not able to say with absolute
certainty that the above-mentioned is the only testicular part, though
there is extremely little doubt but that the whole of the genitalia
were removed from the fish, the ruptured portion being the result of
tearing away the roe from its duct to the exterior.

NOTE ON A HERMAPHRODITE COD. 317

Other examples of hermaphroditism in cod have been described by
Howes,* Masterman,-|- Williamson, | etc.

Masterman gives a tabular list of eleven cases for comparison,
including his own observation and those cited by Howes. In all these
the ovarian organ preponderates. Great diversity is shown in the
position of the testis, which may be single or in as many as three
distinct and separately attached parts. In Williamson's two cases, one
presents a perfectly symmetrical form with a small testis attached to
the anterior end of each ovary, while the other is completely asym-
metrical, the right gonad being an ovary and the left a testis, the two
uniting in the anal region and having a common genital aperture.
My specimen presents a further variation in the position of the testis.
In the relatively large size of the testicular portion it is also
peculiar.

* G. B. Howes, "Hermaphrodite Genitalia of the Codfish," etc. {Journ. Linn. Soc,
xxiii. , p. 539).

t Masterman, "On Hermaphroditism in the Cod" {Thirteenth Annual Report of the
Fishery Board for Scotland, Part III, for the year 1894, p. 297).

+ Williamson, "On Two Cases of Hermaphroditism in the Cod" {Twenty-fourth
Annual Report of the Fishery Board for Scotland, Part III, for the j'ear 1905, p. 290).

[ 318 ]

Note on a Conger with Abnormal Gonad.

By
A. E. Hefford, B.Sc.

With one Figure in the Text.

Among a sample of seven small Conger, from 58 to 77 cm. in length,
obtained from the Plymouth Fish Quay on 31st March, one was found
with unsymmetrical reproductive organs. The other six were im-
mature females with the normal pair of ovaries. The abnormal
specimen has a right gonad quite similar to the ovaries of females at
the same stage of maturity. It is bandlike in form, extending along
the whole length of the abdominal cavity. The inner or left side is
covered with smooth peritoneal epithelium (mesoarium). The greater
part of the surface of the right (outer) side is raised into transverse
lamellae containing the as yet little-developed ova embedded in fat-
tissue. For about one to two millimetres from its free edge, the organ
consists of a strip of fat-tissue quite free from germinal cells, and there
is a similarly constituted longitudinal fold — here and there divided
into a subsidiary one — extending parallel to and about 2 mm. from
the free edge and bordering the lamellated germinal area. The ovary
is 17*5 cm. long, its greatest width 12 mm., and the widest part
of the lamellated area is about 7 mm.

The left gonad is a sterile ovary, the transverse germinal ridges
being quite absent. Along the line of attachment there is a narrow
longitudinal ridge of fat-tissue, fairly well developed anteriorly, but
becoming discontinuous towards the hinder end ; then a narrow strip
of bare peritoneal epithelium (the area which is normally covered with
the egg-bearing lamellae); and along the free edge are folds of fat-
tissue similar to those occurring in the normal ovary.

I am indebted to Mr. J. T. Cunningham for his kindness in examin-
ing an,d giving his opinion upon this specimen.

It is interesting to note that this abnormal individual was the
sixteenth Conger examined by me since March 14th with the object of

NOTE ON A CONGEE WITH ABNORMAL GONAD.

319

obtaining a male specimen ; but up to this time only females had been
found. The sizes ranged from 92 to 58 em., ten of them being less
than 76 cm. (2 ft. 6 inches) which is the limiting size given by Cun-

FiG. 1. — Abnormal Gonad of Conger.

A, anterior ; A^, posterior end of right (normal) gonad.

B, anterior ; W, posterior end of left (abnormal) gonad.

0, egg-bearing lamellae ; f, fat-tissue along attachment edge

of ovary ; f ^, fat-tissue along the free edge of ovary,
p, peritoneal tissue (mesoarium).

ningham* for male Conger. Subsequently I have obtained two males,
of 61 cm. (24 inches) and 50 cm. (20 inches) out of twenty trawl-
caught Conger ranging from 77 to 50 cm. in length.

* J. T. Cunningham, "On the Reproduction and Development of the Conger"
{Jotmi. M.B.A., vol. ii, N.S., p. 31).

NEW SERIES.— VOL. VIII. NO. 3.

[ 320 ]

mm biological Association 0f tljc WrnM |aingbom.

Report of the Council, 1907-8.

The Council and Officers.

Four ordinary and one special meetings of the Council have been
held during the year, at which the average attendance has been ten.

All the meetings have been held in the rooms of the Royal Society
at Burlington House, and the Council desire again to express their
thanks to the Royal Society for the use of these rooms.

Committees of the Council have visited and inspected the Labora-
tories at Plymouth and Lowestoft, and have reported favourably on
the condition of buildings and boats.

The Committee on Fishery.Investigations, appointed by the Treasury
to inquire into the future conduct of such investigations in the United
Kingdom, have visited the Plymouth and Lowestoft Laboratories and
inspected the steam-trawler Hiixhy. Evidence was given before this
Committee on behalf of the Association by Sir E. Ray Lankester,
Dr. A. E. Shipley, Mr. J. A. Travers, Prof. G. C. Bourne, Dr. G. H.
Fowler, Dr. H. R. Mill, Dr. E. J. Allen, Prof. W. Garstang, and
Mr. D. J. Matthews.

The Laboratories.

A number of necessary repairs to the building and to the aquarium
tanks at the Plymouth Laboratory have been carried out during the
year, and a new centrifugal pump has been fitted for circulating the
sea-water through the tanks. The main laboratory, the library and
other portions of the building have been colour-washed.

The work of the Lowestoft Laboratory has been conducted in the
same house as last year.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 321

The Boats.

The steam-trawler Huxley, which has been for five years hired by
the Association for the work of the English section of the Inter-
national Investigations, has now been purchased upon favourable terms
by the Marine Biological Association from her owner, Mr. G. P. Bidder.

Both the Huxley and the OWiona, the corresponding boat at
Plymouth, were laid up during the winter months, and after under-
going full surveys were put into a condition of proper repair.

The sailing-boat Anton-Dohrn was used for the collecting work at
Plymouth during the winter.

The Staff.

At the end of September, 1907, Dr. Walter Garstang resigned
the post of Naturalist in Charge of Fishery Investigations,
which he had occupied since 1897, in order to take up professorial
duties at the University of Leeds. The Council did not feel justified
in making a new appointment to his post, until H.M. Government
had decided to continue the British share of the International Inves-
tigations for a further term of years. The Council desires to record
its appreciation of the valuable help rendered to the work by
Dr. Allen, the Director, in undertaking temporarily the difficult task
of superintending both the Laboratories. Since Prof. Garstang's retire-
ment Dr. Allen has resided chiefly at Lowestoft, and visited Plymouth
when necessary. Mr. L. E. Crawshay has been promoted to be
Assistant Director of the Plymouth Laboratory, and Mr. J. 0. Borley
to be Assistant Director of the Lowestoft Laboratory. Mr. A. E.
Hefford has been transferred from Lowestoft to Plymouth, where he is
specially engaged in the study of fishes and fishery questions. Mr.
A. J, Mason-Jones, M.sc, of the University of Birmingham, has
succeeded Mr. W. Bygrave as Assistant Naturalist for Plankton in
connection with the International Investigations.

Mr. E. W. Nelson has been temporarily employed at Plymouth
■ during the year.

Occupation of Tables.

The following Naturalists have occupied tables at the Plymouth
Laboratory during the year : —

W. C. De Morgan, London (Crustacea).
J. C. Simpson, Cambridge (Echinodermata).
C. H. O'DoNOGHUE, Loudon (Hydrozoa).
A. J. Grove, Birmingham (Protozoa).

F. W. Gamble, d.sc, f.r.s., Manchester (Colour Physiology of Fishes).

G. W. Smith, b.a., Oxford (Sacculina).

322 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

F. J. Bridgeman, London (Development of Porifera and Elasmobranchii).
E. D. Laurie, m.a., Oxford (Crustacea. Biometrical Study).

E. T. Browne, b.a., London (C(!elenterata).

W. Bygrave, B.A., Cambridge (Plankton).

J. E. Davidson, Plymouth (Plankton Larv?e).

J. C. F. Fryer, Cambridge (General Zoology).

E. S. Goodrich, m.a., f.r.s., Oxford (Thymus of Fishes).

E. L. EoBiNSON, London (General Zoology).

E. M. Eichards, London (General Zoology).

Miss W. Coward, Manchester (General Zoology).

Miss H. L. M. PiXELL, B.sc, London (Ferments of Digestive Tract of

Elasmobranchii).
Sir Charles Eliot, k.c.m.g., Sheffield (Nudibranchiata).
Miss A. Isgrove, b.sc, Manchester (Eledone).
H. M. FuCHS, Brighton (General Zoology).
Mrs. 0. A. Meritt Hawkes, m.sc, Birmingham (Embryology and Nervous

System of Elasmobranchii).
H. H. Bloomer, Birmingham (Psammobia).

G. H. Grosvenor, B.A., Oxford (General Zoology).

Twenty-five students attended a course of study in Marine Biology
conducted at the Laboratory during the Easter vacation by Mr. G. H.
Grosvenor.

The Library.

The thanks of the Association are due for the following books and
current numbers of periodicals presented to the Library during tha
past year : —

Acaderaie Imp. des Sciences de St. Petersbourg. Bulletin.

American Museum of Natural History. Bulletin.

Memoirs.

Eejjort.

American Microscopical Society. Transactions.

American Philosophical Society. Proceedings.

Armstrong College. Calendar.

Australian Museum. Memoirs.

Eecords.

Eeport.

Bergens Museum. Aarbog.

An Account of the Crustacea of Norway, etc. ; by G. 0. Sars.

Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu. Occasional Papers.

Fauna Hawaiiensis.

Board of Agriculture and Fisheries. Annual Eeport of Proceedings under the-
Salmon and Freshwater Fisheries Acts.

Eej?ort of Proceedings of 16th Annual Meeting.

Boston Society of Natural History. Proceedings.

Bristol Naturalists Society. Proceedings.

British Association for the Advancement of Science. Eeport.

British Museum. National Antarctic Expedition, 1901-4. Natural History^

Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. Science Bulletin.

Brown University. Contributions from the Anatomical Laboratory.

EEPOIIT OF THE COUNCIL. 323

Budgett Memorial Committee. The Work of John Samuel Budgett.
Bulletin Scientifique de la France et de la Belgique.
Cairo Zoological Gardens. Eeport.

Additions to the Menagerie.

The Cancer Research Fund. Scientific Reports on the Investigations.

Cardiff Incorporated Chamber of Commerce Report.

The Carnegie Institution. Publications.

College of Science, Tokyo. Journal.

College voor de Zeevisscherijen. Verslag van den Staat der Nederlandsche

Zeevisscherijen.
Colombo Museum. Spolia Zeylanica.
The Commissioners of Fisheries, N.S. Wales. Report.

Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal of Conchology.
Conseil perm, internat. pour I'Exploration de la Mer. Bulletin des Resultats
acquis pendant les Courses Periodiques.

Publications de Circonstance.

Rajiports et Proces-Verbaux des Reunions.

Cuerpo de Ingenieros de Minas del Peru. Boletin.

Danish Biological Station. Report to the Board of Agriculture.

Kgl. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab. Oversigt.

Skrifter.

Dept. of Agriculture, etc., Ireland. Reports.

Dept. of Commerce and Labor, U.S.A. Re^jort of the Commissioner of Fisheries.
Dept. of Fisheries, N.S. Wales. Additions to the Fish-Fauna of New South
Wales. By D. G. Stead.

Note on a small Collection of Fishes from Suwarow Island. By D. G.

Stead.

Preliminary Note on the Wafer {Leptoplana australis). By D. G. Stead.

Dept. of Marine and Fisheries, Canada. Annual Report.

Deutsche Zoologische Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen.

Deutscher Fischerei Verein. Zeitschrift flir Fischerei.

Deutscher Seefischerei Verein. Mitteilungen.

Falmouth Observatory. Meteorological and Magnetic Reports.

La Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes.

Field Museum of Natural History. Annual Rejjort.

Publications.

Finnlandische Hydrographisch-Biologische Untersuchungen.

Fisheries Society of Japan. Journal.

Fishery Board of Scotland. Annual Report.

Fiskeri-Beretning, 1905-6.

Fiskerinaringen i Sverige, Atgarder. 1906.

Flodevigens L^dklaekningsanstalts. Bidrag. 1892-1907.

Government Museum, Madras. Report.

Hertfordshire Museum Report.

R. Irish Academy. Proceedings.

Kansas University, Science Bulletin.

Kommission znr wissenschaftlichen Untersuchuug der Detitschen Meere, etc.

Wissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuchungen.
Kommissionen for Havundersogelser, Copenhagen. Meddelelser, series Fiskeri,

Hydi'ografi, Plankton.
Skrifter.

324 EEPOET OF THE COUNCIL.

Kgl. Norske Videnskabernes Selskab. Skrifter.
Kgl. Veteiiskaps Societeteii, Upsala. Stadgar.

Bibliographia Linnaeana. By J. M. Hultli.

Laboratoive Biologique de St. Petersbourg. Bulletin.
Lancashire and Western Sea Fisheries. Superintendent's Report.

Quarterly Report on the Scientific Work.

Liverpool Biological Society. Proceedings and Transactions.

Liverpool Marine Biology Committee. Marine Biological Station at Port

Erin. Report.
Liverpool University Institute of Commercial Research in the Tropics.

Quarterly Journal.

The Commercial Possibilities of West Africa. By Viscount Mountmorres.

Manchester Microscopical Society. Annual Report and Transactions.

Manchester University Biological Society. Publications.

Marine Biological Association of the West of Scotland. Report.

Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Holl. Biological Bulletin.

Mededeelingen over Visscherij.

Meteorological Office. Monthly Pilot Charts, North Atlantic and Mediterranean.

Monthly Pilot Charts, Indian Ocean and Red Sea.

R. Microscopical Society. Journal.

Ministere de I'lnstruction Publique, France. Nouvelles Archives des Missions

Scientitiques.
Musee du Congo. Annales.
Musee d'Histoire Naturelle, Paris. Bulletin.
Musee Oceanographique de Monaco. Bulletin.
Museo Nacional, Buenos Aires. Anales.
Museo Nacional, Montevideo. Anales.
Museum fiir Meereskunde, Berlin. Fiihrer.
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard College. Bulletin.

Memoirs. ^

Report.

Harvard University Museum : Its Origin and History. By A. Agassiz.

Louis Agassiz. 1896. By W. James.

Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons. Catalogue of Osteological Specimens.

Catalogue of Physiological Series.

The Museums Journal.

Natural History Society of New Brunswick. Bulletin
Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Basel. Verhandlungen.
Naturhistorischen Museum, Hamburg. Mitteilungen.
Neapel. Mitteilungen aus der Zoologischen Station.
Nederlandsche Dierkundige Vereeniging. Verslag.

Tijdschrift.

Aarwinsten der Bibliotheek.

Catalogus der Bibliotheek.

New York Academy of Sciences. Annals.
New York Zoological Society. Bulletin.

Report.

New Zealand Institute. Transactions and Proceedings.
Norges Fiskeristyrelse. Aarsberetning vedkommende Norges Fiskerier.
Northumberland Sea Fisheries Committee. Report on Scientific Investigations.
La Nuova Notarisia.

KEPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 325

Oberlin College. Laboratoxy Bulletin.

The Wilson Bulletin.

Otago Acclimatisation Society. Report.

Oxford University Museum. Catalogue of Books added to the Radcliffe

Library.
Pacific Scientific Institution. Publications.

Physiographiske Forening, Cliristiania. Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne.
Plymouth Museum and Art Gallery. Annual Report.
Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science. (Presented by Sir E. Ray Lan-

kester, k.c.b., f.r.s.)
Queensland Museum. Annals.

Rijksinstituut voor het Onderzoek der Zee, Helder. Jaarboek.
Royal Society of Edinburgh. Proceedings.

Transactions.

Royal Society of London. Philosophical Transactions.

Proceedings.

Year-Book.

Royal Society of Victoria. Proceedings.

Scottish Oceanographical Laboratory. Some Results of the International

Ocean Researches. By J. Hjort.
Selskabet for de Norske Fiskeriers Fremme. Norsk Fiskeritidende.
Senckenbergische naturforschende Gesellschaft, Frankfurt. Bericht.

Katalog der Reptilien-Sammlung im Museum.

Katalog der Batrachier-Sammlung im Museum.

Katalog der aus deni palaarktischen Faunengebiet beschriebenen

Savigetiere.

Katalog der Vogelsammlung im Museum.

Reiseerinnerungen aus Algerien und Tunis. Von Dr. W. Kobelt,

Smithsonian Institution. Annual Report of the U.S. National Museum.

Report on the Crustacea (Brachyura and Anomura) collected by the

N. Pacific Exploring Expedition, 1853-6. By W. Stimpson.
Sociedad Scientifica de Sao Paulo. Revista.
Societe Beige de Geologie, etc. Bulletin.
Societe Centrale d'Aquiculture et de Peche. Bulletin.
Societa di Naturalisti in Napoli. Bollettino.

Societe 1' Enseignement des Peches Maritimes. Bulletin Trimestriel.
Society d'Oceanographie du Golfe de Gascogne. Rapports.
Societe Suisse de Peche et Pisciculture. Bulletin.

Societe Imp. Russe de Pisciculture et de Peche. Vyestnik R'ibopom'shlennosti.
Societe Zoologique de France. Bulletin.

Memoirs.

South African Museum. Annals.

Report.

Station de Pisciculture et d' Hydrobiologie, Toulouse. Bulletin Populaire.
Kgl. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademien,

Arkiv for Botanik.

Arkiv for Zoologie,

Handlingar.

Transvaal Biological Society. First Meeting.

Ulster Fisheries and Biology Association. Scientific Papers.

Unione Zoologica Italiana. Rendiconto.

326 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

United States Bureau of Fisheries, Bulletin.
United States National Herbarium. Contributions.
United States National Museum. Bulletin.

Proceedings.

University of California. Publications. Zoolog}', Physiology, Botany.
University of Pennsylvania. Contributions from tlie Zoological Laboratory.

University Bulletins.

Catalogue.

Contributions from the Botanical Laboratory.

University of Toronto. Studies.

Kgl. Vetenska^js Societeten, Upsala. Nova Acta.

Visscherij -Station, Batavia. Mededeelingen.

Welsh Museum. Report.

Zoological Society of Japan. Annotationes Zoologicoe Japonenses.

Zoological Society of London. Proceedings.

Transactions.

— — Reports of the Council and Auditors.

Zoological Museum, Copenhagen. The Danish Tngolf-Expedition.

Zoologischen Museum, Berlin. Bericht.

Mitteilungen.

To the authors of the Memoirs mentioned below the thanks of the
Association are due for separate copies of their works presented to the
Library : —

Borley, J. 0. Marine Zoology. A History of Yorkshire.

Brown, E. T. A Revision of the Meduste belonging to the Family Laodiceidce.

On the Freshwater Medusa, Limnocnida tanganicce, discovered in the

river Niger by the late J. S. Budgett.

The Medusae of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition.

Buchanan, F. The Time taken in passing the Synapse in the Spinal Chord of

the Frog.
BuUen, G. E. Notes upon Hydroids observed in Aberdeen Trawl Refuse.
Cepede, C. Contribution a I'^tude de la nourriture de la Sardine.

Quelques remarques sur la nourriture de la Sardine.

Myxosporidies des Poissons des Alpes Franeaises.

Clark, J. Marine Zoology. A History of Cornwall.
Cligny, A. La Truite de Mer.

Les Preteudues Migrations du Hareug.

Repeuplement des Rivieres du Pas de Calais.

Cotton, A. D. Some British Species of Phceophycece.

Cunningham, J. T. On Kaljndorhynchus arenicolce, a new Gregarine, parasitic

in Arenicola ecaudata.
Dahl, Knut. The Scales of the Herring as a means of determining Age,

Growth, and Migration.
Darbishire, A. D. On the Direction of the Aqueous Current in the Spiracle of

the Dogfish ; together with some Observations on the Respiratory Mech-
anism in other Elasmobranch Fishes.

Some Tables for illustrating Statistical Correlation.

Recent Advances in Animal Breeding and their Bearing on our Knowledge

of Heredity.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 327

Dendy, A., and Hindle, E. Some Additions to our Knowledge of the New

Zealand Holotliurians.
Dollo, L. Notolepis Coatsi, Poisson pelagique nouveau reucueilli par I'Expedi-

tion Antarctique Nationale Ecossaise. Note preliminaire.
Edwards, C. L. The Holothurians of the North Pacific Coast of North America

collected by the Albatross in 1903.
The Order of Appearance of the Ambulacral Appendages in Holothuria

floridana, Pourtales.
Eliot, C. On the Nudibranchs of Southern India and Ceylon, with special Refer-
ence to the Drawings by Kelaart and the Collections belonging to Alder

and Hancock preserved in the Hancock Museum at Newcastle-on-Tyne.

Mollusca. Pteropoda.

Nudibranchs from New Zealand and the Falkland Islands.

Nudibranchs from the Indo-Pacific, III.

Eliot, C, and Evans, T. J. Doridosides gardineri. A Doridiform Cladohepatic

Nudibranch.
Fenchel, A. Ueber Tuhularia larijnx, Ellis. T. coronata^ Abildgaard.
Gardiner, J. S. Investigations in the Indian Ocean. Second Report of the

Committee.
The Percy Sladen Trust Expedition to the Indian Ocean in 1905. I. II.

Description of the Expedition.
Hartmeyer, R. Beitrage zur Meeresfauna von Helgoland, XV. Die Ascidien

von Helgoland.

Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Japanischen Ascidienfauna.

Helland-Hansen, B. Current Measurements in 1906.

Hewitt, C. G. A Preliminary Account of the Life-history of the Common

House Fly {Musca domestica, L.).
Hickson, S. J. Obituary Notice of Sir Michael Foster.

The Differentiation of Sjiecies of Ccelenterata in the Shallowwater Seas.

Note on Caligorgia flahellum from Port PhilliiD.

Hickson, S. J., and Gravely, F. H. Coelentera. II. Hydroid Zoophytes.
Hjort, J. Nogle Resultater af den Internationale Havforskning.
Hodgson, T. V. Pycnogonida. National Antarctic Expedition.

Pycnogoniden. Hamburger Magalhaensische Sammelreise.

The Pycnogonida of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition.

Holt, E. W. L., and Byrne, L. W. New Deep-sea Fishes from the South-west

Coast of Ireland.
Horst, R. On a New Cubomedusa from the Java-Sea.

On a large PeneZZa-species from the Moluccas.

Juday, C. Ostracoda of the San Diego Region. II. — Littoral Forms.

Cladocera of the San Diego Region.

A Study of Twin Lakes, Colorado, with Esi^ecial Consideration of the

Food of the Trouts.
Kofoid, C. A. New Sj^ecies of Dinoflagellates.

The Limitations of Isolation in the Origin of Species.

Dinoflagellata of the San Diego Region. III. — Descriptions of New

Species.

Current Zoological Literature.

Lambe, L. M. Note on the Occurrence of a Supernumerary Tooth in a Dog.
Loisel, Gustave. Rapport sur une Mission Scientifique dans les Jardins et

Etablissements zoologiques publics et prives du Royaume-uni de la

Belgique et des Pays Bas.

328 REPOKT OF THE COUNCIL.

M'Intosli, W. C. Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory.

Man, J. G. de. Diagnosis of New Species of Macrurous Decapod Crustacea

from the " Siboga-Expedition." II.
Sup Quelques Especes Nouvelles ou pen connues de Nematodes libres

habitant les Cotes de la Zelande.
Mardchal, J. Sur I'ovogenese des Selaciens et de quelques autres Chordate's. I.
Meek, A. Eeport on the Scientific Investigations. Northumberland Sea

Fisheries Committee.

Murray, J. " Scotia " Collections. Note on Microscopic Life in Gough Island,

South Atlantic Ocean.
- — — Arctic Rotifers, collected by Dr. William S. Bruce.
Norman, A. M. On some British Polyzoa.

Notes on the Crustacea of the Channel Islands.

Some species of Lejatocheirus, a Genus of Amphipoda.

The Celtic Province, Its Extent and its Marine Fauna.

Pavillard, M. J. Sur les Geratium du Golfe du Lion.

Philippi, E. " Spermatophoren " bei Fischen.

Pixell, H. L. M. On the Morphology and Physiology of the Appendix

digitiformis in Elasmobranchs.
Eathke, Jens. Afhandling om de Norske Fiskerier og Beretninger om Reiser

i Aarene, 1795-1802, for at Studere Fiskeriforhold, M.V.
Reed, T. E. The Sex Cycle of the Germ Plasm.
Ricciardi, L. L'LTnita delle Energie Cosmiche.
Shipley, A. E. Walter Frank Raphael Weldon. 1860-1906.

The late Prof. Sir Michael Foster, k.c.b.

Sea Fisheries.

Todd, R. A. Marine Zoology. A History of Devonshire.

Thornelj^ L. R. Report on the Marine Polyzoa in the Collection of the

Indian Museum.
Tregelles, G. F. Sea Anemones and Corals of Cornwall.
Trybom, F. Ichthyologische Beobachtungen auf den Laichplatzen der Lachse

und Meerforellen im Unterlauf des Flusses Dalelf in Schweden.

Markierungen von Lachsen und Meerforellen im Ostseegebiete.

Trybom, F., and Schneider, G. Das Vorkommen von "Montees" und die

Groesse der Kleinsten Aale in der Ostsee und in deren Fluessen.
Die Markierungsversuche mit Aalen und die wanderungen gekennzeich-

neter Aal in der Ostsee,
Walker, A. O. Amiihipoda. National Antarctic Expedition.
Weber, S. E. Polygenesis in the Eggs of the CulicidcC.
Mutation in Mosquitoes.

General Work at Plymouth Laboratory.

Several reports on the material collected by the Huxley from the
north side of the Bay of Biscay in August, 1906, have been published
in the Journal, whilst others are still in preparation.

Mr. Crawshay and Mr. Worth have published in the Journal (vol.
viii., No. 2) detailed reports on the nature of the bottom deposits
found in the English Channel between the Eddystone and the fifty-
fathom line, as a result of the dredging operations carried out in 1906.
The biological reports dealing with these dredgings are not yet
complete.

KEPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 329

A large number of hauls have been made in the Channel during the
year with a Petersen young-fish trawl, which has proved very success-
ful in capturing larval, post-larval and young stages of fishes. Mr,
A. E. Hefford is engaged in the study of this material, and is also study-
ing the different aspects of the fisheries in the south-western district.

Mr. G. E. Bullen has continued his study of the food of the mackerel
and other migratory fishes, and has prepared a report on the subject
which will soon be published in the Journal.

Mr. E. W. Nelson has continued a series of experiments, which had
been commenced by Dr. E. J. Allen, on " pure cultures " of Planktonic
Diatoms and Algse, in connection with the rearing of pelagic larvae of
fish and invertebrata.

Mr. C. L. Walton was temporarily engaged at the Laboratory from
October to January, devoting his time chiefly to the study of the local
Actinise, and an account of some of his observations has been published
in the last number of the Journal.

An exhibit of tow-nets, trawls, dredges, etc., is being shown by the
Association in the Hall of Science at the Franco- British Exhibition.

The International Fishery Investigations.

The following is a summary of the work done, and of the conclusions
arrived at by the scientific staff working under the direction of the
Council.

Section I.— NORTH SEA WORK.
A. WOEK OF THE S.S. "HUXLEY."

Trawling Investigations. — From June 1st, 1907, to the end of May,
1908, the Huxley made 9 voyages, in the course of which 176 hauls of
the commercial trawls were made, together with 347 hauls of various
smaller nets and other gear. The total number of voyages made by
the Huxley from the commencement of the investigations to the present
date is 99 ; the total number of hauls made with commercial trawls is
1254, that with smaller gear 1153.

In the spring of this year trawling investigations, which it is pro-
posed to repeat at quarterly intervals throughout the year, were carried
out at certain selected positions and along a line already trawled in the
spring of 1905 and 1906 and the summer of 1905. In this work the
ordinary commercial trawls, the Beam trawl covered with fine meshed
netting as described in the last report, and various smaller nets, were
used, the hauls being made as strictly comparable in time and place as
is possible under the unavoidable difficulties of marine work.

330 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

Dredging Investigations. — Extensive series of hauls with Dredge,
Conical Dredge and Agassiz trawl were made in the months of June,
July and August in the deep water west of the Dogger and on the
rough ground between Flamborough Head and Lowestoft and west of
3° E. long. In April similar work was carried out on different grounds
between 52° and 53° N. lat.

In voyages 98 and 99 a small trawl with very coarse canvas netting,
specially designed for the capture of small fish and Crustacea, has been
used with success.

Fish Measured, — Over 75,000 fish were measured during the year.
As in past years, the entire catch was measured on nearly all occasions.
The details as to the number of plaice, haddock and other species are

as follows : —

Plaice. Haddock. Others. Totals.

1902-7 Voyages 1-90 107,614 47,240 253,293 ... 408,147

1907-8 Voyages 91-98 32,350 1,273 41,954 ... 75,577

Totals 139,964 48,513 295,247 ... 483,724

Measurements of plaice accompanied by observations on maturity
were also carried out, both at sea on a Lowestoft fishing-smack and at
the Lowestoft market. In this way 1810 plaice were dealt with at sea
in January, while in the observations on the market, which were made
almost daily in November and December and at intervals throughout
the first quarter of 1908, 10,786 plaice were examined.

Marking Experiments. — During the past year 2159 plaice and 15
other fish have been marked and set free. Of the marked plaice, 1430
were transplanted from the Dutch and Danish coastal grounds to the
southern shoals of the Dogger Bank in May, 1908, with a view of
obtaining information as to their rate of growth in 1908-9.

The more noteworthy of the remaining experiments were directed
towards ascertaining the movements of plaice in autumn in the deeper
water bordering the Dogger Bank, and of the spent plaice which were
leaving tho spawning grounds in the southernmost portions of the
North Sea in spring. With these objects 278 plaice were marked at
various positions round the Dogger Bank in August, 1907, and 190
plaice, including spent females of 35-40 cm. in length, were marked
near Smith's Knoll Light Vessel in March, 1908.

Of the plaice marked from June 1st, 1906, to May 31st, 1907, 387 or
187 % were returned before June 1st, 1908. Of the fish marked in
the year 1905-G, 25-6 % were returned before June 1st, 1907. These
percentages are only comparable in a rough sense, since the times
elapsing between the various experiments and the 31st of May following
do not necessarily correspond in ihe two years. The difference is, how-

EEPOET OF THE COUNCIL. 331

ever, worthy of notice. It seems to be due to the small number of trans-
planted fish recovered, the returns from the Fisher Bank being particu-
larly small. Nearly two-thirds of all the fish marked were taken to
the Dogger Bank, Great Fisher Bank and Little Fisher Bank : the per-
centages of these recovered before June 1st, 1907, were 15*1 %, lO'l %
and 2'5 % respectively, while of the fish marked in the ordinary
marking experiments 34'6 % were caught again.

The conditions under which they were captured being in some
respects unfavourable, there is reason to think that the transplanted
fish were not very strong ; this, together with the difterences of
intensity of fishing in the areas covered by the work of the two years,
probably accounts for the different rates of recapture; Of the 749 fish
transplanted in April and May, 1907, to the Dogger Bank, 15 were
recovered after an interval of 12 months, and show an average yearly
growth of 11*1 cm. Four fish were recovered a year after liberation
on the Great Fisher Bank, having increased in length by 5"0-10"7 cm.
Only one fish of those set free on the Little Fisher Bank was re-
captured after the same period ; this had grown 4"6 cm.

During the year, 9 turbot, 3 cod and 3 latchets were also marked,
and the following marked fish were returned : 33 thornback rays,
17 soles, 10 cod and 3 brill. Considering the small number of fish
marked, and the fact that practically all were marked before June,
1907, the proportions of cod and thornbacks returned in the current
year seem to indicate that the mark is fairly suitable for work with
these fish. Of 295 soles marked in the year 1906-7 about 6 %
were recaptured before June 1st, 1908.

Vitality Experiments. — The plaice caught in 14 hauls of the com-
mercial trawl were examined with a view to the estimation of the pro-
portion that would survive under various conditions of trawling, if
returned to the sea either at once or after certain periods on deck. The
number of plaice dealt with in these experiments is 16,163, each of
which had to be examined separately.

Marked Coconuts. — In September, 1906, 859 coconuts were put
overboard in the North Sea. 142 of these nuts have now been
recovered. In many cases the wire by which the label is fastened to
the nut is found to be much worn, indicating a considerable amount of
motion at the sea bottom on which the nut rested.

B. LABOEATORY WORK.

Maturity of Plaice. — During the past year the investigations with
regard to the age and size of plaice at maturity in different parts of the
Nortli Sea and English Channel, and also those on the distribution of

332 REPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

spawning plaice, have been continued. The results show that, on an
average, female plaice are first mature when at the end of their sixth
year on the grounds around the Dogger Bank, at the end of their fifth
year in the southern part of the North Sea, and at the end of their
fourth year in the western part of the Channel. Males, on an average,
mature a year earlier than the females.

There is evidence to show that spawning takes place particularly in
the deep water off the Yorkshire coast and at the southern end of the
North Sea, but not in the region of the Leman Banks or on the Dogger
Bank. Spawning off Yorkshire appears to occur later than on the
southern spawning ground.

The examination of 123 otoliths suggests that local and sexual
differences are reflected in the otolith, owing to a diminution of growth
at maturity. The data are not however considered to be as yet suffi-
cient for the satisfactory substantiation of this conclusion.

The material for this research consists in observations on the size and
maturity of 13,247 plaice, in 4,106 of which the age was determined
from the otoliths.

Observations on Plaice in the Barents Sea. — By the kindness
of Messrs. Hellyer, a member of the staff was enabled to make a
voyage to the Barents Sea in a Hull trawler, in August last. In the
course of this voyage 2,146 male and 2,365 female plaice were
measured.

The "average size at first maturity," i.e. the length at which 50 %
are mature, was found to be about 40 cm. for female plaice from the
Barents Sea ; which is the same as for those from the central grounds of
the North Sea. Whereas, however, in the Barents Sea the great
majority of the plaice caught on the voyage were considerably above
this " average size at first maturity," and had therefore spawned once at
least, the majority of plaice examined in the North Sea were below it,
most of them not having spawned at all before being caught. The
North Sea thus is in the condition which theoretically should result
from the overfishing of such a plaice population as that of the Barents
Sea.

The rate of growth of the Barents Sea plaice appears to be slow,
possibly owing to the low temperature (about 2° F. above freezing
point) which prevails.

There is some evidence that the plaice migrate towards Atlantic
water for spawning purposes, as do those of Iceland.

An account of this voyage appears in the Journal of the Associa-
tion, vol. viii., p. 71.

Vitality of Trawl-caught Plaice. — A report has been prepared

KEPORT OF THE COUNCIL. 333

on the results of the experiments carried out on this matter by the
H^Lxley. The fish tested were derived from 12 Otter- and 16 Beam-
trawl hauls of different duration. The catches varied in nature and
weight. Each catch was tested in sections, batches of fish being placed
in tanks of circulating sea-water after various periods of exposure ; the
total number of such batches was 89.

Consideration of the data obtained leads to the conclusion that few
of the small plaice captured in the process of commercial trawling
would survive if returned to the sea immediately after they reached
the deck ; while if returned, as in practice they would be returned,
after the fishermen had dealt with the marketable catch, the percentage
surviving would be extremely small.

The Otter trawl is found to injure a far greater proportion of the fish
than the Beam trawl, though probably the very long hauls of the
latter which are quite commonly taken by the sailing vessels using
these trawls would produce the same effect as the hauls with the Otter
trawl. Long hauls, the presence of Meduscv in the net, hot sunshine
during the time the fish are on deck and probably heavy catches are
all detrimental to the fish.

Migration of Cod. — A brief report on this subject has also been
completed.

It is based on the 252 cod marked on the Huxley and the 42
recaptures recorded up to the date of writing. Most of the recaptures,
constituting 13 % of the healthy fish liberated, took place within six
months of liberation.

The fish below 60 cm. in length appear to have remained in water
of depth similar to that in which they were first caught, and had not
travelled far. Most of those which had moved some distance from
the liberation point were recaptured south or west of it.

The number of these is however small. Fifteen cod which remained
for more than three months at liberty showed an average rate of growth of
1'5 cm., but afforded no indications of different growth rates at different
seasons.

Food of Fishes. — Since the conclusion of the second report on this
subject the stomachs of 2,040 fish, belonging to 24 species have been
examined and their contents identified. The total number of fish
subjected to examination during the investigations is 11,866, drawn
from 39 species.

Invertebrate Fauna. — The preparation of a report on the distribu-
tion of invertebrates in the North Sea, based on the operations of the
Huxley, is in progress. The report will deal with 2,168 hauls made
before the end of 1907.

334 REPOKT OF THE COUNCIL.

Bottom Deposits. — During the year the collection of bottom samples
has been increased by 161, and is now 5i9. All those collected before
the end of 1907 have been classified by reference to type specimens
and graded by the use of sieves with holes ranging from 15"0 to
0"5 mm. diameter. The percentage of silt has also been estimated in
each case, and the shells present have been identified.

In certain typical samples the chief minerals have been determined.
Elementary chemical examination of these samples is proceeding.

Taken as a whole the material shows that wide areas exist over which
the condition of the bottom is exceedingly uniform, and that these
areas are confined to the central and eastern parts of the North Sea :
west of 2° E. long, the ground is extremely irregular and for the most
part coarse in texture. The distribution of considerable quantities of
the various grades of deposits on the offshore grounds can be defined
with some confidence in the south part of the North Sea.

C. FISHERMEN'S RECOEDS.

There has been no change in the method of carrying out the collec-
tion and examination of fishermen's records.

A report on the records of the catches of plaice and soles obtained
from Lowestoft smacks has been completed. It deals with 4,929 hauls,
made in the years 1903-6, and shows that the average catch of plaice
per six hours' fishing, by the three boats whose records are considered,
markedly declined during this period. The catch of soles also declined,
though after 1905 the decrease was very small. No conclusion as to
the cause of this general decline in the years considered has been reached.

The catches of turbot and brill have been treated in a similar manner,
that of turbot showing a continuous decline, that of brill falling until
1905, and then rising; the numbers of these two species caught are
not, however, great.

The treatment of the Grimsby records, obtained from steam-trawlers,
is proceeding. 13,535 hauls made in the years 1904-7 have been
tabulated by areas, and the monthly average catches of turbot, brill,
and soles determined together with that of plaice for 1905.

Section II.— HYDEOGRAPHIC AND PLANKTON WORK
IN THE ENGLISH CHANNEL.

During the past twelve months the hydrographic investigations have
been carried out according to the programme of recent years, and the
quarterly cruises have been extended into the Irish Channel nearly as
far north as the Smalls. A large number of samples of water have been
received from outside sources, while the establishment of a regular
weekly sailing between Plymouth and Brest by the G.W.Ry. Co. has

REPOKT OF THE COUNCIL. 335

made it possible to obtain surface samples every fortnight on this line,
so that a continual record can be kept of the surface changes over the
whole of the English Channel.

During the month of August, 1907, salinities were, on the whole,
somewhat low. At the south-west extremity of the area investigated
the water was of the same composition from top to bottom, which is
somewhat unusual at this season ; to the north of this, however, at
about sixty miles true south of the Scilly Islands, a distinct division
into layers of different origin was found, and this condition could be
traced in a northerly direction to the Smalls Lighthouse.

The November cruise showed that the waters of the Irish Channel
were becoming more homogeneous, while in the western part of the
English Channel a more pronounced division into layers of varying
salinity had appeared. The investigations in the eastern area had
to be considerably curtailed owing to continued bad weather.

During December, 1907, the surface conditions, as shown by samples
received from liners and cross-channel steamers, were decidedly ab-
normal. Irregular patches of water of very high salinity appeared to
the south-west, off the Cornish coast, while the salinity between New-
haven and Caen fell to below 34 parts per thousand. During January
and February the high salinity water advanced eastward, and there is
reason to suppose that in April it had reached the line joining the Isle
of Wight and Havre. The low salinities found between Newhaven and
Caen during December were not found in January, and it is probable
that they were due to a thin surface layer which would be quickly
obliterated by mixing.

During the year samples of Plankton were taken in the usual manner
on the four quarterly cruises, and also at regular intervals at Plymouth,
and at light-vessels on the English and Irish coasts. Samples were
also taken each week, midway between Plymouth and the Channel
Islands, from the s.s. Devonia. The records of species taken on the
quarterly cruises are published in the Bulletin of the International
Council.

The samples taken during the August cruise at one station in the
Bristol Channel (E. 30) contained pieces of a peculiar Siphonophore,
apparently LycJinagalma, Haeckel. This was also found off Ushant in
November. The appearance of two small Protozoans, Didyocysta
elegnns, Ehrb., and Didyocysta mitra, Haeck., at the Western Stations
in November are of interest in connection with the peculiar hydro-
graphic conditions of the English Channel and the North Sea during
that month. These organisms, according to Brandt, have a distinctly
Atlantic distribution.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 3. 2 A

336

EEPOKT OF THE COUNCIL.

Published Memoirs.

The following papers, either wholly or in part the outcome of work
done at the Laboratory, have been published elsewhere than in the
Journal of the Association : —

Cotton, A. D. — Some British Species of Phaeophycece. Journal of Botany, vol. 45,
1907, pp. 368-373.

Darbishire, a. D. — On the Direction of the Aqueous Gurrent in the Spiracle of the
Dogfish ; together ivith some Observations on the Respiiratory Mechanism in other
Elasmohranch Fishes. Linn. Soc. Journ. Zool., vol. 30, 1907, pp. 86-94.

Hodgson, T. V. — Pycnogonida. National Antarctic Expedition. Natural
History, 1907.

Hodgson, T. V. — The Pycnogonida of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition.
Trans. Roy. Soc, Edinburgh, vol. 46, Part I., 1908.

MacBride, E. W.— /SorJie Points in the Development of Ofhiothrix fragilis. Proc.
Roy. Soc, Ser. B., vol. 79, pp. 440-445.

MacBride, E. W. — The Development of Ophiothrix fragilis. Quart. Journ. Micr.
Sci., vol. 51, 1907, pp. 557-606.

Smith, Geoffrey. — The fixation of the Gypris Larva of Sacculina carcini (Thompson)
upon its Host, Garcinus maencts. Quart. Jour. Micr. Sci., vol. 51, 1907, pp. 625-632.

Woodland, W. — Studies in Spicule Formation, VII. The Sclerohlastic development
of the Plate-and- Anchor Spicules of Synapta, and the Wheel Spicules of the Aiiricularia
Larva. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. 51, pp. 483-509.

Donations and Receipts.

The receipts for the year for the ordinary work of the Association
include the grants from His Majesty's Treasury (£1000) and the
Worshipful Company of Fishmongers (£400), Special Donations (£40),
Annual Subscriptions (£96), Eent of Tables in the Laboratory (£85),
Sale of Specimens (£400), Admission to Tank Eoom (£134).

Vice-Presidents, Officers, and Council.

The following is the list of gentlemen proposed by the Council for

election for the year 1908-9 : —

President.

Sir Ray Lankester, K.C.B., LL.D., F.R.S.

Vice-Presidents.

The Duke of Abercorn, K.G., C.B.
The Duke of Bedford, K.G.
The Earl of St. Germans.
The Earl of Ducie, F.R.S.
Lord AvEBURY, F.R.S.
Lord TwEEDMOUTH, K.T.
Lord Walsinqham, F.R.S.
The Right Hon. A. J. Balfour, M.P.,
F.R.S.

The Eight Hon. Joseph Chamber-
lain, M.P.

The Right Hon. Austen Chamber-
lain, M.P.

Sir Edward Birkbeck, Bart.

A. C. L. GtJNTHER, Esq., F.R.S.

Sir John Murray, K.C.B., F.R.S.

Rev. Canon Norman, D.C.L., F.R.S.

Edwin Waterhouse, Esq.

KEPORT OF THE COUNCIL.

337

G. L. Alward, Esq.
Prof. T. W. Bridge, Sc.D., F.R.S.
W. T. Calman, Esq., D.Sc.
Piof. A. Dendy, D.Sc, F.R.S.
Sir Charles Eliot, K.C.M.G.
G. Herbert Fowler, Esq., Ph.D.
F. W. Gamble, D.Sc, F.R.S.
Prof. Walter Garstang, D.Sc.

Members of Council.

S. F. Harmer, Esq., ScD., F.R.S.

E. W. L. Holt, Esq.

J. J. Lister, Esq., F.R.S.

H. R. Mill, Esq., D.Sc

P. Chalmers Mitchell, Esq., D.Sc,

F.R.S.
Prof. D'Arct W. Thompson, C.B.

Cliairman of Council.
A. E. Shipley, Esq., D.Sc, F.R.S.

Hon. Treasurer.
J. A. Travers, Esq.

Hon. Secretary.
E. J. Allen, Esq., D.Sc

The following Governors are also members of the Council : —
G. P. Bidder, Esq., M.A.
G. L. Denman, Esq. (Prime Warden

of the Fishmongers' Company).

E. L. Beckwith, Esq. (Fishmongers'
Company).

G. C. Bourne, Esq., D.Sc (Oxford

University).
A. E. Shipley, Esq., F.R.S. (Cambridge

University).
Prof. W. A. Herdman, D.Sc, F.R.S.

(British Association).

[ 338 ]
^r. Statement of Receij^ts and Payments for

£ s. d. £ s. d.

To Current Income : —

H.M. Treasury 1,000

Fishmongers' Company 400

Annual Subscriptions 96 11

Rentof Tables 85 2 1,58113

„ Extraordinary Receipts : —
Donations : —

E. T. Browne, Esq £5

Per Dr. A. E, Shipley 35

Composition Fee

Hire of Steam Boats : —

S.S, mixlcij £600

S.S. Oitho7ia 50

,, Balance : —

Loan from Bank

Less : —

Cash at Bank £437 5 7

Cash in hand 18 19 11

15 15

650

705 15

700

456 5

243 14

Note. — This balance is apportioned as follows : —

General Account, overdrawn 396 15 10

iess Repairs and Renewals Account in credit 153 1 4

£243 14 6

£2,531 2 6

Examined aiid fouixd correct,

(Signed) N. E. Waterhouse, A.C.A. L. W. Byrne.

Hugh Robert Mill.

•l^iK June, 1908.

[ 339 ]

the Year ending ^\st May, 1908.

dr.

•r. T. 1 <. ■, . & S. d & S. d.

hJy Balance from last year, viz. : —

Loan from Bank 400

iess Cash at Bank £69 1

Cashinhand 20 11 4 89 12 4 310 7 8

,, Current Expenditure : —
Salaries and Wages —

Director 200

Assistant Director 206 13 9

Naturalist 139 11 8

Salaries and Wages ,. 687 13 1,233 18 5

Travelling Expenses 53 10 2

Library 104 4 1

Journal 50 15 6

iess Sales of Journal 10 2 8 40 12 10

Buildings and Public Tank Room —

Gas, Water, and Coal 122 7 9

Stocking Tanks, Feeding, etc 42 15 2

Maintenance and Renewals 110 19 2

Rent of Land, Rates, Taxes, and Insurance 35 12 1

311 14 2
Zess Admission to Tank Room 134 10 11 177 3 3

Laboratory, Boats, and Sundry Expenses —

Stationery, Office Expenses, Printing, etc 128 2 4

Glass, Chemicals, and Apparatus £151 15 1

iessSales 52 9 9 99 5 4

Purchase of Specimens 56 2 8

Maintenance and Renewal of Boats,

Nets, Gear, etc £253 3 5

iessSales 5 9 5 247 14

Insurance of Steamers —

S.S. irtia;% (half-year) 82 19 1

B.S. Oithona 25 5 5 108 4 6

Coal and Water for Steamers 130 19 6

770 8 4

Less Sales of Specimens, etc 400 10 6 369 17 10

Bank Interest 12 14 5

„ Extraordinary Expenditure : —

On account of purchase of S.S. Huxley, including
expenses of Vendor reimbursed by Agreement (the
balance of the purchase price is secured by a Mort-
gage of the vessel repayable by annual instalments) 228 13 10

£2,531 2 6

[ 340 ]

Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom.

LIST

1st OCTOBEE, 1908.

• Member of Council. t Vifie-President. J President.
Ann. signifies that tlie Member is liable to an Annual Subscription of One Guinea.

C. signifies that he has paid a Composition Fee of Fifteen Guineas in lieu of Annual
Subscription.

I.— Governors.

The British Association for the Advancement of Science, Burlington

House, W. £500

The University of Oxford £500

The University of Cambridge £500

The Worshipful Company of Clothworkers, 41, Mincing Lane, E.G. £500

The Worshipful Company of Fishmongers, London Bridge, E.G. £8505

Bayly, Robert (the late) £1000

Bayly, John (the late) £600

Thomasson, J. P. (the late) £970

G. P. Bidder, Esq., Cavendish Gorner, Gambridge £1400

II.— Founders.

1884 The Corporation of the City of London £210

1884 The Worshipful Company of Mercers, Mercers' Hall, Gheapside £341 5s.

1884 The Worshipful Company of Goldsmiths, Goldsmiths' Hall, E.G. £100

1884 The Royal Microscopical Society, 20, Hanover Square, TV. £100

1 884 The Royal Society, Burlington House, Piccadilly, JV. £350

1 884 The Zoological Society, 3, Hanover Square, W. £ 100

1884 Bulteel, Thos., Radford, Plymouth £100

1884 Burdett-Coutts, W. L. A. Bartlett, 1, Stratton Street, Piccadilly, W.... £100

1884 Crisp, Sir Frank, Treas. Linn. Soc, 17, Throgmorton Avenue, E.G. ... £100

1884 Daubeny, Caj^tain Giles A., The Vicarage, Tottington., Bury, Lanes. ... £100

1884 Eddy, J. Ray, TJie Gh-ange, Garleton, Skipton £100

1884 Gassiott, John P. (the late) £100

J1884 Lankester, Sir E. Ray, K.C.B., F.R.S., 29, Thurloe Place, South

Kensington, S.W. £100

LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS. 341

1884 The Rt. Hon. Lord Masham (the late) £100

1884 Moseley, Prof. H. N., F.R.S. (the late) £100

+1884 The Rt. Hon. Lord Avebury, F.R.S., Hujh Elms, Bromley, Kent £100

1884 Poulton, Prof. Edward B., M.A., F.R.S., JFykeham House, Oxford ... £100

1884 Romanes, G. J., LL.D., F.R.S. (the late) ; £100

1884 Worthington, James (the late) £100

1885 Derby, the late Earl of £100

1887 Weldon, Prof. W. F. R., F.R.S. (the late) £100

1888 Bury, Henry, M.A., Mayfiekl House, Furnham, Surrey £100

1 888 The Worshipful Company of D rapers, Drapers' Hall, E.G. £315

1889 The Worshipful Company of Grocers, Poultry, E.C. £ 1 20

1889 Thompson, Sir Henry, Bart, (the late) £110

1889 Revelstoke, The late Lord £100

1890 Riches, T. H., B.A., KitwelU, Shcnley, Herts £230

1902 Gurney, R., Ingham Old Hall, Stalham, Norfolk £100

III.— Members.

1897 Adams, W. R., 16, Milestone Road, Gintra Park, Upper Norwood,

London Ann.

1900 Aders, W. M., Zeitoun, Gairo, Egypt Ann,

1884 Alger, W. H., 8, The Esplanade, Phjmouth C.

*1895 Allen, 1*1. J., D.Sc, The Laboratory, Plymouth Ann.

*1889 Alward, G. L., Enfield Villa, Hamberstone Avenue, Waltham, Grimsby Ann.

1892 Assheton, R., M.A., Eiversdale, Granchester, Gambridge £20

1904 Aflalo, F. G., 7, Courtenay Place, Teignmouth, Devon Ann.

1884 Bailey, Charles, M.Sc, F.L.S., Atherstone House, North Drive, St. Anne's-

on-the-Sea Ann.

1902 Baker, R. J., 3, Ash Villas, CoUings Park, Mannamead, IHymouth Ann.

1884 'S>aMo\\v,Vvoi. '&a,yl%Y, 7. ^.'&., Roijal Botanic Gardens, Edinburgh G.

1908 Ballard, Edward, Greenfield, Hoole Village, Ghester Ann.

1884 Bayliss, W. Maddock, D.Sc, F.R.S., ^t. Guthbcrts, West Heath Road,

Hampstead Ann.

1884 Bajdy, Miss, Seven Trees, Plymouth £50

1884 Bayly, Miss Anna, Seven Trees, Plymouth £50

1884 Beaumont, W. I., B.A., The Laboratory, Plymouth Ann.

1885 Beck, Conrad, 68, Cor7ihill, E.G. G.

*1889 Beckwith, E. L., The Knoll, Eastbourne Ann.

1887 Beddard, F. E., F.R.S., Zoological Society's Gardens, Regent's Park, N.W. Ann.

1884 Beddington, Alfred H., 8, Gornwall Terrace, Regent's Park, N.W. C.

+1907 Bedford, His Grace the Duke of, K.G., Endsleigh, Tavistock G.

1897 Bedford, Mrs., 326, Gamden Road, London, N. Ann.

1903 Bidder, H. F., 10, Queen's Gate Gardens, London, S.W Ann.

1893 Bles, A. J. S., Palm House, Higher Broughton, Manchester Ann.

*1884 Bourne, Prof. Gilbert C, M.A., Savile House, Mansfield Road, Oxford Ann.

1898 Bowles, Coh Henry, Forty Hull, Enfield Ann.

*1895 Bridge, Prof. T. W., D.Sc, F.R.S., University of Birmingham Ann.

1902 Brighton Public Library (Henry D. Roberts, Chief Librarian Ann.

1886 Brooksbank, Mrs. M., Leigh Place, Godstone, Surrey G.

342 LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS.

1884 Brown, Arthur W. W., 62, Carlisle Mansions, Carlisle Place, London, S. W. C.

1893 Browne, Edward T., B.A., 141, Uxbridge Road, W. Ann.

1897 Byrne, L. W., B.A., 7, New Square, Lincoln's Inn, London, JV.C Ann.

1887 Caldwell, W. H C.

*i908 Caiman, Dr. W. T., British Museum {Natural History), Crormvell

Road,S.W. Ann.

tl884 Chamberlain, Rt. Hon. J., M.P., 40, Prince's Gardens, SJV. Ann.

1884 Christy, Thomas Howard, 199, Bramhall Lane, Stockport C.

1887 Clarke, Rt. Hon. Sir E., K.C., 5, Essex Court, Temple, B.C. £25

1884 Clay, Dr. R. H., Windsor Villas, Plymouth Ann.

1885 Clerk, Major-General H., F.R.S., '' Mountfield," 5, Upper Maze Hill,

St. Leonards-on-Sea, Sussex £21

1886 Coates and Co., Southside Street, Plymouth C.

1885 Collier Bros., Old Town Street, Plymouth C.

1900 Cooper, W. F., B.A., Ashlyns Hall, Berhhamsted Ann.

1885 Darwin, Francis, F.R.S., 13, Madingley Road, Cambridge C.

1885 Darwin, W. 'K., Ridgemount, Bassett, Southampton £20

*1908 Dendy, Prof. A., F.R.S., Binfield, Weyhridge Ann.

1884 Dewick, Rev. E. S., M.A., F.G.S., 26, Oxford Square, Hyde Park, W.... C.

1885 Dixey, F. A., M.A. Oxon., Wadham College, Oxford £26 5s. and Ann.

1906 De Morgan, W. C, c/o National Provincial Bank, Plymouth Ann.

1890. Driesch, Hans, Ph.D., Philosophenweg 5, Heidelberg, Germany C.

+1889 Ducie,TheRt. Hon. the Earl of,F.R.S., TortworthCourt,Falfield,B.S.O. £50 15s.
1884 Dunning, J. W., 4, Talbot Square, London, W. £26 5s.

1884 Dyer, Sir W. T. Thiselton,M.A.,K.C.M.G.,F.R.S., The Ferns, Witcombe,

Gloucester C.

*1898 Eliot, Sir C. N. E., K.C.M.G., C.B., Endcliffe Holt, Endcliffe Crescent,

Sheffield Ann.

1906 Elliott, Sir Thomas H., K.C.B., Board of Agriculture and Fisheries,

4, Whitehall Place, London, S.W. Ann.

1891 Ellis, Hon. Evelyn C.

1908 Elwes, Maj. Ernest V., Glendower, St. Albans Road, Babbacombe Ann.

1893 ^ny?,, io\\\\T>&YiQS, Enys, Penryn, Cornwall Ann.

1 885 Ewart, Prof. J. Cossar, M . D. , University, Edin burgh £25

1894 Ferrier, David, M.A., M.D., F.R.S., 34, Cavendish Square, W. Ann.

1884 Fison, Sir Frederick W., Bart., 64, Pont Street, London, S.W. C.

1897 Foster, Richard, Windsivorth, Looe, R.S.O Ann.

*1885 Fowler, G. Herbert, B.A., Ph.D., The Old House, Aspley Guise,

Bedfordshire Ann.

1884 Fox, George H., Wodehouse Place, Falmouth Ann.

1884 Fry, George, F.L.S., Carlin Brae, Berwick-on-Tweed £21

1892 Galton, F., F.R.S., 42, Rutland Gate, S.W. Ann.

*1907 Gamble, Dr. F. W., F.R.S., Heathwaite, Bramhall Lane, nr. Stockport Ann.

1906 Gardiner, J. Stanley, M.A., Caius College, Cambridge Ann.

*1907 Garstang, Prof. W., D.Sc, 2, Ridge Mount, Cliff Road, Headingly,

Leeds Ann.

LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS. 343

1885 Gaskell, W. H., F.R.S., The Uplands, Shelford, Cambridge 0.

1901 Giles, Col. G. M., 3, Elliot Terrace, Plymouth G.

1885 Gordon, Rev. J. M., St. John's Vicarage, Redhill, Surrey Ann.

1884 Grove, E., Norlington, Preston, Brighton Ann.

1899 Guinness, Hon. Rupert, Elveden, Thetford £35 15s.

tl884 Giintlier, Dr. Albert, F.R.S., 2, Lichfield Road, Keio Gardens Ann.

1900 Gurney, E., Sproioston Hall, Norwich Ann.

1884 Halliburton, Prof. W. D., M.D., F.R.S., Ghurcli Gottage, 17, Marylehone

Bead, London, W. Ann.

1 884 Hannah, Robert, 82, A ddison Boad, Kensington, W. G.

*1885 Harmer, S. F., D.Sc, F.R.S., King's Gollege, Gambridge G.

1889 Harvej^, T. H., Gattedoion, Plymouth Ann.

1 888 Haselwood, J. E., 3, Lennox Place, Brighton G.

1884 Haslam, Miss E. Rosa, Bavenswood, Bolton £20

1884 Head, J. Merrick, F.R.G.S., J.P., Pennsylvania Gastle, Isle of Portland,

Dorset ., Ann.

1884 Heape, Walter, Greyfriars, Southwold, Suffolk G.

*1884 Herdman, Prof. W. A., F.R.S., The Zoology Department, The University,

Liverpool Ann.

1884 Herscliel, Col. J., R.E., F.R.S., Observatory House, Slough, Berks G.

1889 Heywood, Mrs. E. S., Light Oaks, Manchester C.

1884 Hickson, Prof. Sydney J., M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S., Ellcsmere House,

JFilenslow Boad, JVithington, Manchester Ann.

1907 Hill, Prof. J. P., The Zoological Laboratory, University College,

London, W.G. Ann.

1 897 Hodgson, T. V., 54, Kingsley Boad, Plymouth Ann,

1884 Holdsworth, E. W. H., F.L.S., F.Z.S., Lucerne House, Dartmouth Ann.

*1905 Holt, E. W. L, 46, Soicer Baggot Street, Dublin Ann.

1884 Hudleston, W. H., M.A., F.R.S., 8, Stanhope Gardens, South Kensing-

ton, S.W. Ann.

1891 Indian Museum, Calcutta Ann.

1888 Inskip, Capt. G. H., R.N., 22, Torrington Place, Plymouth Ann.

1885 Jackson, W. Hatchett, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S., Pen TFartha, Weston-super-

Mare Ann.

1887 Jago-Trelawny, Major-Gen., F.R.G.S., Goldrenick, Liskeard G.

1897 Lancliester, W. F., B.A., Den of Gryffe, Kilmacolm, near Glasgow G.

1885 Langley, Prof. J. N., F.R.S., Tmi^ CoZ%e, (7am6nV7^e G.

*1895 Lister, J. J., M.A., F.R.S., St. John's College, Cambridge Ann.

1885 Macalister, Prof. A., F.R.S., St. John's College, Gambridge Ann.

1884 Mac Andrew, James J., Lukesland, Pcybridge, South Devon Ann.

1900 Macfie, J. W. Scott, i^ow^on Hall, Chester G.

1884 ]\Iackrell, John, High Trees, Clapham Common, S.W G.

1902 Major, Surgeon H. G. T., 24, Beech House Boad, Croydon G.

1 889 Makovski, Stanislaus, Saffrons Corner, Eastbourne Ann.

1885 Marr, J. E., M.A., F.R.S., St. John's College, Cambridge C

1902 Martin, C. H., The Hill, Abergavenny Ann.

344 IJST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS.

1906 Masterman, A. T., D.Sc, Board of Agriculture and Fisheries, Delahay

Street, London, S.TV. Ann

1884 Mcintosh, Prof. W. C, F.KS^Nevay Park, Meigle, N.B G.

1884 Michael, Albert D., The Warren, Studland, nr. TFareham, Dorset C

1903 Mill, H. R., D.Sc, 62, Camden Square, London, N.W. Ann.

1899 Minchin, Prof. E. A., 4, Tennyson Mansions, Oheyne Row, Chelsea, S. W. Ann.
*1905 Mitchell, P. Chalmers, D.Sc, F.R.S., Secretary Zoological Society,

3, Hanover Square, London, W. Ann.

1885 Mocatta,F.H G.

1886 Mond, Ludwig, F.R.S., 20, Avemie Road, Regent's Park, N.W. G.

1906 Morford, Rev. Augustin, The Friary, Saltash, Cormoall Ann.

tl896 Murray, Sir John, K.C.B., F.R.S., Challenger Lodge, Wardie, Edinhurgh Ann.

tl884 Norman, Rev. A. M,, M.A., D.C.L., F.R.S., The Red House, Berkhamsted,

Herts Ann.

1885 Phillips, Chas. D, F., M.D G.

1906 Plymouth Corporation (Museum Committee) Ann.

1906 Port of Plymouth Incorporated Chamber of Commerce Ann.

1885 Pritchard, Prof. Urban, Combe Hurst, Nutley Terrace, Hampstead Ann.

1884 Pye-Smith, P. H., M.D., 48, Brook Street, W. G.

1893 Quintin, St. W. H., Scampstone Hall, Rilling ton, Yorks Ann.

1884 Ralli, Mrs. Stephen £30

1885 'Ransom, W. B., The Pavement, Nottingham C.

1 892 Robinson, Miss M. , University College, London, W.C. Ann.

1892 Riiffer, M. A., M.D., Conseil Sanitaire, Maritime et Quarentenaire, Alexan-
dria, Egypt Ann.

1897 Sandeman, H. D., 4, Elliot Terrace, Plymouth Ann.

1888 ScharfF, Robert F., Ph.D., Science and Art Museum, Dublin Ann.

1901 Schiller, F.W., Rowley House, Stafford Ann.

1884 Sclater, P. L., F.R.S., Odiham Priory, Winchfield, Hants Ann.

1884 Sclater, W. L., El Paso Club, Colorado Spriugs, Colorado, U.S. A Ann.

1885 Scott, D. H., M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., East Oakley House, Oakley, Hants.... G.

1 903 Scott, S, D. , Ne uich Ho use, Bath Road, Cheltenham Ann.

1884 Sedgwick, Prof. A., M.A., F.R.S., Triiiity College, Cambridge C.

1888 Serpen, E. W., 19, Hill Park Crescent, Plymouth £50

1900 Sexton, L. E., 17, Collings Park, Higher Gompton, Plymouth Ann.

1904 Sh&w, J ose\)h.,Bryanston Square, Londo7i, W. £13

1885 Sheldon, Miss Lilian, High Park, Bideford Ann.

*1884 Shipley, Arthur E., M.A., F.R.S., Christ's College, Cambridge C.

1886 Shore, T. W., M.D., Woodlawn, Kingswood Road, Upper Norwood,

London, S.E Ann.

1894 Simpson, F. C, J. P., Maypool, Churston Ferrers, R.S.O Ann.

1885 Sinclair, F. G., Friday Hill, Chingford, Essex G.

1891 Sinclair, William F., 102, Cheyne Walk, Chelsea, S.W. G.

1884 Skinners, the Worshipful Company of, (Simncrs' ffa/Z, ^.(7. £42

LIST OF GOVERNORS, FOUNDERS, AND MEMBERS. 345

1889 Slade, Capt. E. J. W., R.N., M.V.O., TFar College, Portsmouth G.

1888 Spencer, Prof.W.Balchvin,M.A.,F.R.S., University of Victoria, Melbourne Ann.

1907 Sprague, Thomas Bond, M.A., LL.D., 29, Buckingham Terrace, Edinburgh Ann.

1897 Straker, J., LL.M., F.Z.S., Oxford and Cambridge Club, S.W. C.

*1899 Thompson, Prof. D'Arcy W., C.B., University College, Dundee Ann,

1890 Thompson, Sir H. F., Bart., 9, Kensington Park Gardens, London, W. Ann.

1884 Thornycroft, Sir John I., F.R.S., Eyot Villa, Chiswick Mall Ann.

1906 Tims, H. W. Marett, M.D., Deepdene, Cavendish Avenue, Cambridge .. Ann.

1 903 Torquay Natural History Society, Torquay Ann.

*1897 Travers, J. A., Tortington House, Arundel Ann.

1 891 Vaughan, Henry, 325, High Holborn, London C.

1884 Walker, Alfred 0., Ulcombe Place, Maidstone Ann.

1884 Walker, P. F., 36, Pruice's Gardens, SJV. Ann.

tl884 Walsingham, The Rt. Hon. Lord, F.R.S., Mcrton Hall, Thetford £20

1906 Waterhouse, N. E., 3, Fredericks Place, Old Jeivry, London, E.G. Ann.

1906 Weldon, Mrs., Merton Lea, Oxford

1891 Wildy, A. G Ann.

1900 Wille}% A., D.Sc, Government Museum, Colombo, Ceylon Ann.

1908 Williamson, Lieut. H. A., R.N., H.M.S. Mercury, Portsmouth Ann.

1884 Vfilson, Scott B., iJe«i/ieri?an/;, Weybridge Heath C.

1900 Wolfenden,R. N.,M.D.,76, JFimpole Street, Cavendish Square,Londo7i,JF. Ann.
1905 Woolf, M. Yeatman, JVimjJole House, Wimpole Street, London, W. ... Ann.

1898 Worth, R. H., 42, George Street, Plymouth Ann.

IV.— Associate Members.

1900 Bignell, G. C, F.E.S., The Ferns, Home Park Road, Saltash, Cornwall.
1889 Caux, J. W. de, Great Yarmoxdh.

1889 Dannevig, Capt. G. M., Arendal, Norway.

1904 Donnison, F., Deep Sea Fishing Co., Boston.

1904 Edwards, W. C, Mercantile Marine Office, St. Andrew'' s Dock, Hull.

1904 Freeth, A. J., Fish Quay, North Shields.

1904 Hurrell, H. E., 25, Regent Street, Yarmouth.

1904 Inskip, H. E., Capt., R.N., Harbour Master's Office, Ramsgate.

1904 Johnson, A., Fishmongers' Company, Billingsgate Market, London, E.G.

1889 Olsen, O. T., F.L.S., F.R.G.S., Fish Dock Road, Great Grimsby.

1904 Patterson, Arthur, Ibis House, Great Yarmouth.

1889 Ridge, B. J., Neivlyn, Penzance.

1901 Sanders, W. J., St. Elmo, Brixham.

1889 Sinel, Joseph, 8, Springfield Cottages, Springfield Road, Jersey, C.I.

1890 Spencer, R. L., L. and N. W. Depot, Guernsey.
1890 Wells, W., The Aquarium, Brighton.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE ASSOCIATION.

Journal of the Marine Biological Association.

Old Series.
No. 1, August, 1887 (only a few copies left, reserved for Libraries).
No. 2, August, 1888. Price Is.

New Series {Royal 8vo).

Volume I., 1889-90, 472 pp., 28 plates.

Volume II., 1891-2, 410 pp., 14 plates.

Volume III., 1893-4, xxxviii. and 458 pp., 5 jalates and 25 woodcuts.

Volume IV., 1895-7, iv. and 425 pp.

Volume v., 1897-9, 550 pp. and 16 plates.

Volume VI., 1899-1903, 676 pp., 3 charts and 7 plates.

Volume VII., 1904-6, 588 pp., 1 chart and 12 i^lates.

Volume VIII., Nos. 1, 2, and 3:

Separate numbers (generally 4 to one volume), in wrappers, from 2s. to 5s. each,

according to size.

London Agents; Messrs. Dulau & Co., 37 Soho Square, W.

Cloth Ato, 150 2^P-i 18 plates (12 coloured).

A TREATISE ON THE COMMON SOLE.

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A., F.R.S.E.,

Late Fellow of University College, Oxford ; Naturalist to the Association.

Price to Members, 20s. ; to Non-Members, 25s.

Medium 8vo, 3Q8 pages, 159 Illustrations and two Alaj^s. Price 7s. 6d. net.

{Macmillan d; Co., London.)

THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE MARKETABLE
MARINE FISHES OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS.

Pi'epared expressly for the use of those interested in the Sea-fishing Industries,

J. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A.,

FORMERLY FELLOW OF UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, OXFORD ;
NATURALIST ON THE STAFF OF THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION.

eiMitl) Preface ip
E. RAY LANKESTER, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.,

PROFESSOR OF COMPARATIVE ANATOMY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD.

[ 347 ]

Notes on the Littoral Polychaeta of Torquay (Part II.).

By
Major E. V. Elwes.

Phyllodocidae.

It cannot be said that all the species of the Phyllodocidae have yet
been satisfactorily defined, much difference of opinion existing as to
the separation of varieties and species. In the accompanying key the
nomenclature of Professor Mcintosh has been followed, but those
Annelids, which are classed by him as varieties, but which have been
hitherto generally accepted as distinct species, are shown separately.
The true specific value of the arrangement and nature of the papillae
on the proboscis can only be settled by the examination of numerous
individuals from various localities ; in the meantime it appears best to
consider Annelids differing in these particulars as at least varieties
worthy of a name.

EuLALiA viKiDis, 0. F. Mliller. Mcintosh, 3Ion. Brit. Ann., vol. ii.,
p. 55.

The variety of U. viridis, most commonly found at Torquay, is
coloured an uniform dark green, the cirri being rather lighter in
colour. It is particularly abundant where the limestone rocks have
been much eaten away from about half-tide mark downwards. It appears
to like crawling about the damp rocks out of the water when the tide
is low, and does not hesitate to leave the water when placed in a
shallow vessel. The terminal papillae of the proboscis numbered
fourteen in all the individuals examined, like those found by de St.
Joseph at Dinard ; but the whole of the extended proboscis was
covered with papillae.

The variety ornata of de St. Joseph is fairly common, but does not
appear to extend above the Laminarian zone. There appears to be very
little doubt that this is the P. griffithdi of Johnstone. His specimens
were obtained from Torbay, and there does not appear to be any
species of Eulalia found there to which the description could apply.

NEW SEKIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 4. May, 1909. . 2 B

348 NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH.ETA OF TORQUAY.

The number of segments per inch of length mentioned by Johnstone
applies much better to ornata than to E. ncbulosa, Montagu.

The variety aurea of Gravier is also found at Torquay in the same
localities as ornata. The dorsal cirri are distinctly less pointed, and
the breadth of the segments greater in proportion to the length than
in the case of the other varieties.

EuLALiA NEBULOSA, MontdigM = E . 'puTictif era , Grube. Mcintosh, Mon.
Brit. Ann., vol. ii., p. 53.

One specimen only from Corbyn's Head. Colour dull green rather
than yellowish or red ; some of the dorsal cirri heavily marked with
dark colouring matter. The much longer upper limb of the bifid
setigerous process of the foot is very characteristic of this species.

EuMiDA SANGUINEA, (Ersted = ^. pallida, Grube. Mcintosh, Mon.
Brit. Ann., vol. ii., p. &Q.

The real distinction between the genera Eulalia and Eumida, as
defined by Malmgren and Mcintosh, is that in Eulalia the first pair of
tentacular cirri are attached to a segment divided from the head by
a constriction visible at least on the ventral side, while in Eumida. the
first pair of tentacular cirri are apparently attached to the head, the
first segment being soldered to the head. Such a distinction is, how-
ever, unsatisfactory, because the visibility of a dividing line between
the segment and head depends so much on the method of preparation
of the specimen. The only British species is, however, easily recognised
as a rule by the peculiar white markings, which look as if they had
been painted on with Chinese white. It is common amongst the
Laminaria roots at Torquay. Most of the specimens are coloured
ajpale brown, but one or two were found with a decided red tinge in
the^posterior part of the body.

The proboscis is covered with very small papillae, which almost or
entirely disappear in preparations, for which reason the smoothness of
the proboscis as a generic distinction is also objectionable. Some
of the individuals had black patches in the intestines like those
described by Gravier in his Eumida communis. Bull. Sc. Fr. Belg.,
t. xxxix., p. 18.

Phyllodoce maculata, Johnstone. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann.,
vol. ii., p. 89.

This is the only species of Phyllodoce which is at all common between
tide marks at Torquay. It is found amongst rucks and weeds, and
also in the sand. On one occasion sixteen individuals were found

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH^TA OF TORQUAY. o49

in a whelk shell containing the decaying remains of a hermit
crab.

The Torquay species agree well with the beautiful coloured drawing
given in the Mon. Brit. Ann.

One specimen was found in a limestone pool which differed consider-
ably from the type : the general colour much greener, the dorsal cirri
larger in proportion and without spots, the distance between the feet
greater. The number of the rows of papillae on the proboscis could not
be observed. Possibly this is the Phyllodoce maculata of (Ersted.

Phyllodoce lamelligera, Gmelin. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann.,
vol. ii., p. 76.

One light-coloured individual under a stone at Hope's Nose, and
another of the normal colouring at Meadfoot.

Papillte of the proboscis could not be observed.

Phyllodoce Paretti, De Blainville. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann.,
vol. ii., p. 76.

The head and about twenty segments of one from Corbyn's Head. The
specimen, mounted in weak Formalin solution, retained its beautiful
colouring for some weeks, then changed gradually to a reddish brown.

Gosse, in The Aquarium, second edition, p. 243, describes an example
of this species from Torbay.

Eteone picta, De Quatrefages. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann., p. 100.

Small ones, about 25 mm. in length, are not uncommon amongst
Laminaria roots. The pattern of the colouring agrees with that
described by Mcintosh, but the anal cirri are quite differently shaped
to those in PI. xlv. Fig. 3, of the Monograph, being ovate, exactly like
those figured by Gravier, Bull. Sc. Fr. Belg., PI. xvi. Fig. 14.

NoTOPHYLLUM FOLIOSUM, Sars = alatuTii, Langerhans. Mcintosh, Mon.
Brit. Ann.

One from Livermead. The dorsal cirri appear to be much more
deciduous than the ventral. Colouring like that described by Mcintosh
for specimens kept some time in confinement, namely, brownish green
without the red iridescence.

Nepthydidse.

Nepthys Hombergii, Lamark. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann., p. 17.
Moderate-sized examples of this species, about 90 mm. in length, are
common in the sand at Tor Abbey Sands and Livermead. They were

350 NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH^TA OF TORQUAY.

also found in rather dirty, muddy sand in the inner harbour of Torquay,
The posterior lamina of the ventral branch of the foot is more pro-
nouncedly directed upwards and more truncate than is shown in any of
the figures given in the monograph.

Nepthys cirrosa, Ehlers. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann., vol. ii., p. 36.

In clean sand in company with N. Hombergii, but not quite so
numerous. It may be distinguished at once from N. Hombergii by its
comparatively narrow width and the light colour of the bristles.

Mcintosh says (p. 38) that de St. Joseph distinguishes this species
by the larger size of the branchise. But it is not the branchiaj them-
selves, but the " cirre branchial " (called by Mcintosh " the dorsal
cirrus at the base of the branchia ") which de St. Joseph says becomes
larger and larger, until, for about the thirty last segments, it is almost
longer than the branchise. See Ann. Sc. Nat., 8th series, xvii., p. 21.

Hesionidae.

Castalia fusca, J ohn8toi'i = Kef ersteinia cirrata, Kef. Mcintosh,
Mon. Brit. Ann., vol. ii., p. 127.

Common under stones, especially at Meadfoot; also in Laminaria
roots. It is an extremely brittle species which, like other very brittle
annelids, is best lifted up with a soft camel-hair brush.

Magalia peramata. Mar, and Bobr. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann.,
vol. ii., p. 136.

Common amongst Laminaria roots.

Nereidse.

Micronereis variegata, Clpd. Claparkle, Beob. ilher anat. wirbel
thiere, etc., 1863, p. 57 and PI. xi, Figs. 56-7 ; and Glanures parmi Us
Ann. de Port Vendres, p. 122, PI. xiii, Fig. 4a.

This little aberrant member of the Nereida? is not recorded in the
"Fauna of Plymouth." Four or five individuals were found amongst red
algse and Lithothamnion from the rocks between Oddicombe and
Babbicombe beaches.

The length is 4 mm., number of segments 21. The head, which is
rounded in front, has no tentacles or palps. There are four eyes, the
lateral pair close together, the posterior pair close to the margin of the
head ; the first pair have conspicuous crystalline lenses. There are four
pairs of tentacular cirri, the front pairs situated on the front edge of
the buccal segment low down ; the posterior pairs, which are inserted
higher up, are slightly longer, than the other. The tentacular cirri are

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH.^TA OF TORQUAY. 351

fusiform and are tinged with yellow. The body is coloured purple.
The jaws are about twice as long as broad, the number of teeth in each
jaw five. There are no denticles. The first pair of feet, which are
uniramous, are attached to the buccal segment. The second pair are
also uniramous, but all the other feet are deeply bifid.

There are about twenty bristles in each foot, the terminal pieces of
which are straight and narrow ; they are much longer in proportion to
their length than those shown in Claparede's drawing. Bristles and
spines are colourless. The drawing given by Claparede is quite
accurate for an individual drawn under compression, but the feet and
cirri as shown there are much flattened out.

Leptonereis Vaillanti. de St. Joseph, Ann. des Sc. Nat. Zool.,
vol. v., 1888, p. 246.

One imperfect male Heteronereid form of this species was found in
the month of February at Oddicombe. The posterior of the three
regions into which the body is divided was absent, but the remaining
segments agreed with the description and figures given by de St. Joseph.
It is not recorded in the " Fauna of Plymouth."

Nereilepas fucata, Savigny. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann., vol. ii.,
PL LXi, Figs. 6 and 6a.

This is not strictly a littoral species, but may be sometimes found in
whelk shells thrown up on the shore. One lived for about six months
in a small aquarium in a broken whelk shell, but without any hermit
crab. It usually had the head and about ten or twelve segments of
the body protruding from the shell ; this part of the body being curved
and continually waved backwards and forwards, giving the worm a
most curious resemblance to a cobra.

Nereis pelagica, L. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann., vol. ii., PI. lx,
Figs. 6 and 6a.

This Nereis is extremely common in the roots of the Laminaria,
nearly every root containing one or two. Several of the Heteronereid
form were found in the same situation in January and February, 1907,
on Oddicombe beach. They measured about 30 mm. in length.

Nereis Dumerilii, Aud. and Ed. Mcintosh, Mon. Brit. Ann., vol. ii.,
PI. lx, Figs. 10 to 10c.

Small individuals, 20 to 30 mm. in length, are very common amongst
lagse from rock pools and the Torquay harbour.

352 NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCHiETA OF TORQUAY.

Nereis irrorata, Mgrn. Mcintosh, vol. ii., PI. l, Fig. 17 ; and
PI. LX, Fig. 8.

Occasionally under stones at Petit Tor Bay and Babbicombe beach ;
also amongst roots of Zostera at Corbyn's Head.

The glands in the feet are very conspicuous in this species, both when
living and preserved.

Nereis gultrifera, Grube. Mcintosh. Mon. Brit. Ann., vol. ii.,

PI. LX.

Under stones, not very common, on the edge of the submerged forest
at Tor Abbey Sands.

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH.ETA OF TORQUAY. 353

^ So. . I e

5 is ^ -SI

o ' i: o ^ ^ t 7

O § O -i-S^IS -IIS

^ t> <U

r ■ ,_j C-i t\j ^ -J. "

- ^ ffi D o a ^ .a ^ o o c _E

'-0 .^ 2

^ S3 ■-

•"^

•:: a.rt

2-c; ^

o 2 =

HHP^

a ^ ■ -

ti2

-3

f^-r^ '^po^^ DOS

X ^S-ti^o'-'S c3«'3

O <; ,- ;z:; Q ^^ ^^

5 S —

w — a) -(^ c3

o <

CO O g P.P.

O
H

E^H

354

NOTES ON THE LITTOKAL POLYCH.ETA OF TORQUAY.

-o ^^

tM e^

l.i

II g^

3 S

XJI

W "u

« to"

•sT a

g r^

rH a; cC '3^
o '^

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH.ETA OF TORQUAY,

355

T-K

ty^

h4 ^^

e"
s

S' ^

^ ._

^^_._^

P r^'

■ ■ §2

■ ^^ ■

CO -p

oH W3

-^ Oi

s
s

■5 J

im. .

gment and
inal papilla3

■ tJD ■
0) CO

CO ^

CO CO

2 ^

p-i'S.,

• ^ O) ^
- CO S

■ s ° •

»n

Sr^ S

!>•

-1 1^

3 j; S

"&)

rC S

_r> ^

■*■

a
P,

S "^ .

be S

1 a^'

CD ^ .

S *P 1
O ci

Pirt

)ill0e, 14 to 21. Leng
pot on the middle of
li side of the segment.

1 longitudinal violet line
id a dark line on each
96, 20. Length, 80 mm.

QJ 3
0=0'

ments uniform brow
tentacle half-way bet'
papillfe, 14. Length,

^11

'^ o

•3 c3 CO C

-s „ p-

T3 «•

'^ 'rt 'S
a 3

ci r^

S^ 5So

'i>U^

-5

0)
fcC

reen with
boscis wii
8 mm. .

reen. Tei
ellow, wit
parallel b
Length, 6
ellow, wit
central li
Terminal

? CO

rst and s
spotted,
of head.

o>^

ftn

II g

o
0)

CO
0)

ular ci
g lane
proces;
lOCIRR

8-3

-2 r2

C CO

's-

5 C3

0) (1^

O to

H C (U
— ii

^ tc

rt ;:;

■3 -^.=«

'^ c

^ c

C4-t ^-^

1— 1

o • —

O OJ

^00

•:3 :-<

1-^-

S,=s

^ ^

'Bss

•342 tD^

z, ?_=.=

356

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL TOLYCH^^TA OF TORQUAY.

fe5

^ r-!

b->

'r^

1— t

5>"g

fe5

■^

I-:!
<

= 6

^ o

O -k^
O) o

m
T3 ■

■go

■^ O

• «

Qi OJ

0) i

*^-n

';-(— 1

«-^ ^

^ J

t3 - tf

1-^ rt ^

— o)

i ^ C

>^ <D

_ r*

.ti

O O

5 w)

CO g

Q -=

o —

o°o

G a> cS
O) CB O)

^ .2 •

03 cc 58
Cl, O 0)

.«

11 •

^-5

H S

o ^-^

— QC

^ -

S H

•S Is

13"°

t3 ao

C
O
■^ 00

eS ^

4»S

O o
60 ^

.2 ^ o irj

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH^TA OF TORQUAY.

357

'^-^

H
I— j

O
H

^ ^ • o'

358

NOTES ON THE LITTORAL POLYCH.ETA OF TORQUAY.

<
5

H
02

<1
O

o
!z;

w
P5

W
P^

o.S
ji 5c

g rt

■^ !»

-:i

^ fe

to"

c o

o ^

^■5

o w

.3 O

Gets
P TO

in tc
rt PI

■ p-(

^ ^

[ 359 ]

The Mollusca collected by the "Huxley" from the
North Side of the Bay of Biscay, in August, 1906.

By
Alexander Reynell.

This paper deals with the Mollusca collected on the cruise of the s.s.
Huxley to the north side of the Bay of Biscay in August, 1906, with
the exception of the Cephalopoda, which are being worked out by
Dr. W. E. Hoyle.

The collection, though small, taking into account the area over which
dredgings were taken, contains a fair number of interesting species.
Though there is nothing new, there are several species represented
which one would not expect to find in such high latitudes, and their
discovery adds somewhat to our, as yet, slight knowledge of the fauna
of the deeper seas and its distribution.

Seventy-five species were identified, divided as follows : —

Amphineura

Pelecypoda

. 34

Scapliopoda

Gastropoda

. 37

ISTudibranchia

Of these seventy-five species, sixty-two have been recorded from the
British Area, and of the remaining thirteen three are Pelecypods.

Pecten hruei, Payraudeau. — Mostly known as a Mediterranean
species, but has been confounded with P. sulcata (Miill.), which is a
northern species. They meet in the Bay of Biscay, as both are repre-
sented in this collection.

Lima marioni, Fischer. — With reference to this species, Mr. E. A.
Smith tells me it is the same as L. lata, found by the Challenger
Expedition and described by him as new in his work dealing with the
Lamellibranchs brought home by that expedition. Though an addition

360 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

to the fauna of the actual Bay of Biscay, it had been previously found
and recorded from off the coast of Portugal by the TmvalUcur.

Lima excavata (Fabricius). — Fragments and odd valves of this
northern species have been found south of the Bay of Biscay, by the
Porcupine off Cape St. Vincent, and by the Talisman off the west coast
of the Soudan. The single specimen found during the HiLdey cruise,
though smaller than the northern specimens I have seen, contained the
animal, and thus proves its extended habitat, which was suggested by
the discovery of the above-mentioned fragments.

The two species of Scaphopoda are both recorded as British.

Of the non-British Gastropods, two cannot be identified on account
of their condition, but the remaining eight species are of interest.

Emarginula riiultistriata , Jefi'reys. — A Mediterranean species
recorded from off the coast of Portugal.

Calliostoma obesnlum (P. Fischer) and C. deopatra (P. Fischer) have
only been recorded from off the Atlantic coasts of Northern Africa,
and the fact of their having been found living, the former in large
numbers, so far north, is a valuable indication of the possible very
wide distribution of deep-water species.

Natica operculata, Jeffreys. — Jeffreys records the species as having
been found by the Forcupinc off the Spanish coast.

Randla gigantca (Lamarck). — The most northerly habitat of this
species so far recorded.

Scala richardi (Uautzenberg and de Boury). — This species has not
been found living, the type being described from a dead shell dredged
off the Azores. The remarks applied to the two species of Calliostoma
apply to this species as well.

Pseudomurex richardi (P. Fischer). — Previously recorded from the
Bay of Biscay.

Cavolina trispinosa (Lesueur). — Has an almost world-wide dis-
tribution, but is probably killed by coming into cold areas.

I tender my sincere thanks to the following gentlemen for their
kind assistance in many ways : Mons. Ph. Dautzenberg, Sir Charles
Eliot, K.C.M.G., Mr. E. E. Sykes, b.a., Mr. E. A. Smith, ls.O:, and
Mr. H. B. Preston, F.z.s. Finally I feel very much indebted to Dr.
E. J. Allen for allowing me the opportunity of examining a collection
of material of very considerable interest in many ways.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. '^61

MOLLUSCA.
AMPHINEURA.

APLACOPHORA.

NEOMENIID^.

Ehopalomenia, Simroth.
Rhopalomenia aglaopheniae, Kovalevsky and Marion.

Ehopalomenia aglaophenice. — Kovalevsky and Marion, 1887. Ann.

Aius. Hist. Nat., Marseille, iii.
„ „ Garstang, 1896. Proc. Malac. See,

Lond. Vol. ii, No. 3, p. 124, pi. x,

fig. 3.
Distribution. Plymouth (Garstang) [Banyuls, Marseille].

Station I, 75 fathoms. One coiled round stem oi AdJaophenia

myriophyllum.
,, XIII, 412 ,, One coiled hut free.

PELECYPODA.

PROTOBRANCHIA.

NUCULIDiE.

NucuLA, Lamarck.
(1) Nucnla sulcata, Bronn.

Nucula sulcata, Bronn, 1831. Italiens Tertiiirgebild, p. 109.

„ polii, Philippi, 1836. Enum. Moll. Sicil., p. 63, pi. v, fig. 10.

Generally distributed in the North Atlantic and throughout the
Mediterranean, .and as far south as the coast of Guinea. Found in both
shallow and deep water.

Station IX. 240 fathoms. One fragment of a broken valve.

(2) Nucula nitida, G. B. Sowerby.

Niicula nitida. G. B. Sowerby, 1833. Conch. 111. (Nucula), p. 5,
fig. 20.

Generally distributed in the North Atlantic from Scandinavia to
Gibraltar and throughout the Mediterranean. "^

Station XII. 246 fathoms. One odd valve.

362 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

FILIBRANCHIA.
ANOMIACEA.

ANOMIID^.

Anomia, Linne.
Anomia ephippium, Linne.

Anomia cphipjnum, Linne, 1758. Syst. Nat., edit, x, p. 701.
This well-known species has many synonyms and is very variable.
All the specimens under consideration are or have been attached to the
spines of Echini.

This is a very widely distributed species, and is found on both sides
of the Atlantic, " Iceland to Egypt and Madeira, Labrador to Long
Island Sound" (Jeffreys). Found by the Challenger off Pernambuco,
the Nightingale Islands, and Tristan dAcunha.
Station TV. 109 fathoms. One living, young.
,, IX. 240 fathoms. Many living, all young.
„ XI. 146 fathoms. Two living, both young.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. Five living, all young.

ARCACEA.

ARCID^.

LiMOPSis, Sassi.
(1) Limopsis aurita (Brocchi).
Area aurita, Brocchi, 1815. Conch. Foss. Subapp., ii, p. 485, pi. xi,
fig. 9.

Pectuneulus auritus, Philippi, 1836. Enum. Moll. Sicil., i, p. 63.
Limopsis aurita, Jeffreys, 1863-69. Brit. Conch., ii, p. 161, pi. iv,
fig. 3 ; V, p. 174, pi. XXX, fig. 1.

A very widely distributed species. Seas of Europe from Norway
to the Mediterranean. It has also been recorded from the Azores,
New Jersey, Virginia, Cape Hatteras, Georgia, Florida, West Indies.
Jeffreys {Poreupine, etc.) records it from Japan.

Station IX. 240 fathoms. One living, four odd valves.
,, XII. 246 fathoms. One living, three odd valves.

(2) Limopsis minuta (Philippi).

Peetuneulus minntus, Philippi, 1836. Enum. Moll. Sicil, i, p. 63,
pi. V, fig. 3.

Limopsis Borcalis, Woodward, 1865. In Jeff. Brit. Conch., v, p. 174,
pi. 100, fig. 3.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 363

Zimopsis minuta, Jeffreys, 1879. Proc. Zool. Soc, p. 585, pi. xlvi,
fig. 9.

This species has a very wide distribution. It has been recorded
from the North Atlantic, on the east side, from the Loffodens to the
Canary Islands, on the west from New Jersey to the Gulf of Mexico,
also from Barbados and in the Mediterranean.

Station XII. 246 fathoms. Five odd valves.

Glycymeris, da Costa.
Glycymeris glycymeris (Linne).

Area glycy7neris, Linne, 1758. Syst. Nat., edit, x, p. 695.

Glycymeris orhiculata, da Costa, 1778, p. 168, pi. xi, fig. 2.

Pectunculns pilosus, etc., Turton, 1822. Conch. Insul. Brit., pp. 172-4,
pi. xii, figs. 2-6 (non Linne).

Generally distributed in the European seas, though rare in the
Mediterranean ; also found on the Senegal coast, Madeira, and the
Canary Islands. Jeffreys records it from the north of Japan.

Station I. 75 fathoms. Two living, one very young.
,, V. 109 fathoms. One odd valve.

Arca, Linne.

(1) Area nodulosa, Miiller.

Ai'ca nodulosa, Miiller, 1766. Zool. Danise Prodr., p. 247.
„ scabra, Poli, 1795. Test. utr. Sicilise, ii, pi. xxv, fig. 22.

Barhatia scabra, Brusina, 1886. Contr. Fauna Dalmat., p. 101.

Arca (Barbatia) scabra, Dautzenberg et H. Fischer, 1897. In Mem.
Soc. Zool. France, x, p. 199.

Appears to be a widely distributed species in the Atlantic Ocean,
north of the equator, and is recorded from the Hebrides, Faroe Islands,
British coasts. Bay of Biscay, Portugal coast, Senegal, Canary Islands,
Gulf of Mexico, and the Florida coast ; it is also found throughout the
Mediterranean Sea.

Station VII. 444 fathoms. Twelve of various ages and all living.

„ XIII. 412 fathoms. Twenty -five of various ages, all living with
the exception of a couple of odd valves.

(2) Arca obliqua, Philippi.

Arca obliqua, Philippi, 1844. Enum. Moll. Sicil., vol. ii, p. 43,
pi. 15, fig. 2.
„ „ Jeffreys, 1863. Brit. Conch., vol. ii, p. 175 ;

vol. v, p. 175, pi. XXX, fig. 4.

NEW SEEIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 4. 2 C

364 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

Distribution, Bergen and Shetland to the ^gean, Azores (Jeffreys).
Not recorded as being found during either the Candan or Travailleur
and Talisman expeditions.

Station V. 109 fathoms. One, living.

MYTILACEA.

MYTILID^.

VOLSELLA, Scopoli.

Volsella phaseolina (Philippi).

Modiola phaseolina, Philippi, 1844. Enum. Moll. Sicil, ii, p. 51,
pi. XV, fig. 14.

Widely distributed from Iceland and Finmark to the Straits of
Gibraltar and throughout the Mediterranean. Not recorded as having
been found during the Travailleur and Talisman expeditions, nor
that of the Caudan.

Station II. 75 fathoms. Two, living.

PSEUDOLAMELLIBKANCHIA.

PECTENID^.

Pecten, Miiller.

Pecten bruei, Payraudeau.

Pecten bniei, Payraudeau, 1826. Moll. Corse, p. 78, pi. ii, rigs. 10-14.
„ leptogctster. Brusina, 1866. Contr. Fauna Dalmat., p. 45.

This species appears to me to be easily separable from P. sulcata,
being much more regularly and definitely costulated, and our solitary
specimen is quite typical of the species with the exception of its being
without colour. Its geographical range seems limited to the Mediter-
ranean and Atlantic coasts of Europe from the Bay of Biscay to the
south of Cape Verde. Our specimen was dredged further to the nortli
than any previously recorded.

Station IX. 240 fathoms. One living.

Chlamys, Bolten.
Chlamys sulcatus (Miiller).
Pecten sulcatus, Miiller, 1776. Zool. Daniae Prodr., p. 248.
Ostrea arata, Gmelin, 1789. Systema Naturae, (^dit. xiii, p. o326.
Pecten aratus, G. 0. Sars, 1878. Moll. Eeg. Arct. Norveg., p. 17,
pi. 11, fig. 3.

Locard's reference, in his Travailleur and Talisman niollusca,

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 365

to the synonymy of this species in Forbes and Hanley's " History of
British Molliisca," 1855, vol. ii, p. 281, is a mistake, for this refers to
P. striatus, Miiller, and it is not surprising he found the synonymy
very complex and doubtful. I have not been able to find any mention
of P. sulcatus in Forbes and Hanley's work except J. Sowerby's fossil
variety of P. opercularis.

The only identified specimens of this species I have been able to
inspect are in the National Collection, and with the exception that
they are richly coloured and somewhat larger and more solid than the
specimens under consideration, I can see no difference.

The range of this species is considerable, and if we omit the Medi-
terranean locality given by Jeffreys as doubtful, it has been recorded in
the Atlantic from Norway and the Faroe Islands to the seas west of
the coast of the Soudan.

Station XIII. 412 fathoms. One living, young; three dead valves of
various ages.

^QUIPECTEN, Fischer.
^quipecten opercularis (Linne).

Ostrea ojoercularis, Linne, 1758. Syst. Nat., Mit. x, p. 698.

Pecten opercularis, Montagu, 1803. Test. Brit., p. 145.

Chlamys (jEquipecten) opercularis, P. Fischer, 1886. Man. Conch.,
p. 944.

Generally distributed in the European seas and Asiatic and African
coasts of the Mediterranean and off the Azores. From 5 fathoms
to 600 or more. Locard remarks that the shells dredged by the
Caudan were much smaller than usual, and the same can be stated of
the living shells under consideration, the largest of which measures
only 21 mm, by 20 mm. in breadth. The dead shells and fragments
show that the species attains a much larger growth in the same locality.

Station I. 75 fathoms. One living (small). Three odd valves of
various sizes.

Station II. 75 fathoms. One living, one dead, and an odd valve.
,, IV. 109 fathoms. Four fragments.

,, V. 109 fathoms. Many small living and dead and broken frag-
ments of larger shells.

Station XI. 146 fathoms. One living (small), and two odd valves.

Palliolum, Monterosato.
(1) Palliolum similis (Laskey).

Pecten similis, Laskey, 1811. In Mem. AVerner Soc, i, p. 387,
pi. viii, fig. 8.

366 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE "HUXLEY" FROM THE

Pecten Uimidus, Turton, 1822. Conch. Insul. Brit., p. 212, pi. xvii,
fig. 3.

Found generally in the seas of Europe and on the African coast
of the Mediterranean.

Station V. 109 fathoms. Two living.

(2) Palliolum vitreus (Chemnitz).

Pallium vitreiim, Chemnitz, 1782. Conch. Cab., vii, p. 335,
pi. Ixvii, fig. 637ff.

Chlamys vitrea, Dautzenberg, 1889. Contr. Faune Mala. Azores,
p. 76.

A very widely distributed species in the North Atlantic, found on
both the American and European coasts.

Station VII. 444 fathoms. Seventeen living, of various sizes, and
one odd valve.

Station XIII. 411 fathoms. Two living.

LIMID^.

Lima, Brugiere.
(1) Lima excavata (Fabricius).

Ostrea excavata, Fabricius, 1780. In Schroter's Naturg., ii, p. 117.

Excavata fabricii, Chemnitz, 1784. Conch. Cab., vii, p. 355, pi.
Ixviii, fig. 654.

Lima excavata, Loven, 1846. Index. Moll. Scand., p. 32.

Badula (Acesta) excavata, Dautzenberg et H. Fischer, 1897. In
Mem. Soc. Zool, France, x, p. 186.

This species must be much more generally distributed than was at
one time supposed, for in 1883 the Talisman dredged it off the west
coast of the Soudan. The Lightning and Porcupine only found frag-
ments, though Jeffreys remarks in one case {Lightning, 1868, north of
Hebrides, St. 5) the pieces were quite fresh and united by the carti-
lage.* Li7na excavata has usually been considered to be confined to
almost Arctic seas.

Station VII. 444 fathoms. One living.

(2) Lima marioni, P. Fischer.

Lima marioni, P. Fischer, 1882. In Journ. Conch., xxx, p. 52.
„ lata. Smith, 18'85. Voy. Challenger, xiii, p. 257, pi. xxiv,
fig. 3.

* Those found by the Porcupine (1870) off St. Vincent were semi-fossil.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 367

Radula lata, Dautzenberg et H. Fischer, 1897. In Mem. Soc. ZooL,
France, x, p. 186.

Apparently a very widely distributed deep-water species.
Challenge!', N.E. of Brazil, Philippine Islands.
Hirondelle and Princess Alice. Off the Azores.
Travailleur. West of Portugal.
Talisjnan. West coasts of Morocco and the Soudan.

Station VII. 444 fathoms. Eight Hvmg, of various sizes.

,, XIII. 412 fathoms. Seven living, of various sizes, one curiously
malformed.

(3) Lima subauriculata (Mont.).
Pecten subauriculatus, Montagu, 1808. Test. Brit. SuppL, p. 63,
pi. xxix, fig. 2.

Lima subauriculata, Turton, 1822, Conch. Insul, Brit., p. 218.
„ sulcata. Brown, 1827. 111. Conch. Gt. Britain, pi. xxxi,
fig. 4-5.
nivea, Philippi, 1836. Enum. Moll. Sicily, vol. i, p. 78.
Found on both sides of the Atlantic, in the Mediterranean, and off
the Canary Isles.

Station V. 109 fathoms. One valve.

EULAMELLIBRANCHIA.
SUBMYTILACEA.

ASTARTID^.

AsTARTE, J. Sowerby.

Astarte sulcata (da Costa).

Pectunculus sulcatus, da Costa, 1778. Brit. Conch., p. 192.
Venus danmonana, Montagu, 1808. Test. Brit. Suppl., p. 45,
pi. xxix, fig. 4.

Astarte sulcata, Fleming, 1828. Hist, of Brit. Anim., p. 439.

„ „ Forbes and Hanley, 1853, Hist. Brit. Moll, i, p. 452,

pi. XXX, fig. 6 (as A. danmoniensis).
A difficult species, very variable, and provided with many synonyms.
Generally distributed in European seas, Siberia, East Greenland,
North-east America, Gulf of Mexico, Canaries.

Station I, 75 fathoms. One odd valve.

,, II. 75 fathoms. One living.

,, IX. 240 fathoms. One living, and several odd valves.

,, XII. 246 fathoms. One living, and several odd valves (small).

368 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

TELLINACEA.

SCEOBIGULARID^.

Syndosmya, Eecluz.
Syndosmya prismatica (Mont.).
Ligula 'prismatica, Montagu, 1808. Test. Brit. SuppL, p. 23,
pi. xxvi, fig. 3.

Scrobicularia prismafAca, Jeffreys, 1863-69. Brit. Conch., vol. ii,
p. 435 ; vol. V, p. 189, pi. xlv, fig. 1.

G-enerally distributed throughout the seas of Europe.
Station II. 75 fathoms. Three odd valves.
„ XL 146 fathoms. Three odd valves.

MACTRID^.

Spisula, Gray.
Spisula elliptica (Brown).
Madra elliptica, Brown, 1827. 111. Conch. Gt. Brit., pi. xv, fig. 6.
„ gracilis, Locard, 1890. In Bull Soc. Maloc. France, vii,
p. 4, pi. i, fig. 1.

With Mr. E. A. Smith's help I carefully compared these specimens
with those dredged by the Porcupine expedition, but still felt very
doubtful as to their true specific position. I submitted them to Mons.
Dautzenberg, whose works on the North Atlantic mollusca are well
known, and he confirms my opinion, and says, "it is the true M.
elliptica of Brown, but not of the greater number of authors, and the
M. gracilis of Locard is a synonym."

This species is probably widely distributed in the North Atlantic.
The Gulf of Cadiz is the locality given by Mons. Locard for the single
valve found by the Talisman expedition.
Station I. 75 fathoms. Eight odd valves.

„ II. 75 fathoms. One living, and ten odd valves.

„ V. 109 fathoms. Two living.

„ XI. 146 fathoms. Three living, and two odd valves.

VENERACEA.

VENEEID^.

LuciNOPSis, Forbes and Hanley.
Lucinopsis undata (Pennant).
Venus undata, Pennant, 1777. British Zoology, ed. 4, vol. iv, p. 95,
pi. Iv, fig. 51.

Lucinopsis undata, Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist. Biit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 435, pi. xxviii, figs. 1 and 2, pi. M, figs. 1 and 2.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 369

This species is widely distributed in the seas of Europe, from
Norway and the Loffbden Isles to Spain and Portugal, and in
the Mediterranean as far east as the Adriatic.

Station Y. 109 fathoms. One odd valve.

Venus, Linne.

(1) Venus (Ventricola) casina (Linne).
Venus casina, Linne, 1758. Syst. Nat., 6dit. x, p. 685.

This species is known under a dozen or more synonyms, which
appear to me to be unnecessary to repeat, as the shell is well known,
and they can be found in many standard works.

Generally distributed in European seas, and also off the Canary
Islands and Madeira.

Station I. 75 fathoi^s. One living and one odd valve.
,, IV. 109 fathoms. Five living and many odd valves.
,, A". Two living ; young shells.

(2) Venus (Timoclea) ovata (Pennant).

Venus ovata, Pennant, 1767. Brit. Zool., iv, p. 97, pi. Ivi, fig. 56.
Cytherea racliata, Stossich, 1866. Enum. Moll. Trieste, p. 31.
This species has many other synonyms.

Generally distributed in European seas and the Mediterranean
coast of Africa.

Station I. 75 fathoms. Several odd valves.

,, II. 75 fathoms. One odd valve.

„ V. 109 fathoms. One living and several odd valves.

„ XI. 146 fathoms. Four living and several odd valves.

,, XII. 246 fathoms. Two odd valves.

GouLDiA, C. B. Adams.
Gouldia minima (Montagu).

Venus minima, Montagu, 1803. Test. Brit., p. 121, pi. iii, fig. 3.

Cyprina minima, Turton, 1822. Conch. Insul. Brit., p. 137.

Cytherea minima. Brown, 1827. 111. Conch., Gt. Britain, pi. xix, fig. 3.

Circe minima, Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist. Brit. Moll, 1, p. 446,
pi. xxvi, figs. 4, 5, 6, 8.

Circe (Gouldia) minima, P. Fischer, 1887. Man. Conch., p. 1081.

This species has a very extended synonymy. Locard gives twenty-
three, but in a paper of this sort such an extension seems needless, the
shell being common enough and well-known. Its distribution is
general in the North Atlantic, from Great Britain to the Azores,
and throughout the Mediterranean.

Station V. 109 fathoms. Two odd valves.

370 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FKOM THE

CARDIACEA.

Cardium, Linne.
(1) Cardium minimum, Philippi.
Cardium, minimum, Philippi, 1836, Enum. Moll. Sicil, i, p. 51.
„ „ „ 1844. Log. cit., ii, p. 38, pi. xiv, fig. 18.

„ saldiense, Eeeve, 1845. Conch. Icon., pi. xxii, fig. 132.
„ loveni, Thompson, 1845. In Ann. Mag. Xat. Hist., xv,

p. 317, pi. xix, fig. 7.
„ suecicum, Loven, 1846. Index. Moll. Scand., p. 189.
Very widely distributed in European seas, from the Loffbden Isles
and Norway as far east as Siberia in Asia, British, French, Spanish,
and Portuguese coasts, and, though rarer, throughout the Mediterranean.
In shallow and very deep water.

Station IX. 240 fathoms. One specimen, perfect though dead.

(2) Cardium (Lsevicardium) norvegicum (Spengler).
Cardium loivigatum, da Costa, 1778. Brit. Conch., p. 178, pi. xiii,
fig. 6.
„ norvegicum, Spengler, 1790. Skrift. Natur. Selsk., i, p. 42.
„ crassum, Gmelin., 1790. Syst. Nat., ed. xiii, p. 3354.
„ serratum, de Lamarck, 1819. Anim. sans Vert., vi, i, p. 11.
„ vitellinum, Eeeve, 1844. Conch. Icon., pi. vii, fig. 77.
Lcevicardium norvegicum, H. and A. Adams, 1858. Gen. Eec. Moll.,
ii, p. 457, pi. cxii, fig. 2.

Cardium {Lcevicardium) norvegicum, Issel, 1878. Croc, del " Vio-
lante," p. 37.

Generally distributed in the European seas, off Madeira, the Canary
Isles, and coast of Senegal.

Station IV. 109 fathoms. One broken valve.

MYACEA.

GARID^.

Gari, Schumacher.
Gari costulata (Turton).
Fsammohia costulata, Turton, 1822. Conch. Insul. Brit., p. 87,
pi. vi, fig. 8.
„ discors, Philippi, 1836. Enum. Moll. Sicilite, i, p. 23

pi. iii, fig. 8.
Distributed in the Atlantic Ocean, from Norway to Madeira and
the Canary Islands, and throughout the Mediterranean.

Station V. 109 fathoms. One specimen, dead, hut the valves attached

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 190<J. 371

SAXICAVID^.

Saxicava, Fleuriau Bellevue.
Saxicava arctica (Linne).
Mya arctica, Linne, 1766. Systema Naturse, edit, xii, p. 1113.
The synonymy of this genus or species is very much involved, the
number of species still being a very open question. Mr. E. A. Smith's
opinion is that rugosa is the only species, the other so-called ones
being varieties. The shells under consideration are undoubtedly the
rugosa var. arctica figured by Jeffreys in his " British Conchology," v,
pi. li, fig. 4. Generally distributed in the North Atlantic, from Green-
land and Norway to Cadiz Bay, and in the Mediterranean.
Station I. 75 fathoms. Six living.
„ II. 75 fathoms. Two living.

ANATINACEA.

PANDORID^.

Pandora, Brugiere.
Pandora inaequivalvis (Linne).

Tellina incequivalvis, Linne, 1766. Systema Naturae, edit, xii, p. 1118.

Pandora rostrata, Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. i, p. 207, pi. viii, figs. 1-4.

One valve only in poor condition, and this circumstance makes an
examination of Mons. Locard's remarks, when dealing with P. pinnoides
(Moll. Test. Trav. et Tal.) of doubtful utility, though he appears to
have had only one specimen to base his conclusions on.

Station V. 109 fathoms. One left valve.

LYONSIID.^.

Lyonsia, Turton.
Lyonsia norvegica (Chemnitz).

Mya norvegica, Chemnitz, 1788. Conch. Cab., vol. x, p. 345, pi. 170,
f. 1647.

Lyonsia stricda, Turton, 1822, Conch. Insul. Brit., p. 35, pi. 3,
figs. 6, 7.

Hyatella striata, Brown, 1827. 111. Conch. Gt. Brit., pi. xvi, figs. 26, 27.

Generally distributed throughout the European seas and Mediter-
ranean.

Locard splits this species into two, norvegica (Chem.) and striata
(Mont.). Not having sufficient material at hand, I am content to let
the generally accepted name stand for the present.

Station I. 75 fathoms. One Hving.

372 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

ANATINID^.

Thracia, Leach in Blainville.

Thracia papyracea (Poll).

Tellina papyracea, Poll, 1795. Test. Utr. Sic, vol. i, p. 43, pi. xv,
figs. 14, 18.

Thracia p)haseolina, Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist. Brit. Conch.,
vol. i, p. 221, pi. xviii, figs. 5, 6.

Eanges from Iceland and Loffoden Isles to throughout the Mediter-
ranean, Madeira, the Canary Isles. Locard does not mention this
species at all as having been found by the Talisman and Travailleur
expeditions, or the Caudan expedition. Jeffreys reports it from the
Porcupine expeditions of 1869-70.

Station V. 109 fathoms. One valve and three fragments.

SEPTIBRANCHIA.

CUSPID ARIID-ffi.

CUSPIDARIA, Nardo.
(1) Cuspidaria abbreviata (Forbes).
Necera abbreviata, Forbes, 1843. In Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond., p. 75.
Near a vitrea, Loven, 1846. Ind, Moll. Scand., p. 48.
Cuspidaria {Tropidaniya) abbreviata, Dautzenberg, 1881. Mem.
Soc. ZooL, Fr., iv., p. 612.

Atlantic and Mediterranean : from Norway and the West of
Ireland to Algiers and the ^gean Sea.

Station XII. 246 fathoms. Two odd valves.

(2) Cuspidaria cuspidata (Olivi).
Tellina cuspidata, Olivi, 1792. Zool. Adriat., p. 101, pi. iv, fig. 3.

Corbula cuspidata, Philippi, 1836. Enum. Moll. Sicil., i, p. 17, pi. i,
fig. 19.

Appears to have the same geographical distribution as the last
species. Locard doubts if the Mediterranean form is the same as the
Atlantic, and proposes Brown's name brevirostris for the latter. I
have carefully compared, with Mr. E. A. Smith's kind assistance, our
specimens with those from the ForciLpinc expedition, in the British
Museum.

Station XI. 146 fathoms. One odd valve.
XII. 246 fathoms. One odd valve.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 37;>

(3) Cuspidaria curta (Jeffreys),

Nemra curta, Jeffreys, 1876. In Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 4th

Ser. xviii, p. 495.
1881. Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond., p. 943, pi.
Ixxi, fig. 10.
Cuspidaria curta, Dautzenberg, 1883. Gontr. Faune Malac, Acores,
p. 88.

Known only from the Atlantic, in which it is widely distributed on
both sides, from the Behring Straits to the Bermudas and from the Bay
of Biscay to Morocco.

Station XII. 246 fathoms. Two odd valves.

SCAPHOPODA.

DENTALIID^.

Dentalium, Linne.
(1) Dentalium entails, Linne.

Dentalium entalis, Linne, 1758. Syst. Nat., ed. x, p. 785.

„ Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist. Brit. Moll,
vol. ii., p. 449, pi. Ivii., fig. 11.

According to Jeffreys this species is much more common in the
north than in the south of England. He remarks also that he has not
been able to identify this species as Mediterranean or Adriatic, though
the name occurs in nearly all the accounts of the shells of those seas.
Locard, on the contrary, gives various localities in those seas for this
species, on the coasts of Spain, France, Italy, Corsica, Malta, African
coast, Gulf of Gabes, and also mentions Vigo, the Azores, and Cape
Bonne Esperance as Atlantic localities. It has also been recorded
from Iceland, Loffoden Isles, Northern Eussia, Maine, and Vancouver
Island in North America.

Several ; living and dead.
Three living.
Two, one living, one large fragment much

Five, all dead, some fragmentary.

(2) Dentalium panormitanum (panormum) (Chenu).
Dentaliuvi panormum, Chenu, 1842-47. 111. Conch., pi. vi, fig. 13.
Dentalium lessoni, Sowerby, 1842-83. Thesaur. Conch., pi. xv,
fig. 18.

Station I.

75 fathoms.

„ V.

109 fathoms.

„ IX.

240 fathoms.

corroded.

„ XL

146 fathoms.

374 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

A rather difficult species, and I can lind only one specimen in the
British Museum (Nat. Hist.), and this appears to be similar to the
solitary specimen under consideration, which is in rather a bad state.
Jeffreys (Moll, of Lightning- For cupine Expds., 1868-70, part v,
P. Z. S., 1882, p. 657) decides in favour of its validity. It is a rare
shell, which has been recorded only from the Bay of Biscay, Portuguese
and Spanish coasts, and in the Adriatic. The Talisman dredged it off
Senegal and in the tropical seas, in 1883, from four stations.

Station IX. 240 fathoms. One dead, corroded shell.

GASTROPODA.

PROSOBRANCHIA.

ASPIDOBRANCHIA.

RHIPIDOGLOSSA.

FISSUEELLID^.

PuNCTURELLA, It. T. Lowe.
Puncturella noachina (Linne).
Patella noachina, Linnc, 1767. Mantissa plantarum, p. 551.

fissura, Milller, 1788-1806. Zool. Dania?, pi. xxiv, figs. 5, 6.
Syphostriata noachina, T. Brown, 1827. 111. Conch. Gt. Brit., etc.,
pi. xxxvi, figs. 14-16.

Cemoria noachina, Gould, 1841. Invert. Mass., p. 156, fig. 18.
Rimula Flcmingii. Macgillivray, 1843. Hist. Moll. Anim. Aber-
deen, etc., pp. 65 and 178.

This species is very widely distributed in the seas of the sub-polar
and temperate regions of the world.
Station XI [. 246 fathoms. One dead.

Emarginula, Lamarck.
(1) Emarginula fissura (Linne).
Patella fissura, Linne, 1758. Syst. Nat. edit, x, p. 784.
Eniargimda reticulata, Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist. Brit. Moll.,
ii, p. 477 ; figured as MUlleri, iv, pi. 63, fig. 1.

Generally distributed in the European seas and oft' the Canary
Isles.

Station I. 75 fathoms. One dead

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 375

(2) Emarginula multistriata, Jeffreys.

Emarginula multistriata, Jeffreys, 1882. In Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,

p. 30,
„ „ „ „ Proc. Zool. Soc, p. 680,

pi. 1, fig. 12.
Eecorded from the Atlantic, off the coast of Portugal, and from the
Mediterranean.

Station VII. 444 fathoms. One dead shell.

TROCHIDiE.

Calliostoma, Swainson.

(1) Calliostoma obesulum (P. Fischer).
Zizyphiiius ohesulus, P. Fischer, 1883, in Collect.

Gribbula ohcsula, Locard, 1898. Exp. Sci. Trav. et Talis., ii, p. 47,
pi. iii, figs^ 1-4.

This is another species that seems to have been previously recorded
only from the coast of Morocco and the Soudan coast of the North
Atlantic. Locard's figures above-mentioned are not particularly good,
and I am indebted to Mons. Dautzenberg for its correct identification,
the species not being represented in our National Collection.

Station VII. 444 fathoms. Twenty-four living, one fragment.
,, XIII. 412 fathoms. One living, two dead.

(2) Calliostoma cleopatra (P. Fischer).
Trochus ch'ojxctra, P. Fischer, 1883, in Collect.

Zizyphinus cleopatra, Locard, 1898. Exp. Sci. Trav. et du Tab,
vol. ii, pi. ii, figs. 20-23.

Only recorded by Locard from one station {Talisman, 1883, Station
83) off the Sahara coast, and the fact of this scarce shell turning up,
living, in the north of the Bay of Biscay is very interesting.

Station VII. 444 fathoms. One living.

(3) Calliostoma miliaris (Brocchi).

Trochvs miliaris, Brocchi, 1814. Conch, Foss. Subappen., p. 253,
pi. iv, fig. 1.

Trochus millegranus, Philippi, 1836, Enum. Moll, Sicil, I, p. 183,
pi. X, fig. 25.

Zizyphinus miliaris, Locard, 1886. Prodro. Conch., Franc, p. 309.

Calliostoma miYtai'is, Pilsbry, 1889. Man. Conch., part xliva,p, 387,
pi. xviii, figs. 10, 11.

376 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FEOM THE

Generally distributed in the North Atlantic and throughout the
Mediterranean in shallow and deep water.
Station I. 75 fathoms. One young, dead.

(4) Calliostoma granulatum (Born.).

Trochus granulatus, Born, 1778. Ind. Rerum Nat. Mus. Yindobon,
p. 343.

Trochus pcqjillosus, da Costa, 1778. Brit. Conch., p. 38, pi. iii, tigs.
5 and 6.

Trochus fringilis, Pultney, 1799. Cat. Dorset Shells, p. 48, pi. xvi, fig. 6.

Trochus tenuis, Montagu, 1803. Test. Brit., i, p. 275, pi. x, fig. 3.

Fairly distributed in European seas, Britain, France, Spain, and
Portugal. In the Mediterranean and Adriatic, Morocco, Madeira,
Canaries, etc.

Station V. 109 fathoms. Five living, including one var. lactea (Jeff.)
and one young shell.

Station VI. 87 fathoms. One living.

PECTINIBRANCHIA.

T.^.NIOGLOSSA PLATYPODA.

CAPULIDuE.

Capulus, de Montfort.
Capulus hungaricus (Linne).

Patella ungarica, Linne, 1758. Syst. Nat. edit, x, p. 782.

Fileopsis hungaricus, Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist. Brit. Moll.,
vol. ii, p. 459, pi. Ix, figs. 1 and 2 (as C. hungaricus).

A widely distributed species, ranging from Iceland, Norway, and
the Eastern coasts of Europe to the Azores, and throughout the
Mediterranean to the south-east coasts of the United States. It was
not found by either the Caudan or Travailleur and Talisman expeditions.

Station IV. 109 fathoms. One living on Venus verrucosa.

NATICID^.

Natica, Scopoli.
(1) Natica (Lunatia) sordida (Philippi).
Natica sordida, Philippi, 1844. Enum. Moll. Siciliae, ii, p. 139, pi.
xxiv, fig. 15.

British seas, and very generally distributed in the European seas,
including the Mediterranean, and off Madeira.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 'Ml

The synonymy of this species is not very clear. Locard considers
it to be the N. fnsca of Blainville, 1821. (Diet, des Sciences Nat.)

The specimens under consideration are all young, b\it compare very
well with those in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.) from the Lif/hMing
and Porciqjinc expeditions.

Station IX. 240 fathoms. Three dead.
,, XII. 246 fathoms. Three dead.

(2) Natica (Lunatia) catena (da Costa).

Coddea catena, da Costa, 1778. Brit. Conch., p. 83, pi. v, fig. 7.

Natica monilifera, Lamarck, 1822. Anim. s. Vert., vi, ii, p. 199.

Natica catenata, Locard, 1886. Prodr., p. 274. 1892. Conch. Franc,
p. 182, fig. 157.

Generally distributed in the European seas.

Jeffreys does not appear to have recorded this species in his
mollusca of the Lightning and Porcupine expeditions, nor is it men-
tioned by Locard as having been found during the Travailkur and
Talisman expeditions, but he records it as commonly found in the Gulf
of Gascogny cruise of the Caudan.

Station II. 75 fathoms. One dead.

(3) Natica (Lunatia) alderi (Forbes).

Natica alderi, Forbes, 1838. Malac. Monensis, p. 31, pi. ii, figs. 6, 7.
„ nitida, Forbes and Hanley, 1853. . Hist. Brit. Moll., iii,
p. 330, pi. C (100), figs. 2-4.

Jeffreys (P.Z.S., Jan. 20th, 1885, p. 30) considered this species to
be identical with Linne's N. glaucina (Fauna Suecica, ed. 2, p. 533,
No. 2197), while Locard (" Travailleur et Talisman") decides that he
described under this name several European Naticas. The latter also
removes Natica iwliana, Delle Chiaje, from the synonymy of this
species, thus making it more an oceanic species by excluding it from
the Mediterranean list, and giving Natica poliana specific rank.

British seas and the oceanic coasts of Europe and the Sahara coast
of Africa,

Station Y. 109 fathoms. Eight dead, of various sizes.

Station XI. 146 fathoms. One dead, small, broken.

(4) Natica (Lunatia) montag"ui (Forbes).

Natica montagui, Forbes, 1838, Malac. Monensis, p. 172, pi. ii,
figs. 3, 4.

Lunatia montagui, G. 0. Sars, 1878. Moll. Keg. Arch. Norvegiee,
p. 157.

378 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FKOM THE

Natica montatmti, Jeffreys, 1885. In P.Z.S., Lond., p. 31.
British and European seas, including the Mediterranean.

Station Y. 109 fathoms. Three dead.

,, XI. 146 fathoms. Three, one hving, two dead.
,, XII. 246 fathoms. One dead, Avhich appears to be var. conica of
Jeffreys.

(5) Natica (Lunatia) operculata (Jeffreys).

Natica opercnlata, Jeffreys, 1885, Proc. Zool. Soc, p. 34, pi. iv,
fig. 7.

Distributed in the North Atlantic. Jeffreys' localities are from the
neighbourhood of Cape St. Vincent to south-west of Cadiz, and in
the Mediterranean, Adventure Bank. He also gives North Japan
(St. John) as a habitat.

I am indebted to Mons. Dautzenberg for the identification of the
one small specimen.

Station I. 75 fathoms. One, small, dead.

LAMELLARIID-a:.

Lamellaria, Montagu.
Lamellaria perspicua (Linne).

Helix perspicua, Linne, 1758. Syst. Nat., edit, x, p. 775.

According to Jeffreys, the distribution of this species is Norway,
Faroe Islands, Great Britain, Ireland, Brest (Daniel), Atlantic coasts
of France and Spain (Hildago), throughout the Mediterranean and
Adriatic, Canaries (McAndrew), Labrador, Canada, and the United
States.

This species is not recorded by either the Caudan or Travailleur
and Talisman expeditions.

Mons. Dautzenberg records it from San Miguel and Pico in the
Azores, remarking that all the examples were young, the shell hyaline
white, marked with three opaque bands.

Station VI. 87 fathoms. Five living, two male, three female.

TRITONIIDJE.

Eanella, Lamarck.
Ranella gigantea (Lamarck).

Murex reticularis, Born, 1780. Test. Mus. Caesar, Vindobon, pi. xi,
fig. 51, non Linne,

Argohuccinum {Gyrina) gigantea, Dautzenberg, 1892. In Mem. Soc.
Zool., France, iv, p. 605.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 379

Locard considers that the shell found in the Atlantic differs from
that found in the Mediterranean, and calls them var. atlantica and
var. meditei'ranea, the sculpture of the latter being stronger than in
the former. Not having had the opportunity of examining a large
series from both localities, I do not care to offer an opinion, as Locard
also remarks that the Atlantic variety was not always confined to
this habitat, as he has found it in the Post-pliocene of Italy.

Station IV. 109 fathoms. Four living, two male, two female, the latter
being the largest. This appears to be the most northernly record for this
species.

SCALID-ffi.

ScALA, Humphrey.
(1) Scala clathrus (Linne).
Turho clathrus, Linne. Syst. Nat., 1758, ed. x, p. 765 (partly).
Scalaria comiimnis, Lamarck. An. s. Vert. 1822, vi. (2), p. 228.
„ „ Forbes and Hanley, 1853, Hist. Brit. Moll,

pi. Ixx, figs. 9 and 10.
Dredged by the Porcupine, 1869, in Donegal Bay, 1870, off
Cape Sagres, and in the Mediterranean at Algeciras Bay and on the
Adventure Bank.

Station I. 75 fathoms. One dead shell.

(2) Scala trevelyana (Leach in Johnston).
Scalaria trevelyana (Leach MS.), 1853. In Forbes and Hanley,
Hist. Brit. Moll., iii, p. 213, pi. Ixx, figs. 7 and 8 ; pi. FF, figs. 1-3.
Distribution, North Atlantic, from Norway to the Sahara coast.
Station XI. 146 fathoms. One dead shell.

(3) Scala richardi (Dautzenberg et de Boury).

Scalaria richardi, Dautzenberg and de Boury, 1897. Mem. Soc.
Zool. de France, x, p. 68, pi. ii, fig. 5.

Dredged by the Hirondelle, 1888, off the Azores ; and Princess Alice,
1895, also off the Azores.

None but dead shells seem to have been found, and the species
was described from imperfect specimens.

Station IX. 240 fathoms. One dead shell with the mouth imperfect.

TURRITELLID^.

TuRRiTELLA, Lamarck.
Turritella communis, Eisso.
Turritella communis, Eisso, 1826. Hist. Nat. Europe ]Merid., iv,
p. 106, fig. 37.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 4. 2D

380 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

This well-known species has an extensive habitat in the seas of
Europe, living as far north as the Faroe Islands. It is found throughout
the Mediterranean and off the coast of Morocco.

Locard splits this species into two on the strength of distinctions
pointed out by de Monterosato, but I do not know how far this
distinction has been adopted, nor have I been able to inspect a series
of each. Our solitary specimen is both young and damaged, but can
be without doubt referred to the var. gracilis of Jeffreys.

Station XI. 146 fathoms. One dead, young and broken.

TRICHOTROPID^.

TORELLIA, Jeffreys.
Torellia vestita, Jeffreys.

Beclnzia aperta, Jeffreys, 1859. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 3rd ser., iii,
p. 114, pi. iii, fig. 22 a-c.

Torellia vestita, Jeffreys, 1867. Brit. Conch., iv, p. 244, pi. iv, fig. 1 ;
V, pi. Ixxix, fig. 5.

Little seems to be known as to the distribution of this species.
Jeffreys mentions Loffoden Isles southwards on the authority of Loven
and others, Shetland (Barlee) and New England coasts of the United
States (Verrill), It is not recorded from either the Travailletcr,
Talisman, or Cauclan expeditions, which makes this an interesting
Bay of Biscay record.

Station XIII. 412 fathoms. One living.

STENOGLOSSA.
RHACHIGLOSSA.

BUCCINID^.

BucciNUM, Linne.
(1) Buccinum undatum (Linne).

Buccinum undatum, Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist. Brit. Moll.,
iii, p. 401, pi. cix, figs. 3 and 5.

This species seems to be confined to the North Atlantic, its habitat
extending from the North Cape (Bars, Friele), and Iceland (Steenstrup),
to the north, Massachusetts (Gould), Cape Hatteras (Dall.), New York
State (De Kay, Smith, Prime, Tryon, Man. Conch.), to the west, and
Eochelle (D'Orbigny pere and Aucapitaine) to the south.

It is not recorded by Locard as having been found in either the
Travailleur, Talisman, or Cauclan expeditions.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 381

Station I. 75 fathoms. One living.

,, II. 75 fathoms. One dead and one fragment.
,, V. 109 fathoms. One living and two young shells dead.
,, VI. 87 fathoms. One living and one dead.
Remarks. — The shells are mnch thinner than those usually found in the
English Channel and southern part of the North Sea, anl might be con-
sidered as approaching the variety striata, Pennant.

(2) Buccinum, Sp.

Two young living specimens of some species ; without further material
it is not much use attempting to give them a specific position. Mons.
Dautzenberg suggests they may be the young of B, sch7ieideri,
Verkriizen.

Station V. 109 fathoms. Two living, young,

LiOMESUS, Stimpson.
Liomesus dalei (J. Sowerby).

Buccinum clalei, J. Sowerby, 1825. Min. Conch., p. 139, pi. 486,
figs. 1, 2.
„ „ Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist. Brit. Moll., iii,

p. 408, pi. cix, figs. 1, 2.
Buccinopsis „ Jeffreys, 1867. Brit. Conch., iv, p. 298, pi. v, fig. 3 ;

V, pi. Ixxxiii.
Jeffreys gives several localities on the authority of others ; for
instance, west coast of Ireland, 100 fathoms; soft ground beyond the
Doggerbank, Aberdeenshire ; places between the Loffenden Isles, the
jSTorth Cape, 40-50 fathoms, while he dredged it himself from a bottom
of fine sand and mud in 72-87 fathoms off the northern and eastern
coasts of Shetland.

Not recorded by Locard in either the Travaillcur, Talisman, or
Ccmdan expeditions.

One living and two dead, the latter young

Three young shells dead.

Two young shells, one living, one dead.

One young shell dead.

Tritonofusus, Beck.
(1) Tritonofusus gracilis (da Costa).
Buccinum gracilc, da Costa, 1778. Brit. Conch., p. 124, pi. vi, fig. 5.
Fusus gracilis, Alder, 1848. Cat. Moll. North, and Dur., p. 63.
Neptunca gracilis, P. Fischer, 1878. In Act. Soc. Lin., Bord., xxxii,
p. 190.

Station V.

109 fathoms.

shells.

Station IX.

240 fathoms.

„ XI.

146 fathoms.

,. XII.

246 fathoms.

382 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

Distribution, Norway, Sweden, the seas of Northern Europe pretty
generally, Locard is of the opinion that its reputed discovery in the
Mediterranean requires confirmation.

I am, to some extent, doubtful as to the identification of all the
specimens I have referred as belonging to this species, their condition
not being good in most cases.

Station I. 75 fathoms. One of average size but long dead, one smaller,
dead and broken.

Station II. 75 fathoms. Two, both dead, one with remnants of epi-
dermis.

Station V. 109 fathoms. Two, both dead, and young shells.

,, IX. 240 fathoms. One of average size but long dead, and one
fragment.

(2) Tritonofusus (Siphonorbis) propinquus (Alder).

Fusics (Siphonorbis) propinqims, Alder, 1848. Cat. Moll. North, and

Dur., p. 63.
„ „ „ Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist.

Brit. Moll., vol. iii, p. 419, pi. 103,
fig- 2.
I cannot find much recorded relating to the distribution of this
species, and the Porcupine material has not yet been worked out.
Jeffreys' localities, given in his British Conchology, are all Northern or
Irish Sea, and Dautzenberg records it from the coast of Loire-Inferieur.
I do not find it mentioned as having been found by the Caiidan, Tra-
vailleur et Talisman, or the Prince of Monaco's expeditions.
Station V. 109 fathoms. One young, dead.
,, IX. 240 fathoms. One living,

,, XI. 146 fathoms. One dead embryonic, one dead but covered
with epidermis.

(3) Tritonofusus turritus (Sars).
Tritonium turritum, Sars, 1858. Arct. Moll, Norg, in Vet. Forh.

Christ, p. 39.

Fusus propinquus, var. turrita, Jeffreys, 1867. Brit. Conch., iv, p. 339.

Distribution, Norway, etc., and according to Jeffreys, in 78 fathoms
off the coast of Shetland. Locard does not record this species from
either the Travailleur and Talisman or Caudan expeditions.

Station XIII. 246 fathoms. One living and one dead.

(4) Tritonofusus (Siphonorbis) jeffreysianus (Fischer).

Fusus Jeffreysianus, P, Fischer, 1868. In Journ. Conch., xvi, p. 37,
Neptunia Jeffreysiana, P. Fischer, 1878. In Act. Soc. Lin., Bordeaux,
xxxii, p. 198.

NOKTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 383

Sipho JeJ^reysiana, Tryon, 1881. Man. Conch., part x, p. 126, pi. 41,
fig. 308.

Neptunia Jej^reysiana, Locard, 1896. Campagne du Caudan, facie, i,
pi. v., fig. 6.

Locard remarks that this species is very local in its distribution, it
being more or less confined to the Bay of Biscay, the commonest form
of the French coast.

It was dredged in the Pormi^ine, Travailleur, 1882, Hirondelle,
1886, Caudan, 1895, expeditions in the Bay of Biscay.

Station V. 109 fathoms. Two living, both males. One dead, young
and broken.
„ IX. 240 fathoms. One dead.

(5) Tritonofusus fusiformis (Broderip).

Buccintun fusiforme, Broderip, 1829. In Zool. Journ., v, p. 45,
pi. iii, fig. 3.

Fusus fenestratus, Turton, 1832. In Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., vii,
p. 351.

Neptunca fenestrata, Kobelt, 1875. In Martini und Chemnitz,
Conch. Cab., 2^ edit., p. 97, pi. xxvi, fig. 6.

Sipho fusiformis, G. 0. Sars, 1878. Moll. reg. arct. Norvegise,
p. 377, pi. xiv., fig. 1.

NeptuTiea (Siphonorbis) fusiformis, Friele, 1879. Norsk. Nordh.
Exped., Buccin, p. 18.

Sipho {Siphonorhis) fusiformis, Ed. Smith, 1889. In Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist., 6^ ser., p. 424.

This species seems to be widely distributed in the North Atlantic,
from Scandinavia and Finmark to the coasts of Morocco. Mons.
Locard points out that in the north it inhabits comparatively shallow
water, living at greater and greater depths as its most southern
recorded habitat is reached.

Station V. 109 fathoms. One dead.

„ IX. 240 fathoms. One young, living.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. One dead.

Note. — At first I concluded that specimens from Stations 9 and 12 were
referable to Neptunea peregra, Locard {Exped. du Trav. et du Talis., vol. i,
p. '311, pi. xviii,figs. 8 ^o 11). I submitted them to Mons. Dautzenberg, who
decided they were the young of the above species. Is Neptunea peregra,
Locard, a distinct species 1

384 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

FASCIOLARIID^.

BucciNOFUSis (Conrad).
Buccinofusus berniciensis (King).

Fusus hcrniciensis, King, 1846. In Ann. and Mag. Nat.' Hist, xviii,
p. 246.

Boreofusus berniciensis, G. 0. Sars, 1878. Moll. Eeg. Arct. Norvegise,
p. 278.

Troschelia herniciensis, Friele, 1882. Norske Nord. Exped. i, p. 26-

NeptiLnia herniciensis, Locard, 1886. Prodr. Conch. Franc, p. 176.

Dredged at various stations, in deep water, from the North of Spain
to Cape Verde, also by Mr. Holt of the Irish Board of Agriculture, in
337 fathoms, 48 miles to the N.W. of Tearaght, Co. Kerry, 1904. It
has been recorded from several localities in the British area, Norway,
Faroe Islands, North Eussia and Davis Straits.

Station IX. 240 fathoms. One dead, in very poor condition.

PSEUDOMUEEX, Monterosato.
Pseudomurex richardi (P. Fischer).

Murex richardi, P. Fischer, 1882. In Journ. Conch., xxx, p. 49.
Pseudomurex richardi, Monterosato, 1890. Coq. Prof. Palermo, p. 23.
Distribution : In deep water from the Bay of Biscay to the west
coast of Morocco and in the Mediterranean.
Station XIII. 412 fathoms. Two living.

MURICIDJE.

Teophon, Montfort.
Trophon muricatus (Montagu).

Murex muricatus, Montagu, 1803. Test. Brit., p. 262, pL ix, fig. 2.

Fusus echinatus, Philippi, 1836. Enum. Moll. Sicil., I, p. 206,
pi. xi, fig. 10.

Trophon muricatus, Forbes and Hanley, 1853. Hist. Brit. Moll., iii,
p. 439, pi. cxi, figs. 3, 4.

Trophon {Trophonopsis) muricatus, Buquoy and Dautzenberg, 1882.
Moll. Ecus., I, p. 39, pi. vi, fig. 7.

Generally distributed in European seas as far north as Belgium
and south to the Mediterranean and ^gean seas. The single specimen
found falls in with Locard's remarks as to the small size of the dredged
examples, it being only 10 '5 millimetres in height.

Station V. 109 fathoms. One (young) dead.
„ XI. 146 fathoms. One dead.

NOETH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 385

COLUMBELLID-S.

Anaohis, H. and A. Adams.
Anachis costulata (Cantraine) auct.

Fusus costulatus, Cantraine, 1835 (?). Diagn. Esp. Nouv. in Bull.
Acad., Bruxelles, p. 20.

Colicmlella halicdi, v. alhida, Jeffreys, 1867. Brit. Conch., iv, p. 356,
pi. vi, fig. 5. ; 1869, v, p. 219, pi. Ixxxviii, fig. 3.

Bela grimaldi, Dautzenberg, 1889. Contrib. Faune Malac, Agores,
p. 26, pi. ii, figs. 2a, 2&, 2c, 2d.

Bela lima tula, Locard, 1896. Kesultats Scient. de la Camp, du
Candan, Mollusques, p. 141, pi. v, fig. 3.

I submitted the two specimens to Mons. Dautzenberg, having
in vain endeavoured to trace them in the National Collection or
figured and described in the above-mentioned works, neither Locard's
or Dautzenberg's figures showing the teeth on the outer lip, both hav-
ing been drawn from young shells.

This species must be widely distributed in the North Atlantic,
though the records are few.

Station XII. 146 fathoms. Two dead shells.

OPISTHOBRANCHIA.

TECTIBRANCHIA.
BULLACEA.

SCAPHANDRID^.

Scaphander, de Montfort.

Scaphander lignarius (de Montfort).

Bulla lignaria, Linne, 1758. Sys. Nat., ^dit. x, p. 727.
Scaphander lignarius, de Montfort, 1810.. Conch. Syst., ii, p. 33-4.
Bulla lignaria. Gray, 1815. In Ann. Phil., p. 408.

Very widely distributed on the coasts of Europe, from Norway to
throughout the Mediterranean, in shallow and deep water.

Station A". 109 fathoms. One large living and one smaller, dead.
„ XL 146 fathoms. One fragmentary^, dead.
XII. 246 fathoms. One small and broken.

386 THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

OAVOLINIID^.

Clio, Linne.
Clio pyramidata, Linne.

Clio pyramidata, Linne, 1767. Syst. Nat, 12th Ed., p. 1094.
Hyalcea lanceolata, Lesueur, 1813. Nouv. Bull. Soc. Philom. de
Paris, iii, p. 284, pi. v, fig. 3.

This species has many synonyms, whose repetition is hardly
necessary.

It is cosmopolitan in its distribution throughout the oceanic world.
Station XII. 246 fathoms. Thirteen specimens, more or less fragmentary,
though two or three contained the animal in a much con-
tracted state.

Cavolinia, Abildgard.
(1) Cavolinia trispinosa (Lesueur).

Hyalma trispinosa, Lesueur, 1821. In de Blainville, Diet. Hist.
Nat., xii, p. 82.

Hyalcea mucronata, Quoy and Gaymard, 1827. In Ann. Sci. Nat.,
X, p. 231, ph viii, B.

Hyalcea depressa, Bivona, 1832. Ejemer. Scient. Sicil., pi. ii, tigs.
4,5.

Cavolinia trispinosa, Locard, 1886. Prodrom. Conch. Franc, p. 22.

Cavolinia {Diacria) trispinosa, Dall, 1889. In Bull. United States
Nat. Mus., xxxvii, p. 82, pi. Ixvi, fig. 115.

I have compared our solitary, nearly perfect specimen with those
from the Atlantic in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.).

This species is widely distributed, and is recorded from the east and
west coasts of the Atlantic, the Mediterranean, West Indies , Madeira
and Canary Isles, and Pacific Ocean.

Station XII. 246 fathoms. One dead and one fragment.

(2) Cavolinia inflexa (Lesueur).

Hyalcea injiexa, Lesueur, 1813. Nouv. Bull. Soc. Philom., vol. iii,
p. 285, pi. V, fig. 4, A— D.

Hyalma labiata, d'Orbigny, 1836. Voyage dans I'Amerique Meridion-
ale, vol. V, p. 104, pL vi, figs. 21-25.

Cavolinia injiexa, Tesch., 1904. The Thecosomata and Gyinnoso-
mata of the Siboga Expedition, p. 43, pi. ii, figs. 54-63.

This is a very variable species and has extensive synonymy : our
two shells seem to be referable to v. lahiata from an examination of
those so named in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.).

Station XII. 246 fathoms. Two empty shells.

NOKTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 387

PLEUROBRANCHACEA.

PLEUROBRANCHI^.

Pleurobkanchus, Cuvier.

Pleurobranchus, Sp.

I have submitted this specimen to Sir Charles Eliot, who remarks,
" an immature Pleurobranchus, very likely P. plumula, Montagu ; but
the dorsal skin has been torn off. The species cannot be identified."

Station XIII. 412 fathoms.

NUDIBRANCHIA.
KLADOHEPATICA.

^OLIDIID^.

Genus ?

Sir Charles Eliot remarks, " The body of an ^olid which has lost
all but its papillae and is otherwise in poor preservation. It is not
possible to determine even the genus."

Station A"II. 444 fathoms.

DOTONID-ffi.

DoTO, Oken.

Doto, Sp.

Sir Charles Eliot remarks, " A Doto, probably V. fragilis, Forbes."
It is common on the British coasts, and is very likely generally dis-
tributed in the Atlantic.

Station II. 75 fathoms.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

Berg, R. Opisthobranchs provenant des Canipagnes du Yacht V Hirondelle.

Resultats des Campagnes Scientifique accomplies sur son yacht par Albert

ler, Prince de Monaco, Fasc. iv, 1893.
Berg, R. Nudibranchs et Marsenia provenant des campagnes de la " Princesse

Alice." Resultats des Campagnes Scientifique accomplies sur son yacht par

Albert ler, Prince de Monaco, Fasc. xiv, 1899.
Brown, Capt. T. Illustrations of the Conchology of Great Britain an. I Ireland,

1827 (1st edit.).
Costa, C. M. da. Historia Naturalis Testaceorum Britannise, 1778.
Dall, W. H. Preliminary Catalogue of the Shell-bearing Marine Mollusks, etc.,

of the South-east Coast of the United States. Un. States Nat. Mus.,

Bui. No. 37, 1889.

888

THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE "HUXLEY FROM THE

Dautzenberg, p. Conti'ibutions a la Faune Malacologique des lies Agores.

Resultats des Campagnes Scientifique accomplies sur son yacht par Albert

ler, Prince de Monaco, Fasc. i, 1889.
Dautzenberg, P. Contribution a la Faune Malacologique du Golfe de Gascogne.

Mem. Soc. Zool., France, 1891.
Dautzenberg, P. Croisieres du Yacht Chazalic dans I'Atlantique, MoUusques.

Mem. Soc. Zool., France, 1900.
Dautzenberg, Ph., and Bourt, E. de. MoUusques appartenant a la famille des

Scalidce et du genre Mathildia. Di'agages effectues par VHirondelle et par

la Princesse Alice, 1888-96. Mem. Soc. Zool., France, 1897.
Dautzenberg, Ph., and Fischer, H. Dragages effectues par VHirondelle et

par la Princesse Alice, 1888-96. Mem. Soc. Zool., France, 1896-7.
Dautzenberg, Ph., and Fischer, H. MoUusques provenant des dragages effectues

a I'ouest de I'Afrique. Resultats des Campagnes Scientifiques accomplies

siir son yacht par Albert ler, Prince de Monaco, Fasc. xxxii, 1906.
Fischer, Dr. P. Manuel de Conchyliologie, etc., 1887.
Forbes, E., and Hanley, S. British Mollusca, 1848-53.
Garstang, ^Y,, m.a. British Aplacophora. Proc. Malac. Soc, Lond. No. 3,

Vol. II. Oct., 1896.
Friele, H. Den Norske Nordhaus-Expedition, 1876-78. Mollusca, 1882-6.
Jeffreys, J. Gwyn. British Conch ology, 1862-9.
Jefferys, J. Gwyn. On the Mollusca procured during the Lightning and

Porciqmie expeditions, 1868-70.

Part 2. Proc. Zool. Soc.

Lond.

1879.
1881.

1881.
1882.
1883.
1884.
1884.
1885.

LocARD, A., et Vayssiere, A. Resultats scientifiques de la Campagne du Caudan
dans le Golfe de Gascogne, Aout et Sept., 1895. Ann. Univer. de Lyon, 1896.

LocARD, A. Expeditions scientifiques du Travailleur et du Talisman pendant les
annees 1880, 1881, 1882, 1883. Mollusc|ues Testaces, 1897-8.

Payraudeau, B. C. Catalogue descriptif et Methodique des Annelides et des Mol-
lusques de L'ile de Corse, 1826.

Pennant, T. British Zoology, A^ol. iv, Mollusca, etc., 1777.

Philippi, R. a. Enumeratio Molluscorum Siciliee, etc., 1836-44.

Saussaye, Petit de la. Catalogue des MoUusques Testaces des Mers d'Europe, 1869.

Sykes, E. R., On the Mollusca procured during the Porcupine Expeditions,
Supplemental Notes.

Pt. 1. Proc. Malac. Soc, Lond., vol. vi. No. 1, 1904.
„ 2. „ „ „ „ No. 6, 1905.

„ 3. „ „ „ vol. vii. No. 3, 1906.

The Thecosomata and Gymnosomata of the Siboga Expedition, 1899-

April, 1904.

Conchylia Insularum Britannicarum, 1822.

1869-70.

Tesch, J. J.

1900.

Turton, W

Note. — The above bibliography iucludes only such books as I have had the opportunity
of consulting.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 389

CO GO '*

+::+:::+;+;+

I^rt to
CO 00 ^

— -< o

bo !o '-'

X 1 ^r °

HH I CO CC ^

+ + +

+ :+:: + +:::+:.+

+ + +

+ i +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + ; : + + + +

■S5 S

3 5 -13

rt 2 P<

Nucula sulcata
, , nitida
Anomia ephii)pi
Limopsia aurita

,, minut
Glycymeris glyc
Area nodulosa

,, obliqua .
Volaella phaseol
Pecten bruei
Chlaniys sulcati
^quipecten ope
Palliolum simili

Is
>

, , manoni

, , subauricul

Astarte sulcata

Syndosmya pris

Spisula elliptica

(M CO "# in

'J5 t^ 00

OJ O .-H (M CO ■«<

«D t^ 00 OJ O .-1
r-H rH rt r-H (M C>^

390

THE MOLLUSCA COLLECTED BY THE "HUXLEY FKOM THE

O
O

H
<^

t— I
H

H
ft
-^

I— I
O

H
«2

00 cc

00 00 *"*

°coa> «^

+ + +

+ : +

+ +

^ ^ p>

<M (M ITS

CC to

+ + + + : :+ :+ :+ :

+ : ; : +

+::::+

+ +::::+:+:

+ ; : +

+++++++++++++ ++ ++

cS ^ O c3

•S.§« =e-^

rt p C .:i ;: "S "^

!^ •" ^ TT -" ^

2 c« cS

j 2
s 5

o „ ^5.2 S 8 g S g-s:2

P^ S g

.•p'C

t- X a p

S CL, 1-5 H O

•5 C

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY, IN AUGUST, 1906. 391

+ + + + +

+ +::::+:+:::+: +

+ :::: + + + + + +

+ + +

:+ : : ':++ I : I I : \ \ ': + + + + + [ + + ] ] +

: +

+::+::::+::+

+++++++ ;+ :++ i+++ ;+++++++ :+++++ i ; +

■^

cri^

B43

O 1-

'l—l

.-. =*

3 ^ ^ 5d^

=• a s
,:s CO ir'--H a •— ,-^, .^-...^^-^ ^ <^ M S -»^ c3.^ i^utJ-^S^acs"

:;;

=« i=

crl

bbso

o
-1^

ClJ

[ 392 ]

The Brachiopoda collected by the "Huxley" from the
North Side of the Bay of Biscay, in August, 1906.

Alexander Reynell.

Of the three species of Brachiopoda found, two, Magellania cranium and
M. septigera, are found in the British list. The third species, Muhlfeldtia
tnmcata, has not, as far as I can discover, previously been recorded
from so high a latitude, Turton's Torbay locality being very doubtful.

BRACHIOPODA.

ARTICULATA.

TEREBRATULID^.

Magellania, Bayle.

(1) Magellania cranium, Miiller.
Terebratula cranium, Miiller, 1776. Zool. Dan. Prodr., p. 249.
Anomia cranium, Gmelin, 1789. Syst. Nat., edit, xiii, p. 3347.
Waldheiniia cranium, Eeeve, 1860. Conch. Icon,, pi. iii, fig. 6.
Magellania {Macanclrevia) cranium,, P. Fischer et (Ehlert, 1891.

Trav. and Talis. Expedit., Brach., p. 73, pi. v, figs. 10«-10.s.

Distributed from Greenland and Norway to the south-west of
France, according to Jeffreys. A. Adams records it from Northern
Asia and Japan.

Mons. Dautzenberg kindly identified this species.

Station A^. 109 fathoms. One living.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. One living.

(2) Magellania septigera, Loven.
Terebratula septigera, Loven, 1846. Index Moll. Scand., p. 29.
Waldheimia septigera, Davidson, 1855. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.

[II], vol. xvi, 1855.

Terebratula septata, Jeffreys, 1878. Proc. Zool. Soc, London, p. 407,
pi. xxiii, fig. 1.

THE BRACHIOPODA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY." 393

There seems to be some doubt as to whether this species is the same
as the Tci'ehratula septata of Philippi, Both Jeffreys and Locard are
of the opinion that it is, but Fischer and (Ehlert do not even mention
Philippi's name. I, under the circumstances, think it the wisest plan
to follow the latter authorities. This species seems to be distributed
in the eastern part of the North Atlantic, from Norway and the
Hebrides and Shetland Islands to the West Coast of Africa and the
Canary Islands.

Station XI. 146 fathoms. One small, living.
„ XIII. 412 fatlioms. Eleven living.

MuHLFELDTiA, Bayle.
Mtihlfeldtia truncata (Linne).

Anomia truncata, Linne, 1767. Syst. Nat., edit, xii, p. 1152, No.
229.

Terelratula truncata, Philippi, 1836. Enum. Moll. Sicil., I, p. 95,
pi. vi, fig. 12.

Milhlfeldtia truncata, P. Fischer and D. P. (Ehlert, 1891. Trav. et
Talis. Brachiopoda, p. 80, pi. vii, figs. 11«-11^.

This species is recorded as being very common in the Mediterranean,
and has been found in the Bay of Biscay, at many stations off Cape
Finisterre, the North of Spain, and has been dredged off the Morocco
coast, and the Canary Isles. Turton's record of a specimen from Torbay
is generally considered doubtful, as far as being a proof of its living in
the British area is concerned.

Station VII. 144 fathoms. Three living.

BIBLIOGKAPHY.

Fischer, P., and ffihlert, D. P. — Brachiopodes de rAtlantique Nord, 1892. Resultats
des Campagnes Scientifiques accomplies sur son Yacht par Albert
I'^'^ Prince de Monaco.
Jeffreys, J. Gwyn. — On the Mollusca procured during the Lightning and Porcupine

Expedition, 1868-70. Part I, Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond., 1878.
Locard, A. — Brachiopods. Resultats Scientifiques de la Campagne du Caudan
dansle Golfe de Gascogne, August-September, 1895, 1896.
Many Brachiopods are, of course, included in the older works dealing with the
Mollusca as detailed in the bibliography of that group on pages 387 and 388.

•AU ]

Mackerel and Sunshine.

By
E. J. AUen, D.Sc,

Director of the Marine Biological Association.
With Figs. 1-5 in the Text and Tables I. -VII. at the end.

In his paper on " Plankton Studies in Eelation to the Western
Mackerel Fishery," in the last number of this Journal (Vol. VIII., p.
269), G. E. BuUen shows that for the years 1903-1907 there appears
to be a correlation between the number of mackerel taken during
May and the amount of Copepod plankton, upon which the mackerel
feed, taken in the neighbourhood of the mackerel fishing grounds
during the same month.

It was clearly worth while, therefore, to consider what conditions
favour the production of an abundant supply of Copepods in the
fishing area, since it appears to be this supply of food which attracts
the mackerel into that area, or at any rate into its surface waters.

The hydrographical investigations carried out at the mouth of the
English Channel have rendered it probable that the movement of the
water there is comparatively slow. It may therefore be assumed that
on the mackerel grounds to the westward of the Cornish coast the
water which is present at any particular time has not recently moved
into the district from any very remote region, and, treating the matter
broadly, has been subjected for some time to the general climatic
conditions of the neighbourhood.

The question then suggests itself, can the differences which occur from
year to year in the abundance of the Copepods be referred in any way
to such climatic conditions? If such a connection exists it will probably
be not direct, but indirect, through the action of the climatic conditions
on the food of the Copepods. The food of Copepods seems to be largely
the vegetable organisms of the plankton, chiefly diatoms and Peridinida3,*

* This has long been recognised in a general way, but useful direct evidence of it has
recently been brought forward by W. J. Dakin. Notes on the Alimentary Canal and Food
of the Gopepoda. Internat. Jievve der gesam. Hydrobiologie u. Hydrographie, I., 1908.

MACKEKEL AND SUNSHINE. 395

though even if a considerable proportion of it were found to consist of
minute animal organisms, these in their turn would feed upon the
phytoplankton. It is therefore to the conditions which favour the
production of phytoplankton, the fundamental food supply, that we
must turn.

The three most obvious matters to be considered in connection with
tlie production of this vegetable plankton are: (1) the composition of
the sea-water itself, (2) the temperature, and (3) the amount of light
which is available for the production of plant life.

With regard to the composition of the sea-water itself, the only
information available refers to its salinity, and up to the present it has
not been possible to show any simple relation between changes in
salinity and changes in the vegetable or animal production in the area
under consideration. The same is true of temperature, though this will
be considered in more detail below.

It is the object of the present paper to call attention to what appears
to be evidence of the influence of the third factor, the intensity of light.
Experiments on the cultivation of marine plankton diatoms in the
laboratory, upon which I had been engaged, had drawn my attention to
the great importance to be attached to the intensity of the light ta
which the diatoms were exposed. It therefore occurred to me that a
special abundance of Copepods during the month of May in any year
might be due to a special amount of sunshine during the earlier months
of the year, which would increase the amount of phytoplankton, the
Copepod food. An attempt was therefore made to correlate the average
quantity of mackerel per boat taken in May with the number of hours
of bright sunshine recorded during the first quarter of the year.

The ofticial statistics of mackerel landed are not very satisfactory for
such a purpose, since they give only the total quantities of fish and
give no information as to the number of vessels from which the fish
are obtained. In making use of them, therefore, one must bear in
mind that the number of vessels to which the figures relate varies from
year to year, although the amount of this variation over a small
number of consecutive years will not generally be very large.

In order to get figures of a more definite character, I applied to
Messrs. Peacock & Co., of Lowestoft, who have had vessels engaged in
the western mackerel fishery for many years. Messrs. Peacock were
good enough to furnish me with a series of figures giving the number
of hundreds of mackerel landed each month from February to June, at
Newlyn and Milford,* by three of their steam drifters, for each of the

* These vessels landed lish only at Newlyn and Milford, so that, by combining the
figures for the two ports, we get the total number of fish taken by each boat from the
western fishing grounds,

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII. NO. 4. 2 E

396 MACKEKEL AND SUNSHINE.

years 1902-1908, as well as similar figures for three sailing drifters.
These figures are given in Tables I. and II.

Messrs. Peacock's figures show that by far the largest quantities of
mackerel are landed in the month of May, and that, as in the case of
the official statistics (cf. Bullen, loc. cit., p. 277), the figures representing
the May landings dominate the curve representing the total landings
from the spring fishing. Moreover, it is practically certain that the
vessels fished throughout May, whereas for the other months, except,
perhaps, April, one has not generally any definite knowledge as to when
they began or ended their fishing.

In the diagram below (Fig. 1) the average number of mackerel per

HUNDREDS

■HRS. 0'" MACKEREL

SUN| ■ — ~~ — lIN MAY

700
275

- 600

v^ \ \

250 -

H 500

f ^ ■ ^

225 \-

AVERAGE

1 /

\
\
\

'^ AVERAGE

217-5

f55

1 1

ll
//
1

1 1

-qoo

200h

300

175 h

200

4902 1903 1901 1905 1906 Qor (908

Fig. 1. — The dotted line indicates the average number of hours of bright sunshine re-
corded for the months of February and March, in each of the j^ears 1902-1908,
at the meteorological stations at Plymouth, Falmc '^h, and Scilly.

The continuous line indicates the average number of "hundreds" (120 fish)
of mackerel per boat landed at Newlyn and Milford in the month of May of
the same years 1902-1908, by three steam drifters belonging to Messrs.
Peacock & Co., of Lowestoft.

boat in "hundreds" (each "hundred" really means 120 fish) landed in
May by Messrs. Peacock's three steam drifters is represented by the
continuous line, whilst the number of hours bright sunshine during
February and March is represented by the dotted line. The sunshine
figures were obtained by taking the average of the number of hours

MACKEREL AND SUNSHINE. 397

recorded at the three meteorological stations, Plymouth, Falmouth, and
Scilly. Although the extreme closeness of the agreement between
the two curves may be due to chance, it seems scarcely possible to
doubt that they indicate a fundamental correlation between the
abundance of mackerel in May and the amount of bright sunshine
during the earlier months of the year. The sunshine curve, it should
be added, has practically the same shape, whether it is taken for the
three stations chosen, or for the whole south-western district of
England, which includes inland stations, or for the south-west of
England and south Ireland combined. The figures on which the
sunshine curve is based will be found in Table III.

In Fig. 2 the continuous line gives the total number of cwts. of
mackerel landed on the south and west coasts of England and Wales
in May* for each of the years from 1886-1908, as given by the
official statistics of the Board of Trade and Board of Agriculture and
Fisheries (see Table IV.), whilst the dotted line gives the average
number of hours bright sunshine recorded for the south-west of
England and - bouth Ireland for the first quarter of the year ( Jan.-
March), as given in the reports of the Meteorological Office (see Table
v.). As already pointed out, the official figures of mackerel landed
take no account of the number of boats fishing, and those taken during
the first four or five years are known to be very imperfect and should
therefore be neglected. It is practically certain that the fishing power
has increased during the years for which the records are given, more
especially since the introduction of steam drifting about 1902.
Comparing the two curves in Fig. 2 generally, and bearing in mind the
above limitations, there is, I think, sufficient similarity in the way in
which they rise and fall together to justify us in regarding them as in
no way contradicting the very definite agreement shown between
Messrs. Peacock's figures and the sunshine curve as seen in Fig. 1.

Considering in x ore detail the years 1902-1908, it will be seen
that the most striking difference between the curve given by the official
figures and that representing the averages for Messrs. Peacock's boats is
the great drop wb''.'h the official figures show in 1906. A similar
though less marked drop in 1906 is also shown by the curve given in
Fig. 3, which represents the average number of " hundreds " of mackerel
landed by Messrs. Peacock's three sailing drifters. A reference to the
figure given by Bullen {loc. cit., p. 279, Fig. 1) also shows a minimum in
1906 for the Copepods taken at the International Stations E.5. and
E.6. The high figure for 1906 given by the three steam drifters,
although it agrees with the high February and March sunshine for that
* Most of the fish are landed at Newlyii and Milford Haven.

o
o

o
o
o

o
o

o ot^

«o

MACKEREL AND SUNSHINE.

399

year, does not therefore agree with the official figures for mackerel, with
the catches of the three sailing drifters, nor with the figure taken to
represent the Copepods. Any explanation of this discrepancy can only
be of a speculative kind, but it is probable that the steam drifters
fished much further west of the Scillies than the sailing drifters would
go, or than the International Stations are situated. If this is the
explanation of the difference shown, it would seem to suggest that in
May, 1906, there was some local factor at work on the grounds nearer
the shore which did not operate on those which were more distant.

HUNDREDS
OF MACKEREL

400

500h

200-

100

1902

1903

190^

1905

1906

1907

Flu. 3. — Curve indicating the average number of " hundreds" (120 iish) of mackerel per
boat, lauded at Newlyn and Milford, in the month of May of the years 1902-
1907, by three sailing drifters belonging to Messrs. Peacock & Co., of Lowestoft.

Before leaving the question of sunshine it should be stated that
curves representing the bright sunshine in the months of April and
May have not shown any kind of correlation with the quantities of
mackerel taken.

In order to ascertain whether the temperature of the water during
the fishing months in the different years bore any relation to the takes
of mackerel, and to meet the suggestion that the effect of the bright
sunshine might have been simply to increase that temperature, a series
of curves have been drawn showing the average temperature of the
surface water in February, March, April, and May for each of the years
1902-1908 in the area between 48° and 50° North Latitude and 4°
and 10° West Longitude. The temperatures given in Table VI., and

400

MACKEREL AND SUNSHINE.

represented in Fig. 4, are the means of the six temperature averages
given for this area on the Monthly Pilot Charts of the North Atlantic,
issued by the Meteorological Office in London. For comparison with
these, Table VII., and Fig. 5 give the mean temperatures at the surface
and at 10 meters (5 fathoms) depth found at Stations E.5. and E.G. on
the International Cruises carried out in May in each of the years
1903-8. It will be seen that the two curves follow] the same general
course. The outstanding feature of these temperature curves is the
occurrence of two very marked maxima in 1903 and 1905. On

190-^

1Q05

(907 1905

Fig. 4. — Curves showing the mean surface temperature of the sea in degrees Centigrade in
the area between Lat. 48° and 52° N. , and Long. 4° and 10° W. , as given on the
Monthly Pilot Charts of the Meteorological Office for the months of February,
March, April, and May, in the years 1902-1908.

comparing the curves with the curves representing the catches of
mackerel, either with that given by Messrs. Peacock's figures, or by
the ofiicial figures, no relation between the two can be traced. Whilst
the 1905 temperature maximum agrees with the maximum total
catch of mackerel as shown by the ofiicial statistics and the high
average catch shown by Messrs. Peacock's figures, the temperature
maximum of 1903 is accompanied by low catches of mackerel. The
other parts of the curves also give no indication of any close connection
between the surface sea temperatures and the mackerel catches.

MACKEREL AND SUNSHINE.

401

I have to thank Mr. G. E, Bullen for assistance in plotting the
early curves which rendered the relation between sunshine and
mackerel probable, though I am myself entirely responsible for the
accuracy of the curves and figures as given in this paper. Mr. D. J.
Matthews has also helped me in various ways.

My thanks are especially due to Messrs. Peacock & Co., of Lowestoft,
for the very great trouble they have taken in supplying the figures
showing the numbers of mackerel caught by their vessels and for
allowing them to be used. Without their ready co-operation this
paper could not have been written.

10'

/a\

// ^

'k //

•\jv //

\\ ^ -^ZT^

A //

^\ — -'-""^

^X //

\ //

vy/

1 1

1 - 1

1903

1904

1905

1906

1907

1905

Fig. 5. — Curves showing the means of the temperatures, in degrees Centigrade, recorded
at Stations E.5 and E.6 at the surface (continuous line) and at 10 meters
(dotted line), on the International Investigation Cruises in the month of May,
for the years 1903-1908.

402

MACKEREL AND SUNSHINE.

TABLE I.

Table showing the number of "hundreds" of Mackerel landed by
three steam drifters at Newlyn and Milford Haven for the years
1902-8, from figures supplied by Messrs. Peacock & Co., of Lowestoft.

LANDED AT NEWLYN.

LANDED AT MILFORD.

A\-erage
Number of

'hundreds'
per boat

landed at
Newlyn

and
Milford.

Steam

drifter

Steam

drifter

steam

drifter

.Steam

drifter

Steam

drifter

steam

drifter

1902.

Hds.

March .

April

May

June

103|
490JL

287"

222i
263f
263
289i

18
1341
113^

—

120
201
289

288

1903.

Marcli .
April
May
June

247i
120^
328^
ll7i

127i
140|
218
57^

409J

202

196i

—

2Ah
60|

261
162
268

1904.

March .
April
May
June

300i
lllf
293|
277i

347i
216|
293
143

237i
313|
197i

—

295
225
261
210

1905.

February
March .
April
May .
June

120^

235|
585

19^

182

374i
291J
4704

49J

87i

429|

3781

59
296
319
490

1906.

February

March .

April

May . .

June

iioi

269
29

767

12i

129J

708i

4
4

lllf

83i

12^

61
125
581

1907.

March .

April

May

160|
105J
457

H
320i
869

48i
105i
5841

—

32i

—

83
178
637

June

—

1908.

March .
April
May
June

109^
363|
418

66i*
266
616|

37t
326|

237|ir

—

71
319
517tt

* Steam drifter B is not the same vessel in 1908 as in previous years,
t Commenced March I7tli.
H Finished May 19th.
tt Average for vessels A and B.

MACKEREL AND SUNSHINE.

403

TABLE II.

Table showing the number of "hundreds" of Mackerel landed by
three sailing drifters at Newlyn and Milford Haven for the years
1902-7, from figures supplied by Messrs. Peacock & Co., of Lowestoft.

LANDED AT NEWLYN.

LANDED AT MILFORD.

Average
STumber of

hundreds '

_, -•

per boat
landed at

Sailing

Sailing Sailing Sailing

Newlyn

drifter

drifter drifter drifter

and

A. B. C.

Milford.

1902.

Hds.

Hds. Hds. Hds.

Hds.

March .

—

__ — —

April

57i

241

129i

— — —

144

May

150i

215i

— — —

183

June

—

113

— ' — —

113

1903.

March .

531

April

83i

160

77h

— — —

107

May

93J

—

1231

— 202 —

139

June

57^

166f

104

1904.

March .

lOf

— 594 —

318

April

—

47^

— 86 —

May

187

107

143i

— 35 -

157

June

113

1031

— — —

1905.

March .

162^

— 240 —

201

April .

42|

—

237i

— 265f —

182

May

259|

250

4571

— 70 —

346

June

52i

—

— — —

52i

1906.

March .

19i

- 12^ -

April .

226|

157i

— 151 —

178

May

—

llii

— 443 —

215

June

—

10^

—

— — —

10|

1907.

March .

56i

—

- 15i

April .

240i

148|

— 801 _

178

May

—

260

— 266^ —

i 292

June

—

_ _ _

404

MACKEREL AND SUNSHINE,

TABLE III.

Table showing the average number of hours of Bright Sunshine
recorded at the three Meteorological Stations, Plymouth, Falmouth,
and Scilly, in January, February, and March of the years 1902-8,

1902.
Plymouth .
Falmouth

January.
45-6
49-3

Kebruary.
92-5
87-0

March.
108-4
123-3

Average for

February and

March together.

Scilly

56-5

92-7

121-5
117-7

Average .

50-4

90-7

208-4

1903.

Plymouth ,
Falmouth

38-6
55-3

59-3
63-3

110-8
126-7

Scilly . .

71-5

50-2

129-6

Average .

51-5

57-6

122-4

180-0

1904.

Plymouth
Falmouth .

42-0
48-0

52-1
57-7

121-5
104-7

Scilly

49-6

55-5

123-3

Average .

46-5

55-1

116-5

17116

1905.

Plymouth .
Falmouth ,

69-4 1
65-1 1

81-0
88-0

136-6
137-7

■

Scilly

61 -7 1

81-9

146-3

Average .

65-4 ;

83-6

140-2

223-8

1906.

Plymouth
Falmouth .

66-9
64-6

96-2
110-7

142-9
164-8

Scilly

77-9 '

101-7

154-3

Average .

69-8 !

102-9

154-0

256-9

1907.

Plymouth .
Falmouth .

75 .
74

91
76

186

178

Scilly

186

Average .

183

262

1908.

Plymouth .
Falmouth .

72
49

147
153

Scilly

158

Average .

153

220

MACKEEEL AND SUNSHINE.

405

TABLE IV.

Table showing the number of hundredweights of Mackekel landed
at Ports on the South and West Coasts of England and Wales in the
month of May for the years 1886-1908, compiled from official statistics
of the Board of Trade and Board of Agriculture and Fisheries.

May.

Year.

No of cwts. Mackerel.

Year,

No. of cwts. Mackerel

1886

63,338

1898

146,769

1887

71,117

1899

207,962

1888

139,739

1900

138,723

1889

173,828

1901

169,020

1890

280,444

1902

169,857

1891

127,148

1903

152,753

1892

127,183

1904

199,884

1893

105,754

1905

378,157

1894

139,384

1906

108,273

1895

135,238

1907

222,151

1896

119,323

1908

108,144

1897

193,769

TABLE V.

Table showing the Number of Hours of Bkight Sunshine recorded
over England S. W. and S. Wales and Irelayid S. for the first Quarter
of the years 1886-1908. From the records of the Meteorological
Office.

England S.W.

and S. Wales.

Ireland S.

Mean.

Year.

Hours.

1886

174

203

188

1887

314

309

312

1888

240

260

250

1889

227

243

235

1890

239

247

243

1891

300

1892

305

257

281

1893

285

244

264

1894

330

293

312

1895

292

260

276

1896

195

190

192

1897

215

237

226

1898

260

255

257

1899

304

286

295

1900

234

256

245

1901

240

238

239

1902

217

215

216

1903

205

201

203

1904

207

193

200

1905

272

268

270

1906

286

250

268

1907

315

256

286

1908

246

229

238

406

MACKEREL AND SUNSHINE.

TABLE VI.

Table showing the average surface temperature in degrees Centi-
grade of the Area between 48° and 52° North Latitude and 4° and 10'
West Longitude from February to May, as given on the Monthly
Pilot Charts of the Meteorological Office. Each temperature given
is the average of six means printed on the charts.

1902.

1903.

1904.

1905.

190t5.

1907.

190S.

February

8-7

10-0

9-1

9-6

9-3

8-4

9-4

March

9-2

9-9

8-9

9-2

9-0

April

10-3

9-6

9-9

9-3

9-6

8-9

May

. 107

11-6

107

11-9

10-4

10-6

10-8

TABLE VIL

May Hydrogkaphic Cruises.

Temperatures (C'") at Stations E.5 and E.6.

Surface. 10 meters.

E.5.

E.6.

Mean.

E.6.

Mean.

1903 .

11-08

10-20

10-64

11-02

10-19

10-60

1904 .

9-63

9-30

9-46

9-60

9 15

9-37

1905 .

11-39

10-83

11-11

, 11-25

1071

10-98

1906 .

10-16

9-68

9-92

10-03

9-62

9-82

1907 .

10-69

979*

10-24

10-63

9-33*

9-98

1908 .

10-69

9-91

10-30

1 10-69

9-85

10-27

Station E.5 is situated in Lat. 49° 6' N., Long. 6° 32' W. ; i.e. about 50 miles to the

southward of the Scilly Isles.
Station E.6 is situated in Lat. 50° 24' N., Long. 6° 5' W. ; i.e. about 30 miles to the

northward of the Scilly Isles.
The Temperature records are taken from the Bulletin des risultats acquis pendant les

croisieres periodiques. 1902 onwards.
* Sta. E. 1907. V. 14. 50° 35' N. Lat, 6° 14' W. Long., 89 m., worked for E.6.

(about 11 miles further north). Probable surface temp, at E.6. would be

0-4° lower.

[ 407 ]

The Decapoda collected by the " Huxley " from the North
Side of the Bay of Biscay in August, 1906.

By
Stanley Kemp, B.A.

The collection of Decapoda made by the Hmdey during her short
cruise on the north side of the Bay of Biscay is an extensive one ; it
comprises no less than forty-nine species — a number which speaks
well for the efficiency of the gear employed.

Although, as might' be expected, the majority of the species obtained
are well-known members of the N.E. Atlantic fauna, the material
presents many points of interest. Five species not hitherto known
to extend south of the British Isles were found by the Huxley, and
in several cases important additions have been made to our knowledge
■of the bathymetric range.

A specimen which has been tentatively referred to Periclimenes
Komi (Lo Bianco) is of the greatest possible interest, for no deep-
water representative of the family Paltemonidse was hitherto known
from the N.E. Atlantic. Unfortunately, the species is represented only
by a fragment of a single individual ; this is particularly irritating,
for the collection, as a whole, is in a remarkably good state of pre-
servation.

No close comparison can be made between the species in the
present collection and those found by the Caudan in 1895, for the
latter expedition worked considerably to the south of the area investi-
gated by the Huxhy ; nevertheless, two species, Sjjongicola Kochleri
and Uroptychus Bouvicri, which were first described from material
obtained by the Caudan, have again been found. Until now, both
these forms were known only from the type specimens.

My thanks are due to Dr. E. J. Allen for the opportunity of
-examining this interesting collection.

NEW SERIES.— VOL. VIII. xo. 5. March. 1910. 2 F

408 THE DECAPODA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

DECAPODA NATANTIA.

PEN-SIDEA.

Sergestid^.

Sergestes arcticus, Kroyer.

Station VIII. Surface. Many, 9-22 mm.*
„ X. Surface. One, very small.

XII. 246 fathoms. Five, 29-35 mm.

The majority of the specimens only measure from 9 to 15 mm. in
length, and the largest (35 mm.) is not half grown. The examples
from St. XII were prohably caught in midwater during the ascent of
the net.

STENOPIDEA.

Stenopid^.
Spongicola f Koehleri, Caullery.

Station XIII. 412 fathoms. Twenty-three, 25-46 mm., and several
very young, about 8 mm.

Prior to the date of the Huxley's cruise, this interesting species
was known only from five specimens dredged in the Bay of Biscay in
770 fathoms by the Caudan expedition. The additional examples,
while in the main confirming the accuracy of Caullery's J description,
show a very considerable amount of variation in the spinulation of
the carapace and certain appendages. This variation is indeed so great
that no specimen in the collection exhil )its precisely the same armature
on both sides of its body. The following notes indicate the numbers
of spines and spinules observed in some of the more important
positions.

The rostrum bears from 6 to 9 teeth on its dorsal aspect. Ventrally
there are two ridges (for the rostrum is triangular in section), each of
which is furnished with from to 4 spinules. Occasionally the fore-
most spinule is median in position owing to the confluence of the two
ridges near the apex. The rounded antero-inferior angle of the
carapace bears from 1 to 4 short spines, and from 1 to 4 are situated
on the lateral face of the carapace a little behind the margin. At the

* The measurements of all the Natantia mentioned in this paper were taken from the
tip of the rostrum to the apex of the telson.

t Bouvier (Mem. Mus. Com]). Zool., Harvard, XXVII, 3, 1909, p. 264) gives a useful
table for the discrimination of the five species comprised in this genus.

J " Schizopodes et Decapodesde la Campagne du Caudan." Ann. Univ. Lyon, XW I,.
1895, p. 382.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY IN AUGUST, 1906. 409

base of the rostrum on either side there are from to 3 spines, while
the posterior margin of the gastric groove may be wholly unarmed or
may be provided with as many as twelve spinules. There are from
2 to 5 spinules, often blunt and inconspicuous, on tlie outer margin of
the antennal scale, and from 4 to 14 on either side of the telson.
There may also be one or two stout spines on the internal margin of
the merus of third pereiopod.

The eyes, as Caullery has observed, are devoid of black pigment,
except for an annular band at the proximal edge of the cornea. The
small and rudimentary exopod which Spence Bate has figured * at the
base of the third maxillipede of Spongicola venusta is not found in
S. Koehhri.

The Hii.rley, like the Caudan, obtained several very young
specimens of this species. Those in the present collection measure
about 8 mm. in length and evidently represent the earliest free-living
stage, for some remain curled up as though still within the eggshell.
The rostrum and all the appendages of the cephalothorax are well
developed in these specimens, while the eyes are just as deficient in
pigmentation as they are in the adult. The pereiopods are fully
segmented, and chela? are present on the first three pairs, those of the
third pair being very noticeable owing to their large size. Conspicuous
exopods are retained on the first three pairs. The pleopods are well
formed, but the.uropods are not yet free and the telson is slightly
emarginate distally.

An ovigerous female was found to be carrying sixty-two eggs.

As in the case of the type specimens, the examples of *S^. Kochleri
collected by the Huxley were living in the sponge RegadreUa
phmnix ; as a rale a single individual was found inside each sponge.

CARIDEA.

Pasiph^id.^.

Pasiphae sivado (Eisso).

Station VIII. Surface. Many, 35-55 mm.

„ IX. 240 fathoms. Eight, 59-69 mm.

„ X. Surface. Many, 8-26 mm.

XII. 246 fathoms. Twenty-nine, 21-40 mm.

XIII. 412 fathoms. Two, 40 and 58 mm.

Only once previously has this species been recorded from depths
exceeding 400 fathoms : by Adensamer, from 543 fathoms in the
Mediterranean.

* Challenger Report, 1888, PI. XXIX, Fig. i".

410 THE DECAPODA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

Pasiphae princeps, Smith.

Station XII. 246 fatiioms. One, 69 mm.

This solitary individual is specifically identical with a number of
specimens found off the west coast of Ireland. These, although
differing in certain features from the original description, have been
determined as P. princeps. Smith, a species closely allied to P. tarda^
Kroyer, but extending much further south.

P. princeps had not hitherto been found in as little as 246 fathoms.

PANDALIDiE.

Pandalus leptocerus, Smith, var. Bonnieri, Caullery.
Station IX. 240 fathoms. Twenty-six, 35-ca. 110 mm.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. Thirty-three, 25-98 mm.

Pandalus propinquus, G. 0. Sars.

Station VII. 444 fathoms. Nineteen, 27-70 mm.
IX. 240 fathoms. Eight, 27-34 mm.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. Fifteen, 18-35 mm.
„ XIII. 412 fathoms. Thirteen, 31-ca. 75 mm.
P. -propinquus had not previously been recorded as far south as the
Bay of Biscay.

Plesionika martia (A. Milne-Edwards).
Station XII. 246 fathoms. Five ; one perfect, 90 mm.
(?) „ XIII. 412 fathoms. One, large, in very bad condition.
The large individual from Station XIII cannot be satisfactorily
determined. It appears to have been swallowed by a fish and partially

digested.

Pandalina brevirostris (Eathke).

Station IX. 240 fathoms. Three, 21-25 mm.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. Thirty, 12-25 mm.

Several of the female specimens are ovigerous.

HlPPOLYTID^.

Hippolyte varians, Leach.

Station II. 75 fathoms. One, 17 mm. ; an ovigerous female.

Caridion Gordoni (Spence Bate).
Station IX. 240 fathoms. Four, 16-21 mm.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. Eiglit, 14-18-5 mm.

Tlie rostra of these specimens bear from six to nine teeth above
and from one to three below.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY IN AUGUST, 1906. 411

C. Gordoni was not previously known to the south of the Britisli
Isles, and hitherto had not been trawled in depths exceeding 200
fathoms.

Processid^.

Processa canaliculata, Leach.
Station II. 75 fathoms. Two, 26 and 30 mm.
,, Y. 109 fathoms. Seventy -six, 21-50 mm.

Two of the specimens have abnormal eyes. The cornea on one
side is well developed and of the usual size, whereas that on the other
side is much smaller with, in one case, a curious swelling on the inner
face of the stalk. The rostrum of the latter specimen is also unusually
short, and is not furnished with its full complement of sette.

Pal.^monid^.
Periclimenes Korni? Lo Bianco.

Station XIII. 412 fathoms. Fragment.

The rostrum of this specimen is broken off at the base, and the
whole of the abdomen is missing. This is particularly unfortunate, for
the specimen is, as far as I am aware, the only deep-water Palaemonid
which has been found in the North-East Atlantic. It appears to be
most closely allied to the imperfectly described Periclimenes (Anchistia)
Komi (Lo Bianco),* found near Capri in about 600 fathoms, but is
considerably larger and differs from the Italian author's figure in the
lengths of various segments of the pereiopods.

The carapace measures 7 mm. from the back of the orbit to the
hinder margin of the carapace ; it is therefore probable that the
specimen was originally more than twice as long as the types of
P. Korni, which were only 13-15 mm. in total length.

The rostrum is broken, but four dorsal teeth are present on the
anterior third of the carapace behind the orbital notch. The dorsal
carina is clear and distinct for three-quarters the length of the cara-
pace, fading away further back. Both hepatic and antennal spines are
present. The eyes are deeply pigmented and the cornea is wider than
the stalk. The outer antennular flagellum is split into two rami, the
inner one (which is also the thicker) being slightly longer than the
fused basal part. The lamellar portion of the antennal scale is
produced acutely at its inner distal angle, and reaches considerably
beyond the stout spine which terminates the straight outer margin.

The first pair of pereiopods reaches beyond the apex of the
antennal scale by the whole length of the propodus ; the merus and

* Lo Bianco. Mltf. Zoo. Stat. Neaj^cJ, 1903, p. 250, tav. 7, fig. 1-3.

412 THE DECAPODA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FKOM THE

carpus are nearly equal in length, each being about one and a half
times as long as the chela. The second pair is characterised by the
very long but comparatively slender chela, which is twice the length
of the merus. The carpus is very short, about one-third the length of
the merus, and the dactyl us is half the length of the palm. The
dactylus is strongly curved and sharply pointed apically ; it bears a
prominent longitudinal carina on either side and a sharp tooth in-
ternally in the middle of its basal third. The fixed finger is carinate
along its internal aspect only, and bears, in its basal third, two teeth,
lietween which the dactylar tooth fits when the claw is closed. In the
last three pairs of pereiopods the propodus is slightly longer than
the merus, the carpus is three-fifths the length of the propodus, and
the dactylus is very short, simple, curved, and claw-like.

Crangonid.^.

Crangon Allmanni, Kinahan.

Station II. 75 fathoms. Nine, 18-26 mm.

V. 109 fathoms. Many, 14-25 mm.

XL 146 fathoms. Many, 12-27 mm.

The capture of this species on the north side of the Bay of Biscay
in 146 fathoms establishes new records both for its horizontal and
bathymetric distribution. G. AUmanni had not hitherto been found
south of the British Isles, and was not previously known from depths
exceeding 100 fathoms.

The small size of the specimens seems to indicate that the species
is unable to attain its maximum development in deep water.

Philocheras* echinulatus, M. Sars.
Station IX. 240 fathoms. Forty-eight, 14-34 mm.
,, XII. 246 fathoms. Many, 14-35 mm.

This species was not previously known as far south as the Bay
of Biscay.

Philocheras bispinosus, Hailstone, var. neglectus, G. 0, Sars.

Station II. 75 fathoms. Two, 11*5 mm.

These two specimens show no trace of the brown pigment which is
sometimes such a prominent feature of the var. neglectus when living.
The surface of the carapace and abdomen is, however, without trace of
tubercles, and is pitted with microscopic punctuations exactly as in the
forms with transverse brown bands.

* Philocheras, Stebbiiig, no7n, nov. vice Cheraphilus.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY IN AUGUST, 1906. 413

P. hispinosus var. ncglcctHS had not hitlierto been recorded from as
far south as the Bay of Biscay nor from as much as 75 fathoms. The
typical form is, liowever, known to extend to the Azores and has been
found off the west coast of Ireland in as much as 200 fathoms.

iEgeon Lacazei (Gourret).
Station IX. 240 fathoms. Fourteen, 19-5-28 mm.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. Eight, 20-25 mm.

This scarce species is closely allied to the common Mediterranean
form A. cataphractus. It was originally described by Gourret from
specimens found in the vicinity of Marseilles, and since then twelve
examples have been trawled off the west coast of Ireland between
160 and 374 fathoms.

Pontophilus spinosus (Leach).
Station IX. 240 fathoms. Seven, 28-38 mm.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. Three, 9-12 mm.

Pontophilus norvegicus, M. Sars.
Station XII. 246 fathoms. Three, 13-17 mm.

DECAPODA KEPTANTIA.

ERYONIDEA.

Eryonid.e.
Polycheles typhlops, Heller.
Station XII. 246 fathoms. Two, 29 mm.

SCYLLARIDEA.

Palinurid.e.
" Phyllosoina" (larva).
Station VIII. Surface. Two.

GALATHEIDEA.

Uroptychid-e.

Uroptychus rubrovittatus (A. Milne-Edwards).

Station VII. 444 fathoms. Foiir, 15-30 mm.*
XII. 412 fathoms. One, 19 mm.

* The measuremcBts of all the Galatheidea mentioned in this paper were taken from
tlie apex of the rostrum to the extremity of the telson, with the abdomen stretched out in
maerurous fashion.

414 THE DECAPODA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FROM THE

Uroptychus nitidus var. concolor (A. Milne-Edwards).
Station XIII. 412 fathoms. One, 30 mm.

Uroptychus Bouvieri, Caulleiy.

Station XIII. 412 fathoms. Three, 14-5-22 mm.

This is the first time this species has been recorded since it was
described by Caullery.* The type specimens, two males, were found
by the Caudan expedition between 218 and 273 fathoms.

Two of the examples collected by the Huxley are ovigerous
females, and measure 22 and 20'5 mm. from the tip of the rostrum to
the apex of the telson ; the third is a male, 14'5 mm. in length. The
first pereiopods measure 26, 24, and 23"5 mm. respectively, thus
showing that this limb is much more strongly developed in the male
than in the female.

Little can be added to Caullery's careful description. The small
median denticle behind the base of the rostrum is absent in all the
specimens, the lateral spines on the carapace vary in number from five
to six, and the antennal scale reaches to two-thirds the length of the
rostrum, and is narrower at its base than in the figure of the type.
The notch in the sternal plaston is, in the female, rectangular in shape,
and considerably deeper than in the male.

Only four longitudinal rows of spines can be found on the merus
and carpus of the first pereiopod, and the internal edge of the propodus
of the same limb is upturned and denticulate proximally and is
separated from the smooth dorsal surface by a well-defined groove.

The eggs, which appear to be on the point of hatching, measure
about 1"5 mm in length.

Gastroptychus formosus (A. M.-Edw. and Bouvier).
Station VII. 444 fathoms. One, IS mm.

„ XIII. 412 fathoms. Two, 21 and 38 mm.

One of the specimens from Station XIII is an ovigerous female.

Galatheid^.
Galathodes tridentatus (Esmark).
Station VII. 444 fathoms. Twenty-four, 6'5-28 mm.

„ XIII. 412 fathoms. Four, 18-20 mm.
Nine females are ovigerous.

" Schizopodea et Di'capodes de la Canijiagne du Caudan," Aivn. Univ. Lyon, XXVI,
1895, p. 394.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAV OF BISCAY IN AUGUST, 1000. 415

Galathea nexa, Enibleton.

Station ir. 75 fathoms. Two, 16 and 23 mm.

,, V. 109 fathoms. One small ; Ijroken.

„ Xr. 146 fathoms. Six, 10-21 mm.

,, XII. 246 fathoms. Two, 15 and 18 nun.

Compared with Bonnier's figures the third niaxillipede in these
specimens bears a closer resemblance to G. dispersa than to G. nexa.
Recent autliors are, however, agreed that these two forms are merely
variations of a single species, and although the form known as dispersa
is far the commoner, yet this name must lapse in favour of ne,va,
which has priority.*

Munida barnffica (Pennant).
Station IX. 240 fatlioms. Two, 24 and 33 nun.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. Four, 25-33 mm.
„ XIII. 412 fatlioms. One, 23 mm.
Although the specimens are small, they all present the scaly
appearance on the thoracic sternum which so readily separates this
species from its close ally Munida tcnvimana*

PAGURIDEA.

Pagurid^.
Eupagurus bernhardus (Linn.).

Station II. 75 fathoms. One, very small.

Eupagurus Prideauxi (Leach).

Station II. 75 fathoms. Five.
,, y. 109 fathoms. Four.
„ VI. 87 fathoms. One.

In the largest specimen, which is an ovigerous female from
Station VI, the carapace measures 15 mm. in length.

Eupagurus variabilis, A. M.-Edw. and Bou\ier.
Station IX. 240 fathoms. Twenty -six.
„ XI. 146 fathoms. Sixteen.
„ XII. 246 fathoms. Twelve.
„ XIII. 412 fathoms. One.

The largest example, taken at Station IX, measures 62 mm. from
tlie hinder margin of the cephalothorax to the distal extremity of the
large chela. All the specimens are typical in form with the exception
of two, in which the propodus of the right chela is slightly excavate.

* V. Hansen, Danish Ingolf Malacost race , 1908, y>\k 31 uiiJ 32.

416 THE DECAPODA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY " FKOM THE

Eupagurus carneus, Pocock,
Station VIT. 444 fathoms. One.
„ XIII. 412 fathoms. Two.
The largest specimen measures only 28 mm. from the hinder
margin of the cephalothorax to the distal extremity of the large chela.

Anapagurus Isevis (W. Tliompson).

Station II.

75 fathoms. Seven.

„ V.

109 fathoms. Twenty-two.

„ IX.

240 fathoms. Two.

„ XI.

146 fathoms. Six.

„ XII.

246 fathoms. Four.

OXYSTOMATA.

DOKIPPID^.

Cymonomus granulatus (Norman).

Station XII. 246 fathoms. One, 4 mm.*

Leucosiid.e.
Ebalia tuberosa (Pennant).

Station V. 109fatlioms. One, 12*5 mm.

This species does not seem to have been recorded hitherto from as
much as 109 fathoms.

Ebalia tumefacta (Montagu).
Station II. 75 fathoms. One, 7 mm.

„ V. 109 fathonis. Two, 8 and 8-5 mm.

Ebalia nux, Norman.
Station V. 109 fatlioms. One, 7-5 mm.

„ IX. 240 fathoms. Eight, 6-5-8-5 mm.

,, XI. 146 fathoms. Three, 7-7-5 mm.

„ XII. 412 fathoms. 7-8 mm.
Several of the specimens are ovigerous females.

BRACHYGNATHA.

PORTUNID.-E.

Portunus holsatus, Fabricius.
Station II. 75 fathoms. Eighteen, 10-5-18 mm.
V. 109 fathoms. Tliree, 6-5-8-5 mm.

* Length of eaiajiace.

NORTH SIDE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY IN AUGUST, 1906, -417

The specimens are all very young, but in my opinion they can be
referred with safety to this species. Hitherto P. holsatus has not
been recorded from depths exceeding 70 fathoms.

Portunus pusillus. Leach.

Station V. 109 fathoms. Eighteen, 5-9 mm.

It is with some doubt that these small specimens are referred to
F. pusillus. The median frontal tooth is, in several instances, not
more advanced than the lateral, but it is probable that with growth
this feature would become more apparent.

Portunus tuberculatus, Koux.

Station III. 75 fathoms. Two, 27 and 29 mm.
„ V. 109 fatlioms. Three, 17-21 mm.

„ VI. 87 fathoms. Three, 21-22 mm.

Polybius Henslowi, Leach.
Station II. 75 fathoms. One, 36 mm.

Bathynectes superba (Costa).

Station VII. 444 fathoms. Two; one 11 mm., one broken.
,, IX. 240 fathoms. Seven, about 5-5 mm.

„ XII. 246 fathoms. Fifty-three ; one large and very macerated,

the rest 5-6 mm.
,, XIII. 412 fathoms. Four.

In the small specimens the form of the carapace resembles Bouvier's
figure * of an individual 4'5 mm. in length ; the frontal margin is four-
lobed, the second and fourth antero-lateral spines are extremely short,
while the fifth is not specially longer than the third. In the two
large specimens from Station XIII the hindmost spines of the antero-
lateral series are very long ; they measure 50 and 46 mm. in breadth
without these spines, while, including them, they measure 84 and
80 mm.

Geryon sp. ?

Station XII. 246 fathoms. One, broken, 5 mm.

Atelecyclid.e.
Atelecyclus septemdentatus (Montagu).
Station II. 75 fathoms. Two, 15 and 17 mm.

* Boiivier, He's. Camp. Sci. Monaco, XIII, 1899, PI. II, lig. 1.

418 the decapoda collected by the " huxley " from the

Maiid^*:.
Inachus dorsettensis (Pennant).

Station V. 109 fathoms. Four, 13-18 mm.
„ VI. 87 fathoms. Two, 19 and 20 mm.

Inachus leptochirus, Leach.

Station II. 75 fathoms. Sixteen, 12-22 mm.
„ VI. 87 fathoms. Five, 18-22 mm.
„ XI. 146 fathoms. Two, 9 and 12*5 mm.

Stenorhynchus longirostris (Fabricius).

Station II. 75 fathoms. Twelve, 10-20 mm.
„ V. 109 fathoms. Two, 9-5 and 17*5 mm.
„ IX. 240 fathoms. One, 22 mm.

Lispognathus Thomsoni (Xorman).

Station VII. 444 fathoms. One, 7 mm.
„ XIII. 412 fathoms. Four, 4-7 mm.

Ergasticus Clouei, A. Milne-Edwards.

Station V. 109 fathoms. One, 8 mm.
„ IX. 240 fathoms. One, 11 mm.

„ XII. 246 fathoms. Four, 9-18 mm.

Hyas coarctatus, Leach.
Station VI. 87 fathoms. One, 26 mm.

NORTH 81DE OF THE BAY OF BISCAY IN AUGUST, 1900. 419

?' ,vi ^ .

r-l r- CO ^N

1^ «o to

"^ : CN "^ CO .-^ "^^ CO **

c« 00 CO CO (N

«) o N

■CO • iii CO -CO

rH»^ :

t-t

■-^rt

: : • : C5 • •

?►

f~|.

■ S

• M ■ Oi ■ fM

>^l-] fa

C O

^ ^ _ „

o 2 £ jg-H'

— - ^ 'Eij

to o :a; -D 2 "^ ^ '" —

vr c ~ E"^ 'C •■=• 't; ~^

2- ? '3 "5 5 5 2 5 2^'n
o c^ce cite ---5 cs::; cs

I i> rt ^ to •-- 5^

&- 9 > 2 £ S
o r o ^ S t<

y. J- rt OT CO

-. -3 4) OJ I— 1 ^ _3

'^ s' J J S -2 -2
j^ c5 ^ •:: tc c fl

(U f ,S -S M o o

-.-1=0

_; 03 s 3 3 3 o

** >. '^ &■ c« G413

ei< ,i*#i o o o iS

« O N~ ~ ^ ^ eg

420

THE DECAPODA COLLECTED BY THE " HUXLEY.

1- CO o

CCo (M

; <M ■* ^ : -^

r-, : ^

I— I

O
I— I
H
<^
H
cc

H
P

1—1

: : gi : ^ o^ ^ c c^ „

rl< • 7<1 • rt

• (>] . r-l O

I-H • ^

!M I ;t; ;,'

.PJ

^n7

a'n

2 "t^

S c

>A^A

eS St; oj "p c3

a) C "^ '^ '^
2 c3 en aj CO
,^

53 S.2 3 •

OJ ^ <D > g

a> 2 53

^ MS,

S a ^ S X^ A^-i

TS o3 t. - C •

■73 .JS

cfl

S C §

-^ CO H

,___3:2SbOS

I .rj 'g 60 60 sc 60 ^ ;; «« «3

> -^J '^^ rA f^ r^ r^ ZL^ ^-' *^ * ^^

^ CO CO CO .-,
S D a a 2

a-^-o^

cS «3 C a^S

c3 rt rt cd

■ >55

~ t: t: ^-m w^ 5

1^ Ch 0, c^ 33 ;:5 <; ►

^— " o C &,§> c4

[ 421 ]

On the Artificial Culture of Marine Plankton
Organisms.

By
E. J. Allen, D.Sc,

Director of Laboratories and Secretary to the Council of the Marine Biological Association,

and

E. W. Nelson,

Assistant Naturalist.

Introduction ....
I. Cultuie of Plankton Diatoms

A. Practical Culture Methods

1. Miquel's Method

2. Houghton Gill's Method

3. [a) Modification of Miquel's Method.
[h) English Channel Water .

(d) Animal-Cliarcoal Water .

(e) Peroxide of Hydrogen Water
(/) Cultures in these Media .

B. Experiments with a view to Determining

the successful Culture of Diatoms

Methods

The Sea-water employed

The Constituents of Miquel's Solutions

Animal Charcoal and Peroxide of Hydroge

Reviving Exhausted Cultures

Silica

Organic Infusions

Artificial Sea-water

Alkalinity .

Salinity

Light

Temperature

General Conclusions
II. Mixed Cultures
III. Notes on particular species of Diatoms, on their

on other Algte occurring in Cultures
IV. Rearing of Marine Larv;i3
Methods
Echinus acutus .
E. esculentus
E. miliaris
Cucumaria saxicola
Pomatoceros triqueter
C'haetopterus variopedatns .
Sabellaria alveolata
Archidoris tuberculuta

' Miquel Sea-water

the Conditions which underlie

methods of Reproduction, and

PAGE

422
423
423

423
426
427
429
430
431
434
435

436
437
437
438
443
443
444
445
446
447
453
453
454
455
457

460
464
464
466
466
467
467
468
468
469
469

422 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

PAGE

Calanus finmarchicus ...... 470

Echinus hybrid ....... 470

Saccnlina carcini ...... 470

Suiumary of jAIethod for Rearing Larv£e .... 471

Bibliography ........ 472

Introduction. The observations to be recorded in tliis Paper were
commenced in March, 1905. They originated in an attempt to find a
general method for rearing marine larval forms. Several investigators
liad previously succeeded in rearing Echinoderms, Molluscs, and Poly-
chfetes from artificially fertilized eggs under laboratory conditions,
but the process was generally difficult and the results more or less
uncertain. The most promising method seemed to be that adopted by
Caswell Grave (26), who was able to rear his larvae by feeding them
on diatoms. Grave obtained his diatoms by placing sand, collected
from the sea bottom, in aquaria and using such diatoms as developed
from this material. All the methods, however, suffered from the
uncertainty of not knowing what organisms were introduced into the
aquaria in which the larvse were to be reared, either in the original
sea-water or along with the food-supply.

It appeared, therefore, at an early stage of the work, worth while
to make an attempt to carry out rearing experiments on a more
definite and precise plan, to endeavour, in fact, to introduce the larvae
to be reared into sterile sea-water, and to feed them with pure cultures
of a suitable food. This was the ideal to be aimed at. As a matter
of fact, it has seldom, if ever, been attained in practice ; nevertheless
a considerable measure of success has been achieved by working upon
these lines, and during the course of the work innumerable problems
relating to the physical conditions under which plankton organisms can
best flourish have presented themselves. Some account of the experi-
ments made may be of interest to other workers, although many of
the problems raised are not yet solved, notwithstanding the fact that
some 1500 cultural experiments have been under observation. It is
rather with a view of stimulating other work upon similar lines, tlian
of bringing forward conclusive results, that this paper is being
published.

In the summer of 1907, Mr. E. W. Nelson became associated with
the investigation, and since that date the experimental work has been
carried out by him. The discussions in this paper of a more chemical
character, particularly the section on alkalinity, are almost entirely the
work of Mr. Nelson, and we have both had throughout the advantage
of the constant advice and help of Mr. D. J. Matthews on all such
matters.

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 423

I. CULTUEE OF PLANKTON DIATOMS.
A. Practical Culture Methods.

1. Miqucl's Method. Attention was first directed to the culture of
Plankton diatoms ; and the methods, which had been elaborated by
Miquel (11) for fresh-water diatoms and had been found by him to
succeed with marine-bottom diatoms, were tried.

The essential features of Miquel's method, as applied to marine
diatoms, are as follows : —

Two solutions are prepared : —

Solution A.

Magnesium sulphate .....
Sodium chloride ......

10 grm.
10 „

Sodium sulphate .......

Ammonium nitrate .....

5 „
1 „

Potassium nitrate .....

2 „

Sodium nitrate

2 „

Potassium bromide .....

0-2 „

Potassium iodide ......

0-1 „

Water .......

100 „

Solution B.*

Sodium phosphate .....
Calcium chloride (dry) ....

4 grm
4 „

Hydrochloric acid .....

t 2 cc.

Ferric chloride

t2 „

Water

80 „

Forty drops of Solution A and 10 to 20 drops of Solution B are
added to each 1000 cc. of sea-water, and the sea-water is sterilized by
keeping it at 70° C. for about 20 minutes.

According to Miquel it is also necessary to add "organic nutritive
material in the form of bran, straw, or filaments of weed such as
Zostera. Macerations of these should be made up separately, some
time before they are required for use, and should be carefully filtered
and sterilized. Organic matter must, however, be used very sparingly,

* '* The preparation of Solution A presents no difficulty ; Solution B should be made up
as follows : To the Sodium phosphate dissolved in 40 cc. of water are added first the 2 cc.
of Hydrochloric acid, then the 2 cc. of hydrous Ferric chloride and then the 4 grm. of
Calcium chloride dissolved in 40 cc. of water, taking care to shake the mixture, which
I call Phospho-ferro-calcic solution. The addition of this last solution to the maceration
throws down a slight brownish flocculent precipitate, formed for the most part of Ferric
oxide, which should be carefully separated from the liquid used for cultivations."

t " Acid chlorhydrique pur ^ 22\" Presumably meaning degrees Baume = sp. gr. l'I69.

:!: •' Perchlorure de fer liquide a 45''." As above = sp. gr. 1'421.

NEW SEIUE3. — VOL. VIII. NO. 5. MaUCH, 1910. 2 G

424 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

or else putrefaction will set in and the cultures will be irrevocably lost."
As a matter of fact, we have found that such organic infusions are
unnecessary, when dealing with plankton diatoms, and it has not been
our practice to employ them (cf., however, p. 445).

Miquel obtained cultures of single species of diatoms either by
picking out individual diatoms under the microscope and introducing
them into the prepared water, or by adding a small quantity of water
containing a mixture of diatoms and other organisms to some prepared
water, and subdividing this into a number of tubes. If the subdivision
has been carried out sufficiently some of the tubes may contain one
kind of diatom only, from which fresh cultures can be made. In this
way, by repeated subdivision, cultures can be obtained which, by
inoculating fresh quantities of prepared water from time to time,
may, with care, be maintained indefinitely. Such cultures, however,
must practically always contain bacteria, and Miquel distinguishes
them from bacteria-free cultures, which he terms " Cultures des Dia-
tomees a I'etat de purete absolue." The latter he found very difficult
to obtain, but, through repeated washing in sterile water, followed by
fractional subdivision, he succeeded in getting some in which he could
find no trace of bacteria by ordinary bacteriological methods (cf. Miquel
11, p. 155 ; cf. also Kichter, 16-18).

We propose to call any diatom culture, which can be carried on
practically indefinitely by inoculating fresh supplies of prepared
water, a '^persistent" culture, the terra '"imre" culture being reserved for
cultures which can be proved to contain not more than one organism.
We are not satisfied that we have yet succeeded in obtaining cultures
of the latter kind. For the most part our persistent cultures contain
one species of diatom only, and are free from all organisms larger than
small flagellates.

In our earlier experiments with plankton diatoms, we obtained per-
sistent cultures, containing a single species of diatom, by both of the
methods recommended by Miquel. We, however, have rarely succeeded
by picking out single diatoms or chains of diatoms, for although we
have passed the selected diatom through several changes of sterilized
sea-water, the resulting cultures, even when the diatoms have multiplied
to some extent, have generally shown evidence of contamination by
harmful organisms, and have soon died down. Only in one of the
earliest experiments, and in one more recent, has complete success
resulted. In the first case a small chain of six or eight frustules
of Skeletonema costatum, picked out in April, 1905, gave rise to a
culture which still persists (Nov., 1909). Subcultures can still be
obtained even from tlie original flask inoculated in April, 1905. In the

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 425

second case a chain of 8 or 9 cells of Ghaetoceras densum, picked out
from a Petri dish culture, has given a particularly good growth.

The method of dilution and subdivision has been more successful
and persistent cultures of a number of species have been obtained in
this way.

A more ready method of obtaining the cultures is, we have found,
to add one or two drops of plankton to, say, 250 cc. of a suitable sterile
culture medium, and to pour this into shallow glass dishes (Petri
dishes). The dishes should be placed in a position as free as possible
from vibration, and where they can be easily examined with a lens
in sttiL The temperature should be kept as constant as possible and
the dishes exposed to light of moderate intensity, direct sunlight
being avoided. In the course of a few days, colonies of diatoms of
different species will be seen at different spots on the bottom
of the Petri dishes. These can be picked out with a fine pipette
and transferred to flasks containing fresh culture medium. The
colonies should be picked out from the Petri dishes at as early
a stage as possible, because if left too long some one organism,
a diatom or a flagellate, may have multiplied so rapidly that the
whole of the water in the dish becomes infected with it. In this case
persistent cultures of a single species would not be obtained. The
above method is similar to one described by Miquel, excepting that he
placed gelatinous silica at the bottom of the vessel. Some very
successful persistent cultures were obtained from the following experi-
ment, which will serve to illustrate the method : — A sample of plankton,
from a very fine-mesh bolting-silk tow-net, was diluted down with
sterile sea-water, until a single drop examined under a two-thirds-inch
objective contained on an average ten organisms, chiefly diatoms of
various species. Petri dishes (4 in.), containing 60 cc. each of Miquel
sea-water, were then inoculated with various numbers of drops of the
diluted plankton. The two dishes, to which two and three drops
respectively were added, gave the best results ; and from these per-
sistent cultures of several species of diatoms were obtained Hence
we may conclude that the most advantageous number of single cells or
short chains of cells to be added to a 4 in. Petri dish, containing 60 cc.
culture medium, is about 20 to 30.

We have succeeded in obtaining the following species of Plankton
diatoms in persistent cultures : —

Asterionella japonica, Cleve.
Biddulplda mohiliensis (Bail.), Grun.
BiddvJpliia rcfjia (M. Schultze).*

* See pp. 461.

426 ON THE AKTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.'

Chcctoccrris densiim, Cleve.

Chcctoccras dccipiens, Cleve.

Chcetoceras constridum, Gran.

Cocconcis scutellum, Ehr. var. minutissima, Grun.

Coscinodiscus exccntricus, Ehr.^

Coscinodiscus Granii, Goush.

Dityliiim BrightweUii (West), Grun.

Landcria horcalis, Gran.

Nitzschia clostcrinm, W. Sm.

Nitzschia dosterimn^. ^m.., forma minutissima.

Nitzsdiia seriata, Cleve.

Rhizosolcnia stolterfothii, H. Perag.

Skdetonema costatum (Grev.)

Streptotheca thamensis, Shrubs.

T/ialassiosira deciijiens, Grun.*

It is hardly necessary to add that in dealing with tliese cultures^
similar precautions to those used in bacteriological work must be
taken, all vessels and instruments being carefully sterilized before they
are brought into contact with the prepared sea-water. The cultures
are best made in small, wide-mouthed flasks, which may be plugged
with cotton wool, or simply covered with watch-glasses. The flasks.
should be kept at as uniform a temperature as possible (from 12°-17°
C.) and should be exposed to strong daylight, direct sunlight being
avoided. A flask should not be more than half filled with culture
fluid, so that the surface exposed to the air may be large in pro-
portion to the volume of fluid.

Other Methods. The addition of the solutions devised by Miquel ta
sea-water has in all cases given us good cultures of diatoms, and the
method is certain in its action. We have, however, made numerous
experiments by treating sea-water in other ways, with a view to
finding out what are the best conditions under which plankton
diatoms will grow, and of arriving at some explanation of the action
of the different salts contained in Miquel's solutions.

2. Hoiighton Gill's Method. H. Houghton Gill (5), a contemporary
of Miquel, made use of a culture medium not essentially difl'erent
from that employed by the latter. Unfortunately he died before pub-
lishing his work, but an account of his principal results is given by
Van Heurck. In his final method Houghton Gill made use of four
distinct solutions, as follows : —

* See p. 460.

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 427

Solution 1.

Crystallized sodium phosphate
Calcium chloride
Syrup of iron chloride .
Strong hydrochloric acid
Water ....

Solution 2.

Crystallized magnesium sulphate
„ sodium sulphate

„ potassium nitrate

Common salt (sodium chloride)

Potassium bromide

Potassium iodide .

Water ....

Solution 3.

Crystallized sodium carbonate
Water ....

Solution 4.

Well-washed, precipitated calcium silicate
Water

'1 grm

0-5

))

100

])

))

0-2

))

0-2

100

))

100

))

All the salts employed must be chemically pure. Three cc. of each
of these liquids are added to 1000 cc. of fresh water or sea-water
(according to circumstances), and the whole sterilized. In his earlier
work Houghton Gill added a sterilized infusion of grass or of diatoms,
but it is not clear from the accounts whether this was still employed
with the above solutions. We have obtained very good cultures with
the above solutions, to which we did not add any organic infusion.

3 (a). Modification of MiqueVs method. " Miquel Sea-vjater."
Since several of the components in Miquel's formula for solution A
(p. 423) are obviously unnecessary, when sea-water is being used as
the basis of the culture-medium, we adopted for our own work the
following modifications : — After some preliminary experiments it was
found, as would be expected from the composition of sea-water, that
the only salts of value to the medium are the three nitrates, KNOo,
NaNOo, NH^NOg, and possibly KBr and KI. The omission of
the two latter was soon found to make no difference. Experiments
also showed that the formula for solution A could, without any
appreciable detriment to results, be further simplified to the one
salt, KNOg, or XaNO^, but not NH^NOo. At first the amount of
KNOg, dissolved in 100 cc. distilled water, used to make the modified
solution A, was the same as the sum of the weights of the nitrates in

428 ON THE AKTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

Miqiiel's own formula,, viz. 5 grm. But later experiments showed
that a considerably greater concentration of KNO3 than this gave
more lasting cultures ; the strength of solution, and amount to be
added to a litre of sea-water, in order to obtain the best results, being
2 cc, 2M, KNO3.

In the case of solution B no modification has been adopted, but it
has been found that small variations in the amounts of the ingredients
used do not affect the results. A convenient method for measuring
the right amount of FeClg is to warm the salt until it just melts in
its own water of crystallization, and to pipette out 2 cc. with a
previously warmed pipette. No temperature corrections need be con-
sidered. Also 2 cc. of the ordinary pure concentrated hydrochloric
acid at room temperature will suffice.

Our own formula for preparing Miquel sea-water is now : —

Solution A.*

Potassium nitrate ....
Distilled Avater ....

Solution B.f

Sodium phosphate (N'a2HP04l2HoO)
Calcium chloride (CaCUBHoO) .
Ferric chloride (melted) ,
Hydrochloric acid (pure, concentrated)
Distilled water ....

To eacli 1000 cc. of sea-water:|: add 2 cc. solution A and 1 cc.
solution B, and sterilize by heating to 70' C. AVhen cool, decant off
the clear liquids from the precipitate, which will have formed when
solution B is added to the sea-water.

As a rule our cultures were made in 60 cc. of this medium, con-
tained in short-necked, wide-mouthed flasks of 125 cc. capacity, so
that the proportion of air-surface to volume of liquid was large.

The medium was found to give constantly satisfactory results. On
inoculation from a persistent culture of such diatoms as Thalassiosira,
Skeletonema, Chaetoceras, etc., a growth visible to the eye is obtained in
about ten days, and then multiplication takes place very rapidly. In
from three weeks to a month's time a very considerable growth will
be seen making a brown, flocculent mass at the bottom and back of
the vessel containing the culture.

* This strength has only been used in the most recent experiments ; and solution A in
this paper, unless otherwise stated, means the iive per cent solution of KNO,.

t For preparing this solution see p. 423.

J " Miquel water " seems to succeed equally well, whether it is made by adding Mi(iuers
solutions to " outside water'' or to " tank water" (cf. p. 437).

20-2 grm
100 „

•I.

-- 2M KXO3

4 „

2 cc.

2cc.

80 cc.

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 429

In from three to four months the culture begins to show signs of
exhaustion and the frustules lose colour, but they do not, as in the case
of sterilized outside and tank water, completely die off. A great
number certainly do die, but some remain in a resting condition, and
often, after a period of six months or so, these begin to multiply again
and the culture regains its former vigour. This is probably due to the
food-stuffs contained in the dead frustules going into solution again,
possibly by means of bacterial action. This periodicity in cultures is
interesting in that it resembles what takes place in the ocean. Cultures
in this medium will persist indefinitely, so far as our experience goes.
The oldest culture in our possession is one of Skeletoncma costahmi,
made at the very commencement of this work, dated April, 1905.
Although the frustules in this culture are quite unrecognizable as
any diatom now, on making a subculture in fresh Miquel a normal and
healthy growth can always be obtained.

In old cultures the diatoms are nearly always found to be very
much deformed, and often appear to be only a mass of broken-down
chromatophores. Whether regeneration can be successfully obtained
from a single chromatophore, which must presumably be contained
within a cell-wall of some kind, has not been definitely decided, but
results seem to point in this direction.

At the start of a culture a tendency to teratological forms is often
exhibited, but when the growth is well advanced, the shape of the
frustules is usually quite normal.

(li) English Channel Water {" Outside Water "). — In a large
number of our experiments sea-water brought in from outside the
Plymouth breakwater, and therefore taken at some distance from the
shore, has been used. This is referred to as " outside water." It has
an average salinity of about 35"0 °l^^, and the temperature range for the
year is from 8° C. to 16° C.

If a sample of " outside water " is inoculated from a persistent
culture of a plankton diatom, a small growth is obtained in from five
to fifteen days. But soon minute bottom forms of diatoms, other
alga;, flagellates, infusoria, etc., appear, and the inoculated species is
lost. The total growth of any form is never large. If the growth of
these foreign forms is prevented by sterilizing the water before
inoculation, a considerably better growth of the plankton form is
obtained. The water was, as a rule, sterilized by simply heating to
70° C, which temperature was found to be quite adequate. Boiling
gave equally good results, but the former was preferred, as less con-
centration due to evaporation took place. Even under these conditions

430 ON THE AETIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

no permanent culture can be obtained, the diatoms soon beginning to
lose colour and getting into an exhausted condition. Death takes
place in from two to three months after the culture has been started,
and in many cases considerably sooner. Long before inability to start
new cultures, the test of death, has been established, the valves appear
on examination quite colourless and practically empty.

Samples of outside water, taken at times when the quantity of
plankton was widely different, gave no appreciable variation in the
results obtained by culture methods. It is, however, doubtful whether
differences in the amounts of growth in cultures, proportional to the
seasonal variation in the quantity of phytoplankton, would be suffi-
ciently marked to be appreciable.

The total growth under cultural conditions, although small for
a culture, is very much greater than any natural plankton that has
come within our experience.

(c) Tanlc-ioater. — " Tank-water " or water taken from the supply of
sea-water circulating through the tanks of the Aquarium at Plymouth,
shows some striking and interesting differences from " outside water."
This water is pumped up from the sea, just below the Laboratory, into
two large, covered-in, settling reservoirs, with a capacity of 50,000 gallons
each. Pumping is only done at high water, spring tides, so as to get
the least contaminated water, and no water is pumped that does riot
show a specific gravity, measured with a hydrometer, of p^^"^ = 26"00
(S = 34*00) or over. The water is allowed to settle for about a fortnight
before being used for the general circulation.

The tanks themselves are made of slate and glass, and the pipes which
convey the sea-water to them are of vulcanite, so that the water does
not come in contact with metal, excepting in the pumps, which are of
cast-iron. The two settling reservoirs are used alternately, for about
a week each. From time to time, tide and water allowing, waste
is replenished, and about twice a year each reservoir is emptied, cleaned
out and refilled. The aquarium takes about 20,000 gallons, and this
is in circulation with one of the two 50,000-gallon reservoirs. An
estimate of the amount of life in the tanks of the aquarium must be
exceedingly rough, but the intensity of the larger forms of life is
far greater than anything met with in natural waters. About 500
fish and 2000 invertebrates, including all forms as large as an Actinia
equina, might be somewhere near the mark. So it will be seen that
the accumulation of excretory products must be a by no means
negligible factor. The flora of the tanks is very restricted, and is
chiefly composed of minute forms of algte. Minute naviculoid diatoms,

ON THE AKTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 431

Edocaiyus, GladiypJiora, Entcromorpha, Vauchcria, and unicellular algfe
are the commonest forms. The large seaweeds, such as Fucus and
Laminaria, do not live long if introduced. Plankton diatoms, although
a great number must be pumped up when the reservoirs are being
filled, are not represented.

As in the case of outside water, a sample of " tank-water," in-
oculated from a persistent culture, will only give a very small growth,
minute forms, etc., soon multiplying and choking out the plankton form.
The ultimate growth of minute unicellular algse other than diatoms is
often considerable, and many quite unknown and unidentified forms
have been obtained. The total growth of vegetable forms is always
found to be greater than in the case of outside water.

In cultures of plankton diatoms made with sterilized tank water,
a very great improvement on outside sterilized water was always
noted. The culture of the diatom used to inoculate this medium
persists for a considerable period, and the colour of the frustules
remains normal for two to three months.

{(l) Aniinal- Charcoal Water. — The use of animal charcoal, as a means
of purifying the water in small aquaria, has for a long time been
known and practised by those who have kept such aquaria in
inland places. At an early stage in our experiments, water from
a tank, which was not in a satisfactory condition, was treated with
some powdered animal charcoal and filtered. It was noticed that
a good growth of diatoms took place in this water. Systematic
experiments with the use of animal charcoal were then conmienced,
and these have resulted in a method of great value, both for the
culture of diatoms and for the rearing of pelagic larvae.

Animal charcoal is made by the carbonization of bones,* and is
«old in two grades known as "pure" and "commercial." Our earlier
experiments were all made with " pure " animal charcoal, but
subsequently the " commercial " animal charcoal was largely used and
appears to give equally good, if not better results. In both cases the
animal charcoal is used in the powdered form. Animal-charcoal water
is prepared as follows : —

1. A quantity of sea-water is sterilized by heating it in a fiask to

* Analysis of Animal Charcoal, from Thorpe's Dictionary of Applied Chcviistnj : —
Carbon . . . . . . . 10"51

Ca., Mg. phosjihates, Ca. fluoride, etc. . SO "21
Calcium carbonate ..... 8'30

Other mineral matter . . . . 0'98

100-00

432 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

70° C, at which temperature it should be kept for about twenty
minutes. At the same time some animal charcoal is heated sufficiently
to sterilize but not to burn it, covered over and allowed to cool. When
both are quite cold, the charcoal is added to the water (ca. 15 grm. to
1000 cc.) and well shaken up in it several times. After an interval of
half an hour or more the water is filtered through fine filter cloth *
the whole filter having been first sterilized with boiling sea-water, and
is received in a sterile fiask. It is then ready for use.

2. For many experiments, where larger quantities of water were
required, the sea-water was not sterilized before being treated with
animal charcoal. In this case, if the first part of the filtrate be
rejected, the subsequent water will generally be practically sterile, and
few, if any, extraneous organisms will develop in it.

3. At a later date an automatic apparatus was set up in the
Plymouth Laboratory, by which very considerable quantities of sea-
water could be treated with animal charcoal, and subsequently filtered
through a "Berkefeld" filter; water treated in this manner we call
"Berkefeld water." Tank- water was always used in this apparatus,
and was mixed with animal charcoal,f in a clean sulphuric acid carboy,
by blowing air through with a pair of bellows. The mixture was
allowed to settle for at least twenty-four hours and then syphoned
over into an inverted bell-jar, with a tubulure at the bottom, into which
the Berkefeld candle was fitted. Filtration under these conditions
was found to be rather slow ; so, in order to increase its rate, an
apparatus was devised by which the pressure on the filter was con-
siderably augmented.

This apparatus (see Fig. 1) consists of a glazed earthenware "tobacco
jar " with two tubulures, one at the side, the other at the bottom, and
a lid which can be screwed down tightly on to a rubber washer, by
means of a triangular metal arrangement fitting into grooves above the
lid.J The internal dimensions of our jars are 11x6 inches, and the
diameter of the opening at the top is 3| inches. The tubulures are
coned, with the smaller diameter external, and make a good fit for
a No. 8 rubber bung. When setting up this apparatus, a bung, through
which a short glass tube bent at right angles is passed, is fitted into the

* The iiltei' cloth used for this purpose is the same as is made for use in filter presses,
and is known as Extra-Super Swansdown. To prevent tliis becoming clogged another cloth,
known as Hydraulic Twill, was, as a rule, used over it.

t Ca, 300 grm. to 20 litres of water.

X These jars were made, to our specification, by Messrs. Price, Powell, and Co., Bristol.
The clamps usually sui>plied with such jars are not strong enough to obtain a tight joint,
but these are easily replaced by stronger ones.

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 433

side tubulure. This tube is connected, by means of rubber pressure
tubing, to another glass tube leading down from the bottom of a small
inverted bell-jar, placed some height above (in our case 14 feet, which
gives a pressure of ca. 6 lbs. to the square inch inside the jar).
A screw pinch -cock on this connection serves as a tap. The carboy
containing the treated water stands just above the bell-jar, and is fitted
with a tightly fitting rubber bung, through which two tubes pass. One
is an ordinary syphon, the other the only air inlet into the carboy.
This latter automatically keeps the level of the water in the bell-jar

ii==*=\

. ^S^?^gg-S:^

Fig. 1. — Diagram of apparatus for preparing sterile sea-water by filtration,
without contact with metal.

constant, by closing the air-inlet as soon as the water covers the end of
the tube. When filtering water, the modus operandi is as follows : —

The carboy is filled with tank-water, treated, and allowed to settle as
before. The Berkefeld candle,*" bung, delivery tube, and connections
(see Fig. 1) are sterilized by boiling for half an hour and fitted into
place from within. (The delivery tube is shaped so that any drops of
water, accidentally running down outside it, do not enter the vessel
receiving the filtrate ; and the jar should be large enough to allow the
hand to fit the filter into place without much trouble.) The pinch-cock
is closed and the syphon from the carboy started, which will automati-
cally stop if the bung has been properly fitted. This should be watched
to avoid accidents. The pinch -cock is then opened until the water
rises in the jar well above the top of the candle, but still leaving some
air space. The lid can now be fitted into place and screwed down.
The tightness of this joint can be tested by pouring a little water into

* No. fi. Porcelain •mount ; length 8 ins., diameter 2 ins.

434 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

the crack round the lid, and observing if any bubbles are formed when
the pinch-cock is opened. If all is right, no bubbles will be seen, and
a good stream of water will flow out from the delivery tube. Our
apparatus will filter about twenty litres an hour, and the filtrate
is exceptionally bright and clear. The candle should be sterilized
every three or four days that the apparatus is in use, to avoid indirect
contamination by growths of organisms through the substance of the
filter.* The water while passing through this apparatus only comes
into contact with glass, earthenware, and rubber, the use of metal
liaving been purposely avoided.

(e) Peroxide of Hydro()cn Water. As it seemed probable that the
action of animal charcoal was due to contact oxidation with the oxygen
occluded in the charcoal, experiments were made to determine whether
a similar effect could be produced by the use of hydrogen peroxide
(H2O2). This was used in two ways. In the first method a sufficient
quantity of H2O2 was added to the sea-water to ensure complete
sterilization (1 cc. of H^Oo of 20 vols, strength per 1000 cc. of tank-
water was found to be satisfactory), and the excess of H.3O., was decom-
posed by adding manganese dioxide. The water was then filtered
through filter cloth, and the filtrate appeared to remain quite sterile.
Good cultures of Chactoccras constrictum, Biddidfliia mohiliensis, and
SkeUtonema costatum were made in this water, which seemed to be as
good as water treated by the animal-charcoal method.

The second way of using the peroxide of hydrogen was to start with
water sterilized by heating to 70° C, and to add to this H^O^, in small
quantities at a time, until its presence could just be detected on testing
the sea-water with permanganate of potash. In these circumstances,
the first amounts of HoOo are decomposed in the oxidation of organic
substances in the water, and a very slight excess of H^Oa persists.
For tank-water 1 cc. of 1 vol. HoOo per 1000 cc. was found to give the
best general effect. Cultures grown in water prepared in this way
developed satisfactorily, being practically equal to those made in animal-
charcoal water, but they became exhausted rather quickly.

The treatment of aquarium water with ozone was also tried, as this
seems to offer a possibility of treating large quantities of water,f such
as the whole bulk of water in an aquarium circulation, without very
considerable expense. Experiments on a small scale, which we were
able to make, unfortunately only with imperfect apparatus, showed

* See Bulloch and Craw., Jovr. of Hygiene, VI, No. 3 (1906) ]). 409.

t The use of ozonized air for the puritication of fresh water for town-water supplies has
been adopted in some localities. See Bridge, J. H. Paper read before Franklin Institute,
reprinted in Eiujlish Mrchanic (1907), )ip. ^369 and 392,

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 435

that water treated with ozonized oxygen gave distinctly better cultures
than untreated water. Although the sea-water was not absolutely
sterilized by the treatment to which we actually subjected it, a sample
of water which was visibly clouded with bacteria became quite clear
and bright.

(/) Cultures in these Medici. In order to make clear the different
results, which are obtained by using these different waters, we will
describe the probable result which would be got from a series of flasks
set up with the following media, and each inoculated with a persistent
culture of a true plankton diatom, such as Thalassiosira, Skeletonema,
or C%actoccras.

A. " Outside water " untreated.

Small growth in from five to fifteen days, ahiiost immediately
swamped by growths of foreign forms ; the latter, however, will never
be large.

B. " Outside water " sterilized.

Slightly larger growth, very soon becoming exhausted.

C. "Tank- water" untreated.

Same result as in A, but growths will be much larger, healthier, and
will last longer.

D. " Tank-water " sterilized.

A fair growth of the inoculated si^ecies, but the total growth will
not be as great as in C ; the diatoms will retain their normal appear-
ance for some time.

E. " Outside water " + Miquel's solutions A and B, sterilized.

Best culture in series, both in quantity and quality. The diatoms
Avill remain normal and healthy for a very long period.

F. " Outside water " sterilized and treated with Animal Charcoal.

Fair growth, especially at first ; diatoms will soon grow pale and
become exhausted ; better than D.

G. " Tank-water " sterilized and treated with Animal Charcoal.

As F, only growth will be slightly greater and will last considerably
longer. Third liest in series.
H. " Tank-water " treated with Animal Charcoal and filtered through Berke-
feld filter.

This will usually be the second-best culture in the series, but the
difference between this and G will only be slight.
K. " Outside water " treated with HoO..

This will most resemble F, but will iK^t be quite so good.
L. " Tank-water " treated with HoO^.

A distinct improvement over K. This medium is rather variable,
and in some cases the growth obtained has Iteen quite equal to F, if not
better.

436 ON THE AETIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

B. Experiments with a View to Determining the Conditions

AVHICH underlie THE SUCCESSFUL CULTURE OF Dl ATOMS.

The attempt to make cultures of diatoms for use as food, when
rearing pelagic larvte, led naturally to an effort to determine the best
culture medium and the most favourable conditions for the rapid and
continuous growth of diatoms. Before success can be attained in this
direction exact knowledge as to the nature of the essential food-stuffs —
and in fact as to the general physiology of the Diatomacese — is
necessary.* Numerous experiments, extending over the last three
years, have been carried out, with a view to obtaining such knowledge,
and the results, though still by no means complete or conclusive, are
perhaps worth recording.

A great difficulty which has to be met in carrying out such investi-
gations on marine diatoms is caused by the fact that, when sea-water is
used as a basis for the culture media, we are dealing with a solution
of a very complex and very variable character, the exact nature
of which it is extremely difficult to determine. The most direct
method of research, namely, chemical analysis, has not proved of much
service, owing to the uncertainty and in many cases impossibility
of accurate determinations, in sea-water, of such minute quantities
of substances as those upon which the growth of plankton diatoms has
been found to depend.

We have had, therefore, to rely, for the most part, on the lengthy
and tedious process of analysis by " trial and error," the experiments
being largely conducted on lines suggested by Liebig's well-known
*' law of minimums " (Pfeffer, vol. i., p. 413). The ideal at which we
aim is to find a culture medium, with artificially prepared sea-water as
its basis, such that the absence, or diminution in quantity, of any one
of its constituents would have a profound effect upon the growth
of diatoms in it. Whether the conditions regulating growth in such a
medium would be at all comparable to the natural conditions of life in
the sea is a question that would have to be decided by experiment, but
in any case this could be made a starting point for much more definite
research than has yet been attempted. Up to the present time we
have not, unfortunately, succeeded in finding such a culture medium.
Throughout the work we have had very great diificulty, in spite
of much care and many precautions, in obtaining consistent results.
It may even happen that, in two flasks containing the same culture
medium, inoculated with the same culture of diatom and standing side

* For general references to literature sec Bibliography, especially Miquel (12),

Rinhter (18).

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF JIARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 437

by side, under exactly identical conditions, as far as can be recognized,
quite different degrees of growth will be observed. All experiments
must therefore be frequently repeated before entire confidence can be
felt in any conclusions which they seem to indicate.

It must be remembered, also, that in all the persistent cultures of
diatoms that we have used, bacteria have probably been present, and
this fact has probably had some influence on the result. Unfortu-
nately our attempts to obtain absolutely pure cultures have not met
with success.

Methods. In carrying out the experiments to be described in this
section the procedure has been as follows : — All media have been pre-
pared from sterile sea-water, and sterile vessels and instruments have
always been used. The cultures have usually been made in 60 cc. of
liquid, in short-necked, wide-mouthed flasks of 125 cc. capacity. When
a number of cultures were to be compared, the flasks were kept stand-
ing in a row together in such a way as to keep the physical conditions
as similar as possible. Control cultures in standard media were in-
cluded in each series, so that results from different series could be com-
pared by reference to the controls. The various media were inoculated
from a persistent culture of a species of plankton diatom, which in the
great majority of cases was Thalassiosira decipicns (p. 460). When pre-
paring the different media the methods used were, as far as possible,
identical, and although only about 60 cc. was needed for a culture, a
litre was made up, so that errors due to measuring very minute quanti-
ties might be avoided. The media were all freshly prepared for each
comparative series of cultures, the same sample of sea-water being used,
when the basis of any two or more was the same. Comparative esti-
mates of the amount of growth in the different cultures were made by
eye. alone. Any difference between amounts of growth that has been
described here as appreciable has always been accompanied by a marked
difference in appearance to the eye on holding the cultures up to the
light. A few drops from each culture were also, from time to time,
examined microscopically as a test of the quality and purity of the
growth.

The sea-ivater employed. The sea- water employed as a basis for the
culture media has been either (1) " outside water " or (2) " tank-water."
A general description of these will be found on pp. 429-431. An
accurate chemical analysis of both types of water would probably
make clear many difficult points, but, as already pointed out, no
chemical methods of sufficient delicacy have yet been devised.

438 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

We have seen that if we compare " tank-water," i.e. water from the
closed circulation of the Plymouth Aquarium, with off-shore sea-water
ill situ, a most obvious difference is the much increased density of the
larger forms of animal life in the former, combined with the almost
complete absence of plant life. Hence the concentration of excretory
products in the tank-water must be very much higher tlian in outside
water. Other factors, such as increased bacterial action, artificial
aeration, etc., in tank-water, must also be taken into account (cf.
Vernon, 58 ; Smith, 56). There seems to be direct evidence to show
that the concentration of nitrates, possibly due to the action of nitri-
fying bacteria on the products of excretion, such as urea, ammonia,
etc., is considerably higher in the tank-water, and the presence of soluble
organic matter, in concentrations never met with in the sea, can
almost certainly be assumed. It is probably due to the presence of
these nitrates and soluble organic substances that sterilized tank-water
is a much better medium in which to grow diatoms than sterilized out-
side water (see p. 435).

The constituents of MiqiieVs solutions. It has already been stated that
no better medium for the culture of plankton diatoms has been found
by us than the solutions recommended by Miquel, although these solu-
tions may be modified and simplified in various ways with equally
good results. The formulae recommended by Houghton Gill give very
similar cultures. The essential features of Miquel's and Houghton
Gill's methods, when adapted to sea-water, are the same. Miquel's
solution A, and Gill's solution 2, can both be replaced by a solution of
potassium nitrate (p. 427). Again, Miquel's solution B and Gill's solu-
tion 1 only differ in the proportionate amounts in which the various
constituents are prescribed. The formula? are : —

Miquel's sol.

H. GUI's sol. 1. .

Na., HPO4, 12H.0 .

4 grm.

2 grni.

CaCl, . ." .

. 4 „

4 „

Fe CI3 (syrupus)

2 CO.

0-5 „

HCl (concentrated) .

2 cc.

1 „

Water

. 80 cc.

100 „

Use

1 cc. per 1000.

Use 3 cc. per 1000

The proportionate amounts added to equal volumes of sea-water
are : —

MiqueVs sol. B. H. Gill's sol. 1.
Na., HPO4 .... 10 .12

CaClo 10 .24

FeClg . . . . 5 .3

HCl 5 .6

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTUEE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 439

Since cultures can be obtained with no appreciable difference by
using media prepared by adding either of these solutions, together
with Miquel's solution A, to sea-water, a considerable latitude in the
proportions of the salts present is tolerated.

We must now consider what is the role of the various constituents
in Miquel sea-water. The part played by any salt of a culture medium
may be considered as being either, firstly, "nutritive," or secondly,
"protective."* Under the first heading, any direct addition of food
material must be included ; under the second, any removal or neutral-
ization of harmful substances, such as toxins and possibly bacteria,
and any more remote effects, which, although influencing growth, do
not directly enter into the metabolism of the plant.

Our experiments have proved that solution A can be reduced to a
simple solution of potassium nitrate f without detriment (cf. p. 427),
and that the amount of growth is, within limits, roughly proportional
to the amount of KNO3 added, as the following experiment shows : —

Inoculated from persistent culture of TJialassiosira decipieiis.

A. Normal Miquel sea-water.

Growth as usual.

B. Ditto, but only one-half amount of sol. A.

Good growth at first, but exhausted sooner than A.

C. Ditto, but 2i times amount of sol. A.

Was slower than either A or B at start, but afterwards was
better than A or B and lasted longer.

D. Ditto, but five times amount of sol. A.

As C, but in greater degree.

Considering the nature of the substance added, and its already well-
known action in plant metabolism, these results, coupled with the fact
that exhausted cultures can often be regenerated by the simple addi-
tion of nitrates (see below, p. 444), are quite consistent with the
assumption that sol. A is simply nutritive in action. The concentra-
tion of nitrates in natural sea-water is so low (Brandt, 47) that the
amount available in a culture of untreated water very soon becomes
completely exhausted, and it is this deficiency that sol. A probably
corrects.

Considering now the action of sol. B, it must first be observed that
increased concentration of nitrates alone will not explain the whole

^ * Loeb, The Dynamics of Living Matter (New York, 1906), p. 77.

t For the sake of conveuience, the expression sol. A will be used throughout the rest of
this paper to indicate a simple solution of potassium nitrate (5 per cent) and sol. B to
indicate Miquel's phosi)ho-ferricalcic solution (p. 423). Unless otherwise stated, the amounts
of each added to 1000 cc. sea-water will be normal, i.e. 2 cc. sol. A and 1 cc. sol. B.

NEW SERIES. — VOL. VIII, NO. 5. MaKCH, 1910. 2 H

440 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

action of Miquel's solutions, for no increase in growth is obtained when
nitrates or sol. A only are added to sea-water. To illustrate this point
an account of an actual experiment may be given : —

Inoculated with Thalassiosira declpiens.

A. Normal Miquel sea-water.

Good strong culture, in every way normal.

B. Outside water sterilized.

Small growth at first ; very soon exhausted.

C. Ditto -I- sol. A.

No improvement over B.

D. Ditto + sol. B.

Fair groAvth. Great improvement on B and C, hut exhausted
considerably before A.

E. Tank-water sterilized.

Appreciably better than B, but growth not large.

F. Ditto + sol. A.

Not even as good as E.

G. Ditto + sol. B.

Next best in series to A ; lasted longer than D, and had l^etter
coloiu'.

To generalize, no improved culture is obtained with sol. A alone,
but a fair, though not very lasting, growth can result from using
sol. B only.

The action of sol. B is to some extent obscured by the fact that,
when this solution is added to the alkaline sea-water, a precipitate
is formed. This precipitate is at first white, but, on heating or stand-
ing for some time, it becomes greenish yellow. We are indebted to
Mr. D. J. Matthews for the following analyses.

Ten litres of normal Miquel sea-water were prepared, and the pre-
cipitate was collected on a filter paper washed and dried at 100° C.

Weight of dry precipitate from 10 litres = 0*2949 grm.

Analysis

Dry

Precijntate.

Per cent.

P205

26-36

Fe^Og

41-31

CaO

7-63

H„0

24-86

100-16

Or, the precipitate from 1 litre of normal Miquel sea-water contains : —

P2O5 -00777 grm.

FePg ...... -01218 „

CaO -00225 „

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 441

An analysis of 1 cc. Miquel sol. B, the amount added to 1 litre Miquel
sea- water, gave : —

PoOg -00825 grill.

Fe.^Og -0105 „

Cab 0145 „

Comparing these figures, it seems probable that, when added to sea-
water, all the iron in sol. B is precipitated, and a certain amount also
of the phosphate and calcium. The additive effect on the sea-water is
therefore a slightly increased concentration of phosphate and calcium.

An analysis of a sample of tank-water for phosphorus, before and
after treatment with sol. B (1 cc. per thousand), gave the following
figures : —

Tank-water . . . -5 mgriii. P per litre = -00163 grm. PgO^

Tank-water + sol. B

(without precipitate) . 1-5 ,, ,, ,, =-00488 „ ,,

It will be noticed that the figures from the different analyses do not
agree very well. This is probably due to the fact that different
samples were used for analyses in each case, and also to the fact that
the solutions were made up in the ordinary way, without any special
precautions, volumes, for instance, being measured in cylindrical
glasses, pipettes, etc.

Cultures were tried in sea-water containing the normal amount of
sol. A, plus the normal constituents of sol. B, less all the iron and
less the amount of phosphate that would combine with the iron to
form basic ferric phosphate (P2052Fe203l2HoO). This solution
should have very nearly the same chemical composition as normal
Miquel sea-water from which the precipitate has been removed.
Successful cultures could not, however, be obtained in it. Neither
could cultures be grown in sea- water to which had been added the
normal amount of sol. A and 1 mgrm. P (as sodium phosphate)
per litre.

To ascertain the effects of the different constituents of sol. B,
experiments were carried out with separate solutions of these con-
stituents, each of the same strength as in Miquel's formula. Different
combinations of these solutions were added, together with sol. A, to
sterilized sea-water, and the resulting media were inoculated in the
usual way. It was found necessary to repeat these experiments a
great number of times, as the results obtained were rather contra-
dictory. To illustrate the methods used, a list of the different media,
and notes on the cultures obtained in them, are given below. These
media were inoculated from cultures of Thcdassiosira dccipicns, and the

442 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

cultures were kept under observation for at least four months. Series.
were made as uniformly as possible, and controls in standard media
were included in each. The strength of the various solutions used in
these experiments was the same as in Miquel's formula.

A. Outside water + .sol. A + sol. B (normal Miquel sea- water).

First control.

B. Outside water + sol. A + NaoHPO^ sol. + FeClg sol. + CaCl.^, .sol.

Second control.

Good normal cultures were always obtained in these two controls.

C. Outside water + sol. A + ISra2HP0^ sol.

A very uncertain medium. Sometimes no growth has been
recorded and at other times a fair growth results, but these
cultures are never equal to normal jNIiquel.

D. Outside water + sol. A + FeClg sol.

Occasionally a very small growth has been obtained, but at the
best it is very poor.

E. Outside water + sol. A + CaCU sol.

About equal to D.

F. Outside water + sol. A + Na^HPO^ sol. + FeClg sol.

Uncertain as C ; no cultures have been obtained equal to tlie best
inC.

G. Outside water + sol. A + Na^HPO^ sol. +CaC1.2 sol.

Some cultures very nearly equal to the controls have been obtained
in this medium.
H. Outside water + sol. A + FeCI, sol. + CaCl._> sol.
Poor, about equal to D.

Analysing the above results, we see that —

(1) None of these modifications of sol. B give results equal to sol. B

itself.

(2) The best result is obtained from the combination of the phosphate-

and calcium chloride solutions.

(3) Of the solutions used singly the phosphate is the best, the iron and

calcium chloride being about equal.

(4) The addition of FeCl3 to Na.^HPO^, or the addition to CaCl, to

FeClg, does not improve the medium to any extent.

Experiments were also made to determine whether the precipitate
thrown down in sea-water by Miquel's sol. B, itself had any influence
on culture media. A quantity of this precipitate was prepared, filtered
ofi', and then added to outside sea-water + sol A (nitrates). A small
growth was obtained, which was a distinct improvement on the control
without the precipitate, but exhaustion soon set in.

Further discussion of the mode of action of sol. B, and as to
whether that action is purely nutritive, or partly nutritive and partly

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 443

protective, is better postponed until a later section, after the action of
animal charcoal and other substances has lieen considered (see p. 455).

Animal Charcoal and Peroridc of Hydrogen. The most successful
culture medium for plankton diatoms, next to Miquel sea-water, is
that prepared from animal charcoal (cf. p. 435). Animal-charcoal
water gives at first almost as good cultures of plankton diatoms as
Miquel sea-water, but the tendency to paleness and exhaustion
appears much sooner. The best cultures were obtained in " Berkefeld
water," that is, tank-water from the Plymouth Aquarium treated with
powdered commercial animal charcoal and filtered through a Berkefeld
filter. Tank-water as a basis for animal-charcoal water is very much
better than outside water, probably on account of the higher con-
centration of nitrates, etc.

There is a very striking resemblance between the effect of animal
charcoal and of Miquel's sol. B upon sea-water used for diatom
cultures, and the growths obtained by using tank-water + sol. B and
tank animal-charcoal water are very similar in character. If Miquel's
sol. A is added to animal-charcoal water, there is a great improvement,
both in the colour and quantity of diatom growth, and in the case of
Thalassiosira decipiens the chains are long and well formed. With
animal - charcoal water + sol. B, on the other hand, practically no
growth was obtained.

It is possible that a certain amount of phosphate, and perhaps of
calcium, from the animal charcoal, goes into solution and serves as a
" nutritive " material for the diatoms. But we are inclined to think
that its chief action is " protective," and due to its power of occluding
gases, such gases being in a state of higher chemical activity than
under normal conditions.*

As was explained in a previous section (p. 434), the possibility that
the action of animal charcoal might have some sort of effect com-
parable to oxidation, led us to experiment with hydrogen peroxide.
Fair growths of diatom could be obtained in sea-water prepared in
the manner described, but they always showed a tendency to rather
rapid exhaustion. As in the case of animal-charcoal water, tank-
water proved a much better basis for treatment with HgO^ than outside
water.

Reviving Exlumded Cultures. Several experiments were carried out
with water from old, exhausted cultures. The sediment was filtered

* Against this view would seem to be tlie fact, that when powdered cocoanut charcoal,
which has a still higher power of occluding gases, was used in the place of animal char-
coal, very poor cultures were obtained.

444 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

off, the filtrate was nterilized by heat, and then treated by various.

methods.

In one typical experiment the following was the result : —

Water from an exhausted culture of Skelctonema costatum in Miquel

sea-water, reinoculated with the same diatom : —

A. Filtered and sterilized.

N'o growth obtained.

B. Ditto + sol. A (nitrates only).

Good culture, but did not last very long ; further addition of
nitrates made no improvement.

C. Ditto + sol. B.

No growth.

D. Ditto + sol. A + sol. B.

Very good growth, lasting considerably longer than B.

E. Ditto + an. char.

No growth.

Exhausted cultures in animal-charcoal water gave the same general
results on treatment and reinoculation. In an old culture of Biddul-
l)Ma mobiliensis in outside water + sol. B only, which was in a very
exhausted condition (nine months old), the addition of KNO3 gave a
very rapid regeneration, and the diatoms became of normal colour
and form. This renewed growth, however, did not last very long, and
a further addition of KNO3 did not give any result. The addition of
sodium phosphate also failed to stimulate growth. The same rapid
regeneration, on the addition of potassium nitrate, has been obtained
with almost every medium, but a second attempt has always failed.

Silica. A very noticeable character of the true plankton species of
marine diatom is, that their skeletons are very markedly less silicious.
than the great majority of other forms. Their valves are only feebly
marked, if at all, and they will not stand the vigorous treatment of
cleaning with acids and heat that is commonly used in the case of
fresh-water diatoms. In cultural forms, this absence of silica is still
more obvious, and no marking can usually be seen on even those
forms which, under natural conditions, are the most silicious, e.g.
Coscinodiscus excentricus. Deformed and distorted frustules are the
rule in certain stages of growth in our cultures, and it is often very
hard to make out more than the thinnest coating of silica. It is quite
probable that this deformity can be accounted for simply by the
absence of a strong silicious skeleton. As a rule, the more rapid the
growth, the more teratological forms will 1)6 found. In untreated
outside water little deformity will take place, but in normal Miquel,
where very rapid growth takes place, the diatoms may assume almost

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 445

any conceivable shape. The form of the frustules tends to come Lack
to the normal agam, when the culture is well started, and in old stages
the majority will be perfectly formed, although small and pale. It
was found that the addition of silica (in early experiments as fragments
of potassium silicate) was, as far as could be judged, immaterial, which
fact led to the conclusion that a sufficiency dissolved out from the glass
flasks in which the cultures were kept. During rapid growth, it is
possible that the silica does not dissolve out fast enough to supply the
demand, although it is also possible that diatoms, during rapid division,
cannot absorb silica and form a perfect skeleton, even when the supply
is abundant. Eichter (18) has proved the necessity of either CaSiaOj
or KgSioO. for the growth of Nitzschia ixdea, grown in pure cultures.
We tried the addition of silica in various forms, and in one instance,
in a culture of Coscinodiscus excentricus, to which a little precipitated
calcium silicate had been added, the uniformity and markings of the
valves were much more regular than in the control. The presence of
a trace of pure, dialysed silica, also, in one experiment, gave an im-
proved regularity of form, but the quantity or rapidity of growth did
not seem to be affected. No sign of regeneration could be obtained in
exhausted cultures by the addition of silica.

Organic Infusions. — Miquel recommends the use in culture media of
infusions of organic substances such as bran, straw, diatom broth, etc.,
in addition to the saline solution. He does not make it quite clear
if he ever dispensed with them at all. In his general directions, he
certainly states that the addition of both saline and organic nutrient
material is necessary. As would be expected from the general metabolism
of plants, the saline constituents are sufficient for growth. At the same
time, excellent cultures have been obtained from dilute organic in-
fusions, both with and without the addition of Miquel's sols. A and B.
About a square inch of Ulva was boiled in 600 cc. sea-water for half
an hour, cooled and filtered. In this medium an excellent growth of
Coscinodiscus excentricus in one case, and Biddulphia mohiliensis in
another, was obtained, the growth lasting for some considerable time.

Infusions, made in the same way from a small piece of fresh fish,
gave the same results, and although growth was rather slower at first,
the final result was, if anything, slightly better. As Miquel points
out, these infusions must be made very dilute, otherwise growths of
bacteria, moulds, etc., will completely swamp the diatoms. Karsten
(7), in some interesting experiments, showed that Nitzschia imlea
(Kutz), W.Sm., could be made to alter completely its mode of nutrition.
On placing this diatom in organic nutrient solutions, it lost all chloro-

446 ON THE AETIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

phyll and became colourless, but in saline media the chlorophyll would
not regenerate, and the nutrition change back from heterotrophic to
autotrophic*

Of course, with our infusions, it cannot be said that the diatoms
were necessarily feeding on dissolved organic material, as some neces-
sary, saline, nutritive materials could have dissolved out from the
weed or fish. If the former is the case, it might explain the superiority
of tank-water over outside water, since the tank-water must contain
a much higher percentage of organic substances in solution. If an
alternative mode of nutrition autotrophic or mixotrophic could be
proved, especially in the case of the " bottom " forms of diatoms,
a great many phenomena could be explained, but the evidence is as
yet far too slight to warrant any such assumption.

Artificial Sea-water. — As we have explained in a previous section,
the ideal aimed at, in this part of our work, has been to obtain strong
growths of diatomaceae in purely artificially prepared solutions of
simple salts. If this end could be satisfactorily attained, the diffi-
culties due to the unknown and variable composition of natural sea-
water at once disappear. According to van 't Hoff (35) sea-water is a
solution containing salts in the following molecular concentrations : —

NaCl 100-0, KCl 2-2, MgClg 7-8, MgSO, 3-8, CaCl. 1-0 (varies).

Using these molecular concentrations, a sea-water of any desired
salinity can be prepared. The chlorine content of average Atlantic
water is about CI =19*4, and samples of artificial sea- water were pre-
pared with the same chlorine value, thus : —

NaCl

26-75

KCl

•75

MgClo

342

CaCl,

•51

MgSO,

2-10

Double-distilled water

966-47

1000-00

To make this solution comparable to natural sea- water, the " alka-
linity " must be raised by the addition of an alkali such as NaoCOg.
After the importance of " alkalinity " as a factor had come before our
notice, 2*4 cc. M/2 NajCOg was always added to the above solution in
order to make the amount of base in equilibrium with COo equivalent
to the usual 40 mgrm. 0H7„„ (p. 450).

* Cf. Zumstein, Zur Mor/iJioIogi*' ». PhysMogie </. Euglena gracilis. Leipzig. 1899.

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTUKE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 447

The only success we attained with artificial sea-water as a basis for
culture media was with four isolated cultures in one of our earlier
experiments. Two of these were cultures of Coscinodiscus cxcentricus
in artificial sea- water + Miquel's solutions A and B. The two cultures
were identical except that one was in an ordinary Bohemian glass
flask and the other in a " resistance glass " flask. No difference be-
tween these two could be seen. The growth obtained in both was in
every way equal to normal Miquel sea-water, and is still fair, although
over two years old. The other two successful cultures were growths
of the same diatom in the same media, plus a small quantity of weed
infusion, made by boiling up a small piece of Ulva in artificial sea-
water. These gave just as good results, but the addition of unknown
factors from the weed detracts from their general interest. In spite
of frequent attempts, over fifty in number, we have not been able to
repeat this experiment, which may possibly be due to some accidental
impurity in the salts or distilled water from which the successful
media were prepared.

Alkaliiiity. Tornoe (43) and Dittmar (33) were the first to
investigate the fact that sea-water showed on analysis an apparent
excess of base over acid, which excess they termed " the alkalinity
of sea-water." Dittmar defines the alkalinity of sea-water as " a
measure of its potential carbonate of lime," but this definition, and
his supposition that this excess of base combines directly with dis-
solved CO2 to form carbonates and, further, but only in very small
proportion, bicarbonates, is liable to give a quite erroneous idea of the
state of equilibrium actually occurring in the ocean. For, as Fox
(34) has shown, "sea-water reacts, w situ very nearly neutral, and
actually just slightly more (Kyid than distilled water." This is due
to the fact that sea-water always contains a considerable quantity
of dissolved COo.

If a salt solution with neutral reaction, that is containing H* and
OH' ions in concentrations equal to one another and the same as
for pure water, be exposed to an atmosphere containing COo, a definite
amount, depending on pressure, temperature, and salinity, would go
into solution. This CO^ would combine with water and form the very
weak acid H2CO0, which would ionize with the formation of the
free H* ions thus : —

HoCOg'? H'-hHCOV
(HCO'3 ? H' + CO".).

The second stage of dissociation is so small as to be negligible. The
concentration of H* being now increased, and OH' decreased, the

448 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTUIiE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

solution would have an acid reaction. The actual amount of CO.2 thus
dissolved would always be small; for instance, a salt solution of
strength CI = 20-00 (average Atlantic water CI = 19-4) will at 10°C.
dissolve about -3 cc. COo per litre from an atmosphere containing
3 Voco COo (about normal). But the ocean is found to contain very
much greater quantities than this, 60 cc, or two hundred times this
amount, being a not unusual figure for the total CO2. The difference
between this amount and the "3 cc. or so dissolved by the neutral salt
solution, as above, is kept in equilibrium with the 3 7„„^ COo of the
atmosphere, by the amount of " excess " base equivalent to the amount
of acid neutralized when an acid such as HCl is added to sea-water
in excess. If a solution identical with sea-water but absolutely free
from CO^, (a practical chemical impossibility) could be obtained, then
there would be present an excess of base over acid, and consequently
an excess of OH' ions over H* ions, and an alkaline reaction. On
exposing such a sokition to the atmosphere, CO., would go into solu-
tion, ionize, and the H* ions thus set free would react with the
OH' ions, due to the excess base, to form water. And this reaction
would continue to take place, on more CO., dissolving, until all the
excess OH' ions were neutralized, at which point the solution would
react neutral. Now, as before with the neutral salt solution, a further
small amount of COo would go into solution, bringing the solution
into equilibrium with the atmosphere, and the excess H* ions thus
formed would give an acid reaction. The final result would be a
solution exactly identical with natural sea-water. The total CO^
found in sea-water can be considered as existing in two parts : the
larger part in equilibrium with free base, its amount depending on
temperature, pressure, and alkalinity ; the smaller in equilibrium with
the partial pressure of CO., in the atmosphere, its amount depending
on temperature, pressure, and salinity. Although sea- water in situ
has an acid reaction, it still maintains the property of being able
to neutralize a certain amount of any acid stronger than H.COg, that
is any acid which, on dissociation, forms a higher concentration of
H' ions ; for the stronger acid will turn out the H^,C03 in equilibrium
with the " excess base " and COo will be evolved.

In consideration of these points a less confusing definition of the
^'alkalinity of sea-timter" would perhaps be « measure of its jwtential
capability of neutralizing a strong acid* with the evolution of CO.,.
This can be conveniently expressed, as is usual, in mgrm. OH 7,o-

Some of our earlier experiments seemed to show that " alkalinity "
was a factor of considerable importance for the successful growth

* Such as HCl, with a high de£!rce of ioni;catioii.

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMy. 449

of cultures of plankton diatoms ; so an attempt was made to analyse
the various samples of water both before and after treatment as
culture media. The method adopted was a modification of that used
by Tornoe and Dittmar. Solutions of NaOH and H.2SO4 of strength
N/50, ^y intention, were made up and stored in 5-litre " aspirator "
bottles. Two accurately graduated burettes standing side by side
were connected to these by tubes, so that they could be readily filled
by gravity. All air inlets to burettes and stock bottles were fitted
with tubes of soda lime. A standard solution of NaoCO^ of exactly
known alkalinity, approximately that of average sea-water (40'00
mgrm. OH 7,,), was prepared by diluting down from a N/j,, solution,
all operations being performed by weighing. These standards were
stored in stoppered bottles of the fairly insoluble dark green glass,
but those that had been kept for any length of time were not trusted,
fresh standards being prepared. On analysis these standards agreed
with one another to well within '1 mgrm. OH °/^^. The water used
for diluting the standards was distilled water from the laboratory
still, redistilled in all-glass apparatus with potassium bichromate and
sulphuric acid.

When carrying out an analysis, equal volumes (about 100 cc.) of
sample and standard were measured out into Jena glass Erlenmeyer
flasks with a Knudsen automatic pipette. The specific gravity of each
was determined by weighing in a 25 cc. pyknometer. Sample and
standard were then titrated by running in acid from the burette and
back titrating with alkali, using a 1 % alcoholic solution of aurine as an
indicator and keeping the liquid boiling. The acid to alkali equiva-
lent was determined by titrating a pipetteful of double-distilled water
in the same manner. The mean of at least four readings was always
used. Let N and n be number of burette divisions of alkali equivalent
to standard and sample respectively, and D and d their density at the
time of pipetting out. Then if A is the alkalinity of the standard and
X the required alkalinity of sample : —

x=a5l;

Since all operations were carried out at the same room temperature,
no corrections for temperature are necessary.

In spite of the greatest care consistent results could not be obtained
by this method of analysis. A sample analysed against the same
standard would sometimes give results varying as much as 0*5 mgrm.
and occasionally I'O mgrm. OH %^. The work on indicators by Salm
(42) and its application to this question has only recently come to our
notice, and it is our intention to experiment on this in future research.

450 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

The figures quoted below as the results of analyses have been rounded
off as whole numbers, since their interest lies in their comparative
rather than their absolute value, for convenience they are quoted
as " alkalinities," although we are fully conscious that the methods
used do not warrant this assumption, and that their actual chemical
significance is still obscure.

The mean value for " outside water " was found to be fairly constant
at 40-0 mgrm. OH 7oc> which figure agrees with results obtained by
otliers for average ocean water. Samples from the aqnarium tanks
never gave as high figures as this, the average being approximately
37"5 mgrm. OH 7oo- From this it seems that the amount of base in
equilibrium with COg in tank-water is appreciably less than in
outside water. A series of thirteen samples taken from seven miles
beyond the Eddystone to well inside the Cattewater (an inner tidal
harbour near Plymouth) showed a gradual lowering of the alkalinity
from the normal 40, to 38 mgrm. OH V^o as the water became more
estuarine and polluted.

The addition of Miquel's sol. B to sea-water was found, on analysis,
to reduce the "alkalinity" by an amount equivalent to 10 mgrm.
OH 7„o or more. The 1 cc. sol. B added to a litre of sea-water,
in itself contains a certain amount of free acid, equivalent to less than
4 mgrm. OH 7oo- ^^^^ tliis reduction of alkalinity cannot be accounted
for by the addition of free acid alone, because if only a quarter of the
amount of sol. B is added, the alkalinity of the sample will be found to be,
if anything, only very slightly higher. Also, if the various constituents
of sol. B are added as separate solntions, thus obviating any addition
of free acid, a reduction equivalent to about 6 mgrm. OH 7oo is still
obtained. The presence of ferric chloride in sol. B gives a possible
explanation of this phenomenon. If a solution of ferric chloride
is added to a solution of a soluble carbonate, a reaction, which can
be expressed by the following equation, takes place : —

3 R^COgAq. +Fe2Cl6Aq. - 6 RCl.Aq. + FeoOgAq. + 3 CO.,.

When the ferric chloride is added to sea- water, the final result will
be that a certain amount of the " excess base " which was in equi-
librium with COo, will then be in equilibrium with the chlorine,
available on the precipitation of hydrated ferric oxide, with a consequent
liberation of COo, and a reduction in " alkalinity " will, therefore, take
place.

An analogy between the actions of Miquel's sol. B and animal
charcoal can be seen in the fact that water treated with animal
charcoal also shows a reduced " alkalinity," the amount being very
variable in different samples.

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 451

Sea-water treated with HoO.> also showed a lowering of the alka-
linity, hut in a much less degree when, as usual, minimal quantities
were used.

Control experiments on double-distilled water, which had been
treated with these substances, were tried, but great difficidty was
found in obtaining an end point with the indicator. As far as could
be judged, distilled water treated with sol. B (quantities as with sea-
water) showed a negative " alkalinity," equivalent to about 8 mgrm.
OH 7oo> ^^^^ ^^^ the case of animal charcoal a positive alkalinity
equivalent to 6 mgrm. OH °/^^, but the colour change was so slow that
these results are only the roughest estimates. The possibility that the
above results are due to some effect on the indicator, which entirely
cloaks the true alkalinity, must always be taken into consideration.

Before any attempts at analysis had been made, the probability that
considerable differences might be found in the alkalinity of the various
media had presented itself. Improvement in the growth of diatom
cultures was found to result from the purely empirical addition of
NaHCOg, this result being most marked in normal Miquel sea-water,
outside water + sol. B only, and Berkefeld water. No growth could be
obtained in either tank-water or Miquel sea- water to which had been
added 1 cc. HCl (pure, concentrated) per litre, but on again raising the
alkalinity of the latter by the addition of NaHCOg or KOH good
normal growths resulted. lUchter (18) and H. Gill (5), also, both
state that a weak alkaline reaction is necessary for the growth of
diatoms.

In our most recent experiments, all the media have been analysed
for alkalinity, and those given in detail below illustrate the importance
of determining this factor. Cultures of Tholassiosira decipicns were
made in the following media : —

A. Tank-water. Control.

Poor groAvtli, hardly uonual. Later, good growth of minute
forms, etc.

B. Tank-water treated with cold commercial animal charcoal and filtered.

Very good growth indeed.

C. Tank-water treated with cold pure an. char, and filtered.

Very poor growth, compara1)le to A without minute forms.

D. Tank- water treated with pure an. char, as in C, but the an. char, wan

added red hot.
Fair growth, much superior to C, Ijut not up to B.

The sample of pure an. char, used here had been previously found to
give very poor results, and it was also quite contrary to our experience
that any improvement in growth should be obtained by adding it hot.

452 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

But if we examine the results of analyses of these media for alkalinity
a probable explanation presents itself. The following figures are only
comparative : —

A — 38 mgrm. OH °/^^ (used as standard).

B — 37 „ „ (higher than usual).

C — 16 „ ,, (very Ioav indeed).

D-34 „

It will be seen that the amount of growth in each treated sample
follows the alkalinity very closely.

Solutions of NaoCOg, NaHCOg and HCl were made up, so that 4 cc.
of any one contained an amount of acid or alkali equivalent to
10 mgrm. OH. From these a series of normal Miquel sea-waters of
different alkalinities were prepared. Cultures of Thalassiosira de-
cipicns were grown in these media.

A. Normal Miquel sea-water. Control. A ^ 32*7 mgrm. OH 7oo-

Perfectly normal groAvth.

B. Ditto + 4 cc. Na.^C03 per litre. A = 41 -7 mgrm. OH 7^^ ( = -t- 9-0).*

No difference between this culture and A.

C. Ditto + 8 cc. ^XCOo per litre. A = 50-2 mgrm. 0H7„^ (= + 17-5).

Best culture in series in quality and quantity.
D Ditto + 4 cc. NaHCOg per litre. A - 42*4 mgrm. OH 7'^^ ( = + 9-7).
Slightly better than control.

E. Ditto + 8 cc. NaHCOo per Htre. A = 51 -5 mgrm. OH 7^^ ( = + 18-8).

As D.

F. Ditto -1- 4 cc. HCl per litre. A = 22-2 mgrm. OH 7„„ ( = - 10-5).

Fair growth but never up to control, exhausted much sooner.

G. Ditto + 8 cc. HCl per litre. A = IM mgrm. OH 7^„ ( = - 21 '6).

Poorest in series.

Except in the cases where the alkalinity was lowered by the addition
of HCl, the results obtained from this series were not up to expecta-
tion. Nevertheless the majority showed a distinct improvement from
increased " alkalinity " and in C, where the alkalinity had been raised
17"5 mgrm. OH7oc5 this improvement was very marked.

Another point illustrated by cultural experiment is that in two
samples of an. char, water, one with " outside " and the other with
" tank-water " as a basis, the amount of growth in the latter consider-
ably exceeded that in the former, and at the same time it was found
that, with the tank-water, the alkalinity had not been reduced to the
same extent as in the case of the outside water.

How far apparently anomalous results, which have so frequently

* Figures in parentheses are diirerence in alkalinity from control, in mgrm. OH 7oo*

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 453

occurred in our experimental work, could be explained by unforeseen
changes in " alkalinity," can only be answered by future research.

Saliiiity. — The salinity (or amount of salts dissolved in a litre of
sea-water) of the outside water used in these experiments only varied
between small limits, S = 34-5 - 35-57oo. The salinity of " tank- water "
is also fairly constant, the average being about S = 34-97co \ water is
only pumped up into the reservoirs at high water, spring tides, and
unless the salinity on analysis is well above S = 34-57c, no water is
taken. Experiments to show what effect salinity pure and simple had
on the growth of diatoms were undertaken. Samples of sea-water of
various salinities were prepared by diluting down "outside water"
with double-distilled water, and by concentrating " outside water " by
slow evaporation. Two litres of "outside water" S = 34-9 were
evaporated down to the bulk of one litre, giving a 50%* concentra-
tion. Miquel solutions 4 cc. A, 2 cc. B, were now added, and the
solution was divided into ten culture vessels, 20 cc. in each. Double-
distilled water was added, 2 cc. to the first, 4 cc. to the second, 20 cc.
to the last, so that a series of media were obtained, varying in salinity
from normal to nearly 50% concentration, each containing the same
amount of Miquel's nutrient solutions. These were inoculated from a
mixed culture of Sheletonema costatum, Biddulphia mohiliensis, and
Coscinodiscus caxentricus. A good growth took place in all except the
two with highest concentration. Of these two, the last remained
practically sterile and tlie growth in the other was very poor. The
limit of concentration, therefore, seems to lie between 35 and 40%.
In the same way series of lowered salinities were prepared, and
cultures of the same diatoms were grown in these. Dilution up to
100% did not seem to make any diff'erence at all in the quantity or
quality of growth. In a series extending the dilution to 200% even in
the cultures of lowest salinity, a fair quantity of growth took place.
The range of salinities covered by the various series was S = 127oo to
S = 607oc ^i^d within these limits no eff'ect on growth could be
observed, except in the very highest, where a distinct deterioration was
noted.

An attempt to grow Coscinodiscus cxccntricus in tap water + Miquel's
solutions was tried, and it was thought that some slight multiplication
took place, although it was certainly not at all considerable. In-
oculating a culture of normal Miquel sea- water from this after six
weeks gave no growth.

Lifiht. Of all the factors controlling tlie rate of growth of a culture,

* i.e. from every 100 cc. Sfa-watei' .^jO cc. H^G liad lieen siilitracted.

454 ON THE AETIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

light seems to be by far the most important. Without light a culture
soon dies off completely, showing marked signs of malnutrition very
soon after having been placed in the dark, the brown pigment being
the first to go, and later the chlorophyll. A culture {Thalassiosira)
placed in the dark for five months was found to be completely killed,
the diatoms being quite colourless. In cultures kept in bulbous flasks
or any spherical vessel, the strongest and earliest growth always
takes place at the side of the vessel away from the source of light,
where the light will be found to be concentrated owing to the lens
effect of a sphere of water. By painting a tlask black on the outside
up to the water-line of the medium, a very marked diminution
in the rate of growth was obtained. The total growth was not affected,
but depends on the available quantity of food-stuffs present.

Experiments on the reaction of cultures to different rays of the
spectrum, obtained by coloured glass, were tried, but no results
obtained. Miquel obtained marked results with yellow light, but
in our experience, with plankton diatoms, satisfactory cultures could
not be obtained under these conditions.

Tcmjjeraturc. Tlie highest temperature which diatoms and allied
forms can stand was about uniform for all the species tested, and
lay between 35°-40° C. Cultures of the following species, viz.
Asterionella japonica, Nitzschin clostcrium, minute naviculoid diatom,
Pleurococcus vuicosus, Chilomonas sp., were slowly heated in a water bath,
and at every rise of 5° C. from 15° C. to 45° C, a few drops of the culture
were pipetted out and a fresh flask inoculated. In all the flasks
cultures were obtained where the heating process had not been
carried above 35" C, but none in those where the temperature had
exceeded this.

In the earlier stages of experimentation the cultures of diatoms
were kept in various places about the Laboratory, and so were under
quite different temperature conditions. Those placed in the warmer
situations, i.e. near hot-water pipes, as a rule gave the most satis-
factory results. In all the later work the cultures have been kept
in one room, and an attempt has been made to keep the temperature
of this room as nearly as possible constant at 15° C. A continuous
record of its temperature has been kept by means of a recording
thermograph, and no very great change of temperature has been
noted. In a few isolated cases the temperature has dropped as low
as 9° C, and in hot weather has risen just above 20° C, but these have
only been for very short periods, the average temperature having kept
remarkably constant. An apparatus in which flasks could be kept at

ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE 01" MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS. 455

different uniform temperatures from 10^ to 25° C, by means of hot
air, was used, but no really satisfactory result could be obtained.
About 17" C. seemed to give the maximum growth, and the cultures
below this temperature were usually superior to those above.

General Conclusions. The general conclusions to be drawn from the
experiments described in this section, which were made with a view to
determining the conditions that underlie the successful culture of
diatoms, may now be discussed. Although the experiments have in-
volved the making of some 750 different cultures, our conclusions on
many of the questions raised are still indefinite, and much further work
will be necessary before a satisfactory answer can be given to them.

If we wish to obtain the maximum quantity of healthy growth of a
plankton diatom, the diatom must first be obtained as free as possible
from all other organisms, if not in a " pure " culture, at least in a
" persistent " culture. All culture media should be sterilized either by
heat or filtration, and the experiments should be conducted under
sterile conditions. Starting with normal sea-water as the basis for the
culture medium, it seems to be first necessary to raise the concentration
of the nitrates, and possibly also of the phosphates, in solution. But
this simple addition of nutrient materials will not in itself suffice.
Some other action, such as that exerted by Miquel's sol. B, by animal
charcoal, or by peroxide of hydrogen, seems to be imperative in
nearly every case. The exact nature of this action we have not been
able conclusively to determine. If the substance contained in sol. B
were purely nutritive in character, we should expect that, when altera-
tions in the amounts of the different ingredients were made, or when
any one of the ingredients was omitted altogether, the differences in
the quantity of growth would show a direct relation to the kind of
modification introduced. But our usual experience has been that
sol. B can be modified within certain limits, without producing any
appreciable effect upon the resulting cultures, whilst if these limits
are exceeded, there is an almost complete inhibition of growth. In
supplying a necessary increase of phosphates, both Miquel's sol. B and
animal charcoal may and probably do act as " nutritive " substances,
but, since the addition of phosphates alone does not yield cultures
comparable with those produced by either of these, and since, excepting
phosphates, there is no possible common nutritive substance in their
composition, we are led to conclude that, in addition to any nutritive
effect, they must exert some other action. This view is supported by
the results obtained by using HoO.,. This substance cannot be directly
" nutritive," although it may be so indirectly, by oxidizing into useful

NEW .SEKIE.S.— VOL. VIII. XO. 5. MAl'.ril, 1910. 2 I

456 ON THE ARTIFICIAL CULTURE OF MARINE PLANKTON ORGANISMS.

food-material substances wliicli the diatoms are incapable of using in
their metabolism, e.g. nitrites into nitrates. The absence of any
increase in phosphates, when using HoOo, may possibly be the reason
why better results were not obtained with this medium. The action
which, in addition to any nutritive value, we must assume that sol. B,
animal charcoal, and HoOo can all effect, would appear to fall into the
class of " protective " actions (p. 439). It is quite conceivable that, with
different samples of sea- water, this " protective " action is not neces-
sary in every case, and this would account for the anomalous results
met with when using sea- water + nitrates + phosphates only, in which
medium sometimes good cultures, but more often the reverse, are
obtained. The effect of Miquel's sol. B, animal charcoal, and HoOo on
the " alkalinity " of the sea- water, also points to some chemical change,
which does not directly enter into the metabolism of the plants.

It may be pointed out that the action of such substances as finely
powdered carbon, and ferric oxide precipitates, has been shown to pro-
dvice a favourable effect on nutrient solutions used for the culture of
certain higher plants, and it has been suggested tliat the beneficial
action of these substances is the removal of toxic elements from the
media (Breazeale, 3). Such removal of toxins would fall under our
definition of " protective " action.

Of nutritive substances, other than those already mentioned, we
have still to consider (1) silica and (2) dissolved oxygen and carbonic
acid. Having regard to the conditions under which our cultures have
been grown, i.e. in glass flasks, tlie question of silica does not seem to
enter into the problems which we have discussed. A few words must,
however, be said as to the dissolved gases. Whipple (62) and Bald-
win (44) have drawn attention to the observed relations, which are
found in natural waters, between algal growths and the amounts of
dissolved oxygen and carbonic acid. That these factors are of great
importance cannot be doubted, but in our cultures it seems reasonable
to suppose that the conditions of saturation of these gases are the
same in all, since series of cultures in standard media, such as Miquel
sea-water or Berkefeld water, can be set up with the certainty that, if
not every one, at least a very high percentage, will give normal results.

Of the purely physical factors, light is by far the most important.
Within limits, the rate of growth in a suitable medium seems to
depend directly on the intensity of the light (Whipple, 60). Absence
of light, as would be expected, soon comp